Anima Summa Book 1 - The Mystery of Rhedae by Anima Summa

Rating: PG
Genres: Romance, Mystery
Relationships: Harry & Hermione
Book: Harry & Hermione, Books 1 - 4
Published: 02/07/2003
Last Updated: 19/07/2003
Status: Completed

Join Harry, Ron, Hermione and Ginny in their quest to solve a modern-day mystery and uncover an
ancient secret that will help in the fight against the Dark Side. But then Harry has a more
daunting task to complete - he's the Anima Summa - a champion of the Light Side - the latest of
a rare and exclusive breed stretching back into the mists of time, and he has to find his soul
mate, his female counterpart, the girl he’ll love above all others. But who is she? This is the
first of 3 novel length fics (which I've now completed)covering years 5 to 7. It was written
before OOTP came out.




1. Prologue - The Prophecy
--------------------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 6 203 2002-12-12T11:12:00Z 2003-06-30T17:52:00Z 5 2855 16277 135 32
19989 9.2720 1 Prologue The Prophecy

It was 2 a.m. in the far-off forbidden forest near ancient Rhedae. It was a time when all the
creatures of the forest should have been asleep.

Suddenly, the dark forest stirred with the excited calls of a multitude of Magical Creatures.
Their tormented roars, hisses, growls and yelps filled what should have been a peaceful time of the
night. Hippogriffs suddenly took flight and Trolls wandered about in a stupor looking for something
– anything - to bash. Acromantulas scurried about the forest floor thinking that a late meal was
approaching but were confused when it didn’t. The Romanian Longhorn dragons’ eyes rolled in their
heads as they tried to pinpoint the source of the magical emanations that had disturbed them. They
crashed through the undergrowth in a vain search for the offending mind, wanting to end the feeling
of uneasiness that was instilled in them.

At the edge of the forest four ramblers slept in a small tent, weary after the previous day’s
hike through the foothills of the Pyrenees Mountains that straddled the Franco-Spanish border.
Before they had pitched camp they had come upon the forest but were, inexplicably, unable to enter
– it was as if some unseen thing was warning them away. Their tiredness prevented a retreat,
however, and they had agreed to stay outside the forest just until the morning. They now wished
that they had left immediately the previous evening.

A horrific roar woke all four sleepers. They nervously looked outside their tent for the cause,
and were left speechless and terrified at the sight that confronted them. Dragons were not supposed
to exist! So if that were the case, what the hell were the enormous creatures that were running
about just inside the forest perimeter?

“Bloody Nora!” yelped one of the hikers, his northern-British accent sounding incongruous in
this part of Europe. “Look at the size of those sodding gnashers – I’m off!”

All four took flight directly away from the dragons, knowing that the nearest village was many
miles away, but not caring to stay around to become a tasty snack for the unholy denizens of this
weird place. They weren’t to know that the dragons were prevented from leaving the forest by
magical wards set up by the French Ministry of Magic.

Deep beneath the ground, some twenty miles or so away from this fevered activity, the spirit
that was the cause of the disturbance continued to send out its mind power into the world. It had
been awakened from its age-old slumber by the triggering of a magical alarm set nearly one thousand
years ago. It had received its warning of the imbalance in the world – an imbalance that would
inevitably lead to an age of evil. The spirit was there to warn of this abomination, and was now
calling to the one force of light that could do something about it.

It didn’t know, however, who the current force of light was, or if he or she was yet strong
enough, magically, to receive its summons, or was prepared for the coming conflict.

It could only send out its magical summons and hope that it was acted upon. It would continue to
broadcast until the light arrived. It could now only wait….

***

Rubeus Hagrid sat outside his shack, near the Forbidden Forest at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft
and Wizardry. His eyes were closed, soaking up the warm summer sunshine. The school and its
surroundings were always peaceful at this time of year. It was summer recess, and the students and
most of the teachers had left for their holidays well over a week ago. Hagrid was reflecting on his
failed attempt to persuade the giants of Eastern Europe to help in the coming fight against
Voldemort and his Dark Minions. He was satisfied for now that he had persuaded them, with the help
of his giantess mother, Fridwolfa, to remain neutral, but he didn’t know how long that situation
would last. A newly resurrected Voldemort would also, no doubt, be trying to win over the support
of the giants.

A rustling of leaves at the edge of the forest shook Hagrid from his reverie and he looked to
find what the cause was. His eyes widened at the sight of Ronan and Firenze, his centaur friends,
gesturing to him from just inside the confines of the woods. It was unlike them to come so near to
Hogwarts during daylight hours, normally preferring to stay away from the people at the school.

“’Ello, I wonder what’s up with ‘em,” thought Hagrid as he moved toward the centaurs. “Something
must be wrong for ‘em to come this close to the school.”

“Ronan, Firenze – what’s up? What brings you ‘ere at this time o’ the day? I thought you were
night-birds.”

“Greetings, friend Hagrid,” said Ronan. “We have an urgent message for Professor Dumbledore, and
we’d like you to deliver it for us. Last night the stars were full of portents and we saw a dire
prophetic warning. It is essential that you tell Professor Dumbledore immediately. Please write it
down so that there can be no mistake.”

“’Ang on, I’ll get some parchment and a quill – back in a mo’.” He quickly went to his hut.

“Right, then, let’s ‘ave it,” said Hagrid when he returned.

Firenze took on a look much like Professor Trelawney when she went into one of her trances, and
began to recite the prophecy …….

*“… He who was once defeated has again risen and will enslave mankind. The world will then
enter a long period of darkness from which there can be no escape. This can be prevented only if
the former conqueror uncovers the ancient secret and then joins with his Anima Summa and together
build their strength.“*

“Ok, I’ve got that and thanks. What does it mean?” asked Hagrid scratching his head.

“It is not for us to interpret the prophesies of the stars. We just read them and pass them to
those who are needful,” answered Ronan.

“Right, ok. I’ll go and see Professor Dumbledore straight away.” Hagrid rushed off towards the
school, waving to the two centaurs as they disappeared back into the forest.

***

Meanwhile in the headmaster’s office, Fawkes was exercising - jigging from foot to foot,
swinging around his perch, and letting out his distinctive Phoenix song in a slightly annoyed way.
He’d been awakened a little earlier by the arrival of Professor McGonagall, the deputy
headmistress.

Dumbledore looked up at McGonagall. “Minerva, I’ve given a lot of thought about the ways in
which we can help Harry. I think he’d have an advantage over the Dark Side if he were to become an
Animagus. Only we would know this of course, but he’d have to register when the threat from
Voldemort is over. Can you give Harry private and secret instructions on the Transformation
Spells?”

“Of course, headmaster,” replied McGonagall. “Harry should be able to complete the
transformation training without too much bother, since his father was also an Animagus at about the
same age. I’ll begin his training when school starts.”

“Thank you, Minerva.”

A knock at the door signalled the arrival of two other teachers, and they sat down at
Dumbledore’s gesture.

The group sat around the headmaster’s desk – Severus Snape, the Potions Master at the left,
Minerva McGonagall next to him, and then Remus Lupin on the right. Lupin had been re-appointed
Defence Against the Dark Arts teacher for the coming year, which didn’t go down well with Snape,
who had always wanted the job. Everyone knew, however, that Snape was the best Potions Master in
Europe, so Dumbledore was reluctant to move him from that post.

Much to the surprise and horror of Snape and McGonagall, a tall, thin dark-haired man entered
the room. Sirius Black was a known criminal and the only wizard ever to escape from Azkaban Prison.
He took a seat close to Dumbledore, who welcomed him with a smile and tried to ease the fears of
the rest of the group.

“Please, please don’t upset yourselves. Sirius is here at my request. Let me explain…” The
headmaster folded his hands on his desk and continued, “I’ve been in constant touch with Cornelius
Fudge, the Minister of Magic, over the last week or so, and he has finally accepted Harry Potter’s
account of what happened at the Triwizard Tournament, and that Voldemort has been resurrected and
is undoubtedly building his own strength and his Dark Army.”

He looked toward Snape, who pulled his gaze of loathing from Sirius Black and gave a slight nod
of confirmation. Snape had at one time been one of Voldemort’s Death Eaters, and had the Dark Mark
on his forearm as proof, but had for some time been assisting the headmaster as a spy. Voldemort,
although not fully trusting Snape, still believed him to be one of his Death Eaters and Snape had
to tread a fine and dangerous line in his task.

Dumbledore continued, “You will no doubt realise, from Harry’s account, that Peter Pettigrew –
Wormtail - is still alive and at the side of Voldemort.” Some of the teachers again winced at the
sound of that name. “And this obviously means that Sirius is entirely innocent of killing him, and
also of killing those poor muggles – it was Wormtail who did that. Harry and his friends, Remus
Lupin,” he looked towards Lupin, “and I have been aware of this for over a year, but with no proof
up until now, we couldn’t do anything about it. Fudge has also now accepted Sirius’ innocence and
has secretly pardoned him. But he won’t relent on releasing this information to the Magical
Community at large. He doesn’t want to cause a panic by confirming that Voldemort is back. I don’t
agree with his position, but at least progress has been made.”

Lupin and McGonagall stood and shook Sirius’ hand and muttered their support. Snape was the
exception, which was not surprising given the history between the two when they were students
together at Hogwarts.

“I can accept that Black is innocent of the charges, Headmaster, but why is he here at our
meeting?” Snape asked Dumbledore.

“Well, Fudge has agreed to me setting up a team to infiltrate and combat Voldemort and his Death
Eaters. I already have several spies out in the field as you know, and I’ve been getting reports
from the U.S. that there is increasing Death Eater activity there. It seems that Voldemort is
trying to increase his sphere of influence. The U.S. Magical Congress has asked to send a special
services Auror over here to monitor Voldemort’s activities, and I’ve appointed Sirius to work with
their agent as a special two-man team reporting directly to me. They’ll keep close tabs on any
Death Eater activity and try to get advance warning of anything Voldemort is planning. The agent
should be arriving in about a month’s time. Severus, I’d like you to continue to spy from inside
Voldemort’s group, and Remus, I’d like you to keep an eye on Harry and his friends when they return
to school after the summer. Now I know that is easier said than done, given their passion for
exploration and adventure using Harry’s Invisibility Cloak, but I have one of your own inventions
which might help.”

Dumbledore reached into his desk drawer and produced a blank piece of parchment. It was a copy
of the Marauder’s Map, which had been produced by Mooney, Wormtail, Padfoot and Prongs during their
time at Hogwarts. He gave it to Lupin (Mooney) with a twinkle in his eyes. “Remus, I’m sure that
you won’t be up to no good when you use this. It covers the whole of the Hogwarts buildings and
grounds.”

Lupin grinned at Sirius (Padfoot) at the headmaster’s oblique reference to the command that
activated the map.

”Next, I’d like to …”. Dumbledore was suddenly interrupted when the door to his office was flung
open and a breathless Hagrid rushed in.

“Sorry to in’erupt, Professor, but I’ve got an urgent message from Ronan and Firenze who asked
me to see you straight away. They’ve seen a prophecy in the stars and they say it’s urgent that you
see it.”

“That’s all right, Hagrid, tell me what this prophecy is,” said the headmaster.

Hagrid pulled the parchment out of his pocket, and …

“Sirius Black! Professor Dumbledore, do you know who’s sitting over there?” Hagrid bellowed.

“Yes, Hagrid. I’ve just been explaining to the others that Sirius is innocent, and he has now
been secretly pardoned. He’s joined our little group here, and he’ll be doing special tasks for
me.”

“Right, right.” Hagrid quickly recovered his composure and nodded to Sirius.

He then unrolled his parchment and read out the prophecy to a captivated audience, who scratched
their heads in puzzlement.

“What do you think it means, Headmaster?” asked McGonagall.

“Well,” said a thoughtful Dumbledore, taking the parchment from Hagrid, “let’s look at it a
piece at a time…’He who was once defeated has again risen and will enslave mankind. ‘”

“Well that’s obvious,” muttered Lupin. “It must mean ‘You-Know-Who’.”

“I agree. But what about the next bit, ‘This can be prevented only if the former conqueror
uncovers the ancient secret’.”

“The former conqueror must be Harry, since it must refer to ‘You-Know-Who’s defeat when Harry
was a one-year old. But what is this ancient secret?” asked McGonagall.

“There are many ancient secrets - far too many. This piece of the puzzle will have to remain a
mystery for now,” said Dumbledore with a frown on his weather-beaten face. “‘And then joins with
his Anima Summa and build their strength.’”

There was silence around the room, so Dumbledore continued

“This is a crucial bit of the prophecy. Harry must join with his ‘Anima Summa’ – now I seem to
remember reading something about this term when I was at Wizarding University. I can’t remember any
specific details apart from it being a very, very rare happening. I’ll have to do some research and
get back to you on this.” He paused and looked at each of the people around the desk.

“I think that this is a very important prophecy that the centaurs have revealed – and you all
know how accurate they are. This is crucial in the fight against the Dark Side and may be our only
hope of salvation. It is imperative that Voldemort does not get to know about this – I’m sure
you’re aware of the consequences for Harry if he does. So please, keep this to yourselves and be
very careful of eavesdroppers if you discuss it among yourselves. This will put a great strain on
Harry if he finds out, so I think it best that he isn’t told about it for the moment.”

Everyone nodded in agreement and looked grimly determined.

Dumbledore then dismissed the group. “Well, thank you all for attending – I’ll let you know when
I have some more information and we can then reconvene this meeting.”

Before he left, Sirius spoke quietly to Dumbledore. “Yesterday, I received an owl from Hermione
Granger and she sounded very upset …” He allowed himself to reflect on that letter …

.

.

.

Two days previously, Hermione was sitting on her bed reading *‘A History of Hogwarts’* when
she heard a tapping at the window. She looked up to see a snowy owl, its large amber eyes staring
at her. It was Harry’s owl, Hedwig. She opened the window and the owl flew into the room.

“Hello, Hedwig, its nice to see you,” she said as she released the parchment from the owl’s leg.
“You’d better hang on in case I need to reply to this.”

She gave Hedwig a biscuit to chew on while she read the message.

*‘Dear Hermione*

*I know that it’s only been just over a week since I saw you, but I need to tell you
something. I think I’m going crazy. Uncle Vernon locks me in my room nearly all day and all I seem
to do is think of what happened at the end of the Triwizard Tournament. I’m feeling terrible about
it all.*

*I didn’t tell you and Ron everything that happened – it’s so painful to think about it – but
I’m getting more and more scared about what’s going to happen now.*

*Wormtail cut my arm and used my blood in the spell to give Voldemort a new body. Does this
mean that he’ll have some sort of control over me now?*

*I can’t stop thinking of Wormtail using the Avada Kedavra curse on Cedric – just because he
got in the way. He wouldn’t have died if I hadn’t told him to take the trophy with me.*

*I’m scared, Hermione, scared not only for myself, but for you and Ron as well. Now that he’s
back, I’m sure that Voldemort will try to hurt you two to get at me. I won’t be able to live with
myself if that happens. So I think it would be best if I stopped being friends with you and Ron. If
you both stick together and I keep my distance, then maybe Voldemort won’t try to get you.*

*I’m sorry, Hermione, but the way I feel and the way this is affecting me, I wouldn’t be a
very good friend anyway.*

*Harry’*

After reading this, Hermione put her hand over her mouth to stifle an anguished gasp of
horror.

‘Harry must be in a dreadful state to want to stop being friends,’ she thought. ‘I’ve got to do
something about this. But what….’

“Sirius!” she suddenly exclaimed. “He must be able to help.”

Hermione picked up a piece of parchment and began to write …

*‘Dear Sirius*

*I’ve just had the most awful letter from Harry. He’s in trouble.*

*He’s told me about what happened with Wormtail and he’s afraid that ‘You-Know-Who’ might now
have some sort of hold over him. He’s agonising about Cedric’s death and blames himself for
it.*

*Worst of all, he wants to end his friendship with Ron and me because he thinks we are in
danger – Sirius, I can’t let him do this. Without the support of his friends what would happen to
him? And what would he have left?*

*As his godfather, I know that you’ll want to do something about this. Please let me
know.*

*Your friend*

*Hermione Granger’*

Hermione then attached the parchment to Hedwig’s leg. “Hedwig, take this to Sirius Black as
quickly as you can.”

Hedwig spread her beautiful wings and flew out of the window on her long journey to deliver
Hermione’s message.

.

.

.

Sirius roused himself from his thoughts and glanced at the headmaster. “… I have to go and see
Harry straight away. It looks like he’s in a terrible state after his run-in with ‘You-Know-Who’,
and I wouldn’t be a good godfather if I didn’t give him some support and try to talk some sense
into him. And if those Dursleys are mistreating him as well! ….” He trailed off with a dark look on
his ruggedly handsome features.

“Yes, I agree Sirius. I think that would be a good thing to do, but remember – not a word to
Harry about this prophecy. He’s got enough on his plate at the moment.”

With that, Sirius left the office and went directly to Hogsmeade so that he could Apparate to
No. 4 Privet Drive.

***

A small group of wizards dressed in black cloaks stood in a circle around a sinister-looking man
with gleaming red eyes. Lord Voldemort had summoned his closest lieutenants to a meeting in the
north of Scotland, and was telling them of his plans.

Among those listening attentively to the Dark Lord were Lucius Malfoy - his right-hand man, and
Peter Pettigrew – Wormtail the betrayer.

“I will not be stopped now! It is time the world again trembled at the name of Lord Voldemort.
Soon, my Death Eaters, I will be master of this miserable country, and then – the world. We will be
able to fulfil our destiny – ridding the planet of Mudbloods and Muggles, except those we keep as
slaves – it is our pureblood right to rule and mould the earth to our noble ideals.”

There was a murmur of approval from the group.

“You, my most trusted helpers, will play a big part in my glorious plan. You will go out into
the country and recruit for me an army of Death Eaters. You will train them and gather them
together to be initiated into my cause. My close allies will be doing the same in the United
States. Do not fail me – you know what will happen if you do.” He looked menacingly at the group
around him.

“Now go! I want to start the initiation ceremonies within the next week.”

After the ritual ‘Yes, my Lord, we will obey you’ the Death Eaters Apparated away to start on
their task.



2. Summer
---------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 3 264 2002-12-23T16:17:00Z 2003-06-30T19:17:00Z 19 10069 57395 478 114
70485 9.2720

**Chapter 1**

Summer

Harry was sitting on the floor of his bedroom at No. 4 Privet Drive, Little Whinging, covered in
a bath of sweat. He had just finished his hour-long stint of circuit training, and was now trying
to relax, breathing deeply, trying to bring peace to his aching mind and body.

After a while, he got up and sat on the edge of his bed and smiled to himself. He thought back
to his godfather’s visit a week ago.

.

.

.

*Harry was curled up in a ball on his bed when Sirius entered his room. His Uncle Vernon stood
behind him looking frightened, but then quickly went back downstairs. Sirius had taken one look at
Harry, and his worse fears were confirmed – Hermione had been right – his godson was in one hell of
a state.*

*Sirius touched Harry on his shoulder, and then lifted him up into a sitting position. Harry’s
eyes were dull – gone was the mischievous spark that normally lived there.*

*“Harry …” Sirius muttered quietly.*

*Harry then seemed to focus his eyes and when he recognised his godfather, let out a
soul-tearing gasp of anguish and clung to Sirius as if his life depended on it. The tears that he
had held back after Cedric’s death then flowed freely as he sought to purge himself of all his
worries.*

*Sirius had a tear of his own in his eye as he held Harry, and then whispered, “Tell me all
about it, Harry. Perhaps I can help.”*

*Harry sat back against the headboard of his bed and poured out all his experiences with
Voldemort after the Triwizard Tournament, and his fears for the safety of himself and his
friends.*

*“Yes, I knew most of this after Hermione wrote to me yesterday. You really upset her when you
sent her that owl, and you’re upsetting me now. Listen, Harry, none of what happened is your fault.
You didn’t kill Cedric – Wormtail did. And to even think of ditching your best friends is just
plain silly.*

*“Look, when I was with your father, mother and Remus at Hogwarts, it was the best time of my
life. I felt privileged to have their friendship. It was the rock that kept me going through the
bad times.”*

*“But Sirius,” Harry tearfully shouted. “Voldemort killed my mother and father. How did that
make you feel? I don’t want the same thing to happen to Hermione and Ron.”*

*“Listen, Harry, I felt absolutely gutted when your parents were killed and think how I felt
when you were left alone and I was stitched up in Azkaban. But even with hindsight I wouldn’t have
changed my relationship with them. In the long run I would have been the poorer for not knowing
them as I did.*

*“You must never underestimate the power of friendship, Harry. You can’t shut out Ron and
Hermione. Think how they’ll feel if you suddenly dumped them – I know how Hermione feels about it –
she’s beside herself with worry. In those two, you have the most loyal friends I know and Hermione
- well, she’s one in a million. You must let them help you. Ok, they know the risks, but they can
accept them, so why can’t you? Let them be a source of strength to you – this is one of your
greatest weapons in the fight against the Dark Side. The power of the friendship you have is pretty
rare, so don’t deny it to yourself.”*

*At those words, Harry felt an uplifting of his spirits. Put that way, he could see the sense
in what Sirius was saying to him and he silently resolved to move on and think more positively
about things.*

*“Thanks, Sirius. I needed that, I really did. You do wonders for a guy’s morale. Can’t I stay
with you this summer? It would be so much better than having to put up with the Dursleys.”*

*“I’m sorry, Harry,” said Sirius, “but I haven’t got anywhere permanent yet and I’m doing a
few things for Dumbledore that’ll keep me moving about for the next few months. But I’ve had a few
words with your uncle and I don’t think he’ll be so nasty to you from now on. If he is, just send
me a note with Hedwig and I’ll come and put him straight.”*

*“Thanks Sirius, you don’t know how much you’ve helped me. I can’t thank you enough. I only
wish I could help you by clearing your name with the ministry.”*

*“You’ve already done that, Harry. You have to keep this quiet, but Cornelius Fudge has
accepted your account of things and has privately given me a full pardon. He’s afraid to broadcast
it, though, because he doesn’t want it known that ‘You Know Who’ is back.”*

*Harry jumped up at this news. “That’s great Sirius, that’s marvellous news. Can I tell Ron
and Hermione?”*

*“Yes, but only Ron and Hermione. Look, I have to go now, but always remember that I’m there
for you any time you need me and I’ll help you as much as I can. Just send a note with
Hedwig.”*

*And with that, Sirius went back down the stairs, fixed Vernon with one of his deadly stares
and went out of the house.*

.

.

.

‘That was a week ago,’ thought Harry. ‘What a change in 7 days.’

After Sirius had left, Harry had sent Hedwig to Hermione with a note of apology, saying Sirius
had visited and made him realise he was being a prat to want to end their friendship. He asked her
to forgive him and that he would see her in Diagon Alley just before school started back.

Harry had resolved to do a number of positive things after Sirius’ talk to him. He had decided
that if Voldemort *were* going to come after him and his friends, then he would be as prepared
as possible to meet him. That meant that he had to get his mental attitude right and he also needed
to be prepared physically – hence the circuit training. And he’d also thought of another way to get
fit and strong.

After showering, Harry went down stairs for dinner, which he, of course, had to prepare. It
seemed that getting the food ready for them all took forever, especially with the huge amounts that
Dudley tucked away these days. The bigger and fatter he got, the greater his appetite became.

When they were eating their meal, Harry tentatively asked his uncle, “Eh, Uncle Vernon, I was
thinking. You and Aunt Petunia are always on about me being a lazy git. What would you say if I
came to your factory and did some manual work – you know, shifting boxes and things? I wouldn’t
want any pay for it, I’d just be happy knowing that I was helping.”

After he said this, Harry had a job to get his tongue unstuck from the inside of his cheek.

Aunt Petunia and Dudley had their mouths wide open at this but Harry knew that the ‘no pay’ bit
would get his uncle’s attention.

“No pay, you say. Ok, if it’ll teach you not to be a lazy good-for-nothing then you can start in
the morning. I’ll put you with Jake – if you can keep up with him then you might be of some
use.”

Uncle Vernon looked pleased with himself – as if it were his idea in the first place.

Harry just grinned.

***

On 28th July, Hermione was strolling down Diagon Alley. She was at a complete loss,
for once in her young life, as to what to get Harry for his birthday. It was only 3 days away and
she was going on holiday with her parents in two days time on a tour of Eastern Europe. She’d
arranged to visit Viktor Krum when they got to Bulgaria, and looked forward to seeing him
again.

She’d thought of all the usual things to get Harry – something for Quidditch and a book, but she
wanted to get something special after the trauma he’d suffered earlier in the month.

A few shops up from ‘Flourish and Blotts’, she noticed a small, insignificant little shop which
she was sure hadn’t been there the last time she visited. She seemed to remember that this
particular shop had always been empty and boarded up before.

There was now a sign over the front window, which said *‘El Hamri – Unusual Gifts’*.
Intrigued, Hermione wandered over and browsed in the window. Something drew her attention to a
small amulet tucked away in the corner – it was an unusual piece in the form of a Knight with an
upraised sword, astride a large golden eagle. The Knight had a cross on the front of his tunic that
reminded her of paintings she had seen about the Crusades back in King Richard the Lionheart’s
time.

She opened the door to the shop and heard a chime coming from the rear. An old and wizened man
appeared and asked her, in perfect English but with an unfamiliar accent, “Hello, young lady. Is
there anything that you fancy? A present for your boyfriend, perhaps?” Hermione blushed at this,
but asked the man if she could see the amulet from the front window.

“Ah, yes,” said the man as he stretched over and picked up the amulet. “I think that you must be
a very discerning young lady. This is a very rare piece that was recovered from Palestine after the
last crusade. One of my ancestors fought there, you know, but on Saladin’s side. The Priory sent it
to me only yesterday. Would you like to hold it?”

“Yes please,” said Hermione taking the object from the old man. She wondered to which priory he
was referring.

As soon as she held it, Hermione experienced a warm and secure feeling emanating from the
amulet. She had the distinct feeling that this was the perfect gift she had been looking for and
she simply had to get it for Harry.

“That is a very rare piece, don’t forget. But to you, it is only 6 galleons,” said the old man
with a gentle smile.

Hermione pulled a face. She hadn’t intended to spend so much. But she just had to get it for
Harry – after all he had been through, he deserved something special.

“Right, I’ll take it,” said Hermione and fumbled in her purse for the 6 galleons, which she
handed over to the man. “Tell me, I haven’t seen your shop here before. Have you just opened
it?”

“Yes, it has only been open for a week,” replied the old man.

“I was thinking – which priory sent you the amulet and where is it?”

“Ah,” said the man with an enigmatic smile on his face, “it is a very old priory, as old as time
itself. It is not for me to reveal it’s true name and as for its location, well - it is
everywhere.”

Hermione looked quizzically at the old man and pondered his answer for a moment. She was puzzled
and made a mental note to do some research on *‘the priory’* when she got back to Hogwarts –
the library was sure to have a book on it.

“Well thank you very much – goodbye.” Hermione walked out of the shop, pleased with her
purchase, and she went to find a suitable birthday card for Harry.

***

Meanwhile, at The Burrow, Ron, Fred, George and Ginny were sitting around the kitchen table
talking about the 2-a-side Quidditch game they had just finished. There was a fair amount of
taunting from Ron and Ginny after beating the other two 270 – 190.

Fred and George soon retired upstairs to work on their plans for *‘Weasleys’ Wizard
Wheezes’*, the shop they were hoping to open when they finished school next year. The shop had
now become a distinct probability after Harry had given them the prize money from the Triwizard
Tournament.

“Ron, I’m so glad that Harry seems to be ok now,” said Ginny.

Ron had received a note from Hermione a week ago about Harry’s problems. And he’d told Ginny,
but leaving out any mention of Sirius Black.

“Yes, Ginny, thank goodness. But why do you think Harry didn’t contact me about his problems? He
must have known that I’d support him.”

“I’m sure he knows that Ron, but let’s face it, who would *you* turn to in a crisis like
that? If it were me I know I’d want to talk to Hermione – she *is* the smartest witch at
Hogwarts after all.”

“I guess you’re right Ginny. It’s a pity that Dumbledore won’t allow Harry to come and stay with
us like last year,” said Ron ruefully.

“Yes, but you know how he is about protecting Harry, especially now that ‘You Know Who’ is back
on the scene. Oh well, I think I’ll go and start packing Harry’s birthday present.”


Ginny trotted upstairs to her room and started packing Harry’s present and birthday card, feeling
just a little sad. She had, of course, had a crush on Harry since her first year at Hogwarts and
she didn’t think that she had completely got over it yet.

‘Oh come on Ginny,’ she thought. ‘I’m fourteen now and getting a little too old to harbour such
feelings for a boy who would never notice me THAT way. At least I’ve got Harry as a friend. Next
school year, I’m going to forget that old crush and start getting a life – a boyfriend perhaps? …
Hmmmm’

But she couldn’t get it out of her head that any boyfriend she managed to get would only be
second best.

***

Harry had many good qualities to his character. One of the strongest of those qualities was
determination in the face of adversity. Harry certainly needed that quality now.

Uncle Vernon’s factory had just received a large delivery of raw materials, and Jake had set a
furious pace at unloading them from the lorry and stacking them onto shelves ready for dispatch to
the various assembly lines. Uncle Vernon was too mean to invest in forklift trucks.

Harry had been working for two weeks now, and he and Jake had built up a friendly rivalry on who
could shift the most stuff in the allotted time. After all, Jake had his weekly bonus to spur him
on, but Harry only had his determination and competitive edge, honed from four years of
Quidditch.

“Come on ‘Arry,” laughed Jake. “You’ll never get fit and strong working in slow motion.”

Harry gritted his teeth and lifted another heavy box from the lorry and ran with it over to the
shelves. With a loud grunt, he lifted it onto the top-most shelf and sighed with relief before
running back to get another box.

“Bugger off, Jake. If you were as fast as me you wouldn’t be able to lift your pay packet at the
end of the week.”

When all the boxes were stacked, Harry and Jake collapsed onto the floor with exhausted grins on
their faces and started chatting about the people working at the factory.

“Oooh that Melanie,” sighed Jake. “She’s a right little cracker. I wouldn’t mind a night out wiv
‘er, I can tell yuh”

“Well why don’t you ask her, Jake? You won’t know if she likes you until you do.”

Jake ignored that remark and, with a smirk on his face said, “What about that girl of yours
‘Arry? What’s her name – ‘erm-ee-nee, ‘erm-ii-oo-n. Have you shagged her yet?”

Harry went bright red and shouted, “Sod off Jake! It’s HERMIONE, and she’s not my girlfriend –
she’s just one of my best friends. And no – I haven’t, for God’s sake, and anyway, she’s not that
sort of girl!”

“Well, the way you always go on about her, you could have fooled me! Right, five more minutes
rest and then we’ve got that load of coal to shovel down at the boiler room site.”

Jake grinned, delighted that he’d struck a raw nerve with Harry, and laid his head back on the
floor and started daydreaming about Melanie.

***

Harry woke early on the morning of July 31st, his birthday. The incessant tapping at
his window by a flock of owls was the cause of his early return to the conscious world. He jumped
out of bed and let them in, removing the parcels from their legs. He then gave them some biscuits
to eat before they flew back out of the window.

Harry excitedly started opening his presents. He smiled when he opened Ron’s present - a book
entitled *‘Quidditch Tactics and Innovative Moves for Seekers.’*

Ginny’s present was a wizarding photograph, which had the heading, in Ginny’s handwriting,
*‘The Fab Four’*. It showed Harry, Ron, Hermione and Ginny at the lake at Hogwarts – the four
were smiling and waving. Harry remembered Colin Creevey taking that picture just before the end of
the Triwizard Tournament.

Harry laughed when he opened the birthday card from Ginny. There was a picture of a parrot on
the front, and when the card was opened, he’d chant *‘Who’s a pretty boy then’* over and
over.

‘Just like Ginny.’ Harry thought back to the time when Ginny had embarrassed him at school with
her singing valentine.

The next present he opened was a parchment from Professor Dumbledore. It read…

*‘Happy birthday Harry*

*I hope that you are feeling better after your chat with your godfather.*

*Professor McGonagall and I wanted to give you something for your birthday – but it will have
to wait until you return for the new school year. I won’t tell you what it is, but I will say that
you will be following in your father’s footsteps when you get it.*

*Be happy Harry and look after yourself.*

*Albus Dumbledore’*

“What the devil is that?” Harry muttered to himself. But he knew one thing – if it allowed him
to follow in his father’s footsteps then it must be ok. He couldn’t wait.

Sirius’ present was next – it was a small round glass object about the size of a squash-ball and
shimmered like crystal. The note that accompanied the present said

*‘Happy birthday Harry*

*I hope you are keeping well. This little present is called a ‘find-me-stone’. If you hold it
in your hand and whisper the incantation ‘expiscor ego’ then the holder of the matching stone will
be able to find you immediately. Of course, I have the matching stone, and don’t worry – only I can
operate it. It has to be magically set for the holder, and only I know the password.*

*You should set up the stone straight away. Hold it in both hands and say*

*Erigo Harry James Potter*

*The stone should then glow with a light shade of red. Then say your password like so*

*Signum <say your password>*

*And if the stone accepts it, the glow will change to a light blue colour. Once you set your
password, only you will be able to use it.*

*I thought that this little device might come in handy one day.*

*With love from your godfather*

*Sirius’*

Harry smiled. “Just like Sirius – always practical and looking out for me. Right, lets try to
set it up.”

Harry held the stone in both hands and said, “*ERIGO* Harry James Potter.”

Surely enough, the stone’s colour changed to a light red.

Harry thought for a moment and then said, “*SIGNUM* Seeker.” The stone changed to a light
blue colour.

‘Great,’ thought Harry, and put the stone into his pocket.

The last present was from Hermione. Harry grinned when he read her note saying that she just had
to get this present and she hoped he liked it.

‘A book of some sort I bet,’ thought Harry

He was suitably surprised when he opened the parcel to reveal the Knight amulet. When he picked
it up he had the same feeling of warmth and security that Hermione had when she held it. He made a
mental note to ask her where she had found it when he saw her next, and whether it had any more
magical properties.

A picture of Hermione’s smiling face came to Harry and he knew that Sirius was spot-on when he
said that Hermione was one-in-a-million. He was lucky to be able to call her his best friend.

He put the amulet around his neck, where he intended to always keep it. Harry jumped when he
heard the sound of something being pushed under his bedroom door. He picked up an envelope and
opened it.

*‘Our birthday present to you*

*An extra shift at the factory next Saturday*

*Don’t be late!*

*Uncle Vernon and Aunt Petunia’*

Harry laughed. He didn’t mind the extra work at all – especially since he wouldn’t have to put
up with Dudley all day Saturday. Harry thought that was probably the best birthday present they had
ever given him.

***

Harry continued to work at the factory throughout the summer, and had got into the routine of
jogging around the factory site whenever there was a slack period. Jake, however, thought he was
crazy and didn’t waste any time in telling him. By this time, Harry had a well-defined muscle
structure to his upper body, his stomach was flat and muscled, he felt very fit and he had become
quite tanned. It seemed that all the work he was doing was starting to pay off.

He also enjoyed his running, even when he knew he had to pass by the office block and had to
endure the whistles and calls (some of them quite rude and embarrassing) of the office girls. He
thought it strange that they always seemed to know exactly when he would pass by their window. Some
of the girls were very pretty and a lot older than Harry, and he wondered what the devil they saw
in him. After all, they wouldn’t know that he was Harry Potter, ‘*The boy who lived’*.

Jake had told him that he should take advantage of some of the offers shouted at him by a few of
the girls and that he didn’t realise how lucky he was. Harry had blushed but didn’t take the
bait.

All in all, Harry was becoming very contented with life and for once didn’t get the feeling that
time was passing too slowly when he was on his summer break.

This all changed the following day.

***

Harry was jogging around the back of the factory, close to some waste ground, when he heard a
soft chuckle, which seemed to come from behind a nearby tree. He was later to thank his lucky stars
for his keen hearing.

Harry turned towards the tree and saw a figure dressed in black robes and wearing a black hood.
The figure lifted his hand, which, Harry saw, held a wand and shouted

“*STUPEFY*”

Before the figure – obviously a Death Eater – had finished saying the spell, Harry had dodged to
one side, and saw the red beam of light pass by his left shoulder. Harry didn’t hang about after
that. He turned and started running and stepping from side to side over towards a group of empty
metal drums, thankful for his newly acquired fitness and his years of practice on the Quidditch
field. The Death Eater continued to throw spells, but they all missed their mark, with Harry making
himself as difficult a target as possible.

Harry reached the waste drums and flung himself onto the ground behind them. By this time the
Death Eater was roaring in frustration, and started to walk over towards the drums.

‘If only I had my wand,’ Harry thought. His wand was in his trunk back at the Dursleys. Since he
wasn’t allowed to do magic away from school, the wand stayed in the trunk all through the
summer.

Harry thought furiously for a few moments as the Death Eater got nearer and nearer. Then he
reached into his pocket, removed the ‘find-me-stone’, and whispered, *‘EXPISCOR EGO’.*

The figure of Sirius Black appeared out of thin air alongside Harry and quickly took in the
scene before him. Raising his wand towards the Death Eater, who had frozen in surprised shock at
Sirius’ unexpected appearance, he yelled *‘STUPEFY*.”

The Death Eater wasn’t as quick as Harry, and the spell caught him squarely in the chest. He
collapsed to the ground immediately.

“Are you ok, Harry?” asked a concerned-looking Sirius, checking for any signs of damage.

“Thanks, Sirius, yes I’m ok – he didn’t touch me. But look, how did he know I was here?”


“Well, I don’t know, but the factory isn’t protected like the Dursley house. I’ll speak to
Dumbledore and get him to set up full protection spells on this site. But in the meantime you’d
better get back to the Dursleys and stay there until I give you the all clear to go back to work.
Right, I’ll take this git back to Hogwarts and see if we can get him to talk – Snape will have some
Veritaserum on hand, I’m sure.”

“Thanks, Sirius. You saved my life, you know.” Harry grinned. “That birthday present certainly
turned out to be pretty useful.”

“Don’t mention it, Harry. And keep your guard up from now on.”

Sirius then went over and grabbed the Death Eater by the arm. There was a slight ‘pop’ as both
figures disappeared.

***

After Sirius arrived with the Death Eater at Hogsmeade, he had taken him, still under the
Stunning spell, to Hogwarts using *‘WINGARDIUM LEVIOSA’* to lighten the load.

The Death Eater now sat bound in a chair in the centre of Dumbledore’s office, with Dumbledore,
Sirius and Snape standing over him.

“What is your name?” asked Dumbledore

“Ballocks.” was the only reply he could get out of the sour-faced captive.

“Well if that’s going to be your attitude, we’d better move things along. Severus, have you got
any Veritaserum prepared?”


“Yes, Headmaster, I’ll go down to my office and fetch it,” said Snape, walking quickly out of
the room.

“Sirius, I’ll set up the protection on the factory site as soon as we’re finished here. The
Aurors from the ministry should be arriving shortly to take our friend, here, for further
questioning.”

Dumbledore then turned to the Death Eater and said, “Well, Mr. Ballocks, how does a little
stretch in Azkaban sound to you? You might as well tell us what we want to know now, and save
yourself the discomfort of the truth serum.”

The Death Eater looked nervous but remained sullenly silent.

Snape then came into the room carrying a small phial containing a dark brown liquid. Sirius held
the struggling Death Eaters’ head while Snape poured the Veritaserum down his throat.

“Give it a minute or two, Headmaster,” said Snape, wiping away a small amount of the liquid,
which had spilled onto his hand.

The three remained silent, watching the Death Eater for any sign that the serum had taken
effect. Then Dumbledore walked up to him and started his questioning.

“What is your name?”

“Darius Lork,” was the reply, given in a dull-sounding voice.

“When did you last see Lord Voldemort?”

“Two weeks ago when I was recruited.”

“Where were you recruited and how many of you were there?”

“At Croyden, and there were fifty three of us.”

Snape let out a surprised gasp, “Good God, I new that there were recruiting meetings going on,
but I never suspected the number of people involved. The Croyden meeting was just one of about
twenty back two weeks ago”

Dumbledore looked worried. “This is worse than I thought. At this rate, Voldemort will have a
sizable army very soon. Sirius, I think you’d better do some snooping and try to get a feel for the
size of this problem. Tell me, Lork, who ordered you to attack Harry Potter?”

“No one.”

“How did you know where Potter was and why did you do it then?”

“I live close to Privet Drive, and I’d seen him going out every morning. I wanted to make a good
impression on my senior commander so I followed Potter to the factory and hid until he was close
by.”

Sirius heard footsteps outside the office and walked into a small room at the side of
Dumbledore’s office. He didn’t want there to be any misunderstanding when the Aurors came in. He
still had to be careful to whom he showed himself.

The door then opened, and Dobby the house elf showed in two tough-looking men.

“We’ve come to collect the prisoner,” said one of them and flashed his Ministry of Magic ID.

Dumbledore nodded and said, “We’ve finished so you’re welcome to him. Tell the minister that
Voldemort is recruiting Death Eaters at a fair old rate. That’s probably why we haven’t seen much
of him and his minions over the summer. No doubt you’ll be able to get more details out of this
one.”

The Aurors then grabbed hold of Lork, easily lifting him up, and bade their farewells as the
three left.

***

It was a week after Dumbledore had set up the protection spells at the factory site, and Harry
was now back working as normal. Uncle Vernon hadn’t been very impressed with the one-day lay-off.
Harry had to feign an upset stomach, which didn’t get too much sympathy from the Dursleys.

Harry was reading the Quidditch book that Ron had sent him, when an owl flew in through the
window. Harry took the parchment from the out-stretched leg and the owl flew back out. He was
pleased to see that the letter was from Hermione.

He settled back onto his bed and began to read.

Dear Harry

*I hope you are well and that you are not over-doing it at that factory.*

*I’m having a wonderful time in Eastern Europe. The cities and the countryside are absolutely
beautiful. We started off in Austria. Vienna was positively marvellous, and we went to a Mozart
music concert. The experience was absolutely wonderful - honestly.*

We then went to Hungary and the capital Budapest. We had a lovely cruise down the Danube. The
food there was pretty spicy, though; they seem to put tons of paprika into everything – my tongue
still hasn’t recovered!

Then we travelled into Romania and toured around the wonderful alpine meadows and dense forests
of Transylvania. There was plenty of wildlife there – bears, mountain goats and wild boars - but I
didn’t see any vampires, thank goodness!

We have just arrived in Bulgaria, and I am writing this in our hotel room in Sofia. It’s a
beautiful city, nestling in the lovely Balkan Mountains.

Well I have to go now but I’ll write to you again soon. (I’ve also written to Ron and Ginny).
I’ve got to get ready for tonight - Viktor has asked me out to dinner at a posh restaurant, and I’m
really looking forward to seeing him again.

Love from

Hermione

Harry grinned as he read – he was really glad that Hermione was having a good time. But he felt
a bit uneasy when he read about Viktor Krum. He thought that Viktor was ok, but he had an odd sort
of feeling about Hermione’s date with him. He instinctively reached up and closed his hand around
the amulet, which still felt warm and gave off that same feeling of security. He hoped she would be
ok.

***

Sirius Black and Remus Lupin were warily treading their way through some dense undergrowth in
the New Forest near Southampton. They had received a tip-off from Snape that there would be a Death
Eater initiation ceremony somewhere on the northern side of the forest tonight, near a monument
known as ‘*The Rufus Stone’*.

Remus whispered, “This place is certainly well chosen for a Death Eater meeting. Muggles have
reported spooky feelings whenever they pass by the stone. Did you know that King William the
2nd - William the Conqueror’s son - was killed at this very spot? He was also known as
Rufus because of his shock of Red hair. To this day, no-one knows whether the arrow that pierced
his heart was the result of an accident or murder.”

“Where the hell do you get these bits of information from, Remus? Next to Hermione Granger you
must be the most bookish person I know,” whispered Sirius. “Hold on, I think there’s something in
that clearing just up ahead”

They both squinted in the almost pitch dark and saw a faint light. It seemed to be a magically
produced bluish light. They edged closer and baulked at the sight that confronted them - about
fifty people dressed in black cloaks and hoods stood in a circle facing in towards the middle.

At the centre of the circle was a tall thin shape, also dressed completely in black. But as he
slowly lifted his head, a chill spread down the spines of the two watchers. That face was exactly
as Harry had described - a thin slash of a mouth, just two slits for a nose and slitty eyes that
gleamed red in the darkness. Voldemort!

“You stay here, Remus. I’ll try to get a bit closer and see if I can hear what’s going on.”
Sirius changed into his animagus form, and the large black dog padded silently towards the unholy
group.

“Welcome my new Death Eaters. I have summoned you all here tonight to be initiated into the Dark
Side. We are growing stronger by the day and I already have over 2000 loyal servants. Soon I will
be able to take action against the abomination of Mudbloods and Muggles that pollute the land. When
I call your name, step forward and receive the mark that will be your treasured badge for the rest
of your lives…. Mark Leeming”

One of the Death Eaters stepped forward, knelt on the ground before the Dark Lord and rolled up
his right sleeve. Voldemort placed his wand on his forearm and shouted *“MORSMODRE.”* Leeming
arched his back and let out a scream of pure agony as smoke rose from his arm. After about a minute
the man relaxed slightly, whimpering, and then held up his arm for the rest of the group to see.
Burned into his arm was the dark mark – a skull with a serpent in its mouth. The group of Death
Eaters roared with approval, bringing a sneering smile to the ugly face of Voldemort.

This continued until all fifty people had been given the mark, and the air was full of the smell
of burning flesh. Voldemort then raised his arms into the air, his wand pointed upwards, and yelled
*“CRUCIO.”*

All fifty Death Eaters fell to the ground writhing in agony. This lasted only for a few seconds
before the curse was lifted.

Voldemort laughed and shouted, “The pain you have just witnessed is nothing to the pain you will
feel if you ever disobey me. Be warned. You will be contacted in a few weeks by your group
commander, who will give you your instructions.”

There was a ‘pop’ and Voldemort was gone.

Sirius felt sickened and padded his way back to Remus. Both men then made their way a little
further out of the forest and Apparated back to Hogsmeade. They then walked towards Hogwarts to
report to Dumbledore.

***

Charlie Weasley was leaning against a tree at the edge of a forest clearing in a remote part of
Romania. He was watching a group of Romanian Longhorn dragons sleeping in the warm summer sunshine.
It was a crucial time for Charlie. The female dragons were nearing the time when they would lay a
new batch of eggs.

As the world’s foremost expert on Romanian Longhorns, Charlie needed to document the birthing
cycle of the beasts in great detail. He was due to give a lecture at the Ministry of Magic next
year, where dragon experts from all over the world would be holding their annual convention.

He was deep in thought about the reports he’d heard from his father that ‘You Know Who’ was
building up his forces, when he was shaken from his ruminations by an owl that swooped down and
landed on a branch just above his head. Charlie looked up and saw a parchment attached to its leg.
He reached up, removed the parchment, and the owl flew off.

Charlie unrolled the note, and the first thing he saw was the official seal of the British
Ministry of Magic. He sat down and read the note and muttered, “Well I’ll be …”

*‘Dear Mr. Weasley,*

*The French Ministry of Magic has approached me on a rather delicate matter.*

*It appears that the Magical Creatures in the forbidden forest in the south of France have
started to exhibit some rather peculiar habits. Among the most disturbing aspects of the affair is
the strange behaviour of the group of Romanian Longhorns that have taken up residence
there.*

*A number of Muggles have spotted them wandering close to the edge of the forest. The Muggles
have, of course, had their memories of the dragons removed. The French authorities have the matter
contained, but have been unable to come up with an explanation for the outbreak.*

*While the matter has not yet reached a critical state, the French have requested that you
give them your expert assistance as soon as you can. I know, of course, that your work is
approaching a delicate stage and you cannot be released this year, but I would ask you to keep your
diary clear for the early part of next year. You will have several months free before you give your
lecture at the convention.*

*I will contact you at a later date with the name of your contact in France, together with an
update of the current situation.*

*Yours truly*

*A Smoothy*

*Head of Dept. of Magical Creatures*

*Ministry of Magic’*

Charlie wondered what the devil had caused those Longhorns to stray to the edge of their forest.
By habit, they tended to keep to the central parts of the forests they inhabited. He made a note in
his diary and then settled down to watch the sleeping dragons.

***

Harry was happily jogging around the factory when he stopped for a break just outside the main
office. He sat on the lawn with his head back, soaking up the sunshine.

A voice suddenly whispered in his ear, “Hello, handsome, what are you doing here?”

Harry opened his eyes to see Jake’s fantasy, Melanie, smiling down at him. She sat down very
close to Harry and drew her nails down the side of his well-muscled left arm. “My, you’ve certainly
grown up since you started working here. You’ve got muscles growing on muscles,” she said as she
squeezed his biceps.

Harry was mortified. “Eh, hello Melanie. Shouldn’t you be working?”

“I’m running an errand for your uncle, so I stopped by to say hello,” she said, starting to
stroke his shoulder. “I was thinking, how would you like to go to the pictures tonight? There’s a
good film showing - Spiderman I think”

“Th..Thanks for the offer M..Melanie,” stuttered Harry, “but I don’t think my uncle will let me
go out in the evenings. Why don’t you ask Jake? I’m sure he’d go with you.”

“Humph. Why don’t you want to go out with me Harry? What’s the matter with me? Have I got two
heads or something?”

“Oh no, Melanie, there’s nothing wrong with you at all. I..I’m sorry. I have to go now.” Harry
jumped up and started sprinting towards the back of the factory. When he was out of sight, he
stopped and let out a big sigh and thought, ‘Jake would kill me if he found out his crush had come
onto me like that. And what the devil does she see in me anyway? I’m only 15 for goodness sake -
surely she can’t fancy me! Perhaps it’s because I’m the boss’ nephew. Yep, that must be it.’

Harry reached up to hold his amulet – he tended to do this now when he got into awkward
situations – and felt the familiar feelings it generated. This time, however, there was a new
sensation – a sort of tingly, urgent type of feeling. He couldn’t really pinpoint what it was but
it was certainly there. He again made a mental note to ask Hermione if she knew any more about the
amulet.

That evening, Aunt Petunia ordered Harry to go into the garden to cut the grass. It had been
neglected since Harry had started working and, since the lawnmower was broken, the grass had
reached almost jungle proportions. That meant that he had to use the short-handle shears. ‘Great,’
he thought ruefully. ‘This is going to take me all night.’

After about an hour, his arms were nearly dropping off. Although he was strong now, his strength
was built up by lifting heavy boxes and circuit training. The action of using the shears was new,
and he was using different muscles than he normally did.

He sat down for a rest, when a voice called over the fence, “Well hello there. Where have you
been all summer?”

He looked up to see a pretty girl about his own age leaning on the fence post. She had shiny
blond hair curved down around her shoulders, light blue eyes, full sensuous lips and a cute nose,
which turned slightly upwards at the end. She was smiling at him with a teasing look in her eyes.
‘Oh no, not again,’ thought Harry.

“I’m Lara and I live over the road in number twelve. Why haven’t I seen you here before then?
What’s your name?”

“Eh, I’m Harry. I work at my uncle’s factory all day and I don’t normally come out here in the
evenings.”

“Do you want to come over to my house and play some CDs or something? We’d have great fun,” she
asked.

“Thanks, Lara. Another time, perhaps. I’ve got to finish cutting this lawn and I think it’s
going to take me all night.”

“Well ok, Harry, but I’ll hold you to that. I’ll speak to you again. ‘Bye.” Lara smiled prettily
and walked back over the road and into her house.

‘Phew!’ thought Harry. ‘What the bloody hell is wrong with the female population in this town?
Aren’t there enough blokes to go around or something? …She is cute, though, and she does seem nice.
Maybe I’ll take her up on that offer – Hmm.’ And he carried on with the backbreaking job of cutting
the lawn.

***

When Harry got home from work the following day, he quickly cleaned the vegetables and put them
on the stove to cook. He then prepared the lamb chops and placed them in the oven.

‘Right!’ he thought. ‘I’ll have a shower while they cook. I wonder what I can wear tonight?’

After showering and putting on some light casual clothes, Harry went down stairs to see his
uncle and aunt sitting at the dining table with their arms folded and wearing matching scowls.
“Where’s this dinner then! You know we’re going out tonight!” his uncle growled.

“We’ve always got to wait and poor Duddykins is nearly feinting from hunger,” his aunt whined.
Dudley was holding his knife and fork in his hands and glaring at Harry in a threatening way.

Harry ignored their complaints and went to dish up the food.

After dinner, Harry finished the washing-up and then sighed with relief. “Right, the rest of the
evening is mine.”

“We’ll be home at about 10.30 tonight, and make sure the supper is on the table,” shouted his
aunt as all three Dursleys went out the front door to the car.

Harry glanced at the clock and saw that it was 6.30 pm. He went out the back door and locked it,
putting the key under a stone by the back window. He always did this when he went out and the
Dursleys were not at home. He sauntered into the garden and leaned on the fence running along the
side of the house, wondering if Lara would come by. He hoped that she would – he missed the
companionship of his Hogwarts friends, and really felt that he could do with an evening with a
friendly face of his own age. He glanced towards the front of the house and saw Lara. She was
walking on the opposite side of the street, and looking towards the front of No. 4.

“Hi, Lara,” Harry shouted.

Lara turned her head and smiled before trotting over to where Harry was standing.

She glanced at the lawn. “Hi, Harry. I see you’ve finished cutting the grass. Does that mean
you’re free tonight?”

“Eh … yes I am,” croaked Harry, his mouth suddenly going quite dry.

Lara beamed at him. “Well come on then. Lets go to my house and listen to some music. My mum
won’t mind and my dad’s working away all week.”

Harry climbed awkwardly over the fence and walked along beside Lara. “I have to be back by half
past ten tonight to make supper for my aunt and uncle.”

“Oh don’t worry, we’ve got plenty of time.” Lara caught hold of Harry’s hand and dragged him
towards the back door of her house.

“Hello mum, this is Harry.” Lara spoke to her mother as they entered the kitchen. “Is it ok if
we go into the study and play some music?”

Harry looked at the woman, and was startled to see a replica of Lara – only older

“Hello Harry, I’m Mrs. Smythe, and yes, it is ok, but keep the noise down – we don’t want to
give those Dursleys anything more to complain about do we!” said Lara’s mother.

“Er, mum, Harry lives at No. 4 – he’s the Dursley’s nephew.” Lara had a look of horror on her
face.

“Oh my, I ..I’m sorry Harry, I meant ….”

Harry smiled. “Don’t think anything of it, Mrs Smythe. I know what the Dursleys are like. I’ve
had to put up with them for long enough to know that. I don’t live with them from choice, you
know.”

Mrs Smythe smiled sympathetically at Harry, although she still looked a bit flustered, and
walked through to the lounge to watch television.

“Sorry about that, Harry,” said Lara. “Would you like something to drink?”

“Um.. have you got any pumpkin juice?”

“What’s that? Is it something new they’ve brought out?”

Harry mentally kicked himself. “Eh.. No, that was a joke - coke will be fine if you’ve got
it”

Lara led Harry into her dad’s study, carrying their glasses of coke. The study was quite dark,
with a very large bookshelf along one side of the room. A large desk stood near the window, which
overlooked the side garden. There was a large computer sitting on the side of the desk, and a laser
printer and scanner on a smaller table to the side.

“What does your father do?” asked Harry, looking at the computer equipment.

Lara smiled. “Oh, dad’s a computer systems consultant and usually works from home. He used to
work for a large corporation, but he decided to branch out on his own. So we moved to Privet Drive
last year because the study was an ideal size to set up an office. He designs and writes small
business systems to run on PCs. He’s up in Manchester this week installing a system for an
insurance company. But come on,” she said as she turned on the computer, “lets play some CDs on
dad’s computer – I’ve got some of the latest ones and dad’s got some as well. They’re old, but the
music is great. The more you listen the more you like it. You know, The Beatles, Stones, Queen
..”

She pulled two chairs in front of the 21” screen. “Come on, Harry, sit down here and watch.” She
took one of the CDs from her father’s collection and placed it into the drive.

As ‘*Bohemian Rhapsody’* thundered out of the impressive-looking speakers at either end of
the room, Harry took his eyes off the screen and glanced at Lara who was looking at him while she
sipped her coke. She had an enigmatic smile on her face and Harry coloured up a bit.

‘She’s a very pretty girl, and nice with it,’ he thought. ‘She’d fit in well at Gryffindor. Pity
she’s a Muggle.’ The two teens continued looking at each other, both caught up in their own
thoughts.

Lara couldn’t stop looking at Harry’s eyes – they were the most beautiful emerald green and were
so warm. They sent tingles all along her spine as she was becoming lost in their depths.

They both jumped when the door to the study flew open to reveal an angry-looking Mrs. Smythe.
“Will you turn that music down!” she shouted above ‘The Beatles’ *‘I am a Walrus’*. “I can’t
hear myself think.”

“Sorry, mum,” said Lara as she reached across Harry and turned down the speaker volume.

“Now that’s fine – why do you kids need to listen to music so loud? You’ll be deaf by the time
you’re twenty you know!” Mrs. Smythe went back out and closed the door smiling to herself. ‘They do
look cute together,’ she thought.

Lara put a Britney Spears CD in the drive and then turned to Harry. “So, Harry, how come you’re
staying with your aunt and uncle. Where are your parents?”

“They died when I was a year old - killed in a car crash. I’ve been staying here ever
since.”

“Oh I’m so sorry, Harry, that’s terrible. But why haven’t I seen you before now?”

“Well I only stay here now for two months of the year. I’m in boarding school in Scotland for
the rest of the time.”

“I go to Smeltings now. That’s a boarding school too, but since it’s close by I don’t stay
there.”

“So you must know my cousin Dudley then. He goes there.”

“Oh yes,” said Lara ominously. “Fatty Dursley – ugh. He used to give me hell when I started last
year. He and his cronies were always picking on me. They were also picking on three other girls in
year 4 so we started to go around together everywhere in school. That stopped their antics – they
only pick on people if they’re on their own. I supposed he helped me, in a way. Carol, Beth, Josie
and I are inseparable now – we’re great friends, but they live in all four corners of the country
so we don’t see much of each other during the holidays. I can’t wait for school to start next week
to see them again.”

“That’s exactly as it is with me, Lara. I’ve got great friends at Hogwarts but four of us are
best friends and we do lots of things together. There were three of us to start, but Ginny – that’s
Ron’s sister who’s a year younger than us – joined up with us towards the end of last year. Ron’s
great. We hit it off right from day one and he’s a mine of information on Quidditch. My other best
friend is Hermione Granger. She’s the smartest witc .. I mean girl in the school. Everybody says
she’ll be head girl when we get to year 7. She really looks after us, and if we pass our OWL … I
mean GCSEs next year it will be down to her. She’s always helping us.”

“So what is this school – Hogwarts – it’s a funny name isn’t it? I’ve never heard of it. And
what’s Quidditch?”

“Oh, it’s a .. an old sort of game we play at the school – it’s a tradition, a bit like the Eton
wall game. Hogwarts is a school for ..err .. special kids, I suppose.”

“So how are you special, Harry … apart from the obvious, that is?”

“Obvious? Well, I don’t know – I don’t think I’m special at all. I guess I was lucky to be
picked to go there.”

‘I’m sure that’s not the case,’ Lara thought to herself. ‘He really doesn’t know how gorgeous he
is does he? Wow!’

“So, Harry, have you got a girlfriend at Hogwarts? It sounds as if Hermione’s your
girlfriend.”

“No, no I haven’t got a girlfriend. Hermione and I are just best friends. Last year I liked a
girl a year older than me, but she didn’t like me though, and nothing came of it. Have you got a
boyfriend?”

Lara pulled a face. “No, not yet. There are a few nice boys at school, but nobody’s asked me to
go out yet.”

Lara looked at Harry’s mess of unruly black hair, and reached over and parted his fringe,
revealing the lightening bolt scar. “How did you get that?”

“Uh .. Quidditch accident – it’s a pretty tough game, you know.”

The two teens continued to chat and Harry warmed to the friendly Lara. She reminded him of
Hermione – their personalities were very similar. He hadn’t had such a good time in a long
while.

Harry was so wrapped up in their conversation that he didn’t notice how dark it had become
outside. When he did, finally, glance at the clock on the wall he saw that it was 10.35.

“Oh look at the time! I’m late. Lara I’m sorry but I have to go now.”

“Will I see you tomorrow, Harry? We can go out somewhere if you like.”

“Oh I’m sorry, Lara, but tomorrow is my last day at work, and my uncle is driving me to Diag ..
I mean London straight after to meet my godfather. He’s taking me to buy books and things for
school. I’ll be staying with him for a few days in a hotel before catching the train to Scotland. I
only wish we’d met earlier this summer.”

Harry was crestfallen as he saw the look of sadness on Lara’s face.

“Me too, Harry, … me too. Will I see you again – perhaps next summer?”

“I don’t know, Lara. I may be staying with my godfather next year. I won’t know for a while. But
I’ll owl you and let you know”

“Owl me? What’s that?”

‘Oh bugger,’ thought Harry, ‘how do I get out of this one?’

“Well, Hogwarts is in a very remote part of Scotland, and there are no towns or villages nearby.
So there’s no postal service to speak of. We get around it by specially training the more
intelligent types of owl to carry our mail – a bit like the pigeons they used in the First World
War. I’ve got an owl called Hedwig – she’s in my bedroom now. I’ll call her so that she’ll know
where to bring the letter when I write.”

Harry stuck his head out of the window and shouted, ‘HEDWIG. Here girl.’

Lara’s chin dropped to her chest when a beautiful snowy owl flew in through the window and
perched on Harry’s shoulder, and nibbled his ear.

“Hedwig, meet Lara. Lara meet Hedwig.”

“Oh Harry, she’s beautiful,” said Lara as she ruffled Hedwig’s feathers behind her ear and gave
her a piece of biscuit to eat. Hedwig hooted contentedly.

“Oh she likes you, Lara. When you want to send a letter, you tie it to her leg and say the name
of the person you want her to find. She knows where you live now, so there won’t be a problem. I’ll
tell her to wait with you so you can write back to me.”

Hedwig then flew out of the window back to her perch in Harry’s bedroom.

Harry went towards the door, but was stopped from opening it by Lara. She leaned up and placed
her lips against Harry’s. His eyes opened wide when she broke the kiss, and he looked directly into
her sparkling blue eyes. He felt embarrassed and elated at the same time – he didn’t know how he
felt, really, since this was the first time a girl had kissed him like that.

“I … I …” stumbled Harry, lost for words.

Lara had a sad look when she said, “I hope I’ll see you soon, Harry. I really do.”

“So do I Lara – I’ll send Hedwig and let you know how I’m getting on.”

Harry then opened the door and ran across to the back of No. 4, his mind in turmoil.

Lara had tears in her eyes when her mother walked into the study.

“Lara, are you ok, love?”

“Yes mum,” she said, “but I don’t know if I’ll see him again. Why couldn’t I have met him
sooner? And why does he have to go away?” She turned and buried her head in her mothers shoulder,
the tears flowing freely now.

“Oh, Lara,” whispered her mother holding her close and stroking her hair. She had a tear of her
own in her eye as she looked at her daughter going through the first heartache of her young
life.

Harry bent to get the key from under the stone but found it wasn’t there. He tried the door but
it was locked. “Uncle Vernon,” he shouted.

“You useless good-for-nothing,” yelled his uncle through the door. “We’ve had to make our own
supper. You can damn well stay out there tonight! I’ll let you in to make our breakfast in the
morning.”

Harry went over to the garden shed and opened the door. The shed was just big enough for him to
lie down full length. He covered himself with an old dustsheet and settled down for the night. His
hand went to his lips and felt where Lara had kissed him. “If only …” he thought as he drifted off
to sleep.

***

There was a sombre mood in the headmaster’s office at Hogwarts as Dumbledore, McGonagall, Snape,
Sirius and Remus looked at each other with a feeling of impending doom. Sirius and Remus had just
finished giving their report of what they had seen and heard in the New Forest.

“This is as bad as I feared,” said Dumbledore. “In a few weeks – a month at the most at this
rate – Voldemort will be able to start his evil campaign in this country. And I’m sure that he’ll
be recruiting in other countries then, if he isn’t already. Have you heard anything about this
Severus?”

Snape nodded and said, “At the last meeting, he mentioned something about ‘his foreign friends’.
I didn’t know what he was talking about then, but it seems pretty obvious now.”

“The students start back in 3 days time,” said Dumbledore, “and I think we are going to have to
tighten our security for their safety. Visits to Hogsmeade will have to stop for the time being –
it won’t be safe outside the protection spells at the school. And we are going to have to impose a
curfew - we can’t allow students to wander around the grounds after dark – it’s just too
risky.”

The others nodded in agreement with glum looks on their faces. They knew how hard it would be
for the kids and also for them in imposing the restrictions.

Dumbledore looked to lift the mood of the meeting and said, “Right, let’s move on to a different
matter – the *‘Anima Summa’* issue. Now I’ve done a bit of digging over at my old University
and also at our library here. This is what I’ve found …”

Dumbledore glanced at his colleagues and saw that he had their full attention.

“Anima Summa can be translated from the Latin as Anima meaning ‘the breath of life’, ‘vital
principle’, or more commonly – ‘soul’. Summa means ‘the highest part or whole’. In the ancient
magical text that I’ve read, Anima Summa identifies what is known as a ‘Highest Soul’. This is a
very rare and powerful bond shared between a wizard and a witch, and when the bond is fully
achieved, it gives them both immense magical powers. No one knows exactly what those powers are, or
how they are achieved, or indeed, how the bond comes to be shared in the first place. In short, we
know very little about it. It is common for a witch and wizard to become ‘soul-mates’ but this form
of ‘soul-mate’ is almost unheard of. When compared to soul-mates, the power of the Anima Summa is
right off the scale!”

Everyone in the room looked puzzled. McGonagall pushed her glasses further back against her nose
and asked, “Albus, you say the Anima Summa is very rare. How rare and is there any record of such
an occurrence in the past?”

“It’s extremely rare, Minerva, and I could find only one recorded instance of the bond
happening. That was back in the time of the great Merlin, when he bonded with the witch
Morgana.”

“But Headmaster,” said Lupin, “Morgana, or Morgan Le Fay as she is sometimes known, was recorded
as an evil witch – a mistress of the Dark Arts. How is it possible that she could have bonded with
Merlin?”

“Ah, Remus. You can’t always trust what you read in the history books. Don’t forget that this
happened before the Christian Church came to the fore in the country, and suppressed the old
religions - and the victors always write the history books. The Church leaders depicted Morgana as
evil to suit their own ends but they couldn’t soil the memory of Merlin as well. It was a sexist
thing as well, I suspect,” Dumbledore chuckled.

“Anyway, back at that time, the Christians were intent on suppressing any form of witchcraft,
and so not a lot has been documented about Merlin and Morgana. What we do know, however, is this
..” Dumbledore itemised what he knew.

“One - they must be completely in love with each other and be pure in mind and body.

Two - the bond is only shared between two very powerful magical people.

Three - the two must have similar qualities to a varying degree – bravery, intellect,
willingness to risk all for others and also compassion.

Four – the conception dates of the two is critical. The male must be conceived first, and the
female exactly 3 months later. No one knows why, but it is thought that the pairing is pre-ordained
magically, and the 3-month period is needed for the spirits, or whatever, to establish the exact
traits of the male so that the female can be matched to him exactly.

Five – the immense powers of the two are only realised when they are together. They are still
very powerful when they are apart, but together they are almost invincible. There seems to be a
number of stages or aspects to that power, but there are no details documented – except for
one.

Six – the strength of the bonding depends on spontaneous realisation. They must both realise at
the same time that they are each other’s Anima Summa. That means that if either of them knows they
are an Anima Summa, and finds out who the other Anima Summa is, before the bonding takes place,
then their power will be diminished. This is why we are going to have to be very careful if we find
out the identity of the female before hand.” He paused briefly. “This may be a fairly complex thing
to grasp. The easiest way to understand it is they must both realise at the same time that the
other is their Anima Summa – even if one of them knows that he or she is an Anima Summa beforehand.
As long as this happens, they will then be capable of maximum powers.”

Dumbledore paused to let the information sink in, and then continued, “When Merlin and Morgana
bonded, they were fully adult. They were worldly-wise and were well equipped to handle the bond.
Harry has just turned fifteen!”

Sirius gasped and shouted, “But, Headmaster, how the hell is Harry and his mate, whoever she is,
going to be able to handle this? Good grief, they can’t be expected to cope at such a tender age.
They’ve hardly lived. And how can they be compared to the great Merlin and Morgana?” he trailed off
at a loss for words.

“Sirius,” said Dumbledore gently. “I don’t know the answer to that. And I don’t know when this
bonding is going to happen, but what I do know is that the prophecy is accurate and it is urgent.
It seems that the Anima Summa has been seeded with just this time in mind – the rise of Voldemort.
What is absolutely essential is that we all have to support Harry in this. We mustn’t tell him
about Anima Summa; he must find out for himself. If he did know, then he will obviously try to find
the female, and that might not be the best thing for him. We are going to have to let nature take
its course here. Do you all fully understand?”

Everyone in the room nodded. They were deep in their own thoughts about the revelations that
Dumbledore had made.

Lupin looked up when a sudden thought came to him. “Headmaster, we know that Harry’s birthday is
31st July 1980. Now I know that we don’t know when actual conception took place, but
it’s reasonable to assume that the female Anima Summa will be born on 31st October 1980,
give or take a few days either side. Now is this any help to us? Let’s face it – under normal
circumstances the girl could be anywhere in the wizarding world so it’d be impossible for us to
even start looking for her. But, given the nature of the prophecy, and the urgency, it may well be
that the girl is already within easy reach – maybe she’s already here at Hogwarts!”

“You could well be right, Remus. But I wouldn’t bank on it. I know, for instance, that we are
going to get a number of exchange students from Europe and America later in the school year and
some of them will be in Harry’s year. But I don’t know yet who they’ll be. In the meantime, though,
I’ll check the records of all the fifth year girls at the school to see if I can find a match. But
even if I do find a match, it won’t be certain that the girl will be the one – let’s be honest,
even if I find a match, how can we tell if she’s Harry’s Anima Summa? She won’t be wearing a sign
on her head or anything, and there must be many witches with a birth date of 31st
October 1980 in the wizarding world. All we would be able to do, I think, is to make sure that no
harm comes to any of the girls we find with the right birthday, just in case one of them might be
the one.”

Remus looked dejected. “When you put it like that, Headmaster, I have to agree with you. There’s
no way we’d be able to tell who the right girl is.”

“Right, onto the next matter. Sirius, the U.S Congress of Magic has been in touch with me. The
special Auror they have appointed to work with you is...” He looked at a parchment on his desk.
“Ceri Jones – there’s a note here that says it’s pronounced ‘K-e-r-r-y’. He will be arriving next
week, just before school starts. Now, I’ve told the U.S. ministry that you will be outside the
Three Broomsticks in Hogsmeade in your Animagus form – you can’t be too careful – on the
31st August at 10.00 pm. He will make contact with you then - the ministry seems
reluctant to give any details of their agent so I don’t know anything about him apart from his
name.”

“That’s fine, Headmaster,” said Sirius. “Sounds as if he has a Welsh ancestry with a name like
that. By the way, I’m meeting Harry at the Leaky Cauldron tomorrow evening. I though it would be a
good idea to spend a day or two with him before he comes back here, and don’t worry - I won’t say
anything about the prophecy to him.”

“That sounds fine, Sirius. But be careful. We don’t want anyone to recognise you.” Dumbledore
sighed and ended the meeting. “Right, I know you want to get back to sort out your classes and
schedules for the year. I’ll let you know if I find any witches with the right birthday. Thank you
all for coming.”

They then left the headmaster’s office pondering the events of the meeting.

Dumbledore drew his thoughts away from the prophecy to more mundane things, and muttered to
himself, “I must remember to set up the password on the gargoyle at the bottom of the stairs before
school starts …”

***

Harry heaved his trunk into the boot of his uncle’s car in the carport of No. 4 Privet Drive. He
smiled as he remembered that he could hardly lift the trunk to drag it at the start of the summer.
All his hard work and exercising had paid off, and he felt strong and ready for just about anything
that may be thrown at him in the coming year. He was also excited that he would soon spend some
time with his godfather and meet up with his friends.

He placed Hedwig, sitting drowsily on her perch in the cage, onto the back seat of the car and
sat down next to her. As his uncle drove slowly down Privet Drive towards the junction at the end
of the street, Harry glanced over at No. 12 and saw Lara standing at the upstairs window looking
down at him. His heart ached as he saw the look of sadness in her red-rimmed eyes. She lifted a
hand to her lips and blew Harry a kiss, before slowly raising it to wave a silent goodbye. Harry
had a sinking feeling as he slowly waved back. They didn’t take their eyes off each other until the
car turned onto the main road towards London.

Harry sighed as he tried to take his mind off Lara by thinking back to the events of the day
…

.

.

.

*“Come on ‘Arry. We’ve got to go up to the main office to shift some filing cabinets,” said
Jake with a twinkle in his eye. It was 4.30pm on his last day at the factory.*

*The two walked up to the office building and Jake held open the door and pushed Harry into
the large open-plan office, which appeared to be empty. Harry was startled when about twenty office
girls jumped up from behind their desks and shouted*

*“Surprise!”*

*They walked up to Harry and stood in a semi-circle in front of him. Jake stepped up alongside
Harry and took a battered piece of paper out of his pocket and began to read.*

*“Well, girls, this is ‘Arry’s last day at the factory, and he’s going back to his posh
school. It’s been great ‘aveing you ‘ere Harry, and you’ve made a lot of friends. Now we’ve clubbed
together and got you a little somethin’ to remember us by.” Jake took a small parcel from Melanie
and gave it to Harry.*

*“It’s not a lot, just somethin’ that you can use at school. We all ‘ope that you come back
next year – we’ve loved working wiv ‘im ‘aven’t we girls?”*

*“YES,” was the strident shout from the girls, some of whom had handkerchiefs held up to their
eyes.*

*“Go on then - open it,” said Jake.*

*Throughout all this Harry had stood with his mouth slightly agape and a pink tinge covering
his face. He looked down and ripped open the package to see a small crystal paperweight, engraved
with the words, ‘TO HARRY FROM ALL HIS FRIENDS AT THE FACTORY’.*

*“Th .. thanks everybody,” stammered Harry. “I d .. don’t know what to say.” Harry was clearly
overwhelmed and hadn’t expected anything like this.*

*“Well shuddup then,” said Jake as he caught hold of Harry’s hand and shook it vigorously. The
girls then stepped up and each placed a kiss on his cheek – except for Melanie who kissed him full
on the lips.*

*Harry had tears in his eyes as uncle Vernon walked in and shouted, “Come on, I haven’t got
all day to wait around for you – let’s go. And you lot, get back to work. There’s still 15 minutes
left before finishing time!”*

*Harry walked towards the door with his uncle, and before going out turned and waved to all
his friends.*

.

.

.

Harry was shaken from his thoughts when his uncle shouted, “Where’s this Leaky Cauldron then.
How do I get there?”

“It’s in Charing Cross Road, Uncle Vernon.”

***

“Are they here yet?”

“No, my Lord,” answered Peter Pettigrew as he cringed on the floor. They were inside Voldemort’s
cave in northern Scotland. It was illuminated with flaming torches that showed the damp seeping
down the craggy walls. The ceiling, about 12 feet above, was hung with varying sizes of
stalactites, and dripped small drops of percolated rainwater into milky-coloured puddles that
formed on the uneven floor. In a dank and gloomy corner of the cave lay a huge coiled snake, it’s
head protruding above the thick coils of it’s body and it’s forked tongue flicking out at regular
intervals. At the centre of the cave was a stone throne, raised about 3 feet from the ground by a
stone pedestal. On it sat the sinister figure of Lord Voldemort, impatiently tapping his fingers on
the head of a stone snake, which adorned the arm of the throne.

“Go outside and activate the summons again. I will not be kept waiting like this,” hissed
Voldemort. Wormtail scurried to the cave entrance to obey his master’s command.

A few minutes later, two figures dressed in black entered the cave with Wormtail. One was quite
tall and held his head up high. The other was smaller and kept glancing around the cave nervously.
The nervous one stood stock still when he saw who was sitting on the throne, but was pulled towards
the centre by the taller man. They both bowed reverently to Voldemort, the taller one saying, “My
apologies, my Lord, I did not intend to keep you waiting. I was giving last minute instructions to
my son on the correct way to behave in your esteemed presence.”

Voldemort seemed appeased by this and hissed, “Don’t ever keep me waiting again, Lucius. Let me
see his face.”

Lucius Malfoy pulled the hood down from his son’s head. Draco’s eyes were as large as saucers as
he stared mesmerised at the legendary Dark Lord.

“So. Draco Malfoy. You look a lot like your father. Do you know why you have been brought before
me today?”

“N ..no, my Lord,” stuttered Draco. “But I will do whatever you ask”

“Hmm that’s good Draco. Your father has no doubt told you what happens to my servants if they
disobey me.” He turned to Lucius and asked, “Are you sure that he can be fully trusted and that
he’s up to the job I want him to do?”

“Yes, my Lord,” he replied. “I have no doubt at all. Potter is Draco’s worst enemy and he wants
to do anything he can to get at him.”

Voldemort turned back to Draco and pointed a bony finger towards him. “You have been chosen to
carry out a very important task for me. If you fail me, you will feel the pain of my wrath, do you
understand?”

“Y .. Yes, my Lord. I will not fail you.”

Voldemort nodded. “You may be wondering why I have not yet initiated you into my army of Death
Eaters, Draco. Be assured that you will as soon as you have finished your schooling. Look on this
as a sort of apprenticeship into the Dark Arts. I have sensed, over the last few weeks, an
emanation. It is very feint and I cannot pinpoint the source, but I can feel that it involves the
Light Side, and it seems to be some sort of summons. I don’t know the one who is being called, but
I have a feeling that it involves Potter. Now when you go back to Hogwarts in a few days I want
you, Draco, to find out everything you can about the things that Potter and his friends do.
Anything at all that seems a bit unusual. Send an owl to your father when you have any information
for me.”

Voldemort reached into his robe and pulled out a silvery, shimmering piece of material, and held
it out towards Draco. “This will help you to get close to Potter without being seen. It’s an
invisibility cloak.”

Draco’s eyes were wide with excitement as he took the cloak.

Voldemort had a grim expression on his face as he pierced Draco with an icy stare and hissed,
“That was very difficult to get hold of; it is very rare and valuable. If you lose it or damage it
in any way, your life will not be worth living. Do I make myself clear?”

“Y .. yes, my Lord”

“Do well in the task I have set you and you will be rewarded. Now go!”

The Malfoys were led out of the cave by Wormtail as Voldemort turned his head to the snake in
the corner of the cave. “Interesting times, Nagini – interesting times.”



3. Diagon Alley
---------------

Chapter 2 Diagon Alley

Harry looked out of the window of Uncle Vernon’s car as it entered Charing Cross Road. As they
approached the Leaky Cauldron, Harry said, “Stop here, please.”

“Why? I can’t see the pub,” said Uncle Vernon. He didn’t know that it was magically hidden from
Muggles. However, he stopped the car, wanting to get rid of Harry as soon as he could. He stopped
outside a large bookshop, little knowing that it was next to ‘*The Leaky Cauldron*’. Harry
lifted Hedwig’s cage out of the back seat, and heaved the trunk from the boot. As soon as the boot
was closed, Uncle Vernon pulled away without so much as a backward glance.

As Harry looked around, he felt something wet on his hand. He glanced down to see a large,
black, shaggy-coated dog nuzzling him.

“Padfoot!” Harry shouted and patted the dog’s head affectionately. They both turned and walked
towards the Leaky Cauldron.

When they entered, the main bar was almost empty, just one or two regulars sitting at a table
playing wizarding chess. Harry walked up to the bar and greeted the landlord. “Hello Tom, nice to
see you again. Have you got a spare room for two nights please?”

“Well hello, young Harry,” smiled Tom. “It’s good to see you. I think I’ve got your old room
free, Room 11. I’ll check.” He went over to the register and drew his finger down a list of names.
“Yes, it’s free for the next two nights. What about the dog?”

“Oh, he can stay with me if that’s all right – he’s fully house trained.” Padfoot looked
disdainfully at Harry as a low growl escaped from his mouth.

“Well, since it’s you, Harry, I’ll let him stay – but he won’t be allowed in the dining room,
mind you,” said Tom as he handed the room key over.

“Thanks, Tom. Oh, can I have dinner in my room please? I’ve got some reading to do for school
and I’ve got a bit behind with it. I’m starving, so I’d appreciate it if I could have a very large
meal.”

“No problem, Harry. I’ll send it up as soon as it’s ready. Oh, and I’ll send a nice big bone up
for the dog.”

“Thanks again Tom,” grinned Harry over his shoulder as he and Padfoot made their way to the
stairs and up to room 11.

As soon as they entered, Padfoot immediately transformed and a stern-looking Sirius glared at
Harry. “House trained indeed!” and they both fell into the two easy chairs laughing.

Later that evening, both Harry and Sirius were feeling comfortably full after eating the
extremely large meal.

“I’ll keep the bone for later, after I’ve transformed,” said Sirius. “Well, Harry, I can’t get
over the change in you. You’re looking great. How have things been since I saw you last? Did you
get up to anything interesting?”

“Well, work was great – I was really sorry to leave. They’re a great bunch at the factory. Look
what they gave me as a leaving present.” Harry pulled the paperweight out of his trunk and handed
it to Sirius.

“That’s great, Harry. It’s nice to see you making new friends.”

Harry had a pensive look on his face and said, “Uh, Sirius. Can I ask you something? I don’t
have anyone else to talk to about things like this.”

“Well of course you can, Harry. What things?”

“I uh .. well I met this girl living in Privet Drive. Her name’s Lara and she’s really nice. And
... and she kissed me. She was pretty sad when I left to come here tonight.” Sirius’ ears pricked
up. “I .. well I really like her, but she’s a Muggle. What can I do, Sirius?”

‘Oh lord,’ thought Sirius, ‘he really is growing up. But if the girl’s a Muggle, she can’t be
the one.’

“Look, Harry, there’s nothing wrong with having Muggle friends. There are quite a few people I
know who have even married Muggles – although things don’t always work out between them. It seems
that Muggles can’t always handle it when they find out that their partner is a witch or
wizard.”

“I’m pretty confused about things, Sirius. Some of the girls at work were trying to get me to go
out with them, as well. What do they see in me? I’m not famous to them or anything.”

“Look, I’m hardly an expert in such matters, Harry, but I think it’s called ‘growing up.’ I seem
to remember that it wasn’t an easy time for me, either. The main thing is to be happy – go with the
flow. Live a little, you’re still very young, after all. You’ll probably find that quite a few
witches will come onto you – but I can tell you one thing. When the right girl comes along, you’ll
know beyond any shadow of a doubt.”

“Uh, thanks Sirius – I think …but I still don’t know why these girls keep coming onto me,” said
Harry doubtfully.

‘Oh my,’ thought Sirius, ‘there’s going to be a few broken hearts strewn around Hogwarts this
year!’

“Don’t worry about it Harry – just be glad you’re so popular. Right - to bed. You want to be
fresh tomorrow when you fight your way through the crowds in Diagon Alley.”

“Sirius, has there been any news about Voldemort over the summer?”

Sirius frowned. “There haven’t been any attacks, but there’ve been reports that he’s building up
his strength and recruiting an army. Remus and I spied on one of the Death Eater initiation
ceremonies – and I’m afraid that ‘You Know Who’ looked to be pretty strong then. I think it’s only
a matter of time before the attacks start. But don’t you worry about it. You and your friends will
be safe at Hogwarts and Professor Dumbledore has organised quite a powerful spy network to get
advance information on any activity.”

“I hope you’re right, Sirius, but I can’t help worrying about what’s going to happen.”

Sirius smiled. “To bed, Harry. We can talk about this another time.” He transformed and curled
up on the rug at the foot of the bed to eat his bone.

***

Harry and Sirius woke early the following morning. They weren’t used to the noise of the traffic
in Charing Cross Road, which was just below the front window of their room. Harry dressed in his
wizarding robes, went downstairs to breakfast and managed to fill a ‘doggy bag’ of the choicest
items on the menu. Harry went back up to room 11 and proudly displayed the bag full of food, which
Sirius ate ravenously.

“Will you be all right on your own Harry? I think I’d better stay here in case I’m recognised,
and I don’t think Diagon Alley is the place for a dog today.”

“No problem. I’m meeting Ron, Hermione and Ginny anyway, so I won’t be on my own. I’ll see you
later this afternoon.”

Harry went out to the walled courtyard outside the Leaky Cauldron and walked over to the wall
that hid the entrance to Diagon Alley. He measured three bricks up and two across, just above the
dustbin, then took out his wand from his robes and tapped the brick. A small hole appeared and
rapidly became larger to form an archway. Harry smiled at the familiar hustle and bustle which was
always the trademark of Diagon Alley, especially just before school when students, accompanied by
their parents, stocked up on books and materials for the coming year.

Harry happily walked along the street taking in the sights and the excited chatter of the
younger children just about to start their first year at Hogwarts. He made his way to Gringotts
bank and entered the cool and somewhat gloomy reception room. He asked a goblin at the desk to take
him to his vault, which was way below the floor of the bank. There he took out enough money to last
him the school year, and also to buy the books and supplies he needed.

When he walked back out into the warm sunshine, the street had become far more crowded – Sirius
had been right – it was certainly no place for a dog. He threaded his way over to Florean
Fortescue’s Ice-Cream Parlour and sat outside at a spare table, underneath a brightly coloured sun
umbrella. He ordered a chocolate-flavoured ice cream and slowly enjoyed its taste while waiting for
his friends to arrive. Feeling warm, he took off his wizarding robes and put them on the seat
beside him - he felt far cooler in just his jeans and T-shirt. He closed his eyes and had started
to go into a comfortable doze when he heard, “Heelloo Haarryyy,” in a young female voice.

He looked up to see three girls grinning and staring at him. He recognised them as third – no
fourth year now – Ravenclaws from Hogwarts. “He .. Hello girls.”

“What have you been up to during the summer, Harry?” asked the tallest girl. “It looks like
you’ve been working out it a big way.” The other two girls giggled.

“Uh, I’ve been working in my uncle’s factory,” said Harry feeling very embarrassed at being put
under the spotlight. “You haven’t seen Ron Weasley have you?”

“No, but I saw Ginny about 10 minutes ago.”

“Thanks. Well I suppose he’ll be here any time now.”

“Byeee Harryyy,” said all three girls in concert as they walked away, smiling as they looked
back over their shoulders at a pink-faced Harry.

“Harry me old mate! How the devil are you?” shouted a smiling Ron as he approached the
table.

Harry stood up, grinning widely, and greeted his best friend. “Hello Ron, it’s great to see you.
What have you been doing? You look as if you’ve sprouted about three inches.”

“Yeh, well my mother says I’ll be the tallest in the family if I keep on growing,” said Ron
ruefully as the two friends sat down at the table.

“You’re looking different,” said Ron. “You must have worked your socks off at that factory.”

“Uh yes, I suppose I did, Ron. Have you seen Hermione?”

“Yes, and wait till you see her! She’s with Ginny looking in one of the clothes shops.”

“Why, what’s wrong with her?”

“Just wait, Harry,” said Ron grinning widely.

About a hundred yards further back along the street, Ginny and Hermione had just emerged from
the shop and passed the three Ravenclaws who had spoken to Harry earlier. They couldn’t help but
listen to their excited chatter.

“Ohh he’s so gorgeous…. really hot…. I wonder if he’ll be free this year… you wish… You’ll have
to get in the queue.”

“Oh, I wonder who they’re drooling over,” said Ginny. “Sounds like there’s a new stud on the
block.”

Hermione rolled her eyes. “Ginny! We go to Hogwarts to study! I don’t intend to have any
romantic involvements. My schoolwork is far too important!”

“Well I don’t know about that, Hermione. Surely you can combine the two? I ... I’ve decided to
forget my old crush on Harry, by the way. He’ll never treat me other than a friend, so I won’t
waste my time any more. I’m going to look around at the other talent, and if I get the chance -
well you never know. And anyway, what about you and Viktor?” grinned Ginny.

“Oh … he ... he’s just a friend. There’s nothing going on between us.” But Ginny noticed the
pink flush on Hermione’s face.

They walked on towards Florean Fortescue’s and Ginny suddenly stopped, with her mouth wide open.
“Eh, Hermione. I … I think I know who those Ravenclaws were going on about. Look over there ...
next to Ron. Wow!”

Hermione looked in the direction Ginny was staring and saw Harry and Ron talking animatedly at
one of the tables. Her mouth dropped slightly open as she took in the change in Harry. ‘Those girls
weren’t far wrong,’ she thought. She felt something stir deep inside her – it seemed to be more
than just seeing a gorgeous boy. She didn’t know what it was and shook herself mentally and tried
to put it out of her mind.

“You know, Hermione, every girl at Hogwarts is going to fancy Harry – there’s going to be a
stampede. And they are certainly going to be jealous of us two – you know, being best friends with
him and spending so much time with him.”

“Honestly, Ginny. Come on, let’s go.”

Harry glanced up and noticed Ginny and Hermione coming towards their table. He stood up and
smiled as they approached. “Hi, Ginny,” he said as he hugged her. Ginny held on to Harry longer
than she should have for a friendly hug. Harry, however, didn’t seem to notice – he’d looked at
Hermione and was astounded.

What he saw sent a flush to his cheeks - she had certainly grown up during the summer. Her hair
was now smooth and shiny, and neatly fell around her shoulders. She was tanned, and her broad smile
lit up her face. She was, in short, beautiful. She was no longer the gawky schoolgirl he first met
4 years ago, she was now rapidly becoming a woman, and even her robes couldn’t hide her willowy
figure. He couldn’t help but compare her with Lara. He suddenly felt cheap at the way he was
thinking about his best friend – the one he most respected. ‘Come on, Harry, this is Hermione. Get
real,’ he thought to himself.

When Ginny released Harry her face was almost as red as her lovely hair. But Harry didn’t
notice. He went over to Hermione. “Hello, Hermione. Great to see you,” and they hugged -
briefly.

“Hello, Harry. Glad to see you’re better.” Hermione couldn’t help but marvel at the beauty of
Harry’s eyes. They seemed to have a more mature look and had a sort of mesmerising effect,
twinkling with all sorts of emotions as they appraised her. She again felt a jolt deep within her.
She shook herself. “Shall we stay here for a while before getting our school stuff?” she said
looking around at the other two.

They all sat around the table, and Harry ordered ice creams all round. “Where’s Fred and
George?” he asked.

Ron grinned. “Oh you know them – they’ve gone to Gambol & Japes, the joke shop, to eye up
the opposition and to stock up for their last year. I think they’re planning to go out with a
bang.”

All four laughed, thinking about the pranks they would be witnessing, mostly on the Slytherins
no doubt, in the coming year.

“Well, Hermione,” said Ron with a smirk on his face. “How was crumby Viktor this summer?”

Hermione flushed at the jibe. “Oh he’s ok. We had a great time”

“Yeah, I’m sure you did,” Ron replied with a hint of sarcasm.

“Now look, Ron, what I did in Bulgaria is none of your business. So drop it!”

Harry looked at his two friends and groaned inwardly. They hadn’t taken long to start one of
their legendary slanging matches. He tried to divert Ron from another frosty reply. “Ron, hey
thanks for the Quidditch book – it was great, and the chapters on Seeker tactics were
brilliant.”

“That’s ok, Harry. What else did you get for your birthday?”

Harry told them about the presents he’d received, and they all laughed at Ginny’s singing
birthday card. He then took hold of the amulet and pulled it outside his T-shirt. “I had this from
Hermione – and thanks,” he said looking towards her. “It feels warm when I touch it, and I get a
feeling of security.”

“Yes, I had the same feeling,” said Hermione.

Ron and Ginny each took hold of the amulet but they said they could feel nothing out of the
ordinary. Harry then looked at Hermione and said, “Lately, I’ve felt something else when I hold it.
It’s a sort of feeling of urgency – it’s hard to describe. You try it.”

Hermione held the amulet. “Well I still get the warm and secure feeling, but I can’t feel
anything else.”

“What do you know about it, Hermione, and where did you get it?”

“I got it at this new shop that hasn’t long opened. It’s a few doors up from Flourish and Blotts
– come on, I’ll show you. Perhaps we can ask the old man who sold it to me if he knows anything
more.”

Harry put his robes back on and the four friends made their way through the crowds to the
shop.

Hermione was astonished to see that the sign over the window had now disappeared, and the shop
was boarded up. “Well that’s odd. Come on, let’s ask in the shop next door – they might know when
it closed and if he’s moved somewhere else.”

They walked into the little shop next door and Hermione went up to the lady behind the counter.
“Can you tell me when the shop next door closed – El Hamri I think it was called?”

“El Hamri? No dear, the shop next door has been closed for years.”

“But I was there about a month ago. A foreign gentleman owned it, and he was selling old
curiosities.”

“No I think you are mistaken, my dear. I’ve been here all summer – haven’t missed a single day.
I pass by that old shop every morning when I open up and I’d have noticed if there was something
new there.”

“Oh well thanks for your help,” said Hermione with a frown on her face, and the four walked back
out to the shop next door.

“This is weird,” said Hermione. “It’s almost as if the shop was there only when I passed by,
especially to sell me the amulet. I think there’s something odd going on here. Harry, I think you
should get rid of the amulet in case it has any more nasty surprises.”

“No - I don’t think there’s anything nasty going on here. All the feelings I’ve had from it are
good feelings. Even the feeling of urgency has a good sort of feel to it. No, I’m keeping it. And
anyway, how could I throw away my birthday present from you?” said Harry with a smile on his
face.

“I don’t know about this. We’ll have to do some research when we get back to the school library
– I’ve seen a few books there about magical amulets and there must be something about it I can
find. The old man said that it was pretty rare and dated from the Crusades.”

The four turned around and walked towards Flourish & Blotts to get their fifth year
schoolbooks – except for Ginny, of course, who already had her fourth year books passed down from
Ron. They were just about to enter when they heard, “Well if it isn’t Potty, the two weasels and
the Mudblood – are they letting you rabble back into school this year then?”

They turned to see Draco Malfoy’s sneering face flanked by his two minders, Vincent Crabbe and
Gregory Goyle.

“Push off Malfoy,” said Harry as Ron bristled beside him. “It’s bad enough that we’ve got to put
up with you at school, let alone before it starts.”


Draco sneered at them. “Just keep out of my way Potter. I don’t want to be near you when ‘You
Know Who’ comes to get you this year.” And he and the two heavies sauntered off in the direction of
Florean Fortescue’s.

Ginny and Hermione grabbed hold of the backs of Ron and Harry’s robes as they made to follow.
“Hang on you two, just ignore them,” said Ginny with a curious smirk on her face. “I know exactly
how to teach them a lesson they’ll never forget.”

They looked at Ginny with astonishment - it was so unlike Ginny to act this way. “Well,” said
Ron, “she is a Weasley, and she’s been pretty close to Fred and George this summer. What have you
got up your sleeve, Ginny?”

Ginny just smiled but said nothing.

The next few hours were spent stocking up their supplies for the new school year. The visit to
Flourish & Blotts was particularly long, since the book list for Harry, Ron and Hermione’s OWLS
was quite formidable. And of course Hermione just had to get some extra tomes that weren’t on the
list. The other three ended up having to drag her out of the shop.

They then went into Madam Malkin’s for Ron and Ginny to get new dress robes – they said that
Fred and George had given them the money, but they didn’t know where it had come from. Harry just
grinned at this.

The four friends were pretty tired by the middle of the afternoon, and finished up with another
visit to Florean Fortescue’s and another round of ice cream. They then walked slowly towards the
entrance to The Leaky Cauldron where they were all staying overnight, together with Fred and
George. Mr. Weasley had arranged to pick them up in a ministry car the following morning to take
them to Kings Cross station.

***

Six rather noisy and exuberant teens sat at a table in the bar of The Leaky Cauldron that
evening. They had just finished a huge meal and were chatting among themselves over a round of
butter beer.

Harry dampened the proceedings somewhat. “Have you heard what’s happening with Voldemort?” he
asked.

The other five cringed at the sound of his name, and shook their heads. Harry proceeded to tell
them what he had heard from Sirius. “So we’re going to have to be careful this year. I know that
the teachers are going to be imposing tight security – so we should be all right as long as we
don’t do anything stupid – like sneaking off to Hogsmeade.” Harry directed his gaze at Fred and
George particularly.

They all looked gloomily into their butter beers for a while until Fred put a grin on his face
and said, “Come on. Who’s for a game of wizarding darts then? George and I will take on any two of
you in a game of doubles.”

Wizarding darts was a relatively new game at The Leaky Cauldron. It was played like the Muggle
variety, but the dartboard was enchanted to revolve as the darts were thrown, as were the darts
that tried, not always successfully, to find the place they were aimed at. The game could be quite
hilarious at times. Ron and Ginny volunteered to take them on in the first game, and the four
siblings went over towards the corner of the room where the dartboard hung on the wall.

Harry and Hermione stayed at the table, sipping their butter beers. Harry told Hermione about
the Death Eater attack at the factory and the ‘find-me’ stone - he pulled it from his pocket to
show her. She looked at the stone with some interest, as Harry told her how it worked.

“Uh, Hermione. I haven’t thanked you properly for what you did - you know, back at the beginning
of the summer. I thought I was going crazy, and I think I would have if you hadn’t asked Sirius to
speak to me.” He squeezed her hand in a friendly gesture of gratitude.

Hermione flushed. “It was the least I could have done. You really worried me when I read your
owl.” She smiled at Harry and continued, “Thanks for stopping Ron having a go at me about Viktor
this afternoon – I really didn’t want to get into an argument with him.”

“Yeah – I know. He can be a git on times, but you know Ron! So how did your dinner date with
Viktor go?”

Hermione flushed slightly and looked down at her hands.

“What’s the matter Hermione? Is anything wrong?”

“Oh Harry, I need to tell somebody about this but please promise not to tell Ron – I’ll never
live it down.” Hermione looked imploringly at Harry.

“Of course I won’t tell him. What happened?”

“Well, Viktor picked me up from our hotel and took me to this really nice restaurant. We had a
lovely dinner, and the atmosphere was so romantic. We were there for about three hours, talking
about loads of things – it was nice. When he walked me back to the hotel we stopped outside and
talked for a bit. Then he... he... well he kissed me.” Hermione face went bright red, but
continued, “It was quite cute and charming, I suppose – it was my first kiss. But... but he didn’t
stop there. He kissed me again, but harder this time and I started to get a bit panicky. You see,
Harry, I look on Viktor as a friend – but that’s all, despite what Ron keeps saying. There was
never anything more to it than that. I pushed him away and told him. Well, he got a bit angry and
called me a cheap tease. And then he walked off leaving me standing there. I was mortified, Harry.
I... I’m not a cheap tease am I?”

Hermione had a pleading look on her lovely face and Harry felt a sudden burst of anger and stood
up as he growled, “That... that dirty sod. I’m going to punch his lights out if I see him
again.”

“Please, Harry. Calm down.” Hermione gently caught hold of his arm and pulled him back into his
seat. “Ron and the others will hear!”

“Sorry. But there’s no way that you’re cheap or a tease. You’re one of the nicest people I know.
Just don’t pay any attention to what Krum said. He was probably feeling the blow to his ego because
you didn’t give in to him. He just isn’t worth it, Hermione.”

“Thanks, Harry. I’m glad I spoke to you about it and that you understand. But please, please
don’t tell Ron.”

Harry looked at Hermione and said, “I think you’re underestimating Ron. If he knew what
happened, he’d react the same way as me I’m sure.” He glanced over his shoulder to make sure that
the others were still engrossed in their darts game, and continued, “You... err... you weren’t the
only one to get a first kiss this summer – but for goodness sake don’t tell Ron. I think I know how
he’ll react to that. It would give him at least a month’s worth of teasing.”

Harry then told her about Lara, and how confused he felt about her.

“So – do you really like her?”

“Yes, I do - but she’s a Muggle. I just don’t know what to do about her.”

As he said this, Hermione felt another jolt deep inside her – and again she couldn’t put her
finger on what exactly it was. They looked at each other for a few moments, both silent and
thinking about what the other had said and both feeling a close bond of friendship with each other.
They both jumped at a great shout from the corner of the room, where they saw Fred and George
dancing with delight at their victory. Ron and Ginny sat back down at the table and gulped their
butter beers, while Fred and George continued to play darts.

“I’ve got a surprise for you,” said Harry with a grin on his face. “Come upstairs to my room –
it’s up there.” He reached down and picked up a bag of food that he had filled during their
dinner.

As they entered room 11, they heard a low growl from the foot of the bed, and a large
shaggy-haired head with a shiny black nose peeked over the blanket.

“Snuffles!” shouted Ron and Hermione as they ran over and affectionately ruffled his fur.

“Oh I didn’t know you had a dog, Harry,” said Ginny as she walked over to pat Snuffles. Ginny
didn’t know about Sirius/Padfoot/Snuffles and still thought, like the vast majority of the
wizarding world, that Sirius Black was an escaped killer on the run.

“Uh, Ginny,” said Harry. “He isn’t my dog, and we’ve got a surprise for you. Now don’t shout out
or anything.” He looked at Snuffles, who transformed back into his human form.

“SIRIUS BLA…” yelled Ginny, as Harry clamped a hand over her mouth. He turned her round to face
him, looking into her lovely brown eyes that had suddenly gone very wide.

“Ginny, Sirius is my godfather. And he didn’t do anything wrong. He was framed by Wormtail –
Peter Pettigrew.” He then told her about what had happened fourteen years ago. He looked over at
Ron and Hermione. “And Cornelius Fudge has secretly, but officially, cleared him of those crimes.
The only people who know are the four of us, Professor Dumbledore, Remus Lupin of course, and a few
other teachers at Hogwarts. Fudge wants to keep quiet about it because otherwise he’d have to admit
that Voldemort is back.”

Ron and Hermione grinned at the news, and Ron shook his hand. Hermione hugged Sirius and said,
“I’m so glad, Sirius. Perhaps Fudge will tell everyone soon – I’m sure ‘You Know Who’ will surface
pretty soon, from what Harry’s told us.”

“Can I take my hand away now Ginny?” said Harry. Ginny nodded, although her eyes were still wide
as she looked at Sirius.

Sirius went over and held his hand out to Ginny. She nervously shook it as Sirius said grinning
at her, “It’s nice to meet you at last, Ginny. Harry’s told me a lot about you.”

“Yeh, me too,” said Ginny. “Look, I’m sorry if I seem a bit quiet, but I need to get used to
this.” Sirius nodded and looked at the other three grinning teenagers.

Harry gave Sirius the bag of food, which he ate hungrily as he chatted to the four.

“So, what’s happened to Buckbeak?” asked Hermione.

“Oh I flew with him to a forbidden forest in the south of France and he soon settled down with a
group of hippogriffs who live there – he seemed happy as Larry when I left. So – you’re all off to
Hogwarts tomorrow then. Look, I’m going to have to leave now. I’ve got a meeting in Hogsmeade with
a special agent from America. I’ll be working with him to try to get a fix on what ‘You Know Who’
is planning. I’ll be back later tonight though, and I’ll see you off in the morning.”

He waved at them before disappearing with a slight ‘pop.’

Harry led the others back down to the bar and joined Fred and George in their discussion of a
range of wizard jokes they were planning.

***

Padfoot was sitting on the pavement outside ‘The Three Broomsticks’ in Hogsmeade. He looked a
miserable sight in the light drizzle that was falling from the grey sky. He shifted, uncomfortably,
as he waited for the American to arrive. But the only people he could see on the cobbled street
were a witch and wizard, who walked past him and went into the pub.

He let out a growl of frustration and kept looking up and down the street for any sign of his
contact. He jumped slightly as he felt a hand on his head.

“Padfoot, I presume?” said a voice that was definitely not that of a man, although it had an
American accent. Padfoot looked up and was startled to see a woman in her early to mid thirties.
She was very attractive, with dark brown hair, cut to just below her neck, twinkling hazel eyes,
and a very pleasant smile on her heart-shaped face. “I’m Ceri Jones. Do you think we can go
somewhere more pleasant?”

Padfoot dumbly nodded his head and set off towards the shrieking shack, closely followed by the
woman. He looked around before transforming and leading her into the sinister-looking house via a
side door.

“Well,” said Sirius, “you’re a bit of a surprise. I expected to see a man.” He beckoned her to a
seat by a table that had food and pumpkin juice on it. Sirius had earlier prepared the shack for
the meeting.

Ceri laughed. “I always seem to get that response from people I’ve never met before. Ceri is a
Welsh name, as you’ve probably gathered. In Wales, Ceri is a name given to both boys and girls. My
ancestors came over to New England - Maine - a long time ago, and most of the Welsh families have
kept up a tradition of naming their kids with Welsh names. Some of us can even speak the language,
and we try to teach it to the kids from an early age. In fact, our community is a sort of little
Patagonia on the North-East coast.”

“Patagonia?”

“Oh you know – the Welsh community in Argentina. Like them, we keep up quite a few of the old
traditions. We hold an Eisteddfod every year, and we’ve even sent a group of singers to the
International Eisteddfod at Llangollen – that’s in North Wales.”

“Eisteddfod?”

Ceri laughed at Sirius’ attempt at the pronunciation. “Yes – an annual competition of
traditional music, dancing, and literature. All in the Welsh language, of course.”

“Amazing,” said Sirius. “Do you still have any relatives left in this country?”

“Oh yes – my family came from a little village in the foothills of the Brecon Beacons Mountains
– that’s in Mid Wales – and I’ve got some distant cousins still living there. They’re Muggles, but
we still keep in touch. The wizarding parts of the family were the ones who emigrated to the
States.”

“That’s interesting, Ceri. Perhaps you’ll find some time to visit them?”

“I certainly hope so.” Ceri looked at Sirius reflectively. “Uh, It’s not a problem that I’m a
woman is it?”

“No... no, of course not. I just didn’t expect...” Sirius trailed off. “Uh, why don’t you get
stuck in to some of this food?”

“Ok – thanks. Well, I was pretty surprised as well when I was told I had to meet a dog! What’s
with that?” said Ceri as she started munching on a chicken sandwich. She appraised the man before
her, ‘Hmm, quite attractive in a rugged sort of way,’ she thought to herself.

“Well, I don’t suppose you’ve heard of Sirius Black in the States, but in this country…” Sirius
told Ceri briefly about what had happened fourteen years ago and the recent events that had cleared
his name. “So, you see, I still have to act as if I’m a wanted criminal – and it’s all down to that
filthy scum, Wormtail!” Sirius’ eyes blazed as he said the name of his former friend.

Ceri winced. “Sirius, I... I’m an empath and I can feel people’s emotions, if they’re strong
enough. What I felt from you then nearly blew my head off. You really must try to curb that anger –
it’ll cloud your judgement if you get close to Wormtail, as you surely will given what we’re going
to be doing.”

“Yes, I know that Ceri. But it’s difficult. That bastard not only deprived me of my freedom, but
also of my godson for twelve years. I feel I’ve let down my two best friends, his parents. I wasn’t
there to look after him after they were killed, and at a time when he needed me most.”

Ceri winced again and looked at him with sympathy in her eyes. She felt herself warming to this
strange man, and she couldn’t help but compare his past with her own. She had also been deprived of
the ones she loved most. A tear rolled down the side of her face as she thought of her own private
agony.

“Ceri, what’s the matter? Did I say something to upset you?”

Ceri looked at Sirius. “What you’ve gone through just reminds me of my own pain.”

“Want to talk about it?” said Sirius

She looked at Sirius and before she knew what she was doing, she started to tell him...

“I married Siôn – that’s Welsh for John by the way – when I was only seventeen. We soon had a
lovely baby daughter – we called her Siân – that’s Jane. Well we were sitting having lunch at a
restaurant in Portland when about six Death Eaters ran in - ‘You Know Who’ had some pretty active
cells in the States back then, fourteen years ago. They were just intent on killing as many Muggles
as they could – they were shouting out slogans like ‘long live purebloods.’ A few of us witches and
wizards who were there tried to fight back and they *did* run off as soon as they saw they had
opposition. But... but not before my husband and daughter were killed.” More tears ran down Ceri’s
face, and Sirius put a hand on her shoulder to comfort her. Even after all those years, the memory
was obviously still very painful.

“Well, I guess I lost it for a while after that. I don’t even remember what I did for about two
years. Then one of my friends suggested that I fight back. She said there were quite a few female
Aurors around, especially since ‘You Know Who’ was gone and it wasn’t so dangerous any more. So I
took her advice and joined the U.S. Congress of Magic and started my Auror training. I did
reasonably well and I was put in charge of my own team. Then about five years ago we got a lead on
the group of Death Eaters that we suspected of carrying out the attack at the restaurant. My team
was sent to investigate. When we got to the house, which was in a remote part of Vermont, I set up
the team to stake it out. That’s when it all went pear-shaped. I recognised one of the men - I’ll
never forget the face of the man who sent the curse that killed my little girl. That’s why I warned
you earlier, Sirius, of anger clouding your judgment. It certainly clouded mine back then. I threw
the rulebook out of the window and went charging into that house, my wand blazing. My team were
thrown into confusion and they ran in after me. In the fight that followed, one of my team was
killed. We captured all the Death Eaters, but the damage had been done. If it weren’t for me, Jerry
would still be alive.”

Ceri had to pause for a moment before she continued. “The Death Eaters were convicted and
sentenced to life in Demenota – that’s your equivalent of Azkaban - all except for the one who
killed my daughter. It turned out that he’d also killed my husband and the other person to die that
day, a Muggle. He got the Dementor’s kiss. I was suspended from duty and had to face an internal
enquiry. I don’t know why, but I wasn’t fired – I guess they had some sympathy for my position. But
I was barred from ever again leading my own team. Ever since, I’ve been given special assignments
to do on my own. This is the first job I’ve had with another agent for five years. Does that make
you nervous, Sirius?”

“No it doesn’t, Ceri. It seems that I’m the one with things to learn – not you. You know, we’ve
both got pretty strong reasons to hate the Dark Side – we’ve both lost loved ones and we’ve both
got deep regrets. I think, maybe, we’ll make a pretty strong team.”

Ceri smiled. “So what’s on the agenda, and when do I get to meet Albus Dumbledore? I’m looking
forward to meeting the greatest wizard in the world.”

“Oh you’ll meet him soon enough. But first we’ve got a bit of spying to do. I’ve had a tip-off
from one of our spies that there’s going to be a meeting of ‘You Know Who’ and his inner circle
tomorrow night - he’s given me the time and location. I’ve got an early meeting at Hogwarts
tomorrow morning, then we can meet here and talk through the details of the mission. We’ll no doubt
have to report to Dumbledore after that, so you’ll meet him then. He’s not far away from where we
are at the moment, you know – over at Hogwarts just outside Hogsmeade. My godson will be going
there for his fifth year tomorrow.”

“You know it’s strange that the three most famous wizards in the world are Brits. ‘You Know Who’
of course, Dumbledore and Harry Potter. I wouldn’t like to meet the first one, but I’d love to meet
the other two. Isn’t Harry at Hogwarts at the moment? He must be about the same age as your godson.
Does he know him?”

“Uh, Ceri, I guess I didn’t tell you before, but Harry Potter *is* my godson.”

Ceri’s mouth dropped open for a moment. “Oh, so that means your two friends who were killed were
James and Lily Potter!”

“Yes, that’s right. Harry’s a great kid. I just don’t know how he grew up to be like that. He
had to live with some horrible people for ten years. I suppose there’s a lot of James and Lily in
him. You know, Ceri, he’s faced ‘You Know Who’ several times already – he was even forced to duel
with him just over two months ago – and he’s survived every time, and he’s only just turned 15.
Many kids that age would be walking around with a swollen head and full of his own self-importance
– but not Harry. Do you know that the biggest thing on his mind at the moment is the safety of his
friends?”

“He sounds like a very special person, Sirius. You must be proud of him.”

“I certainly am.” Sirius laughed. “The other problem he’s wrestling with at the moment is
‘girls.’ He told me last night about a Muggle girl he’s met, and he’s pretty confused about the way
he feels about her. I tried to give him some advice, but I can’t help feeling that I’ve only made
things worse. But there, I suppose I’m not too clever myself when it comes to girls.”

Ceri smiled. ‘Men!’ she thought to herself.

“Have you met anyone since you ... well... lost your husband, Ceri?”

“No. And I don’t intend to – at least not in that way. I’ve had more than my share of despair
and heartache and I don’t intend to put myself in a position where I’ll get more of the same!” Her
eyes held a hard edge at that moment, so unlike the way they had looked earlier.

Sirius smiled sadly at her. “I lost a lot of my youth in Azkaban. Being that length of time
close to Dementors makes you pretty gritty, you know. I doubt if I’ll meet anyone – probably no one
would want to get too close to me with the sort of baggage I carry around in my head. Anyway, I
suggest you stay at ‘The Three Broomsticks’ tonight. I’ve got to go back to London and make sure
Harry and his friends leave for Hogwarts on time.”

“Ok, Sirius, that sounds fine to me.” They left the shrieking shack and walked back down to the
pub. It was quite dark by then, so there wasn’t much risk of anyone recognising Sirius.

“See you tomorrow, Ceri,” said Sirius as he Apparated back to London.

***

The morning of 1st September dawned, and Harry was woken up by a cold wet nose being
thrust into his ear. “Ugh, Padfoot, please don’t do that so early in the morning.” Harry looked at
the clock on the wall and said, ” And do you know what time it is?”

Sirius transformed and said, “Sorry Harry, but I waited as long as I could. I’ve got a breakfast
meeting with Dumbledore so I have to go shortly.”

“Oh. Will I see you at Hogwarts soon, Sirius?”

“Yes, I should think so. I’ll be popping in to see Dumbledore at fairly regular intervals.”

“How did your meeting with the American agent go? What was he like?”

Sirius grinned. “Well, first off, he is a she. It seems that Ceri can be either a male or female
name - it’s Welsh. And she’s very nice – you’ll like her. She wants to meet you, you know. It seems
you’re quite famous in America.”

Harry looked askance at Sirius. “What’s that twinkle in your eye, Sirius? Perhaps I’d better
meet her to warn her about you!”

Sirius laughed. “Don’t you dare! But seriously, this is on a purely professional level. She made
it very clear that she’s finished with romance forever. She’s had a hard life, Harry. She lost her
husband and baby daughter to Death Eaters at about the same time you lost your parents. She was
only about 18 at the time.”

Harry’s eyes clouded over. “That’s awful. Losing my parents before I really knew them is bad
enough, but to lose...” he shook his head.

Sirius put his hand on Harry’s shoulder and squeezed. “Before I go, please make sure you look
after yourself – keep an eye out for anything strange going on, and if your scar starts to hurt,
report it to Dumbledore straight away. Do you promise?”

“Yes Sirius, I promise,” said Harry as Padfoot quickly left the room.

Harry did a quick half hour of his exercises and then showered and dressed. He saw that it was
now 8.30 and went to wake up his three friends to go to breakfast. Only Ron needed any sort of
encouragement to get up and it was only the thought of a good breakfast that eventually roused
him.

The ministry car arrived at 10.15 precisely, and they set off for Kings Cross to catch the 11.00
am Hogwarts express. Mr. Weasley chatted happily to Harry and Hermione on the trip, asking them if
there had been any new Muggle inventions in the last few months. They arrived with 15 minutes to
spare, and proceeded up to platform 9 3/4. Ron and Ginny went through the wall first, followed by
Harry and Hermione, and finally by Fred and George. The platform was fairly crowded, with pupils
and parents saying their goodbyes until the Christmas holidays. Fred and George went off to find
their 7th year friends, and the others found an empty compartment towards the front of
the train. They flopped down onto their seats and chatted companionably as the train got into
motion towards Hogsmeade.

***

Earlier that morning, Professor Dumbledore and the others settled down to their meeting.

“I’ve made contact with the American agent,” Sirius reported, “and he’s a her, by the way. She
seems to be a very capable witch though. I’m meeting her later this morning to plan our spying
mission tonight.”

“Be very careful Sirius,” said Dumbledore, “and bring Ceri to see me afterwards. You can both
give me your report on what you see and hear. Now concerning the Anima Summa, I’ve been researching
the school records for any witches with likely birthdays around 31st October 1980, but I
haven’t come up with anything conclusive. I’m afraid that the two girls most friendly with Harry
are not contenders – Ginny Weasley is much too young, and Hermione Granger was born on
19th September – that’s about six weeks too early. Of the other girls in year five, only
two were born within two weeks of the right date. Hannah Abbott from Hufflepuff was born on
23rd October 1980, and Pansy Parkinson was born on 4th November 1980. That
leaves Pansy as the most likely girl.”

Sirius raised his eyebrows and mouthed to Remus Lupin, “What’s she like?”

Remus let out a loud snort, “You’ve got to be kidding. Pansy Parkinson is a Slytherin, and
she’s... well... she’s pretty ugly. Not at all Harry’s type!”

“Well I never!” said professor McGonagall. “If that’s not a typically chauvinist comment then
nothing is! Now if Pansy was a beautiful blue-eyed blond then you’d be all for her, wouldn’t you?
Pansy may not be the prettiest girl in year 5, but she is... eh she is...eh”

“Thanks, Minerva. You’ve just proved my point,” laughed Remus. “You can’t think of a single
thing going for the poor girl. Now Hannah is a nice little girl, but still not Harry’s type. And
anyway, she’s Ernie McMillan’s girlfriend.”

“Now, now, there’s no need to squabble,” said Dumbledore with a devilish twinkle in his eyes.
“All we can do is keep an eye on those two girls and make sure no harm comes to them. Severus, you
keep an eye on Pansy, and I’ll ask Professor Sprout to keep an eye on Hannah. Severus, have there
been any more developments with Voldemort?”

“No, Headmaster – only the meeting that I told Black about.”

“Right, so if there’s nothing more to discuss, you’d better go and meet your American lady,
Sirius - be sure to give her my regards. I’ll see the rest of you in an hour to go over the opening
ceremony tonight.”

Padfoot left the school grounds and trotted into Hogsmeade to the shrieking shack. He
transformed and went in through the side door. Ceri was already there, brewing a pot of coffee.

“Good morning, Sirius. How did your meeting go?” said Ceri as she poured Sirius a steaming mug
of coffee.

“Fine, Ceri. Dumbledore sends his regards and has asked that we both brief him after the spying
mission.”

Ceri smiled. “Great. So how are we going to go about it tonight? Tell me what you know.”

“Well, the meeting will take place at midnight in a clearing at the northern end of the
Forbidden Forest. I know where it is – I spent a fair amount of time in the forest as Padfoot when
I was hiding out.”

“How are we going to get close enough to hear what’s going on? They’re bound to place some quite
powerful wards around the area.”

“Yes, but I should get close enough in my Animagus form – Padfoot’s ears are very keen, you
know, and the wards will only be set for humans – there are loads of animals in the forest, so it
wouldn’t be practical for them to be interrupted by every creature that’ll be scurrying about.
You’ll have to wait for me a little way off so that you won’t be detected.”

“Is that so?” said Ceri as she transformed into a rather handsome she-wolf. After a few moments,
she transformed back to human form to see Sirius gaping at her.

“Why didn’t you tell me?” he asked.

“A woman doesn’t go around giving away all her secrets, Sirius – not until it’s necessary,
anyway.”

“Ok, then. So we’ll both get close to them. By the way, I don’t know if Padfoot will be able to
resist your lupine charms.” Sirius grinned.

“Oh get real, Sirius. If you know what’s good for you, then you’d better try pretty hard to
resist,” she said grinning, but with a steely look in her eye.

Sirius gulped. “Anything you say Ma’am. Anything you say.”

***

The Hogwarts express was an hour into its journey. Harry and Ron were chatting about the coming
Quidditch season, and who would be the new Keeper, now that Oliver Wood had finished school.

Opposite them, Ginny was dozing and Hermione was reading ‘*Transfiguration for 5th
Year Students.’* Ron smirked at Harry and glanced across at Hermione - he just couldn’t resist
it. “Hermione, why are you reading that book? I would think it would get quite boring after reading
it six times. Haven’t you memorised it all yet?”

Hermione gave a snort. “Bog off Ron It would do you good to get some reading under your belt
before the start of school. Don’t you know that our OWLS are this year?”

Their banter was interrupted by the rattle of the refreshments trolley outside the compartment.
Harry got up and bought enough goodies to keep them going for the rest of the journey - Ginny was
woken up when Harry threw a chocolate frog into her lap, and they all settled down to eat.

A little while later, their friendly chatter stopped as the door opened to reveal a smirking
Draco Malfoy flanked by his two goons.

“Oh no,” said Harry. “What do you want, Malfoy? Have you run out of people to annoy?”

“Shut up, Potter. I just want to take a last look at you lot before ‘You Know Who’ comes to get
you. If I were you I’d pull the emergency cord to stop the train, and start walking back to London.
You might be safe there in amongst all the Muggles.” He turned and grinned at his cronies. “And
while you’re at it, take all the weasels with you – they might be able to find jobs. Lord knows
they can do with the money!”

Ron and Ginny jumped to their feet, but were restrained by Harry and Hermione. “Ignore the silly
git and sit back down,” said Harry.

Ginny was having none of it, however. She pulled out her wand and pointed it in the direction of
the intruders. “*VENTULUS INFLATIO*,” she shouted.

Nothing seemed to happen, although Ginny had a smirk on her pretty face. Draco blinked and said,
“What was that Weasel – I think you’d better brush up on your wand work. Nothing …”

He was interrupted when a loud noise came from behind Goyle. It sounded like the air being
slowly let out from a very large balloon. Goyle coloured up, and had an odd look on his face. Then
a similar sound erupted from behind Crabbe. Malfoy looked at both boys with a injured look on his
face. “You dirty …” But he was stopped in full flow by the loudest noise of all coming from his own
backside. For the next minute, the cacophony of rude noises increased both in volume and frequency,
until the three turned, rushed out of the compartment, and ran down the corridor.

A red-faced Malfoy shouted over his shoulder, “I’ll get you for this.” But his words were
drowned out by the awful noise.

By this time, Harry, Ron and Hermione were staring in disbelief, but Ginny was rolling on the
floor laughing her head off, and clutching her sides.

“Ginny, honestly!” gasped Hermione.

Harry looked at Ron. Ron looked at Hermione and Hermione looked at Harry. Then they all
collapsed onto the floor in uncontrollable fits of laughter.

They remained in this way until Fred and George rushed in, also laughing. “Ginny,” said George,
“did you use that farting spell we taught you on Malfoy and his mates?”

Ginny could only nod. She was incapable of speech. They were all sent into further bouts of
laughter at the ensuing conversation between Fred and George.

“This is a great opportunity, George. That spell will last for about an hour!”

“Yes, Fred, you’re right. We know which compartment they’re in. We could charge everyone 5 knuts
each to go and listen to them.”

“Hmmm. Except the Slytherins, of course. Come on, let’s go!”

Fred and George rushed down the corridor to make their killing.

An hour later, Fred and George came back into the carriage. “Not bad,” said George. “We made
over 3 galleons out of that. Here you are Ginny, here’s your share.” He handed 1 galleon to Ginny –
made up of a large number of knuts and sickles.

“This is the best train journey we’ve ever been on,” said Fred. “You’re learning, Ginny. When we
open our shop, you can have a job there any time you want. You know that Malfoy will never be able
to live this down – practically all the kids at school saw it – or should I say heard it. There’s
only one topic of conversation on the train at the moment – you’re famous Ginny! We were planning
to go out with a bang, this year, but it seems that Malfoy’s beaten us to it.”

“Yeah, Malfoy is going to have to keep a pretty low profile for a bit,” said Harry, “but we’re
going to have to keep a close eye on Ginny, too. I don’t think Malfoy is going to take it lying
down.”

Soon, the train started to slow down, and they all put on their robes, ready to get off at
Hogsmeade station. When the train stopped, the pupils streamed out onto the platform talking
amongst themselves excitedly – a lot of them came up to Ginny and started slapping her on the
back.

“Firs’ years over ‘ere. Firs’ years over ‘ere.” Hagrid shouted, and led the new students down
towards the lake, to be taken to the school in a fleet of small boats. The rest of the students
clambered into the many horseless carriages that lined the roadway that run alongside the
platform.

Harry and the others had seen no sign of Malfoy, Crabbe and Goyle on the platform. Harry looked
back at the train and caught a glimpse of them crouching down behind one of the doors. It wasn’t
until most of the students had gone that the red-faced three emerged to run over to a spare
horseless carriage.

Harry, Ron, Hermione and Ginny piled into one of the last free carriages, which soon set off
along the road to Hogwarts.



4. Kidnapped
------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 9 936 2002-12-30T15:05:00Z 2003-07-05T09:38:00Z 21 12049 68683 572 137
84347 9.2720 Chapter 3 Kidnapped

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Note :** Thanks for reviewing the story – it’s appreciated. As I said in the
summary, this is the first of 3 novel-length fics relating to the Anima Summas. I finished writing
the third and last one just before OOTP came out, so I hope you don’t mind that ‘the death’ and
various other events play no part in it. I’ll be posting chapters for the first 2 books at a fair
old rate – one chapter per day if I can manage it (I’m altering the original chapters slightly to
get rid of some minor irritations). From about chapter 8 onwards, I’ll give details of some images
showing the places that Harry and his friends visit and some of the things they see – I’ll post the
links at the appropriate times. I’m currently working on the plot of a new fic – taking in years 6
and 7, post-OOTP. It’ll be H/Hr, of course, and will give vent to some of my firm convictions about
‘the death’ (or non-death I should say) and the possibility that we haven’t seen the last of the
much-loved character that JK so cruelly erased. Anyway – hope you like the rest of this story.

Harry looked out of the horseless carriage as it rounded a bend in the road, and the magnificent
sight of Hogwarts came into view. It gave Harry a warm feeling inside – he was coming home.

The carriage pulled up outside the main entrance and Harry, Hermione, Ron and Ginny tumbled out
and stretched their legs in the warm early evening air. A lot of students were milling around the
entrance, chatting amongst themselves while they waited for the doors to be opened. Harry saw Cho
Chang, who was on her own, looking out towards the lake. She had a sad look on her pretty face, no
doubt thinking back to the times when she was with Cedric.

Harry felt a pang of guilt, and slowly walked over towards her. “Hello, Cho. How are you
feeling?”

Cho turned around and smiled. “Oh hello Harry, I’m doing ok.”

Harry wanted to say more but was interrupted by his nemesis, Professor Snape, who shouted, “Come
on you lot, into the Great Hall quickly - the Headmaster is waiting to start the opening ceremony.
Quickly now!”

Harry went back to join his friends and the students slowly made their way into the Great Hall
and sat down at their house tables. There were a number of gaps at each of the tables, vacated by
last year’s seventh year students, shortly to be filled by the new first years. The top table held
the usual array of professors, flanking the Headmaster. A buzz went up from the students when they
noticed that Remus Lupin was there. He was sitting between Hagrid and Professor Flitwick at the end
of the table.

The door to the side chamber opened, and Professor McGonagall entered leading the very
nervous-looking first year students. Harry looked on with sympathy as he thought back to the time
he had been one of those new students. No one had told them what was going to happen in the sorting
ceremony, and all kinds of horrible things had gone through their heads. McGonagall then placed the
sorting hat onto the stool, which stood at the front of the top table.

The hat opened its ‘mouth’ and sang its song, following which there was thunderous applause.
Professor McGonagall then unfurled the scroll containing the names of all the first years and the
sorting began.

“Andrews, Virginia,” she shouted, and whispered to a scared little girl who sat on the seat and
placed the hat on her head.

Without any sort of delay, the hat shouted, “Hufflepuff.” Virginia staggered over to the
Hufflepuff table whose students applauded warmly.

“Appleby, Simon.” – was quickly sorted into Ravenclaw.

“Bones, Jeffrey.” – was sorted into Hufflepuff, and ran over to join his sister, Susan.

“Bryant, Clare.” – there was a long delay before the hat shouted, “Gryffindor.” There was loud
cheering from all the Gryffindors as the pretty little dark-haired girl took her place. She glanced
nervously at Harry as she sat down.

Bagshot, Butch became the first Slytherin – there was not much doubt that he would, since he
appeared to be a clone of Vincent Crabbe.

And so the sorting continued until all the first year students had taken their allotted seats.
Then Professor Dumbledore stood to give his welcoming speech.

“Hello all students and welcome to a new school year at Hogwarts. First, let me get out of the
way some nasty things. You may or may not know it, but Voldemort is back.” There were loud gasps
from most of the students.

“I’m sorry to have to tell you this, but security around the school has been increased, and I’m
afraid that Hogsmeade visits are suspended until further notice.” There were groans all around the
room.

“The Forbidden Forest is still forbidden, Mr. Filch will still frown on after-hours exploration
of the school corridors, and no-one is allowed outside the school buildings after dark.” He stared
pointedly at the Gryffindor table as he said this – and in particular at Fred, George, Harry, Ron,
Hermione and Ginny.

“Now onto more pleasant matters. We have a new professor this year – Professor Remus Lupin has
kindly agreed to take the Defence Against The Dark Arts class again.” There were boos from the
Slytherins, but cheers from everyone else. Remus grinned.

“I know you are not happy about the Hogsmeade visits, so I’ve arranged a few things to make up
for your disappointment. There will be a Halloween Ball and a Yule Ball as well as the normal
End-of-Year Ball.” There were excited whispers from the girls and groans from the boys.

“House Quidditch matches will start late this year.” Groans all around, as Dumbledore paused, a
twinkle in his eye. “Because I have arranged a special inter-school challenge match with The Salem
Enchantments School.” There was an excited buzz around the room. “As you may know, Salem is the
premier Wizarding School in the United States and are currently school champions of their country,
as indeed they have been for the past five years. But I know we can give them a good game – we
aren’t that bad ourselves, are we?” There were cheers around the room.

“That match will take place on 1st October. Now the school team has already been
selected by Madam Hooch and the rest of the professors, and here it is.” The students leaned
forward excitedly.

“Keeper – David Bletchley from Slytherin

Chasers – Ernie McMillan from Hufflepuff, Terry Boot from Ravenclaw, Katie Bell from
Gryffindor.

Beaters – Fred and George Weasley from Gryffindor.

Seeker – Harry Potter from Gryffindor”

There were a mixture of cheers and boos all around the room. Malfoy, in particular, had an angry
expression on his face.

“The captain will be…” Dumbledore paused for effect, as everyone held their breath. “… Harry
Potter!” There were loud cheers - except from the Slytherins. Harry sat stunned, not believing that
he was the school captain. He felt honoured and nervous all at the same time. All the Gryffindors
had got up from their seats and were patting Harry on the back.

“Harry,” said the headmaster, “you should arrange practice sessions as soon as you can – you
only have a month. Madam Hooch will be team manager, so you will need to get together with her
quickly. Right, Quidditch House Captains. Your votes at the end of last year have been counted, and
here are the names of the captains of each house. Slytherin – Draco Malfoy. Hufflepuff – Ernie
McMillan. Ravenclaw – Cho Chang. And Gryffindor – Harry Potter.” All tables cheered for their
captain this time.

“There will be four new prefects this year. Slytherin – Draco Malfoy. Hufflepuff – Hannah Abbot.
Ravenclaw – Terry Boot. Gryffindor – Hermione Granger. Will you please come up and collect your
prefect badges. Professor McGonagall will brief you on your duties after the feast finishes.”

Harry, Ron and Ginny were the first to congratulate Hermione, who sat stunned and had to be
pushed up towards the top table to get her badge. Her friends looked proudly on as she walked back
to her seat with the badge pinned to the front of her robes.

“And now, students, let’s eat!” Dumbledore waved his wand and masses of steaming food appeared
on the tables. Ron was, of course, the first to tuck in and grab a piece of every dish on the
table.

“Ron!” said Hermione, looking aghast at the huge pile of food on his plate. “How are you going
to get all that into your stomach?”

“Just watch, Hermione,” he said as he started stuffing the food into his mouth.

Just before the feast finished, Harry walked up to the professors’ table and spoke to Madam
Hooch. “Excuse me, Professor. I think we should arrange a team meeting for tomorrow if that’s
ok.”

“Yes Harry, bring the team to my office at 10.00 in the morning, and we can start on our
campaign to win this match.”

“Oh Harry,” said Professor Dumbledore. Harry turned towards him. “I want to have a word with you
– come into the side chamber for a moment if you will.” Harry turned and gestured to Ron that he
was going with the Headmaster.

Professor McGonagall was already in the chamber waiting for Harry and Dumbledore. She smiled at
him and gave her congratulations on the team captaincies.

“Harry, I suppose you must be wondering what our birthday present is going to be?” In the
excitement of the opening ceremony, Harry had forgotten about it until now.

“Yes, Professor, I’ve been wracking my brains, but I can’t think how I’ll be following in my
father’s footsteps.”

“You know, of course, that your Patronus is a silver stag.” Harry nodded. ”And that your father
was an Animagus – a stag, Prongs.” Again Harry nodded. “Well, Professor McGonagall and I thought it
would be a good idea, and it will help in the struggle against Voldemort, if you too, became an
Animagus.”

Harry gasped at this; he knew that it was very unusual for a witch or wizard to become an
Animagus, especially at so young an age. “But... but... how?”

“It is not certain, of course, that you *can* become an Animagus, but we think that since
your father became one quite young, you would probably follow suit. Now Professor McGonagall has
agreed to instruct you in the process, which will take a few weeks probably.”

“We can start next week, Harry,” said McGonagall. “You’ll need a week to settle back in and make
arrangements for the school team. Meet me after classes, one week from today, and I’ll start your
training. It would be best, for now, not to say anything to your friends about this.”

“But... but what if I can’t become an Animagus? Why is it so difficult?”

“Because they never reach the lake,” said McGonagall enigmatically.

“The Lake? What lake?” Asked Harry.

“That will have to wait until next week, Harry. You have to be patient.”

Harry felt weak and elated. He’d had surprise after surprise in the last few hours, and he could
only manage to squeak, “Th ... thanks. Thank you both,” before going back into the hall, which was
now empty apart from his friends and the new prefects.

Harry, Ron and Ginny talked excitedly about the school team while McGonagall was briefing the
new prefects. Ron was particularly excited, and suggested that they go through the book he gave
Harry for his birthday to find some new moves and tactics that he could use.

Hermione finally joined them, her face beaming, and they made their way up to the seventh floor
to Gryffindor tower. Hermione gave the Fat Lady the password ‘Acid pops’, and the portrait swung
forward to reveal the entrance hole. As they entered, Harry was mobbed and marched over to the
middle table in the room, where Fred and George hoisted him onto it.

George turned to the students. “Ladies and gentlemen of Gryffindor. I give you our school
captain, and house captain, Harry Potter!” The room full of students erupted with cheers, and
shouted ‘SPEECH, SPEECH’

Harry’s face was a picture by this time, eyes wide and face pink. “Uhh.... You know I don’t like
making speeches you lot. Fred, George, Katie – school team meeting in Madam Hooch’s office tomorrow
morning at 10 am sharp. We are going to win this game aren’t we?”

“YES,” everyone shouted, and Harry jumped down from the table, went over to his favourite corner
and flopped down next to Ron, Hermione and Ginny.

He was followed by seven first year students - four girls and three boys. They formed a semi
circle around him, staring tiredly and shuffling their feet before Clare Bryant said, “Harry, we’re
all quite tired. Can you show us where we sleep please?”

“It’s normally the prefects who do that, Clare,” said Harry as he glanced over at Hermione.

Hermione grinned. “Not tonight, Harry. I think they want *you* to show them.”

Harry grinned and stood up. “Come on then, let’s go.” Clare reached out and caught Harry’s hand
as he led the group up the stairs.

Ginny grinned after them. “I think Harry’s added 7 more to his fan club – and in particular
Clare. I hope she doesn’t turn out to be another Colin Creevey.”

‘Or another Ginny,’ she thought to herself.

As Harry and the first years, with Clare still clinging onto his hand, reached the top of the
staircase, the other Gryffindors at the bottom let out a chorus of “Aaawwwww.”

Ron and Hermione laughed, and they went up to their own dorms, looking forward to a good night’s
sleep.

***

Padfoot and the she-wolf crept stealthily through the northern end of the Forbidden Forest. It
was almost a half-hour before midnight, and they were close to the meeting place that Snape had
indicated. Up ahead they saw a clearing in the dim light given off by the moon, but it was empty.
They crept as close as they dared, far enough away to avoid detection but close enough to listen to
the proceedings with their ultra-sensitive hearing. They settled down to wait.

Just before midnight, they heard several slight popping noises, and saw six figures dressed in
black cloaks and hoods. They stood silently waiting. A few minutes later two more figures
appeared.

The two figures pulled their hoods back from their faces to reveal Wormtail and Voldemort. Ceri
winced as a low growl came from Padfoot’s throat, and she felt the strong emotion of anger coming
from him. Sirius had seen the ratty features of Wormtail, and instinctively rose and started
towards the clearing, intent on doing him as much damage as possible.

Sirius found however, that his progress was halted. The she wolf had bitten down hard on his
tail with her powerful jaws and was dragging him back to their hiding place. The pain in his tail
brought Padfoot to his senses, and he looked at the wolf gratefully as they again settled down to
listen to what was going on.

By this time, the other six Death Eaters had pulled back the hoods of their cloaks, and Sirius
recognised them as Lucius Malfoy, Walden Macnair, Avery, Nott Snr, Crabbe Snr and Goyle Snr. ‘This
must be the inner circle,’ he thought.

Voldemort began to speak. “The time is drawing near, my faithful servants. We are growing
stronger by the day. The world will soon be shaken by the power of the Dark Side. My plan is to
take over the governments of both this country and the United States. Already, I have my supporters
in the Ministry of Magic of both countries, and we will strike there first. Once these major powers
have fallen, the rest of the world will be easy. My servants in the U.S. are recruiting followers
at an ever-increasing rate, and within a few short months they will be ready. We will need to
carefully plan our campaign of terror so that it strikes in both countries at the same time. I want
our attacks to be far-flung around both countries. They will be diversionary attacks to keep their
defences stretched as much as possible. It will then be far easier to strike at the centres of
power.”

The Death Eaters nodded and muttered their approval at the vision and tactical awareness of
their master. “I will be contacting my inner circle in America to arrange a meeting with us, so
that we can plan the campaign in detail. I will summon you to my headquarters when I am ready, but
in the meantime, I want you all to start identifying the best targets for our attacks in this
country – I want to strike in all four corners of the land at the same time.” He rubbed his hands
with glee. “They won’t know what’s hit them.

“Lucius, I am still feeling the emanations I told you about earlier, but I still can’t get a fix
on them. Tell ‘our friend’ that I want Potter and his gang to be watched closely – I’m sure that
he’s involved with this.” Lucius nodded.

“Now go, all of you.” Everyone in the clearing Apparated away.

Sirius and Ceri transformed to their human forms and looked at each other, stunned. Sirius
cleared his throat. “I had no idea of the scale of his ambition, nor how far down the line his
plans had gone. And what’s this thing about ‘emanations’ and how does it affect Harry? This is
serious stuff, Ceri. We have to get back and report to Dumbledore straight away.”

“You’ll have to go alone, Sirius. Things are far more advanced in the States than I thought.
I’ll have to go back and report without any delay. I’m scared about what’s going to happen back
home, Sirius - both our homes. The sooner our people start working on this the better. Look, I’ll
get back as soon as I can, but it may be a few weeks – it’s going to be hard to convince my people
how far along this thing is.”

Sirius nodded, with some regret showing on his face. “Yes, I understand, Ceri. But...” He
ruefully rubbed his rear end. “Couldn’t you have found a less tender part of me to bite?”

Ceri chuckled. “You should be glad it was only your tail I grabbed hold of. The way you acted,
it should have been your head! Do you know what would have happened to us if you’d shown
yourself?”

“Yes, I know. I’m sorry, Ceri, I won’t let that happen again. And thanks for stopping me.”


She smiled at him. “You’re welcome. Right, I’d better go now. I’ll get back to my room in
Hogsmeade – I’ve got a Portkey there. Goodbye Sirius.” Ceri disappeared with a feint pop.

Sirius transformed back to Padfoot, and started back towards Hogwarts to give his grim report to
Dumbledore.

***

Ginny woke early on the first morning of the new school year at Hogwarts. There were no lessons
today – the students would be given their class schedules for the coming year, and would have time
to prepare for their first lessons the following day. She got out of bed and padded out towards the
bathroom to take her shower. She paused before entering – she had heard some strange sounds coming
from the common room. She crept over to the landing at the top of the stairway and looked down. The
sight that greeted her brought a flush to her face.

Harry was dressed only in a pair of training shorts, and was energetically going through his
circuit training exercises. He was in the middle of a set of push-ups and was grunting, “Thirty
three … thirty four … thirty five….”

Ginny stared at the splendour of Harry’s tanned and well-defined body, and felt weak at the
knees. She quickly rushed into the 5th year dormitory and shook Hermione, who was up
until then sleeping peacefully. “Hermione ... Hermione ... Wake up, you’ve got to see this!”

Hermione groaned and opened her eyes to see Ginny’s flushed face before her. She jumped quickly
out of bed. “What’s wrong, Ginny. What’s happened?”

“Come on – come with me... quick.”

Parvati and Lavender were both awakened by the excited chatter, and followed Ginny and Hermione
out of the dorm, with curious faces.

“Be quiet – come and look at this,” said Ginny.

Four mouths dropped open at the sight of Harry exercising.

“Will you look at that,” breathed Lavender.

“Ohhh, wow,” said Parvati.

Hermione could only stare in admiration, and she again felt that jolt deep within her.

Parvati whispered, “He is so gorgeous! Do you think he’ll be doing this every morning? I’d
better start setting my alarm from now on - I could watch him forever!”

Hermione shook herself and rolled her eyes. “Honestly! This is Harry we’re talking about - he’s
our friend. Come on, back to bed – let him have some privacy.” She ushered the others, quietly
protesting, back to the dorms, but not before taking one more glance over her shoulder.

Harry, unaware that he had been the centre of attraction, finished his exercises just as he
heard the sounds of the Gryffindors waking up and taking their showers. He quickly ran up to his
dorm, and sat cross-legged on his bed breathing deeply as he willed his heart rate to slow
down.

The others had gone down to breakfast by the time Harry had finished his shower, and he quickly
followed, running down to the Great Hall. After all his exercising he was feeling hungry. Still
feeling warm, he was carrying his robes on his arm, and just had on his usual T-shirt and trousers.
He was looking forward to the meeting with Madam Hooch and the school Quidditch team that morning,
and he was deep in thought about training and practice strategy as he entered the hall. The buzz of
conversation that was normal at breakfast suddenly quieted. Harry stopped and looked up, wondering
what had caused the lull. He saw most of the girls in the room looking at him, most with
unrestrained longing in their eyes – Parvati and Lavender had been quick to tell as many people as
they could about the early morning entertainment they had witnessed earlier.

‘Oh no!’ Harry thought. ‘Not here as well. What’s the matter with these girls?’

Harry quickly donned his robes, and walked self-consciously over to the spare seat between Ron
and Ginny. He noticed the odd stares he was getting from the Gryffindor girls at the table, but
when he looked over at Hermione she seemed to be her normal self. She smiled at him. “Morning
Harry. How are you this morning?”

“All right – I think!” he replied, and started piling his plate with eggs, bacon, fried bread
and black pudding.

“Hey, Harry,” said Fred who was sitting next to Ron. “What’re we going to be talking about in
the meeting this morning?”

“Madam Hooch will be running the meeting, but I want to talk about our training and practice
schedule for the next month.”

“Training?” laughed Ron. “How are you going to get Fred and George to do that? Their idea of
training is sitting down and playing an energetic game of Wizard Snap! I wouldn’t like to be in
your shoes for the next month.”

Harry grinned nervously at Fred and George. “You’re not going to give me a hard time are
you?”

“Well I wouldn’t bank on it, Harry. You know us!” said George with a wicked smile on his face.
Harry groaned inwardly.

Ron looked down at Harry’s overflowing plate and said quietly, “Harry, it’s not like you to
stuff yourself full in the mornings. You’ll be getting as fat as your cousin if you’re not
careful.”

Harry laughed. “If you had the diet I had this summer, you’d be putting away three times as much
as this on your first morning back in civilisation. And there’s no way I’ll be like Fatty Dursley -
that’s what Lara calls him.” Even as the last words left his mouth, he kicked himself angrily,
hoping that Ron hadn’t noticed.

Ron, of course, picked up on it straight away. “Lara? Who’s Lara then Harry?”

“Oh she’s just a girl I met - she lives in Privet Drive,” Harry whispered.

“What’s she like? Is she your girlfriend?” shouted Ron, so that everyone close by could hear
him.

‘Oh no - please,’ thought Harry, trying to get out of answering by stuffing his mouth full of
hash brown.

“Come on, Harry. Tell us – is she your girlfriend? Did you kiss her?” There was a lot of
interest in the conversation at the Gryffindor table now.

Harry coloured up. “No she’s not, and no I didn’t kiss her.” At the sound of the ‘K’ word, all
the girls at the table leaned forward to try to hear more.

Hermione let out an indignant gasp, “You fibber, Harry. You told me you’d kissed her!” Hermione
immediately put her hands over her mouth, and with eyes wide and a look of horror on her face
mouthed to Harry, “Oh I’m sorry”

Harry stood up and his chair fell backwards onto the floor with a clatter. His face was burning
as he shouted, “No I didn’t kiss her – she kissed me!” and he stormed out of the Great Hall.

By this time, there was great interest around all four tables, and everyone started whispering,
speculating on whether Harry had a girlfriend and who she was. Hermione, Ron and Ginny looked at
each other, and followed Harry out of the room but there was no sign of him.

At the far table, Draco Malfoy was smirking, and he got up and quickly followed the four
Gryffindors.

“I think he must’ve gone up to the common room. Come on - let’s go,” said Hermione. She was now
feeling terrible that she was the cause of Harry’s embarrassment, and it showed in her face.

“Hermione, it’s not all your fault,” said Ron. “I was the one who was taunting him in the first
place. I should have known he’d react like that.”

“Some friends you are!” said Ginny angrily. “You’d better tell us what you know, Hermione, if
we’re going to try to limit the damage you’ve caused.”

Hermione hesitated before telling her two friends about Lara. She didn’t want to make things
worse for Harry, and she had promised him that she’d keep quiet. But the cat was well and truly out
of the bag now, and Ron knew. So she didn’t think there was any point in keeping the secret any
longer. “Well he met a Muggle living in his street - No. 12, I think – Lara goes to the same school
as Harry’s cousin – Smeltings. He only met her just before coming to Hogwarts and he’s a bit
confused about his feelings for her – I think he likes her a lot.”

“Well, come on let’s go,” said Ginny. “He must be feeling awful, and the sooner we can talk to
him the better.” The three rushed up the marble stairs towards the common room.

As they disappeared down the corridor at the top of the stairs, Draco Malfoy slipped off his
Invisibility Cloak and put it back inside his robes. He grinned, evilly, and muttered, “Well that’s
a turn-up. Potty’s got a girlfriend, and a Muggle at that! Now I’m sure dad’ll be interested in
that piece of news.” He rushed off to the owlery, mentally composing the message to his father.

Harry was sitting in his favourite chair in the common room when his three friends burst in
through the portrait hole. He looked at them angrily and went back to staring at the floor.

They tentatively approached him, and Ginny said, “Harry, are you ok? Look Ron and Hermione are
really sorry about what happened…. Talk to us, Harry!”

Harry looked up, and there was anger and hurt in his eyes. “Ginny, you haven’t done anything,
but do you know how I’m feeling right now? Two of my so-called best friends have just humiliated me
in front of the whole school.”

Ginny looked helplessly at Ron and Hermione.

“I... I’m sorry, Harry. I didn’t mean to needle you like that, but well, I was just surprised
that you didn’t tell me about Lara. If I’d known how you felt about her, I wouldn’t have shot my
mouth off.”

“And I just didn’t expect that two of my friends would do that to me!” Harry retorted, still
feeling hurt and angry. Ron and Hermione looked at their feet, not really knowing what to say.
Hermione, in particular, was feeling terrible and she was close to tears.

“Oh Harry, I’m really sorry. It just slipped out before I realised what I’d said.” A tear rolled
down her cheek - Harry looked at Hermione and saw the agony she was going through - he melted. He
never could be angry with Hermione for very long.

He breathed out loudly, “Don’t cry, Hermione. I know you didn’t mean it. I suppose it was my own
fault that I let slip Lara’s name to this git here.” He looked at Ron and smiled ruefully. “I knew
that you’d never be able to resist having a go.”

The three looked with some relief at Harry. “So are we still friends?” asked Ron.

“Of course we are, you silly git,” said Harry as Hermione rushed over and hugged him. “Hey,
enough. You’ll get my robes all wet,” he said grinning fondly at her.

“Hey I’ve got to go,” said Harry. “The meeting with Madam Hooch is in ten minutes.” He turned
and raced across the common room and dashed out through the portrait hole – it wouldn’t look good
if the team captain was late for the meeting.

***

“Just to give you some idea of the task ahead, I’ve been researching Salem’s match history,”
said Madam Hooch. The seven team-members sat around her desk and listened intently.

“In the last five years, they’ve played 54 games – and lost only one. And that was only because
their Seeker was injured and they had to put out a reserve. I’ll go through their team for you. The
keeper is Dave Ballot, and he’s 6’5” tall. The Chasers are Tom Broadbent, who’s 6’2,” Julie Mount
6’ dead and Garry Kawalski who’s 6’1.”

“The Beaters are David Petrucci who’s 6’4,” just as wide and weighs 225 lbs, and Bill Bludge who
comes in at 6’3 and 217 lbs. The Seeker is Kristen Davis, the smallest member of the team at 5’4”
and as fast as lightening.”

“Bloody hell!” said Fred looking aghast at Madam Hooch.

“Weasley! Language, please.” Madam Hooch glowered at Fred.

“I’ve heard they breed ‘em big in the States, but that’s ridiculous. What do they do – bulldoze
their way through the opposition?” said George.

Harry took in the worried faces around the table. “Look, so they’re big. So what? A good little
un is as good as a good big un any time – especially when they’re on a broomstick.”

“That’s easy for you to say,” said Ernie McMillan. “You’ve got the smallest one up against
you.”

“And she’s also the fastest,” said Harry and paused. “I’m going to have to be at my best to
stand a chance against her. I think we can get over their size with two things. One – we’ve got to
get fit. And I mean really fit. Two – we’ve got to work out some tactics for the Chasers to get
around their superior reach. If we work at it, we can give them a good game. I’m sure of it”

“Thank you, Harry,” said Madam Hooch. “You’re the only positive one here. Now we can do this, I
know we can. You’re the best that Hogwarts has so don’t underestimate yourselves. Now I think that
Harry’s ideas are good. We can have three nights of fitness training, 2 nights of practice, and 1
night of tactics every week. I know that’s a very heavy schedule, but if you feel you can’t keep up
with it, then now’s the time to resign from the team.” Madam Hooch looked around the table, and was
pleased to see a far better attitude from the players - with the exception of Fred and George. She
raised her eyebrows at them, questioningly.

“We’re not afraid of them. But all that training, Madam Hooch - that’s terrible,” said
George.

Harry grinned at his two friends; he knew exactly what to say. “Fred, George. You’ll be the key
to beating the Yanks. You’re going to have to keep their Chasers off balance with some pretty hefty
bludger work. I know you’re good - very good. But for that lot you’ll have to put on a bit more
muscle. There’s only one way to do that – arm and upper body training – and plenty of good food.”
His friends’ expressions picked up a bit when they heard the magic word. “But it’s no good you
eating well unless you train – you’ll just get fat. So, Madam Hooch, do you think they can have
treble portions of fillet steak every evening for the next month?”

A glazed expression had settled on Fred and George, and they were drooling. They both looked
hopefully at Madam Hooch.

“I think I can arrange that, Harry,” she smirked, and then turned towards Fred and George, “but
the minute I see you slack off training, it stops. Is that clear?”

“Yes, yes, anything,” they both said together.

“Ok. Harry - work out a training schedule for each of the team by tomorrow, if you please. I’ll
arrange for a training room down by the Quidditch field. Tactics meetings will be held on Tuesday
nights, and practice on Wednesday and Friday nights. That leaves Monday and Thursday nights and
Saturday mornings for training. Is everyone happy with that? …. Right. And good luck to you
all.”

The seven players left the office, chatting about the heavy schedule. Katie Bell asked Harry
what training they needed to do.

“Apart from Fred and George who’ll have to do a lot of weight training, the rest of us can do
basic circuit training. We’ll all have to do some running as well. We can jog around the Quidditch
field to warm up, and more serious running after the circuit training. It’ll be fun, don’t
worry.”

At the end of the corridor, the team split up and went their separate ways to their common
rooms.

***

Hermione and Ginny sat in the common room that night, reading their school books in readiness
for the following day’s lessons. Hermione, of course, didn’t need to do this – she had read them
three times already. Harry and Ron were playing wizard chess over by the centre table.

Ginny looked up from her book with a thoughtful expression on her face. “Don’t you think Harry’s
become far more mature since last year? – I don’t mean just his body. I’m talking about, well, his
attitude and the way he speaks.”

Hermione looked up and thought for a moment. “Yes. I think you’re right, Ginny. Katie said that
she was surprised at the way Harry conducted himself at the team meeting this morning – she said he
was really cool. And look at when Ron and I upset him at breakfast – he didn’t take long to forgive
us. Last year, he’d have been pouting for a week! Yes, he’s certainly changed.”

“And he’s so sexy as well, don’t you think? I don’t suppose I’ll get a look in now,” said Ginny
sadly.

“Ginny! I thought you’d got over your crush on Harry. You told me that you’d resigned yourself
to just being his friend.”

“Yes I know I did. But that was before I saw him after the summer. I mean, look at him. He’s so
… so … “

“Oh Ginny...”

“I bet there’ll be a queue a mile long of girls wanting to ask him to the Halloween ball.” Ginny
looked sad as she went back to reading her book.

Ron’s knight had just clobbered one of Harry’s pawns when he looked up at Harry. “So what do you
think of Hermione? Didn’t I tell you?” he said.

“Well, yeah. She’s certainly changed,” said Harry

“She’s growing up Harry. And she’s gorgeous. I think I’ll ask her to the ball – if I can get up
enough courage to ask her, that is. Perhaps she won’t want to go with me.”

Harry grinned at Ron. “Well don’t act like last year. Get it over with quickly this time. I bet
there’ll be loads of the guys after her, so the sooner you ask the better. At least that Viktor
Krum won’t be on the scene this year.”

“What about him, Harry. Has Hermi said anything to you? Whenever I ask her, she won’t tell me
anything. Do you think she likes him?”

Harry thought before he answered – he didn’t want to let slip Hermione’s secret. “I don’t think
you need worry about him. I think she sees him as just a friend.”

Hermione was looking at her Potions textbook, but she wasn’t taking anything in. She was
thinking about her life since coming to Hogwarts and how it had changed her. She was so grateful
that she now had the best friends anyone could hope for. She thought back to the time before she
knew she was a witch.

Hermione spent a lot of time lying on her bed at home, back then, feeling very sad. She had no
friends to speak of – only Julie down the road, but she had other friends that she hung out with a
lot. She had no brothers or sisters and she was left on her own a lot of the time. The other
children at school gave her a wide birth after a number of strange things had occurred when she was
around. She hadn’t known then that she was a witch and could make things happen. She remembered the
time when Billy Jones kept annoying her at school. He would creep up behind her and pull her hair.
One day she had had just about enough of it, and shouted at him ‘GO AWAY’. No one really knew how
the boy ended up at the top of the tallest tree in the school grounds. But he didn’t bother her
after that, and neither did anyone else – they were very suspicious of the little bushy-haired girl
after that incident.

The only thing left to her was reading. She was a naturally curious child and loved learning
about all sorts of things. The other kids thought she was a bookworm and a swat, so they didn’t
really like her. They wouldn’t take the trouble to get close to her and find out what she was
really like and she had given up all hope that she would ever have a ‘best friend’ It was only when
she met Harry and Ron that things changed. And even then, she remembered how bossy she was at
first, and had almost not been their friend because of it. It was those two, and Harry in
particular, who took the trouble to get to know her – and they had become best friends because of
that. She had changed for the better since knowing them and now she had Ginny as well, as a best
friend – she could talk to her about things she could never talk about with Ron and Harry.

She looked over at her two friends, laughing over their game of wizard chess. As she looked at
Harry, she again felt that strange jolt deep within her. What was that? Did she like him only as
friend or was it more? What was it? She gave up in the end and tried to concentrate on her
book.

***

Harry ate a more healthy breakfast the following morning and he had made sure that he was with
his friends when he entered the Great Hall. He didn’t want a repeat of the previous morning.

“Will you look at this, Harry!” said Ron with a pained expression. “Double Potions with the
Slytherins - what a way to start our 5th Year.”

Harry looked at the class schedule he was reading. “Ugh! But at least we’ve got Charms and then
DADA in the afternoon. Oh no – we’ve got Trelawney to finish the afternoon off. I wonder if she’s
thought up any new ways to kill me off?”

Ron laughed. “Don’t worry, Harry. At least none of her predictions have worked. You’re still
with us, you know.”

A great fluttering of wings filled the hall as the morning post arrived. There was nothing for
Harry, but the last owl to enter dropped an ominous red parchment in front of Ginny. It was a
HOWLER.

Ginny went red and looked nervous as she fingered the parchment, not wanting to open it in front
of her schoolmates.

“Go on, Ginny. You can’t delay the inevitable. Open it. It’s already starting to smoulder at the
edges,” said Ron.

Ginny slowly opened the parchment and Mrs. Weasley’s angry voice filled the hall …

‘GINNY WEASLEY … I EXPECTED BETTER FROM YOU. WHEN I HEARD OF THAT .. THAT … *SPELL …* YOU
PUT ON THREE OF YOUR FELLOW STUDENTS ON THE HOGWARTS EXPRESS I COULD HAVE DIED WITH SHAME.

I NEVER BROUGHT YOU UP TO ACT IN SUCH A WAY AND IF YOU’RE NOT CAREFUL YOU’LL END UP LIKE YOUR
BROTHERS FRED AND GEORGE.

I DON’T WANT TO HEAR ANYTHING BAD ABOUT YOU FOR THE REST OF THE YEAR.

YOUR MOTHER

Ginny cringed as she put her head on the table, mortified. The howler burst into flames.

The other students however, thought it was hilarious and loudly cheered and started chanting -
GINNY ... GINNY … GINNY. The cheering was led, of course, by Fred and George.

That was the signal for Malfoy, Crabbe and Goyle to cringe, and they left the hall as
inconspicuously as they could. At the top table, most of the professors, including Dumbledore, were
not very successful in hiding their amusement – they’d all heard the details of the incident on the
train.

Harry shook Ginny’s shoulder and whispered, “If I ever get a howler, then that’s the type I’d
prefer. Come on, Ginny, your fan club awaits.”

The four friends got up from the table and made their way to the first class of the year. Harry,
Ron and Hermione went into the Potions classroom, which was in the dungeons, to see the grim face
of Professor Snape looking at them disdainfully. They sat down at the back of the room while the
other students entered and took their customary places.

Snape stood up. “Before we start, I want to alter the seating arrangements. I know that some of
you,” he glared at Harry, Ron and Hermione, “like to hide at the back, and frankly, your last
year’s results show it. So from now on, I want you, Potter to sit with Pansy Parkinson at the front
– right here in front of me. Weasley – go and sit behind Potter with Lavender Brown. And you,
Granger, take the seat along side Weasley with Neville Longbottom. MOVE!”

The three groaned as they went to their seats. ‘Why is he putting me with Pansy?’ thought Harry
as he looked at the smirking face of the Slytherin girl.

“Alright – settle down. This lesson will be concerned with the emphasis of facial features. Now
the Potion you are about to brew shouldn’t tax even your feeble brains – eh Longbottom?” Neville
shook visibly as Snape skewered him with one of his evil grins.

“If you brew the potion correctly, then your most prominent facial feature – whatever that may
be,” Snape glared at Harry, “will be emphasised. The effect will last for only 20 minutes. If you
do *not* brew the potion correctly however, then the results may be unpleasant.

“I want each of you to work on your own today, no helping the person sitting next to you. The
brew should be ready in about 1½ hours, which includes heating, and you will then test it on each
other. The ingredients are up on the board, and if you need help, consult your textbook. Right, get
your cauldrons out and start.”

Hermione looked with trepidation at Neville. He was prone to extreme nervousness in Snape’s
class, and had been known to get his Potions wrong more than once. She kept glancing at him as she
got out her knife and started chopping up the daisy roots, while Neville looked frantically through
his Potions book.

As Neville poured the bubotubor puss into his cauldron, Hermione nudged him and whispered, “No,
Neville. The daisy roots have got to go in first.”

“5 points from Gryffindor,” said Snape with an evil grin. “I said no helping the person sitting
next to you, Granger.” Hermione scowled and resigned herself to whatever fate was in store for her
in just over an hour’s time.

After 1½ hours, everyone’s potion was bubbling away nicely in their cauldrons, but whereas most
were a biley yellow colour, Neville’s was a dark green. Hermione feared the worst.

“Right, everybody. The Potions should now be ready to test. Now who shall go first? … um Potter,
come here and stand facing the class. Let’s see if Pansy has got it right, shall we?”

Harry scowled and went to the front, as Pansy poured a measure of her potion into a glass jar.
She handed it to Harry, who looked at the foul-smelling liquid with horror.

“Drink, Potter,” said Snape, as the Slytherins leant forward eagerly to see what humiliation was
to befall Harry. Harry closed his eyes and held his nose as he gulped down the potion.

“Ugh. That was terrible. Whew!” he exclaimed, as he felt his scar throbbing.

“Oh look,” shouted Malfoy, “he’s grown an aerial!” The Slytherins roared with laughter. Harry’s
scar, arguably his most prominent feature, stood out from his forehead by about 3 inches.

“Excellent, Pansy,” smirked Snape. “5 points to Slytherin. 5 points from Gryffindor for the
histrionics, Potter.” The Gryffindors groaned – Potions was not going to be any different to
previous years, with Snape looking for any excuse to favour his own house at the expense of
Gryffindor.

“Sit down, Potter. Now all of you drink a measure from your partner’s cauldron so that we can
see the results.”

The next half hour was quite hilarious and somewhat embarrassing. Ron’s nose grew by about 4
inches, and Pansy’s nose resembled that of a large pig’s. Neville’s jaw dropped down towards his
chest, ending in a point, and Malfoy’s eyes were like saucers. Hermione, however, was not so
lucky.

“Longbottom! You forgot to peel the Abyssinian shrivelfig didn’t you. 5 points from Gryffindor,”
shouted Snape as he looked at Hermione. She had no features whatsoever! Her face was completely
blank, no eyes, no nose, no mouth, nothing. She was obviously in trouble, since she had nothing to
breath through and Harry shouted frantically at Snape to do something, while Ron tried to calm her
as she thrashed her arms in front of her.

Snape slowly picked up his wand and uttered an incantation as he pointed it at Hermione. She
gasped out loud as her eyes, nose and mouth appeared, drawing in large gulps of air.

“I’m s ...s… sorry, Hermione,” squeaked Neville as the bell went for the end of the class. Ron
and Harry helped Hermione out into the corridor and it wasn’t until they had reached Professor
Flitwick’s class that she was back to her normal self.

As they made their way down to the Great Hall for lunch, Harry spotted Cho Chang leaning on the
front door, looking out towards the lake. “You go in,” he said to Ron and Hermione. “I want to
speak to Cho for a moment.”

As he walked towards her, he realised that the feelings he’d had for Cho the previous year were
not there any longer. She was still one of the prettiest girls in the school, but he was over his
crush. The main feeling he had as he looked at her now was great sadness. He said quietly, “Hello,
Cho. Can I speak to you for a few minutes?”

Cho looked up and smiled. “Ok, Harry. Let’s go outside, shall we?”

Harry rubbed his thumb nervously as he looked at Cho. “I ... I wanted to speak to you about what
happened at the Triwizard Tournament last year,” he began.

“Look, Harry,” Cho interrupted, “I know most of what happened. And you really weren’t to blame,
you know. I suppose that if you were a selfish person, Cedric would still be alive – you wouldn’t
have offered to share the trophy with him. But I know that you were thinking of Cedric when you did
that. I can’t blame you for being brave and noble now can I?”

“Thanks, Cho. It’s true that I blamed myself for a long time for Cedric’s death. And it wasn’t
until my godfather talked some sense into me that I faced up to the truth of it. It was Peter
Pettigrew who killed Cedric, using Vol ... ‘You Know Who’s wand. If I could have stopped him I
would have, you must believe me. But neither of us had any time to react.” Harry paused before
saying a white lie. He wanted to try to ease Cho’s grief. “Cho – there’s something that you
probably don’t know. When I was forced to duel with ‘You Know Who’, the light from our wands
clashed, and the spells that his wand had done were forced out – I think the effect is called Prior
Incantatem. Cedric appeared from his wand as a spirit, and he spoke to me.”

Cho was listening intently now, and it was clear that she knew nothing about this.

“Cedric asked me to take his body back to you and his parents, for safekeeping. I’m glad that I
managed to do that, Cho.”

Cho had tears on her face now, but she was still smiling. “I didn’t know that, Harry. And I’m
glad that you told me. I’ve agonised over what his last thoughts were, and now I know. Thank you.”
They walked back into the school, Harry to the Great Hall and Cho up to the Ravenclaw common
room.

Harry felt as if a great weight had been lifted from his shoulders. The white lie he had told
Cho niggled at him, but he was glad that it had seemed to have eased her mind a bit.

***

That evening after classes saw the first school team session at the Quidditch field. Madam Hooch
and the seven players were inside the training room, going over the training schedule that Harry
had prepared. He demonstrated the circuit training exercises, much to the delight of Katie, and
went through the routines for Fred and George on the Muggle weight machine that Mr. Weasley had
managed to get for them. When everyone was happy with what they had to do, Harry led them on a
fairly gentle four laps of the field.

Harry then supervised the circuit training sets, and was pleased to see everyone throwing them
selves into it with great determination. At the end of the session, they did a more strenuous ten
laps of the field, followed by 2 more at a gentle jog to wind down. They were all fairly tired at
the end, and after showering, limped into the Great Hall for dinner.

Fred and George were the envy of their fellow Gryffindors as they each greedily tucked into
three enormous fillet steaks, muttering, “It was worth it, it really was.”

“How did it go, Harry?” asked Ron as he watched his brothers make pigs of themselves.

“Oh fine, Ron. If we keep this up I think we’ll be ok.”

“I must say that was a stroke of genius to get Fred and George to train. I thought you’d never
be able to manage it.”

“Well, Harry can be smart when he wants to be, Ron,” said Hermione. “It’s nice to see him using
his brains for once.”

“For once? Hermione! – I resent that,” laughed Harry.

***

They had been back at Hogwarts for 1 week, and Harry felt excited that today he would get his
first Animagus lesson. He thought about what it would involve as he went through his early morning
training routine. He didn’t notice a pretty face that held two beautiful hazel-brown eyes looking
wistfully at him from the staircase landing. Parvati and Lavender did though.

They had had the same impulse as Hermione and had decided to come and watch Harry that morning.
Hermione jumped and squealed as they poked her in the back, and the three crept back into their
dorm before Harry could notice them.

“Well Hermione Granger. What have we here?” said Lavender with a twinkle in her eye. “Fancy your
best friend, do you?”

Hermione went a deep pink as she replied, “Of course not, Lav. What do you take me for? Harry’s
my best friend and nothing more.”

“It doesn’t seem like that to me, the way you were ogling him back there,” argued Parvati.
“What’s going on between you two?”

“Nothing ... nothing at all. I ... I was just going to the bathroom, and just happened to notice
Harry working out. I was only there for a second before you came.” She started to regain her
composure. “You must be mad to think I like Harry that way. Come on you two, there’s no way I’d let
anything get in the way of my studying. You know that.”

Parvati and Lavender seemed to accept her explanation, but Hermione wasn’t sure that she
accepted it herself. She’d had that jolt again, and just couldn’t work out what it was. She felt
angry with herself and quite a bit confused.

That evening after classes, Harry rushed to Professor McGonagall’s office and knocked. “Come in,
Harry,” she called.

Harry opened the door and walked in. “How did you know it was me?”

“I knew you wouldn’t be late for this, Harry. You are dead on time. Who else could it have
been?”

Harry sat opposite his house professor as she explained the process of becoming an Animagus.
“This session will be very short, Harry. It will only last 10 minutes at most.”

Harry raised his eyebrows and looked at her questioningly.

“Remember I told you that very few witches and wizards get to become an Animagus. They never get
beyond the first stage of the process. This first stage requires that you dream, Harry. I will
place a special charm on you before you leave my office and you will then dream every night until
the first stage has been completed. Now you will dream for up to1 month only, and if you haven’t
managed to complete the first stage in that time, then I’m afraid you will never be able to become
an Animagus.”

“What will I dream about, Professor?”

“You will dream that you are seeing your surroundings in your Animagus form. For example, you
know that I’m a cat Animagus. When I dreamt, I saw grass and trees and ferns as I ran through a
forest. I knew that I was a fairly small animal, but I couldn’t see myself then. You can only
become an Animagus if you see your Animagus form in your dream. Luckily, I did. It always happens
the same way, to each Animagus, that is. You will seek out clear water. You must reach the lake and
look in its smooth waters to see your reflection. What you see will be your animal form. Very few
witches and wizards reach the lake, Harry, as I told you before.”

“How long do you think it will take?”

“As I said, you must reach the lake within 1 month. Most Animagi reach the lake within 3 weeks.
And don’t worry if you don’t find the lake in the first week – it is very rare that that happens
within even two weeks. So be patient. Now I’ll set the charm.”

McGonagall picked up her wand, pointed it at Harry’s head and uttered, *“SOMNIO
ANIMAGUS”*

A yellow light surrounded Harry’s head for a few moments and then disappeared.

“That’s it, Harry. There’s nothing more to be done until you reach the lake and find what animal
your Animagus form will take. When it happens, come to see me straight away and I’ll instruct you
on the transformation process. And Harry, don’t be too disappointed if you don’t reach the lake.
Very few do, so it’s no disgrace. Goodnight Harry.”

Harry wandered back to Gryffindor tower deep in thought. He couldn’t help but feel that it would
be a disgrace if he failed. After all, his father and Sirius – even Wormtail – had managed it.
Perhaps that was why Professor McGonagall had told him not to tell anyone – to save him the
humiliation of telling them he’d failed. He reached up and held the amulet in his hand, as he
usually did at times like this. He was comforted by the warmth and security it gave him, and the
feeling of urgency was still there, but Harry thought that the urgent feeling was a bit stronger
than the last time he had felt it.

Harry couldn’t wait to go to bed that night. But he couldn’t go to sleep. He was far too excited
by what he would see in his dream. He lay awake in his four-poster for ages, listening to Neville
snoring his head off, and he thought about ways to make himself sleep. He quickly gave up on the
idea of counting sheep. He didn’t want to tempt providence – he certainly didn’t want to be a sheep
Animagus!

Just when he thought he’d never sleep that night, he drifted off. And dreamed.

He felt free – the most wonderful feeling of freedom. He opened his eyes and saw trees – tops of
trees. He looked up and saw the stars and a bright moon. He was moving very fast, faster than when
he was riding his Firebolt and it felt so much better. He looked ahead but saw just the feint
outlines of trees in the moonlight. He looked down again and saw the trees rushing by underneath
him. He then saw a clearing, and looked for water – there was none.

“Harry! Harry! Wake up you lazy git.” Harry slowly opened his eyes and saw Ron shaking him.
“Blimey, I thought you’d be there all morning. Come on, it’s time for breakfast. Hurry up.”

Harry groaned. He hadn’t reached the lake. But there was one thing he did know now. He was a
bird! No wait, I might be a hippogriff or a dragonfly, or a fly – how fast can a fly fly anyway? I
might even be a dragon. He gave up. All he did know was that he could fly. And the feeling he’d had
– it was wonderful. He couldn’t wait to go to sleep again that night.

***

School had finished for the weekend, and Lara and her three friends were taking the shortcut
from the school to the coffee shop. They went through the same routine every day after school. Lara
liked to spend some time with her friends before she went home to Privet Drive and the others
returned to school for dinner. They liked to sit and chat while drinking coke in the little café in
the high street that was just a few minutes away from Smeltings.

“Have you heard from Harry yet, Lara?” Beth asked her friend, as they walked along a narrow
alley.

Lara sighed, “No, not yet, Beth. But it’s only been a week and he must be pretty busy at
school.”

“Look, I don’t mean to be nasty or anything,” said Josie, “but you’ve only known him for a day,
and you know what some boys can be like.”

“Harry’s not just any boy, Josie. He’s the nicest boy I’ve met, and he’s so modest. I mean he’s
gorgeous and he doesn’t even know it.”

Just then, the girls heard slight popping noises coming from behind them. They turned to see
four men wearing long black cloaks with hoods pulled over their faces. Each of the men was pointing
a weird looking stick at them. Carol opened her mouth to scream, but nothing came out. Strange
lights came from the end of each stick and all four girls went rigid. They couldn’t move or speak.
They looked in horror as the men approached them, each one catching hold of one of the girls’
arms.

Lara felt a strange sort of lurch, and the alleyway disappeared and everything went black. She
was still conscious, though, and felt rough hands lowering her to the floor. After a few moments, a
light appeared about 20 yards away, and she looked at her surroundings. She seemed to be in a cave
– a large cave – and she saw her three friends lying on the ground beside her. The four men were
now gathered around the light, which appeared to be a bluish fire, although nothing seemed to be
burning.

The men then turned and walked towards them. They uttered some strange-sounding words and the
feeling returned to Lara’s limbs. She could now move, and she found that she could speak as she
whimpered, “Wh... who are you? Why have you done this to us?”

Carol and Beth began to cry and Josie looked on in terror. “Be quiet, or we’ll immobilise you
again,” said one of the men.

The men again uttered some strange sounding words, and astonishingly, rope whipped out from the
end of the sticks and curled tightly around the girls. It wasn’t as bad as before – they still had
feeling in their arms and legs and they could speak.

“What are you going to do to us?” asked Lara, as she stared with frightened eyes at the biggest
of the four men.

“If Potter behaves himself, nothing will happen to you,” he said. “You’ll just be our guests for
a little while. Now keep quiet and don’t give us any trouble.” The men then went back over and sat
down beside the strange flames, talking quietly amongst themselves.

“Lara, what is this? I don’t understand. How did we get here, and what are those weird sticks
they are carrying? I’m frightened!” whispered Carol.

“I don’t know, Carol,” Lara whispered back, “but it sounds as if Harry’s involved somehow – but
I’ve got no idea what it’s about. The only thing we can do for now is make sure we don’t make them
angry.”

***

Harry sat with his friends in the Great Hall eating breakfast. He was looking forward to the
training session later on that morning. He looked up when he heard the familiar sound of the owl
post arriving.

An unfamiliar hawk flew right above Harry and dropped a black-coloured parchment onto his plate
of half-finished scrambled eggs. He glanced at Ron, enquiringly, as he picked it off his plate and
opened it. His eyes went wide as he read …

*Potter,*

*We have your Muggle girlfriend and her three friends. If you want them to see the light of
day again then you will do well to follow these instructions.*

*Go into Hogsmeade, and walk through the High Street and past the edge of the village. In a
little while you will see a style, leading onto open ground at the foot of a mountain. Go on a
little while and you will come to a pile of boulders by a rough track. Wait there for further
instructions.*

*Do not tell anyone. If we see any teachers nearby, we will kill the girls.*

*Come alone this morning.*

It was unsigned. Ron, Hermione and Ginny looked questioningly at Harry, who was just staring at
the letter. He then handed it to Hermione, who read it quietly to the other two.

“They’ve got Lara. If they harm her …” Harry whispered.

“Harry, we’ve got to tell Dumbledore - he’ll know what to do,” said Hermione.

“No – you read the letter. If they see any teachers, they’ll kill them. No – I’ve got to go
there on my own.”

“No, Harry, you can’t. You’ll be killed!” moaned Ginny.

“Let’s go outside to talk about this,” said Ron. “We can decide what to do then.”

The four walked outside and sat on a bench beside the lake. “Do you think it’s ‘You Know Who’?”
asked Ron.

“Who else – or at least some of his minions,” answered Ginny.

“Let me see the letter again,” said Hermione as she grabbed it from Harry. “What do you think
they mean by ‘never see the light of day again’? Does this mean they’ve got them holed up somewhere
dark?”

“Yes! Of course!” replied Harry. “I thought I recognised those directions. I bet they’ve got
them in that cave – you know, the one where we met Sirius last year. We went up a rough mountain
track to get to it.”

“You’re right, Harry,” said Hermione. “We’ve got to tell Dumbledore – he’ll be able to rescue
them.”

“I can’t risk it. If they see any of the professors, they’ll kill the girls. I’ve got to do this
on my own. Look, I remember Sirius telling me when we were in the cave, that there was another
entrance to it as well as the fissure in the rock at the front. He said that there was a narrow
passageway at the top, an old rainwater gully I think he said – and it led right down into the back
of the cave. If I can get to the top of the mountain without being seen, then I can take them by
surprise, or I may be able to lead the girls out that way.”

“You’re not going on your own, Harry,” said a determined Ginny. “We’re coming with you. We can
take our broomsticks and fly around behind them to the top of the mountain, and go down that gully
together. The four of us will stand a better chance at getting them out.”

Ginny looked at Hermione and her brother and they nodded their agreement. Harry looked at them
gratefully.

“But you’ve got to do one thing, Harry,” said Hermione. “If this goes wrong we’ve got to be able
to get help somehow. Leave a note on your bed before we go, just to tell them what we’re doing –
you don’t have to say where we’ve gone. But tell them that you’ll use the ‘find me stone’ if we
need any help.”

Harry thought for a moment. “That sounds ok, Hermione. I’ll go up to the dorm and write the
note, you three go to the Quidditch field and get three broomsticks. I’ll bring my Firebolt with
me.”

Four broomsticks were steered low to the ground around the back of the mountain that overlooked
Hogsmeade. Harry flew very close to Hermione, giving words of encouragement as she clung
desperately to her broom - she never had been comfortable in the air. They flew up to the summit
and hovered for a moment. Harry was watching the ground intently, looking for the second entrance
to the cave. He knew that it must be towards the front of the mountain, and probably in amongst a
pile of rocks. He saw a likely looking place and pointed to the others to follow him down to the
ground.

“Spread out and search for the entrance to the gully,” he whispered, ”and keep as quiet as
possible.” The four fanned out and started looking.

***

Dumbledore was sitting in his office talking to McGonagall and Sirius. They were waiting for
Remus Lupin, who was late, to start their weekly progress meeting on the activities of the Dark
Side. Snape had been called away at the last minute to sort out some trouble in the Slytherin
common room, and would also be late.

“Have you given any more thought to the emanations that ‘You Know Who’ was talking about?”
Sirius asked Dumbledore.

“Yes, I have. I’ve picked up on the emanations as well but I can’t make any sense of them. They
are definitely coming from the Light Side, though, and I’ve never experienced anything like it
before. I get the distinct feeling that it is some sort of message or summons, and that it is meant
for someone or something in particular. It is probable that only he, she or it is able to ‘read’
it.”

“Do you think it’s for the Anima Summa? For Harry?” asked McGonagall.

“Very likely, Minerva. And if it is, then Harry may not yet be strong enough, magically, to
detect it. But he’s getting stronger by the day, and I think he should be able to sense something
before too long.”

Just then, Remus Lupin burst in. “Headmaster, I’ve been checking my marauders map, and there’s
no sign of Harry, Ron, Hermione or Ginny anywhere at Hogwarts. Harry should be at Quidditch
training, but Madam Hooch says he hasn’t turned up.”

“Oh no,” said McGonagall, “what are they up to now! Do you know anything about this Sirius?”

“No Minerva, I don’t,” Sirius thought for a moment. “Look, Harry’s not stupid. Haven’t you
noticed how more sensible he is this year? He wouldn’t just go off without saying anything to us,
and he certainly wouldn’t miss Quidditch training … unless he’s in some sort of trouble!”

“Minerva, check Gryffindor common room for any clues immediately please. And see if his
broomstick is missing,” ordered Dumbledore. She rushed out of the room immediately, with a look of
concern on her face.

“When did you last check the map, Remus?”

“Before a few minutes ago, I checked about 9.30 – that’s just over an hour ago, Headmaster”

“Have you noticed anything odd with his behaviour, or that of his friends lately?” said
Dumbledore. Both Sirius and Remus shook their heads. “Well they can’t have gone very far in an
hour, even if they are on brooms.”

A breathless McGonagall rushed back into the room then, holding a note in her hand. “Harry left
a note on his bed,” she gasped. “ Harry’s Muggle friend and three other girls have been taken
captive and are being held somewhere near Hogsmeade. He doesn’t say where, but the four of them
have gone off to try to rescue them. Harry says that if any professors are spotted by the captors,
the girls will be killed. He says he has the ‘find me stone’ Sirius. Do you know anything about
that?”

“Yes, I do,” said Sirius as a spark lit up his eyes. “I gave that to Harry for his birthday. If
he uses it, his exact location can be pinpointed and we can Apparate there.”

“Come on, quick,” said Dumbledore. “We need to get to Hogsmeade straight away. We can’t Apparate
from the school grounds, as you know.”

The three professors, and one big black dog strode purposefully out of the office and down
towards the Entrance Hall. Dumbledore quickly explained the situation to the passing Professor
Flitwick, and he joined them as they rushed towards Hogsmeade.

***

Ron ran over towards Harry at the top of the mountain. “I think I’ve found it, Harry. It’s over
there.” He pointed to a clump of rocks about 40 yards away. Harry waved to the two girls and they
went over to look at what Ron had found. At the bottom of a pile of rocks was a large boulder,
behind which could just be seen a narrow fissure, covered with cobwebs.

“Do you think that’s it? It doesn’t look big enough,” said Ginny doubtfully.

“Hang on a minute,” said Harry, “I’ll squeeze through and check.”

With some difficulty, Harry managed to get into the fissure in the boulder. He pulled out his
wand and whispered *“LUMOS.”* A light appeared at the tip of the wand, and he saw that he was
in a slightly larger space beyond the fissure. He could just see a narrow gully running down into
the depths of the mountain. Harry turned and pushed his head back out of the fissure. “Yes. This is
it, I’m sure. Come on – follow me, but be very quiet.”

“Eh, Harry. Can you make sure there are no big fat hairies by the entrance?” whined Ron, eyeing
the cobwebs fearfully. His friends knew that he hated spiders.

“There aren’t any here Ron, come on,” said Harry.

The gully was damp and slippery, and very narrow in parts and they had difficulty in keeping
their footholds on some of the more steeply sloping places.

“Bugger!” winced Ron as he hit his head on a piece of rock protruding from the ceiling of the
gully. This was followed by an “Ouch!” from Hermione who scraped her elbow on the narrow side of
the tunnel.

As they went further down, they found that they had to get on all fours to crawl through some
very tight spots. It was hard work and they were getting dirtier by the minute.

They seemed to be climbing down for ages, when they came to a large boulder surrounded by a pile
of mud, dirt and small rocks. There didn’t seem to be any way through.

“Sod it!” exclaimed Harry. “It looks as if there’s been a rock fall fairly recently. Now what do
we do?”

“Calm down, Harry. Lets think for a minute,” said Hermione, as her forehead creased with
concentration. “We can’t levitate the boulder out, it would cause the rocks to slide down and make
too much noise. And for the same reason we can’t blast it away.” She brightened suddenly. “But we
may be able to bore a hole around it.”

“How are we going to do that?” said Ron

“Stand back.” She lifted her wand and muttered, *“COMBURO CAVUM.”* A bright yellow light
shot from the end of her wand and started to consume the rubble that was piled to the side of the
boulder. After a few minutes, they could see that a hole, just large enough for them to crawl
through, had been burnt right through to the other side of the blockage.

“Wait a few minutes for it to cool down,” said Hermione quietly.

They all looked at her with admiration. “Where did you learn that?” asked Ron

“Where do you think, Ron? If you’d bothered to read your 5th year Charms book, you’d
have found it in chapter 63.”

Ron rolled his eyes. “I should have known!”

On impulse, Harry crawled over to Hermione and kissed her on the cheek. “You’re brilliant,
Hermione,” he said gratefully.

Hermione was glad that the gloom hid her burning face from the others.

Harry crawled into the hole and looked through to the other side. He saw that the gully
continued on downwards. “Come on,” he whispered, “it’s clear.”

***

Padfoot led the professors towards the shrieking shack in Hogsmeade, and pushed open the side
door for everyone to enter. Professor Dumbledore quickly explained to Flitwick about Sirius. “So
you see, Filius, Sirius Black is completely innocent and he has been working for me for a while
now.”

The little professor gestured to Padfoot. “And I suppose that he’s Sirius Black?”

“That’s right, Professor,” said Sirius as he transformed. “I brought you here because we’ll be
hidden from any prying eyes, and it’ll be more comfortable to wait for Harry’s call.”

“Thank you, Sirius,” said Dumbledore. “And that’s all we can do now – wait.”

***

They crawled through the gully for another fifteen minutes before it began to level out. Harry
put his arm out to halt the others, and whispered, “I think we’re close to the back of the cave,
see how the ground is getting flatter? Be very quiet from here on.”

They crept carefully forward until they could see a feint blue light from just ahead. Harry
extinguished the light from his wand and put his mouth up close to Ron’s ear. “I’ll go on ahead to
see what we’re up against. You wait here till I come back - tell the others. I’m glad I brought
this.” he pulled his Invisibility Cloak from under his robes and put it over his head.

Harry cautiously inched forward and looked through the opening into the cave. He saw four Death
Eaters sitting around the flame, and over towards the back of the cave, just in front of a large
outcrop of rock he saw the girls, tightly bound with magical rope. He silently walked into the
cave, past the Death Eaters, and out to the front entrance. He looked around outside, but could see
no one else in sight. He went back to the others and pulled the cloak off himself. He gestured for
the other three to come close and he whispered, “There are four of them sitting around a flame in
the middle of the cave. When I give the signal, move out into the cave and stun them. I’ll take the
one on the right. You, Ron, take the one next to him, and you Hermione take the one on the left.
Ginny, you get the one next to Hermione’s target. Are you ready?”

They nodded.

“Now!”

The four rushed from the cave and shouted simultaneously as they raised their wands,
*“STUPEFY.”*

Three of the Death Eaters dropped unconscious to the floor, but Ron had missed his target. The
surprised man recovered quickly and sent off a curse that narrowly missed Ginny, the cave wall next
to her head lighting up with the force of it. Ron proved more accurate with his second try and the
fourth Death Eater crumpled in a heap besides his fellows.

There was silence in the cave. “That was too easy. Something’s not right here,” Harry said as he
looked nervously around the cave.

Lara and the other three girls had gone through a whole spectrum of emotions as they watched the
action unfold. From terror, it changed to surprise and wonderment as they saw that their captors
were being attacked, and then to relief as Lara whispered, “It’s Harry,” to her friends.

“Harry!” she shouted.

Harry and his friends ran over to the struggling girls and quickly released them from their
bindings. Lara groggily got to her feet and limped over to Harry. She flung her arms around his
neck and held him tightly, sobbing quietly.

“It’s ok now, Lara. Everything’s going to be all right,” he whispered into her ear as Ron looked
on, grinning. Hermione and Ginny just looked down at the floor.

Lara stood back and took a big breath. “What’s going on, Harry? Who are those men and what are
those sticks? What were those strange lights coming from them?”

“Ah, Potter! I thought you’d try something funny!” said a voice suddenly from the front of the
cave. Harry looked around and saw five Death Eaters. He couldn’t see their faces because their
hoods were pulled over their heads, but he thought the oily voice was very familiar.

*“CRUCIO”* yelled the voice. The curse narrowly missed Harry, but caught Ginny on the
shoulder. She crumpled to the floor, writhing in agony.

“Quick, behind that rock, and keep low,” yelled Harry. Ron and Hermione ran behind the rocky
outcrop, pulling the four frightened girls with them. Harry caught hold of Ginny’s robes and
dragged her into the shelter of the rock. As they disappeared from sight, the curse was broken, and
Ginny gasped with relief.

“Oh do come on, Potter. You can’t stay hidden for ever, you know,” came the sneering voice of
Lucius Malfoy. “Did you think that I wouldn’t plan a surprise of my own?”

Harry peeped around the rock and saw Malfoy. The other four Death Eaters were reviving the ones
they had stunned earlier.

“I’m getting impatient, Potter. Come out or face the consequences. Maybe you’d like a taste of
our power to convince you?”

Curses were flung in their direction, dissipating against the rock they were hidden behind, and
laughter filled the cave as the nine Death Eaters enjoyed their target practice.

“We’re done for,” said Ron. “How are we going to get out of this one?”

“You three keep them occupied,” replied Harry, “and I’ll signal Sirius.”

Ron, Ginny and Hermione sent stunning spells blindly around the rock, missing the Death Eaters
by a fair margin, not daring to raise their heads to take aim, but it was enough to buy Harry the
time he needed. He pulled the ’find me stone’ from his robes and said into it, *‘EXPISCOR
EGO’.*

No more than five seconds later, Harry was relieved to see Dumbledore, Sirius, McGonagall, Lupin
and Flitwick suddenly appear alongside him with a feint ‘Pop’.

While the others sent stunning spells at the Death Eaters, Dumbledore pointed his wand at the
eight crouching teenagers and whispered an incantation. A blue light shimmered around them, and
spread in a semicircle to cover them all.

Dumbledore then turned back to help his colleagues. He saw that there wasn’t much left to be
done. At the sight of Dumbledore appearing before them, Malfoy and five of the Death Eaters had
immediately Apparated away. Three of them weren’t so quick witted, however, and found them selves
bound tightly by magical rope before they could get off any shots. Dumbledore turned back and
removed the shielding spell he’d put over the youngsters.

“Are you all ok?” asked Sirius as he ran over to them. “Are any of you hurt?”

“No, Sirius, we’re fine,” said Harry, “but Ginny took the brunt of a Cruciatus curse and she’s
still a bit groggy. Other than that and a bit of dirt, we’re all ok.”

Professor McGonagall bent over the reclining form of Ginny and quickly examined her. “Madam
Pomfrey needs to take a look at her. I’ll take her to the hospital wing,” she said, and she took
hold of Ginny’s arm before they both disappeared with a ‘pop’.

This was all a bit too much for the four Muggle girls. Strange lights, dark caves, men in black,
people appearing and disappearing, and to top it all, an old and very strange man stood in front of
them, looking like the Wizard of Oz!

“Harry,” wailed Lara, “please tell me what’s going on?”

“Lara, it’s a long story but I don’t think you’ll believe me if I tell you.” Harry looked
pleadingly at Dumbledore.

“Go ahead, Harry, you can tell them. You realise of course, that I’ll have to use the Obliviate
charm on them before they are taken back?”

“Wh ... what’s Obliviate, Harry? What’s that?” said Lara as she eyed Dumbledore
suspiciously.

“Lara, everything you’ve heard and seen here, from the moment you were captured, will have to be
wiped from your memories. You see, we can’t allow you all to remember anything of this – it’s too
risky.” Harry took a deep breath, and looked towards Hermione and Ron. “These are two of my best
friends - you know, the ones I told you about. That’s Ron and that’s Hermione. Ginny, my other best
friend, was the one taken to hospital just a few minutes ago.”

Lara looked up and regarded the two teenagers. She saw that Ron was tall, with a slightly long
nose, and the reddest hair she’d ever seen. She felt a pang of jealousy as she looked at Hermione.
Her hazel-brown eyes were kind and warm, and she was very beautiful. She could immediately tell
that she was a very nice person, and the way she looked at Harry … She was startled at Harry’s next
words.

“Hermione’s a witch. Ron’s a wizard, and … and I’m a wizard too.” He looked at Dumbledore.
“That’s Professor Dumbledore, my headmaster, and the greatest wizard in the world. The others are
two of the professors at Hogwarts – they’re wizards too. And the big ugly one,” he looked at
Sirius, smiling, “is my godfather. Oh yes, and he’s a wizard as well.”

Lara and her friends were now staring wide-eyed with their mouths open. “Don’t be silly Harry,
everyone knows that there aren’t such things as witches and wizards.”

Harry, Ron and Hermione then sat down with the girls and told them about their magical world,
and the Dark Forces that were trying to take over. The adults meanwhile, went over to interrogate
the Death Eaters.

Lara turned sad eyes on Harry. “You can never leave your world, can you Harry? You can never ...
be with ... someone who doesn’t have any magic, can you?”

Harry then realised the truth of it all. The thing he had wrestled with since meeting Lara, the
thing that had been confusing him. He looked at Lara and placed his hand on her cheek.

“I’m so sorry, Lara. I really do like you a lot, but it can never work out between us. I’m
sorry.” The six others looked at them with a feeling of sadness, and Hermione again felt a jolt
deep within her. She felt sad for Lara. She obviously liked Harry a lot, so much, in fact, that she
was willing to give him up for the sake of his happiness. She looked with respect at the pretty
blond-haired girl.

Dumbledore then came back towards the group. “Are you ready to go back home then? You won’t feel
a thing when I do the memory charm. You’ll wake up in the woods close to your school thinking that
you’d gone for a walk and got lost.”

“Professor Dumbledore,” said Lara, “please, don’t wipe my memory. I promise I won’t say anything
to anybody. I ... I ... was just so very unhappy before, not knowing if I would see Harry again. It
was awful and I don’t want to go back to that. I know now that I can never be with Harry, like I
can with other boys. It will be a lot easier for me knowing, rather than not knowing. Please.”

Harry looked at Dumbledore. “I think it would be best, Professor. And I trust her to keep it
quiet.”

Dumbledore thought for a moment and then slowly nodded. He pointed his wand at Lara’s friends
and muttered, *‘OBLIVIATE.’* The three girls closed their eyes and flopped onto the floor in a
deep sleep.

He then turned to Lara. “Lara, I’m now going put a special spell on you so that the Dark Forces
will not be able to find you. Your memory will be in tact, but you can rest assured that you will
be safe.” He then uttered another incantation, while directing his wand at Lara. She felt nothing
at all.

“Remus, Sirius. Will you take the girls back and make sure that they return to their
school?”

Lara turned to Harry, put her arms around his neck and kissed him tenderly on the lips. She
whispered, “Goodbye, Harry. Let me know how you’re getting on, will you?”

Harry nodded.

She then hugged Ron. “Thank you for rescuing us.” She then hugged Hermione. “Thank you too.
Please look after Harry,” she whispered as she looked at her knowingly. Hermione could only nod and
squeeze the hand that held her as she looked at the girl.

Sirius and Remus then held onto the girls and Apparated to the woods around Smeltings. They said
goodbye to Lara and then hid in a thicket before reviving the three girls. “Where do you think we
are?” said Carol.

“You won’t believe this,” replied Lara. “I had a look around while you were still sleeping, and
we’re only about a hundred yards from the edge of the wood, just above the school. Come on, let’s
go.”

Sirius and Remus watched from the edge of the wood as the four girls walked back towards the
school. Outside the school entrance was a police car and several worried-looking adults. “Mum!”
shouted Lara. A very relieved woman run to her daughter and hugged her tightly, before she starting
asking a load of questions.

The two wizards smiled as Lara looked towards the place where they were hidden. They could see
the wistful smile on her face - but they hadn’t heard her sigh.

***

Ron and Hermione sat at Ginny’s bedside in the hospital wing later that evening. They had just
finished telling her what had happened after she and Professor McGonagall had left.

“Poor Harry,” said Ginny. “It sounds as if he really liked Lara.”

“Yes,” said Ron, “but I guess it’s for the best. When is Madam Pomfrey going to let you
out?”

“I don’t know, Ron. I feel fine now, but she says that there can sometimes be bad after affects
with the Cruciatus curse, especially for people my age. So she says she wants to keep an eye on me.
Oh there’s Harry.”

Harry had just come in to stand by Ginny’s bedside, looking pensive. “How are you feeling,
Ginny?”

“I’m ok, Harry. Why the glum look?”

“I just got a rocket from McGonagall, Dumbledore and Sirius. They’re not very happy with me at
the moment, and you lot aren’t exactly flavour of the month either. They said I should have trusted
them to work out a way to get the girls back, and not dragged you into danger with me. I suppose
they’re right.”

“Well it worked out didn’t it?” said Ron. “I mean - they should be giving us extra points for
what we did.”

“I don’t think so, Ron,” said Hermione. “We should never have gone off like that. It was
exciting though, wasn’t it?” she grinned.

“Come on, out ... out. This girl needs to rest.” Madam Pomfrey had come over to the bed with a
‘no nonsense’ look on her face. The three waved to Ginny as they left the hospital and walked back
to Gryffindor tower.

That night, Harry dreamt again …

It was daylight and the tops of the trees were now in sharp focus. He flew towards them,
revelling in the feel of the wind that streamed around him. He soared high above the trees looking
for a break in the canopy, looking for a glint of reflected light that would signify water. But
there was nothing.



5. Strengths, Weaknesses and Quidditch
--------------------------------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 7 928 2002-12-30T17:12:00Z 2003-07-06T10:46:00Z 21 12220 69659 580 139
85546 9.2720 Chapter 4 Strengths, Weaknesses and Quidditch.

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Note :** To answer a couple of your questions on the review board :

**- Lara -** she’ll pop up once or twice in the rest of this book.

**- Have I got a site?** – afraid not.

Ginny joined her friends for breakfast the following morning. Madam Pomfrey had given her a
clean bill of health after she’d had a good night’s sleep. Harry and Ron were deep in discussion
about the best Quidditch tactics for the inter-school match, which was only about two weeks away
now.

Hermione noticed Ginny looking dreamily at Harry. “Ginny, your eyes are going to pop out of your
head if you’re not careful.”

Ginny gave a start and smiled. “I can’t help it Hermione. I’ve really tried not to think about
him *that* way, but what can I do? If only he weren’t so damn gorgeous!”

Hermione shook her head sadly. “Well I’m off to the library to do my Arithmancy homework. Are
you coming?”

“No. I think I’ll stay here for a while. Maybe I’ll come up a bit later.”

Hermione made her way up the stairs and along the winding corridors to the library and pulled
out her parchment and quill, relishing a few mind-bending hours on her homework. However, she found
it strangely difficult to concentrate. She kept thinking about Ginny’s continued crush on Harry,
and how it would affect her. Did Harry have feelings for Ginny? She knew that Harry wasn’t exactly
insensitive – he had shown that with Lara yesterday. But she couldn’t help feeling that he looked
on Ginny only as a best friend - perhaps even as a sister - rather than a girlfriend. She hoped
Ginny wouldn’t be hurt.

These thoughts prompted her to try to examine her own feelings for Harry. She tried to make
sense of the strange jolts she had been getting sometimes when she looked at him. Were they a sort
of friendly – even brotherly – concern for him? Apart from Viktor Krum, whom she hadn’t thought of
in *that* way anyway, she’d never had a boyfriend. She’d never experienced any romantic
feelings for a boy. Were those jolts something to do with .. with any romantic notions she might
have for Harry?

No, it wasn’t possible. He’s her best friend, and would remain so. She wasn’t going to risk
losing that friendship by some airy-fairy notion that she might have concerning romance.

‘Get a grip, Hermione,’ she thought. ‘Put it out of your head and get on with some work!’

***

The following Wednesday evening saw Harry and the team on the Quidditch field. They had
discussed various tactical moves the previous evening, and were now going to try to put them into
practice.

Under the direction of Madam Hooch, the three Chasers and two Beaters rose into the air. The
Chasers took up a ‘V’ formation, with Katie Bell up in front and the other two about twenty yards
behind on either side of her. Fred and George patrolled on either side of the ‘V’.

They flew up the field, the Chasers passing the Quaffle between them. Katie found it very
difficult since she had to catch the ball coming over her shoulder, and then throw it back behind
her. With her head looking back more than in front, she found it difficult to see where she was
going.

“Ernie, Terry - get wider apart to give her a chance,” shouted Harry.

“Don’t be daft, Harry,” shouted George. “That’ll make the gap between them too wide, we’ll never
be able to give proper protection from the Bludgers, and anyway, the Yanks will find it too easy to
intercept the Quaffle with all that space in between them.”

Harry looked at Madam Hooch. “All right,” she shouted, “come on down. Back to the drawing
board.” She led the team into the training room to work out more realistic manoeuvres.

“Look. We’ve got to try to counteract their size and reach,” said Harry. “The best way to do
that is to use our speed. Why don’t we try the crossover move? One Chaser up ahead and one behind
and to the side of the one with the Quaffle. Say Katie is in possession, Terry is up ahead and
Ernie is wide and behind.”

He drew the formation on the blackboard to illustrate his ideas. Then drawing arrows to show the
direction of movement, he continued, “Ernie puts on a burst of speed and comes up towards Katie,
who streaks off to the right and loops ahead, feinting that she’s taken the Quaffle with her, but
in fact, leaving it behind in the air before she streaked off. Ernie collects it and throws it to
Terry. By this time Katie is alongside Terry, about 20 yards away and slightly ahead of him. Terry
throws it to Katie, and if we do this at speed and with guile, she’ll be clear on goal. What do you
think?”

“That’s looks good, Harry,” beamed Madam Hooch.

“Would you mind going through that again, Harry?” said all three Chasers at the same time. So he
did.

When everyone was happy with the play, they again went outside to practice the move. To start
with, it was a disaster - their timing was all wrong. However, by the end of the session, they had
it right, and were starting to do it at speed.

“Ok, that’s it for tonight,” said Madam Hooch. “I think that it’s been a successful session, and
we can only get better. Off you go.”

***

The following Sunday was 19th September. It was Hermione’s 15th birthday.
She was feeling slightly aggrieved that no one had wished her Happy Birthday yet, as she walked
down to the Great Hall for breakfast. She went into the hall and saw that most of her friends were
already there. She sat down beside Lavender, and started to spoon scrambled eggs onto her
toast.

“Good morning, everyone,” she said.

“Good morning, Hermione,” everyone replied. But still no ‘Happy Birthday’.

‘Oh well,’ she thought, ‘they’ve obviously forgotten – typical!’ and started to eat her
breakfast moodily.

As the day went on, still no one said anything to her. She went up to her dorm and opened the
parcel she had received from her parents – a lovely new set of robes, hazel coloured to match her
eyes. She was thrilled with the present, but was still feeling down that her friends had forgotten
her birthday – she thought that Ginny, at least, would have remembered.

After sulking on her bed for a while, she decided to snap out of the mood, and went down to the
common room. None of her friends were there - except Harry, who was sitting in his favourite chair
reading a Quidditch book.

“Hi Harry,” she said as she sat down beside him. “Where’s everyone?”

“They’ve all decided to go for a walk down by the lake,” said Harry, “but I needed to brush up
on my tactics. You look a bit peaky today. What’s the matter?”

“Oh nothing, Harry. Nothing at all,” she said with rather more force that she intended.

She’d half decided to have a go at Harry about her birthday, but looked towards the window when
she heard an insistent tapping. It was Hedwig, so she went over and opened the window to let in the
owl. Hedwig flew over to Harry and dropped a note into his lap, and then flew off without waiting
for a reply.

“It’s from Hagrid,” said Harry as he read the note. “He says he’s got something to show us. Come
on, let’s go.”

They walked down to Hagrid’s hut and knocked - Hagrid opened the door and let them in. “What is
it, Hagrid. What’ve you got to show us?” asked Hermione, looking around the room.

“Oh, it’s out the back, Hermione. Come on, come and see.”

Hagrid opened the back door, and stood aside for Hermione to go outside. She was stunned when
she saw a long table, overflowing with food, and all her friends sitting around it, beaming at her.
Hagrid walked up behind her and raised his arms – and conducted them all to a chorus of “Happy
Birthday.”

Hermione was laughing, although a small tear escaped from the corner of her eye, as she stood
and watched her friends. Hagrid then led her to the head of the table and sat her down in front of
an empty plate. “Come on, then, Hermione. Tuck in!” said Hagrid.

That was the signal for everyone to start filling their plates with all manner of sandwiches,
pies and pasties, sausage rolls and plenty of other goodies.

“You thought we’d forgotten, didn’t you?” said Ron, who was sitting next to her.

“No I didn’t … ok, yes I did,” she pouted and everyone laughed.

When the feast was finally over, Hermione was surprised when a load of parcels were put in front
of her. She opened them all, thanking each of her friends in turn. She noticed that she hadn’t had
presents from Ron and Harry.

Ron grinned as he handed her a large package. She opened it and saw a large book entitled
*‘2001 Recreational Spells by Gladys Helmont’*. “Oh, Ron, thank you. That’s wonderful – I
haven’t read this one!”

Everyone laughed. Only Hermione could appreciate a present such as that. Then Harry handed her a
smaller parcel, about two inches wide and six inches long. She looked at him as she tore open the
wrapping to reveal a long narrow box. She opened it and saw a gold chain necklace, with a gold
pendant in a Celtic design. At the centre of the pendant was a beautiful hazel-brown sapphire.

Hermione gasped, “Oh it’s beautiful. But it must have cost the earth. I ... I can’t accept this,
Harry.”

“Yes you can! I’ve been wanting to get you something nice for a while, and when I saw it in
Diagon Alley just before school, I had to get it. It’s your birthstone, you know. The wizard at the
jewellery shop said that it has traditional magical properties – it is said to cool the inner heat
of anger. And it’s said to lessen the powers of spells cast by evil ones. It also enhances the
powers of love and peace. It was made for you, Hermione.”

Hermione looked deeply into Harry’s eyes as he spoke. And she felt the biggest jolt yet, deep
within her.

“Thank you, Harry,” she whispered as she kissed him tenderly on the cheek. Everyone clapped and
cheered then, and both Harry and Hermione felt their cheeks burning.

The party went on until it was almost time for the evening meal, and everyone made their way
back up to the school. As they walked, Ron caught hold of Harry’s arm and motioned him over to one
side, apart from the rest of the group.

“Harry, can I ask you something?”

“’Course you can, Ron. What’s the matter?”

“Eh ... you and Hermione. Is there anything going on? I ... I mean, that present and the way she
looked at you and kissed you and everything?”

Harry looked wide-eyed at Ron. “No of course not. She’s our best friend, Ron.”

“Good,” said Ron forcefully. “Harry, I think I like her – you know, like her *that* way –
not just as a friend. I think I *will* ask her to the Halloween ball. What do you think?”

“Look, Ron. You couldn’t ask her last year – and you haven’t done it yet this year. When are you
going to do it?”

“I don’t know yet, Harry. But Krum isn’t on the scene, so I haven’t got to worry about him, have
I?”

“Right. So don’t hang about then, Ron. Ask her before somebody else does.”

“Yes, I will, Harry – just give me a bit of time to build up to it.”

Harry rolled his eyes and whispered, “Oh no, here we go again!”

***

He had been flying over the forest for some time now. The bright sunshine was warm, and he felt
good – he was in his element. But there was still no sign of water.

*He noticed a curiously shaped tree up ahead - it was taller than those surrounding it, and
the dark trunk was bare from the top of the other trees until the very top, when the spread of
leaves formed a sort of arrow, pointing straight ahead. His heart leapt – is this a sign?*

*He sped on until he was directly over the tree, and looked in the direction the arrow seemed
to be pointing. Way up ahead he thought he caught sight of a glint of sunlight shining off
something. ‘Water!” he thought. It must be.*

*He increased his speed and swept towards the spot of shining light, and …*

He woke up. “Damn, damn, damn,” he said. “I was sure the water was right there!” It had been
nearly two weeks, now, since he had started dreaming and he was getting frustrated. ‘Still,’ he
thought. ‘I must be getting close. Maybe next time I’ll get there.’

He looked at the window, and saw the pale light coming through the pane - it was just past dawn.
Harry got out of bed and put on his training shorts, and went down stairs to do his exercises.

***

That evening, Quidditch practice had gone well. The Chasers had perfected the crossover move and
were now looking quite slick. There was a feeling of relief in the team – the game was only one
week away. It looked like they may have a good chance of winning.

Fred and George were hitting the Bludgers harder than ever, and the training had obviously
helped David Bletchley. Harry had never seen him make so many saves during practice. As for
himself, Harry concentrated on speed. He constantly practiced his dives, now managing to pull up
from screaming dives just inches from the ground.

Another week of training and practice and they would be as ready as they ever would be.

That night, Harry still couldn’t find the water in his dream. He again found the ‘arrow tree’
but couldn’t reach the silvery glint before he woke up.

At breakfast the following morning, Harry and Ron talked about the team’s progress until it was
time to go to their first class – Divination with Trelawney.

As they walked to the class, Harry asked Ron, “Well – have you asked her yet?”

“No, not yet. Give me a chance, Harry. There’s still about five weeks to go yet,” he said
nervously. Harry grinned at his friend’s discomfort.

Professor Trelawney was sitting at her table at the front of the room when they entered.
Lavender and Parvati were already there at the front gazing at some strange looking stones on the
table. Harry and Ron took their seats at the back of the class, hoping that they wouldn’t be the
subjects of any death predictions today.

The professor stood and addressed the class, “Today we will begin studying the ancient art of
Prediction using Rune Stones.” She pointed to the stones lying on the table. “The Runes are thought
to have been made by the main god of the Vikings - Odin. This set contains 24 stones, and the
person wishing to see the future casts them on the ground. It is quite complicated to read the
messages in the stones, and you will need to study your ‘*Divination for 5th
Years’* book, chapters 90 to 125 thoroughly before you’ll be able to make any sense of the
patterns - that will be your homework for the next few weeks. Now, I’ll demonstrate how they are
used. Lets see … hmmm … Harry, come down the front of the class please.”

Harry groaned and Ron nudged him in the back. “Go on, Harry, let’s see how you’re going to die
this year.” Harry walked slowly to the front.

“Right, Harry,” said Trelawney. “Pick up the stones and cast them on the floor in front of my
desk. The rest of you come and gather round.”

Harry picked up the stones, bent down and let them fall from his hands onto the floor. The
professor then sat on the floor and started to read the pattern. “I see that you are going on a
long journey, and the way will be difficult and dangerous.”

Lavender and Parvati sucked in their breath and looked at Harry sadly. Harry just looked at the
professor and Ron started giggling.

“Weasley! This is not a laughing matter, you know!” Professor Trelawney speared Ron with one of
her hurt looks. “The Runes never lie. You will do well to pay proper attention.” She sniffed and
looked back down at the stones.

“I see that you will not be alone on this journey … but it is unclear who you are with.” She
suddenly gasped and put her hand over her mouth, “Oh my dear boy. There is danger here, great
danger.” Lavender cried out and made the rest of the students jump.

Trelawney’s eyes then became glazed and had a far-away look in them. She spoke in a low-pitched
voice that didn’t sound at all like her own. “But you must come. I have been waiting for you. I
have been waiting for so long now, and time is getting short.”

The professor jumped slightly and looked about her. “Did I say anything just then? I felt as if
I were asleep.” Parvati told her what had happened, and Trelawney looked at Harry.

“Harry, heed the warning. I … I don’t feel very well. I need to lie down and think a bit more
about this. Class dismissed.” She staggered towards the door to her room.

“But Professor,” shouted Harry. “What does it mean? Where am I supposed to go, and who is
waiting for me?”

She turned round. “That I don’t know. All I know is that you must do what the Runes tell you,
and what the spirit told you – the spirit that used me as a medium to deliver his message.” And she
opened the door and went into her room to lie down.

“What do you think it’s about, Harry?” said Lavender breathlessly. “What are you going to
do?”

“I’ll tell you what he’s going to do,” said Ron. “He’s going to forget about cranky predictions
and concentrate on the real issue – Quidditch.”

Harry grinned at Ron but couldn’t help thinking if what he’d just heard had anything to do with
the feeling of urgency he had from his amulet.

The students went out through the trap door, one by one, and walked through the corridors to
their next class – Transfiguration with Professor McGonagall.

***

Harry lay awake in bed that night, hoping that he would get to the water when he went to sleep.
Sleep was a long time coming, but he eventually drifted off …

Flying over the trees in bright sunlight, he went towards the ‘arrow tree’, which he found quite
easily. He looked in the direction the arrow was pointing and again saw the sunshine reflecting off
something. He sped towards the glint, which he thought was brighter than in any of the previous
dreams.

*He flew over several clearings until at last he saw a lake up ahead. It was a fairly small
lake, but the water looked glassy since there was no wind to ruffle up any waves. He started to
descend towards the lake, clipping the trees that stood all around it. He landed at the waters edge
and walked over to peer into its ice-blue surface.*

*At last, he saw his animal self, and marvelled.*

*At first, he saw a smallish head, with a large, sharp curved beak as the prominent feature.
He smiled as he saw that his eyes were emerald green, and there was a dark brown lightening-bolt
shaped mark on his forehead, which was otherwise covered in golden fur and feathers, as were his
neck. He leaned further out over the water, and saw that his body and wings were dark brown. He
spread his wings.*

*He was a golden eagle - but a lot larger than a normal bird. He saw that his body was about 5
feet in length and he had a wing- span of over 12 feet.*

*He rose up into the air and hovered over the lake, looking down at his reflection, making
sure that he had identified the animal correctly. He had no doubt – he had seen photos of golden
eagles at his Muggle school, and he had even seen one flying in the hills above Hogsmeade.*

*He soared upwards into the clear blue air and relished the feeling of freedom.*

He awoke the following morning feeling elated. He had done it. He heard the snores of the other
boys in the dorm, and looked at his watch to see that it was 7.30 am. He went quickly into the
shower, and then dressed and went down to the common room. His exercises went forgotten this
morning – he was too excited. He went out through the portrait hole and made his way to Professor
McGonagall’s office, hoping that she would be there even at this early hour.

He knocked on the door and was relieved to hear the professor shout, “Come in. It’s open.”

McGonagall took one look at Harry’s beaming face and said, “You’ve found the lake haven’t
you?”

Harry nodded, “Yes, Professor. I’m a golden eagle – and a big one.”

“I bet you’re happy, Harry,” she said, getting up from her chair and walking around the table.
“You always *have* liked flying. Well, now for the next stage in your instruction. Have you
got a clear image of your animal form in your mind?” Harry again nodded.

“Right, what you need to do now is to close your eyes and concentrate on that image. Then see
your human self in your mind’s eye, and slowly visualise yourself changing into your animal form.
As you do this, think the words *‘CONVERTO AQUILA AUREUS’* – that means ‘Transform Golden
Eagle’. When you want to transform back to your human form, you do the reverse. See yourself, in
your mind’s eye, changing from the eagle to human form and say *‘CONVERTO EGO’*. You’ll need
plenty of practice, Harry.”

“Can I try it now, Professor?” asked Harry excitedly. She smiled and nodded.

Harry closed his eyes and saw his eagle form in his mind. Then he saw himself changing into that
form, and he said the words silently to himself. He opened his eyes and looked down at himself -
and was disappointed to see that he hadn’t transformed.

“Harry,” said the professor grinning. “You look rather strange with the head of an eagle and the
body of a human. I think you’d better change back.”

Harry went through the reverse process and said, “What did I do wrong?”

“Nothing, Harry. Like everything new, you need to put in plenty of practice before you can
perfect it. You’ve made a good start – nothing usually happens when most Animagi first try to
transform. You need to concentrate more - you’ll soon master it. But don’t practice where anybody
can see you - remember that this must remain a secret for now. I’ll give you the password to a room
known only to the Headmaster and myself. It’s right next to my office, behind the suit of armour.
To get in, you tap the right arm with your wand and say the password ‘sugar beans’.”

“Thanks, Professor. Can I tell my friends now?”

“Yes, you can – but only Ron, Hermione and Ginny - no-one else. And you may like to wait until
you can transform properly first to save yourself from any embarrassment. Let me know when you’ve
mastered it.”

***

Fred and George walked into the Great Hall late for breakfast, and went over to sit opposite
their brother and sister - they were grinning like Cheshire cats. “Uh oh,” said Ginny to Ron.
“They’ve been up to something. Look at their faces.”

“Hey, you two,” said Ron. “What have you done now?”

“It’s great,” said Fred. “We’ve just been down to the dungeons to try out a new trick we’ve
invented on the Slytherins. We set it over the entrance to their common room, so when they come
through they’ll … well, just wait.”

The two pranksters sat eating their breakfast, glancing all the while at the door to the Great
Hall. The first Slytherins – Mandy Brocklehurst and Pansy Parkinson - came in and went over to
their table. They were soon joined by Malfoy, Crabbe and Goyle. Fred and George were sitting on the
edge of their seats, looking expectantly at them as they spooned food onto their breakfast
plates.

Ron nudged Harry and Hermione. “Look at the Slytherins, something’s going to happen I think –
Fred and George’ve done something.”

The tension at the Gryffindor table could be cut with a knife as the word was passed around.
Every Gryffindor was now staring and waiting for something to happen.

Draco Malfoy noticed the Gryffindors watching them and said – or at least he meant to say ‘What
are you gits staring at!’ What came out of his mouth was ‘Eee aaw … Ee aaw ... Ee aaw.’ He clapped
his hand to his mouth, and stared wildly about him.

The other Slytherins had heard Draco and started to ask him what was up. “Ee aaw … Ee aaw… Ee
aaw .” they asked.

By this time, Fred and George were rolling on the floor in fits of laughter. The other
Gryffindors just looked at the Slytherins in disbelief before they all cracked up, letting out
hoots of laughter. The Slytherins run out of the hall, red-faced, but not before Draco stopped and
looked at Fred and George, shouting. “Ee aaw … Ee aaw ...”

This only served to double the mirth of the Gryffindors. Eventually, Fred and George explained
that they had named their new spell ‘The Donkey Charm’, but it would dissipate from the Slytherin
entrance after about half an hour. The people it affected, however, would be talking like donkeys
for about two hours.

“Great,” said Harry. “That means we’ll have some peace from them at the DADA class.”

Harry, Hermione and Ron went to their first class of the morning. Remus Lupin was looking
angrily at the Slytherins, who were already at their seats. “What’s wrong with you lot?” he said.
“When I ask a question, I expect a reply.”

Harry went over and whispered in Remus’ ear, telling him about the ‘Donkey Charm’. Throughout
the rest of the class, Remus had to call on all his powers of restraint to stop bursting out
laughing at the Slytherins’ predicament. He knew he shouldn’t have done it, of course, but he
couldn’t help singling out Slytherin students to answer the questions he posed.

“From now until the end of the term,” he said, “we are going to concentrate on spell-blocking
and deflecting. With the rise of the Dark Side, you will find this increasingly helpful.”

Hermione’s hand shot up. “Yes, Hermione?”

“Professor Lupin, I thought that unforgivable curses can’t be blocked,” she said.

“Well, your right and wrong, Hermione. Nothing can block the Avada Kedavra, of course – although
there has been one exception,” he said looking at Harry. “But the full power of some of the others
can be dispelled. For instance, you all know that Harry, there, is very adept at resisting the
Imperious curse. He can’t stop the curse, but he can resist it. The key to it all is having a
strong mind and high powers of concentration. With practice, even the worst effects of the
Cruciatus curse can be deflected.”

Again Hermione’s arm shot into the air. “How can you practice that, Professor? I mean, apart
from it being illegal to throw the Cruciatus, how can anyone stand the curse for the number of
times it’ll be needed to practice? We’ll be gibbering idiots before we get near to deflecting
it.”

“Again, you’re both right and wrong. We won’t be using the Cruciatus, but a very close and
surprising relative of the curse – Rictusempra – the tickling charm. I know that they seem
completely opposite in their effect, but think about it! They both work by stimulating the nerve
endings - one to cause extreme pain, and the other to cause extreme itching. So if you can resist
the tickling, you should be able to resist Cruciatus. Now, I need a volunteer – how about you,
Ron?”

“Me!” said Ron, his face going quite pale.

“Yes you. Come on Ron, come out to the front of the class.”

Ron walked towards Remus looking nervous. ”Right, Ron. When I cast the charm, concentrate hard,
and visualise the nerve endings of the part of the body I’ll be aiming at. Visualise that you are
placing a hard cover over them – a cover that can’t be penetrated. Are you ready? – I’ll give you a
minute so that you can put yourself in the right frame of mind.”

“Ready, Professor,” said Ron after a little while, looking determined.

Remus pointed his wand at Ron’s arm and said, “*RICTUSEMPRA.”*

Ron immediately fell to the floor, laughing, and futilely scratching at his arm. *“FINITE
INCANTATEM”* said Remus, and Ron got to his feet, looking shame-faced.

“I was useless, wasn’t I? I can’t see how I’m going to do that,” said Ron.

“Ron, it will take a great deal of practice, and a lot of people can’t manage to deflect it even
then. Most of those who can deflect it do so with only limited success – they still feel the
effects, but not their full power. So don’t feel bad about it. You’ll improve, I’m sure. Lavender,
you next.”

Lavender fared no better than Ron, and went back to her seat.

“Hermione, you come up and try.”

Hermione had a very determined look on her face as she walked to the front of the class.

“Are you ready? *RICTUSEMPRA*,” said Remus as he aimed his wand at her arm.

Hermione concentrated hard on putting up shields to the nerve endings in her arm. After feeling
extreme itching for a moment, the tickling seemed to decrease in intensity. She was able to keep it
up for about 5 seconds before collapsing in fits of laughter, rubbing her arm.

After removing the charm, Remus beamed at her. “That’s absolutely brilliant, Hermione. You
managed to block it for about 5 seconds. For a first try, that is really amazing. Harry, you come
up next.”

Harry concentrated hard as Remus aimed the wand at his arm. He felt only a slight irritation as
the charm hit him. He kept up his concentration for a full minute, feeling hardly anything, before
Remus lowered his wand, looking completely gob-smacked.

“Harry, I have never known anyone to completely resist that charm as you did. And at the first
attempt too? That ... that’s completely unheard of! Let’s try it again.”

Remus again flung the charm at Harry, this time with all the power he could muster. Again Harry
was able to block the charm, feeling just a slight itching in his arm.

“Now, Harry. If you agree, I’ll try the Cruciatus curse to make sure you can deflect it. Do you
want to try?”

“Professor!” shouted Hermione, looking worried. “That’s illegal. You can’t!”

“It’s quite all right, Hermione, I’ve got special dispensation to use certain unforgivables for
the purpose of instruction. No laws will be broken. And Harry, if it doesn’t work, I’ll lift the
curse immediately. What do you say?”

Harry looked nervously at Remus, but nodded. He had felt the curse at the hands of Voldemort,
and didn’t want to feel the agony again. But it was important that he try.

“Ready?” Remus lifted his wand and pointed it at Harry’s arm. “*CRUCIO*,” he yelled.

Harry concentrated harder than ever, putting up shields on the nerve endings in his arm. As the
curse hit him, he felt only the slightest pain, before it dissipated. Remus kept the curse on Harry
for a full minute, but Harry stood unflinching.

“Amazing! Sit back down, Harry,” said Remus after he had lifted the curse.

Remus looked distracted for the rest of the class, not believing what he had seen. Dumbledore
had said that Harry’s powers were increasing day by day, but this was astounding. He’d have to
report to the headmaster as soon as possible.

***

Harry and the team were practicing down at the Quidditch field. It was the day before the big
game and they were putting the finishing touches to their tactics. Madam Hooch was pleased to see
that they were all looking very fit, and that the session was progressing very well indeed.

She called the team to her as she saw a group of people walking towards them from the direction
of the school. The group was being led by Professor Dumbledore, and comprised six large teenagers,
one smaller one and an older looking wizard.

“Ah, Madam Hooch,” said Dumbledore as they approached. “This is Professor Bill Bangley. He’s the
Quidditch instructor at Salem, and these fine young people are the Salem Quidditch team.”

Madam Hooch shook hands with her counterpart, and she introduced the Hogwarts team. Professor
Bangley then introduced his team.

The two teams looked at each other appraisingly. The Americans looked very fit and very big.

“I’ve taken the liberty,” said Dumbledore, “of offering the Quidditch pitch to our guests for a
practice session. Is that all right with you, Madam Hooch?”

“Yes, perfectly,” she said. “We’ve just finished our final session.”

“Right. The facilities are all yours, Professor Bangley,” said Dumbledore. “When you’ve
finished, come up to my office and I’ll show you to your rooms. We can then all go to dinner
together - I’ve set up a separate table in the Great Hall for both teams to share.”

The Salem team attracted a lot of attention from the Hogwarts students at the evening meal. The
special table was arranged so that the Americans were seated along one side of it, with the Brits
facing them. Harry found himself opposite their Seeker, Kristen Davis, a very pretty girl about his
own age. He found himself comparing her with Lara and Hermione. Like Lara, she was a blue-eyed
blond, and like Hermione, she had warm and kind eyes.

Things were inevitably a bit tense between the two teams initially, but with Fred and George at
the table, they didn’t remain so for long. Fred told everyone about the prank they’d pulled on the
Slytherins and soon they were all laughing merrily – except, that is, for David Bletchley who had
the good grace to keep a somewhat forced smile on his face.

This pleased Dumbledore, who was sitting between Madam Hooch and Professor Bangley at the top
table. “It’s nice to see them all getting on well together,” he said to Bangley.

“Yeh, it sure is,” he replied. “I was a bit worried that there would be too much rivalry, and
the thing would fall flat.”

“Professor Dumbledore,” he continued, “my headmaster asked me to have a word with you about the
student exchange programme. We’ve got 5 students coming to Hogwarts in two weeks time. But one of
them is in the Quidditch team – and since she’s here already, we thought it’d be a good idea to let
her start now. What do you think?”

“That’s fine by me,” Dumbledore replied. “Is the student happy to stay if her friends won’t be
coming for another two weeks?”

“Oh yes, she’s happy to start now. She’s a very friendly girl and she’s looking forward to
meeting new people and making new friends.”

“Then that’s settled. Have you got her school file? I’ll need to look at it and arrange for her
to be sorted into a house.” Bangley pulled a file from his robes and handed it to Dumbledore, and
then went over to the girl to tell her that she’d be staying.

Dumbledore opened the file and glanced down at the details, until he came to an entry that made
him stare, unblinking, at it.

Kristen Davies – Date of Birth : 31st October 1980.

It stood out like a beacon. He quickly went over to McGonagall, Lupin and Snape. “Meeting in my
office straight after dinner – urgent news.” He then asked Remus to contact Sirius so that he could
be there.

“So you’re the famous Harry Potter,” said Kristen, looking over at Harry.

“Yes,” sighed Harry.

“Well now that’s out of the way … I’ve just been told I’ll be staying here after the game – you
know, the student exchange program.”

“That’s great, Kristen. I wonder what house you’ll be sorted into?”

“How do they do that here?” she replied. “At Salem, they’ve got a magical broomstick you have to
sit on, and it flies you over to the house table it thinks is best suited.”

Harry told her about the sorting hat and what the houses were at Hogwarts. “I hope you’re not
placed in Slytherin,” he said, “but I can’t see that happening. Your eyes are too warm and kind.”
He coloured up a bit as he said that, as did Kristen.

“I hope I’m in Gryffindor,” she said. “From what you say, it sounds like the house I’m in at
Salem. By the way, who’s the captain of your team?”

“Eh, that’s me,” said Harry. “Who’s yours?”

“Tom Broadbent,” she replied nodding at a tall, slim boy sitting further down the table. “He’s
one of our Chasers.”

After the meal ended, Dumbledore rushed up to his office with the other professors he’d spoken
to earlier. Sirius was already there waiting for them. “What’s wrong, Headmaster?” he said. “Remus
told me that you had something urgent to discuss.”

Dumbledore showed them Kristen’s file. “Look at the date of birth - right on the button for the
Anima Summa. And didn’t you all notice how well the two of them were getting on tonight?”

“What’s she like, Remus?” asked Sirius.

“She’s a blue-eyed blond with a body to kill for,” he said, grinning.

“Remus. Please!” gasped McGonagall. Remus and Sirius just grinned – they loved baiting
Minerva.

“We’ll have the sorting at the evening meal tomorrow after the match,” said the headmaster, “but
first I’ll have a word with the sorting hat – and I’ll suggest that Gryffindor would be a suitable
house for her to be sorted into. Of course, it doesn’t always listen to me, but I think I can get
it to see the sense of it.”

“It would certainly be a help, Albus,” said McGonagall. “The closer Harry is to her, the more
likely that *things* could happen. I will, of course keep a close watch for any signs.”

“Thank you, Minerva. And all of you – keep a close watch on the girl. We want to make sure that
nothing happens to her.”

***

The following morning arrived, and Harry had a knot in his stomach. He was nervous about the
game, and felt the responsibility of being captain weighing on him. Ron, Hermione and Ginny tried
their best to help him by trying to keep him distracted with their light-hearted chatter, but Harry
couldn’t help but feel nervous.

After breakfast they all headed down to the Quidditch field. The others wished him good luck as
he headed to the changing rooms, and they then went to try to get good seats in the stand. Harry
waited for his team to arrive, thinking about what he was going to say to them. He looked up to see
the six enter the room.

“Harry, I hope you haven’t got a fancy speech prepared,” said Fred. “We had enough of those with
Oliver.”

“Yes, and don’t tell us how big they are – we can see that for ourselves,” said George.

Harry grinned. “I can always rely on you two to lift the gloom. Anyway, I won’t say anything –
except concentrate on what we’ve talked about and practiced. We can’t do anything more than that.
And we’re as fit as them – don’t forget it.”

They changed into their playing robes and Harry led them out onto the field to the loud cheers
of the students. All the school was there to watch – even Professor Dumbledore. There were also a
few others that Harry spotted – he saw Cornelius Fudge, the minister of magic, sitting next to the
headmaster, and he also saw Percy Weasley. One person he saw made him scowl – Rita Skeeter. She
worked for the Daily Prophet newspaper and was there, obviously, to report on the game. ‘No
pressure then!’ thought Harry wryly.

They all shook hands with the Salem team and the referee, who was a wizard who normally
officiated at Quidditch First Division games, tossed a sickle to decide ends. “Dragons,” shouted
Harry. However, the coin came down ‘Centaurs’ and Tom Broadbent chose to play towards the Forbidden
Forest end, with Hogwarts playing towards the school.

The spectators roared as the referee blew his whistle, and fourteen players rose quickly into
the air. The referee then released all four balls, and play began.

It was clear, very quickly, that the Salem team were good. They moved about like they knew
exactly what they were doing, and looked like a team who were used to winning. Harry rose above the
players, as he usually did, keeping his eyes peeled for the Golden Snitch to show itself. There was
something different, however. Normally, the opposing Seeker would sit on Harry’s tail and follow
him everywhere. But Kristen Davis was clearly confident in her own abilities to spot the Snitch.
She slowly circled the field, ignoring where Harry went.

A gasp went up from the crowd as the Quaffle was thrown with tremendous pace at the Hogwarts
goal. David Bletchley didn’t even see the ball as it zoomed through the right-hand hoop. “TEN – NIL
SALEM,” shouted Lee Jordan, who was commentating on the match.

“Don’t worry, David,” said Harry as he flew past the Keeper, “that was a fluke. You’ll be
ok.”

The next fifteen minutes, however, showed that it was no fluke. The score was 40 – 0 to Salem
and the Hogwarts Chasers had hardly touched the Quaffle. Harry flew up to Fred and George. “Come
on, you two. Get those Bludgers at their Chasers. They’re murdering us.”

“We would, if we could get at the Bludgers,” shouted George. “Their Beaters seem to be
everywhere.”

“Sit on our Chasers’ tails,” said Harry. “The Bludgers will soon come in your direction.”

This proved to be right, and as a Bludger hurtled towards Ernie, George managed to get in front
of him and smash the ball in the direction of the Salem Chaser in possession of the Quaffle. The
Chaser was clearly not used to this sort of treatment as he ducked his head to make sure it stayed
on his shoulders. In doing so, he dropped the Quaffle and it was gratefully collected by Ernie, who
passed it forward to Katie.

Harry saw that the Hogwarts Chasers were now in the ideal position. “Crossover,” he yelled at
them.

Ernie immediately started to streak towards Katie, who dashed off to the right, taking one of
the Salem Chasers with her. She had left the Quaffle behind her, however, and Ernie grasped it as
he sped past and to the left. The Chaser marking Terry Boot flew over to cover Ernie, and Ernie
passed to Terry, who saw Katie streaking past his right-hand side, with a Salem Chaser desperately
trying to catch her. He passed the Quaffle to Katie and she sped towards goal, unopposed.

The crowd cheered wildly when she sent the Keeper to the right with a feint, and threw the
Quaffle through the left-hand hoop. “Goal,” shouted Lee Jordan. “Well done, Katie. 40 –10 to
Salem”

The move had worked perfectly, and it gave them the confidence they needed. In the lull after
the goal, Fred and George had a quick tactical chat and decided on a ploy to keep the Bludgers away
from the Chasers. The Salem Beaters were just too powerful and were disrupting most of the Hogwarts
moves.

The next time Fred intercepted a Bludger, he sent it screaming off in the direction of David
Petrucci, the big Salem Beater. He ducked frantically to avoid it and glared at Fred. Fred just
laughed at him and shouted, “What’s the matter, Petrucci? Don’t like a taste of your own
medicine?”

Petrucci and his fellow Beater were never ones to resist a challenge, and the next half hour saw
the Bludgers rocketing back and fore between the four Beaters. Harry saw what was going on and
grinned at the way Fred and George were giving the Chasers the space they needed – and it was
paying off. Unrestricted by the Bludgers, the Hogwarts Chasers started to show their superior
speed, and after 2 hours play the score stood at 170 – 150 to Salem, with Hogwarts catching up
fast. They had worked the crossover move seven times by then, and Salem seemed to have no answer to
it.

The Americans were not champions for nothing, though, and Tom Broadbent rushed up to his Beaters
and told them not to be suckered into a contest of wills with the opposing Beaters. Unfortunately
for Hogwarts, they took his advice and once more started to concentrate on the Chasers.

The game continued at a fast pace and the Americans, with their Beaters back to normal again,
started to pull away once more. Even though Bletchley made some great saves, after three hours the
score was Salem 340 Hogwarts 220.

The pace of the game was fast and furious, and Harry was pleased to see that his team-mates were
not flagging - the training was certainly paying off. He was still circling above the field slowly,
looking everywhere for the Snitch. It hadn’t shown itself once, yet. Out of the corner of his eye,
he saw the Salem Seeker go into a sudden dive toward the centre of the field.

‘She’s seen the Snitch,’ he thought, and started to dive himself. Before he had gone 10 yards,
he pulled up - he couldn’t see the Snitch. ‘Wronski Feint,’ he thought.

Kristen laughed as she stopped her dive and flew up past Harry. “I see you’re not fooled that
easily, Harry,” she shouted.

“Nice try, Kristen,” he replied.

After 4 hours, the score was 420 – 290 to Salem. Both teams had slowed up by now – it was
impossible to keep up with the earlier pace of the game. And as the game slowed, the superior
height and reach of the Salem team began to show. After another 10 minutes it was 460 – 320 to
Salem.

Harry started to get worried. If the game went on much longer it would be beyond their reach. He
couldn’t blame the team – they had given everything and had played well. It was up to him, he had
to find the Snitch. He increased his speed as he flew above the play, looking everywhere for the
glint of gold that would reveal the position of the Snitch.

He was behind his own goal posts when he spotted it. It was very close to the ground in the
centre of the pitch. Kristen was behind her own goal posts and by her actions, Harry knew that she
had spotted it as well. They both put on furious bursts of speed and streaked downwards towards the
Snitch.

By the time they neared the middle of the pitch, they were both moving so fast that they were
just blurs to the crowd. “They’ve seen the Snitch,” shouted Lee, and the level of noise increased
as the crowd’s excitement grew.

‘I’ve got to get there first,’ Harry thought as he approached the Snitch, with his right arm
held out, ready to grab it. Kristen obviously had the same idea - she was also screaming towards
the Snitch with her right arm outstretched.

They both arrived at the Snitch at the same time, and their hands grabbed the fluttering little
ball simultaneously. Now, obviously, they were moving in opposite directions, and when their
forward momentum was suddenly stopped with the Snitch as their centre of gravity, something had to
happen.

Ron later told Harry that what happened next would go down in the annals of great sporting
moments at Hogwarts, and what was even better, Colin Creevey was on hand with his camera to capture
it all. The forward momentum of the two Seekers was immediately transformed into angular momentum,
and they cart-wheeled around the Snitch, both of them determined to hold onto it. They were a blur
as they spun round and round.

Something had to give eventually. The crowd by this time were in a frenzy, and the other twelve
players had stopped and were just staring, holding their breaths. Lee Jordan was going mad, not
knowing who had the upper hand in the duel of the Snitch.

Suddenly, both Seekers went hurtling away from each other and skidded along the ground, both
falling from their brooms. They both then stood up and looked at each other. The crowd had suddenly
gone quiet – even Lee Jordan was quiet.

Then slowly, Harry held up his arm to reveal the golden Snitch fluttering in his hand. He had a
broad grin on his face.

“Hogwarts wins – 470 to 460,” shouted Lee excitedly. The crowd erupted.

The six Hogwarts players zoomed down to Harry and surrounded him, ruffling his hair and patting
his back, and Katie kissed him. “Don’t you dare kiss me, Bletchley,” growled Harry, still with a
grin on his face.

The students were now milling around and cheering, congratulating their team. Ron ran up to
Harry and pulled him into a bear hug, and Hermione and Ginny were close behind, each kissing him on
the cheek excitedly.

When the excitement died down a bit, Harry walked over to the dejected Salem captain and held
out his hand. “That was the closest game I’ve ever played in,” he said.

Tom Broadbent grinned ruefully. “That it was, Harry – and well done.”

Harry then went over to Kristen, who was still staring at the ground in disbelief. It was the
first time she had not claimed the Snitch in all the matches she had played. Harry grinned at her
and said, “I don’t think I want to come up against you again. You’re good, Kristen, the best Seeker
I’ve ever played against.”

“Thanks, Harry. I can’t believe I didn’t get to the Snitch first.”

“Well neither do I. We got there together - remember? It was just luck that I managed to keep
hold of the Snitch.”

Kristen’s brow creased in a frown. “Oh I don’t think so, Harry. I guess your arms are more
powerful than mine. That’s what it came down to in the end - you’re a boy and I’m a girl!”

Harry just nodded, thankful for all the arm exercises he had done over the summer and during
training. Harry was grabbed by his excited school-mates just then and was lifted onto their
shoulders and paraded around the field with the rest of the team. Harry looked over at the
‘celebrity stand’ and saw the beaming professors applauding, and was surprised to see Madam Hooch
and Professor McGonagall hugging each other, with tears in their eyes.

It was a moment to savour for Harry and the team. But Harry couldn’t help but reflect, as he
looked towards the watching Salem players, on how close it had been. It could easily have been him
and his team who were looking on wistfully as the opposition celebrated.

Lee Jordan’s voice rang out over the stands and the field, “Professor Dumbledore has asked me to
announce that dinner will be served in thirty minutes. Will everybody please make their way up to
the Great Hall. Thank you.”

The two teams went over to the changing rooms to shower while the rest of the school walked
slowly back to the school building.

The fourteen players walked up to the school together, about thirty minutes later, and the mood
was that of friendly rivalry. Fred and George had struck up a good rapport with the other two
Beaters, and as they walked along, they exchanged views on the noble art of Bludger-smashing.

They walked into the Great Hall to tumultuous applause, and just stood in the middle of the hall
where their table had been the previous evening.

Professor Dumbledore then stood up. “Would the Hogwarts players please sit at their usual
tables. The Salem students will tonight sit in among their many friends at each of the four house
tables.” He then directed the two Beaters to the Slytherin table, two of the Chasers to Hufflepuff,
Kristen and the Keeper to Ravenclaw, and Tom Broadbent to Gryffindor. Tom took a seat between Harry
and Katie Bell as the headmaster remained standing.

“Before we eat, let me and my fellow professors pay a tribute to the two teams. Without doubt,
this was the best match ever seen at Hogwarts, and all who took part are to be congratulated. Will
all the players stand up please.” Dumbledore led the applause that filled the room as all fourteen
players stood, a bit self-consciously, grinning at everyone.

“Now Professor Bangley is understandably disappointed at the result of the game, and feels that
another game should be arranged. I have agreed to this, and a return match will be held, this time
at Salem, next year. I know that we all look forward to that.”

After the applause had died down, Dumbledore continued, “And now for another announcement. The
Salem Seeker, Kristen Davis, will be staying at Hogwarts until the end of the school year under the
student exchange program. Since she is here already, it has been agreed that she will start
straight away. So that means that she will have to be sorted into a house – and we will do that
now. Kristen, will you come up to the top table please.”

As Kristen walked up from the Ravenclaw table, Professor McGonagall brought out the stool and
placed it in front of the teachers’ table. She then placed the sorting hat on top of it. She
whispered to Kristen, who sat on the stool and placed the hat over her head.

‘Hmmm,’ said the hat. “It has been suggested that Gryffindor would be the best house for you,
but I’m not so sure. I see that you are very intelligent, and that makes you a prime candidate for
Ravenclaw. Hmmmm.”

‘Oh please,’ thought Kristen. ‘I’d like to be in Gryffindor. My house in Salem is similar to
that.’

‘Now let’s see … Yes, I can see those qualities in you – brave and true. It’s very difficult …
but I think that you should be in ...”

“GRYFFINDOR,” shouted the hat.

The Gryffindor students jumped up and cheered as she walked over to their table – not least
because she wouldn’t be opposing them in the Quidditch tournament later this year. For the same
reason, the students in the other houses groaned – except for Draco Malfoy who was pleased that
he’d still be the Slytherin Seeker. Kristen sat opposite Harry and between Parvati and
Lavender.

Harry introduced Kristen to his friends at the table, and Parvati and Lavender especially gave
her a friendly welcome, and told her that she’d be in their dorm along with Hermione. The rest of
the evening was spent mainly talking about Quidditch.

***

Early the next morning, Lavender and Parvati shook Kristen awake. “You’ve got to see this,
Kristen. Come on,” whispered Lavender, not wanting to wake Hermione.

They pulled her, grumbling, out onto the landing at the top of the spiral staircase and pointed
down into the common room. Harry was there doing his usual morning exercises. Kristen looked
admiringly at Harry, before turning and going back to her bed.

“Hey,” said Parvati who had followed her, “didn’t you like the show?”

“Yeh, he’s ok, Parvati. But I think he deserves a bit of privacy.”

“I quite agree,” said Hermione who had been woken by the chatter. “If Harry knew you were ogling
him every morning, he’d be mortified. Come on, Parvati, give him a break.” Parvati returned sulkily
to her bed, as did Lavender.

At breakfast, Kristen was sitting with her new friends when Fred and George came and stood
behind her, one on each side.

“Right, Kristen,” said Fred. “Just a few pointers on being a Gryffindor. See those slimy gits
over there?” He pointed to the Slytherin table. “They’re the Slytherins, and you won’t find a more
objectionable bunch on the planet.”

“That’s right, Kristen,” said George. “Nobody likes them, not even the Ravenclaws and
Hufflepuffs. If they get the slightest chance to drop you in it with the teachers, they will.”

“And if they give you any grief, just call us,” said Fred as they both went back to their
seats.

Kristen looked at Harry and raised her eyebrows questioningly. “That’s Fred and George’s
standard introduction for new Gryffindors,” he said laughing.

That first day, Kristen found it strange getting into the way things were done at Hogwarts but
by evening, she was pleased that she hadn’t done anything that could have embarrassed her and was
happy that she seemed to be fitting in. She was helped by her fellow 5th years,
especially Parvati and Lavender, and the three seemed to have struck up a budding friendship.
Feeling tired, she went to bed early that night, leaving most of her friends in the common
room.

A few hours later, only Harry and Hermione were left in the common room, all the others having
gone up to their dorms. They were sitting next to each other at the end table by the window,
putting the finishing touches to their essays on the causes of the third Goblin uprising, which had
to be handed in to Professor Binns the following day. Hermione sighed as she finished writing and
took out her ruler to measure the length of the parchment – it turned out to be five feet, even
though the requirement was only two feet.

She leaned over and looked at Harry’s parchment to see if he had nearly finished. At the same
moment, Harry turned his head and looked up. Hermione found herself staring into Harry’s eyes,
their faces only inches apart. As she stared into the depths of his emerald greens, she felt the
biggest jolt yet, deep within her. What she did next she just couldn’t explain. It was as if
something had taken her over, and she felt helpless to resist. She leaned closer and gently and
sensuously brushed her lips against Harry’s, their eyes still locked together. Harry’s eyes were
wide as she drew back slightly, and then taking in a deep breath, she kissed him again, this time
more passionately.

Feeling the passion in that kiss, Harry responded and he brought his hand up behind her head and
pulled her closer.

When they broke apart, they were both quite breathless, their mouths open and their eyes wide,
both trying to make sense of what had just happened. They jumped as they heard a noise at the top
of the stairs and looked to see Ron gazing at them, with a hurt look in his eyes.

“Ron, I … I …” stuttered Harry, a feeling of guilt suddenly coming over him. He knew that Ron
liked Hermione, and he felt that he had just stabbed him in the back. Ron didn’t wait to hear any
more and he turned and went quickly back into the dorm.

“Oh no. What have I done?” whispered Harry. He looked at Hermione who was now gazing with a
distraught expression at the spot that Ron had just vacated. Harry briefly glanced at her and then
ran up the stairs to the dorm. When he got there, the curtains were pulled around Ron’s bed.

“Ron!” groaned Harry. “Let me speak to you ... please.” He was met by silence from the other
side of the curtain.

“Damn!” he whispered to himself and went back out onto the landing. When he looked down at the
common room, Hermione was nowhere to be seen. “Damn, damn, damn!” he again said to himself as he
slowly climbed into his bed and pulled the curtains around him. He knew he was in for a sleepless
night - he had a lot to think about.

‘I’ve lost them both,’ he thought. ‘What was I thinking of? My two best friends – I’ve screwed
up big time! But it was Hermione who kissed me first - why did she do that? She’s never said that
she liked me that way before – so why? And why the hell did I kiss her back? She’s my best friend
for God’s sake! If I lose her friendship, I don’t know what I’ll do. And Ron … oh what can I
do?’

These thoughts bounced around Harry’s head all night before he at last fell into a disturbed
sleep. He woke late the following morning, to find that everyone had left the dorm. He was glad
that the 5th year Gryffindors had a two hours free period this morning. He was filled
with trepidation as he made his way down to the common room, but only a few first years were there,
getting ready to go down to breakfast. He sat down in his favourite chair to think, and looked up
as he heard someone coming down the stairs – it was Hermione. By the look of her she, also, hadn’t
had much sleep. She looked at Harry as she reached the bottom of the stairs, and he stood up to go
to speak to her. However, she looked guiltily at Harry before quickly going out through the
portrait hole without saying a word. Harry groaned inwardly – his worst fears were being
realised.

When he walked into the Great Hall, only a few Gryffindors were there eating breakfast –
Hermione wasn’t there. When Ron saw him coming in, he got up and walked right past him without
saying anything. Again Harry groaned and sat down beside Kristen.

Kristen had noticed that Ron had ignored Harry, and saw the stricken look on Harry’s face as he
sat down. “What’s wrong with you two, Harry? Have you had a fight or something?” she asked, a look
of concern on her pretty face.

At that moment, Harry was very grateful for someone to talk to, and he told her what had
happened the previous night. “What am I going to do, Kristen?” he pleaded.

She thought for a moment, then said, “How do you feel about Hermione, Harry?”

“Well, we’ve been best friends for 5 years. I’ve always seen her as just that. I mean ... I’ve
always been very protective of her and I’d go through hell and back for her – but I’d do the same
for Ron too.”

“Are you sure you only see her as a best friend? You did return her kiss, Harry.”

“Oh ... I don’t know Kristen. It ... it just seemed the right thing to do at the time.”

“Well, I’m sure you’ve noticed that Hermione is a very beautiful girl, and any red-blooded
wizard would have done the same I’m sure. How do you think she feels about you?”

“I ... I just don’t know, Kristen. Until last night I always thought she saw me as ... well, as
a sort of brother. But now, I just don’t know!”

“It seems to me that the first thing you’ve got to do is to find Hermione and talk to her.
You’ve got to sort out what you’re feeling for each other. Then you’ve both got to patch it up with
Ron somehow.”

“I suppose you’re right. But I’m so scared of losing her ... both of them ... as my best
friends.”

“Harry – you’ve got to do this, and do it now. You can’t let it fester, or you *will* end
up losing them both. Now go!”

Harry got up from his chair leaving his breakfast untouched, and walked out of the Great Hall,
thinking where Hermione could be. ‘The Library!’ he thought. She always went there when she had to
think about anything. He quickly made his way up the stairs and through the corridors, trying to
sort out in his mind what he was going to say to her.

Hermione, at that moment, was indeed in the library. She was sitting in a quiet corner, away
from the few other students who were there. Her eyes were slightly red from all the crying she’d
done the previous night, and she wasn’t far from a few more tears now. ‘How could I have been so
stupid!’ she thought to herself. ‘What made me do that? I don’t know what Harry must think of me. I
hope to goodness that I haven’t lost him as my best friend.’

As these thoughts went through her mind, she couldn’t help but think how she felt when Harry had
kissed her back. She had felt strangely elated.

‘And yet,’ she thought, ‘he’d run off after Ron - he hadn’t stayed with her. He must be feeling
guilty about what happened. No, I have to put things right, somehow. Back the way they were
before.’

She heard a noise behind her and turned to see Harry standing there, looking very nervous. She
drew in a deep breath. “Harry. Sit down – we need to talk. Look, I’m sorry for what I did last
night. It was stupid, and now you, Ron and I are all suffering and it’s all my fault. All I can
say, Harry, is that any witch in the school who found herself sitting so close to you would have
kissed you then. You can be irresistible, you know - after all, you’re the sexiest boy in Hogwarts.
Will you forgive me?”

As Harry listened to what she had said, he had an odd sinking feeling – which he quickly
dismissed. He now knew how she felt about him – she obviously didn’t like him *that* way – it
sounded as if it was just an attack of hormones.

“Of course I forgive you. And it was just as much my fault. You can be pretty irresistible as
well, you know. I had a terrible night thinking that I’d lost you as my best friend – thank god I
haven’t.”

Hermione also had the same odd sinking feeling that Harry’d just had as she listened to him. But
at least he was still her best friend! “Thank you, Harry – I don’t know what I’d have done if I’d
lost you as a friend.” she reached over and squeezed his hand – and felt another odd jolt - which
she quickly put out of her mind.

“What are we going to do about Ron?” asked Harry, looking worried. “He ... well don’t say I told
you, but he likes you, you know – *that* way, and he must be feeling that we’ve both put the
boot into him.”

Hermione’s eyes went wide. “Ron *likes* me? I knew that he was a bit jealous of Viktor and
me – but I always thought it was because he didn’t like Viktor - not so much that he liked me. Or
lord, this gets worse.”

“Do ... don’t you like Ron that way, then?”

“Well no – he’s my other best friend. I could never think about Ron that way.” Again Harry had
that sinking feeling – Hermione could never feel that way about her best friends – and that
included him. The thought was again quickly dismissed.

“We’ve got to speak to him – together. Tell him that nothing’s going on between us. And the
sooner we do it the better.” They walked out of the library together, and went to find Ron. They
went to the common room but he wasn’t there. Harry looked out of the window, and saw Ron standing
by the edge of the lake, skipping stones over the surface of the calm water.

“He’s there – down by the lake. Come on, Hermione, let’s go.”

“Ron!” they both shouted as they ran over to the lake. Ron turned and looked at them and then
turned back to skip another stone over the water.

“Look, Ron – there’s nothing going on between me and Harry.”

“Come off it, Hermione. I know what I saw last night – and that wasn’t just a friendly peck on
the cheek between friends.”

“I know what it must have looked like, Ron,” said Harry, “but Hermione’s right. There isn’t
anything going on between us. What you saw ... well it just sort of happened. It was a stupid thing
and it didn’t mean anything. We’ve sorted it out between ourselves, and we’re still best friends –
and we don’t want to lose you as a best friend either.”

Ron looked at them both, and saw the pleading look in their eyes. “Are you sure? I mean, are you
sure nothing’s going on between you?”

“Nothing Ron. Come on, you’ve got to believe us,” said Hermione.

Ron smiled. “Well don’t let me catch you doing that again. I might have to throw up all over you
both.”

Harry and Hermione grinned with relief as they each put an arm around his shoulder, and pulled
him back towards the school for their first class of the day – History of Magic.

***

That night, Harry left the common room and went to the special room that Professor McGonagall
had let him have to practice his Animagus transformation. After giving the password, he walked into
the room, which was fairly small and completely empty, except for a mirror standing against the
wall. He walked over and stood before it, looking at his reflection.

“Oh my,” said the mirror, “aren’t you something then. You can look into me any time you
like.”

Harry groaned. ‘Trust me to end up with a female mirror,’ he thought.

“Will you please keep quiet - I have to practice my Animagus transformation.”

Harry concentrated and visualised himself as a golden eagle. He then saw himself as his human
form changing into the eagle and thought, ‘*CONVERTO AQUILA AUREUS’*.

He watched, fascinated, as he saw his head and shoulders change to those of a golden eagle, but
the rest of him was still Harry Potter. “Oh dear,” said the mirror, “you really do need the
practice don’t you.”

Harry spent the next hour trying to transform, but by the end of that time he had only managed
to change his right arm into a wing, apart from his head and shoulders, that is. He was feeling
quite weary by that time – the transformation process was very tiring if repeated so often. So he
walked back to Gryffindor tower and went straight to bed.

***

The middle of October saw the onset of autumn in Scotland, and the evenings began to take on a
chilly feel to them. It was a beautiful time of year at Hogwarts, with the leaves changing to
russet, gold and red before dropping to leave a kaleidoscopic carpet over the fields that
surrounded the school.

Sirius was sitting in the shrieking shack, looking out of the window at the fields. It never
failed to amaze him – the beauty of this place in autumn. He was waiting for Ceri to arrive. He had
received her message that she would be returning tonight, and he hoped she would be in time so that
they could both spy on another meeting of Voldemort’s inner circle. Snape had told him that it
would take place at 10.00 pm in the same location as the last meeting.

It had just started to get dark when the side door opened and Ceri walked in. “Hi Ceri. It’s
been a long time. How did it go?”

“Hello Sirius,” she said cheerfully. “Well after a long, hard slog, I finally managed to
convince them to take my report seriously. Then they insisted that I be involved in setting up
special infiltration teams before they let me come back over here.”

“We’ve got another spying mission tonight. And we haven’t got much time to get there. Do you
feel up to it, or do you want to go to the hotel for some rest?”

“Lead on, kind sir,” said Ceri, and they went off towards the Forbidden Forest.

The she-wolf and the big black dog had settled down under a large bush as the first of
Voldemort’s inner circle arrived. Then came the man himself, with Wormtail in tow. This time Sirius
did not react – he had learned his lesson.

“Lucius,” hissed Voldemort. “What’s the delay? Why is it taking so long to recruit these past
few weeks?”

“My Lord,” replied Lucius Malfoy, “we’ve found spies at some of our recruiting meetings. We’ve
dealt with them, but we’ve had to be more careful with our security. This has slowed us down, but
it hasn’t stopped us. It’ll just take a while longer to swell your army to the required size.”

“Hmmm, I’ve had the same reports from my servants in America. It seems that the Light Side have
noticed our activities. You’re right to increase security – nothing must stand in the way of my
destiny. I’ve told my foreign friends to be on their guard as well. At this rate, it won’t be until
next spring before we are ready – but we must be patient. I don’t want anything to go wrong now.
Keep me informed of your progress. Has there been anything more from our friend at Hogwarts? What
has Potter been up to lately?”

“No nothing, my Lord. Things are very quiet there.”

Voldemort and Wormtail then Apparated away, quickly followed by the inner circle. Sirius and
Ceri stayed in their animal forms as they made their way to Hogwarts to report to Dumbledore.

“Sirius – welcome,” said Dumbledore as the black dog entered his office, followed by a pretty
young woman. “And you must be Ceri Jones. I’m pleased to meet you at last.”

Sirius transformed as the professor shook Ceri’s hand. “I’m glad – no - privileged to meet you
Professor Dumbledore,” she said as she looked into two twinkling blue eyes.

“The privilege is all mine, my dear. Sirius has told me all about you. Did you manage to
convince your people of the seriousness of the situation?”

“Yes, Professor, after a while. We’ve set up a number of teams to infiltrate the Death Eater
meetings to try to slow them down.”

“And it seems to be working,” said Sirius as he told Dumbledore about the meeting they’d just
spied on.

“Well that’s something, anyway. It should buy us the time we need to set up our defences for the
coming attacks. Ceri, the rest of my team will be here shortly, and I’ll introduce you to them.
I’ve laid on supper for you both, and you can help yourselves later. Sirius tells me that you
normally stay at the Three Broomsticks. You are welcome to stay here in one of our guest rooms if
you wish?”

“That’s fine, Professor. I’d love that. But how are you going to explain my appearance to your
other teachers and students? As Sirius has told you, there’s a spy hanging around watching Harry
Potter.”

“I’ll tell them you’re a visiting observer from one of the premier Witchcraft and Wizardry
schools in America - here to see how we do things at Hogwarts. And yes, I know about the spying on
Harry – he and his friends are being watched by us too – not that he really needs it. He’s quite
capable of looking after himself these days. Did you know that he can now block the Cruciatus curse
with ease?”

Ceri gasped, “How can he do that? I didn’t think anyone could block that curse.”

“I told you he was special, Ceri,” said Sirius. Remus had told him all about the DADA class.

Dumbledore nodded. “He’s growing stronger all the time – both physically and magically. Ah, here
they are.” Dumbledore waved in McGonagall, Snape and Lupin and introduced them to Ceri. Then she
and Sirius again gave their report for the benefit of the newcomers.

After the meeting was over, Sirius and Ceri went into Dumbledore’s anteroom to eat supper. The
headmaster then showed her to the guest room.

***

The Halloween ball was fast approaching, and the excitement of all the girls in the school was
rising. They constantly talked about who had asked who to go to the ball, and in particular, if
anyone had been asked by Harry.

About a week before the ball, Harry was sitting alone at the breakfast table when a pretty
6th year Ravenclaw – not Cho – came up to him, nervously wringing her hands.

“Harry, I was wondering, are you going to the ball with anyone?”

“Eh ... no, Sarah. I don’t know if I’ll be going, yet.”

“Well if you *do* decide to go, would you ... come with me?”

Harry looked at Sarah, feeling sorry for her obvious agitation, and marvelling at her courage in
asking him. He searched for the right words to let her down gently. “Thanks Sarah, I ... I’ll bear
it in mind. But I really don’t know if I’ll go.”

Sarah walked dejectedly back to her table, where she was pounced on by all her friends,
excitedly wanting to know what Harry had said. This was only the first of several offers by girls
from all four houses, and it got to the stage where Harry was almost afraid to go outside his dorm.
The trouble was that he found it very difficult to say ‘No’, especially to a pretty girl.

He thought about what he could do and came up with the obvious answer. If he asked someone to go
to the ball and it became common knowledge, then they would stop asking him. But who could he ask?
Just as he was thinking about it, Ginny walked into the common room. ‘Ginny – of course!’ he
thought. ‘Who better than one of my best friends – she’s long over the crush she used to have on
me, so we’ll just be going as friends – just as long as she hasn’t already been asked, or there’s
no one she expects to ask her. I don’t want to cramp her style, after all.’

He called Ginny over to him.

“Hi, Harry. What’s up?”

“Has anyone asked you to go to the ball yet, Ginny?”

She looked at him with narrowed eyes. “No, why?”

“Is there someone you think might ask you?”

“Noooo….” she said wondering what was coming next.

“Ginny, what do you say we go to the ball together?”

Ginny couldn’t believe her ears. Harry Potter had just asked her to the ball! “Yes, ok Harry.
I’d love to go to the ball with you. Eh ... can you excuse me now? I have to do something.” She ran
up to her dorm looking for her friends.

‘That went ok,’ thought Harry. ‘Ginny’s a nice girl and she obviously doesn’t mind that we’re
going just as friends.’

How wrong Harry was.

The next day, just before their DADA class, Harry whispered to Ron, “I’m taking Ginny to the
ball.”

“WHAT!” shouted Ron, attracting the attention of the other students in the class.

“Ron!” whispered Harry. “I’m only taking her as a friend. I had to ask someone to keep all those
girls off my back. Ok?”

“Well, ok Harry. As long as that’s the only reason!”

“It is, Ron. It is”

Later that evening, Harry went to his secret training room to practice his Animagus
transformation. He had been steadily improving over the last few days and had great hopes that he’d
succeed during this session.

His first attempt had the mirror in fits of laughter. She said she had never in her life seen
anything so funny. Harry was grateful for McGonagall’s advice that he not tell his friends before
he had perfected the technique – he had to admit that the sight of a magnificent golden eagle,
perfect in every respect except for a pair of human feet, was hilarious in the extreme.

Unabashed, however, Harry persevered and after half an hour managed to complete the full
transformation. He was elated, and repeated the change four times to make sure that it wasn’t a
fluke. He’d done it.

He went to Professor McGonagall’s office and told her the good news, and demonstrated the
transformation. The professor nodded her approval, and told Harry she would inform the headmaster
that the task was now completed.

Harry walked happily into the common room, and saw a very downcast Ron sitting in front of the
fire. He looked as if he had the troubles of the world on his shoulders.

“What’s up Ron?” asked Harry. “Why are you looking so miserable?”

Ron raised his chin from his hand. “I’ve done it again, Harry. I’m a stupid git.”

“What – what have you done, Ron?”

“I just asked Hermione to go to the ball with me, but she said that Neville’s already asked
her.”

“Oh,” said Harry. He wondered if Neville had asked Hermione, or if Hermione had asked Neville –
just to have an excuse not to go with Ron. He wished that he hadn’t told her about Ron’s feelings.
‘You’re not the only git, Ron,’ he thought.

Afterwards, he cornered Hermione, who seemed a bit distant, and asked her about Neville. “No,
Harry. He asked me three days ago. And what’s this I hear about you and Ginny? The whole school is
buzzing about it – but I don’t suppose you’ve noticed as usual!”

Harry frowned slightly at Hermione’s odd attitude. “I only asked Ginny to keep the other girls
off my back.We’ll only be going as friends, you know.”


“Are you sure about that, Harry? You may think so, but does she? I don’t want to see her get
hurt, Harry.” And she stormed off.

Harry was confused now. ‘I did tell her we’d be going just as friends, didn’t I?’ He tried to
think back to when he’d asked her - but he couldn’t remember! ‘But it doesn’t matter anyway. Ginny
doesn’t like me that way any more. She must realise we’re only going as friends – mustn’t she?’

The day of the Halloween ball arrived, and everyone had been given a day off from school.
Although the boys didn’t mind a day off, they couldn’t really see the need for it. There was plenty
of time to get ready – after all, it wasn’t due to start until 7.30. Not so the girls. They seemed
to think they needed every minute of their day off to get ready. There was a buzz of excitement
about them, and all you could see that day was one group of girls after another talking excitedly
and running here there and everywhere. Harry thought that Dumbledore had put a spell on the female
population of the school.

Dumbledore had organised dinner before the dance, but the tables were not the usual four, one
for each house. There were now quite a few smaller tables, each seating 10 people. Harry and his
friends sat together, eating their meal – Harry with Ginny, Hermione with Neville, Ron with
Lavender, Dean and Parvati, Seamus and Kristen.

The ten friends chatted together and had a great time. Until the dancing started, that is. There
were no romantic feelings between any of the 5 pairs and they just let their hair down and enjoyed
themselves - but Ginny was the exception. When the band played a slow number, the others danced in
the prescribed foot-apart manner. But Ginny moved in close to Harry, put her arms around his neck
and rested her head on his chest. Harry was in turmoil. He looked over to Hermione pleadingly, but
was met with a deadpan expression, which said ‘I told you so!’

Harry let Ginny stay in that position as the song continued, wondering what on earth he was
going to do. At the end of the song, he said, “Ginny, come outside for a minute?” and she happily
went with him, holding his hand. She attracted quite a number of envious stares as they went
outside onto the balcony.

Harry sat down on a bench and motioned for Ginny to sit down next to him. “Ginny,” he said
nervously, “I’ve got a confession to make. And I don’t think you’re going to like it.”

That was the highpoint of the ensuing conversation. Things then went quickly downhill as Harry
explained why he’d asked her to the ball. Ginny was mortified. She hardly heard Harry’s apologies,
and she got up and ran back to Gryffindor tower, wiping the tears from her face. Harry felt
terrible and knew how Dobby must have felt when he used to beat himself up when he’d done something
he’d been ashamed of.

He knew he had to go after Ginny. He knew he had to make things right between them. She was one
of his best friends, and like a stupid git, he’d put that friendship at risk – just as he had with
Hermione and Ron. ‘What the hell is wrong with me?’ he thought. ‘If I’ve hurt her - and all because
I was thinking of myself. All because I wanted to get the girls off my back. Did I once think about
what I might be doing to Ginny? Did I hell!’

He walked back to the common room, but there was no one there. He went up the stairs and walked
towards Ginny’s dorm and then stopped. He could hear the sound of muffled crying. He knocked
quietly on the door. “Ginny? Ginny ... can I speak to you please?”

“Go away, Harry,” came the reply.

“Ginny, please. I really need to talk to you. I can’t leave you like this.”

He put his ear to the door, and heard a rustle of clothes. Ginny slowly opened the door and
walked back to her bed and sat down. Harry followed.

“Oh, Ginny,” he said, “I’ve been such a stupid fool. I never thought you still felt anything for
me. I thought that was all in the past.” He paused and took a deep breath. “I’ve always liked you,
Ginny. We’ve become best friends. I haven’t told you this before, but I do love you, Ginny.” Her
eyes widened. “I’ve come to love you as the sister I’ve never had, and always wanted. So you
*are* special to me, and when I asked you to the ball, it was on those terms. But like a fool,
I just assumed that you felt the same. I can see that I’ve hurt you, but I just don’t know what to
do about it. The only thing I could do is to tell you how I truly feel. I hope you won’t hate me
for what I’ve done.”

“You *have* hurt me Harry - I’ve never felt so bad. I wish you’d told me how you felt
earlier – before I made a fool of myself. I’ll speak to you tomorrow, Harry. But now, I just need
to be on my own.”

Harry squeezed her hand and then left the dorm. He walked down to the common room to see two
very angry faces looking up at him. “What have you done to my sister, Harry?” shouted Ron. That was
bad for Harry to take, but nowhere near as bad as Hermione’s angry whisper, “I told you Harry. I
warned you about this. You’re nothing but an insufferable, insensitive, bloody fool. I really
despair for you sometimes Harry.”

Harry sank forlornly down into his favourite chair as Hermione raced upstairs to Ginny’s dorm.
Ron sat down next to Harry. “Care to explain?” he said.

Harry told Ron all about how he’d messed up, and how bad he felt about hurting Ginny. He half
hoped Ron would hit him – it would at least make him feel better. He told him what he’d said to
Ginny, loving her like a sister, and then put his face into his hands, feeling too bad to
continue.

Surprisingly, Ron didn’t hit Harry. Nor did he shout at him - he could see how upset Harry was.
He put his hand on his shoulder. “Harry, I do understand you know. Ginny had us both fooled. I
didn’t suspect that she still had some sort of crush on you – she certainly disguised that pretty
well. If I’d known, I would have warned you.”

“But Hermione warned me Ron. But I didn’t think she was right. I ignored her. How stupid can I
get? When is Hermione ever wrong?” he wailed.

“Look, Harry. I know you didn’t intend to hurt Ginny, and she’ll come around to that way of
thinking soon enough – she’s not stupid. And to think,” he grinned. “How long have you thought of
her as a sister? And does that mean you think of me as a brother?”

Harry looked up to see Ron’s grinning face. “Of course I do, Ron. I’ve never told you this, but
I really envy you. You’ve got the best family anyone could possibly have, and ever since I met you,
I’ve hoped that I could be part of it. Does that surprise you?”

“In a way it does. I’ve always been envious of you Harry – oh in a friendly way of course –
Captain of the School and House Quidditch teams, youngest Seeker at Hogwarts, fame – the list is
almost endless. I never thought that the famous Harry Potter would ever be envious of me!”

They both looked self-consciously at each other. They had rarely spoken in such an intimate way
to each other before. But a strong bond between them was forged that night – even stronger than the
one they’d already had. They went up to bed, both feeling a little better than earlier in the
night.

The next morning, Ron and Harry went down to the common room to see Hermione waiting for them.
She speared Harry with a glare and said, “Ginny wants to see you – up in her dorm. She’s on her
own.” And she turned and went to sit over by the fire. Ron sat next to her as Harry went back up
the stairs.

Ron told Hermione everything that he and Harry had talked about the previous night. “I
understand how Harry’s feeling,” she said, “but if only he’d thought – that’s the trouble with you
boys – you don’t think! Harry didn’t even realise that he was playing with Ginny’s emotions. He’s
hurt her Ron – badly. She really thought she had a chance with him, but your sister is one noble
witch - she’s the best. She’s going to forgive him, you know. She can accept that Harry sees her as
a sister – she’s even flattered by it. But it’s going to take a while before she fully gets over
this. We’ll need to keep an eye on her.”

Harry felt relieved that Ginny had accepted his apology, and had forgiven his stupidity. When
she had finished speaking, he hugged her and whispered in her ear, “So is it all right if I think
of you as my sister?”

“Yes, of course it is,” she replied, “brother mine.” Harry didn’t see the tear than ran down her
cheek.

***

It was getting impatient now. It had waited for a long time, there beneath ancient Rhedae, and
nothing had happened. It increased the power of its summons, sending it out into the four corners
of the world. It had to do something for time was getting short.

Buckbeak lifted his noble head. The emanations had changed. They were stronger. He flew into the
air above the forest to join his friends, craving the comfort of their nearness.

The noise increased in the forest, and the wizards patrolling the perimeter noticed the change
in activity. The creatures were still confined, but they sent their report to the French ministry,
hoping that something would be done soon.



6. The Amulet
-------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 10 1491 2003-01-01T12:37:00Z 2003-07-07T13:30:00Z 20 11310 64468 537 128
79171 9.2720

**Chapter 5**

**The Amulet**

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Notes :** Thanks for the reviews – glad you like the story. Some questions on the
review board :

Is this gonna be H/Hr? – Anticipation of an event is often just as good as the event itself.

Will Harry and Hermione stop suppressing those emotions any time soon? – I wouldn’t bank on it –
the time has to be right.

There’ll probably be a short pause in posting after this chapter – looks like I’ll be away from
home for a couple of days – but I should resume posting on Thursday.

It wasn't until fully four days after the Halloween ball that Hermione even spoke to Harry.
Ron had tried to get her to patch things up with him, but she was stubborn - the sight of Ginny
crying forlornly into her pillow had affected her badly. She loved Ginny, she was her best female
friend and her feelings had been mangled by Harry.

The worst part was that she couldn't forget the way she and Harry had kissed a few weeks
ago. However hard she tried to put it out of her mind, she just couldn't forget those feelings
she’d had when it happened. She hoped and prayed that she wouldn't be put in the same position
that Ginny was in right now - she refused to let that happen. The redhead was suffering bravely,
and she really felt for her.

The event that made her speak to Harry occurred in the common room one chilly evening. The four
were sitting around the fire reading, when Harry suddenly clutched his amulet. It had grown
suddenly warmer as it lay against his chest. When he felt it, that familiar urgent feeling had
grown much stronger, but he couldn't tell what the urgency was exactly.

Hermione noticed Harry clutching the amulet, and a look of concern crossed her face. She still
thought that he should have got rid of it when they spoke in Diagon Alley, and she was afraid that
something bad was going to happen. "What's the matter Harry? Why are you holding the
amulet like that?" she asked.

"The feeling of urgency I told you about has just grown stronger, and it feels a lot warmer
than it did. It doesn't feel like anything bad, but I get the distinct feeling that I've
got to do something."

"I knew there was something I'd forgotten!" she exclaimed. "I was going to do
some research on the amulet. I'm sorry, Harry, I just forgot. I think I'll go down to the
library and see if I can find that book I told you about. I shouldn't be long."

"I'll come with you, Hermione," Ginny said, and they both went out through the
portrait hole and headed towards the library.

As much as they tried, they couldn't find the book on magical amulets that night, although
they hadn't had much time before Madam Pince closed the library. They resolved to go back the
following day, which was a Saturday, when they would have plenty of time to look for it.

They had just finished breakfast the following morning when Hermione and Ginny got up to go to
the library.

"Hang on a minute, you two,” said Harry. "I have to show you something. Come on Ron.
Lets go."

They followed Harry up the stairs until they reached Professor McGonagall's office. They
looked at each other with furrowed brows, wondering what Harry had to show them. They were even
more confused when Harry walked up to the suit of armour standing next to the professor's
office. They were intrigued when Harry pulled out his wand, tapped the right arm of the armour, and
said *'sugar beans'*.

To their surprise, the suit of armour stepped aside to reveal a doorway, which Harry opened and
he beckoned them inside. They were in a room they hadn't seen before - it was empty with only a
mirror standing against one of the walls.

Harry turned to his friends. "I've got something to show you. I've had to keep it
secret up until now and it must remain a secret - only you three will know, apart from Professor
Dumbledore and Professor McGonagall. Promise?"

"Yes, we promise. Now tell us what it is," said Ron impatiently.

"Now don't be frightened by what you are about to see. I'm new to this. Are you
ready?"

"Come on, Harry, get on with it," said Hermione, who had a strange feeling about
this.

They saw Harry close his eyes and his brow furrow in concentration. Then they saw him change.
Three pairs of eyes opened wide, and three mouths dropped open as they looked at the huge golden
eagle standing before them. "Bloody hell!" shouted Ron.

Ginny, however, looked very excited. "You're an Animagus! When did you do this
Harry?"

"And how the bloody hell did you do it?" said Hermione sternly. Two humans and an
eagle looked at Hermione with disbelief. Hermione didn't swear - except for the other night
when Harry had upset her.

Harry unfurled his wings, the ends touching each of the walls, and flapped them slowly.

"You're beautiful, Harry. When can you take me for a ride on your back?" said
Ginny excitedly. The other two could only laugh.

Harry then changed back to human form. "I can't speak human when I'm a golden
eagle, Ginny. And I don't know if I can carry anybody yet - I've only just perfected it and
I haven't even flown yet."

Harry then explained to his astonished friends how he'd become an Animagus, with the help of
Professor McGonagall.

"They thought it would help in the fight against the Dark Side. I think they know something
I don't. I'm sure they think that I'm going to be involved in the fight at some
stage."

"Oh Harry,” gasped Hermione, putting her hand over her mouth.

They looked glumly at Harry, afraid of what was ahead, but Ron lightened the mood. "When
are you going to fly, Harry? And I want first go at riding you," he glared at Ginny.

Harry laughed. "Oh no you don't Ron. My little sister gets first go - if I can do it,
that is!"

Ginny's emotions were still a bit fragile, but she still grinned at Harry.

Hermione and Ginny went into the library later, to look for the magical amulets book. Hermione
had a sudden thought and walked over to a rarely used bookcase. She looked at the titles closely
and then pulled a large book from the shelf. "I've got it!" she shouted at Ginny,
prompting a loud "Shhhhhh” from Madam Pince.

"Sorry,” she mouthed as she settled down beside Ginny to look through the book. They looked
at the index to see if there was anything obvious. There was - there was a section on
'*Amulets that give feelings of urgency'*. They turned to the chapter impatiently, and
read ...

'Feelings of urgency are sometimes emitted by a certain type of amulet. This feeling can
only normally be felt by the person to whom a message is directed. This class of amulet is known as
the 'Message amulet' class. The normal method of revealing the message is for the intended
recipient to hold the wand onto the amulet and speak the word 'APERIO', while thinking of a
parchment and quill.'

"That's it!" said Hermione, and wrote the information onto a blank piece of
parchment. "Let's go and find Harry and Ron. I want to see what the message is."

They ran all the way back to Gryffindor tower and said the password to open the portrait hole
and climbed in. Harry and Ron were playing wizard chess in the corner, but there was no one else in
the room. "Harry. Ron. We've found something," shouted Ginny.

They walked over and Hermione read out the notes she had made in the library. "Come on –
let’s see if it works,” she said excitedly.

Harry pulled the amulet over his head and placed it on the table. He pulled his wand out from
his robes and held it directly on the knight. He closed his eyes, thought of a parchment and quill,
and said, *"APERIO.”*

The four watched with baited breath, waiting for something to happen. Suddenly, a blue light
came from the tip of the sword the knight was holding, and started to form letters in the air above
it. After a few moments the message could be read …

'The former conqueror - the true Anima Summa - must go to ancient Rhedae. There will he find
the ancient secret, which must be revealed to him and his helpers.'

The four looked at each other. "What the hell does that mean!" exclaimed Ron.

Hermione thought for a moment. "The former conqueror must be Harry - you know, the
conqueror of ‘You Know Who’ when he was a baby. I haven't a clue what the Anima Summa is - but
again it must be Harry, because the message is directed at him. I don't know where Rhedae is,
I've never heard of the place. And what is the secret to be uncovered and who are the helpers?
- I really don't know.” She wrote the message onto the piece of parchment, and just as she
finished, the message outlined in the air vanished. Harry picked up the amulet.

“Could the helpers be us three?” said Ginny as she looked at Ron and Hermione.

"I don’t know, Ginny. But you’ve all helped me up to now.” He looked down at the amulet he
was holding, “The feeling of urgency has gone. I can only feel warmth and security now - like it
was the first time I held it."

The four looked down at the parchment and read the message again. Not one of them noticed the
portrait hole open and close. Outside in the corridor, Draco Malfoy grinned. It had been easy - he
had been lurking outside the entrance under his Invisibility Cloak when the Mudblood and the
Weasley girl came along and opened the portrait. They were so excited about something that they
hadn't noticed that the portrait had remained open longer than usual. He had followed them
inside without any bother. He removed the cloak, and rushed off to the owlery.

Back in the common room, Hermione was in her element. "We've got to research
this," she said. "We've got to scour the library for references to a place called
Rhedae, and for any information on the true Anima Summa. Agreed?"

They all nodded, and they knew that Hermione's insatiable appetite for knowledge would drive
them on until they found what they were looking for. "Come on,” she said, "no time like
the present," and she pulled them back in the direction of the library.

They were weary by the time they went in for their evening meal. They had spent all day looking
through loads of wizarding books, but could find absolutely nothing about Rhedae or Anima Summa.
Hermione was frustrated, and knew that it could take some time to find the information they
needed.

"I'll draw up a schedule,” she said to the others. "We can work in pairs in the
library. Harry and Ron can work one shift, and Ginny and I the other. We'll find something even
if it kills us."

"And it probably will," muttered Ron.

"What was that, Ron Weasley?" said Hermione. Harry laughed. He hadn't seen
Hermione so fired up in a long time.

***

At breakfast the following Wednesday, Harry was busy trying to get a list of students who wanted
to try out for the Keeper vacancy in the Gryffindor Quidditch team. He already had 3 names, when he
saw Kristen come into the hall with Parvati and Lavender. He beckoned her over. "Kristen,
I've been thinking. The Quidditch House matches will be starting soon, and I thought that we
could share the Seeker position between us. I thought we could each play one game, and the one who
does best can play the last game. What do you think?"

"No way, Harry. You're the Gryffindor Seeker, and you're the captain - you've
got to play. And anyway, you've already beaten me once."

"Yes, but as you know that wasn't because I was better than you. You know how close
that was. I can't see you just sitting in the stands when you've got all that
talent."

"Thanks, Harry. I remember having a similar conversation with my Salem house captain 3
years ago. I was playing Keeper then, but he could somehow see that I'd make a good Seeker and
persuaded me to switch positions. I won't be happy not playing, but I'd be even less happy
taking over from you."

"You used to play Keeper? But Kristen, I'm looking for a Keeper to replace Oliver Wood.
I'm holding try-outs tonight and you've got to come." He was writing her name on the
list before she even replied.

That evening, Harry looked at the list of students trying out for Keeper. He was standing
alongside the Quidditch field with Katie Bell, Angelina Johnson and Alicia Spinnet - the Gryffindor
Chasers. He looked down the list of four names as he waited for them to arrive. Seamus Finnegan and
Dean Thomas were both Harry's roommates in the 5th year and Colin Creevey was in 4th year.
Kristen's name was last on the list.

When they arrived, Harry explained how the Keeper would be selected. The Chasers would try to
score from various distances, and would throw the quaffle 30 times. The one who pulled off the most
saves would be the new Keeper.

"Right, Colin - you first,” said Harry, and he watched Colin get onto his broom and fly
over to the goal area. Harry could tell as he watched him fly that he wouldn't be much good.
Colin was a whiz with a camera, but Quidditch?

Harry was proved right as he marked Colin's score on the list - 1 save. And that had been a
fluke. He had dived towards the right, lost his grip on the broom and hung suspended beneath it,
his back to the Chasers, as the quaffle hit him on his backside and bounced away. The Chasers had
taken 5 minutes to recover from their fit of laughter before they could resume.

Dean had fared better than Colin, but not much. He was after all a soccer fan, who idolised his
favourite team - West Ham United, which played in the English premiership (author’s note : they
were relegated to the first division at the end of last season – bad luck, Dean!). He did, however,
manage to save 5 shots.

Seamus was by far the best of the three boys. He looked quite good as he stopped 20 of the shots
flung at the goal. "Well done, Seamus,” said Harry as he marked down the score.

Kristen was the last one up. Harry immediately saw that she oozed class as she patrolled the
goal area. She was focused and she flew her Firebolt like a dream. She was a brilliant Seeker, but
she was also an excellent Keeper, and by the end of her session, she'd saved 26 shots.

"Thanks for coming, everybody. Kristen's the new Keeper and Seamus is reserve."
Harry walked over to Kristen and congratulated her, as did the Chasers, who walked back up to the
school with Seamus, Dean and Colin.

"Do you want to fly around for a bit?" Harry asked Kristen. She smiled and nodded, and
pushed off from the ground.

"See if you can keep up with me,” she shouted over her shoulder. Harry laughed and zoomed
after her on his Firebolt. After half an hour of high-speed flying and aerobatics, they went up to
the school to have their evening meal, chatting amiably.

From the window of her office, Professor McGonagall had watched the two flying around and the
way they had interacted. She smiled to herself as she saw them enter the school.

***

The following Saturday evening, Harry called Hermione, Ron and Ginny over to him in the common
room, and whispered, "Early tomorrow morning, I'm going down to the edge of the Forbidden
Forest to try out my flying - and not on my broomstick if you know what I mean. Everybody's
going to be in bed at that time so there won't be any risk of me being spotted. Do you want to
come?"

They all nodded excitedly. "Will you let me ride you?" whispered Ginny.

"It depends how it goes, Ginny - we'll see. 5.00 a.m. down here - is that all
right?"

Four pairs of bleary eyes met early the following morning, and they walked quietly down to the
main door and let themselves out. Thankfully, Peeves must also have been sleeping that morning. It
was still dark as they walked across the Quidditch pitch towards the edge of the Forbidden Forest.
Dawn was just breaking as Harry transformed into his golden eagle Animagus form.

"Magnificent!" breathed Hermione as she looked at the green eyes and slightly unruly
feathers on the top of the eagle's head.

Harry opened his wings, bent his legs, and pushed off powerfully from the ground. The beats from
his wings were so powerful that the other three had to shield their eyes from the dust that was
stirred up from the ground, and clutched their robes that billowed out behind them. Up he soared
into the lightening sky.

Harry was ecstatic. The feeling of freedom in his dream turned out to be very real, and he
marvelled as he rode the thermals, his wings spread wide, rising high into the early morning air.
What he hadn't felt in his dreams was the incredible sense of power. He could see his three
friends as mere dots below him when he decided to try a dive. He pointed his body at the ground and
with powerful beats of his massive wings, set off in their direction. He pulled his wings back in
against his body as he picked up speed.

Below him, three pairs of eyes followed his every move, and gasped when they saw him hurtling
toward them at breathtaking speed.

Harry could see them duck as he approached, and he spread his wings to break his speed. He came
into a perfect landing right beside the others, and immediately transformed. He was grinning as he
asked, "Well, what do you think?"

"Incredible!" said Ron.

"Marvellous, but I felt really sick when you went into that dive," said Hermione.

"Way out,” said Ginny. "How about my ride now, Harry?"

Harry looked at the grinning redhead and smiled. She had been looking forward to this, he could
tell. "All right Ginny. Let's try it. When I transform, climb on my back, just in front of
my wings, but keep your legs well forward to the front. I don't want to knock you off when I
start flapping. Hold onto my neck - but don't choke me!"

Harry transformed and bent his legs to let Ginny climb onto him. As she settled onto his back he
flexed his legs, bouncing up and down slightly to test her weight. He then kicked powerfully off
from the ground and soared up into the air. He could hear Ginny screaming excitedly above him, and
she told him to go into a dive. And he did - but not like the one he did earlier - he was afraid
that Ginny would fall off. After fifteen minutes, Ginny's weight started to tell and he felt a
bit tired, so he came into a smooth landing beside his friends and Ginny jumped off.

Harry transformed and Ginny hugged him. "That was incredible, Harry. I haven't felt
anything like it before. It's much better than a broomstick, and a lot more
comfortable."

They all laughed at Ginny's obvious delight. "Can I have a go now?" said Ron.

"After Ginny, I feel a bit tired Ron. I think it's best if I get in a bit more flying
before taking your weight on my back. But I promise you'll be next. Then it'll be your turn
Hermione."

"No way, Harry. You know I don't like flying, and the speed that you go, you'll
have half my breakfast over your head. No - I'm quite happy to watch!"

They again all laughed as they walked back to the school for their breakfast.

***

It was late autumn, and the weather had taken a turn for the worse. The storms, which had become
more and more normal over the last few years, had started to rush in from the Atlantic, one after
the other. Harry could put up with the rain, but he hated the gales that battered the school. It
meant that Quidditch practice was impossible, and it made his Animagus flying very uncomfortable
and hazardous.

Professor Flitwick was waiting for the 5th year Gryffindors and Ravenclaws to settle
down before starting their Charms class one morning. The Gryffindors, in particular, were looking
disgruntled he noticed, and smiled to himself. They had just come from double Potions with the
Slytherins.

Hermione was sitting with Ron at one table, and in front of them were Harry and Kristen.
Professor Flitwick cleared his throat, “The headmaster has asked me to concentrate on the blocking
of charms for the rest of this term. I know that Professor Lupin is doing the same in your DADA
classes, but we feel that the more practice you get on this the better. This morning we’ll look at
the Confundus charm. You may remember it from last year – the charm that causes confusion to the
person it’s aimed at. The charm works by slightly altering the electrical patterns in the brain –
it manipulates the messages passed between the brain cells before they are sent to the nerves in
the part of the body to be acted upon. The blocking of this type of charm is difficult - very
difficult. But you can, with practice, attempt to repair the electrical messages before they are
passed along.”

He looked at the students and saw that he had their full attention. “Before the charm hits you,
you have to keep a small corner of your brain as clear as possible. You have to concentrate hard
and visualise, say, the very front of your brain, and think a clear thought – one that is familiar
to you. You have to keep concentrating on that thought. And then when you do something – such as
raise your arm – you send that thought to your arm. The thought doesn’t actually go to your arm,
but to the part of the brain that controls arm movement. If done properly, your clear thought will
unscramble the confusion, and allow you to react normally and raise your arm – is that clear?”

There were some very dubious looks from most of the students, so the professor once again
explained it, giving different examples for illustration.

“Right, let’s try it. Seamus, come out to the front please.” Seamus walked up to Flitwick.

“Now think a clear thought, and nod when you’re ready. Then I’ll throw the charm.”

Seamus concentrated for a few moments, and then nodded. *“CONFUNDO”* said Flitwick as he
aimed his wand at him. Seamus had a glazed look in his eyes as the professor said, “Now raise your
right leg.”

Seamus scratched his nose, and everybody laughed. *“FINITE INCANTATEM”* said Flitwick as he
removed the charm. “Don’t be discouraged. You’re all going to need plenty of practice to even
approach getting this right. Hermione – you next.”

Harry saw Hermione concentrating furiously before Flitwick sent the charm. “Raise your right
leg,” said the professor. Hermione made a great effort, and her leg twitched, but she also raised
her left arm and started waving. After Flitwick removed the charm, he was glowing in his praise.
“Excellent, Hermione. I saw your leg twitch. You will certainly be able to master this with
practice. Come on, Harry. Let’s see if you’re as good as Professor Lupin says you are.”

Harry walked out to the front, and started to think of his Animagus form, which he tried to push
to the front part of his brain. He nodded to the professor. *“CONFUNDO.”* Harry felt strange,
but still held onto the image of his eagle at the front of his brain. “Raise your left arm.”

Harry sent the image of the eagle to his left arm – and lifted it above his head. “Now raise
your right leg,” said Flitwick in a hushed voice. Harry raised his right leg. “Now turn around and
face the wall.” Harry did exactly that. *“FINITE INCANTATEM,”* said the professor.

There was silence in the room, before Seamus started to clap. The other students also joined in
the applause, marvelling at Harry’s ability to block the charm at his first attempt. Flitwick just
looked stunned, gazing with disbelief at Harry. “Thank you, Harry. You can sit down now,” he
whispered. He then recovered his composure and smiled. “That, class, is how you block Confundus. I
suggest you go and pick Harry’s brains – both physically and metaphorically.”

“Now split into pairs and try it out on each other. I shan’t be long – I’ve got to see the
Headmaster for a moment.” And he left the room deep in thought. Everybody crowded around Harry
asking him how he’d managed to do it.

Harry looked embarrassed and confused. “Well I just did what Flitwick said - no more and no
less. I really can’t tell you any more. You just need to keep a clear thought in your head.”

The others didn’t really believe Harry and went to practice on each other. Kristen turned to
Harry. “Come on then, Harry. Try it on me.”

“Are you ready?” he asked. After she nodded, Harry threw the charm but Kristen was unable to
block it, scratching her head instead of blinking her eyes.

“Oh, Harry. How do you do it?” she said after the charm had been lifted.

“Now do exactly like I tell you, Kristen.” She nodded. “Think about your Firebolt. Got it? Now
push the Firebolt to the front of your brain. Now when I ask you to raise your left arm, send your
Firebolt to your left arm. Ready?” She nodded.

“CONFUNDO”

Harry watched as Kristen poked out her tongue at him, but he also noticed her left arm
twitching. “Great, Kristen. You did as good as Hermione. Your left arm twitched,” he said as he
lifted the charm.

Kristen grinned and hugged him. “Thanks, Harry. You were a big help then. Come on, let’s
practice some more.”

Hermione watched as Harry helped Kristen. She’d felt a bit uneasy when she had hugged Harry, and
was a bit envious that he wasn’t helping her with the charm blocking. She shrugged it off, however,
and turned back to Ron, who had a finger stuck up his nose.

***

Ceri was sitting at her table in the guest room, reading a pile of intelligence reports from
Dumbledore’s spies, when there was a knock on the door. She opened it and saw Snape standing
there.

“Ah, Miss Jones, is Sirius Black with you? I have a piece of information for him.”

“Sorry, professor. He’s gone to meet a group of our spies in London, and he won’t be back till
this evening. Can you give me the information?”

“Well since the both of you are working together, I can see no reason why not. There’s going to
be a meeting of ‘You Know Who’ and his inner circle on the 21st December at midnight. It
will be a progress meeting, but I’ve heard talk that something new has come up and I can’t find out
anything more about it. It’s going to take place on the Isle of Lewis, off the northwest coast of
Scotland - inside the main megalithic stone circle at Callanish. Now there won’t be much cover – no
trees or anything, but there’s a lot of uneven ground surrounding it, and there’s an avenue of
standing stones leading up to it. So with luck, you should be able to find a suitable hiding
place.”

Ceri made a few notes as Snape spoke. “Thanks, Professor. I’ll tell Sirius when he gets
back.”

Snape nodded and left the room. Ceri looked pensively after him. ‘He’s a strange one,’ she
thought, ‘but I guess his heart’s in the right place’.

Sirius returned that evening, and Ceri told him about the meeting. “We’ll have to get there
early to find a good hiding place,” he said. “And wrap up warm - the Isle of Lewis is not where I’d
choose to be in December. It’s a wild and inhospitable place – marvellous in the summer, but
extremely bleak at this time of year. Still, we’ve got over a week to plan – perhaps you can check
the library for any photos of the site – it’s quite famous so there should be plenty there.”

Ceri nodded. “When am I going to meet your godson, Sirius? I haven’t had much time to get about
the school, what with all these reports to check, and I haven’t seen him yet.”

“Oh, you’ll meet him soon enough, Ceri. Did you hear about what happened in Charms class the
other day? Flitwick came charging into the headmaster’s office, and told us that Harry’d completely
blocked the Confundus charm – and at the first attempt.”

“That’s amazing! How does he do it? I mean he’s only 15 and yet so powerful. Imagine what he’ll
be like when he’s fully grown – he’ll be as powerful if not more so than Dumbledore!”

“Well I don’t know about that, Ceri. So – tell me – what do you get up to in the evenings? You
must be very lonely here - maybe you’d like to come to dinner at the Three Broomsticks with me one
night. There’s a quiet back room there, so I won’t be seen – as long as you don’t mind doing the
ordering. What do you say?”

“Sounds good, Sirius. I’m used to being on my own, and I don’t really mind, but I suppose a
change of scenery would be nice. Tomorrow ok?”

Sirius nodded and transformed before going out the door towards Dumbledore’s office.

***

“I don’t know, Hermione. I don’t think we’ll find anything. There’s just no reference at all so
far about Rhedae and Anima Summa,” Ron moaned after he and Harry had returned from one of their
shifts at the library.

“Now don’t give up, Ron. It’s only been a few weeks, and we’ve checked less than a quarter of
the wizarding books – and that’s not counting the restricted section.”

“But it’s all right for you, Hermione. You love reading books. But it’s so ... so boring,” he
replied.

“Oh come on, Ron,” said Harry. “It’s the middle of December – Christmas will be here soon.”

“Yeh, and so will the Yule ball,” he said with a miserable expression on his face.

“What are you all doing for Christmas? Is anyone staying here with me?” said Harry.

“Sorry, Harry,” said Ginny. “Mum and Dad want me and Ron to come home. Bill and Charlie will be
there and it’s not often that the whole family gets together. Hey perhaps Dumbledore will let you
come too?”

“I don’t think so, Ginny. He’s already told me not to get my hopes up about Christmas. He says
it’ll be safer if I stay here. What about you, Hermione?”

“I’m sorry, Harry. But my parents want me home too. I feel I must go because I may not see them
over Easter. They’re going to France on holiday then, and I don’t think I’ll be going.”

Harry sighed, “Oh well, it’s going to be pretty lonely, but at least I can go out and do some
flying – if the weather’s ok, that it. I really need to strengthen my wings.”

“So Harry,” said Hermione with a steely glint in her eye. “Who are you going to take to the Yule
ball?”

The frostiness wasn’t lost on Harry. “I don’t know if I’ll take anyone. I always seem to put my
foot in it when it comes to dances. How about you?”

“Nobody’s asked me yet,” said Hermione.

“Me neither,” added Ginny.

Ron looked from one to the other as they waited for him to say something. “Well don’t look at
me! I don’t know who I’ll be taking.” He glanced at Hermione, but got no reaction.

Harry went to bed that night, and went to sleep quicker than he normally did. The dream that he
had was different from anything he’d dreamt before.

Everything was dark. He had a feeling of claustrophobia – it felt like he was in a tunnel, not
dissimilar to the one in the mountain above Hogsmeade, but he was standing on a solid, level floor.
There must have been some slight illumination coming from somewhere, because he could just make out
a shape up ahead. The shape seemed to be moving slowly, but he couldn’t make out any details. Then
he heard it – ‘Come. Hurry. Do not delay’ – it was a low, ghostly voice that reached him. It was
not very loud and he had to strain to make out the words. Then the shape seemed to shimmer, and it
was gone. The voice had gone as well.

He woke up with a start – clearly remembering the dream, and trying to make sense of it. He gave
up and went about his usual morning routine, before going down to breakfast.

That evening, the awful weather had eased. The wind had dropped and it had stopped raining.
Harry called for a Quidditch practice session and the seven Gryffindors trouped down to the field,
happy that they’d get some flying in at last. The session went well and they tried out the
crossover move. Angelina and Alicia picked it up fairly easily, and Harry was looking forward to
using it in their house matches.

Kristen was doing well in goal, stopping most of the shots that came her way. She and Harry also
had great fun dodging the bludgers that Fred and George hit at them. After the end of the session,
Harry and Kristen stayed to do some racing - they enjoyed pitting their speed and skill against
each other. As they raced towards one of the goal posts, they were neck and neck. They streaked
towards the ground as if trying to get the snitch, the first one past the post being the winner.
They arrived at the ground together, and bumped. They fell off their brooms and ended up in a
tangle on the damp ground, both laughing joyously.

They both went to get up at the same time, and their heads banged together. Rubbing their heads
ruefully, they looked at each other and grinned. They both leaned forward at the same time and
their lips met. When they pulled apart, they stared at each other, both nervous of the other’s
reaction. Again they smiled and Kristen reached out and took hold of Harry’s hand. “It’s ok, Harry.
I liked that. Did you?”

“Yes, Kristen, I did,” he said, and pulled her close. She rested her head on his shoulder and
smiled to herself. She then reached up and wrapped her hand around the back of his head and pulled
him into another kiss. Harry responded with a feeling of joy in his heart.

When they again looked at each other, Harry whispered, “Does this mean you’re my girlfriend
now?”

“If you want me as your girlfriend, then yes,” smiled Kristen.

Professor McGonagall was standing at her window watching all this. She had a satisfied smile on
her face as she turned and went to inform Dumbledore of the development.

McGonagall was not the only one watching from an upstairs window. Hermione felt an icy hand
clutch around her heart as she saw Harry with Kristen. She felt sad and hurt. She angrily told
herself that she had no reason to be, but she couldn’t help but think back to the time when she and
Harry had kissed, and the wonderful feeling it had given her. Her mind started to play tricks on
her – filtering in unbidden thoughts – ‘that could have been me down there, if I hadn’t been so
stupid’. She angrily looked away from the window and resolved not to let it bother her. She would
throw herself into her schoolwork, and continue with the research they had started. No – she wasn’t
going to let it bother her – it wasn’t as if she and Harry were together or anything - was it.

The following day, Hermione was calmer. She had spent a sleepless night thinking about all the
things she would do, all the reading she would catch up on, and how to further their research. She
was happy that she had a firm grip on her feelings now.

She walked into the Great Hall for breakfast and saw Harry and Kristen together. She sat beside
Ron and Ginny and looked over at them.

Harry felt a little guilty as he looked at Hermione – but he didn’t know why that was though.
“Uh, Hermione, Ginny,” he said nervously. “Kristen and I – well, we’re together – as a couple, I
mean – we’re an item. Are you ok with that?” He looked at them nervously, waiting.

Both Hermione and Ginny smiled and nodded. Ron just sat there grinning, Harry had told him last
night when they went to bed. “So I suppose you’ve got a date for the ball then, Harry?” he
said.

Harry looked at Kristen, surprised that he hadn’t asked her already. “Is it a date?”

“Yes, I suppose it is,” she smiled.

After breakfast, they walked out hand in hand. A sudden hush went over the room, and there were
one or two gasps. This was followed by an excited buzz of conversation as most of the girls in the
hall discussed the new development.

Draco Malfoy didn’t need to do anything special to find out this little snippet of information -
he saw it along with everyone else. He got up from his seat and followed his well-worn path to the
owlery.

As Harry and Kristen went through into the hallway, Parvati and Lavender came up to them, on
their way to breakfast. “Well, and how are the love birds this morning?” said Parvati. Kristen had
told them all about the previous evening’s events.

“You really do make a lovely couple,” sighed Lavender.

Harry and Kristen both blushed furiously and went out of the main doors to go for a walk down by
the lake before classes started.

Ginny was deep in thought as she went out from the Great Hall. She didn’t notice a blond-haired
boy waiting for her to approach him. She jumped slightly when she heard him. “Ginny, I was
wondering. Would you go to the Yule ball with me?”

“Eh ... yes I’d love to Justin,” she said, smiling prettily. She had noticed Justin
Fitch-Fletchley the 5th year Hufflepuff before, and liked his assured and calm manner.
He wasn’t bad looking either.

“Great,” he said. “I’ll pick you up outside your common room on the night. Ok?”

“Yes, fine. See you then.” Ginny smiled to herself as she walked up to the common room. She was
glad someone had asked her to the ball at last, and she was also glad that it had been Justin. He
wasn’t Harry, but then nobody was Harry, except Harry.

That evening, Ginny told her friends about Justin. “He’s a nice guy, Ginny,” said Harry. “I’m
pleased for you.”

Ron, however, looked darkly at Ginny. “I don’t know, Ginny. Aren’t you a bit young to be going
out on a date?” Ginny was shocked and stunned. She knew Ron was protective of her, but this was
ridiculous.

“Sod off, Ron!” she replied. “I’m only just over 6 months younger than Hermione. Do you think
she’s too young as well?”

Ron looked sheepishly at his sister. “Sorry, Ginny. I’m only thinking of you, you know.”

Ginny’s angry features softened. “I know, Ron. But I’m not a baby any more. And I can look after
myself.”

Harry and Kristen went out for a walk, and Ginny went to her dorm, leaving Ron and Hermione
together. Ron looked nervously at Hermione. “Hermione ... I ... I was wondering. Um, w ... would
you go to the ball with me?”

Hermione looked at Ron feeling panic - she knew this would happen. And she couldn’t tell him
someone else had asked her – no one had, yet. She really liked Ron – he was her best friend - but
she only liked him as a friend. And she was determined that she wouldn’t do to Ron what Harry had
done to Ginny at the Halloween ball. She had to think quickly. “Yes, Ron. I’d love to go with you.
But we need to have a little chat first.”

Ron’s beaming smile faltered, wondering what she was going to say. “Ron ... I love you ... I
really do. But only as a best friend – nothing more. I’m sorry, but I can’t help how I feel. I told
Harry the same thing after you saw us that time. The last thing I want is to hurt you, and I’d only
be leading you on if I don’t say this now. Can you accept that?”

Ron’s face fell. “Hermione ... I ... ” He took a grip of himself then and hoped that his
disappointment didn’t show too much. “I understand. And yes, if you like, we’ll go to the ball as
best friends. I can handle that. Eh ... Hermione … it’s Krum, isn’t it? You still like him, don’t
you?”

Hermione was taken aback. “No Ron, it’s not Viktor. He was only ever a friend. I never liked him
*that* way.”

“But there is someone then? Someone you like?”

“No ... no, of course not.” Her face took on a far-away look.

‘Those jolts,’ she thought, ‘the hurt I felt when I saw them together, the excitement of that
kiss we shared …’ Her eyes filled up as the realisation hit her.

“Hermione?” said Ron quietly. “There is, isn’t there?”

“Yes,” she whispered, only now fully realising how she felt about Harry. That simple little
question that Ron asked had forced her to face up to it, and she couldn’t deny it to herself
anymore. She thought, ‘I should have known all along what those jolts were. But there’s nothing I
can do about it now. If only I hadn’t been so stubborn and stupid. But it’s too late now – Harry
has a girlfriend. And anyway, he doesn’t like me *that* way - he told me that he didn’t want
to lose me as a best friend. I’ll just have to accept it and get on with my life.’

“Who is it? You look a bit upset.”

“I ... I can’t tell you, Ron. He doesn’t even know himself. And I know that he doesn’t feel the
same way about me.” A tear rolled down her cheek as the full realisation hit her.

“Tell me, Hermione. Who is it? I won’t let anybody treat you like this!”

“No, Ron. It’s not his fault. He doesn’t even know. Now please, leave it.”

Ron was full of anger as he looked at Hermione’s retreating form. She was so lovely, so
beautiful. ‘Who the hell is this guy? I wonder if Harry or Ginny knows about this,’ he thought.

Later that night, after Kristen had gone to her dorm, Ron called Harry and Ginny over to talk to
them and told them what had happened with Hermione. Ginny was shocked – she thought that Hermione
really liked Ron. Harry knew different of course, but didn’t dare say.

“So who is it? Do either of you know?” Ron asked them.

“I haven’t got a clue,” said Harry. “It’s the first I’ve heard that Hermione likes a boy. Has
she said anything to you Ginny? You know – girl talk?”

“Not a thing, Harry. I’m as much in the dark as you are.”

“I’m not happy about this,” said Ron. “Hermione’s hurting – I could tell when she told me – and
I can’t bear to see her like that. We’ve got to do something.”

“But, Ron. If she won’t tell you who it is, what can we do? Ginny, can you have a girl-to-girl
talk with her? Try to find out who this bloke is?”

“I’ll try, Harry. But I can’t promise anything- she can be pretty deep when she wants to
be.”

Harry felt strange when he went up to the dorm. He’d had a jolt when Ron told them about
Hermione. But it wasn’t anything more than concern for his best friend – was it? Those kisses
they’d shared though. No – he’d already been through this with Hermione and they’d agreed then that
they would remain as best friends – nothing more. He had no right to feel anything more – and
anyway, he had Kristen now and he really liked her. But he felt the same anger as Ron. Who the hell
had the right to reject a girl such as Hermione – but no, he couldn’t think that way. Ron said the
bloke didn’t even know anything about it. Who is he, anyway?

***

The following day, Hermione was thinking about their research, and felt herself wishing that
they had the Internet at Hogwarts. She could find anything she wanted on the Internet. ‘The
Internet!’ she thought. ‘Muggle books – of course. We haven’t looked at any of those books.’

Since it was a Saturday, she knew that they could spend the whole day checking the Muggle
section of the library. There weren’t as many Muggle books as there were wizarding ones.

She rounded up her 3 friends and told them about her idea. They went straight to the library and
pulled all the likely looking books on places and travel onto the middle table.

They started to read through the indices of the books, but could find nothing. Deep in thought,
Hermione went back to the bookcases and started to browse through the titles. She came upon a book
entitled, ‘*Mysterious Places – A Review’,* and idly looked through the index. She found
nothing, but on a whim, turned to the back of the book and looked at the alphabetical
references.

‘Now let’s see – R … Rhedae – see note in chapter 12 – there it is!’ She’d found something at
last. She rushed back over to the table and excitedly showed them the book and the reference.

She hurriedly turned to Chapter 12 and they saw a brief footnote …

*‘Rhedae - The Visigoths founded the prosperous town known as "Rhedae.” In 410, the
Visigoths pillaged Rome and captured the massive treasure of Jerusalem, which had been taken there
by the Roman Emperor Titus in the year 70 AD.*

*The Visigoths were in turn, defeated by the Merovingians led by Clovis. Charlemagne, who had
become the all-powerful master of an immense empire, gave the city of Carcassonne to one of his
leaders with Rhedae being a part of his lands. It was raised to the level of a Royal City by the
marriage of Almaric, son of a Visigoth king, with the Merovingian Princess Clothilde, and it was to
become famous for its court.*

From the 11th century, Rhedae began to decline, being put to the torch by Simon de Montfort and
his crusaders against the Cathar Heresy. Thus the city of Rhedae disappeared forever, leaving only
the small village that still stands today. That village became the focus for one of the most
incredible mysteries of the modern era – the details of which are beyond the scope of this
tome’.

“What!” said Ron. “There’s got to be more on it than that!”

Hermione scanned through the book, but could find no further references. “Well, there’s got to
be plenty on this somewhere – we just have to go through the Muggle section and find all the books
about modern day mysteries. Come on, Let’s get looking.”

After an hour’s search, ten books were piled in the centre of the table. They each took a book
and started reading. After another two hours, only one book remained and they had found nothing
further about Rhedae.

“I don’t know about you lot, but I’m starving!” said Ron. “Coming to lunch?”

“Ron! We’ve only got one book left to go through,” said Hermione.

Harry laughed. “When it comes to a fight between Ron’s stomach and anything else in this world,
there’s only one winner. Come on, let’s go. We can come back here later.”

“No, I’ll stay and go through the book. You three go to lunch, and I’ll grab a sandwich later,”
said Hermione.

Ginny made eyes at the boys and gestured to the library door with her head. “I’ll stay with
Hermione. You two go.” They nodded knowingly and left for the Great Hall.

Hermione and Ginny settled down and looked at the index at the back of the book. There was no
reference to Rhedae.

“That’s strange,” said Hermione. “This book is about modern day mysteries, so there should be
something here. Wait a minute. Rhedae – that footnote said that it disappeared forever, leaving a
small village. I wonder if it’s called something else now – you know, like London. The Romans
called it Londinium before it was renamed.”

“You may be right, Hermione,” said Ginny, “but before we look any further, can ... can I ask you
something?”

Hermione put down the book and looked at her friend. “Of course, Ginny. What?”

“I talked to Ron last night. He told me that you liked somebody …”

“Ron and his big mouth!” interrupted Hermione. “I wish I hadn’t said anything now.”

“But Hermione, we’re all worried about you. Who *is* this boy?”

“What? What do you mean ALL? Who else has Ron told?”

“Calm down, Hermione. He only told Harry and me.”

“He told Harry? Oh no!”

“But we’re your best friends. And like I said, we’re worried about you.”

Hermione’s anger evaporated then. “Look Ginny, thanks for your concern but I can handle this
myself. I can’t tell you who the boy is – he doesn’t even know I like him. And ... and it’s best if
it stays that way. There’s no need to worry about me, so please forget it.”

Ginny wasn’t happy, but she had known that Hermione would react something like this. And she
also knew that nothing she could do would shift her. But she certainly wouldn’t forget it – she
knew what it was like to feel that way for somebody, and not have those feelings returned.

“If you say so, Hermione,” she said quietly.

“Right, back to the book. Now let’s see … let’s look at the chapter titles, maybe that’ll help.”
Hermione looked at the front of the book and run her finger down the list of chapters. “No … no …
no … what’s this? *‘A Merovingian Mystery*’ – chapter 11. That other book referred to the
Merovingians in the footnote.”

She eagerly turned to chapter 11, and the two girls began to read.

About an hour later, Harry and Ron came back into the library carrying two plates of sandwiches
for the girls. Harry looked at Ginny and raised his eyebrows questioningly. Ginny frowned and
quietly shook her head.

Hermione looked up from the parchment, which was covered in the notes she had made. “We’ve found
something – not a lot, but at least we now know where Rhedae is.”

“Great – where?” said Ron.

“I’ll read you my notes – there’s a bit of background to this mystery.” And she started reading
from the parchment in front of her …

*‘Berenger Sauniere was the parish priest of a small village set on a hilltop in the Langedoc
region of Southern France. During the late 19th and early 20th century, he had been receiving vast
sums of money to refurbish the local church and also to build many structures in the area. Sauniere
died in 1917, leaving the secret of where he got his fabulous wealth to his housekeeper, Marie
Denarnaud, who promised to reveal it on her deathbed -- but sadly she had a stroke, which left her
paralysed and unable to speak before her death in 1953.*

*Sauniere's confession before his death was so shocking that the priest who heard it
rushed, pale-faced from his bedside, having denied him absolution and last rites.*

*The mystery is made greater by several parchments found by Sauniere in 1891, which contained
a fairly simple cipher. They were apparently written by his predecessor, Abbe Antoine Bigou. The
parchments were, on the face of it, Latin transcriptions of passages from the Bible Gospels, but
they contained deeper mysteries. Sauniere also appears to have left certain other "clues"
in the highly unusual redesign of his church and of the other structures in the area. Hidden within
those Latin parchments was a message in French, which translates as :*

*"THIS TREASURE BELONGS TO DAGOBERT II KING AND TO SION AND HE IS THERE
DEAD."*

*Within the second parchment was an even stranger message:*

*SHEPHERDESS NO TEMPTATION THAT POUSSIN TENIERS HOLD THE KEY PEACE 681 BY THE CROSS AND THIS
HORSE OF GOD I COMPLETE THIS DAEMON GUARDIAN AT MIDDAY BLUE APPLES.*

During his reconstruction of the church, Sauniere is also said to have discovered a secret
chamber below one of the flagstones in the main aisle. When he lifted the flagstone, the underside
of it contained a carving of a knight on horseback carrying a child. It is thought that the child
was Sigesbert, son of Dagobert II, who was secreted to the city of Rhedae (now the village of
Rennes-le-Chateau) after the murder of his father – the last of the Merovingian kings.

To this day, despite research by writers, scholars, historians and treasure-seekers from around
the world, the secret of the mystery has yet to be revealed. This is not to say that more important
information and clues have not been uncovered. The following is a brief list of some of the
theories put forward as to what Saunière's secret might reveal:

*- Visigoth gold, which comprised much of the treasure of King Solomon including the solid
gold Menorrah, the seven-branched candelabra belonging to the Jews and of which all trace was lost
after its arrival in Carcassonne.*

*- The treasure of Dagobert II.*

*- The treasure of Blanche de Castille, being the ransom money for her son, St Louis, which
she later hid in the Rhazès after learning of his execution at the hands of his captors.*

*- An object of great religious significance such as the Holy Grail, the Ark of the Covenant
or the Menorrah.*

*- An important document, such as evidence of the marriage of Jesus and Mary Magdalene,
implying that their descendants still live on.*

*- The location of the tomb of Jesus on Mount Cardou, which is close to
Rennes-le-Chateau.*

*There have been many books written about the mystery, and further information can found
there.’*

“Wow!” exclaimed Ron. “I love stories about buried treasure.”

“Look at that line there,” said Harry, pointing to the item that had attracted his attention.
‘Rhedae – now the village of Rennes-le-Chateau.’

“That’s right, Harry,” said Hermione. “And the message from your amulet told you to go there –
‘where you will find the ancient secret to be uncovered’. Now this is telling me that the mystery
of Rhedae is not about a normal treasure – although it’s obvious that Sauniere got hold of vast
sums of money – but about something else, perhaps something spiritual – to many people, that is a
treasure in itself, greater than any amount of gold and jewels. And there’s something else that
this is telling me. You know how the ministry hides certain things from Muggles?”

“What – like making them think that Hogwarts is an old ruined castle?” said Ron.

“Yes, well the same thing could be at work here. We know that magic is somehow involved, because
of the amulet and the message, so there might be somebody trying to hide what the mystery is. But
in a very subtle and clever way.”

“How’s that?” asked Ginny.

“Well, what if someone wanted to hide whatever the secret is, but someone else found out about
it? And it certainly looks as if that priest found out about it. But what if he told someone else,
or someone else found out about it, somehow? Now if you wanted to keep the secret hidden, how would
you go about it?”

“Well I’d alter their memory,” said Ron.

“Yes, but what if you didn’t know how many people had been told or you didn’t know who the
person was who’d been told. What then?”

All three just shrugged, not sure where this was going.

“Well I know what I’d do. I’d start putting out a lot of misinformation – you know, write
articles or a book or get my friends to write articles and books about it, but each one giving a
different answer to the riddle, and each one false. Of course, other people not involved in the
conspiracy would pick up on it – that’s just human nature - and start to write their own books,
each with their own pet theory. That way, the whole issue is clouded, and you wouldn’t be able to
pick out the true facts from the false – and the book here says that a lot of books have been
written about the mystery, and it lists a lot of weird and wonderful explanations. I think it’s
obvious.”

“Brilliant, my dear Watson,” said Harry. “Hermione, you never cease to amaze me. How on earth
were you able to work that lot out in such a short period of time?”

“Harry!” said Hermione, blushing. “It really wasn’t that difficult. All the signs are
there.”

“Well maybe,” said Ginny, “but I certainly wouldn’t have been able to work it out.”

“So – it seems that Trelawney was right, for once. I’m going to have to go on a long journey to
the south of France. But how am I going to get to Rennes-le-Chateau?” said Harry with a frown on
his face.

“And if she’s right,” said Ron, “she also warned about great danger.”

“First thing – your not going, Harry,” said Hermione, “at least not on your own.”

“Now hang on, Hermione. Ron just said about the danger – I’m not letting anybody come with me.
I’ve got to do this on my own.”

“No way, Harry,” said Ron. “We’re not going to stand back while you get all the fun. We’re going
and that’s that! And don’t forget, the amulet message said about the helpers going as well.”

“Now that that’s settled,” smiled Hermione, “the second thing – before anybody goes anywhere,
we’ve got to properly research what we’re getting into. We need to get a lot more information.”

“But there aren’t any more books on it in the Muggle section,” Ginny pointed out.

“No. But there are loads in the Muggle world – this book says so. We just need to get hold of
them.”

“How are we going to do that?” said Ron. “We can’t leave the castle, and in any case, you said
yourself that most of them are a pack of lies anyway. So what’s the point?”

“Whatever the different theories, there’s always a grain of truth in them. Like the clues in the
unusual church design the book talks about – it would be silly to lie about that because anybody
can walk into the church to check it. There must be loads of other ‘facts’ that we can pick out
from all the available books.”

“All right, you’ve convinced us,” said Harry, “but how are we going to get hold of them?”

“I’ll be going home for Christmas, so I can get them then,” she replied.

“Hermione, the book shops are going to be closed all over the holidays,” Harry reminded her.

Hermione thought for a moment. “Then I’ll ask my parents to get as many books on the subject as
they can after the holidays and send them to us here.”

Harry reached over and squeezed her shoulder. “What would we do without you, Hermione?”

***

The buzz of excitement and activity among the girls of Hogwarts showed that it was
21st December – the day of the Yule ball. The Great Hall had been decorated, and twelve
huge Christmas tees were spread around the walls, each one adorned with magical ornaments that
twinkled, shone and twirled around.

The Yule feast had been eaten, and the band had started playing. Ron and Hermione were sitting
at their table watching Ginny and Justin as they danced to a fast number. They were obviously
enjoying themselves. Harry and Kristen were also dancing, but they didn’t seem to notice the tempo
of the music since they were still dancing very close together.

Hermione couldn’t help but sneak longing glances at them, all the while trying to hide where she
was looking from Ron. Eventually, Ron asked her to dance, and they joined the merry throng on the
dance floor. Gradually, Hermione got into the spirit of the time of year and was surprised to find
that she was enjoying herself. Ron helped a lot because lately, he had not been picking arguments
with her as he usually did, and they were getting on better than ever.

When the ball finished, Harry, Kristen, Ron and Hermione walked back to their tower together.
They had just given the password to the Fat Lady when a red-faced Ginny came running up to them. As
they went into the common room, she caught Hermione’s arm and gestured her upstairs to the
dormitories.

“Hermione – he kissed me,” said an excited Ginny as she sat on Hermione’s bed next to her.

Hermione smiled. “Are you sure that’s all he did, Ginny? By the colour of your face …”

“Hermione! Of course that’s all he did. It was my first kiss,” she said the last part very
quietly.

“So you really like Justin?”

“Yes, I think so. I mean - the kiss wasn’t like I expected it to be. Parvati keeps going on
about her first kiss being a mind-blowing experience, but it wasn’t like that. It was nice, though.
He was very romantic – and he’s a gentleman. He knows how to treat a girl properly and I feel
comfortable with him. Oh I had a great time tonight, Hermione. Did you?”

Hermione gave her a weak smile and nodded.

Ginny kicked herself mentally. “Oh I’m sorry – I didn’t think. Wa … was he there tonight? The
boy you really like?”

“Yes he was, Ginny,” she said sadly.

“Was he with another girl?”

“Yes. … Ginny, I’m tired now and I need to get some sleep …”

“Sorry, Hermione. I’ll see you in the morning.” Ginny thought about her friend as she went to
her own dorm. It was obvious that she wasn’t getting over the boy, whoever he was. She just didn’t
know how she could help her.

***

Sirius and Ceri were in the Shrieking shack that night. It was 10.00pm and they’d be Apparating
to Callanish a little later. They’d studied the photographs that Ceri had managed to find in the
library and had spotted a good place to hide.

“Are you going home for Christmas, Ceri?” asked Sirius.

“No. There’s nothing there for me any longer. I’ll just have a quiet time in the guest room
eating chocolates, and catching up on my reading.”

“I’ll be at Hogwarts over Christmas. There’s only a few of us staying – Dumbledore, McGonagall,
Snape and my good friend Remus Lupin. It’ll just be like old times – Remus and I were at Hogwarts
together as students. It’s just a great pity that James and Lily won’t be there,” he said
wistfully. “But Harry will. He’s the only student staying so you’ll get to meet him at last. Look,
Ceri, you’re very welcome to spend as much time with us as you like.”

“That’s nice of you, Sirius, but won’t you want to be on your own with Harry and Remus? You see
so little of them.”

“No, of course not. I’d ... we’d love to have you spend time with us. Settled?”

“Yes, as long as you’re sure I won’t be intruding. Thanks, Sirius. Look, we’d better be going.
We want to make sure that the hiding place is ok.”

They pulled their cloaks tightly around them as they arrived at the stone circle. It was
bitterly cold in the northwesterly wind that whistled around the large standing stones. They
quickly found the hiding place and looked about them. It was about 30 yards from the circle, near
enough for their Animagus ears to pick up what was said at the meeting. The spot was behind a
partially fallen menhir, one of a number that formed an avenue leading into the main circle of
stones. Behind the menhir was a large depression in the ground, ideal for a dog and a wolf to
crouch inside and listen. They transformed and settled down to wait …

The arrival of the inner circle followed the familiar pattern. First came Lucius Malfoy and the
other Death Eaters, followed by Voldemort and Wormtail.

Ceri was pleased to see that Sirius again held his anger in check.

“Report!” said Voldemort.

Each of the Death Eaters gave what turned out to be a progress report on their recruiting
activities. The last one, which was similar to the others, was given by Avery. “My Lord. We have
recruited 50 new servants in the last two weeks. We have found two spies in their midst, and both
are now dead. I am continuing to proceed with great caution, and our security is at a high
level.”

“Anything else to report?” said Voldemort.

“Yes, my Lord,” answered Malfoy. “Two matters of very great interest were reported to me by our
friend at the school. First, Potter has a new girlfriend. She’s an American exchange student
staying at Hogwarts until the end of the school year.”

“Interesting, Lucius. But no doubt Dumbledore is giving her a lot of protection if she’s
Potter’s girlfriend. Just keep an eye on things for the moment. We may be able to do something
later. And the second thing?”

“This is strange, my Lord. Our friend was present when Potter and his friends activated a
message amulet. He had the good presence of mind to write down what it said.” He pulled a piece of
parchment from his robes and read out the message. “Our friend has reported that they have been
spending a lot of time in the school library lately – he’s sure that they are doing some research,
but he doesn’t know if they’ve found anything yet.”

“Now that *is* very interesting, Lucius. Tell our friend that I am very pleased with him.
Does anyone know where Rhedae is?” Each of the Death Eaters shook their head.

“Hmmmm. Anima Summa. Now where have I heard that before?” said Voldemort, as much to himself as
anyone else. “I think that this is to do with the emanations – it must be! Lucius, tell our friend
to increase his activities. I want him to find out what Potter knows about this message. He has to
find out where Rhedae is, and if and when Potter plans to go there. If this works out, we can
intercept him and any of his friends, when they leave Dumbledore’s protection. I know that
Dumbledore won’t go with him – he’ll want to make sure nothing happens to his precious
Hogwarts.”

“Yes, my Lord. I’ll arrange it straight away.”

“Avery. I think you can take a break from your recruiting activities for a short while – leave
that to your next in charge. I want you to arrange a little distraction – a nice surprise for
Potter. Come to my cave tomorrow night and I’ll tell you what I want done.”

“Yes, my Lord.” Avery bowed to his master.

“This has turned out to be a very interesting meeting, my servants. Now go.”

Voldemort and Wormtail vanished, followed by the rest of the inner circle.

Sirius and Ceri transformed and looked at each other.

“What the hell is Harry up to now, Ceri? That boy’s got a nose for trouble.”

“Whatever it Sirius, it sounds pretty important to me. Do you know where Rhedae is?”

“Not a clue, Ceri. But knowing Harry – and especially Hermione – they’ll find out. And they’ll
try to go there.”

“Have you heard about this Anima Summa thing?”

“Uh … yes, I have. Very few people know about it – and we were all sworn to secrecy by
Dumbledore. That‘s the one thing that I heard tonight that frightened me. If ‘You Know Who’ finds
out what it is, he won’t rest until Harry’s dead – he may even stage a mass attack on Hogwarts,
itself!”

“So what is it, Sirius?”

“I can’t break my promise to Dumbledore, Ceri, but we have to go and see him straight away about
this, and I’ll ask him to tell you about it – although I don’t think I need do that. I’m pretty
sure he’ll tell you tonight anyway – he trusts you, Ceri.”

They Apparated back to Hogsmeade and made all haste to the school. Ceri and Padfoot had to knock
Dumbledore up from his bed.

“I hope this is urgent,” he said when Sirius had transformed. “An old man needs his beauty
sleep, you know.”

Sirius laughed. “You – old, Headmaster? That’ll be the day.”

The two sat down opposite Dumbledore, and told him what they had heard. “This is serious,” said
Dumbledore. “You’re right in your assessment of what Voldemort will do if he finds out about the
Anima Summa Sirius. Ceri, I think it’s about time we let you in on a little secret.”

He told Ceri about the prophecy, and everything they had found out since, including Kristen’s
birthday. “So you see, Ceri, it’s very important that neither Harry, Kristen nor anyone else finds
out about this.”

“I can see the sense of that, Professor. But haven’t we forgotten something? Harry already knows
he is the Anima Summa – it was in the message.”

“Ah, yes – the message. Harry seems to be getting involved in momentous things again, doesn’t
he? I’m not worried that he knows the term – but I would be if he finds out what it means. Now I
don’t for one minute think that he’ll find out – at least, not from the school library or any other
source I can think of. As far as I know, there’s only one book that gives the explanation – and
that’s locked safely away at my old University. The only person who may uncover something, or at
least have a good attempt at putting two and two together, is Hermione Granger. She’s a very clever
girl.”

“Do you know where Rhedae is, professor?” asked Sirius.

“No – but I’ll bet 50 galleons that Hermione has found out by now!”

“I think I’ll have to have a little talk with Harry,” said Sirius. “I don’t want him doing
anything stupid and I want to know why he hasn’t told us anything about this.”

The headmaster thought for a few moments. “No, Sirius. Don’t say anything to him for the time
being. Harry’s not stupid. I’m sure he’ll tell one of us two if he intends leaving the safety of
Hogwarts. Just give him some time – he and his friends are probably gathering as much information
as possible about Rhedae, and if I’m not mistaken, they’ll have a plan all worked out before they
decide to speak to us. There is something that must be done, though. I don’t know what Voldemort
and Avery are planning, but it won’t be pleasant and it will probably be sooner rather than
later.”

“Yes, what are we going to do about that, Headmaster?” said Sirius.

“I’m taking you both off your spying duties, for now. I’ve already got Remus keeping a look out
for Harry, and the others are watching all the possible Anima Summas – although from what Minerva
tells me, it looks like it’s Kristen Davis – but we can’t be certain. I want you both to keep a
close eye on Harry, Hermione, Ron, Ginny and Kristen. Work with Remus and Professor McGonagall on
this. It’s important that we protect them now, more than ever. I really think something very big
indeed is going to take place, and the safety of the whole world depends on the outcome - I think
it’s that important. Will your people be ok with this, Ceri?”

“They’ve given me a free hand, Professor. They’ve told me that if you authorise something, then
it’s ok with them.”

“Thank you, my dear. This may be a long-term job. It doesn’t end when Harry finds his Anima
Summa – they’ll both need to be protected until they can build up their powers – and no one knows
how long that will take. Now, the Christmas holidays start tomorrow, and all the students, apart
from Harry, are going home. Your immediate task is to keep as close to Harry as possible – although
you’re probably planning to do that anyway. Just make sure he’s accounted for at all times. Right,
time to resume my beauty sleep – Sirius, you can take the guest room next to Ceri. Good night to
you both – and well done. I appreciate your efforts.”

Sirius and Ceri turned to leave. “Oh, Sirius. One more thing,” said Dumbledore, turning. “Harry
might just have a little surprise for you – ask him, and tell him I said it’s ok to show you.”

Sirius looked quizzically at the retreating headmaster as he walked back to his bedroom.

***

Harry stood outside the main doors of the school the following morning. His friends were leaving
for home, and all the students were waiting for the carriages to take them to Hogsmeade station.
He’d earlier said goodbye to Kristen, who had taken a Portkey back to her home in America.

“I’ll be thinking about you Harry,” she’d said as they broke their clinch. “I hate going home
and leaving you on your own, but I couldn’t persuade my parents to let me stay.”

“Don’t worry, Kristen. The time will fly and you’ll soon be back.”

“Yes, I guess,” she said dubiously. But then she brightened. “But at least I’ll get to see my
friends and tell them all about you. They are going to be so jealous!”

Harry grinned and waved as she caught hold of the can of coke and disappeared with a ‘pop’.

Now he was waving goodbye to Ron, Hermione and Ginny as they entered one of the carriages. He
thought that Hermione looked a bit off colour – she wasn’t her usual self at all. ‘I bet she’s
pining over that boy she’s got a crush on. The git!’ he thought as his friends were driven through
the main gates. He turned back to the school sadly and walked back to the common room to do his
homework. ‘At least,’ he thought, ‘that will keep me busy until Christmas day.’

Harry opened his eyes to a chilly Christmas morning. It was snowing outside. He looked towards
the bottom of his bed, but was disappointed that there were no presents in sight. When they went
home for Christmas, his friends normally left his presents with Dobby, and he played Santa during
the night. Harry had given presents to Kristen and his friends before they left.

He went over to the window and looked out to a scene normally reserved for the prettiest
Christmas cards. There was about a foot of snow covering the fields, and the branches of all the
trees were bent over with the weight of the snow they carried. He was thinking about what his
friends were doing right then, when the door to the dorm burst open, and he turned to see his
godfather grinning at him. “Merry Christmas, Harry.”

“Sirius! Merry Christmas. When did you get here?”

“Oh I’ve been here a while. I’m staying in one of the guest rooms all over the holiday, so I
guess I’ll be seeing quite a bit of you for the next week.”

“That’s great Sirius. I’ve done all my homework, and I thought I was in for a week of boredom.
You’ve made my Christmas.”

“Well, don’t you want to open your presents? I told Dobby to put them in my room, so we can do
that together.”

“Great! Come on, let’s go.”

As they walked up to his guest room, Sirius turned to Harry. “Oh, and I hope you don’t mind,
Harry. But I’ve asked Ceri – you know, the American Auror – to join us. She hasn’t got any family
any more, as I told you, so she’s on her own and I couldn’t see her spending Christmas alone.”

“That’s fine by me, Sirius. I know what it’s like to be alone, and I wouldn’t wish that on
anyone, especially this time of year.”

Harry and Sirius were grinning as they entered the guest room. Harry saw a very attractive woman
in her early thirties sitting on a chair by the table. She had longish dark brown hair and hazel
eyes. She was smiling at them both, and her eyes held a twinkle as she pointed to the pile of
parcels on the table.

“Harry, I’d like you to meet Ceri. Ceri, this is Harry Potter, my godson.”

“Pleased to meet you, Ceri.” Harry smiled as he took her hand.

“You too, Harry,” she said as she looked at the youngster before her. She marvelled at his
bright green eyes, and there was no mistaking that scar on his forehead, above which was the
unruliest mop of black hair she had ever seen. ‘Whoever ends up with him is going to be one lucky
witch,’ she thought to herself.

“Come on, open your presents,” she said. Harry laughed and dived towards the table.

The first parcel he picked up had Ceri’s name on it. “Hey, Ceri. This for you,” he said handing
her the package, which was quite large.

She looked surprised as she took it from him. “Strange. I don’t get presents any more,” she
muttered. Harry heard her, and he felt really bad as he thought about the family she’d lost.

Ceri looked startled as she immediately picked up the strong emotions coming from Harry –
compassion, sorrow, understanding – and was even more surprised to sense that the emotions were
directed at herself. ‘He’s so mature,’ she thought, ‘kids that age don’t normally feel those sort
of things for older people, especially for someone they hardly know. Sirius was right – he
*is* special.’

Sirius noticed Ceri’s pensive look and guessed what was going on. “Harry, I ought to warn you
that Ceri’s an empath – she can feel strong emotions.”

“Oh – I didn’t know.” He looked embarrassed and said nervously to Ceri, “Sorry – I’ll have to
try to keep my thoughts to myself.”

She walked up to Harry and gave him a motherly hug. “No need to be sorry, Harry. Your emotions
then told me all I needed to know about you – and I think we’ll get on just fine. Not that your
godfather hasn’t talked about you – he hardly stops. So I suppose I knew you even before we
met.”

Harry grinned at her. “Well – aren’t you going to open it?”

She ripped open the package and pulled out a thick, fur-lined robe in a deep blue colour. “Oh,
it’s beautiful. But who’d give me this?” A small card fluttered to the floor, and she bent and
picked it up. She read it out aloud, ‘To Ceri – Happy Christmas – from Sirius.’

“Uh – since you’re forced to be in this cold climate, I thought it would be a bit warmer than
the one you wore last night,” said Sirius.

“Oh Sirius, you shouldn’t have. But thank you. I really appreciate this.” Her eyes filled up at
the thought that someone had bothered to give her a gift. The last time that had happened. … a tear
rolled down her cheek. She hurriedly wiped it away and laughed. “Come on, there’s plenty more to be
opened.”

After 20 minutes, all the parcels had been opened. Ceri had given Sirius a new wizard hat. “I
thought yours looked a bit the worse for wear,” she had said.

Harry was pleased with all his presents – this was turning out to be one of the best Christmases
ever. He grinned as he looked at Sirius and Ceri – it was like having his own family to share
Christmas with.

“Ceri, I’m sorry I didn’t have anything for you – I would have got something if I’d known. And
thanks again for the trainers – they’re great.”

“Don’t be silly, Harry – you weren’t to know.”

“Oh Harry,” said Sirius. “Have you got a surprise for me? Professor Dumbledore told me that it’d
be ok for you to show me.”

Harry looked puzzled for a moment, and then realised what Dumbledore meant. He grinned at
Sirius. “Well it probably will be a surprise to you,” he said, “but I think we need to go outside
first.”

Sirius and Ceri looked at each other and shrugged. “Well, I suppose I need to try out my new
robe, and you your new hat,” she said as they skipped down the staircase.

Outside, it had stopped snowing but by the look of the leaden sky, not for long. Harry walked
around to the greenhouses, and looked about to make sure no one was in sight. “Ready?”

They both nodded. Harry closed his eyes and concentrated, and transformed into his golden eagle
Animagus form. To say that Sirius and Ceri were surprised was an understatement. Harry looked with
satisfaction at their wide-open mouths and staring eyes.

It was then his turn to be surprised as Ceri transformed into a beautiful she-wolf, quickly
followed by the appearance of Padfoot. The two land-locked animals started running through the snow
down towards the lake, and Harry took flight and swooped after them, diving at them and pulling up
at the last moment. They frolicked about for a while before they all transformed, laughing
delightedly.

“How long have you been an Animagus, Harry?” asked Sirius.

“Oh, not long. I still need to do a fair bit of flying to strengthen my wings. Professor
McGonagall helped me with it after the summer holiday.”

“Who else knows about it – apart from Dumbledore, that is?”

“Only Hermione, Ron and Ginny. I’m illegal, you know – Dumbledore thought it would be a good
idea to keep it secret for now.”

“Well that makes two of us,” said Sirius. “I won’t register until it’s made public that I’ve
been pardoned.”

“Haven’t you told your girlfriend, Harry?” asked Ceri.

“No not yet. I’ll have to get Dumbledore’s permission first.”

“How is Kristen, Harry? Remus tells me she’s a nice girl.”

“Yes she is,” Harry started to redden a bit, “but we’ve only been going together for a few
weeks.”

Ceri again sensed emotion coming from Harry, but it wasn’t what she expected – she found it
difficult to read, and it seemed to be one of confusion – confusion about girls in general. ‘Oh
well,’ she thought, ‘he is very young and at a vulnerable age when it comes to girls. It’s strange.
He’s so mature in some ways but not in others.’

“How do your friends feel about you and Kristen? I mean they can’t be seeing as much of you now
can they?” Sirius asked.

“Oh they’re fine about it. And I still spend plenty of time with them.” Harry frowned slightly
and he continued, “I’m ... that is, we’re all a bit worried about Hermione, Sirius.”

“Hermione? Why? What’s wrong with her?” Sirius asked hurriedly.

“Well, Ron got it out of her that she really likes this boy – we don’t know who though. Ginny
tried to talk to her but she just clammed up. She says that this boy doesn’t even know that she
likes him, but she seems certain that he doesn’t like her that way, you know? We thought it was
just a simple crush, at first, but Ginny can see that she’s still hurting – we’re worried that she
might get sick or something.”

“Oh no, not Hermione,” said Sirius. “You haven’t met her yet, Ceri, but she’s the kindest,
warmest, not to say the most intelligent – and I mean mega intelligent – girl I know. I hate to
think that she’s suffering – she doesn’t deserve that.”

“Tell me about it, Sirius. If I find out who it is, I’ll knock some sense into him!” said Harry
angrily.

“It sounds like you, Ron and Ginny are very protective of Hermione, Harry,” said Ceri. “I think
the best thing you can do for now is let her know that you’re always there for her and just keep an
eye on her.”

“Thanks, Ceri. We’ll certainly be doing that,” said Harry.

“Right – Christmas dinner will be ready soon,” said Sirius. “I promised Remus that we’d call in
on him before we all go down to the Great Hall. Come on, let’s go.”



7. The Mystery of The Secret of Rhedae
--------------------------------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 11 1892 2003-01-01T15:54:00Z 2003-07-10T09:27:00Z 21 12012 68471 570 136
84087 9.2720 Chapter 6 The Mystery of The Secret of Rhedae

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Notes :** At the end of the chapter, I’ve given details of some images on my photo
album relating to this chapter – just click on the link if you wish to view them.

Harry spent a lot of time over the holidays with his godfather, Ceri and Remus. It was one of
the best Christmases he’d ever had. When the weather permitted, the three Animagi went out into the
school grounds and spent many happy hours bounding (and flying) around. Harry could feel his wings
getting stronger every time he flew, and he loved to just hover with his wings spread, riding the
air currents and watching the large black dog and the she wolf chasing around below him.

There was a full moon during this period, and Remus – a werewolf – spent the critical period of
his change in the shrieking shack, with Padfoot and the she-wolf for company. Despite his obvious
dislike for Remus, Snape still brewed for him the wolfsbane potion that eased the werewolf’s
natural instincts to search for blood and flesh.

The new-year was just two days old when the last day of the holiday arrived - too soon for
Harry, even though he’d be seeing his friends again. With Hogwarts full of teachers and students
once more, it would be difficult to find the time and space to practice his Animagus flying.

He was waiting in front of the main doors, students streaming past him, when he spotted his
friends getting out of one of the carriages. They smiled, waving, as they ran up to him, and
started talking animatedly about the holiday and the presents they’d had. Ginny was telling them
about the box of chocolates that Fred and George had jinxed, when Kristen came running up to them
and flung her arms around Harry, hugging him tightly. “I missed you, Harry,” she said.

Ron stood grinning at the pair as they kissed, but Hermione lowered her eyes and looked at the
ground in front of her. Ginny seemed indifferent to the display of affection – she had now well and
truly got over her crush.

“Come on, dinner’s going to be served soon,” said Harry and they all went into the Great Hall.
Harry hung back and looked at Hermione. She seemed a bit pale and her eyes weren’t as bright as
usual. He frowned as he asked, “Did you ask your parents to get the books, Hermione?”

“Yes. But they won’t be able to start looking for them until the middle of the month – they’ve
both got to go to an important dentists’ convention. But we can spend the time making sure we’re up
to date with our assignments, and we really should start revising for our OWLS. The more time we
spend on it now, the more time we’ll have to do our research when the books arrive.”

“But the OWLS are months away!”

“Harry – you can never start too early when your future’s at stake. I told Ron the same.” And
she walked ahead and sat by Ginny at the Gryffindor table.

***

Early January heralded the approach of the Quidditch house matches, and Harry spent most of his
free time holding training and practice sessions with the team. He followed the same pattern that
had served the school team so well, but this time he had a lot of trouble getting Fred and George
to put in the work – there were no carrots to dangle before them any longer, since their triple
fillet steaks had stopped after the match with Salem.

Harry spent many exasperated hours trying to think up ways to get them to train properly but
eventually, on the sound advice of Ron, he just gave up and accepted that Fred and George were
going to do things their way. After all, as Ron pointed out, they had been the best Beaters in the
school by far for quite a few years now, and that was without any training at all. When Harry
guiltily approached the pair and apologised that he’d been acting too much like their brother Percy
– who had always been pedantic in the extreme during his time at Hogwarts – they just laughed,
slapped him on the back, and told him not to worry about it.

The first match of the season would be between Gryffindor and Ravenclaw. Harry usually enjoyed
that match more than the others – the Ravenclaw team was not as dirty as Slytherin but were more
skilful than Hufflepuff. He felt that this was a match that tested his skill rather than his
ability to avoid the fouls that the Slytherins constantly tried to inflict on him and the lack of
any credible opposition from the Hufflepuffs.

And so the match day arrived, and the stands around the Quidditch field were filled with
students, excited that the season was finally starting. Ron, Hermione and Ginny found seats at the
top of one of the stands where they had a great view of the action.

Harry led the Gryffindor team onto the field to the cheers of the rest of his house, and the
boos of the Slytherins. He and Kristen were talking genially and smiling, both happy that they
would soon be in their element.

Harry walked over and shook hands with Cho Chang, the Ravenclaw captain, who smiled and wished
him luck – because he was going to need it, she said. Harry just grinned at her. Madam Hooch blew
her whistle and the teams took to the air. She then released the four balls and the match
started.

It turned out to be one of the better matches witnessed by the school. There was a lot of skill
on show, not least from Kristen, who performed admirably in goal. The Chasers were fairly evenly
matched, but after an hour, Gryffindor led 80 – 30, mainly as a result of the efforts of Fred and
George who gave the Ravenclaw Chasers a torrid time.

Lee Jordan, who was commentating, attracted approving glances from Professor McGonagall for
once. His commentary was almost unbiased – but after all, Slytherin weren’t playing.

As usual, Cho followed Harry wherever he went – or tried to. Harry couldn’t help teasing her,
and at the same time drawing excited shouts from the watchers, when he pretended to see the snitch
and went tearing to the other end of the field. Cho almost always fell for it.

When Harry finally did see the snitch, Cho thought that he was feinting again when he zoomed
towards the ground and she didn’t follow him. Unopposed, he clutched the wriggling snitch in his
hand and held his arm above his head as he lapped the field. Gryffindor had won 270 – 50. After
receiving the congratulations of his team-mates, Harry and Kristen walked arm in arm towards the
changing rooms, to the cheers of the Gryffindor students.

***

Late the following evening, Harry and Kristen sat in front of the common room fire with their
three friends. They each had a book open in their lap, and it was quiet – they were absorbed in
their revision for the Potions OWL. Hermione had bullied them into it at the evening meal
earlier.

Hermione looked up and saw that Ron was grinning as he read his book. With narrowed eyes, she
said, “Ron – what part are you reading?”

Ron jumped and replied, “Oh ... about the uses of Billywig stings.” However, he made the mistake
of slightly raising the book from his lap, and Hermione was able to see the title.

“And when did Billywig stings ever feature in Quidditch tactics?” She glared at Ron, who had
been reading, ‘Quidditch Through The Ages.’ “You’ll never pass your Potions OWL, Ron!”

The other three couldn’t help but laugh when Ron, stung by Hermione’s comments said, “Maybe not
– but they should have an OWL for Quidditch and I’d fly through that one!”

“Honestly!” said an exasperated Hermione.

Just then Harry noticed a flicker out of the corner of his eye. He looked up at the window and
saw a dull, reddish glow.

“What’s that?” he said to the others, and went over to look out.

“Quick, come on, we’ve got to help him,” he suddenly shouted. The other four rushed to the
window and saw that there were flames shooting from the roof of Hagrid’s hut. The bare trees of the
Forbidden Forest were outlined eerily in silhouette behind the hut. In the light of the flames they
could see Hagrid frantically trying to put the fire out by throwing what little snow remained on
the ground, up onto the roof. Fang was a little way off, yelping with fright.

Harry dashed to the portrait hole, quickly followed by the others, and hurtled through. By the
time they approached the hut, the fire had taken a firm grip. Hagrid was sitting in front of the
hut, his arm around fang, looking forlornly at the flames.

“Hagrid,” shouted Harry, “are you all right?”

Hagrid looked up. “Harry! Hey you lot stay away from those flames.”

“Quick,” shouted Hermione, “we can do the shrinking charm on the hut and when it’s small enough
we’ll easily be able to put out the fire.”

The five youngsters pointed their wands at the hut and shouted, *“REDUCIO.”* The hut
immediately began to shrink in size, and when they stopped the charm, it was the size of a doll’s
house.

“Stand back, everyone,” shouted Hagrid and he run over to pile more snow onto the flames.

Unknown to them all, six Death Eaters led by Avery had quietly come out of the forest and were
now standing behind them.

“Potter!” shouted Avery. “I thought our little diversion would draw you out. *CRUCIO.*” His
wand, which was aimed at Harry, spouted a reddish light, which hit Harry in the chest.

Harry, although startled by the appearance of the Death Eaters, instinctively applied the
blocking technique that Remus had taught him. He mentally drew shields over the nerve endings in
his chest just as the light hit him. Harry just looked back at Avery with a smile on his face –
silently thanking his professor. Avery was so astonished that Harry was not writhing on the ground
in pain, that he lowered his wand and just stared, disbelieving.

“*EXPELLIARMUS*,” shouted Harry. Avery’s wand flew out of his hand, and he was sent
crashing to the ground onto his back.

While Harry and Avery duelled, there was a lot of frantic action going on around them.

“*STUPIFY*,” shouted Hermione and one of the Death Eaters crumpled to the ground.

One of the Death Eaters, who had circled around towards the hut to try to get behind the
teenagers, lifted his wand to hurl a curse at Harry’s back, but he never managed to utter the
curse. He hadn’t noticed Hagrid crouched over his tiny hut, nor did he stay conscious long enough
to feel the almighty blow on the top of his head as Hagrid’s clenched fist came crashing down on
it.

“Get out of the light,” shouted Hagrid, and Ron and Ginny dived for the cover of darkness, with
curses thrown by the Death Eaters narrowly missing them.

Kristen was not so lucky. One of the Death Eaters yelled, “*FLIPENDO*,” and a ball of
energy hit her in the stomach, flinging her backwards towards a tree. She crashed into it and fell
to the ground, unmoving. Harry saw it happen as if in slow motion, and felt sickened as he ran over
to where Kristen was lying. “Nooooo,” he shouted.

Avery and the remaining four Death Eaters turned at the sound of shouting coming from the
direction of the school, and saw three adults fast approaching them. Avery, his natural survival
instinct now uppermost in his mind, and one of the Death Eaters managed to gain the cover of the
forest and disappeared into the darkness. Each of the other three were hit with stunning spells
sent by the three adults – Sirius, Ceri and Remus.

The whole action had lasted for only 2 minutes, at the end of which, five Death Eaters were
captured, one with a fractured skull, and Kristen lay, still unmoving, cradled in Harry’s arms.

“Kristen ... Kristen,” he whispered as he rocked her, his head buried in her hair.

Sirius, Ceri and Remus ran over to him, and Ceri gently pulled Harry away as Remus lifted
Kristen into his arms and rushed off towards the school. Sirius caught hold of Harry by his
shoulders. “Are you all right, Harry. Have you been hurt?”

“I’m all right, Sirius, but I don’t think Kristen is. She was very pale.” Harry raised his hand
to his cheek as if to wipe away a tear, and quickly followed the retreating figure of Remus
Lupin.

Sirius and Ceri looked sadly at each other and then went to make sure that none of the other 3
had been hurt. By this time, the fire had been extinguished, and the scene was only dimly
illuminated by the lights coming from the school. Sirius saw that there were quite a few of the
teachers standing by the front doors as Remus reached the castle. He saw several of them turn and
follow Remus inside, quickly followed by Harry.

Ron, Hermione and Ginny were taken back up to the school by Hagrid, while Ceri and Sirius
secured the Death Eaters ready for the arrival of ministry Aurors. Sirius transformed into Padfoot
as he saw Dumbledore and several of the teachers walk towards the hut.

In the hospital wing Harry sat next to the bed on which Remus had placed Kristen. He was holding
her limp hand while Madam Pomfrey quickly examined her. She shook her head sadly, and asked Harry
to leave.

“Harry, she’s still alive. But she must have hit the back of her head when she collided with
that tree and I’m afraid she’s very ill. I’m going to have to work quickly to try to save her, and
it’ll be more difficult if there’s someone in the way. Please go and find the Headmaster and ask
him to come here.” She quickly turned back to Kristen as Harry walked out into the corridor.

It took a week for Kristen to recover from her injury. Madam Pomfrey had worked her usual
miracle – much to the relief of Kristen’s friends. It was the first time that she had been exposed
to the sort of danger that had become almost commonplace to Harry, and it had left its mark.

The normally happy, effervescent girl was now quite nervous and subdued. Harry knew from
experience that it would take a while before she was fully back to her normal self again.

***

Charlie Weasley was in his hut, which stood just outside the large, dark forest in a remote part
of Romania. He finished packing his trunk, and sat on his bed, waiting for the time that the
Portkey would be activated.

His research into the birthing cycle of the group of Romanian Longhorn dragons in the forest had
now been completed, and he had written the paper that he’d be giving at the Dragon Convention in
London later in the year.

His ministry boss, Mr Smoothy at the Dept. of Magical Creatures, had sent him details of his
contact in France, and he was looking forward to the challenge of solving the problem in the
Forbidden Forest in the south of the country.

He looked again at the name of his contact – Demont Blanc. He had come across that name a year
or so ago at the ministry, and knew him to be the keeper of magical creatures at the forest.

He fingered the key ring, which was the Portkey that would take him to a remote part of the
Langedoc region in southern France - close to the Forbidden Forest, and not far from the tiny
principality of Andorra.

The time arrived and he quickly looked around the inside of the hut that had been his home for
the last nine months, before he found himself standing next to a dark-haired man of roughly the
same age as himself.

“Charlie Weasley?” asked the man with only a very slight French accent. He was staring intently
at Charlie.

“Yes, and you must be Demont Blanc. Pleased to meet you,” he said as he shook the Frenchman’s
hand. “I’ve heard a lot about you and your work back at the ministry in London.”

“Thank you. Oh, forgive me for staring like that – it’s just that I haven’t seen anyone with
hair quite that colour before.”

Charlie laughed. “A family trait, Demont.”

“I’ve heard about your work with the Romanian Longhorns, Charlie - very impressive. And that’s
why I sent in the request for your help. We have a colony of the dragons here in the forest, and it
was they that started all the panic.”

“Yes, I’d heard. What’s the situation now?”

“Well, things cooled down for a while but about three months ago it started up again at an even
greater intensity - and the dragons seem to be the most affected. But we can talk in more
comfortable conditions – come on, let’s go to my cabin. It’s not far away from here.”

They walked along the rough ground until they came to a small valley surrounded by trees.
Nestling at the bottom of the valley, alongside a sparkling mountain stream, stood Demont’s
cabin.

“It’s a nice spot here,” remarked Charlie.

“Yes, we love it here. Far better then the noise and fumes of the town.”

“We?” asked Charlie.

“Oh, yes. I was living on my own until about six weeks ago, and then my sister arrived out of
the blue. Affairs of the heart, you know. She’s just split up with her boyfriend. She’d been living
with him for three years, and then he found out that she’s a witch. I suppose he just didn’t
understand and he threw her out of the house with nowhere to go. She’s still very fragile about it,
but I can’t think of any better place in the world for her to get over something like that. She
loves the countryside and she didn’t really settle down in Perpignan.”

“I’m sorry to hear that. She won’t mind, will she? A strange man staying in the same house?”

“Oh no – not at all. She’s very friendly, but I’d better warn you that she goes very quiet from
time to time. Thinking about the Muggle boyfriend, no doubt.”

As they went in through the front door of the cabin, Demont’s sister was sitting by the fire.
She stood up and came over to the two men. “This is my sister, Nadine. Nadine, this is Charlie
Weasley – the dragon expert from London.”

Charlie shook hands with Nadine, and looked at her intently. He saw a pretty girl, with an elfin
face surrounded by shiny black hair. She had a cute little nose and her eyes were a deep blue. He
felt instantly attracted to her, but did his best to hide his obvious admiration.

“Would you like something to drink, Charlie? A glass of wine perhaps?” She spoke English with a
flawless accent.

“Uh, yes, fine Nadine. Red if you’ve got it.”

“Of course. Demont, can you get a fresh bottle of red from the storage shed please?”

“Oh don’t go to any trouble,” said Charlie.

“No trouble at all, Charlie,” said Demont. “We keep our wine in the shed down by the stream – I
diverted part of it to run underneath the end of the shed. We keep the bottles in the running water
– I swear it tastes much better when it’s chilled that way. I’ll only be a few minutes.” Demont
walked back out into the fresh mountain air.

Charlie and Nadine sat by the fire and smiled at each other. “So, Charlie, do you still play
Quidditch?”

“Only rarely, I’m afraid - I’ve been quite busy for the past …” Charlie paused as if he’d had a
sudden thought. “How do you know I play Quidditch?”

“The legendary Gryffindor Seeker and captain extraordinaire? Everyone at Hogwarts knows about
you, Charlie.”

“You were at Hogwarts, Nadine?”

“Yes, I transferred there from Beauxbatons for my seventh year – that was the year after you
left the school. Everyone talked about you and the way you won the school cup.”

Charlie looked a bit embarrassed. “What house were you in? Did you play?”

“I was in Ravenclaw, and I played Chaser for the house team. I don’t think I was very good
though. Have you been back to Hogwarts, Charlie? I loved the place, and it was a real privilege to
have Professor Dumbledore as the headmaster. He’s a great man.”

“Yes, he certainly is. I spoke to him last year when I was there. I was asked to set up one of
the tasks in the Triwizard Tournament – the one where the champions had to pluck an egg from a
guarding dragon.”

“Oh, so you must have met Fleur Delacour – she was the Beauxbatons champion.”


“Yes, I met her and her little sister. Do you know them?”

“I met Fleur when I was teaching at Beauxbatons. That was about four years ago, before I left to
be with ... well, lets just say I wanted to come back to the south of the country.” She looked down
at her hands, and Charlie guessed why she had left – the boyfriend.

She smiled and looked back up. “Did you meet Harry Potter last year?”

“Harry? Yes, I did. He’s a friend of the family – my youngest brother Ron’s best friend. He
stays at our house sometimes at the end of the summer holidays.”

“What’s he like, Charlie? You hear so much about him, but you don’t really know the person
behind the stories.”

“He’s just a normal young boy, Nadine. Brave as a lion, but otherwise he’s just like any other
teenager. He always seems a bit shy of his fame. So, what did you teach at school?”

“With a background like mine, there was only one subject for me – Care of Magical Creatures – I
really loved my two years teaching.”

“What did you think of Snape, Nadine?” Charlie grinned.

“Oh, that insufferable, slimy …” she was interrupted when Demont came back in carrying two
bottles of wine.

“Well, you two look cosy,” he said grinning. “What have you been talking about?”

“Well it turns out,” said Nadine, “that we have quite a lot in common. We both went to Hogwarts
and both played for our house Quidditch team. Charlie had left by the time I got to Hogwarts, but
we still knew a lot of the same people.”

“That’s very interesting. So you’ll have a lot to talk about over dinner, then.”

That evening turned out to be one of the most enjoyable evenings Charlie had ever spent. The
dinner served up by Nadine was delicious, as was the wine. The two former Hogwarts students talked
incessantly, reminiscing about the school and it’s characters, and Demont was reduced to being a
spectator, but still enjoying the conversation.

After three more bottles of wine, they were all ready for some sleep. “Charlie,” said Demont
smiling widely as he showed him to his bedroom, “we don’t seem to have got around to talking about
the problem in the forest – I wonder why? We’ll have a talk in the morning before I take you up
there. Goodnight.”

Charlie closed the door and smiled as he reflected on the evening. “Nadine is one of the nicest
girls I’ve met – and she’s beautiful too. Now that, I think, is an irresistible combination. I
wonder what she thinks about me?”

The next morning, Demont had to drag Charlie outside to go to the forest. He and Nadine just
seemed to continue where they’d left off the night before.

As they walked up the hill and over towards the outskirts of the forest, Demont looked at
Charlie quizzically. “That’s the most I’ve heard my sister talk since she arrived six weeks ago.
You seem to be a good influence on her Charlie, wouldn’t you say?”

“She ... she’s a nice girl, Demont,” he stuttered. “And we do have a lot in common – that’s
probably why she talked a lot.”

Demont grinned. “Do you think that’s it? I’m thinking it may be something else - no?”

“What do you mean, Demont?” said Charlie flushing slightly. “We’ve only just met.”

“Yes, I know. Funny isn’t it?”

They walked on towards the edge of the forest, Demont wearing a slight grin the whole time.
“Here it is, Charlie. The Forbidden Forest – shall we go in?”

They walked cautiously between the dark trees, Demont looking closely at the ground trying to
find the path, which started about a hundred yards inside the forest perimeter. “Here it is,” he
said. “We need to follow this path for about a mile, and we’ll come to a clearing where the dragons
normally hang out at this time of the morning.”

After twenty minutes walk, they came to the edge of the clearing. Charlie saw about twenty
Romanian Longhorns milling about, and the two men knelt down beside a bush to observe them. Charlie
could see immediately that their behaviour was unusual - it wasn’t normal for them to mill about
like that. He followed one of the dragons, a large male, with his eyes and tried to see if there
was any pattern to its actions.

The dragon stamped furiously, then walked across the centre of the clearing with his head
raised, as if sniffing the air. Then it would shake its head, and unfurl its wings before blowing
out thick black smoke, in which flames could be seen, from its mouth. It would then repeat the
pattern.

“This is very strange, Demont. I’ve never seen behaviour such as this. Something is making them
very nervous. Are the other creatures like this?”

“Yes – but to a lesser extent. They’re agitated, but not as much as these dragons.”

Charlie thought for a moment. “I wonder … Demont, dragons, and especially Romanian Longhorns,
are very sensitive to psychic vibrations. I wonder if they’ve picked up on something? Have you
detected anything like that?”

“No, I haven’t. But if there is anything of that nature I’m surprised that Nadine hasn’t picked
it up – she’s very sensitive, normally, to such things. That’s what made her such a good student
and teacher of Magical Creatures. She seems to be able to build up a rapport with them.”

“Well she *has* had a lot on her mind, lately, hasn’t she? She could easily miss something
if she isn’t focused on detecting magical vibrations.”

“Yes, of course,” said Demont. “Look, why don’t we bring her up here? If she can see what the
dragons are doing, it may help her to concentrate. What do you think?”

“I don’t know Demont,” said Charlie hastily. “It’s pretty dangerous. Those Longhorns can get a
bit nasty when they’re riled up.”

Demont smiled. “I’m supposed to be the protective one, Charlie. I’m her brother. But there’s no
need to worry - you know her Magical Creatures background now – she can look after herself.”

Charlie reluctantly agreed, and they both went back to the hut to talk to Nadine. She jumped at
the chance to get involved in the investigation – keeping busy would give her less time to think
about her problems.

About two hours later, the three sat at the edge of the same clearing, observing the same
actions being displayed by the dragons. Charlie had explained his theory to Nadine, and she now sat
with wrinkled brow and closed eyes trying to pick up anything unusual. Charlie watched her,
somewhat distracted from the task in hand, thinking how lovely she looked. He shook himself and
turned back to the dragons.

“Yes. Yes … I feel something,” breathed Nadine, her eyes still closed. “I feel strange
emanations coming from somewhere – they’re coming from a very powerful mind. It seems to be some
sort of summons, but I can’t read anything more - only an urgent summons.” She opened her eyes and
shook her head in frustration.

“Nadine,” said Charlie, “can you tell where the emanations are coming from?”

Again she closed her eyes and concentrated. After a few minutes, she turned back to Charlie.
“No, Charlie. I can’t tell where they’re coming from. They seem to be all around me, as if they are
reflecting or bouncing from various surfaces. More likely, the emanations are being reflected by
the minds of the dragons, and perhaps other magical creatures. Unless I can get close to the source
where there are no reflecting minds, I won’t be able to pinpoint it. I’m sorry.”

“Don’t be sorry, Nadine, you’ve already helped immensely. At least we now know what’s causing
the problem. Demont, we need to get our thinking caps on and work out what we can do about this.
Unless we can find a way to block those vibrations, then those creatures are going to remain
agitated. We really need to find out where they’re coming from.”

The three walked back to the cabin deep in thought.

***

Remus Lupin looked at his class of fifth year Gryffndors. They still looked a bit down following
the Death Eater attack.

“Today,” he said, “we’ll concentrate on curse-deflecting. I know that the attack of two weeks
ago upset you, and Kristen was hit by this very curse that flung her backwards. Under certain
circumstances, the Flipendus curse can be deflected. But before we start – Kristen, do you want to
leave? I know this will be painful for you.”

“No, Professor. I’d prefer to stay if you don’t mind.” Kristen, although still not fully
recovered, was feeling much better with the help and support given her by Harry and her
friends.

“As you wish, Kristen. But if you want me to stop, just say. Flipendus works by flinging a ball
of energy from the wand and hitting a person. The force of that energy sends the person flying in
the opposite direction. The force is also proportional to the power of the witch or wizard casting
the curse. So the curse sent by, say, ‘You Know Who’ would be much more powerful than, say,
me.”

Hermione’s hand shot up. “Professor. How can we practice that? You know what it did to
Kristen.”

“Don’t worry, Hermione. We’ll be doing it under very controlled conditions and I’ll use minimum
force – and only I will be using the curse. Harry, come on – let’s see if you can do this.”

Harry walked to the front of the class, where he stood alongside the professor. Remus waved his
wand and muttered a few words, and a large, bulky mattress appeared at one end of the room,
suspended from the ceiling. “This mattress will serve as a soft landing if you don’t manage to
deflect the curse.”

Again, Hermione’s hand shot into the air. Remus grinned and nodded to her. “Professor Lupin, if
Harry manages to deflect the curse, won’t it hit somebody who happens to be in the way?”

“Good question, Hermione. You can’t see it, but there’s an invisible shield just to the side of
that mark on the floor there. So if the ball of energy is deflected in the direction of the class,
it will be harmlessly absorbed. The only person who will have to watch out is me.” The students
laughed nervously.

“Harry, stand on the mark and face me. Right - you have to hold your arm out towards me and
concentrate. Visualise in your mind, a small metal dish – one that is small enough to fit into your
hand – then move it from your mind into the palm of your hand. When the ball of energy is released,
concentrate on attracting the ball into the dish. If all goes well it will bounce off with no harm
done.” He turned to address the rest of the students. “Again, I will warn you that very few people
can do this. Today, I’m only going to try it with Harry. If it works, then speak to him – ask him
to tell you how he does it. Then next week, if any of you feel confident enough, you can try it
under the same controlled conditions.”

Remus walked to the opposite end of the room and faced Harry. “Ready Harry?”

Harry concentrated for a few moments and then nodded.

“*FLIPENDO*,” muttered Remus. A small, dim ball of energy shot from the end of his wand.
The students watching Harry saw a dish-shaped concave glow coming from his outstretched hand. The
ball of energy hit the glow, and then bounced away, harmlessly hitting the protective shield.

When the students finished clapping, Remus spoke, “Well done, Harry. But that was a pretty weak
shot. Want to try a stronger one?” Harry nodded and again concentrated. The same thing happened as
before, except this time the ball of energy looked brighter. This continued until Remus looked at
Harry thoughtfully and said, “Harry, do you feel up to my strongest possible shot?” Harry again
nodded.

Harry concentrated and tried to visualise the strongest metal dish he could. He then sent it
down his outstretched arm, and held it in his hand. He watched as Remus shouted the curse, and saw
a very bright ball of energy coming towards him. When it hit his hand, he felt a surge of power and
the ball shot back past Remus’ head and punched a large hole in the wall behind him.

Remus looked stunned, and quickly turned and peered through the hole. He was thankful to see
daylight at the other end of the hole, and in the distance beyond he saw the Whomping Willow
flailing its branches. He could see a round smouldering hole in the tree’s trunk.

Not for the first time, Remus marvelled at Harry’s power. He knew that when the energy ball left
Harry’s hand, it had somehow increased in strength as it was deflected. There was no way Remus was
powerful enough to punch a hole in the five feet thick castle wall, and also cause damage beyond
that.

He turned to the class. “I ... I ... I’ve got to see Professor Sprout straight away. I think the
Whomping Willow needs some attention. Class dismissed.”

The other students gathered around Harry, excitedly asking him how he’d managed to do it. “I
don’t know. I just did as Professor Lupin told me. I suppose the key to it all is concentration.
Apart from that, I just don’t know.”

That night Harry and Kristen sat in front of the fire, talking about the next Quidditch game
against Hufflepuff. His arm was around her shoulder as she snuggled up to him. They pulled apart as
Ron, Hermione and Ginny came over to them and sat at the table by the side of their chair. They
were staring at Harry nervously, as if they had something on their minds.

“What!” exclaimed Harry.

“We’ve been talking,” said Ron, “and well … Harry, why do you think you’re getting so powerful?
Do you think it’s something to do with the message?”

Harry looked taken aback for a moment. “I ... I’ve been thinking about it too. And I just don’t
know how I can do it. It’s not as if I feel very powerful – it just sort of happens.” His eyes
clouded and he said quietly, “Do you think that ... that ... you know, when Voldemort tried to kill
me, some of his power was transferred to me? Or when he took some of my blood to make his new body
some sort of link was forged? If that’s the reason, then ... then is that why I’m so good with the
Dark Arts? And does it mean that I’m going to turn out bad as well?” He looked pleadingly at his
friends.

“Of course not, Harry,” said Hermione indignantly. “Think about it logically. You’re not good
with the Dark Arts – you’re good with defence *against* the Dark Arts. And anyway, those
charms you repelled in Flitwick’s class aren’t Dark Arts. So don’t even think of comparing yourself
to ‘You Know Who.’”

Harry smiled. “Thanks, Hermione. It must be right when you put it like that. What would I do
without you?” Hermione flushed slightly, a reaction that did not go unnoticed by Kristen.

Later, Hermione was lying on her bed in the dormitory, sightlessly staring out of the window.
Her other roommates were still down in the common room. Suddenly, the door was flung open, and an
angry-looking Ginny stormed in. Her face was flushed and she was literally hopping from foot to
foot, clenching and unclenching her hands.

“Ginny! Calm down. What’s the matter?” said Hermione anxiously.

“Oh that ... that … that toffee-nosed PRAT,” she mouthed with great feeling. “I never want to
see him again as long as I live.”

“Who, Ginny. What’s happened?” Hermione put her arm around her friend and pulled her down to sit
next to her on the bed.

Ginny started to calm down at last, and then a different reaction set in. Her face contorted and
she started crying, clinging tightly to Hermione.

“It’s all right Ginny. Please tell me what happened.”

“I ... I was with Justin in the Astronomy tower – we’ve been there a few times before.
Everything was all right. We ... we kissed a bit. Then he put his hand … Oh Hermione, I feel so mad
at him. What gives him the right to maul me like that? At least he’ll only be seeing out of one eye
for a bit!”

“Ginny! You didn’t hit him did you?”

“Yes I bloody well did - right in the eye. He won’t try that again.”

Hermione couldn’t help but giggle. “Have you told Ron or Harry?”

“No way – I think Justin’s a prat, but I don’t want him dead. Don’t say anything to them –
please?”

“I won’t Ginny. Come on. I’ll take you back to your dorm.”

That night, Harry again had his dream.

Everything was again dark although he could just make out the sides of the tunnel. He looked up
ahead and again saw the shape and heard the low ghostly voice ‘Hurry. I have waited long. Do not
tarry.’ He could just see some definition to the shape now – it looked like a human figure although
he could see no detail. There was movement above the figure, like an arm beckoning him. The shape
shimmered and then disappeared.

***

That Saturday, Hermione walked along the corridor from the common room on her way to the
library, where she planned to spend a few hours with her revision. Most of the students were
outside, where the sun had made a rare appearance.

She was startled when an arm reached out from behind a suit of armour and grabbed her around the
throat. She immediately tried to reach for her wand, but a large, bulky boy – whom Hermione
recognised as the seventh year Slytherin weirdo, Grimus Plonger, pushed her against the wall and
pinned her arms to her side.

Hermione looked fearfully up at the boy holding her. “Wh ... what do you want?”

“Come on, Granger. You know you’ve been asking for it – strutting about like that. Now keep
quiet and you won’t get hurt.”

Hermione stifled the scream that was building inside her and tried to struggle free. But she had
no chance against the powerful Grimus, who pulled her towards a doorway leading into a classroom,
ripping her robe from her shoulders.

She let out a long moan and closed her eyes, trying not to think about what was going to happen
to her. Suddenly, she felt the weight leave her arms and she was free. She opened her eyes to see
Grimus flying through the air and crash to the corridor floor with a loud thump. She also saw
Harry, his firebolt on the floor beside him, raise his wand and point it towards Grimus, who had
struggled to his feet, and was charging back towards them.

“*STUPIFY*,” shouted Harry, and watched with grim satisfaction as Grimus crumpled once
again to the floor.

“Harry!” shouted Hermione as the tears started to roll down her cheeks.

“Hermione. Are you all right?” he shouted back, desperately looking at her tear-stained
face.

“Oh, Harry. I was so frightened.” Harry went to her and pulled her towards him, his hand pulling
her head in towards his chest.

“It’s all right now. He can’t hurt you,” he said.

“Why did he do that to me, Harry?” she wailed. “He said I’d been asking for it. But I haven’t,
Harry. I haven’t!”

Hermione continued to cry bitterly as Harry tried to sooth her hurt, rocking her gently. He felt
very angry that something like that had happened to her. The feeling of protection towards his
friend was almost overpowering, and he couldn’t prevent a tear of his own from running down his
cheek.

“Come on, I’m going to take you to see Madam Pomfrey.” She let herself be led towards the
hospital wing, still clinging to Harry.

When Hermione was safely in the care of the nurse, Harry stormed into Professor McGonagall’s
office and told her what had happened. She looked shocked, and rushed out of the office towards the
hospital wing. On the way they met Remus who, when told of the event, rushed off to the place of
the attack to take Grimus in charge and led him off to Dumbledore’s office.

Remus told Harry later that Grimus Plonger had immediately been expelled by the Headmaster.

Hermione lay awake on the bed in the hospital wing. Although she was not hurt physically, she
had suffered a great shock. Professor McGonagall and Madam Pomfrey had insisted that she spend the
night there, so that the nurse could keep an eye on her.

Hermione kept playing the event over and over in her head, and she couldn’t get to sleep. As the
night wore on, the thoughts that were uppermost in her mind were those of Harry and the way he had
held her after the attack. That night, gradually, her love for Harry grew more and more evident to
her.

She hadn’t wanted this to happen. Hadn’t she told Ginny that any notion of romance would
distract her from her schoolwork?

‘I’ve always been in control of my mind,’ she thought to herself. ‘Why am I acting this way? For
the first time in my life, I can’t control what I’m thinking! He’s my friend! I shouldn’t have
feelings like this for him. Not that it matters anyway. There’s not a lot I can do about it – he’s
got Kristen now. What am I going to do?’

The trouble was - there were no books that she knew of that could tell her what to do, how to
act, what the answer was. Hermione was in a whole new ballgame, and she found it very, very
difficult.

Hermione walked into the Great Hall for breakfast the next day, and was immediately surrounded
by all her friends. They all wanted to know how she was feeling, and there were many angry glances
and comments directed towards the Slytherin table. Ginny, in particular, her eyes red from crying
after she had heard what had happened, stayed very close to her. She pulled her to sit next to her
at the table, and refused to leave her side for the rest of the day.

Hermione was overwhelmed at the show of concern and affection directed at her. She hadn’t really
known that she was held in such high regard by most of the students. That was one of two things
that helped to ease the shock of what had happened. The other thing was the arrival of a large
parcel from her parents. She opened it to reveal about fifteen books, all related to the mystery of
Rennes-le-Chateau - Rhedae.

***

The next morning, Hedwig came swooping over the Gryffindor table at breakfast, and munched away
at some bacon while Harry removed the letter from her leg. He opened it to see that it was from
Lara. Harry had written to her the previous day, keeping his promise to let her know how he was
getting on – but he hadn’t told her about Kristen.

*Dear Harry,*

*I was thrilled to see Hedwig at breakfast this morning – mum and dad weren’t though! I had a
job convincing them that there was nothing too strange about it.*

*Please be careful – I was horrified to hear that those terrible people are still after you.
How are Hermione, Ron and Ginny? They seemed very nice, although I only met them for a short
while.*

*Carol, Beth and Josie are fine now, and they don’t remember anything about what happened last
September. I had a very tough time from my parents after that – they wouldn’t stop telling me how
stupid we were to go off wandering through the woods - but things are back to normal now.*

*School is fine, and I’m doing really well in my classes. Mrs. Jennings, my form teacher,
keeps telling me that if I keep doing as well, I’ll have no trouble going to University after
seventh year. My dad says that I should try for Bristol University – that’s where he went, and it’s
one of the best for Maths and Physics.*

*I’m so sorry that things didn’t work out between us. I’ve become even more convinced in the
last few months that you wouldn’t fit into my world, and I wouldn’t really fit into yours. I can’t
help but feel sad, though – I keep saying to myself ‘if only …’*

*Have you got yourself a girlfriend yet? I still haven’t found a boy that I like as much as I
liked you.*

*Please don’t stop writing to me. I sometimes think that it may have been better to have let
your headmaster make me forget – but it is sort of exciting knowing that there’s a whole new world
out there that I’d never suspected could exist.*

*Please write when you get the time.*

*Love from your friend*

Lara.

Harry was glad that Lara seemed to be doing so well, although not without feeling a touch of
regret at the way things had worked out. He resolved to keep writing to her – it was the least he
could do. He was roused from his thoughts when Ron poked him in the arm. “Come on, Harry. We’ll be
late for Potions.”

That evening, Hermione seemed much better and did her homework with the others in the common
room. They kept glancing at her, but although she looked a bit tired, she was concentrating on her
books and parchments and didn’t look distracted in any way.

When they’d finished, they sat around the fireplace chatting. “Hermione, have you read any of
those books yet?” asked Ginny.

“No, Ginny, not yet. But I’ll start looking at them tonight and let you know what I find
tomorrow. Maybe we can both do some research tomorrow night.”

“Hermione,” said Harry, “shouldn’t you get some sleep tonight? You look a bit tired.”

“No ... no, I’ll do some reading first, then I’ll try to get a bit of sleep.”

At breakfast the following morning, Hermione spoke excitedly to the others.

“It’s amazing! There are so many different aspects to the mystery, and I’ve only just glanced
through the books. I wouldn’t have believed it - it’s a good thing I’m studying Arithmancy. But my
first impressions seem to be right – there’s so much stuff, and so many different theories –
there’s bound to be a cover-up going on here.”

“So what have you found out?” asked Ron.

“Look there’s no time to go through it now. And I want to do some more reading first – can you
help me tonight Ginny?”

“Of course I can. Well, until I get too tired anyway.”

That night, after their homework had been completed, Hermione and Ginny settled down in the
common room with the fifteen books strewn around the table, and several blank pieces of parchment
piled next to them.

“If we each take a book, we can make some notes of the main points and compare them afterwards,”
said Hermione. “Then we can decide which are the best items to research in the other books. What do
you say?”

“Sounds good to me,” said Ginny as she picked up one of the books.

They spent the next three hours going through the two books, making notes from time to time.
When they’d finished, they found themselves alone in the common room - everyone else had gone to
bed. Ginny yawned loudly. “Oh I’m so tired Hermione. I think I’ll go to bed. You coming?”

“No, not yet. Give me your notes and I’ll compare them to mine. We can decide tomorrow which
will be the most likely things to follow up on.”

“Ok. But don’t be too long. You need to get some sleep. Goodnight.”

But Hermione didn’t get much sleep that night. She *did* go to bed, after another hour of
comparing their notes, but lay awake tossing and turning. She couldn’t stop thinking about her
problem with Harry, but she still couldn’t work out what she could do about it. She found it
increasingly difficult being so close to him all the time and seeing him with Kristen.

For the rest of the week, Hermione and Ginny spent as much time as they could reading the books,
making notes, and researching the points that seemed the most likely to lead to the heart of the
mystery. They were both caught up in the complex meanderings of the vast amount of information they
uncovered. It was getting very complicated, but thanks to Hermione’s brilliant powers of deduction,
they were able to start to make some sense of it all.

By Saturday afternoon, they’d managed to compile a list of the places and facts that seemed
relevant to Harry’s message.

“I don’t know,” said Hermione, studying a photograph in one of the books of the first parchment
found by Sauniere, “there’s something odd about this. Look at the bottom of the parchment. What do
those letters mean – P.S. – it’s like it was a signature or something. And just above it are the
words ‘Solis Sacerdotibus’ – that means ‘Only for the Initiated.’ And look at the last letters of
the last four lines of the text. Reading downwards, they spell out SION. Now I know that’s another
name for Jerusalem, but could it mean something else?”

Ginny leaned over and examined the photograph. Ginny had been looking at a photograph of the
second parchment, and as she leant across, something caught Hermione’s eye.

“Look at that!” She pointed to Ginny’s book. “Pass it here, quick.”

Hermione pointed to the curious symbols at the bottom of the second parchment.

“If you turn the parchment upside down,” she did this as she spoke, “look what those symbols
spell out – SION. So from the both parchments, we get P.S. and SION. I wonder if the S in P.S.
stands for SION?”

“Let’s look for any references to SION,” said Ginny, and they grabbed some books and started to
browse.

After a few minutes, Hermione let out a gasp, “I don’t believe it. Here it is – P.S. – The
Priory of Sion. The Priory! That old wizard in the shop where I bought Harry’s amulet said that it
had just been sent to him by the Priory. I asked him about it, but he was pretty vague. He said it
was ‘everywhere’…. Of Course! I thought he was referring to an old church building. But look here
at this entry – it says that it’s some sort of secret society.”

Hermione’s eyes went wide. “Ginny! It’s beginning to make sense now. The reason that shop was
open when I passed it – it was obviously for me to get the amulet. There must have been a charm on
it to make sure I bought it! The Priory of Sion sent the amulet, and made sure I got it for Harry.
Lets look for more on it Ginny.”

“But why would they go to such lengths to get the amulet to Harry? Why not send him an owl with
the message?”

Hermione thought for a moment. “Well if they’re a secret society, they wouldn’t want to risk
revealing themselves – owls can be traced. And perhaps they had to be sure that Harry was ready to
receive the message – you know, when he became magically strong enough. If that’s the case, what
better way to do it than the amulet – it must have been waiting for the right time to give Harry
those feelings of urgency. What more is there, Ginny?”

After a few more minutes, Ginny said, ”Listen to this. ‘The Priory Of Sion – believed to have
been the secret founders of The Knights Templar…”

“The Knights Templar!” Hermione almost shouted, interrupting Ginny. “Harry’s amulet – the Knight
with a cross on his cloak. Of course, the cross patė – the symbol of the Knights Templar. What else
is there Ginny?”

She continued, “The Priory is one of the most secret of societies, and it showed itself only
fairly recently, following the French government’s edict that all secret societies had to be
registered by law. Recently, however, since the resignation of the last known grand master, Pierre
Plantard, they seem to have gone to ground, and no one knows who or where they are now. See
appendix H for a list of declared grand masters of the order.”

Ginny quickly turned to the appendix and looked at the list of the historic leaders of the
society.

“Let’s see,” said Hermione, “the first recorded grand master was Jean de Gisors in the
11th century … look at these names, Ginny, wow! Leonardo da Vinci, Sir Isaac Newton,
Victor Hugo, Jean Cocteau … Oh my God! Look at this, Ginny. From 1330 to 1418 the grand master was
Nicholas Flamel – you know, he was the one who made the Philosopher’s stone that Harry managed to
keep from ‘You Know Who’ four years ago. He’s Dumbledore’s friend!”

“What a coincidence – or is it!” exclaimed Ginny. “There’s a bit more here, Hermione. Listen to
this. ‘The Priory of Sion are reputed to be the guardians of the secret of Rennes-le-Chateau, and
their ancient charge was referred to in the long lost Aureus’.”

“The Aureus – I’ve heard of that,” said Hermione. “I know! It’s an ancient wizarding book mostly
about alchemy. But it’s not lost – it’s in the restricted section of the library! I remember
reading about it when we were researching the wizarding books before. We’ve got to look at it,
Ginny. There might be something that refers to the magical aspects of the mystery.”

“But Hermione, it’s in the restricted section. We can’t get it without a signed note from a
professor – and we can’t get that, can we.”

“That’s right. Hmmm … I think we’ll ask Harry if we can borrow his Invisibility Cloak – we could
go down to the library tonight.”

“YES!” gasped Ginny, her excitement making Hermione grin. “I’ll go and find him – he’s probably
down at the Quidditch field.” And she leapt up from her seat and dashed out through the portrait
hole.

A little while later, Ginny appeared with Harry in tow, panting from their run up to the
tower.

“So you’ve found something then,” he said. “Come on, tell me!”

“Not yet, Harry. Look, when we find what’s in this old book, we’ll have most of what we need, I
think. We’ll tell you and Ron about it all tomorrow morning.”

“Oh, ok Hermione. I’ll tell him when I get back to the field. See you at dinner.”

“Harry! The cloak?” said Ginny sternly.

“Oh, yes – sorry.” Harry went up to fetch the cloak from the trunk under his bed.

That night, when everyone was in bed, Hermione and Ginny pulled the cloak over themselves and
crept down to the library. Filtch didn’t seem to be about, but they had a scare when Peeves floated
into view and hovered just over their heads, looking around as if he’d heard something. They
breathed a sigh of relief when he cackled and zoomed off through the ceiling.

They opened the door slowly, trying to make sure that it didn’t creak, and crept over towards
the restricted section of the library. Ginny whispered, “*LUMOS*” and held the wand up to the
first bookcase. They peered down the shelves of books, until they came to the Alchemy section.
“Here it is, the Aureus,” whispered Hermione and lifted an ancient looking tome from the shelf.

They moved over to the nearest table and sat down, opening the book. They looked at the
reference section at the back of the book, and there was an entry – ‘Priory of Sion.’ They turned
to the page and started to read.

‘When the age-old secret became untenable at ancient Sion, Jean de Gisors founded the secret
society ‘The Priory of Sion,’ and a little later ‘The Knights Templar’, in order to give it
protection. Its sole purpose from that day to the present is to keep it preserved for the future
Anima Summa. But beware. This must serve as a warning to those who seek – the Anima Summa must not
know what he or she is until the secret is revealed.’

Both girls gasped as they read the final few words.

“That’s it! That’s the connection, Ginny. The mystery of Rhedae and the Anima Summa. But there’s
nothing more here! – We still don’t know what the Anima Summa is, or what the secret is. But, Ginny
– Harry’s the Anima Summa, we know – but we can’t tell him about this. We have to heed that
warning.”

“But Harry already knows he’s the Anima Summa – the message amulet told him that.”

“Yes, but he doesn’t know *what* it is. Come to that, we don’t either. But there’s one
person who might – Dumbledore. He’s Nicholas Flamel’s friend – and he was the grand master of the
Priory of Sion, the guardians of the secret. Dumbledore *must* know about it. But I think that
the least Harry knows about the Anima Summa at this stage the better. Ginny – I think we have to
talk to the Headmaster about this. I get the feeling that we might get in over our heads and Harry
and Ron haven’t exactly been cautious in the past. This is pretty heavy stuff - so much time and
effort has gone into preserving the secret - we have to get some advice from Professor
Dumbledore.”

“Yes, I agree. But come on – let’s go back and get some sleep.”

The next morning, Hermione woke Ginny early, and they went downstairs, intending to go to the
Headmaster’s office. But they didn’t get far. Waiting in the common room were Harry and Ron,
sitting by the fire.

“Harry, Ron. What are you doing up so early?” asked Ginny.

“Come on, you two,” said Ron. “We want to know what you’ve found out. We’ve been up for ages
waiting for you.”

“Yes, come on,” said Harry, “tell us what you’ve found.”

The girls walked over and sat down, resigned that Harry and Ron wouldn’t take no for an answer.
Hermione pulled several sheets of parchment from her robes. “We’ve summarised the main points of
the mystery. So are you ready for this?”

“Yes, get a move on Hermione. I want to know if you’ve found out where the treasure is,” said
Ron.

“Honestly, Ron! Right. First a little bit of history. Before it was known as Rhedae, the Romans
occupied the site. They came when they heard that there was gold in the area. They stayed for a
long time, tunnelling for gold – and those tunnels are still there. Rennes-le-Chateau and its
surrounding area are honeycombed with old Roman mines. Since the mystery became known in recent
times, treasure seekers have also been digging there looking for treasure – but they were stopped
when a few of the houses began to subside. The ground beneath Rennes-le-Chateau must be
riddled!”

Hermione paused for breath and then continued, “The mystery seems to have stemmed from the
arrival of the Knights Templar. They had quite a few strongholds in the area. Now the reason they
probably chose this site is to do with magic. Look at this.” She brought out a map of
Rennes-le-Chateau and the surrounding area and pointed to a number of known Templar sites marked on
it. She then brought out a ruler and quill and began to draw lines. She connected the five main
sites, with Rennes-le-Chateau roughly in the middle, and produced – a perfect five-pointed
pentagram.

“The whole area is enclosed by a pentagram – it’s a huge sacred pagan temple! And that’s not
all. The French painter, Nicholas Poussin, produced a famous painting – and Sauniere went to Paris
especially to get a copy of it from the Louvre.” Hermione pointed to a photograph of the painting –
Les Bergers d’Arcadie II. “This painting, the Shepherds of Arcadia, was commissioned by someone
connected to a secret society – The Priory of Sion – but more about them later. The painting was
constructed using the golden section, or Phi as it’s known – I know about it from Arithmancy. This
is a fundamental mathematical constant – a bit like pi – and is so perfect that nature itself uses
it. For instance, the spacing of buds on a stem and the spiral shells of sea snails grow in the
perfect proportion of Phi. Now a perfect pentagram is also constructed in the proportion of Phi.
Look at this painting – see where I’ve drawn the pentagram. And some of the background in the
painting is of Rennes-Le-Chateau.”

“Oh, Hermione. This is heavy. We don’t all take Arithmancy you know. Can you keep it simple
please?” asked Ron.

Hermione rolled her eyes and continued, “Berenger Sauniere, the priest at the centre of the
mystery, must have found out something from the parchments and the painting. He spent a lot of time
going on long hikes in the surrounding countryside, as if he was looking for something. Now
Sauniere refurbished the church with the money he somehow had, and the statues and Stations of the
Cross show some very bizarre things. It’s as if he was trying to hide something in his design.
There have also been several murders, one of Sauniere’s colleagues, a priest of a nearby village,
was murdered in his house. Many people think that this priest was the prime mover, and not
Sauniere. He may well have been murdered, either to keep him quiet, or to try to get him to reveal
the secret. Sauniere also had a lot of very famous and influential people visit him – strange for a
simple parish priest, don’t you think?

“He also started digging in the churchyard, and he uncovered a tomb – and he then defaced the
inscription on the tombstone, as if to hide something – possibly clues to the secret? When his
bishop called him to account for his great wealth, Sauniere refused to tell him, and he was
suspended from office. But interestingly, the Pope himself overruled the bishop and re-instated
Sauniere. So did the Pope of that time know something?

“Oh and yes, this will interest you Ron. The cipher contained in parchment 2 was quite
complicated. It uses the knight’s tour, from the game of chess, to reveal the secret message.”

“The knight’s tour?” said Ron. “Yes, the knight can be moved, using only it’s own special
movement of course, so that it lands on every square on the chess board. There’s only one solution
to that problem. Hmmm – interesting.”

“Yes,” said Hermione, “and the Knights Templar play a big part in the mystery. When they were
formed, there were only nine knights, and the first grand master of the order, Hugues de Payens,
and the other eight spent nine years excavating in Jerusalem – under the Temple Mount. They must
have found something, because the digging suddenly stopped, and within a few short years, the size
of the order swelled enormously, and they became very, very rich – even though they were known as
‘The Poor Knights’ – did you know they were the first bankers in the world? They had special
privileges from the Pope, and were excluded from paying any taxes. Kings used them to transfer
money, and also to raise loans.”

“Yes, very interesting Hermione. But what did they find?” asked Harry.

“No one knows. But when the order was destroyed in 1307 – on 13th October – that’s
where unlucky thirteen comes from by the way, they were accused of unholy and blasphemous
activities. Some of the knights who were tortured said that they worshiped ‘Baphomet’ – whoever
that was, it was never revealed. But Baphomet has been said to be the goddess Sophia. Sophia, in
Greek, means wisdom. So could they have been worshipers of wisdom? That doesn’t seem so bad to me.
Their last grand master – Jacques de Molay – was later burnt at the stake for refusing to denounce
his beliefs. But not all the Templars were killed. Some escaped by sea – it’s been said to
Scotland, and even to America, and this is way before Columbus! But it’s also been said that a
group of them came to Rhedae. Could it be that these knights brought the secret with them and hid
it there?

“And as for the Merovingian connection, it has been said that they were the descendants of the
lost tribe of Israel – another connection with Jerusalem”

Hermione continued to tell Harry and Ron about the connection with the Templars and Priory of
Sion, and about Nichols Flamel. But they left out what they found out about the Anima Summa. At
last, Hermione finished reading her notes and all four began to discuss some of the points.

“Hermione,” said Ron, “you haven’t said anything about the treasure.”

“Ron, I don’t think there’s any treasure – at least not what you call treasure.”

“But where did Sauniere get all that money – he was loaded!”

“I think he was paid to keep the secret to himself. Think about it. The Templars were involved,
and the Priory of Sion founded the Templars. And the Priory of Sion is the guardian of the secret.
When the Templars were destroyed by Philip the Fair, the king of France, he destroyed them to get
his hands on all their vast wealth. But that wealth was never found. What if it still exists – but
is held by the Priory of Sion, and used to preserve the secret? I think that the Priory paid
Sauniere to keep quiet.”

Harry pondered for a while. “Look, I’ve got to go there. There’s nothing more we can find out
from these books. The only way we’ll get at the secret is if we visit the place and start looking
around. I think it’s time we went to see Dumbledore - we’ve got to tell him what we’ve found.
There’s no way he’ll let us go there unless we explain all this to him – and he might tell us more
about Nicholas Flamel’s involvement.”

As they all trouped off towards the Headmaster’s office, Hermione hung back and whispered in
Ginny’s ear, “Don’t say anything about what we found out on the Anima Summa. We’ll try to go back
to see Dumbledore later.”

“What are you four doing here?” Professor McGonagall was just coming out from behind the
gargoyle guarding the Headmaster’s office as the four approached.

“Professor,” said Harry, “we’ve got to see the Headmaster. It’s about something important.”

She looked at Harry curiously, but didn’t question him. “Come on then, I’ll take you up.”

Dumbledore looked up from his desk as McGonagall led them inside. “Ah, Harry. I suppose you’re
ready to tell me about it then?”

Harry blinked. “Uh ... I ...”

Dumbledore’s eyes twinkled. “There’s not much that escapes me at Hogwarts, Harry. You should
know that by now. Come on, then, who’s going to tell me?”

Hermione walked up to the desk and laid out her parchments, diagrams, maps and some of the
books. “Now why am I not surprised it’s you, Hermione?” he said, laughing.

Hermione flushed, and then took a deep breath before launching into the story. She told about
the amulet, the message and their research. At last, after about an hour, she sat back down,
slightly breathless.

“I must say I’m impressed. Very impressed,” said Dumbledore. He looked at McGonagall. “I think
20 points to Gryffindor, Minerva?”

She smiled as she nodded.

“What about Nichols Flamel, Professor?” asked Hermione.

“Ah - Nicholas. You must understand, that although I knew him well, he had already lived quite a
few lifetimes before I met him. I knew he was involved in some secret things, but he never once
mentioned the Priory of Sion. I’m just as much in the dark about that as you are. But I do know
something. Back last summer, we had a prophecy from the centaurs. It said that you had to uncover a
secret, Harry. And thanks to all your efforts, we now know where that secret is hidden.”

“But why have I got to find out the secret, Professor?”

Dumbledore’s features took on a grim look. “Harry, there’s no easy way to say this to you, and
it’s one of the reasons I haven’t said anything to you before now. It involves Voldemort.”

Hermione, Ginny and Ron gasped – Harry just stared at the headmaster.

“Yes I’m afraid so,” he said. “It’s to do with his rise back to power. It seems that Harry is
the key to making sure he’s not successful in taking over the world.”

Harry looked stunned. “But ... but Professor. How am I going to do that?”

“I don’t know, Harry. But I think you’ll know when you uncover the secret.”

“So you’ll let me go to Rennes-le Chateau?”

Dumbledore smiled. “I don’t think I could stop you, even if I wanted to, Harry. But I must give
a word of caution. Voldemort knows something about this, too – Sirius and Ceri found out about it a
little while ago during one of their spying missions. It’s going to be very dangerous for you to go
outside the protection of Hogwarts. I can’t go with you - I need to protect the school, and I can’t
afford to be away for any length of time. So I need to give some thought about making it as safe as
possible during your quest. I’ll speak to Cornelius Fudge.”

“But that could take ages,” said Harry. “You know what he’s like.”

“I know, Harry. But I won’t risk you going off without proper protection. Now promise me you
won’t do anything foolish until I’ve sorted something out.”

“I promise, Professor,” said Harry looking a bit dejected. “Oh, Professor, what do you know
about Anima Summa? The message said that’s what I am.”

Dumbledore looked over his glasses. “Yes I’ve heard about it too, Harry. But there’s not a lot
that anybody knows about it. I’m still trying to find out things about it, but for the moment
you’ll have to bear with me. Right, I need to get in touch with the ministry. I suggest you go and
get some lunch.” The way he quickly changed the subject wasn’t lost on Hermione and Ginny.

“Harry, just one more thing,” said Dumbledore as they made to leave the room. “I understand that
you and Kristen Davis are together, is that right?”

“Uh, yes Professor,” said Harry looking puzzled.

“Does she know about any of this?”

“No. I haven’t said anything to her.”

“Good,” said Dumbledore. “As an exchange student, all of us need to make sure that she doesn’t
come to any harm in our country. I think it would be best if she doesn’t become involved in this.
Do you agree?”

“Yes, Professor. I do. I don’t want anything to happen to her.”

As they made their way down to the Great Hall, Hermione nudged Ginny and made eyes at her. “Oh,
I left some of my parchments in the Headmaster’s office – I’ll have to go back. You three go on
down and I’ll catch up with you later.”

“I’ll come with you, Hermione,” said Ginny.

As they walked back along the corridor, they were stopped by Professor McGonagall. “I thought
you were going to lunch?”

“We need to speak to the headmaster about something, Professor,” said Hermione.

She looked at the two girls appraisingly. “Come on then, follow me,” and the three went up into
the office.

“Professor Dumbledore, we didn’t quite tell you everything earlier,” said Hermione, “and please
don’t think me rude, but I don’t think you told us everything either. It’s about the Anima
Summa.”

“Go on,” prompted Dumbledore.

“Well, we found something about it in the library. The book said that the secret has been
preserved for the Anima Summa, and it warned against him finding out what he is. That’s why we
didn’t say anything – we didn’t want Harry to find out what we knew. Can you tell us any more about
it?”

Dumbledore stared at the girls over his glasses for a few seconds. “I’m surprised at you – I
suppose you sneaked into the restricted section to find that book?”

Hermione and Ginny flushed. “How did you … I’m sorry Professor,” said Hermione, knowing better
than to try to lie.

Dumbledore grinned. “Don’t worry, I won’t take the twenty points back. I should have known you’d
rip the place apart to try to solve this riddle. Go on, sit down – I’ll tell you what I know. But
be warned – what I’m going to tell you must not leave these four walls – only a few people know
about it, and it is absolutely essential that Harry doesn’t find out. Do I make myself clear?”

Hermione nodded.

“We promise, Professor,” said Ginny.

The Headmaster told them what he had found out, and that Merlin and Morgana were the only
recorded pair of Anima Summas.

“But how can you compare Harry to Merlin?” gasped Ginny.

“You’ve probably seen how strong, magically, Harry is getting. And he’s still developing. So who
knows?”

“Do you have any idea who Harry’s mate is?” asked Hermione quietly.

Dumbledore looked at her, wondering whether to tell them the last bit of information. He sighed
and then said, “The final thing we know about the female, is that she must be conceived exactly
three months after Harry. In other words, her birthday must be on or near to 31st
October 1980.”

Hermione was stunned as she heard the date. She couldn’t say anything. She knew, finally, that
Harry was completely beyond her. Even though he was with Kristen, there was still some shred of
hope in her mind that she’d someday get together with him. Now that hope was dashed and she
struggled to stop the tears falling.

Ginny looked at her and saw the anguish in her eyes. Then she looked back at Dumbledore.
“Professor, do you have any idea who the girl is?”

“There are just three possibilities that we know of, Ginny. Pansy Parkinson ...”

“Hah! No way,” she shouted. “ … Sorry, Professor”

“Hannah Abbot …”

“She’s been tied at the hip to Ernie McMillan for two years,” said Ginny.

“And Kristen Davis. Her birthday is on 31st October 1980.”

Both Ginny and Hermione stared.

“But Harry and Kristen are together already,” said Ginny, “but I haven’t noticed anything
unusual between them - except, of course that Harry seems very protective towards her. Could there
be some mistake?”

“There’s no mistake, Ginny – at least not about the birth date. Don’t forget they’re both very
young, and although Harry’s powers are increasing, so far, Kristen’s haven’t. But there’s plenty of
time for them to develop. And the prophecy says that Harry must join with his Anima Summa
*after* he uncovers the secret of Rhedae. So there’s still time for her powers to develop.

“You must keep this to yourselves. Tell no one – not Harry, not Kristen, not Ron. Make sure that
your attitudes to the girl remain exactly as they have been, otherwise you might invite unwanted
questions from them. Now I’m trusting you both with this information – mainly to stop you digging
any further. Now I suggest you get some lunch.”

Outside in the corridor, Hermione told Ginny to go down to lunch without her. “I ... I’m not
hungry. I think I’ll go back to the common room and catch up on some reading.” Ginny had a worried
look on her face as she stared after her friend.

***

“How are we going to get near the source of these emanations?” asked Demont as he sat with
Charlie and Nadine eating lunch. “Nadine, is there some way you can get a general direction –
anything to help us?”

“I’m sorry, Demont, there’s nothing I can think of that will help,” she replied.

Charlie thought for a while, and asked Nadine, “If we were to go to various places, say within a
twenty mile radius of the forest, and you felt the emanations at each of those spots, would it give
you a better idea of the source – a sort of triangulation exercise?”

“It’s possible, Charlie, but I really don’t know.”

“Well that’s the best idea we’ve had so far,” said Demont. “I suggest we look at a map of the
general area and mark some prominent locations – hills, villages for example, and then tomorrow we
can start to visit them and see what happens.”

“That sounds ok, Demont,” said Charlie, “but how are we going to get to each site? It’ll be
dangerous to Apparate – there’s bound to be loads of Muggles about.”

“We can use my Land Rover,” said Nadine. “It’ll be nice to drive it again, and the 4-wheel drive
will be great in the rough terrain.”

That afternoon, the three pored over a large-scale map of the district, and marked out ten
sites. They used the middle of the forest as the starting point, and measured roughly twenty miles
in ten different directions, to arrive at the chosen places. They then discussed where they’d
start.

“It doesn’t really matter, I suppose,” said Demont. “Lets start to the south – say in Andorra,
and then work around to the east before going north, and then back around to the west. Does that
sound ok?”

“Yes, but that’s a lot of miles to cover. It’ll take us days and days!” exclaimed Nadine.

“We’ll take the two tents,” said Demont. “Charlie and I can share one, right Charlie?”

“Hey I’m used to the outdoors life – no problem. How about you, Nadine?”

“It’ll take me back to when I was young. We always used to go camping, didn’t we Demont?”

Demont smiled. “Our parents always took us camping, back then.”

The following day, they started out early, driving over rough tracks to get to the tarmac road
leading into the Pyrenees and Andorra. They arrived around lunchtime, and stopped at the top of a
rugged pass, still covered with the winter snows. They got out of the Land Rover, and walked over
to a slight rise, facing in the general direction of the Forbidden Forest.

“Right Nadine,” said Demont, “see if you can still detect the vibrations.”

Nadine closed her eyes and concentrated. After a little while, she opened them again. “It’s the
same. I can’t get a direction – but I think it’s just a little weaker than before.”

Charlie made a note on the map, and they drove into a nearby village to have lunch, before
turning back eastwards to their next point on the map.

After five days travelling, they had reached the northern-most point. It was here that Nadine
detected a change. “I still can’t get a direction,” she said, “but it feels stronger, the strongest
since we started.”

“Great, we’re getting somewhere,” said Demont. “I think the best thing we can do now, is go
straight to the most westerly point, and try there.”

They arrived in the late evening, and Nadine tried once again. “It’s weaker than the last time,”
she said.

“Well it certainly looks as if the source is somewhere north of the forest,” said Charlie.
“Let’s camp here tonight, and then go back to the cabin and decide which locations to search
next.”

After Demont went into the tent, conveniently feeling tired, Charlie and Nadine sat chatting
around the campfire they’d made. Charlie’s attraction for the pretty French girl had, if anything,
grown stronger during their expedition, but he didn’t really know how to proceed. He knew that
Nadine was probably still hurting after the split with her boyfriend and he didn’t want to rush
anything. The last thing he wanted was to frighten her away.

“So how are you feeling, Nadine? Demont told me that you hadn’t been well, and you came up here
to recuperate.”

Nadine laughed sadly. “I’m sure Demont told you about me and my boyfriend, Charlie. Three years
together is a long time – and to have it end like that wasn’t very nice.”

“Do you still have feelings for him?”

“Well I thought I did, but I’m not so sure now. I suppose the mountain air and beautiful
countryside has made me think a bit more clearly about things.”

“If ever you feel the need to talk ... well ... I want you to know that I’m a good
listener.”

She smiled. “Thank you Charlie, I may take you up on that sometime. Well, goodnight.” She rose
from the campfire and went back to her tent, leaving Charlie to ponder on whether there was any
hidden meaning in her last remarks.

***

The arrival of March saw the start of spring. The plants and flowers in the grounds at Hogwarts
started to push their new shoots into the cool air, and the trees started to bud. It was the start
of a beautiful time of the year, and held the promise of new beginnings - new life.

It seemed to be a bit lighter this time and Harry could just make out the rough contours of the
tunnel he was in. He moved along it cautiously, looking ahead for the shape. And there it was –
more distinct now, but still not clear in the dim light. It was definitely the shape of a human,
and there was a long tunic, over the chain mail it was wearing. He couldn’t see the face, but an
arm was raised – beckoning to him. He heard again the low voice, calling him – ‘Hurry. I have
waited long. Come quickly.

Harry woke and leaned over to his bedside table for his glasses. The sun shone feebly through
the window of his dorm, showing the sleeping forms of his roommates. He lay back down and thought
about the dream he’d just had. The dream was becoming more frequent now, and was getting clearer
each time it happened. He knew that he had to do something – the note of urgency in that voice was
clear.

He woke Ron, and then dressed, and they both went down to the common room, where they saw
Hermione sleeping in one of the chairs, a load of schoolbooks strewn around the table in front of
her. Harry walked up and gently shook her shoulder, and she opened bleary eyes. “Harry – wh ...
what?”

“How long have you been here, Hermione? You haven’t been to bed, have you!” said Ron.

“Uh, no. I must have dropped off last night,” she replied.

Harry and Ron sat down opposite her, and looked at her pale face. “Hermione, Ron,” said Harry,
“I’ve had that dream again – the one where I’m in the tunnel. It must be something to do with the
secret, and it’s getting urgent now. I feel I’ve got to do something – I’ve got to get to
Rennes-le-Chateau as soon as possible.”

“You can’t go yet, Harry,” said Hermione. “You know what the Headmaster said. Look, you wait
here. I’ll get showered and changed and wake Ginny. We can all go to see Professor Dumbledore
before breakfast.”

***

“So that’s what they’ve been up to,” muttered Sirius. He and Ceri were sitting in Dumbledore’s
office, together with McGonagall, Lupin and Snape. They had just heard the Headmaster’s account of
his meeting with Harry and his friends, and his efforts to arrange protection with the
ministry.

“They’re certainly a very resourceful bunch of kids,” said Ceri.

“More nosey, I’d say,” chipped in Snape. “How they’ve found the time to do all that research is
beyond me – they should be studying for their OWLS. Lord knows they need to for Potions!”

“Now, now Severus,” said McGonagall. “All four of them have shown true Gryffindor qualities –
and I’m proud of them.”

“Just like his father ...” chuckled Remus as he looked at Sirius.

Dumbledore turned his head as if he were listening. “Ah, I see the intrepid four want to see me,
they’re down by the gargoyle trying to figure out my latest password.” He waved his wand, and they
soon heard four pairs of feet walking towards the office. “You haven’t met Harry’s friends yet,
have you Ceri?”

“No, Professor. I’ve seen them around the school, but I haven’t spoken to them.”

“Well now’s your chance,” he said as the door opened, to show four surprised faces as they saw
the roomful of people.

“Oh, sorry Professor. We didn’t know you were in a meeting. We can come back later,” said Harry,
turning to go back out.

“No, it’s all right, Harry. Come on in. The more the merrier. As a matter of fact, we’ve just
been discussing your exploits, and I suppose you want to see me concerning that?”

“Uh, I ... I …” stuttered Harry, looking towards the sneering face of Snape.

“It’s all right. Everyone here knows about Rennes-le-Chateau. This is my, uh, inner circle I
suppose you’d call it. Come on, sit down all of you,” he said as he raised an eyebrow enquiringly
at them.

“It’s Harry,” said Ron. “He’s been getting this dream.”

“Yes, Professor,” said Harry. “I’ve been getting it for over a month now. But last night it was
more urgent.” He told them all about his dream and that he thought it was connected with the
mystery. “So you see, I really need to go to France as soon as I can.”

“Yes, I see,” said the Headmaster thoughtfully. “But we can’t ignore the warnings of danger. And
we know that Voldemort is waiting for you to leave the safety of Hogwarts. Look, Harry, I’ll get
back on to the minister this morning. I’ve been waiting for him to let me know what support he can
provide.”

“Do you think we’ll have to wait long?” asked Hermione.

“I don’t know. But I’ll do my best to hurry him up. You know, of course, that you can’t do
anything until this has been sorted out?”

“Yes, Professor, I know,” said Harry.

“Right. That’s all for this morning. I think we all need our breakfast now. Oh, Sirius, Ceri,
will you stay for a moment. And you four as well,” he said looking at Harry and his friends. “I’ll
leave you to get acquainted,” and he followed the other teachers out of the office.

“I know you’ve seen her around the school,” said Sirius, “and she helped when those Death Eaters
attacked you. But I’d like you three to officially meet Ceri Jones. She’s from the United States
and she’s been working with me since last September. Ceri these are Harry’s best friends – Ron,
Ginny, and Hermione.”

Each of the three shook Ceri’s hand, first Ron, then Ginny and then Hermione. Ceri winced
visibly when she looked into Hermione’s eyes. She instinctively liked this girl but she felt her
terrible anguish and confusion. She also felt her heartache – a love that was completely devoid of
hope. She glanced at Sirius, who was looking intently at Hermione.

Sirius then looked at the others and said, “We’ll probably be seeing quite a bit of you from now
on. The Headmaster has asked us to keep an eye on you all.”

They all chatted together for a while before the four friends went down to the Great Hall for
breakfast.

“I’m worried about that girl, Sirius,” said Ceri. “She’s in mental torment. She has to be
watched, or she’ll become ill.”

“I know, Ceri. I don’t need to be an empath to see that something is very wrong with Hermione.
I’ll speak to Professor McGonagall, I think. Perhaps she can help.”

Images on my photo album : (NB click on each one to get a larger version).

- A Knight Templar

- Nicholas Flamel

- Berenger Saunier – the parish priest at the centre of the mystery

- Parchment 1 - found by Saunier when he renovated the church. Note the slightly raised letters
that spelled the secret message (in French).

- Parchment 2 – note the curious symbols on the bottom right that caught Hermione’s attention
when she viewed them upside-down.

http://uk.photos.yahoo.com/bc/animasumma/lst?&.dir=/Chap+6+Book+1&.src=ph&.view=t



8. Hermione's Despair
---------------------

Chapter 7

**Hermione’s Despair**

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

Harry and Ron groaned as they entered through the trap door into Professor Trelawney’s
Divination classroom. On each of the tables they could see a crystal ball.

“Oh no,” said Ron, “I thought we’d finished with those. I never could make out anything in that
swirling mist.”

“Today, class,” said the professor when all the students had taken their seats, “we’ll brush up
on your crystal ball work. You can expect it to come up in your OWL later this year! Now tap your
wands on the top of the crystal, and wait for the mists to reveal the future.”

Ron tapped his crystal ball and looked into the swirling mist, humming ‘A Foggy Day In London
Town,’ which drew fits of giggles from most of the students.

Harry tapped the surface with his wand, and saw the mist swirling about, and then something
started to take shape within its depths. This was accompanied by a low moaning, which came from
Harry’s crystal ball and echoed around the room. Harry jumped and shouted in surprise.

Professor Trelawney swooped over to Harry and looked into the ball, quickly followed by the
other students. “What can you see, Harry?” She asked.

“I .. I can see a shape,” he replied, “It’s like the shape in my dream. I think it’s the figure
of a man, and he’s waving his arm, calling me.” This was followed by a slight raise in the pitch of
the sound - and words could clearly be heard by all in the room.

‘Come .. Come .. Do not delay … I am waiting …’

All the students gasped, and the professor had a glassy look in her eyes. The mist in Harry’s
crystal then cleared and the voice stopped. The crystal was now inert.

“That is the first time I have ever heard sound coming from the crystal,” said the professor,
“This is very powerful magic. You are privileged, Harry. Very privileged.”

When they left on their way to Transfiguration class, Harry was pounced upon by Parvati and
Lavender.

“What was that, Harry?” said Parvati.

“Do you know who was saying those words?” asked Lavender.

“It was just like a dream I’ve been having,” said Harry, “But I can’t make out who the shape
is.”

The two girls walked on ahead, looking impressed and whispering to each other.

Hermione was already waiting in Professor McGonagall’s classroom when the others arrived. Ron
sat next to her, and Harry and Kristen sat behind. The professor came in and sat at her desk,
looking at the students over the top of her glasses.

“I want each of you to come out to my desk and pick out a button from the pot in front of me.
The buttons are different sizes, varying from very small to very large. I then want you to go back
to your desk, and transform the button into a spider, and I want you to make it walk from one end
of your desk to the other before transforming it back into a button. Clear?”

To everyone’s surprise, Ron’s arm shot into the air. “Yes, Weasley?”

“Uh, Professor. I .. I .. Can I have the smallest button in the pot please?”

All the students laughed – Ron’s fear of spiders was well known.

“It all depends what you pick out of the pot Weasley. I can’t control that. Come on, you come
down and pick first.”

Ron walked to the front and put his hand into the pot nervously. He looked at the button as he
withdrew his hand and groaned as he saw a very large button. “Bad luck, Weasley,” said the
professor, “I think that’s the largest button in the pot. Go back to your desk please – and don’t
swap with anyone!”

Ron looked terrified as he sat staring at his button, wondering how big the spider would be.
Harry whispered in his ear from behind, “At least it won’t be as big as Aragog, Ron.” Ron shuddered
at the memory of Aragog in the Forbidden Forest.

“Right,” said McGonagall, “Hermione – show everyone how it’s done please.”

Hermione touched the button with her wand and concentrated. Her medium-sized button immediately
changed into a medium-sized spider that scuttled over towards Ron. Ron let out a strangled moan as
it run past him, and then Hermione changed it back into a button. “Excellent, Hermione. Now you
have a go Ron.”

Ron touched his large button with his wand, and closed his eyes. The spider was large – so large
that the individual hairs on its legs could plainly be seen. As it moved quickly across the desk,
Ron jumped out of his seat and ran to the front of the classroom, his eyes wide.

“Weasley!” Shouted McGonagall, “Go after that spider and change it back.”

“I can’t. I can’t,” he wailed.

The professor looked aghast at Ron, and then asked Hermione to change the spider back into a
button, which she did.

“I .. I’m sorry, Professor,” said Ron, “I just can’t stand spiders.”

“Oh go and sit back down, Weasley!” she said.

Throughout the rest of the class, McGonagall kept glancing over at Hermione. She could see that
something was bothering the girl – although she did everything correctly in class. She looked quite
down, not the bouncy, confident girl she usually was in her class. When she dismissed the students
at the end of the lesson, McGonagall asked Hermione to stay behind.

“Hermione, is anything bothering you? You looked a bit distracted in class today.”

“No, Professor. Everything’s fine. It’s just all this work for the OWLS.”

Professor McGonagall watched Hermione as she left the room and shook her head. She knew that her
favourite pupil would not be bothered at all by the study for her OWLS. ‘Sirius was right,’ she
thought, ‘I’ll have to keep an eye on that girl.’

At lunch, Ginny noticed that Hermione just picked at her food. She hardly ate anything. “Aren’t
you hungry, Hermi?” She asked.

“Uh, no, Ginny. I had a large breakfast this morning.”

Ginny knew that Hermione had no such thing. She knew that she had eaten only one piece of toast.
She sighed worriedly, not knowing what to do.

***

The following Saturday saw the Quidditch match between Gryffindor and Hufflepuff. It went down
as one of the shortest matches in the history of Hogwarts. The game was barely five minutes old,
with Gryffindor leading 30 – 0, when Harry spotted the snitch and caught it easily. No one had
broken into a sweat, and Lee Jordan had said no more than fifty words in his commentary.

Harry grinned ruefully at the dejected Hufflepuff captain, Ernie McMillan, as he shook his hand.
“Sorry, Ernie. I guess it was luck that the snitch showed itself so soon in the game.”

“It wasn’t luck that you spotted it and caught it, Harry. Congratulations.”

The celebrations were a bit muted in Gryffindor tower that day – everyone had looked forward to
the game, but hadn’t really seen one. They’d have to wait for the annual battle with Slytherin
later in the year.

That afternoon, Harry, Kristen and the others went down to see Hagrid. He had sent Harry a note
telling him that he had a new baby magical creature to look after, and invited him and his friends
to come and see it. The five walked up to Hagrid’s door nervously, wondering what sort of danger
they’d be walking into - last time, it had been Norbert the baby dragon!

“Come in, you lot. Look what I’ve found,” said an excited Hagrid.

Harry and the rest peered around the door, and saw a small shining white horse lying on Hagrid’s
rug, sleeping.

“A horse, Hagrid?” said Ginny disappointedly.

“No. No Ginny. It’s not an ‘orse. It’s a baby unicorn!”

All five youngsters gasped and went over to inspect the young creature. “Look,” said Hermione,
“you can just see the small bump on the front of his head, where the horn will grow.”

“Where did you get it, Hagrid?” Asked Harry.

“I foun’ it wandrin’ over by the edge of the Forbidden Forest. I think he must ‘ave lost ‘is
mother.”

“What are you going to do with him?” Asked Ginny.

“Well I can’ let ‘im go – he won’ last five minutes in the forest. I’m goin’ to keep ‘im ‘ere
until I can find ‘is parents. I’ll start lookin’ tonight.”

“Oh, I hope you find them, Hagrid. The poor little thing,” sighed Kristen.

After a cup of tea, the five set off back up to the school. “Wait. What’s that?” Said Ron,
looking towards the edge of the Forbidden Forest.

“What. Where?” Said Harry

“There – look!”

“Oh yes – look - it’s a Centaur. Hey it’s Firenze!”

The five walked over to the Centaur, who nervously stayed inside the tree line.

“Greetings, Firenze,” said Harry, “It’s good to see you again.”

“Harry Potter. Ronan warned me against coming here, but I had to tell you. The stars show great
impatience. They say you must hurry. And you must watch out for great danger. I must go now.”

“Thank you, Firenze. Goodbye,” Harry called as he watched the galloping Centaur disappear among
the trees.

“What was that about, Harry?” Asked Kristen.

“Uh, Kristen. It’s best that you don’t know about this. It’s dangerous, and I don’t want you
getting mixed up in it.”

Kristen looked hurt, and looked at the others who were staring fixedly at the ground, “Well it’s
obvious that you’ve told everybody else about it. If you can’t tell me then that says a lot,
doesn’t it Harry?”

Tears welled up in her eyes and she turned and ran back up to the castle. “Go after her, Harry,”
said Hermione, “She’s upset.”

Harry looked at Hermione, “I can’t tell her, Hermi. It’s too dangerous. It’s bad enough that
you’re all involved in my problems, without Kristen getting involved too.”

“But she’s your girlfriend, Harry. It’s natural she’ll want to be involved,” said Ron.

“No, Ron. I won’t risk it. I can’t put her in any danger. And you all heard what Dumbledore said
– I can’t tell her,” and Harry ran after Kristen as he saw her go in through the main doors.

Harry found Kristen in the common room, sitting by the window. She looked miserable as she
stared out into the spring sunshine.

“Kristen, can I talk to you?” said Harry quietly as he went up to her.

She turned her head and sighed, “Ok, Harry. What’s it all about?”

“I can’t tell you that Kristen. It’s not that I don’t want you to know, but there’s something
that I have to do, and it’s dangerous. I don’t want to risk you getting hurt.”

“And how does that make me feel? You’re going to do something dangerous, and I don’t know what
it is and I can’t do anything to help you. Please, Harry.”

“I’m sorry, Kristen. I just can’t. Please understand – Professor Dumbledore’s involved in this,
and he’ll make sure I’m safe. And he’s told me not to involve you – he doesn’t want to risk you
getting hurt while you’re under his care. He’s made me promise not to tell you about it.” Harry
looked pleadingly at Kristen.

“Well I’m not happy about this Harry. I was placed in Gryffindor after all, and I’m not afraid
of a bit of danger. But I guess if Dumbledore’s made you promise him, I won’t press you about it
any more. But please promise me, Harry, that you’ll take care. Please promise.”

“Yes, of course I’ll take care Kristen”

Ron, Hermione and Ginny walked into the common room as Kristen reached out to Harry and held him
close, fiercely gripping his shoulders as they kissed.

“Awwwwww,” said Ginny and Ron looking at them. Hermione, meanwhile, trotted upstairs and ran
into her dorm.

***

*She was lying outside a dark cave. The air was still and there wasn’t a sound coming from the
animals in the forest. She saw movement inside the cave, and she recoiled in horror as something
tall and horrible ran towards her from its depths.*

*‘You will be the first Mudblood I kill on my new path to glory,” hissed the Dark Lord, his
wand raised in front of him and his red eyes flashing cruelly, “You will pay for helping Potter on
his quest – you’ve been asking for it. Prepare to die’*

*‘Please, no,’ she wailed, hoping that it was all a dream.*

*Then she heard a loud rushing noise – the beating of powerful wings. She looked up to see a
huge golden eagle swooping towards her. Astride the eagle was Harry; his arm upraised holding a
golden sword.*

*The Dark Lord looked up and she could see terror in his eyes. He turned and ran back into the
cave, looking over his shoulder in fright. The eagle landed in front of her, and Harry jumped off,
grinning. She was filled with longing and love as he approached her, smiling.*

*She reached out to Harry, aching to hold him close.*

*Harry’s expression changed from a smile to a look of horror, and she saw him pulled backwards
into the cave, as if into a vortex.*

*She screamed.*

“Hermi .. Hermi.. ,” Hermione woke up and felt tears running down her face. She was crying
bitterly.

“What’s wrong, Hermi?” Said Kristen. She, Parvati and Lavender were bent over Hermione’s bed
looking worriedly at her.

“It .. it was only a bad dream,” she sobbed, “I’ll be ok in a minute.”

The three girls looked at each other and frowned with worry. This was the third time that
Hermione had woken them with her crying.

At breakfast that morning, Hermione had not appeared. “Where’s Hermi, Kristen?” asked Ginny.

Kristen looked at Ginny, then beckoned for Harry and Ron to lean close to her. “I’m getting
really worried about her. She woke the rest of us in the dorm this morning, sobbing her heart out.
She said it was just a nightmare, but I’m not so sure.”

“Oh, no,” said Ginny, “This is getting worse. I’ve noticed that she’s not eating properly, she
just sits and picks at her food. I .. look out, here she comes.”

The four leaned back in their seats and watched Hermione as she slowly walked over and sat down,
as if in a daze, next to Lavender at the top end of the table. There was not a hint of a smile on
her face, and she looked very pale. Her hair was not as smooth and shining as it had been before –
it had started to bush out again, with strands sticking out here and there.

“There’s something very wrong, here,” Harry whispered to his friends, “I’ve never seen her like
this before. Do you think it’s still the shock of being attacked by that Slytherin, or is it that
.. that boy she likes?”

“I think she got over Grimus Plonger’s attack, Harry,” said Ginny, “I think it’s that boy!”

They looked up the table at Hermione, who was just picking at the scrambled eggs on her plate.
“I can’t stand seeing her like this,” said Harry, standing up, “I’ve got to talk to her.”

Harry walked up to Hermione and sat down next to her. “Hermi?”

She looked up, and Harry was shocked to see that her eyes were dull – there was no longer that
special sparkle in them. Something tugged at Harry, deep inside. It was like that time he’d held
her after the incident in the corridor, and he felt an overwhelming sense of protectiveness towards
her.

“What’s wrong, Hermi? You don’t look well.”

“I .. I .. didn’t get much sleep last night, Harry. That’s all.”

Harry put his hand on her shoulder and looked deep into her eyes. “It’s that boy isn’t it,
Hermi?” he said gently.

A look of panic showed in her eyes and she suddenly jumped up from her seat, “Leave me alone
Harry. I’ll be all right,” and she ran from the Great Hall, her breakfast left untouched.

“Hermi ..” Harry called after her. He had a haunted look in his eyes as he went back to sit with
his friends. Kristen looked at him quizzically, but didn’t say anything. ‘Was Harry’s reaction just
natural concern for a friend?’ she thought to herself.

Ron suddenly threw his fork onto his plate and stood up, “I’ve had enough of this. I’m going to
talk to her – find out who this .. this .. bloody git is!” And he walked purposefully from the
table. The others got up and followed close behind him.

They found Hermione sitting in the common room, looking at one of her books. The four sat down
around her, and she looked at them. “Hermi,” said Ron quietly, “We know there’s something wrong,
and we’re all very .. concerned. Please tell us what it is.”

“Look, Ron. It’s nothing but overwork and a bit of stress. After all that research I did, and
all the homework we’ve been getting - and studying for the OWLS. It .. it’s just getting to me a
bit, that’s all. There’s nothing to worry about. Now come on, we’ll be late for Charms.”

The others looked at each other helplessly, but followed Hermione out through the portrait hole
and walked with her towards Professor Flitwick’s class. Ginny, however, was thinking furiously. She
hadn’t bought Hermione’s explanation for the state she was in. She knew that Hermione would never
get stressed with research and schoolwork – she positively thrived on that sort of thing. ‘No, it’s
definitely that boy,’ she thought, ‘and for her to be reacting this way, she must be desperately in
love with him. And after the last few weeks, I think I’ve got an idea who it is. I’ll talk to her
tonight.’

Ginny was still deep in thought as she left the others to go to her Transfiguration class.

That night, Ginny waited until Hermione went up to her dorm. She had noticed, lately, that she
went up much earlier than usual. And she thought she knew why. Hermione’s roommates were still in
the common room, busy with their homework, so she went up the spiral staircase and opened the door
slightly, “Can I come in, Hermi?”

“Yes .. come in Ginny,” said Hermione. She was sitting on her bed, looking up at the window.
Ginny sat next to her, and took one of Hermione’s hands in hers.

“Hermi, it’s that boy isn’t it? That’s what’s making you so unhappy.”

Hermione looked at her friend, “No .. no Ginny. It’s the work …”

“Hermi. I think I know who he is. It’s Harry, isn’t it?” She whispered. “I’ve noticed lately
that you don’t sit with us so often – you find it difficult to be close to him don’t you? And I saw
your reaction when Professor Dumbledore told us about the Anima Summa’s birth date.”

Hermione stared as if she’d been struck. Then her eyes filled, and she reached out and clung to
Ginny desperately, the tears flowing unchecked.

“Oh, Hermi,” she whispered into her ear, upset at her friend’s pain.

“Please don’t tell anybody,” sobbed Hermione, “Especially not Harry”

She calmed down after a few minutes and sat back, looking at Ginny. “I .. I’ve been in love with
him for a while, now. I don’t know when exactly, but it just sort of crept up on me. I tried to
ignore the feelings I’d been getting, but they just got stronger. It’s horrible, Ginny, when you’re
not in charge of what you think and feel. And what makes it worse is that it’s so futile – I know I
can never be anything more than a friend to Harry. Not after what Dumbledore told us.”

“I’m so sorry, Hermi. If there was only something I could do.”

“But there’s nothing, Ginny. I’ve just got to try to live with it. But it’s so difficult. I
think that I’m going crazy, sometimes. I’ve even been getting these nightmares – about ‘You Know
Who’ - and Harry coming to rescue me – then he’s pulled away from me just as I think he ..,” she
broke down again, crying pitifully, with Ginny doing her best to comfort her.

She pulled away from Ginny again, “I didn’t tell you what happened last year. I kissed him when
we were alone in the common room – I just couldn’t help it. You remember you told me what Parvati
said about her first kiss? Well it was like that – and more. The feeling of excitement was
incredible. And he responded, Ginny. Then Ron came in and it was all over. We both had time to
think about it. I told Harry afterwards that I shouldn’t have done it – that I didn’t want it to
spoil our friendship. He agreed with me – he said he didn’t want to lose a best friend either. And
that’s how it’s been ever since. I suppose I had my chance back then, and like a fool I ignored it.
But after what Dumbledore said, it was probably the best thing to do – it couldn’t have worked out,
and I’d have ended up getting hurt even more.”

“I’ve been there, Hermi. I think I know something about what you’re feeling. As you know, I had
a crush on Harry for years, and it’s only now that I’m getting over it. It’s only now that I can
stand seeing him with somebody else. But at least I know he loves me – even if it *is* only as
his honorary sister. I know there’s nothing I can say that will ease the pain, Hermi. Only time
will do that. But you know that I’m here for you if you want to talk.”

“I know, Ginny. And thanks – thanks for getting me to share the burden. It’s helped, you
know.”

***

In the following days, Hermione didn’t get any better. In fact, she got worse. She still found
it difficult to get to sleep, and when she did, she was disturbed by her recurring nightmare. She
wasn’t eating properly, either. She just didn’t seem to have the appetite.

Harry and Ron were increasingly worried about her, and Harry noticed that she didn’t spend as
much time with him as she used to.

“It must be because I’ve been pressing her to tell me about that boy,” he told Ron. “I’m going
to have to ease off on her, I think – I might be making things worse for her.”

“Yes, but I’m going to talk to Ginny. There must be something she can do to help,” and he walked
off to find his sister, leaving Harry and Kristen sitting by the fire in the common room.

Harry pushed a hand through his hair, and got up from the chair and started pacing around in
front of the fire. “I don’t know what to do, Kristen. I can’t bare to see her like this.”

Kristen just looked at her boyfriend … and wondered.

Ron found Ginny in the library, and went to sit next to her. “Ginny, we can’t ignore what’s
happening to Hermi. Harry and I are worried sick about her. Isn’t there something you can do? Talk
to her or something? Perhaps we should ask Madam Pomfrey to take a look at her.”

“No, Ron,” said Ginny hurriedly, “I don’t think that would help.”

Ron eyed his sister suspiciously, “Why not, Ginny? Come on – you know something don’t you? I
know you too well and I can tell when you’re hiding something”

“I’m not, Ron. Now leave it!”

“I will not leave it, Ginny! Now why don’t you think Madam Pomfrey can help?”

Ginny looked at Ron, and knew her brother well enough to see that he wouldn’t let go. “Be ..
because she can’t mend a broken heart, Ron,” she whispered.

“A brok .. so it *is* that boy! She’s told you, hasn’t she? She told you who he is.”

“Ron, please .. I can’t say anything to you,” Ginny wailed, thinking desperately how to get out
of the hole she was in.

“Ginny Weasley,” Ron whispered dangerously, “She’s my best friend too. You know I won’t let go
until I find out what you’re hiding. If you don’t tell me, I’ll go and tackle Hermi about it – tell
her I know something. Now come on!”

Ginny felt terrible. She knew that she had to tell Ron. There was no way out for her. She knew
that she couldn’t let him tackle Hermione like that.

“It .. it’s Harry,” she whispered almost inaudibly.

“WHAT!” Ron shouted, attracting the stares of Madam Pince, who tutted at him. “That .. that GIT.
That stupid GIT. Well I’m going to put him straight right now!” and he got up to dash out of the
library.

Ginny caught hold of his robes and pulled him roughly back into the chair, which almost toppled
over. Madam Pince looked up in annoyance “If you two can’t keep quiet, I’ll throw you both out. Now
please!”

“Ron. You can’t say anything to Harry. He doesn’t know about this. He’s as worried as any of us.
And if he knew he was the cause of Hermi’s pain, how do you think he’d feel? He wouldn’t be able to
cope, Ron. You know how protective he is. And he’s our best friend too.”

Ron sat back, taking in what his sister had said. “But he’s got to be told that Hermi’s got a
crush on him. Maybe he can talk to her.”

“It’s not a crush, Ron - Hermi’s desperately in love with him. What she’s feeling is far worse
than the crush I used to have on Harry. Ron – you can’t say anything to anybody about this. Please
understand – it’s very important. There’s a lot more to this than you know, but I can’t tell you
anything about it yet. I’ve been sworn to secrecy, so don’t even try to get me to say any more,
because I won’t.”

Ron sighed deeply, “All right, Ginny. But I want to know as soon as you can say about it,” he
paused and looked closely at his sister, “This is a mess, Ginny. I just can’t let Hermi suffer
alone with this.”

“She’s not alone with it, Ron. She knows she can talk to me, now. All we can do is to watch her
and at least try to get her to eat properly. I’m really worried that she’s going to get ill over
this. And Ron – promise me you won’t say a thing to Harry. You’ve got to act normally around him.
Promise me Ron – it’s very important.”

“I promise Ginny. Don’t worry, I won’t say anything.”

Towards the middle of March, Hermione didn’t get any better. Despite all the efforts of her
friends, she still wasn’t eating as she should. And it was starting to show – her robes started to
hang loosely on her shoulders, and it was obvious that she was starting to lose weight. In
desperation, Ginny went to see Professor McGonagall.

“Professor,” she said as she sat in her office, “It’s about Hermione. I’m getting very worried
about her.”

McGonagall nodded, “Yes, Ginny. I’ve noticed how she’s been acting and looking over the last few
weeks. And frankly, I’m worried too – as is the Headmaster and most of the teachers. Is there
anything you can tell me about it?”

Ginny took a deep breath and told McGonagall about Hermione’s feelings for Harry.

“Oh, no,” breathed the professor, “The poor girl. And she knows that nothing can come of it,
too. She must be feeling terrible.”

“But what can we do, Professor. Is there anything you can think of?”

“If things get too bad, then I’ll take her to the hospital wing for Madam Pomfrey to make sure
that she gets the vitamins she’s lacking. But what do you do about a broken heart, Ginny? Not even
Madam Pomfrey can do anything about that.”

“There has to be something, Professor!”

McGonagall thought for a few moments, then, “I wonder if her mother can help? I know that
Hermione’s very close to her.”

Ginny brightened, “Yes, I think that would help. Can you bring her here, Professor? I’m sure
Hermione would love to see her and talk to her at a time like this.”

“I’ll see what I can arrange, Ginny. Look, when she gets here, I think it will be best if you
speak to her first – before she sees Hermione. You know more than anybody about this.”

“Of course I’ll speak to her, Professor. And thanks. I feel a lot better now. I’ll go and tell
the others.”

The following evening, Ginny had a message to go to see Professor McGonagall. She walked up to
her office and knocked on the door. “Come in, Ginny,” shouted McGonagall.

Ginny entered and saw Mrs. Granger sitting at the professor’s desk, looking very worried.
“Hello, Mrs. Granger. It’s nice to see you.”

“It’s nice to see you again, too, Ginny. Come and tell me what’s wrong with Hermione.”

“I’ll leave you two together,” said McGonagall, “Feel free to use this office for as long as you
want. I’ll see you both later.” She smiled reassuringly at them as she left her office.

“Ginny – what’s happened? Is anything gone wrong with her .. uh .. magic?”

“No, Mrs Granger, if only that was it. We could do something about that. But this – well let me
start at the beginning …”

Mrs. Granger wiped a tear from her eye as Ginny finished, “But if Harry doesn’t know that
Hermione loves him, shouldn’t he be told? Perhaps there’s a chance that they can get together.”

“I’m afraid not. There’s this very powerful prophecy at work – and Harry’s future mate is
someone else, and Hermione knows this, I’m afraid. I can’t tell you any more about it, though.”

“Oh my poor girl. She must be in a terrible state. Can I see her now please, Ginny?”

“Yes, I’ll fetch her from the common room now – and Mrs. Granger – be prepared for a shock –
she’s not looking at all well.”

Ginny saw her friend sitting alone in the common room. She went up to her, “Hermi. There’s
someone to see you in Professor McGonagall’s office. Come on.”

“Who is it, Ginny?” asked Hermione as they walked along the corridor.

“You’ll soon see. But I think you’re in for a nice surprise.”

Ginny opened the door and followed Hermione into the office.

Hermione stopped suddenly, looking at her mother. “Mum!” she cried and flung herself into her
mother’s waiting arms. They were both crying as Ginny went back out into the corridor, “I’ll just
be outside. Take as long as you like.”

Ginny paced backwards and forwards outside the professor’s office, hoping against hope that Mrs.
Granger could ease her daughter’s torment. She didn’t care how long she waited, just as long as
something good would come of it. After about an hour, Mrs. Granger come out of the office, wiping a
tear from her eye.

“Oh, Ginny. I haven’t seen her this ill since she was a little baby. Look, can I see you before
I leave? You’re her best friend and I’d like to talk to you before I go. Can you come back in about
an hour?”

“Yes, Mrs. Granger. No problem. See you later. Uh, how is she now?”

“It’s going to take a lot of time before she’s over this. But I think I’m getting through to her
– I’m trying to get her to understand that she has to look after herself. And she’s agreed to come
to France with us over Easter. I think the break will do her good.”

Ginny walked back to the common room to tell her friends. She was smiling for the first time in
a quite a while, full of hope for her friend now.

Later, Ron walked with Ginny back to the professor’s office, and they waited outside. After a
few minutes the door opened, and Hermione and her mother walked out. Hermione seemed a lot better –
her eyes no longer had that dull and empty look.

“It’s been so good to see you mum,” she said, “You don’t know how much it’s meant to me.”

“I think I do, Hermione. Ginny, will you come with me to find Professor McGonagall?”

“Goodbye, mum. I’ll see you in two weeks,” and Hermione walked back to the common room with Ron,
after kissing her mother goodbye.

“Are you feeling any better now, Hermione?” Ron asked as they made their way to Gryffindor
tower.

“Yes, I think so, Ron. It was lovely to talk to my mother about things, and I’m really looking
forward to seeing my dad in France for Easter.”

“Hermi. Er .. I know how you feel about Harry. I know he’s the one you’ve been so upset
over.”

Hermione stopped and looked stricken, “How did you ..? Ginny told you didn’t she? Look Ron, I
don’t want Harry or anybody else to know about this.”

“Don’t worry, Hermi. I won’t say anything – Ginny made me promise. And don’t blame Ginny, I
forced it out of her – we’re all worried about you, you know – especially Harry. He’s beside
himself with worry.”

Hermione looked wistfully at Ron, “Yes – I suppose I’ve been a bit silly. I can’t help how I
feel about Harry, but my mother made a lot of sense in what she said. I’ve just got to accept
things as they are and get on with it.”

“I know it’s going to be difficult for you, Hermi, but don’t shut Harry out. I don’t think he
could handle it if he thought you weren’t his best friend any more.”

“Oh I’ll try, Ron. It’s hard being around him, but I’ll try”

As they entered the portrait hole, Hermione saw Harry sitting with Kristen, talking. When he saw
her, Harry jumped up and rushed over, looking a bit apprehensive. “How was your mother, Hermi? Did
you have – you know – a good chat about things?”

“Yes, Harry,” she replied, “I can see things a bit differently now. Talking to her has helped a
lot.”

Harry grinned with relief, “So we’ll get the real Hermione back then?”

She smiled, “Yes, I think so. But give me a bit of time and space to get my head around things,”
she looked back at Ron, who was standing behind, “Ohhh - I’m starving.”

“No problem, Hermi. Wait here and I’ll go down to the kitchen and get something for you. I won’t
be long.”

As Ron opened the portrait hole, Ginny came in, grinning. “What are you so happy about, Ginny?”
he asked.

“Oh, nothing Ron,” she said airily, “I’m just glad that things seem to be working out at last.”
She walked over to Harry and Hermione, still grinning. “So! She’s looking better already don’t you
think Harry?”

“Yes she is. And I’m glad you’ve got your appetite back Hermi.” Harry went back to sit with
Kristen and talked incessantly about the relief he felt now that Hermione was on the mend. Kristen
smiled, delighted with the news, but she couldn’t help but wonder as she looked at Hermione and
Ginny talking together at the other end of the room.

“My mother knows me inside out, Ginny. She knew instinctively what my problem is. Oh, she can’t
do anything about the way I feel about Harry – the way I’ll always feel about him. But she made me
realise what it was I was doing. I’ve always got to find the answer to everything, Ginny. If
there’s a problem, then I’ve got to solve it. I’ve been trying to find the answer to what I can do
about Harry – the solution that would put everything right. But as my mother said, there’s no
answer to this problem, and that’s why I’ve made myself ill – searching for something that’s not
there. Now I realise that, I can focus on other things – stop trying to search for the impossible.
I’ll always love him, you know,” she looked into her friend’s eyes, “I love him so much that I want
him to be happy – even if it’s not with me. So I’m still going to help him with the secret and the
Anima Summa - there’s no way I can abandon it, even though I know I’ll be doing something that will
push him away from me for ever. Can you understand that, Ginny?”

Ginny reached over and squeezed her friend’s hand, “Yes, I think I can, but I don’t know if I
could do that. You’re very brave, Hermi.”

“Well I am a Gryffindor!” They both laughed briefly, and then Hermione looked quizzically at
Ginny. “Why did you tell Ron about Harry?”

Ginny looked guiltily at her, “He told you, did he? Oh I’m sorry, Hermi – you know what he’s
like. He wouldn’t leave me alone until I told him. Don .. don’t be angry with me .. please.”

Hermione smiled at her friend, “How can I be angry with you, Ginny? And I don’t mind that Ron
knows, really. And he’s promised not to tell Harry.”

Ginny sighed with relief, “Of course, I didn’t tell him about the Anima Summa, but he knows
there’s something I was holding back from him. I told him I’d tell him about it when I was able
to.”

“You know, Ginny, I’ve never had friends like you before I came to Hogwarts. My mother made me
see how lucky I am to have you and Ron to help me through this. I won’t forget what you’ve done for
me.”

“Look, Hermi, Ron and I will always be there when you need us – you know that. And .. and Harry
will too. You do know that don’t you?

“Yes, I do. But I don’t know if that’ll make things easier or worse”

***

“So, what’s happening at Easter?” said Harry. He was sitting with Ron, Ginny and Hermione in the
common room the week before the holiday. Kristen had gone to her student-exchange review meeting
with Professor McGonagall and the other Americans and Europeans who were at Hogwarts. “Kristen’s
going to spend the holiday with her family back in America.”

“I thought she’d be staying here with you, Harry, “ said Ron, “Anything wrong? You don’t seem to
be as ‘lovey-dovey’ as you used to be.”

“No, I don’t think anything’s wrong, Ron. But lately, she’s seemed to be a little bit distant,
as if something’s on her mind. Maybe she’s still a bit off with me for not telling her about the
Rhedae mystery.”

“Ron and I’ll be staying here with you, Harry,” said Ginny.

“As you all know, I’m going to France with my parents. They’re going before the end of term, but
I’ll follow them on the 30th – I’m catching a plane from Glasgow airport,” said
Hermione.

“Where in France are they staying, Hermi?” asked Ron.

“They’ve hired a gite in the South of France.”

“What the hell is a gite?” asked Ron.

“It’s a holiday cottage for rent, there’s a lot of them in France. This one’s near
Carcassonne.”

“Carcassonne… Carcassonne...” muttered Harry, “Where have I heard that before?”

“It’s a mediaeval walled city, not far from Toulouse,” answered Hermione.

“I’ve got it!” exclaimed Harry, “It was mentioned in one of those books we were researching
about Rhedae. How far is it from Rennes-le-Chateau?”

“Yes, of course! I remember now. I’ll go and get my atlas,” said Hermione and rushed up to her
dorm. Almost immediately, she came back down and laid the atlas on one of the tables. She searched
through the pages until she came to the map of France.

The four leaned over the table, looking for Carcassonne. “Here it is,” said Hermione, pointing
towards the bottom of the map, “It’s in the Langedoc region, so Rennes-le-Chateau can’t be that far
away.”

They all pored over the Langedoc region of the map, “There it is,” said Ginny, pointing to a
small dot underneath Carcassonne, “It’s about 25 miles due south of Carcassonne.”

Harry was deep in thought, then looked up at Hermione, “Hermi? How big is this gite you’re
staying in?”

“On no, Harry,” she said, “You know what Dumbledore said. You can’t think about leaving before
he says it’s ok.”

“But this is perfect, Hermi. Don’t you think it’s a bit of a coincidence that you’re going to be
staying right on the doorstep of the mystery? It’ll be a perfect base to investigate the
secret.”

“Do you think your parents will mind if they had another two guests, Hermi?” said Ron, “If
there’s not much room, Harry and I can take a wizarding tent and stay in the garden, or
something.”

“I’m sure they’d love you to come. But there’s no way you can come if Dumbledore hasn’t managed
to get those aurors to protect us,” said Hermione.

“So let’s go and see him, then,” said Harry, jumping up from his chair.

As she listened to all this, Ginny had a very odd expression on her face, and her brow was
creased in furrows. “Just one minute!” she said testily, “What do you mean *two* extra guests?
Don’t you mean *three?”*

“Now don’t get any ideas Ginny,” said Ron, “You know it’s dangerous, and what would mum and dad
do to me if anything happened to you?”

“No way, Ron. I’m coming!”

“Listen, Ginny,” said Harry, “Ron’s right. It’s too dangerous, and I won’t risk you getting
hurt. You’ll have to stay here.”

Ginny’s face took on the colour of her flaming red hair, and her eyes flashed dangerously, “Sod
off, Harry! Haven’t you noticed I’ve grown up now? I’ll be 15 in a few days – the same age as you!
I’m not a shy little girl any more – the one that changed colour every time I spoke to you. I’ve
been involved in this right from the start, and .. and what’s more, Harry Potter, I’m a Gryffindor.
So there’s no way you’re stopping me coming with you. Right?”

Harry and Ron just stood looking with their mouths open as the little firebrand swept out of the
portrait hole. They couldn’t believe that Ginny had just stood up to Harry at last. Hermione just
grinned with a twinkle in her eye as Ron let out his breath and said, “So now you know, Harry. I’m
not the only Weasley with a temper.”

“There’s no way you’ll stop her coming, you know. I’d better go and try to cool her down,”
giggled Hermione as she followed her friend out of the common room.

“Oh well, I’d better start thinking up some explanations for mum and dad,” said Ron
resignedly.

“That makes two of us, Ron,” said Harry, grinning.

“Ginny .. Ginny, wait up,” Hermione called to the furious form of her friend. “It’s ok, you can
come with us. I think you made your point.”

Ginny stopped and turned, the fury still showing in her pretty face. “I should bloody well think
so, too. The cheek of those two gits!”

“Ginny! Honestly, your language.”

Ginny’s expression softened, “Do you think Harry will ever speak to me again, Hermi? I just told
him to sod off!”

“It’ll do him good, Ginny. Don’t think twice about it.”

“Ron’s right, though. When mum and dad find out I’m going with you for Easter they’ll go bananas
– I know it’s going to be dangerous in Rennes-le-Chateau.”

“I think Professor Dumbledore will explain things to them, Ginny. Don’t worry”

“Speaking of the Headmaster, shouldn’t we go and see him about this?”

“Yes, and the sooner the better.”

The two girls turned around and went back to the common room. They hadn’t been able to see Draco
Malfoy, who was on one of his frequent sneaking forays. He’d heard everything they’d said.

‘At last – I’ve got something to report,’ thought Draco as he walked towards the owlery, still
hidden under the Invisibility Cloak.

When they got back into the common room, Ginny glanced sheepishly at Harry, “Sorry I swore at
you Harry.”

Harry grinned at her, “That’s ok – I shouldn’t have treated you like a little kid. I won’t be
doing that again in a hurry! Come on, let’s go and see Dumbledore”

***

“So why won’t Fudge help us with this, Headmaster?” asked Sirius. He sat around the table with
the other inner group members, with Harry and his friends looking on.

“He says he can’t release anybody at the moment. All his operatives are out in the field, up to
their eyes in it. They’re fully stretched trying to slow down Voldemort’s recruitment drive.”

“But Professor, the warnings I’m getting are more urgent,” said Harry, “I can’t wait any longer.
I know I’ve got to go very soon now.”

Dumbledore sighed, “I know, Harry. I agree with you – it can’t be delayed any longer. I only
wish I could risk leaving Hogwarts for a few days. But I can’t. So it’s down to you three,” he
nodded at Sirius, Ceri and Remus, “to give these four as much protection as you can. It’s far from
ideal, I know, but it’s the best we can do under the circumstances. I’ll speak to Olympe Maxine,
the headmistress of Beauxbatons – she’ll be able to arrange for these four to use magic in France.
They’re not so strict there.”

“How are we all going to get there?” said Ceri

“I’ll ask Madame Maxine to arrange a Portkey to Carcassonne. When are your parents expecting
you, Hermione?” asked Dumbledore.

“On the 30th, Professor. I owled them just before coming to your office, so they’ll
be expecting Harry, Ron and Ginny as well.”

“Sirius – you, Ceri and Remus will have to keep watch on them all the time, but you won’t be
able to interfere or help with what they have to do.”

“Why is that, Headmaster?” asked Sirius.

“I don’t know why. I just know that it has to be only these four who must solve the mystery –
call it magical instinct if you will. Harry, I suppose you’ve got a plan in mind?”

“Yes, Professor. Hermione’s the one who drew it up.”

“Now why am I not surprised at that? Care to tell us about it, Hermione?” said Dumbledore.

“We’ll use Carcassonne as our base,” explained Hermione, “Ginny and I will use the second
bedroom in the gite, but Harry and Ron will have to share a tent in the garden. We’ll travel to
Rennes-le-Chateau on our broomsticks,” she pulled a face before continuing, ”We’ll go in the
mornings, just before dawn so that we won’t be seen, and we’ll fly back after dark each night. I’ve
made a list of the buildings and sites to investigate,” she pulled a parchment from her robes, “and
these are the ones that seem to be the most likely places to look at. They seemed to crop up all
the time in the books we researched. We’re hoping that we’ll find magical clues as well – but
that’s something we won’t know about until we get there.”

“That seems pretty comprehensive, Hermione. I’m proud of you,” said Professor McGonagall as she
looked at the parchment, “How many points to Gryffindor do you think, Headmaster?”

“They’re not on school work,” snarled Snape, “House points are highly inappropriate,
Minerva!”

“Hmmph,” said McGonagall, “Now you four be very careful. I want to see you back here after the
holidays all in one piece.”

“We need to talk about your plan in more detail,” said Sirius, “We can meet on the
29th – the day before we leave. Oh and Harry – don’t forget your ‘find-me’ stone!”

***

“Wormtail,” hissed Voldemort, “I want you to take ten of our best Death Eaters to
Rennes-le-Chateau. The school holiday starts on 30th March, so I want you there by
then.”

Voldemort had just listened to Lucius Malfoy’s report, and he rubbed his hands together in
anticipation. “Once this little distraction is out of the way we can concentrate on our plans for
the big take-over. Don’t let me down, Wormtail, or you’ll be sorry!”

“But master, wouldn’t it be better if you led the Death Eaters yourself? No one can stand up to
your power.”

“That’s true, Wormtail, but for once in your miserable life – think! I have to remain hidden
until we are ready with my great plan - otherwise, the Magical Ministries of the world will be
forced to tell their magical communities that I’m back in power, despite the panic it will cause.
Then they’d be able to recruit their aurors in far greater numbers in readiness for my assault. So
it suits me to stay hidden for the moment. Do you understand?”

“Yes my Lord – but master, if Lucius failed to get Potter what makes you think I will?”

“Because, Wormtail, Albus Dumbledore won’t be there. You’ll only have a few young kids and maybe
one or two aurors to deal with. And you’ll be taking my best Death Eaters. So don’t even think of
failing!”

“I won’t let you down master,” said Wormtail, cringing.

“And Wormtail – before you kill them, find out what they’re looking for. I want to know exactly
what it is, and if it’s anything to do with this Anima Summa we heard about. Do you
understand?”

“Yes my Lord. You can rely on me.”

“And don’t use Cruciatus on him. Avery told me that he can block it – although he wouldn’t be
able to block my power. I’m far too strong for him or anybody else.”

***

“So, how are you getting on with my sister, Charlie?”

“We’re getting on fine, Demont.” Charlie waited for Demont’s next try to find out his intentions
towards his sister.

“Just getting on? Nothing else?”

Charlie grinned, “No, Demont. Nothing else.”

Charlie had become amused at Demont’s obvious attempts to get him together with his sister and
he was sure that Nadine was getting the same treatment as well. He just hoped that she wouldn’t be
scared off by it.

“Anything?” asked Demont as Nadine walked over to the two men.

“No – but the vibrations are definitely stronger. North seems to be the right direction to
follow.”

They had parked the Land Rover near the little village of Luzenac, about 10 miles north of the
northern edge of the Forbidden Forest.

Demont looked at their map, “Right, the next place to try is Les Cabannes – it’s not too far
north of here. We should get there by nightfall.” They all piled back into the Land Rover and drove
off along the rough track.

They drove into the quiet little village of Les Cabannes just before dusk, and made their way up
to a promontory about half a mile away. They pitched the two tents at a slight depression in the
ground, underneath a rocky outcrop, and then walked up to the highest point about a hundred yards
away. Nadine closed her eyes and concentrated.

“Slightly stronger, I think,” she said, ”but there’s not much difference from the last
site.”

They walked back down to the tents, and lit a camp fire to cook their usual evening fare of
beans on toast. While Charlie and Nadine prepared the food, Demont studied the map by wand-light.
“The next place on our list is Quillan,” he said, “but it may be an idea to go a bit further west
first. Montsegur is not far away and it may be a good place to try – it’s got a pretty gruesome
history, and it’s perched high on a sheer crag. What do you think, Nadine?”

“Yes, it might be a good idea to try it. We should be there by lunchtime tomorrow if we start
out early.”

“Right, that’s settled then. Oh, I forgot to tell you earlier – I’ve got to be in some meetings
at the ministry for the next few days. But first I’ll have to Apparate back to the cabin in the
morning to collect a few things. You don’t mind, do you? Being on your own for four or five
days?”

Charlie could see through his ploy immediately, “You didn’t mention it before, Demont?”

“Uh, no. As I said – I forgot. But you don’t really need me with you anyway. You two can do just
as well, if not better, without me,” he smiled and looked at them with his eyebrows raised.

“Demont!” said Nadine, “You can be so obvious, sometimes. Sorry, Charlie – you’ll have to excuse
my brother.”

Charlie thought he noticed, in the firelight, a crimson tinge on Nadine’s face as she turned and
walked over to her tent. He smiled at Demont and shook his head in exasperation.

The next morning, Charlie and Nadine drove through the wild and desolate countryside toward
Montsegur. They were a little nervous following the events of the previous evening, but soon
relaxed and chatted companionably as they drove along. It was nearing lunchtime when they spotted
the ruined castle of Montsegur, perched perilously in the distance on top of the huge rocky
crag.

“So what’s special about this place, Nadine?”

“Oh, it was a terrible thing that happened there,” said Nadine, “it was the end of the
Albigensian crusade in 1244, and the castle lay under siege for ten months.”

“What’s the Albigensian crusade?”

“That was one of the darkest times in the middle ages. The Catholic Church was determined to
eradicate all the Cathars from France – the Cathars were a Gnostic Christian sect, whose beliefs
were different from those of mainstream Christianity. One of the things that Rome didn’t like about
them was their belief that each individual could achieve enlightenment on their own, without the
need for a priest. You can imagine what they felt about that! Anyway, the Inquisition was at its
height and many Cathars were tortured and forced to renounce their beliefs. The last of the Cathars
made their final stand at Montsegur – and you can see how difficult it would have been to
attack.”

“It would be bad enough to climb all the way up there – they wouldn’t have had much breath or
energy left to fight,” Charlie commented.

“The siege ended when a surrender was agreed, with the promise that the Cathars would go free if
they confessed their supposed sins. The crusaders killed over 200 Cathars that day – they burnt
them to death.”

Charlie shuddered, “How could Christians do that to other Christians? It doesn’t bear thinking
about!”

“The interesting part, though, is that before the siege ended, a group of Cathars managed to
escape, carrying a great treasure. Many believe that the treasure was the Holy Grail itself.
Catharism didn’t entirely die out at that time. Small groups escaped to Rennes-le-Chateau, a little
village to the north east of here, where they hid in the caves dug by the Romans.”

As they approached the base of the mountain, Charlie groaned, “Oh no. Have we got to climb all
the way up there?”

“Yes I’m afraid so, Charlie. It’s the best place to check for the emanations. Are you afraid of
a little exercise?”

“What me? Come on, I’ll race you to the top!” and he jumped out of the car and started to run up
the rugged and very steep path that led to the summit.

Nadine followed more slowly, and after 10 minutes came upon the prone figure of Charlie, his
chest heaving and his face flushed. “A bit out of condition are we?” she said as she passed
him.

After several hours of climbing, they eventually reached the top, both of them the worse for
wear. They just collapsed beside each other on a flat rock, trying to get their breath back. Nadine
lifted herself up, resting on her elbow, and looked down at Charlie, “I didn’t think you’d make it
all the way.”

Charlie opened his pained eyes and peered up at her, shading the sun with his hand, “I couldn’t
leave you to come up here on your own now could I?”

“Hmmm,” she replied.

After a few minutes, Charlie got to his feet and held his hand out to help Nadine stand. She
caught hold of his hand, and Charlie pulled. Now whether he misjudged her weight or not is mere
conjecture – but the result of his help was Nadine colliding with Charlie’s chest as he supported
her. They looked into each other’s eyes for a few moments, their faces very close, before Nadine
dropped her eyes and moved away.

“I .. I’m sorry, Nadine. Don’t know my own strength!” muttered Charlie.

Nadine just smiled weakly and turned to walk up towards the ruined castle. Charlie followed
closely behind, taking in the majesty of the ruins.

“It’s so silent up here,” Nadine whispered, “There’s an air of desolation and sadness about it.”
She walked further along the crag and began to test for the vibrations.

After a few moments, she turned back to Charlie, “It’s a bit weaker,” she said, “Not quite as
strong as in Les Cabannes. We must have come too far west.”

“Where next then?”

“We’d better go east to Quillan, then north to Rennes-les-Bains.”

“What about Rennes-le-Chateau? You mentioned that place earlier.”

Nadine looked at the map, “Yes we can try there too. It’s only a short way from Rennes-les-Bains
– a bit further north-west. And that place is even more mysterious that Montsegur. I’ll tell you
about the mystery later. It’ll make a good campfire story.”

Charlie smiled and then groaned, “Oh no. We’ve got to get back down. But at least it won’t be as
bad as coming up!”

Nadine laughed at his pained expression, “Yes. And I think we’d better make camp at the bottom
of the mountain. I don’t think we’ll feel much like driving after climbing back down.”

“Come on, then. Lets go. I’ll help you.” Charlie held out his hand towards her. She looked at it
momentarily, then up at Charlie. She smiled, then, and took the proffered hand gratefully as they
started their way down the steep and perilous path.

***

“I should have guessed you’d do something like this – especially since I helped with Hermi’s
surprise!”

Ginny looked at her friends sitting, ginning at her, at the table behind Hagrid’s hut. It was
Ginny’s birthday – the day before they were due to leave for Rennes-le-Chateau. Her friends had
pulled the same surprise as they had done for Hermione, and she hadn’t suspected anything when
Hermione asked her to go with her to see Hagrid.

“Go on, Ginny. Sit down with the rest of ‘em. There’s plenty to eat,” said a smiling Hagrid.

Ginny sat between Hermione and Ron, with Harry and Kristen and Hagrid opposite. After they’d
stuffed themselves full, Ginny looked at her pile of presents, squealing with delight as she opened
each parcel. The last one was from Harry, and she looked at him as she impatiently ripped open the
packaging.

“I hope you like it,” he said a little apprehensively.

Ginny gasped as she lifted out a gold chain that held a gold locket.

“Open it,” said Harry.

Ginny struggled a bit with the clasp, but when she got it open, Harry saw a little tear in the
corner of her eye as she read the inscription ..

‘To My Adopted Sister

*With Love and Respect*

*From Harry’*

“Oh Harry, thank you,” she said breathlessly, “Look everybody,” and she passed it around so that
they could all read the inscription. She went over to Harry and kissed him on the cheek. “Thanks,
brother,” she whispered to him.

Harry smiled down at her and then looked up and caught Hermione’s eye. He moved his head,
slightly, beckoning her over to the side of the hut. She walked over wondering what he wanted.

“That was a nice thing you did, Harry. Ginny will treasure that locket,” she said.

“I hope so, Hermi. Look, I wanted to say something to you – before we go tomorrow. I .. I want
you to know now .. just in case, you know .. anything .. well .. happens to us in France .. I
really appreciate everything you’ve done for me. All the work you’ve done - finding out about
Rhedae and everything. I’d be lost without you, Hermi – you know that don’t you?”

Hermi struggled with her inner feelings, trying to hold in the tears. ‘Oh Harry,’ she thought to
herself as she looked up at him, ‘I’ve been doing all right coping over the last few days. Then you
have to say something like that.’

“Thanks, Harry,” she finally said, “But don’t even think anything bad is going to happen in
France. I can’t think of anybody better to protect us than Sirius, Remus and Ceri.”

Against all her sense of reason, she stretched up and kissed Harry on the cheek. “Thanks,” she
said again, blushing, before going back to sit next to the excited Ginny.

“What was that all about?” asked Kristen as Harry sat back down. She had watched as the two
friends talked, and looked closely at the way they had looked at each other.

“Oh – just thanking Hermi for something she did for me a little while ago,” he replied.

A little while later, Kristen spoke quietly to Ginny as the others went in to see the baby
unicorn - Hagrid had still not found its parents.

“Ginny, I wanted to ask you - Um – oh this is so difficult”

“What’s wrong, Kristen? Is it about Harry?”

Kristen looked pleadingly at Ginny. “No – well yes. Oh, Ginny, is there anything going on
between Harry and Hermione? I know they’re great friends and everything, but – well – do you know
if there’s anything more than just friendship between them?”

Ginny sucked in her breath and thought hard. “Well no – at least not that I know of. What makes
you think that, Kristen?”

“It’s just the way he looks at her sometimes – the way he’s always so protective towards her.
Don’t get me wrong, Ginny. I think Hermione’s great and I don’t for one minute think that she’d do
anything behind my back. It’s just that I get this strange feeling when I see him looking at her
sometimes. I think, on times, that it’s more than just friendship. Oh .. am I making any sense,
Ginny? Am I just being stupid?”

“Kristen – look, I think that Hermi would tell me if she were seeing Harry secretly. I’m sure
that nothing like that is going on. Are you sure you’re not just imagining it?”

“Oh, I don’t know. Perhaps I am. But you know what Harry’s like – he can be so deep sometimes,
and it’s difficult to know what he’s thinking. Look, forget what I just said. I’m just being
silly.”

Kristen walked into the hut to see the unicorn, thinking that she wasn’t being silly. She
thought that perhaps Harry might just have feelings for Hermione, but didn’t realise it.

Ginny remained sitting outside, also thinking furiously. Kristen had set off a chain reaction in
Ginny’s head, and a grin slowly spread over her face as she worked through the possibilities.

Later that evening, the five friends walked back up to the school together. As they approached
the main doors, Harry and Kristen stopped. The other three waved goodbye to her and went
inside.

“Have you got the Portkey?” Harry asked. Kristen showed him the key ring that would transport
her back home to America.

“Have a nice time in France, Harry. It was nice of the Grangers to invite you all. It’s a wonder
that Dumbledore’s allowing you to go though.”

“Well he’s not too happy about it, but he’s sending a few people to watch out for us.”

Kristen sighed and looked at Harry searchingly, “I’ve got to go now. Look after yourself Harry.
I’ll see you after the holidays.”

‘I think I’ve got a lot of thinking to do over Easter,’ she thought. Then she kissed Harry
lightly on the lips before clutching the key ring and disappearing with a slight ‘pop.’

Harry stared at the space where Kristen had been, thinking that her farewell kiss had been a
little on the cool side. ‘I wonder if she’s going off me?’ he thought.

He was still deep in thought as he walked inside the school to join his friends. They had a lot
of packing to do before leaving for Carcassonne in the morning, and they also needed to go over
Hermione’s plan once more – this time with Sirius, Ceri and Remus.

They made their way up to the History of Magic classroom, where they’d arranged to meet Sirius,
Remus and Ceri, and went in to see the three adults waiting for them.

“Did Kristen get away all right, Harry?” asked Sirius.

“Yes – she just left, Sirius,” said Harry looking a bit distracted.

“Right,” said Remus, “We’ve had a good look through your research, Hermione. You did a good
job.”

“Thanks, Professor,” said Hermione, looking pleased.

“I think it’s best if we stay in our Animagus forms for most of the time, Sirius,” said
Ceri.

The six others looked as Sirius replied, “Yes, three people would attract more attention than
just one. And we can hide more easily as animals. You don’t mind a dog and a wolf for company do
you Moony?”

Remus laughed and shook his head, “No. I should be used to that by now, Padfoot. We need to stay
close to the kids, but not too close,” said Remus, “If there are to be any Death Eaters about we
don’t want them to see us. We want the element of surprise on our side.”

“What we need to do is to look at the street map of Rennes-le-Chateau that Hermione found in one
of her books,” said Ceri, “We need to work out the order in which you’ll be looking at each site,
and then the best hiding place for us three at each of them. We can do it in such a way that
there’ll be the minimum risk of being spotted as we move between each location.”

They all looked at the map, thinking of the best order in which to proceed.

“And shouldn’t we contact the Priory of Sion?” said Ron, “After all, they were the ones that
started this off – sending the amulet to Harry.”

Hermione rolled her eyes and looked askance at Ron, “Ron! They’re a *secret* society.
They’re not going to have an office at Rennes-le-Chateau! No one knows who or where they are. No,
if contact is going to be made, they’re the ones who’ll contact us.”

“Oh yes – sorry Hermi. I wasn’t thinking,” said Ron looking abashed.

“Right,” said Hermione looking back at the map, “I think we can start at the Villa Bethania,
then go into the garden to the Magdala tower. Then the Calvery, the churchyard, and leave the
church until last. That’ll do for starters before we look at the surrounding area. What do you
think?”

Ceri looked at the map, thinking. “I think it’ll be better if you start at the Magdala Tower –
us three can climb up that ridge and hide in the bank of trees there. Then go to the garden and on
to villa. We can follow you from inside the trees. Then go to the Calvery, the churchyard and
finally the church. We can stay hidden all the time - we won’t have to come out into the open at
all. Yes?”

“Yes, you’re right,” said Hermione, “I can see you’re good at this Ceri. And we can land our
broomsticks on the far side of the Magdala Tower, hidden from the rest of the village.”

“Right, that’s settled. And you four,” said Sirius looking at the teenagers, “I know you’re
going to be wrapped up in solving the mystery, but for goodness sake keep a look out for the Death
Eaters. They’re bound to turn up at some point. I suggest that two of you concentrate on the
problem while the other two keep a sharp look out. You can do it in turns if you feel left out of
things. And I want you all to stay close together at all times. Do you all understand?” He looked
at the four with piercing eyes as he waited for an answer.

“Yes, Sirius. We understand,” said Harry smiling, and the other three nodded gravely.

Sirius seemed satisfied with the response, “Right then. Any questions anyone?”

He looked around the table and everyone shook their heads.

“I suggest we meet in the Great Hall for breakfast at 9.00 am tomorrow. The Portkey is timed for
10.00am. You can take the rest of tomorrow settling in and spending some time with Mr. and Mrs.
Granger. We’ll be camped close by – hidden from the Muggles, of course. Do your parents know
anything about what you’re up to Hermione?”

“No Sirius. They think we’re on a project for our OWLS – writing a thesis on the mystery of
Rennes-le-Chateau.”

“Fine, see you in the morning then. Goodnight all.”

Author’s Notes : Don’t forget to review – I really do need to know what you think about this
fic, even if it’s only a one-worder (from rubbish to brilliant and all points in between). Grateful
thanks to those who have reviewed so far – it’s appreciated, especially informed criticism – it’s
the best way for a writer to improve.

To answer the queries on the review board :

The identity of Harry’s Anima Summa? – Don’t make your minds up yet! There’re a few chapters to
go before you get all the information!

Kill Kristen off? – She’s still there, but I’m intrigued why you hate her so much Kel – let me
know please.

Where has Draco been? – Lurking under his invisibility cloak!

Will Harry kick some Death Eater butt? – Yes, but Sirius & co. are the main kickers!

Watch out for Chapter 8 – Rhedae. Coming very soon.



9. Rhedae
---------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 9 1901 2003-01-02T14:05:00Z 2003-07-13T08:24:00Z 22 12187 69469 578 138
85312 9.2720 Chapter 8

**Rhedae**

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Notes**: At the end of the chapter there’s a link to some images, showing some of
the places the four visited and some of the things they saw. Feel free to take a look. Watch out
for Chapter 9 – Labyrinth. Coming soon.

"Here they are at last,” said Sirius as he looked up from his second helping of a full
English breakfast. He was sitting next to Remus with Ceri opposite, and they all looked over as the
four friends walked to the Gryffindor table.

"Good morning kids,” said Ceri cheerfully. "What kept you?"

"Oh you know what girls are like, Ceri. We've been waiting for them to get ready for
ages!" said Ron.

"Yes and look at you!” said Hermione. "You can't go to Carcassonne dressed like
that!" Ron and Ginny were dressed in wizarding robes, unlike the others who were dressed in
ordinary Muggle clothes.

"What do you mean? These are my second best robes - there's nothing wrong with
them!" said Ron, looking aggrieved.

"Ron - you've got to dress in Muggle clothes. You'll stand out like a beacon if you
go like that. You too, Ginny."

"But I haven't got any Muggle clothes,” said Ginny with a look of horror on her
face.

"You'll have to borrow some of mine, then,” said Hermione.

"And I've got some spare ones for you, Ron,” said Harry.

Ceri laughed. "We'll get some new ones for you when we get to Carcassonne. You can help
me pick them, Hermione."

As they all started to tuck into their breakfast, Ceri looked up at Sirius. "It's nice
to see you eating so well, Sirius. You've put on a bit of weight since I met you last summer -
you weren't much more than skin and bones back then."

"If you think that's eating well, Ceri, just keep an eye on Ron for the next twenty
minutes - now *that's* eating well.” Harry grinned at his friend.

Ron looked up and mumbled through a mouthful of bacon and egg, "What?"

Everybody laughed as Ron refused to be deflected from his favourite pastime.

After a while, Remus looked at his watch. "Come on, we've only got fifteen minutes. If
you two want to get changed, you'd better get a move on."

Hermione rushed out of the hall with Ginny as Harry grabbed hold of Ron's robes and dragged
him from the table. "Hang on a sec,” said an indignant Ron as he stretched over to grab
another piece of toast.

Dumbledore and McGonagall were waiting when all seven went out through the front doors onto the
drive outside. Dumbledore had a serious expression on his weathered face when he spoke to them.
"I won't tell you to be careful, because I know you will. But let me know how things
progress. I want a daily report please, Sirius - you can use Hedwig.” The Headmaster handed the
cage to Harry, with Hedwig sleeping inside on her perch.

"See you in ten days, Professor,” said Remus as they reached out and held the cricket bat.
Seconds later, they had left Hogwarts.

They looked around as they materialised in a small clearing on the edge of a wood. Through the
trees they could just see the beautiful mediaeval walled city of Carcassonne perched impressively
on a hill. As they walked towards the city, Hermione launched into the history of the place,
reeling off a multitude of facts.

”... And it's the only fortified town in Europe that's still inhabited. It has 52
towers, two concentric surrounding walls and nearly two miles of ramparts.”

"Have you finished now, Hermione? My head's spinning,” said Ron as the others grinned
at him.

"Oh, there's plenty more I can tell you if you're interested Ron." She looked
down at the piece of parchment in her hand and then scanned around the countryside, looking for the
site where her parents were staying. She pointed to a small wooded area off to the right of the
city. "It's over there, about a mile away,” she said.

They walked for another twenty minutes before they spotted a small cabin in front of a copse of
trees. Hermione saw her parents’ car parked in front of the cabin, and the large garden behind,
leading towards the trees.

"That looks like a good place to erect the tents - in the trees behind the cabin,” said
Ceri. "We can put up wards to hide them from any passing Muggles. Harry and Ron can put their
tent in the garden - there's plenty of room. We'll see you later, after we've checked
out the surrounding area - and you'd better not tell your parents we're here, Hermione. It
might be difficult to explain why you need protection. Oh and Harry - you'd better let me take
Hedwig.”

Hermione ran up to the front of the cabin with the other three following closely behind. As she
started to climb the short flight of steps at the front, the door opened and Mr. & Mrs. Granger
stepped out. They were grinning broadly as Hermione first hugged her mother, then her father.

"Ginny, Ron, Harry - it's nice to see you all again,” smiled Mrs. Granger as she came
down the steps. "Come on in - we've got the kettle on.”

"Thanks for letting us stay, Mrs Granger. It's very kind of you," said Harry.

"The pleasure's all ours, Harry,” said Mr. Granger, still holding his daughter around
the waist. "It's nice to see that Hermione has such good friends."

They sat in the cabin chatting as they drank their tea, and then Mrs. Granger got up.
"Hermione, Ginny, come on, let me show you your bedroom. Arbuthnot, go and show the boys where
they can put up their tent.”

Ron looked at Harry, trying not to laugh. *"ARBUTHNOT?"* he mouthed silently.
Harry bent down and pretended to pull up a sock, trying to think of something nasty to stop the fit
of giggles that was threatening to erupt.

"Ok, Millie. Come on you two. Let's go out into the garden – I’ll show you a good place
to pitch your tent."

In the middle of erecting the tent, Hermione and Ginny came out to check on the boys’ progress.
"Hermione,” said Ron, a grin slowly spreading over his face, "why didn't you warn us
about your father's name? Do you know how hard it was for us to stop bursting out
laughing?"

"What's the matter with his name! There's nothing wrong with it - it's a very
old and distinguished name."

"What do they call him?” asked Ron. ”Is it Arby, Buty, or Noty?" Both he and Harry
fell to the floor, finally letting out the uncontrollable fits of giggles that had been lurking
just beneath the surface.

"Oh you! Honestly,” exclaimed Hermione indignantly as she turned, put her nose in the air,
and marched back to the cabin with a smirking Ginny in tow.

For the rest of the holiday, Harry and Ron were hard pressed not to tease Hermione about her
father's unusual name. Ginny had warned them to stay off the subject, and by and large they
coped very well.

Hermione had calmed down by the time Millie served a delightful lunch in the garden. She sat
between Harry and Ginny, and talked about what they would be seeing the following day in
Rennes-le-Chateau.

"I think it'll be great, Harry. We've been researching the place in books for ages,
and to finally see all the places we've read about is exciting, isn't it?"

"Yes, but I hope that all the excitement'll be about solving the mystery.” He leaned
close to Hermione and spoke quietly, not wishing the Grangers to hear his next comment. "And
not fighting Death Eaters.”

Hermione leaned close as well and whispered in Harry's ear, "But there's no reason
to believe that 'You Know Who' knows we're here. How could he know we're coming
now? How could he find out about it? Only us, Dumbledore and his most trusted professors know.”

Harry whispered, "Dumbledore seemed pretty sure there'd be Death Eaters here, Hermione.
Perhaps there's a spy at Hogwarts?"

Hermione turned quickly towards Harry, and breathed, "No!" Their heads were close
together, their eyes locked as they thought about the possibility. Hermione had to turn away then,
her face going slightly pink, as she felt the familiar jolt deep inside her.

Millie Granger was watching them from the other end of the table, deep in thought. 'They
look so good together and they seem to be getting on so well. I wonder if Ginny could be wrong? Oh,
I do hope so.’

She was jerked from her musings by her husband's voice, "We thought we'd take you
on a tour of the city this afternoon, didn't we Millie? What do you think, kids?"

"Yes, dear. It should be very educational for them,” said Millie looking expectantly at her
daughter and the others.

"Oh that sounds great, Dad. There are so many places I'd like to see.” Hermione looked
towards her friends. "There's a few Templar fortifications there - it will look good if we
include it in our assignments, won't it?"

Ginny grinned at Hermione's infectious enthusiasm for anything educational. "It should
be good, Hermione. And we can see how the Muggles live - the shops, ice cream parlours, how they
get about. Don't you think Ron?"

Ron grinned at his sister. "Sounds very interesting. Yes - I'm looking forward to
that.” He had his father's appetite for learning about anything to do with Muggles, and the
'ice cream parlour' reference didn't sound bad, either.

"Right,” said Arbuthnot, rising from the table. "We'll clear these things away and
then we can go. We should all be able to squeeze into the car.”

***

"This reminds me of Hogwarts,” said Harry as he stood looking at the ramparts of the old
town. "There're so many circular towers here.”

Ron stood, looking fascinated, as the cars and buses passed by, and then he let out a gasp,
"What's that?" A strange-looking vehicle was passing, carrying what were obviously
tourists. The vehicle made very little sound at all, unlike the other forms of transport.

"It's an electric bus, Ron,” said Arbuthnot. "They use them to take tourists
around the main attractions in the old town."

"Eklectric!" exclaimed Ron. "Dad would love to see this, wouldn't he
Ginny?"

"He certainly would, Ron. Hey, look at those!" gasped Ginny. She had spotted a group
of teenagers wearing the most outlandish clothes she had ever seen. And their hairstyles!

Harry and Hermione stood closely together, grinning at their two friends. They never failed to
marvel at how little they knew about the everyday Muggle world. Harry put his hand on
Hermione's shoulder. "They're having a good time, aren't they?"

"Yes. It's really great to see them like that - and we've seen hardly anything
yet."

As they walked through the town centre, several very large hawks circled above the buildings.
"Do they use them for delivering the mail, Mr. Granger?" asked Ginny pointing up at
them.

Arbuthnot laughed. "Oh no, Ginny. They use postmen for that. Hawks have lived in the old
town for a long time. They're not owned by anybody and they come and go as they please. Right
Ron, what do you say we try out some of that ice cream you were on about? There's a café just
along the main street.”

"Great, Mr. Granger - lead on,” answered Ron, a broad grin on his face.

As they neared the café, Arbuthnot looked around and found that there were two people missing.
"Where's Ron and Ginny?"

They all turned around and looked back up the street. Ron and Ginny were slowly walking around a
tall, circular structure, looking at it intently. It was about fifteen feet high, eight feet
across, and was very ornate at the top.

"What is it, Ginny? It's made of metal and it’s very strange."

"I don't know Ron. I've never seen anything like this before.” She reached out her
hand to touch the side of the structure.

Ron grabbed her hand and pulled it back quickly. "Don't touch it, Ginny. It might be
something to do with eklectric - and dad says it's very dangerous!"

The two siblings continued to walk around the enigmatic building. "Is there a way in?"
said Ginny. "There doesn't seem to be a normal door anywhere. And what are these buttons?
What happens if you press them?"

The two were starting to attract some very odd glances from passing Muggles, and Arbuthnot
walked over to them, grinning all over his face. "Come on, you two. Don't you want any ice
cream?"

"What’s this tower, Mr. Granger? Is it something to do with eklectric?" asked Ron.

"Uh, no Ron,” said Arbuthnot, stifling a laugh. "It's a pissoir."

"What's a pissoir?" asked Ginny.

"Well, uh, it's a public toilet,” replied Arbuthnot. "They do these things
differently in France, you know.”

Ginny went a bright shade of red and walked, her head held low, over towards Hermione, who was
laughing so hard she had to hold on to Harry to stop herself collapsing to the ground. Ron,
however, wasn't a bit embarrassed - he just kept repeating, "fascinating, really
fascinating," as he walked over to the group.

Later that evening, the four friends walked into the copse of trees behind the garden.

"Hello kids,” said Ceri as she saw them approach. "What have you been up to
today?"

"Oh, mum and dad took us to see the city,” said Hermione and looked over at Ron, smirking.
"Fascinating, wasn't it Ron?"

"Yeah, yeah,” he replied smiling.

"What time to you want to leave in the morning?" Harry asked Sirius.

"Well it should only take us about forty minutes to get to Rennes-le-Chateau on our brooms.
So if you four come over here at about 5.30, you can have breakfast with us. If we leave at about
six o’clock we should arrive just about dawn. Is that ok?"

"Yes,” said Hermione. "I'll tell mum and dad not to get up with us. They'll be
glad of a lie-in."

Ron just groaned, "Half past five - that's terrible. Will you wake me Harry?"

***

It was dark the next morning as the girls finished clearing away the breakfast things. Remus
came out of his tent carrying their broomsticks. "Are we ready then?" he asked.

Hermione took her broom from Remus rather reluctantly, and looked down at the ground as she
said, looking quite miserable, "I'm sorry. I don't know if I can do this."

"Hermione,” said a bleary-eyed Ron. "It's not that far - we'll be there in no
time.”

"Ron - you know that for me, the length of the Quidditch field is a long way to fly.
I've never flown this far before, and it’s dark. And you know I don't like flying.”

Ginny grinned at her. "Then why don't you ask Harry for a lift? It's far more
comfortable sitting on his back than on a broomstick.” She looked at Harry and raised her eyes
questioningly.

"Yes, come on Hermione. I don't mind - and I won't do any aerobatics or
anything."

Hermione looked at Harry doubtfully but said, "Well as long as you're careful and don’t
go too fast.”

"Of course I'll be careful. You can navigate for us.” Harry handed the map and compass
to her.

"I'll be too busy hanging on to you to check compass bearings, Harry. Will you
navigate, Professor Lupin?"

"Of course I will, Hermione. Now don't worry. Everything will be ok. I saw Harry fly
over the Christmas holidays, and he’s very good at it. Now everybody stick close together - you
don't want to get lost.”

Harry transformed into his golden eagle form, and looked at Hermione. She climbed up onto his
back, just in front of his wings, and held on to his head feathers, her eyes tightly closed. Harry
unfurled his wings and pushed off from the ground. He soared up and hovered, waiting for the others
to mount their broomsticks and join him.

They flew through the darkness, with Remus in the lead checking the compass every so often to
make sure that their heading was due south. After about thirty-five minutes, the sky started to
lighten and they could just make out the ground below. Remus called a halt and they hovered while
he checked the map and scanned the countryside ahead.

"Over there!" He pointed ahead and slightly to his right. "I can just make out
buildings on the top of that hill. It must be Rennes-le-Chateau. Come on, let's go more slowly
- and look for the tower. It should be quite prominent - it's perched just on the edge of the
hill.”

They slowly flew over to the hill and started to circle around its edge. "There it
is!" shouted Sirius. "Land over by the right-hand side of it. There's a patch of
clear ground there.”

The sky had brightened considerably as they landed at the side of the tower. They hid their
broomsticks under some bushes as Hermione stepped down from Harry's back. Harry transformed and
rubbed his head. "I thought you were going to pull my hair out, Hermione," he said
screwing his face up in pain.

"Sorry,” whispered Hermione, who looked quite pleased that she was back on the ground once
more.

They looked up at the tower, which was square with battlements at the top. Perched on the side
nearest to them was a much thinner circular tower starting half way up and then rising above the
larger tower. It looked as if it had been stuck on as an after-thought.

“Can you feel it?” Harry said to the others.

“Yes,” answered Ceri, “there’s magic all around here. The feeling is very strong.”

The others nodded their agreement, looking around as if to spot the source of the magical
emanations.

“Sauniere built it to house his library,” said Hermione looking up at the tower, “and a cave has
been found beneath it. Come on, let’s go up and see if we can get in.”

“Now take care all of you,” said Sirius. “Us three will be just inside the trees. And don’t
forget about what I said about two of you keeping a close watch.”

The four teens nodded and started up the grassy bank towards the walkway leading to the tower.
Sirius and Ceri transformed and padded after Remus into the trees at the side of the building.

As they approached the tower, they could see that the door was slightly ajar. Harry opened it
and peered inside. There were piles of rubble on the floor, and each of the floor’s four corners
disappeared down into empty space, obviously the result of fairly recent excavations. They peered
into the cavity below but could see nothing. Apart from the rubble, the room was empty apart from
several ornate bookcases that stood against the walls. Obviously, they once held Sauniere’s library
but they now stood empty.

Harry walked over to a door in the far corner. He opened it to reveal a spiral staircase,
evidently going to the top of the narrow circular tower. “Come on,” he said, “let’s see if there’s
anything up here.”

They walked cautiously up the staircase, Harry in the lead, until they came to another door.
Harry turned the handle and pushed. The door opened and he walked out onto the top of the larger
square tower. The others quickly followed and they looked out over the battlements. Below, they had
a panoramic view of the small sleepy village of Rennes-le-Chateau and they could easily pick out
the places they would be visiting later. To the southwest was a magnificent view over the
countryside and the Pyrenees beyond.

They looked around the tower and up at the smaller one just above them. “I can’t see anything
here that can help us,” said Hermione. “Let’s go back down and look at those excavations
again.”

They went back down the spiral staircase and into the library. “What do you think, Harry. Can we
go down there and have a look around?” said Ron doubtfully. Ron was obviously equating dark
enclosed spaces with the eight-legged denizens that normally lurked there.

“Keep a look out by the door, Ginny,” said Harry. “Ron, you and Hermione help me get down
there.”

Ron and Hermione took each of Harry’s hands and helped lower him to the floor of the dark cavity
below. Harry could just feel the floor as he stretched his feet out below him. “All right, let me
go,” he shouted up to the two.

When he stood on the floor, Harry took out his wand. “*LUMOS*,” he whispered and the cavity
was instantly illuminated. He saw that he was standing in a small cave with piles of rubble strewn
around. He could feel the magical vibrations stronger here. He looked around, and in the middle of
the cave he saw a circular hole in the floor. He walked over and peered inside, extending his wand
into the depths below. He could see that the hole was empty, and it was just big enough to
accommodate one man. It ended about seven feet below, where there were obvious signs of an
unfinished excavation.

Harry sighed, knowing that the answer to the mystery was not there. It only raised more
questions and just added to the mystery. He turned and went back towards the hole in the ceiling of
the cave, but as he started to shout to the others to help him up, he spotted some writing on the
cave wall opposite him. It was obviously in French so he quickly scribbled it down on the back of
his hand. He noticed that there was a small drawing beneath the inscription and he copied that onto
his hand as well.

“Ok,” Harry shouted. “Help me up.” He jumped up and caught the hands that suddenly appeared
through the hole, braced his feet against the wall, and scrambled back up to join the others.

“What did you find?” asked Ron eagerly.

“Nothing – just another empty hole in the floor. The vibrations are stronger down there though.
Oh yes, there was an inscription and a drawing or symbol on one of the walls down there. It’s in
French – can you make out what it means, Hermione?”

Ron and Ginny gathered round eagerly as Hermione lifted Harry’s hand and peered closely at it.
The small drawing consisted of a straight line with a semi-circle sitting above it, like a half
moon. Protruding from the bottom of the half moon was a shape like a finger. “Well! Is it a clue to
the treasure? And is that some sort of map?” asked Ron.

“No Ron.” Hermione was laughing as she translated the inscription. “It’s the French equivalent
of *‘Kilroy was here’* and the ‘map’ is the standard drawing of Kilroy looking over a
wall!”

Harry doubled up laughing, but Ron and Ginny looked puzzled. “Who’s Kilroy?” asked Ron. “Is he
the same one I saw written on one of the passages inside the Great Pyramid of Egypt when we went
there a few years ago?”

This caused Harry and Hermione to go into further fits of laughter. “It’s a sort of Muggle joke,
Ron,” gasped Hermione. “It crops up in the most unlikely places.”

“Oh,” said Ginny, “it sounds like something Fred and George would do.”

“Exactly,” said Harry. “Well – the only thing we’ve found here raises more questions and adds to
the mystery. What were they trying to find down there?”

“That’s anybody’s guess,” said Hermione as she looked at her notes. “Come on, let’s go to the
garden next. Ron – you and Ginny keep a look out while Harry and I look for clues.”

The four went back through the tower door and climbed down into the main garden.

***

Charlie and Nadine drove into the quiet little town of Rennes-les-Bains, and parked near the
main square. They had left Quillan earlier that morning, where the vibrations were once again
stronger.

They walked over towards the little church and into the graveyard behind, where it was very
quiet and peaceful. Nadine closed her eyes and concentrated, and after a few moments she let out a
gasp, “It’s strong, Charlie - very strong. And I can feel that it’s coming from that direction.”
She pointed over to the northwest, to a hill on which Charlie could see perched a small
village.

“What’s that place?” he asked, pointing.

Nadine opened her eyes and looked up at the village. “That’s Rennes-le-Chateau,” she whispered
quietly.

“So it looks as if there’s some truth in the mystery you told me about the other night.”

“Yes, I think so. It must be coming from there. It’s so strong now.”

“Well come on – let’s go. We might be nearing the end of our search, Nadine. Is there a road up
from here?”

“No, Charlie. We have to go further north, then west to Couiza. From there, there’s a narrow
road up to the village. Sauniere built it using some of his vast wealth, you know.”

They walked back to the Land Rover and drove out of Rennes-les-Bains. After a few miles, Nadine
pointed out some of the places she’d told Charlie about. “Over there on the right is Mount Cardou,
where some researchers say the body of Jesus is hidden. And up on the hill on the left is the
Chateau de Blanchefort – the Blancheforts had very strong links with the Knights Templar and it was
Marie de Negre’s gravestone - she was one of that family - that Sauniere defaced after reading the
inscription.”

After turning west onto a main road, they drove along until they entered the town of Couiza, and
spotted a road sign for Rennes-le-Chateau. Nadine drove slowly as they started to climb the narrow
road which wound it’s way up the side of the steep hill. When they were almost at the top, Nadine
suddenly stopped the Land Rover.

“Mon Dieu!” she exclaimed. “I can feel the vibrations without even trying. This is the
place.”

She drove on up into the little village and parked near the main square. “It’s coming from
somewhere below,” said Nadine as they walked over to a little bench.

“What – further down the hill?” asked Charlie.

“No, no. Below the ground – it’s right underneath our feet!”

Charlie scratched his head in consternation. “Now what do we do? Let’s sit on this bench and do
some thinking, Nadine. There’s got to be a way to get at it somehow.”

***

Ron walked in front of Harry and Hermione as they strolled through the gardens fronting the
Villa Bethania. Ginny was behind, constantly looking around for any signs of movement.

“In 1956, some researchers found three corpses in these gardens,” commented Hermione. “They were
all shot.”

“I can’t see anything that could help us here,” said Harry after a while. “Lets go over to the
villa.”

As they approached the large house, which was built using some of Saunier’s vast wealth, Ron
stopped and held up his hand. “There’s somebody still living here.” He pointed to the obvious signs
of habitation, not least the small tabby cat mewing outside the door, wanting to get in. “They must
still be in bed,” said Ron, “the curtains are still drawn upstairs.”

“Well we can’t do much here, then,” said Hermione. “And if someone’s living here I can’t see
that there’d still be many clues to find - the new owners would have got rid of a lot of Saunier’s
things. Come on – let’s go to the Calvary”

The four walked through a gate into the Calvary, which stood in front of the church and close to
the church cemetery. They looked up at the cross that stood upon a stone base. On the base was
carved the inscription *‘A.O.M.P.S.’*

“There’s P.S. again,” said Hermione. “I wonder if that refers to the Priory of Sion?”

To the right of the cross was a strange little grotto, inside which was a stone bench. They
looked inside and Hermione noticed another strange carved inscription *‘K.X.L.S.X.’* “I wonder
what that means?” she muttered.

Ron, keeping an eye out for anything suspicious, had moved over to the side of the church and he
called to the others, “Hey. Look at this!”

They went over to see what he was looking at. It was a pillar that bore a cross, similar to the
cross on Harry’s knight amulet. They looked at it closely and saw an inscription on the base
*‘MISSION 1891.’*

“This is one of the Visigothic pillars that supported the original alter in the church,” said
Hermione. “It may have been the one that hid the scrolls Sauniere found.”

“But why has it been erected upside down?” asked Harry.

“Yes, you’re right,” said Hermione as she bent her head over to look at it. Suddenly she let out
a gasp, “Look!” she exclaimed. “When you look at it upside down, the date 1891 becomes 1681 – 1.618
is the ratio for the golden section - phi - I told you about. It’s not exact but it contains the
same numbers – I think we’re on to something here.”

They looked closely at the pillar and around it’s sides but could find nothing else that would
help them.

“This is standing outside the church,” said Hermione. “This is telling me that we’ll find
something *inside* the church – I just know it!”

“You could be right,” said Harry, “but we’d better stick to our original plan and look at the
church graveyard first. Sirius and the others will be expecting us to go there next.”

“Ok, Harry. Let’s go,” said Hermione with a hint of impatience in her voice.

***

“Nadine, what if we use the same principle as before? Let’s walk around the village and see if
any one spot gives stronger readings.”

“Ok, Charlie. Let’s try”

They walked towards the castle that was once the chateau of Elizabeth de Rennes and looked to be
in a fairly poor state of repair. Nadine couldn’t detect any change in the strength of the
vibrations anywhere around the castle.

Charlie looked around and said, “Let’s try over there, towards the church and the cemetery.”

As they neared the cemetery, Charlie suddenly stopped and let out a loud exclamation, “Bloody
hell! Look who’s over there - it’s my little brother and sister. I don’t believe it!”

Nadine looked and saw four teenagers walking cautiously inside the church graveyard. Two of them
had the same colour hair as Charlie so it was obvious who they were. “Do you know who the other two
are?” she asked.

“Yes – it’s their friends, Harry Potter and Hermione Granger.”

“Harry Potter? What’s he doing here?” exclaimed Nadine. “Come on, let’s find out.”

***

Harry and Hermione looked at the gravestones of Berenger Sauniere and his housekeeper Marie
Denarnaud, each deep in thought about these two people who were at the centre of the mystery they
were investigating. Ron and Ginny looked around intently at the trees and bushes, looking for any
sign of movement or danger. All four jumped as they heard someone shout.

“Ron. Ginny. What the hell are you doing here?”

They looked over to see Charlie Weasley, closely followed by a very pretty dark-haired girl,
striding in their direction. Ginny was the first to recover. “Charlie,” she squealed and ran over
and threw herself into his waiting arms. Ron and the other two ran over and they all started
talking at the same time.

“What are you …?”

“Why are you …?”

“Where have you …?”

Again Ginny was the first to recover her composure. She disentangled her arms from around her
brother and looked at Nadine with a sly grin on her pretty face. “We can swap stories later,
Charlie. But first, why don’t you introduce us to your girlfriend?”

“My girlfriend?” he said uncomfortably. “Uh, this isn’t my girlfriend, Ginny. This is Nadine
Blanc. She’s the sister of a colleague of mine.”

“Oh yes,” said Ginny with a smirk. “So where’s your colleague then?” She reached over and held
her hand out to Nadine. “Pleased to meet you, Nadine. I’m Ginny – Charlie’s sister.”

Nadine smiled at Ginny as she shook her hand. She saw her as one of those people you
instinctively liked.

Ron and Ginny had been so surprised with the sudden appearance of their brother that they had
dropped their vigilance. They hadn’t noticed the rat with a silver paw running out of the cemetery
towards the edge of the hill.

“I’m sorry,” said Charlie, “let me introduce you to the others, Nadine. This is my youngest
brother, Ron. This is his friend Hermione. And this is Harry Potter.”

Nadine shook their hands in turn and asked, “Well I know who Harry Potter is, but what I don’t
know is what you’re doing here in Rennes-le-Chateau. Shall we all go somewhere more comfortable to
talk?”

“Uh, we can’t yet, Nadine,” said Harry. “We’ve got some people watching us from the trees over
there. In fact, you’re lucky you weren’t overpowered when you ran up to us – it must have been
Charlie’s red hair that told them he’s a Weasley. You see - we’re on this sort of quest - and it’s
very dangerous. Come on, if you come over to that line of trees I’ll introduce you to our
protectors.”

As they walked over to the trees, Harry explained to Charlie and Nadine about his godfather, and
his innocence. He didn’t want them reacting badly when they met Sirius.

They went into the trees and bushes at the edge of the graveyard and looked around. “Hello,”
said Remus.

They turned and saw Remus Lupin, a large dog and a wolf approach. “I’m Remus Lupin, Hogwarts
professor and protector to these four.” He shook hands with Charlie and Nadine who were introduced
by Ron. “And these are Ceri Jones, an American Auror on special assignment to the U.K. and Sirius
Black, special agent to Albus Dumbledore.”

The two Animagi transformed and shook hands with Charlie and Nadine. “This comes as a bit of a
shock,” said Charlie. “The last time I saw you was on the front page of the Daily Prophet. Why
weren’t we told you were innocent?”

“It’s a long story, Charlie,” replied Sirius. “Look, there’re some fallen trees over there. We
can sit down and fill each other in about our presence here. But first, these four kids have to
finish their investigation. They have to go into the church to look for something. We can cover
them from here, and when they finish we can talk.”

“Why do you need to cover them?” asked Nadine.

“Uh, look, it may be dangerous here,” said Sirius. “We know that ‘You Know Who’ expects Harry
and his friends to come here. He or some of his Death Eaters may be laying in wait.”

Nadine gasped and covered her mouth with her hand. “Then we must get them away quickly. We can’t
risk them getting hurt!”

“They have to do this, Nadine. It’s very important. I’ll tell you all about it later.” Sirius
looked at the waiting teens. “Go on and be as quick as you can - and be careful!”

Harry led the other three out of the cover of the trees, and they walked through the graveyard
towards the front entrance of the church, all of them looking about them warily.

As they approached the church doorway, Ron suddenly shouted and pushed Ginny to the ground.
“Look out! Get down!”

Hermione turned and saw a line of eleven Death Eaters, dressed in black cloaks, approaching from
the direction of the Calvary. She looked in horror, rooted to the spot, as she saw a ball of energy
coming towards her.

“No!” shouted Harry as he stepped in front of her. He raised his arm and concentrated, forming a
concave dish in the centre of his hand. The ball of energy hit the dish and was repelled back at
the Death Eaters with increased power. Harry grabbed Hermione and dragged her to the ground
alongside the two redheads.

It was now the Death Eaters’ turn to look in horror as the powerful energy bolt sped back
towards them. They scattered and flung themselves to the ground, but quickly raised their wands and
started to fling curses. The four quickly took cover behind some large tombstones and waited as the
beams of light and energy exploded around them.

The Death Eaters were thrown into confusion as the five adults emerged from the trees at the
back of the graveyard, wands outstretched firing spells.

A look of fear appeared on Wormtail’s face as he recognised Sirius Black and Remus Lupin. “Let’s
get out of here!” he yelled, and all eleven Death Eaters Apparated away.

Harry stood up and helped Hermione to her feet. She was shaking with delayed reaction. She flung
herself at him and put her arms around his neck. “Oh Harry! I thought I was going to die when I saw
that bolt coming at me. Thank goodness you were close. I couldn’t have reacted as fast as you
did.”

Ginny went over and rubbed Hermione’s shoulder. “It’s ok now. They’ve gone.”

“Is everybody all right?” shouted Remus as he came up to them. He turned to Sirius. “Did you see
who that was, Sirius?”

“Yes I did – Wormtail! No wonder he bolted when he saw us – he knows what I’ll do if I get hold
of him.”

Charlie went over to make sure that Ron and Ginny weren’t hurt. “Well done, Ron,” he said to his
brother. “If you hadn’t given that warning it could have been nasty. Harry, how did you deflect
that Flipendus curse? It looked pretty powerful to me.”

Harry grinned, “You’ve got to thank Professor Lupin for that – he told me how to do it.”

Charlie looked at Remus with respect. Remus held up his hands and said, “It’s one thing to talk
through the procedure, but quite another to actually be able to do it. I’m proud of you Harry.”

“I don’t think that’s the last we’ll see of the Death Eaters, somehow,” said Sirius. “They’ll be
back when they get over their initial shock of seeing us adults. I think we’d better leave the
church investigation for another day. It’ll be best if we get back to Carcassonne straight
away.”

“But Sirius,” said Harry, “it’s still light and it won’t get dark for hours yet. We can’t use
our broomsticks.”

Sirius rubbed his chin, thinking how to get back without being seen.

“Look, that’s no problem,” said Nadine. “I can take you all in my Land Rover. Well – I can if
you all squeeze up a bit, anyway.” She looked enquiringly at Sirius.

“And we can stop for something to eat on the way,” said Ceri. “You must all be starving – I
certainly am.”

“Amen to that,” said Ron, making the others laugh.

***

“We can’t fail!” Wormtail addressed the group of ten Death Eaters. “You know what will happen to
us if we go back and tell the Dark Lord that they’re still alive.”

They had Apparated back to the cave they were using at the foot of the hill below
Rennes-le-Chateau.

“You were the one who called the attack off, Wormtail,” growled Travis, one of the Death Eaters.
“We could have taken them back there.”

“I ... I ... I was surprised that Sirius Black turned up – he’s crazy, you know, and he’s after
my blood. But I won’t be surprised a second time.”

“So what do you propose we do now?” asked Travis.

“They won’t hang about the village now they know we’re here,” said Wormtail. “They’ll re-group
and come back another time. You lot stay here in the cave, and I’ll hide out in the village in my
Animagus form. When they come back, I’ll come and fetch you. Then we can wait until the kids get
far enough away from Black. Then we strike - and we’d better make sure of it next time.”

“But what are we going to do about Potter?” asked another of the Death Eaters. “You saw the way
he blocked my curse back there. He’s getting too powerful for us.”

“Don’t be stupid, Brackton,” said Travis. “He was lucky, that’s all. And there’s no one that can
stop the Avada Kedavra curse.”

“What about Black then?” asked Brackton. “If he’s that crazy he’s going to be a bit of a
handful, isn’t he?”

“Look,” said Wormtail, “when the kids get far enough away from the adults, six of us can block
off the adults and pin them down while the other five go after the kids. How does that sound?”

“That’s a bit better Wormtail,” said Travis, “but we’ll have to pick the right place to do
it.”

“Leave that to me, Travis,” said Wormtail. “I’m going back up to the village now. Wait here
until I fetch you. I don’t think it’ll be until tomorrow, though.”

***

“That was so good,” breathed Ron as he loosened his belt a notch and patted his stomach. “I
could settle down in this country quite easily.”

“Well thank you, Ron,” said Nadine, smiling. “It’s nice to hear someone praising my
country.”

They were sitting underneath three sun umbrellas outside a small restaurant on the outskirts of
Alet-les-Bains, a small town on the road to Carcassonne. They had just polished off a rather large
and tasty meal, and were sitting in the warm late afternoon sunshine.

“So – it looks like our searches are linked,” said Charlie. He had listened to Remus’ account of
Harry’s quest, which had started with the amulet picking up the magical emanations.

“Yes, I think so,” said Ceri. “Could you feel the magic all around in the village?”

“Yes, we could,” said Charlie, “and none more so than Nadine – she’s psychically tuned to that
type of magical vibration.”

“Could you pinpoint the source of it, Nadine?” asked Harry.

“Not exactly, Harry. But I know that it’s coming from below Rennes-le-Chateau. I was trying to
find the point where it is strongest when we came across you and your friends.”

“So what are you going to do now?” asked Sirius. “We’re probably looking for the same thing - do
you want to join us in our mission? But be warned – it’s dangerous, as you saw earlier.”

“We’ve got to see it through now, Sirius,” said Charlie. “Look, Nadine, you go back to the cabin
and wait for Demont. I’ll stay with these.”

“No way, Charlie. I can be useful to you here. Demont won’t be back from the ministry for a few
days yet.”

“But it’s dangerous, Nadine,” said Charlie.

“If it’s dangerous for me, it is for you all, too. Stop trying to be so protective, Charlie - I
get enough of that from my brother!”

Ginny laughed. “Come on, Charlie, there’s no answer to that. If Nadine wants to come then you
can’t stop her.”

“That’s right, Charlie. Listen to your sister,” said Ceri.

“Yes, and I agree that she should join us too,” said Hermione

Charlie threw up his arms in defeat. “Why do women always stick together?”

The three girls all grinned at each other. “Nadine,” said Ceri, “why don’t you and Charlie stay
with us at Carcassonne? You can stay in my tent and Charlie can stay in Sirius and Remus’ tent. We
can always make them a bit bigger if we need to.”

“Yes,” said Hermione, “and we can travel between there and Rennes-le-Chateau in Nadine’s Land
Rover – oh, as long as you don’t mind Nadine?”

“Of course I don’t mind.”

“Yes!” shouted Hermione, happy that she wouldn’t have to do any more flying.

“When we go there next, we’ll have to remember to collect the brooms,” said Ron.

“We’ll go tomorrow and collect them,” said Sirius. “But you kids can take a day off. I want to
make sure that those Death Eaters are not lying in wait. And Nadine can try to pinpoint the source
of the vibrations - it might make your task a bit easier.”

“Hermione – perhaps we can go into the city to get some Muggle clothes,” said Ginny. “Do you
think your parents will take us?”

“Well I’m sure my mother will jump at the chance to look around the shops. I don’t know about
dad, though.”

“Well he can stay with us,” said Ron. “I don’t fancy going round the shops. Do you, Harry?”

“No way, Ron. We can just spend a nice leisurely day lying in the sun.”

“Talking about parents – do mum and dad know you’re here Ron? And more to the point, do they
know you’ve brought Ginny with you?” Charlie looked pointedly at his brother.

“Uh, I think so Charlie”

“YOU THINK SO?” shouted Charlie. “Do you know what they’ll do to you when they find out? And now
that I know you’re here, do you know what they’ll do to me too?”

“Calm down, Charlie,” said Remus putting a reassuring hand on his shoulder. “Professor
Dumbledore was going to see them personally right after we left for France. He said he’d explain
everything to them, including the need for Ron and Ginny to be here.”

“Why have they got to be here, Remus - Ginny, especially?”

“I don’t really know why. But if Albus Dumbledore thinks they have to be here, then who are we
to argue?”

“Professor Dumbledore is very wise, Charlie,” said Nadine. “I never knew him to do something
without a very good reason.”

Charlie looked at her and smiled. “No – I suppose you’re right.” He turned to his brother and
sister. “And you’d better be careful – very careful. I don’t want to have to tell mum and dad that
you’ve been hurt at all. Right?”

Ron nodded. Ginny walked over, winking slyly at Nadine, and kissed her brother on the cheek. She
looked up at him, smiling sweetly as she said, “You’re so strong and protective, Charlie. I know
you won’t let anything happen to us.” Her expression then turned from sweetness to fury, and she
slapped him hard on the shoulder. “Of course we’ll be careful, you dirty great git. What do you
take us for?”

Everyone laughed, except Charlie who had a pained expression as he rubbed his shoulder.

***

The next day, Sirius stealthily went over to the boys’ tent and woke Harry. “Harry,” he
whispered, not wanting to wake Ron, “we’ll be going in a little while. Keep a look out for Hedwig.
I sent her with a note to Professor Dumbledore last night so she should be back around lunch time.
I’ll see you later.”

“Be careful, Sirius,” said Harry as his godfather backed out of the tent.

Harry went back to sleep and about an hour later was again shaken awake – this time by Ginny.
“Come on, you two, get up. Breakfast’s ready.”

Over breakfast the girls and Millie chatted happily about their shopping trip. “Ron,” said
Millie, “I’d better take your measurements if you’re not coming with us. How about you, Harry? Do
you need any new clothes?”

“No thank you, Mrs. Granger. I’ve got plenty in the tent.”

“Right, well we’ll leave the clearing up to you three. Ron - come and be measured, and you two
girls get ready, I want to leave in ten minutes.”

“What would you boys like to do today?” Arbuthnot asked as they did the washing up. “We can’t go
far because Millie’s got the car. But we can take a walk in the countryside if you like?”

“Is there a Quidditch pitch near here, Mr. Granger?” asked Ron.

“No, Ron,” Arbuthnot laughed. “There is a soccer pitch, but I doubt there’ll be any game at this
time of the day.”

“I think a walk will be fine,” said Harry. “It’ll give us a good appetite for lunch.”

“Ok, Harry. But we’ll have to make it ourselves. Don’t expect the girls back before dinner –
Millie’s acting as if she’s been let loose – she loves company when she’s shopping.”

***

“I’ll get the brooms Sirius, I won’t be long,” said Remus as they climbed out of the Land Rover
in the square at Rennes-le-Chateau.

“No, hang on. We’ll all go together. It’ll be safer,” said Sirius.

They looked around warily as they walked over to the Magdala Tower, and retrieved the brooms
from the bushes where they’d hidden them the previous morning. There were very few people about as
they walked back and put the brooms in the Land Rover.

“I want to check all around the church,” said Sirius. “That’s where the kids’ll be when we come
back tomorrow, and it’s probably where any Death Eaters will be hiding.”

They walked over to the graveyard and checked all the likely hiding places but found nothing.
They then went into the Calvary and around the back of the church, but there was no sign of anyone
hiding. They then hid inside the trees on the edge of the graveyard and waited for two hours,
keeping watch on the church and the surrounding area, but they spotted no one – only the parish
priest who went into the church at midday to say Mass. He didn’t appear to have a congregation,
because they didn’t see any of the locals going inside.

By mid-afternoon, Sirius was satisfied that the area was clear of any unwanted guests. “Nadine.
Would you like to check out the village now to see if you can pinpoint the vibrations?”

“Right,” said Nadine. “We covered most of the village yesterday, and I checked over by the Tower
when we went to get the brooms. The only places I haven’t checked are the church and the
Calvary.”

“Let’s check the Calvary first,” said Charlie and they walked over and stood by the little
grotto. “Anything?” he asked Nadine.

“It’s still the same, Charlie. It’s no stronger than yesterday. Let’s try inside the church –
the priest’s gone now.”

When they entered the church, everyone felt an increase in the magical vibrations. Nadine
gasped, “It’s definitely here. But still coming from below. It’s much stronger in here.”

“Yes, I can feel it too,” said Remus. “If Harry and the others are going to find anything, it’s
certainly going to be here.”

“Come on, there’s nothing more we can do now,” said Sirius. “Let’s make our way back to
Carcassonne – I fancy stopping at that restaurant again. What do you say?”

“Fine – I’m starving,” said Charlie.

“So, Charlie,” said Remus over yet another delicious lunch at the restaurant outside
Alet-les-Bains, “Harry seems to be following in your footsteps – Gryffindor Seeker and
captain.”

“Yes, Remus, Ron’s been telling me all about his exploits. I’d have loved to have seen that game
against Salem.”

“It was amazing, Charlie. Both Seekers had their hands on the snitch but Harry won out. Salem’s
Seeker –Kristen Davis - is at Hogwarts until the end of this year. She’s the Gryffindor Keeper now
– and very good at it as well. She also happens to be Harry’s girl friend.”

“Yes, Ron told me. I rather thought Harry’d end up with either Ginny or Hermione, but there you
go, you never can tell with these things.”

“Talking about that, Charlie,” said Sirius, “you and Nadine seem to be getting on well?”

“We are, Sirius – but only as friends. She used to be at Hogwarts too – she transferred there
the year after I left. How’s old Flitwick these days, Remus? He was a happy old bird when I was
there.”

The men continued to talk about Hogwarts and old acquaintances, while the girls held a
conversation of their own, talking quietly so they couldn’t be heard.

“I’ve seen the way Charlie looks at you, Nadine. I think he really likes you,” said Ceri.

“I don’t know, Ceri. I came to stay with my brother to get over one relationship, and I’m a bit
reluctant to start another one.”

“But you do like him too don’t you? I can tell by the way you look at him – and I’m an empath. I
know you like each other- I can’t help picking up on these things when I’m close.”

Nadine smiled at Ceri. “I thought you were looking at me a bit strangely in the Land Rover
today. That’s what it was all about?”

“Yes – and I’m sorry, but I didn’t mean to intrude. I just can’t help feeling these things,
especially if they’re strong feelings.”

“That’s all right, Ceri. I’m not upset by it. And I suppose you only confirmed what I know
already anyway - I do like him a lot. And you say he likes me?”

“Yes, Nadine. I’m sure of it.”

Nadine looked across at Charlie, who was deep in conversation with Remus. She saw Sirius quickly
look away, but she had spotted him staring at Ceri. “I think you have an admirer too, Ceri,” she
said nodding towards Sirius.

“Oh I don’t think so, Nadine. Our relationship is strictly professional – well perhaps not
strictly - we *have* become very good friends. But he knows that there can’t be anything else
– since I lost my husband and little daughter …”

Ceri told the French girl about her past, and how afraid she was of forming another
relationship. “We’re both in very dangerous situations. One slip and either or both of us could be
badly injured or even killed – and it could happen at any time, especially now. I can’t risk
getting hurt like that again.”

“Oh Ceri, I’m so sorry. It must have been so terrible for you. And I can see how you must feel
about starting anything. But please, don’t deny yourself the chance to be happy again. I know we
live in dangerous times and there are going to be hard times ahead for you both, but surely, if you
can share danger, why can’t you share love as well?”

Ceri looked at Nadine, thinking about what she had just said. She was jerked from her thoughts
by Sirius. “Come on, you two, it’s time we got back - we need to speak to the kids about
tomorrow.”

When they arrived back at the copse of trees behind the gite, Nadine’s Land Rover parked close
by with wards set up around it, they could see Harry and Ron lying in the late afternoon sun,
apparently sleeping. Hedwig was also sleeping on her perch in the men’s tent, and a scroll of
parchment was lying on the table.

Sirius picked up the letter and saw that it was addressed to himself. He opened it and read
quietly, then called as he walked outside the tent, “Hey, Charlie. Come and listen to this.”

They all gathered round as Sirius read ..

*‘Dear Sirius, Remus and Ceri,*

*Thank you for your update today. Be very careful when you go back to the village. You
probably won’t see Voldemort there, but be wary that whomever he sends will be very reluctant to
leave without accomplishing their grisly task, so they are bound to try again.*

*I spoke to Arthur and Molly Weasley yesterday and explained everything to them. They are
worried, obviously, but they accept that Ron and Ginny have a role to play in the solution of the
mystery.*

*They also gave me an interesting piece of information. It seems that their second eldest son,
Charlie, is in your neck of the woods. He’s there on ministry business concerning magical
vibrations that are upsetting the creatures in their Forbidden Forest. Now it seems to me that
these vibrations, and the ones Harry and I’ve been detecting could well be one and the
same.*

*I would suggest that you try to contact Charlie – he could be of great help to you all, and
it would give Arthur and Molly some piece of mind knowing that he’s with you to look out for the
kids. You can trust him with your life – I knew him well when he was at Hogwarts. Let me know if
you manage to get hold of him.*

*Give my regards to the youngsters.*

Albus Dumbledore’

“I’ll send him a note with Hedwig later tonight,” said Sirius. “Your parents will be glad to
hear you’re on the team, Charlie.”

“Yes, thanks Sirius. That’s a weight off my mind, I can tell you.”

They all looked up when they heard a lot of high-pitched giggling and squealing coming from the
garden. They saw two angry-looking boys, dripping wet, and two laughing girls, each holding an
empty water bucket, a pile of shopping bags resting on the floor beside them.

“Oh, you’re all wet,” said Ginny solemnly. “You’ll have to try your new clothes on now.”

“Come on,” said Hermione handing two carrier bags to the boys, “you can dry off and change in
our bedroom. Harry, we got you something new as well - we didn’t want you to feel left out. We’ll
wait here till you get back. Dad’s helping mum cook dinner.”

“Pssst. Hermione, Ginny. Over here,” Sirius whispered from the trees.

The girls ran over and immediately grabbed Ceri and Nadine, and marched them over to the girls’
tent. “You have just got to see what we’ve bought,” said Hermione excitedly as they disappeared
from view.

Sirius shrugged his shoulders in defeat. “I wanted to tell Hermione about the church – but who
am I to try to compete with a fashion show!”

Later, Ron and Harry, wearing their new clothes, joined the group. Nadine told them about the
strong emanations in the church. “I just know the secret’s in there somewhere,” said Hermione.
“I’ve had a feeling all along.”

“We should leave early in the morning,” said Sirius. “You need to spend as much time as you can
looking for clues, and the priest comes to the church at midday to say Mass. So if you haven’t
finished by then you’ll have to wait inside until the priest goes – I don’t want you wandering
outside for any length of time.”

“Shall we meet at say 6.30 by the Land Rover?” Nadine raised her eyes at the teens.

“Ok. See you in the morning,” said Ron as he led the three others back into the garden, eager to
see what was for dinner.

***

It was almost 7.30 by the time Nadine parked the Land Rover as close as she could to the
church.

“Wait here,” Sirius said as he, Ceri, Remus and Charlie got out and started to look all around
the area outside the church, leaving Nadine to curb the impatience of the four teens.

After about fifteen minutes, Ceri came out of the church and opened the tail door of the Land
Rover. “Come on. It’s all clear. Go straight to the church – and good luck.”

Harry led the other three down the narrow lane to the front of the church, and they paused and
looked at the porch, which was covered by a small roof. Above the door was an ornate carving,
protected by the roof. At the very apex of the carving was a ribbon-like motif draped over a cross.
It bore the inscription *'In Hoc Signo Vinces'*

“What does that mean, Hermione?” asked Harry pointing to it.

"Under this sign you win,” she replied, but she was more interested in another inscription,
on the central stone supporting the main arch. “Phew. Look at that,” she breathed pointing up at
it. “*‘Terribilis est locus iste’,”* she read aloud.

“What’s that?” asked Ron.

Hermione gulped loudly and translated, “It says ‘This place is terrible.’”

The four looked nervously at each other. “I don’t think I’m going to like this,” squeaked
Ginny.

“Come on, let’s go in,” said Harry. As they entered, they all felt a strong magical presence.
“Something’s definitely here,” he said.

Ron, Harry and Hermione nearly jumped out of their skins when Ginny let out a loud shriek. They
looked at her and saw that she had her eyes fixed on something to her left.

“Bloody hell,” breathed Ron as he saw what Ginny was looking at.

Just to the left of the doorway was the most hideous statue they had ever seen. It was a
crouching devil, supporting the holy water stoop. Above that there was a carving of what looked
like two lizards, and above that were four winged angels. Underneath the angels was an inscription
in French *‘**Par ce signe tu le vaincras.’*

“Why would Sauniere put something like this in his church?” said Ginny, now recovered from her
shock. They all shook their heads. “And what does that inscription mean, Hermione?”

*“’**Par ce signe tu le vaincras’* *-* It means, ‘With this sign you will conquer
him’.” Hermione thought for a moment, then said, “Those words are almost the same as the ones the
Emperor Constantine saw written in the sky, together with a glowing cross, just before he won a
decisive and important battle that gave him control of the Roman Empire – that’s what converted him
to Christianity. And being the emperor of Rome, he ensured that Christianity survived those
terrible times and beyond. You could say that those words made Christianity what it is today – the
religion of half the people in the world. But the words he saw were ‘*Par ce signe, tu*
*vaincras’ – With this sign you will conquer*. Two letters have been added – L and E - le
which means him.” She started counting the letters from the left hand side of the inscription and
said, “L is the thirteenth letter and E is the fourteenth. 1314 – that’s the date that Jacques de
Molay, the last Grand Master of the Knights Templar, was burnt to death by the inquisition –
curious.” She muttered the last word very quietly as the others looked at her intently.

Her brow creased as she thought hard for a few moments, then she said, “This is a holy water
stoop, so the words mean that by dipping your fingers in the water and making the sign of the
cross, you will overcome Satan. But I ... don’t ... know.”

“It could also mean something else, though, couldn’t it Hermione. What are you thinking?” asked
Harry curiously.

“Yes, of course!” she exclaimed excitedly. “Look at it – the devil is Asmodeus, the limping
devil that guarded King Solomon’s temple in Jerusalem. He’s also known as Rex Mundi - the Lord of
the Earth – Earth! The receptacle he’s holding is a water stoop – Water! The lizards are
salamanders – beings of fire – Fire! And the angels are beings of the air – Air!” She looked at the
other three expectantly.

When they looked blankly at her, she said, exasperatedly, “Don’t you see? Earth –Water – Fire -
Air. The four ancient mystical symbols of alchemy – Magic. So the inscription could mean, ‘You will
conquer him by magic’”

“Conquer who - Satan?” asked Ron.

“I think I can answer that, Ron,” said Harry quietly. “The devil – Lord Voldemort. It all fits –
why else have we been called here? There’s magic in this place, and we have to use it, somehow, to
be able to defeat him.”

Four very subdued teens stepped into the main body of the church, the confessional to the left
and the main aisle to the right, leading up to the alter.

Hermione looked to her left. “Look,” she whispered. “There’s that tombstone that Sauniere
uncovered. There’s Prince Sigesbert being ridden to safety on a horse.” She looked at the
inscription below the tombstone carving and gasped, “Look – it says here that he was saved by his
uncle on 17th January 681 AD. 681 – 0.618 is the reciprocal of the Golden Section 1.618
– again it’s not exact, but it contains the same numbers. And January 17th seems to crop
up a lot in this mystery. That priest was murdered on 17th January, Sauniere had a heart
attack on 17th January, and quite a few other things have happened on that day – Marie
de Negre died on 17th January, Nicolas Flamel created the philosophers stone on
17th January. What does it all mean?”

Ron’s eyes were drawn to the floor of the aisle, which led up to the altar. It was laid out like
a chessboard. He counted the squares. “Sixty-Four,” he said looking at the others. “There’re sixty
four squares in that floor pattern, just like a chessboard.”

“All those statues around the sides of the church are looking at the ground,” commented Ginny.
“Are they always supposed to do that in a church?”

They walked nervously down the aisle, looking around them at the paintings and statues. Hermione
looked up at the ornate alter, which featured a statue of Jesus with one hand raised to the sky and
one hand lowered to the ground. “This is the traditional gesture of the Tarot magician,” she told
the others. “It means ‘As Above So Below’ – heaven recreated on earth. I wonder if it has another
deeper meaning?”

The others looked at her expectantly, but Hermione merely shrugged and they continued to walk
forward. Just behind the altar they saw two statues, one on either side. “That’s interesting,” said
Hermione. “The statue on the right is of the Virgin Mary holding the baby Jesus. And the one on the
left is her husband, Joseph, and he’s also holding a baby. Some bible scholars have postulated that
Jesus had a brother. I wonder if Sauniere knew something more?”

Harry, Ron and Ginny walked up to the altar and started examining it in detail. Hermione,
meanwhile, started looking at the Stations of the Cross – paintings and bas-reliefs that were
placed around the church in the order of the story of the crucifixion. “The Stations of the Cross
are the wrong way round,” she said. “They’re reversed compared to other churches.” She went up and
started looking at them closely. When she came to the fourth station, she gasped, “I think I’ve
found something. Come and look here!”

The three gathered around Hermione and looked at the painting. It was placed on the left hand
wall, just before the entrance to the church tower. Like the others, the painting’s frame was an
arch of golden circles, each one about the size of a Golden Snitch. It showed Jesus carrying the
cross with one man and two women helping him. The man was looking to the centre of the painting,
but his hand was pointing in the opposite direction - to the frame on the left hand side – directly
at the fifth golden circle from the bottom.

“The symbolism is obvious,” said Hermione, her voice revealing the awe she was feeling. “Don’t
you see? This is the fourth station of the cross, and there are four of us. There are four people
in this painting - Jesus – the main player, helped by one man and two women. Harry’s the main
player – the Anima Summa – Ron’s the man whose hand is pointing at the circle on the frame, and
Ginny and I are the two women.” She looked at the others, her eyes sparkling with excitement.

“I think you’re right,” said Ginny, but didn’t comment about another symbolism she could see in
the painting. The older of the two women – the symbolic Hermione – was holding Jesus’ hand and
crying in despair!

“You’re on to something, Hermione,” said Harry. “Ron, point your wand at the fifth circle and
see what happens.”

Ron took out his wand from his pocket and touched the fifth circle. Nothing happened.

“Say Alohomora, Ron,” breathed Hermione suddenly. “The man’s hand is balled into a fist as if
he’s grasping something. It looks like he’s trying to open a door.”

They all looked on with baited breath as Ron again touched the fifth circle with his wand and
whispered, “*ALOHOMORA*.” All of a sudden, things started to happen.

The painting shimmered and then disappeared, showing a blank wall. Then a small square hole
appeared at the centre and quickly spread to form an arch, leading into a darkened chamber beyond.
Ron looked back at the others nervously. He took a deep breath and said, “Oh well, we’ve come this
far,” and stepped into the chamber, quickly followed by Harry and then the two girls.

As they entered, a blue light sprang from the back wall. They found themselves in a small
chamber, and in the middle was a small table with five chairs. A man, his head and shoulders in
silhouette against the blue light, occupied the chair at the furthest end of the table. The
occupant spoke with a soft voice, and no discernable accent.

“Yes, you are most certainly the ones. Only the Anima Summa and his helpers could have found
this secret chamber. Welcome – I’ve been waiting for your arrival.”

They looked at the man, who was in his sixties, as he beckoned them to sit in the other four
seats around the table. He smiled at their nervousness. “So young,” he sighed.

When the four sat down, the man continued, “I am the Grand Master of the Priory of Sion. My name
is not important, but the society I represent is. Over millennia, we have been charged to keep the
secret from those who would corrupt it. The secret is only for the Anima Summa and his helpers – no
one else. Not even I! You see, although we keep the secret, we don’t know what it is. We only know
that we must help the Anima Summa when the time is right. And that time is now.”

He paused as he looked at the four youngsters sitting around him, letting what he had said be
fully absorbed by them.

“It is thought that Jean de Gisors founded our ancient order and was the first of our Grand
Masters, but we existed long before that – so far back in time that our roots have long been
forgotten. Jean de Gisors created the Knights Templar as the physical protectors of the secret,
because it was feared that the Saracens would soon discover it. With the help of that Holy Order,
it was removed from beneath the Temple Mount in Jerusalem and taken to Rhedae, where it still
resides. We – the Priory of Sion – remain the spiritual guardians of the secret, as it has always
been.”

The four teens listened with rapt attention - Hermione in particular was enthralled. She knew
that what was being told to them was very privileged information, and only a very few people
throughout history had known it.

The Grand Master continued, “In more recent times, the priest of this parish found out that a
very great secret was hidden here. We gave the Abbe Sauniere a very large sum of money to refurbish
his church and surrounding area with two things in mind. Firstly, he was charged with creating as
many diversions as possible to deflect prying eyes away from the true nature of the secret. And
secondly, to show the way to the true seekers of the secret – the Anima Summa and his helpers.
Sauniere, though, was not a wizard - so one of our number, the witch Marie Denarnaud, became his
housekeeper to help with the magical aspects of the refurbishment and to keep watch over the
church.”

“What about the mysterious deaths and the date 17th January always cropping up?”
asked Hermione.

“Part of the diversion, my child. It is true that there have been deaths, but they were natural
deaths made to look suspicious to further the deception and add to the mystery.”

Hermione nodded. “How did you know that I’d be in Diagon Alley last July, when you made sure I
bought the amulet for Harry?”

“Ah – so you’ve worked out that it came from us - such great intelligence in one so young.” He
smiled at Hermione. “In ancient times, we the guardians were given special magical powers to enable
us to do such things.”

“Have there been many true seekers in the past?” asked Hermione.

“No – very few. Only a pre-ordained chosen few have been privileged to know the secret. The last
to know it was Merlin, when the world of his time came into great peril. He, too, had three helpers
– it has always been so since the beginning of time. There must always be three. And they must all
be brave and true – as are you. They were King Arthur Pendragon, Morgana and the lady Guinevere and
they helped the Anima Summa – Merlin - find his way to the secret. One of their number was strong
of mind and intellect – that was Guinevere. And again it must also be so now – all of you are brave
and true, or you wouldn’t have come this far in your search, and one of you has a very fine mind –
able to unravel the clues to the secret.” He looked directly at Hermione and smiled. “It is very
obvious that you are that one.”

Hermione blushed and looked down at her hands.

“And also blessed with humility,” said the grand master. He then looked at Harry.

“You, Anima Summa, have been charged by ancient prophecy to protect the world from great evil,
and it is the nature of the secret that I guard to help you in this task.”

“So where is the secret? Can you tell us where to go?” asked Ginny.

“I only know that the secret resides in Rhedae – but not exactly where. What I do have is a
guide that will show you the way. This was handed down by my predecessor, and he received it from
his predecessor, as it has been since the secret was brought to this place. The guide is in the
form of two riddles,” he looked at the four, in turn, “which you must solve both before and during
your journey to the place you seek. The way is difficult and tortuous and you must use all your
qualities and talents if you are to prevail – your bravery, your compassion, your intellect, and
the special powers of the Anima Summa himself. Be warned that one false move and you could all be
lost forever – be very careful. Be true to yourselves and each other and I am sure that you will
find what you seek.”

The teens nodded gravely, waiting to hear the riddles. Ron, however, voiced some of the concerns
that the others had. “But Grand Master, we’re still very young – we haven’t even sat our OWLS yet.
And we’ve still got a lot to learn – we don’t know nearly as much as Merlin and his helpers did, so
how are we going to cope?”

The man smiled. “The things that you need you already have. You don’t have to be old to be brave
and true. One of you already has great knowledge, despite her tender years. It is true that you
gain more knowledge as you get older, but intelligence is with you from the day you are born – it
matters not whether you know everything there is to know – you’re intellect will always see you
through.”

He looked at Hermione. “I suggest you write these down and guard them closely. And remember,
they are for your eyes only. First,” said the Grand Master, “start your quest in the terrible
place. Look to the fruit and their joining with the sign of the teacher, who will cast 3 on the
4th.”

Hermione finished writing the first riddle onto a piece of parchment, and then looked up in
anticipation of the second.

“Second,” he continued, “let the rule of gold be your guide and when it is hidden, follow the
Light of the Righteous.”

“What do they mean?” asked Ron looking puzzled, as did all of them.

“That I cannot tell. Even if I knew, I could not tell you. It is for you four alone to solve the
riddles. You must do this to prove that you are worthy to know the secret - it has always been so
in the past. Now you must go and I wish you well in your task.”

The blue light went out, suddenly, and the room fell into darkness. Then the entry archway,
which had closed after they had entered, opened once more to let in the light from the church. The
four saw that the Grand Master was no longer there.

“Come on,” said Harry, “let’s get back to the others. We’ve got a lot of thinking to do. I hope
you’re on form, Hermione, ‘cause I haven’t got a clue what those riddles mean.”

As they left the chamber, they looked behind to see the archway disappear, and the painting of
the fourth Station of the Cross took its place. Everything was as it was earlier. As they left the
church, Ceri ran over to them. “Where have you been? We couldn’t find you inside. The priest
finished saying Mass ages ago!”

“What!” they all gasped at the same time, and Harry voiced their puzzlement, “But I thought the
priest started his service at midday – that’s hours away!”

“Harry,” said Ceri in disbelief, “it’s nearly four in the afternoon!”

“But ... but we’ve only been inside the church for two hours at the most. It’s only about 10
o’clock, surely.” They all looked at their watches and were surprised to see the time was 3.55
pm.

Hermione looked as puzzled as the rest of them. “We heard a lot of strange and very privileged
things in there. I know we were all wrapped up in it, but eight hours? No way!”

“There you are!” Sirius shouted as he ran up to them, closely followed by the other adults.
“Where the hell have you been? Do you know how frantic we’ve been out here? Where did you get to
and how did you manage to leave the church without us seeing you?”

“Slow down, Sirius,” said Ceri, “something very strange has happened here today. I think we need
to leave as soon as we can – we can talk on the way back to Carcassonne.”

“But I need to do some more research in the church, Ceri,” said Hermione.

Sirius looked at her fondly. “We can come back another day, Hermione. Right now, we need to try
to work out what’s happened.”

Wormtail, who had been hiding inside a bush close to the church entrance, heard what was said.
He now knew he would have another, and hopefully better, chance to attack. As the Land Rover drove
out of the village and down the narrow road, Wormtail transformed and Apparated back to the cave to
update the Death Eaters on the events of the day.

After dinner that evening, the four teens sat outside the boys’ tent and talked about their
experiences in the church. It was only now that they started to realise the full seriousness of the
task that faced them. Harry, in particular, kept hearing the words of the Grand Master over and
over again.

‘You, Anima Summa, have been charged by ancient prophecy to protect the world from great
evil.’

They looked at the riddles once more, and tried to fathom their meaning. Hermione mentally shook
herself, and tried to concentrate. It had been very difficult for her since leaving the church –
the other three had made it plain that they placed great reliance on her ability to make sense of
the riddles. She knew the great importance of solving the clues and for almost the first time in
her life, she began to have doubts – doubts that she would be able to cope with the awesome
responsibility being placed on her young shoulders.

She looked miserably at her feet and her eyes were wet. “I ... I ... don’t know if I can do
this. I don’t know if I’m smart enough to do it,” she wailed.

The others looked at her helplessly. Then Harry moved over to her and put his hands on her
cheeks. He lifted her head up and looked into the tortured eyes of his friend. “Hermione, I know
how you feel – we all do. All four of us have got to complete this task, and we’ve got to do it
together – you’re not alone in this - we’ve all got to help each other. And there’s no one I know
who’s smarter than you. Just try to relax a bit – treat it as one of those complicated Arithmancy
problems you always manage to solve. Come on, we’ll try to help as much as we can.”

She looked gratefully at Harry, and then took a deep breath. “Come on,” she said with
determination, “let’s try again. Ginny, will you read the first riddle – slowly please?”

Ginny picked up the parchment and read, *‘Start your quest in the terrible place. Look to the
fruit and their joining with the sign of the teacher, who will cast 3 on the
4th.’*

“Right,” said Hermione, “the first bit is easy. The terrible place must be the church, itself.
Remember the inscription we read over the doorway? *‘This place is terrible’”*

The others nodded, grinning. This was the old Hermione – no more doubts showed in her sparkling
eyes. “So we have to start in the church,” said Ron. “What next?”

“Ginny,” said Hermione, “can you read the rest of the riddle again please?”

After Ginny finished reading, Hermione put her head in her hands and groaned with frustration,
“That doesn’t make any sense at all! Look to the fruit – what fruit? And what’s the sign of the
teacher?”

Hermione continued to rack her brains, shaking her head from side to side, trying to think of
the books she’d read on the mystery, hoping that there was something – anything – that could help.
Suddenly she stopped moving.

“What?” asked Ginny. Hermione didn’t answer – she shot to her feet and ran into the gite without
saying a word.

“What’s up with her?” asked Ron.

“I hope she’s ok,” said Harry looking worried. “She’s under a lot of pressure with these
riddles. She knows we expect her to solve them. And we’re not helping much!”

Harry needn’t have worried, however. Hermione came bounding back out of the gite clutching
several books in her arms. She sat back down and opened one of the books to the page that showed a
copy of the second scroll that Sauniere had uncovered and the English translation of the coded
message. Hermione read the message aloud to the rest of them.

*SHEPHERDESS NO TEMPTATION THAT POUSSIN TENIERS HOLD THE KEY PEACE 681 BY THE CROSS AND THIS
HORSE OF GOD I COMPLETE THIS DAEMON GUARDIAN AT MIDDAY BLUE APPLES.*

“It starts to make more sense now,” she said. “Notice 681 – 0.618 the reciprocal of the golden
section – again the same numbers. By this horse of God – the horse is the Knight in chess, and the
floor of the church is covered with a chessboard. Daemon Guardian – that’s Asmodeus, the devil
inside the entrance of the church. But look at the last bit – ‘At Midday Blue Apples’ – that could
be the fruit in the riddle. It says ‘Look to the Fruit’ – ‘Look to the Blue Apples’ – that still
doesn’t make sense though!”

Hermione frowned, then brightened. “Wait a minute. I’ve seen something about blue apples in one
of the books. Hang on!” Hermione picked up another book and turned to a page, which showed the
stained glass windows inside the church, and some comments made by the author.

“Yes!” she hissed. “Listen to this, *‘At certain times of the year,* *an apple tree that
bears 3 blue apples is cast through the southern stained-glass windows.’* And the message in the
scroll says ‘At Midday Blue Apples.’ So the light is reflected through the window at midday, but at
what time of the year?”

Hermione continued to look through the book, but couldn’t find any further reference to the time
of year the phenomenon happened. As she looked, she saw something that gave her yet another
insight.

“The Teacher! Look – look at this photo of one of the stained glass windows in the church – it
shows Jesus teaching his disciples. Jesus is the teacher. The riddle says about the sign of the
teacher who will cast 3 on the 4th. Yes – I don’t know what the 3 is, but the
4th – that’s tomorrow, Good Friday.”

“So whatever’s going to happen will occur at midday tomorrow!” said Harry.

“Yes,” said Hermione, “we’ve got to be inside the church then. Whatever happens then is going to
show us where we start our journey to the secret.”

“That’s brilliant, Hermione. I’m proud of you. I knew you’d be able to figure it out,” said a
smiling Harry.

“What about the second riddle?” said Ron. “Read it out, Ginny.”

Ginny read, “Let the rule of gold be your guide and when it is hidden, follow the Light of the
Righteous.” She looked up blankly at the others, who looked hopefully at Hermione.

“Hmmmmm,” she said. “The rule of gold must be the Golden Section – 1.618 - there’s so many
references to it in the church. It must be that!”

“But how the hell do we follow 1.618?” asked Ron sceptically. “That doesn’t make much sense to
me.”

“I don’t know, Ron,” said Hermione, “but I know one thing. I’ve got to start reading up
everything I can about the golden section. And I’ve got to do it by midday tomorrow. It’s a good
thing I brought my Arithmancy books with me.”

“What about the Light of the Righteous?” said Harry. “It says when the golden rule is hidden,
follow the Light of the Righteous. Could that mean there will be some magical light to guide
us?”

“I don’t know Harry,” said Hermione. “I can’t see how we can work that one out until we actually
start on our journey. We’re just going to have to work it out when the time comes. Right,” she said
brightly, “I’m going to go and do some reading.” She picked up her books and trotted back into the
cabin.

“She’s absolutely amazing,” said Ron. The other two nodded their agreement.

“I told her not so long ago,” said Harry, “that I didn’t know what I’d do without her. This is
one of those times that brings the truth of it right home to me.”

Ginny smiled as she looked at Harry, nodding her agreement. “Let’s go and see Sirius and the
others,” she said. “We’ve got to tell them about tomorrow.”

They found the others sitting outside their tents. Sirius, Ceri and Remus were talking together
about what to say in their report to Professor Dumbledore. Nadine and Charlie were sitting quite
close together, laughing at something one of them had said. When he saw the kids, Charlie got up
and walked over to them.

“Hermione’s cracked the first riddle,” Harry said as he went over to Sirius, closely followed by
Ron and Charlie. Ginny looked at Nadine and went over and sat by her. “So – what were you two
laughing at?” she asked.

“Oh – Charlie was telling me about one of his run-ins with Snape.”

Ginny grinned slyly. “You two seem to be getting on, don’t you? There’s nothing you want to tell
me, is there?”

“Ginny!” said Nadine with mock indignation. “Now what should I be telling you?”

“Oh you know – that you and Charlie have finally seen the light and got together?”

“Ginny Weasley! What gives you that idea?”

“It’s plain to see, Nadine. It’s written all over both your faces when you’re together. You like
him don’t you?”

Nadine sighed, “It’s that obvious is it? Yes, I like your brother, Ginny. He makes me laugh and
I didn’t think I could ever laugh again after ...well, that’s another story. But I don’t think
Charlie’s ready to make any commitment yet. At least, he hasn’t said anything to me – that, well,
he likes me or anything.”

Ginny beamed at the French girl. “It’s obvious he likes you, Nadine. He just needs a little
nudge in the right direction. And I’m pretty good at nudging my brothers when the need arises. Oh
I’m so glad, Nadine. This is great!”

“Ginny – now don’t do anything rash. If and when Charlie wants to say something, he will, I’m
sure. Let’s not rush things, please?”

“Come on, Nadine. Let’s go and join the others. We’ve got some news about the riddles.” Ginny
couldn’t stop grinning as they walked over to the other tent.

“So,” Sirius said, “we have to be at the church just before midday, when you expect something to
happen?”

“That’s right, Sirius,” said Harry, “and you may have a long wait. Hermione thinks that we’ll
have to go on a journey to get to the secret. We know it’s somewhere in the village and we think
that the starting point is the church. But if today’s events are anything to go by, don’t expect to
see us till we come back out of the church. Anything might happen, and when it does it’ll probably
be magical.”

“We’ll stick to the same plan as today then,” said Ceri. “We’ll spread out outside the church
and wait. If the Death Eaters turn up I’ll come inside to warn you, but just in case, don’t rush
out of the church without checking that the coast is clear.”

“Is there anything else we can do to help?” asked Remus.

“I don’t think so, Professor,” said Harry. “We’ve got to do this on our own – the Grand Master
told us that. All we can do is be guided by whatever comes our way. I know one thing, though. We’ve
got to have clear heads tomorrow. Come on, let’s get back and get an early night.”

The three kids walked towards the garden. As they left the copse of trees, Ginny turned and
called, “Goodnight Charlie. Have a nice night.”

“Now what did she mean by that?” he asked Nadine.

Nadine just grinned and shook her head.

Author’s Notes (2) : The following is a link to my photo album, which contains 5 images that are
relevant to this chapter –Feel free to have a look at them.

- The 4th Station of the Cross – where Hermione spotted the symbolism and the key to
solving the mystery.

- The devil inside the church entrance that made Ginny scream.

- Magdala Tower.

- Rennes-le-Chateau as seen when the gang approached on their broomsticks

- The church at Rennes-le-Chateau


http://uk.photos.yahoo.com/bc/animasumma/lst?.dir=/Anima+Summa+Book+1+-+Mystery+of+Rhedae&.src=ph&.order=&.view=t&.done=http%3a//photos.yahoo.com/



10. Labyrinth
-------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 3 3 2003-07-14T17:43:00Z 2003-07-14T17:48:00Z 14 7830 44633 371 89 54812
9.2720 6 pt 2 2 Chapter 9 Labyrinth

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

Author’s Note (1) – At the end of the chapter (see Labyrinth (part 2)), I’ve placed a link to
some more images relating to this chapter, including Ginny’s map of the labyrinth.

The morning of the 4th April dawned with a mainly clear sky. As the sun pushed its
way above the horizon, the few wispy clouds vanished and a glorious spring day was in prospect.
Only Harry witnessed the beauty as he poked his head out of the tent. He breathed deeply; feeling
refreshed from his restful sleep, and walked out into the garden to start his exercises.

After an hour, Harry saw a smudge of red poke its way out of the tent and Ron, with bleary eyes,
groaned, “What’s all this noise? Is there something wrong with you, Harry? Look at the time – it’s
only 7 o’clock - it’s still the middle of the night!”

Harry laughed at his friend. “Why don’t you come and join me, Ron? You could do with a bit of
exercise.”

“No way. Just call me when breakfast’s ready,” and the unruly mop of red disappeared back into
the tent.

Just then, Harry caught another flash of red out of the corner of his eye and turned to see a
smiling Ginny approach. “Morning Harry. How long have you been up? Quite a while by the look of
you.” she drew her finger down Harry’s shoulder and showed him the perspiration that dripped from
it.

“Got to keep up the training, Ginny. Mustn’t let it lapse now – we’ve still got the Slytherins
to play you know.”

Ginny flopped onto the grass and beckoned Harry to join her. “Hermione’s still sleeping - I
heard her come to bed at about 3 o’clock this morning. She’d been reading and making notes for
about 7 hours nonstop! I got up at midnight and made her a sandwich and a cup of tea – she hardly
knew I was there! I thought it’d be best to let her sleep – if there’s one of us who needs to be
alert today, it’s her!”

“Yes, I think you’re right. We can call her at 10.30 – that should give her enough time to get
ready and we can travel down to Rennes-le-Chateau at about 11 o’clock. We’ve got to be there by
midday, but we don’t want to arrive too early in case Wormtail shows up.”

Ginny frowned at Harry’s reminder of the ever-present dangers surrounding their quest, then she
brightened. “Uh, what do you think about Sirius and Ceri, Harry? They’d make a nice couple, don’t
you think?” She raised her eyebrows questioningly.

“Oh no, Ginny. Don’t go there. I know what you’re like – I’ve seen you trying to get Charlie and
Nadine to connect.” He paused and then grinned. “But I think you’re absolutely right – they’d make
a great couple. But there’s a lot of painful history there, Ginny. I wouldn’t push things if I were
you. If anything’s meant to happen – it’ll happen on its own.”

Ginny frowned. “Ok Harry. It’s your call. But the Charlie and Nadine project is mine!” She was
smiling again. “So watch this space!” Harry rolled his eyes but couldn’t help laughing at the
infectious optimism of his young friend.

“What the bloody hell is all this noise!” Ron emerged from the tent, dressed only in his boxers,
running his hands through his hair. “Can’t a guy get some sleep in this place?”

“Oh come on Ron,” said Ginny, “you’ve had about ten hours already. Get dressed – and come on,
you and Harry can help me make breakfast. Oh and Ron, we’re letting Hermione sleep in until half
past ten – she’s going to need all the rest she can get before we leave.”

Millie and Arbuthnot were pleasantly surprised to see breakfast waiting for them when they came
into the kitchen. “This is nice,” said a smiling Millie. “We’ll have to invite you on our little
jaunts more often I think.” She looked around the kitchen. “Where’s Hermione?”

“She’s still sleeping Mrs. Granger,” said Ginny. “She was up most of the night doing some
research. We’re going to Rennes-le-Chateau at about 11 o’clock so we thought we’d leave her in bed
for as long as we could.”

“How long do intend to be there, today?”

“Oh, I’m not really sure Mrs. Granger,” said Harry, “but we could be quite a while. We’ve got a
lot to investigate so don’t expect us back before some time this evening. So don’t worry if we’re
late.”

“Umm,” said Millie frowning, “and if I know my daughter, she won’t want to be interrupted by
anything as mundane as finding a nice restaurant to have a decent meal. I’ll have a nice little
picnic ready to take with you. I think I’ve got just enough time to cook you one of my
specialities.”

Ron’s ears pricked up. “What’s that, Mrs. Granger?”

“Pizza Margherita. I picked up this gorgeous recipe in Italy a few years ago. Until you’ve tried
pizza the way the Italians make it, you haven’t lived!”

“Ron!” whispered Ginny. “Close your mouth. You’re slobbering!”

Everyone laughed as Ron quickly and noisily slapped his lips together. “I can’t wait, Mrs.
Granger.”

“What’s all this, Mum?” asked Hermione as she finally made an appearance later that morning.
“And where is everybody?”

“They’re out in the garden getting things ready for your little trip today. And since you’re
likely to be late home, I’ve made you all a little something to make sure you eat properly.”

“Little! Mum, how are we going to carry all that food?”

“Easy,” said Ron as he came into the kitchen from the garden. He stopped suddenly and put his
nose in the air and closed his eyes as a look of pure ecstasy dawned on his face. “What is that
gorgeous smell?”

“That’s my pizza, Ron,” said Millie, looking pleased. Ron opened his eyes and surveyed a huge
mound of packages on the kitchen table. “There’s sandwiches, some chicken drumsticks, a few pies
and pasties, potato crisps, some salad and, of course, the pizza.”

“Thank you, Mrs. Granger. That’s very kind of you. Now where have you put the food for the
others?”

“Ron!” breathed Hermione, laughing. “Tell the others I’ll have a cup of tea and a piece of toast
and I’ll be out in about fifteen minutes.”

“Right. Take your time – we won’t be leaving for another half hour.” Ron piled the packages into
his arms and walked gingerly out into the garden, balancing them precariously, to pack them into
the four rucksacks stored in the tent.

A little later, the three greeted Hermione as she walked over to the tent. “How are you feeling?
And what have you got there?” asked Harry.

“Fine, Harry. Thanks for letting me sleep in. I found out quite a lot about the golden section
last night, and I think we’ll need these things to work out anything we come across relating to
phi.” She showed them a calculator, some parchments, a measuring tape and several other instruments
taken from her Arithmancy set.

“Uh, I think YOU’LL be the one needing them Hermione,” said Ron. “I’ll just protect you while
you do the calculations.”

The four teens grinned and then checked that they had everything before walking into the copse
of trees behind the garden.

“Mum made a huge mound of food for us,” Hermione told the adults. “Much too much for us
four.”

“Speak for yourself, Hermione,” said Ron with a pained expression as she gave two of the
rucksacks to Ceri and Nadine.

“Come on, Ron. Even you couldn’t eat all that,” said Harry.

“I’d have had a good go, Harry. Uh, Hermione, you’ve kept the rucksack with the pizzas in I
hope?”

“I’ve split them up, Ron - some for us and some for the others. Ok?”

“Thanks, Hermione,” said Sirius. “If we can’t finish it all, we’ll keep what’s left for Ron.” He
looked at his watch. “11 o’clock. Time to get moving, I think.”

They all piled into the Land Rover and Nadine slowly pulled onto the track that led to the main
road. As they neared Rennes-le-Chateau, they all had serious expressions on their faces as they
thought of what lay ahead.

“What are we going to do about the priest?” said Remus. “It’s Good Friday and he’s bound to have
a service planned for midday today.”

Nadine glanced at the others. “I think I know what to do. While you kids are in the church, I’ll
wait on the path to the church door and intercept him. I’ll pretend that I’m in a bit of pain or
something and keep him talking. If you, Ceri, go into the church with them, you can come out and
signal when they’ve found the way to the secret and I can then let the priest go.”

“That sounds ok, Nadine,” said Ceri. “Sirius, Remus and Charlie can keep a look out around the
church until we all come out, then the five of us can take up our defensive positions around the
kids, as we agreed earlier, as they start on their journey to the secret.”

The Land Rover pulled into the main square of Rennes-le-Chateau at 11.50 precisely, and everyone
cautiously got out and made their way towards the church. The teens went inside with Ceri while
Nadine waited outside, looking up the lane for the priest’s arrival. Sirius, Remus and Charlie
spread out around the front of the church and started looking for any sign of activity.

From his hiding place behind a large rock, Wormtail was dismayed at the close protection given
to the youngsters, but he had a grim expression on his face, if a rat could have such an
expression. He silently made his way behind the church to Apparate to the cave where the Death
Eaters were waiting.

Just then, Nadine spotted the priest approaching the church. Again, there was no congregation in
sight. As he came near, she flopped onto the ground, holding her stomach, and held her hand out,
imploringly. “Father, please help me. I just felt a sudden stabbing pain in my stomach. It hurts so
much.”

The priest rushed over and bent down beside her. “Easy, my child - let me help you over to the
bench outside the church.”

He gently helped Nadine get to her feet and they slowly walked over to the bench and they both
sat down. “Now tell me - exactly where is the pain?”

Inside the church, Ceri watched as the teens spread out around the main aisle, and looked up at
the stained glass windows. It was 3 minutes to midday, and they looked expectantly towards the
window that showed Jesus instructing his disciples.

“Look there!” exclaimed Ginny pointing to the middle of the aisle. They all looked and saw the
image of 3 blue apples slowly moving down the aisle towards the centre.

“What now?” asked Ron.

“We have to look for the sign of the teacher. You keep looking at the floor, Ginny. The rest of
us will look at the Jesus window.”

It was now 2 minutes to midday and the tension inside the church could be cut with a knife.

Outside, meanwhile, Nadine was making a good job of keeping the priest occupied, while Sirius,
Charlie and Remus kept watch. Suddenly, Remus spotted movement about 50 yards away at the edge of
the cemetery. He signalled to the others and they looked over to where Remus was pointing. They saw
the unmistakable black cloak of a Death Eater disappear quickly behind a tree. Sirius moved
immediately over to the bench where Nadine was talking to the priest.

“I’m sorry, father,” he said, “but you have to leave here immediately. There’s danger
approaching.” He nodded in the direction of the Death Eaters, who at that moment broke cover and
started to run towards the front of the church. The priest had a frightened look in his eyes –
obviously, he understood English. But he said, “But this young child is in pain. I cannot leave her
like this.”

“Don’t worry about her father, I’ll make sure she reaches safety. Now go before it’s too late.”
The priest needed no further prompting and ran over towards the Villa Bethania to seek cover.

“Nadine – go and warn Ceri and the kids. We’ll hold them off as long as we can.” The sound of
curses and charms filled the air as Nadine rushed into the church and Sirius moved back to his
defensive position.

It was 1 minute to midday as Nadine rushed up to Ceri and told her about the attack. They both
rushed towards the door, wands in hand, and prepared to hold position there.

It was midday. Suddenly, Hermione and the others saw a bright light within the stained glass
window they were watching. Ginny again cried out as she saw another image appear on the front of
the aisle floor. The rest looked down and saw a perfect white triangle moving up the aisle towards
the image of the blue apples.

“That’s a perfect isosceles triangle,” said Hermione. “Of course! The teacher will cast 3 – a
3-sided triangle. Look, it’s almost reached the fruit – It has to join with it, just like the
riddle said.”

The triangle and apple images merged at the centre of the aisle, and when the apples were
contained exactly within the triangle, both images completely covered one of the white chessboard
squares on the floor.

“That’s it,” shouted Hermione, “that square must be the starting point of our quest.”

“But Hermione,” said Ron, “where are we supposed to go from there? I can’t see anything else
that shows the way.”

“It must be a portal,” said Ginny, “you know – like the one Ron opened when we met the Grand
Master the other day.”

“I think you’re right, Ginny,” said Harry. “Come on – let’s see if we can open it.”

The four stood, two each side of the square and looked down. Harry took out his wand and touched
the square at the centre and said, “*ALOHOMORA*”.

The square shimmered, and then vanished to reveal a hole with steps leading steeply down below
the floor of the church.

“We’ve found the entrance,” whispered Hermione and she looked around the church. “Where’s
Ceri?”

The others looked around and Harry exclaimed, “Can you here that? That’s the sound of curses
being thrown. The Death Eaters must have shown up. Wait here – I’ll go and see what’s
happening.”

He moved down the church and went to the door where he saw Nadine and Ceri crouched on the
floor, flinging charms towards their left-hand side.

Ceri turned and saw Harry approaching. “Stay back, Harry. It’s Wormtail and about ten other
Death Eaters. You keep looking and we’ll hold them off.”

“We’ve found the entrance, Ceri. It seems to be a tunnel leading underneath the church. But we
can’t go now – we’ll help you fight them off. I’ll go and get the others.”

“No, Harry. We’ll be ok. We’ve got our defensive positions worked out and we’ll be able to hold
them off for quite some time. You go and start the quest – don’t worry about us.”

“But Ceri …”

Suddenly, Harry heard a loud voice. “ANIMA SUMMA.” He jerked his head up and looked around but
couldn’t see who was speaking. He looked towards Ceri and Nadine, who showed no sign of having
heard anything. He moved back inside the church and saw that his friends were looking around with
their mouths wide open – they must also have heard the voice. He went over to Hermione. “Did you
hear that?” he asked.

“Yes Harry – we all did.”

“ANIMA SUMMA. FIND YOUR WAY TO THE SECRET. DO NOT BE AFRAID FOR YOUR FRIENDS OUTSIDE – THEY WILL
BE SAFE. TIME WILL BE EQUALISED.”

“You all hear that?” asked Harry. The others nodded.

Ron voiced what the others were thinking, “Who was that? And what did he mean by ‘time will be
equalised’?”

They all shrugged their shoulders and shook their heads.

“All right,” said Harry. “We’ll go. But hang on until I go and tell Ceri.” He ran back to the
church entrance and touched Ceri on the shoulder. She turned her head and looked at him
questioningly.

“Ceri – we’re going down under the church. We heard a powerful voice saying that you’d all be
safe out here. We’ll be as quick as we can.”

“Ok Harry – go. And don’t worry about us.”

Harry returned to his waiting friends and went to the hole in the floor. He put his foot on the
first step and then paused, looking at his friends. “Goodness knows what we’ll find down there, or
how far we’ll have to go. Are you all sure you want to do this?”

The others looked at each other and Hermione said, “Don’t be silly, Harry. Of course we want to
do it. We’ve come this far and we want to see it through. And in any case, the Grand Master said
that we *all* have to go.”

The four friends grinned at each other, and then Hermione thought for a moment. “The Grand
Master said that the way would be difficult and tortuous. And he also said that if we make one
false move, we’d be lost forever. Now I get the feeling that we’re about to enter a labyrinth – and
there’ll probably be many twists and turns. The tunnel may branch in different directions, so I
think it’ll be a good idea if we map our progress. Ginny, will you keep a record on some parchment
of the way we go? We’ll then be able to follow the map to find our way back out after we’ve found
the secret.”

Ginny nodded. “That sound like a very good idea.” She took some blank parchment and a pencil
from Hermione’s rucksack.

“Why don’t we just make marks on the tunnel wall – you know, arrows pointing which way we go?”
asked Ron.

“No Ron, we can’t do that,” said Harry. “If the Death Eaters break through and get into the
church we don’t want to put up a load of sign posts telling them which way we’ve gone.”

“Oh right. Sorry – I wasn’t thinking.”

Harry grinned at his friend and then took a deep breath. “Ok. Are you all ready?” Everyone
nodded with determination.

“Then let the quest begin!”

***

Charlie ducked as the lethal green light whizzed just above his head. The Death Eaters were
flinging killing curses thick and fast – but they didn’t appear to be very precise in their aim. He
turned to where Sirius was hiding. “These guys are not playing about – tell the others to be very
careful.”

“I know, Charlie. They seem to be putting down a lot of covering fire – some of them may be
trying to outflank us. There’s a weak spot over to our right – I’ll move over to the Calvery – I
should be able to cover it there.” He shouted to the others, “Try to keep their heads down for a
few seconds – I’m going to change my position.”

Charlie and Remus started to send curses in the direction where most of the Death Eater fire was
coming from, while Ceri and Nadine aimed at any sign of movement. It had the desired effect, and
Sirius picked a lull in the curses aimed at them to race from his cover over to the Calvery. He
made it – just. As he dived for the cover of the stone cross, green light started to pepper the
ground around him. He let out a loud breath and raised himself into a crouching position, peering
around his stone cover. He had been right – he could see two Death Eaters creeping along the line
of trees to his right, trying to get into the Calvery. He raised his wand and took careful aim but
he couldn’t get a clear sight because of the tree cover. He then raised his wand and aimed at a
large tree branch under which the Death Eaters were creeping.

“*FLIPENDO*,” he shouted and a ball of energy left his wand and struck the branch at the
point where it met the main tree trunk. The Death Eaters were thrown to the ground as a dense
bundle of leaves and branches fell on them, leaving them exposed to Sirius’ fire. He sent
‘*Stupefy*’ spells in their direction, but the Death Eaters’ fear lent them a burst of speed
as they rushed back to join the main throng of black-cloaked figures.

Sirius grinned and settled down for a long wait.

***

“Harry’s owl – Hedwig – delivered a message this morning, Arthur.” Dumbledore sat at the kitchen
table at The Burrow, facing Arthur and Molly Weasley, who had worried expressions on their
faces.

“Are they all right, Professor?” asked Molly anxiously.

“Yes, yes – don’t worry Molly. They’re all ok. It seems that when I sent the note giving them
your information, Charlie had already made contact with them. It seems that he and a French girl –
the sister of Charlie’s magical creatures contact in the Langedoc – were in Rennes-le-Chateau at
the same time as the kids and their protectors. They’ve now joined the team and Charlie’s keeping a
brotherly eye on Ron and Ginny.”

“Oh thank goodness,” said Arthur. “You’ve mentioned the protectors before, Professor, who are
they? Do I know any of them?”

“Wait a minute, Arthur,” said Molly. At the mention of the French girl, her ears had pricked up
and a gleam had come into her eyes. “Tell me, Professor, who’s this French girl?”

“Her name’s Nadine Blanc, Molly,” Dumbledore said with a grin, “and before you ask any more
questions, no – I don’t know if she and Charlie are an item. I gather they’re very friendly with
each other but beyond that, I don’t know.”

“Well it’s about time Charlie settled down and found a nice girl. I’ve lost patience with Bill,
but I thought Charlie would have been married by now.”

“Molly,” said Arthur knowingly. “I can see that look in your eye but you don’t even know if
Charlie and this girl like each other that way. Now don’t go interfering!” He grinned slyly at
Dumbledore. “Right Professor, you were about to tell us about the support team.”

“Yes Arthur. They’re the best people I’ve got – you know, of course, that I couldn’t get any
Aurors from the Ministry, but these three are right up to the job. Ceri Jones is an American
special Auror, seconded to my team from the United States. You both know Remus Lupin, of course –
my Defence Against the Dark Arts professor. And finally, my most trusted helper, Sirius Black. He
…”

Dumbledore was interrupted by a loud shriek that erupted from Molly Weasley. Arthur had suddenly
gone very pale. “Professor Dumbledore - is that Sirius Black the escaped killer from Azkaban?”

“The very same, Arthur.” he held up his hands to ward off the expected volley of protests and
continued, “I thought you may have heard the odd rumour at the ministry. Sirius Black is innocent
of all charges. Indeed, the wizard he’s supposed to have killed – Peter Pettigrew – is leading the
band of Death Eaters opposing them in France. He was the one who killed the Muggles fourteen years
ago – he’s a rat Animagus, and you may not believe this, but he was living with you for a long time
– Scabbers.”

Molly and Arthur gasped and stared disbelieving at Dumbledore.

“Sirius has been working for me for over a year now – he’s done some very difficult and
dangerous work keeping track of Voldemort. I can’t think of anyone better to whom I’d entrust the
safety of the four kids.”

Dumbledore paused and a grim expression crossed his face. “I won’t lie to you both - there has
been a Death Eater attack on the kids and I very much doubt it will be the last. It was Ron’s quick
reactions that prevented any of them getting hurt and gave them the time for the protectors to
fight them off.”

“Professor Dumbledore,” said Molly, “don’t you think it would be best to bring them home? I
mean, if things are getting that dangerous …” she trailed off at a loss for words.

“I’m sorry, Molly, but this has got to be done. I told you before how important it is that Harry
uncovers the secret, and Hermione, Ron and Ginny have been destined to be his helpers. This is the
key to defeating Voldemort. Look, even as we speak, your children are helping to write wizarding
history. When this whole epic comes to the attention of the wizarding public – and it will – I’ll
see to that – their names will be held in the highest esteem throughout the world. You should be
proud of them – I certainly am.”

A tear rolled down Molly’s face and Arthur put a protective arm around her shoulders. “We are
proud of them anyway, Professor, whether they write history or not. We just hope they’ll come out
of this safely.”

***

Harry slowly led the way down the steps that fell steeply below the church. After a few minutes,
the steps came to an end and the four stood at the entrance to a tunnel. They could see in the dim
light that filtered down from the church above, that the tunnel was roughly hewed from the rock,
about 6 feet high and four and a half feet wide. Jagged pieces of rock jutted from the ceiling and
the sides of the tunnel, so they would have to proceed in single file. Suddenly they jumped as the
light from above was cut off, plunging them into darkness. The pitch black seemed to envelope them
and sent a shiver down Ginny’s spine. She reached out to touch her brother, wanting the comfort of
familiar contact in the deathly darkness.

“Ahhhh … Gerroff … Gerroff …” The others jumped again as Ron erupted.

“*LUMOS*.” Hermione held her wand above her head, the light filling the narrow entrance in
which they were standing. Ron was dancing about like a crazed animal, swatting at his shoulder.

Ginny was standing a little behind Ron nursing her hand. “Ron,” she wailed, “what did you bash
my hand for?”

“Ginny! Don’t ever do that! I thought it was a spider!” Ron looked sternly at his sister.

“Sorry,” she whispered sullenly. Harry and Hermione couldn’t help but laugh at their antics, but
it served to lift the gloom that had earlier descended on them. Harry looked up to the top of the
steps to see that the square hole above had closed.

“Well, nobody’s going to follow us now,” said Harry. “Light your wands, everybody – and watch
that you don’t bump your heads on these rocks jutting down from the ceiling.”

Harry again took the lead and entered the tunnel, quickly followed by Ron, then Hermione, with
Ginny bringing up the rear. The tunnel was fairly straight, but after a few yards started to dip
quite steeply. In places, it was so steep that they had to lean back and brace themselves against
the wall and hold their balance against the jutting rocks to prevent sliding down to the bottom.
They proceeded cautiously as the tunnel wound around to the left, and then the right, levelled off
and then dipped steeply once more. Both Harry and Ron had to walk with a stoop to avoid hitting
their heads on the tunnel ceiling.

They had travelled for about 200 yards before they came to the end of the tunnel. “Hold on a
minute,” Harry whispered, “the tunnel seems to be opening out just up ahead – but I can’t see
anything yet, just darkness.”

He edged slowly forwards and came to the tunnel exit. He stretched his arm out and lifted his
wand into the space before him. He saw a much larger tunnel, but as roughly hewn as the one they
had just descended. He looked down to see that the floor was fairly level and he slowly walked
forward, calling to the others to follow him.

When they were all inside, with all four wands casting their illumination, they saw that they
were standing in a tunnel about 20 yards in length, about 4 yards wide and 8 feet high. Harry
walked towards the centre and peered ahead, holding his wand in front of him. “There’s a blank wall
straight ahead,” he called back over his shoulder.

“There are tunnels leading off to the left,” said Hermione walking over to them. She paused
briefly as she counted. “There’s six of them and they all look about the same size.”

Ron looked towards the opposite wall. “There’re no exits on the right side. We’ve got to go down
one of these on the left.”

“Yes, but which one?” said Ginny looking doubtfully at the six exits.

Hermione looked closely, and saw that the tunnels were not evenly spaced along the wall. There
was one only a few feet from the tunnel they had just come down and one about 5 yards further
along. The third was 2 yards further, and so on in a completely random pattern, the sixth tunnel
being about 6 yards from the far wall.

“I wonder ...” she said to herself. “Ginny – help me do some measuring please.” She eased her
rucksack from her back and fished inside for the measuring tape. She walked over to the first
tunnel and placed the end of the tape on the ground at the left-hand side of the exit. “This tape
is 90 feet long so we should be able to do it in one go,” she said to the others.

“Uh, what are you doing?” asked Ron.

“I’m going to measure the distance from the start of the first exit tunnel to the end of the
sixth. I think this puzzle can be solved using the golden section, just like the riddle says. This
line of exits can be treated as a straight line. And the golden section is a special point on a
straight line – the point where the ratio of the total length to the largest segment is the same as
the ratio of the largest segment to the smallest segment.”

“Uh, right,” said Ron doubtfully. “Now in English please Hermione?”

“The ratio of the golden section is 1.618, to the nearest three decimal places. So on a straight
line, the golden section point will be the total length divided by 1.618. See?”

“If you say so,” groaned Ron.

“Ginny, you hold the end of the tape just here please, and I’ll walk to the far tunnel and take
a reading”

Ginny dutifully bent down and held the end of the tape to the ground as Hermione walked, tape
unreeling, to the far side of the tunnel. When she reached the furthest side of the sixth exit, she
shouted, “50 feet exactly.”

She then walked back towards Ginny, reeling the tape back in as she went. “Right,” she said and
started rummaging in her rucksack once more. After a few moments, she found the calculator and
turned it on. She started to enter the figures, muttering to herself as she worked, “That’s 50
divided by 1.618 equals … 30.9.” She looked up at the others, who were watching intently. “So, if
the golden section rule is to be applied here, we should find that 30.9 feet from the first exit
should land slap bang in the middle of the correct exit tunnel. Ginny, will you help me again
please?”

Ginny once more held the end of the tape in the same place as before, while Hermione walked
along the line of tunnels, all the while reading the measurements as the tape unfolded. She stopped
and held the tape against the floor; unreeling a little more of it until exactly 30.9 feet was
shown. She looked up and was shocked to see that she was facing bare rock, in between two of the
exits.

“Oh bother!” she exclaimed, her brow creasing in consternation.

“Well it can’t be solved by the golden section, then,” said Ron. “So what did the riddle say?
When the rule of gold cannot be followed, follow the light of the righteous.”

“But there’s no light here, Ron,” said Harry. A sinking feeling started to overtake Harry as he
thought that they would fail at the very first hurdle. He looked at Hermione and his spirits
started to lift at the look on her face. She was obviously onto something.

“Ginny,” she called, “will you move back and hold your end of the tape against the far wall? I’m
going to try something else. It may be that the whole length of the wall must be taken into
consideration and not just the distance between the two end tunnels.”

Hermione walked until she reached the far wall. She looked at the tape and shouted, “68 feet.”
She walked back down the row of tunnels, reeling in the tape as she went. She then picked her
calculator back up and started to enter the new figures. “The golden section lies a fraction over
42 feet along from the near wall. Stay there, Ginny. I’ll measure it out”

Hermione repeated the process, and stooped to adjust the tape to measure 42 feet. She looked up
and this time saw that she was at the exact centre of the fourth exit tunnel.

“Eureka,” she yelled. “Come on, you lot – this way. It must be the right one.”

As he passed her to lead the way into the tunnel, Harry leaned over and whispered into her ear,
“How could I have doubted you, Hermione. You’re absolutely marvellous.”

Hermione blushed prettily, and waited for Ron and Ginny to follow Harry before moving into the
tunnel herself.

Feeling elated, Harry walked more quickly than earlier. The tunnel was about the same width as
the first one, but the floor, sides and ceiling were a lot smoother. After about 50 uneventful
yards, the tunnel suddenly opened out into what appeared to be a natural cavern. It was roughly
oval in shape and about 30 yards across at its longest point, which happened to be straight ahead
of them. The ceiling was much higher than before, about 20 feet above their heads.

They all walked cautiously into the cavern looking around with interest. There were some oddly
shaped rock formations on the left-hand side, which appeared to have been formed by running water
at some time in the distant past.

“Well I can’t see any exits along these walls,” said Ron after a while, “only that one straight
ahead – it just seems to be a continuation of the tunnel we just came through.”

“You’re right Ron,” said Harry. “There aren’t any puzzles for you to solve here, Hermione. Come
on, lets keep moving.”

As they started towards the exit at the far end of the cavern, they suddenly froze as the most
terrible roar filled the air around them. It seemed to be coming from dead ahead. “What the hell’s
that?” wailed Ginny.

She got her answer a few seconds later as the most hideous monster imaginable emerged from the
tunnel ahead of them. It was about 18 feet long with a long bulbous body stretched out behind it,
covered in thick black hair. It’s heads – there were three of them - were – well – indescribable.
The only feature to stick in the memory was the length of the double row of razor-sharp teeth,
which dripped an evil-looking purple liquid. It moved fairly slowly, considering the eight legs
that it boasted, and to Ron, its movement was strangely familiar.

“Come on,” shouted Harry, “lets get out of here – back up the tunnel, quick.”

Harry, Hermione and Ginny turned and started to race back up the tunnel. They had gone only a
few yards before they noticed that Ron wasn’t with them.

“Oh no,” breathed Harry. “RON …. RON,” he shouted. There was no reply – only the loud roaring of
the hideous monster.

“We’ve got to go back,” he shouted. “Ron’s still in there.”

The three ran back to the cavern entrance and looked inside, fearing to see the worst. What they
saw shocked them. Ron stood in the middle of the cavern, immediately in front of the monster, with
his wand raised.

“*CONFUNDO*,” he shouted, and the charm hit the monster squarely between the eyes of the
middle head – or what appeared to be eyes – only the gaping mouth could be seen clearly.

The monster stopped and started swaying from side to side, obviously disoriented. Then, much to
the amazement of his three friends, Ron laughed out loud, again pointed his wand at the monster,
and yelled, “*RIDDIKULUS*.”

The monster looked at Ron in disbelief, and then disappeared with a ‘POP,’ leaving behind a
boggart, which quickly crawled away into a dark corner.

They walked up to Ron and, slapping him on the back, Harry said, “How did you know it was a
boggart Ron? It frightened the living daylights out of us three.”

“It was the way it moved, really,” answered Ron. “I knew I’d seen that gait before and then it
struck me – a Dementor. It moved exactly like a Dementor. I know that’s your worst fear, and mine
is a spider – it had eight legs and the body of a big fat hairy. I don’t know what Hermione and
Ginny’s worst fears are, but there wasn’t really any time to ask them – even if they’d stayed here
long enough for me to ask.” He grinned at the two girls, who both looked back at him sheepishly.
”But those two things told me all I needed to know. It must have picked up on all of our worst
fears and changed into an amalgam of all four. Once I realised it was a boggart, it was easy to
just confuse it and then dispel it with Riddikulus.”

“That was a very brave thing to do, Ron,” said Hermione.

“Yes - that it was,” agreed Harry. “You were the only one to stand up to it Ron.”

Feeling embarrassed, Ron dismissed their praise and pointed at the tunnel up ahead. “Come on.
We’ve still got some work to do. Let’s go.”

They entered the tunnel, still in single file with Harry in the lead, and walked down it more
cautiously than they had the previous one.

They followed the tunnel straight for about twenty yards, and then it bent in a dogleg towards
the left. They walked on for another 40 yards before entering a very unusual cavern. It was obvious
from first glance that this was not a natural cave – there were too many straight lines. They
walked to the middle and looked about them. It was only about 8 feet high, and there were three
sides. The smaller side was behind them, which held the tunnel out of which they had just come, and
the ones to the left and right of them were about the same length, and ended in a point, about 20
yards in front of them.

“This is odd,” said Hermione. “It’s in the shape of a triangle – like the one we saw cast from
the stained glass window in the church. Look – there are six exit tunnels on each of the longer
sides of the triangle.”

“That’s twelve to choose from,” said Ginny. “Got any ideas Hermione? Is it the golden rule
again?”

Hermione thought for a few minutes. “I think so. But this is different. I’ll have to look at my
notes.” She took off her rucksack and rummaged for the notes she had made the night before. She
pulled them out and sat on the floor to read.

“Can we do anything while you read?” asked Harry.

Hermione looked up. “Yes - you can measure the lengths of the three walls – that should be a
help.”

“Come on, Ron,” said Harry as he pulled the tape measure from Hermione’s rucksack. “You grab the
end and hold it in the right-hand corner.”

While the two boys measured the dimensions of the cave, Hermione flicked through the pages of
parchment looking for her notes on the golden section and triangles. She found them quite quickly
and started to read. After about five minutes, she stood up and saw that Harry and Ron had just
finished measuring the smallest of the three walls. “Well, what have we got?” she asked.

Harry looked at the notes he had made on the back of his hand. “The two longer walls are exactly
the same size – 60 feet, and the shortest wall is a little over 37 feet.”

“Great,” said Hermione. “That sounds like a golden triangle – it’s a special type of isosceles
triangle, but I won’t know for sure until I measure the angles.”

She pulled out a fresh piece of parchment, a ruler, a pair of compasses and a protractor from
her rucksack and sat back on the ground, placing the blank parchment on top of the pile already on
the floor. She looked up at Harry. “How much over 37 feet is the smallest wall?”

“Uh, just over an inch,” he replied.

Adjusting the scale to fit the parchment, Hermione drew a line to represent the base wall. Then
she took her compasses and measured, again to the same scale, the length of the two side walls. She
placed the compasses on each end of the base line and drew 2 arcs, which intersected at the top of
the parchment. She drew in the other two sides of the triangle and measured their lengths with the
ruler to make sure she hadn’t made any mistakes.

“Right,” she said, “this should tell me if it’s a golden triangle.”

Using the protractor, she measured the 3 inside angles of the triangle she’d drawn on the
parchment. “Yes,” she exclaimed. “It’s a golden triangle – the two larger angles at the base
measure 72 degrees, and the angle at the top is 36 degrees.”

“So what does that tell us?” asked Ron.

“It means I can use this drawing to calculate where the correct exit from this cavern is. But
there’s a problem. You see, if you draw a line from the larger base angle onto the opposite wall,
and you make sure that the base angle is exactly bisected – that’s 36 degrees, then the point that
it hits the opposite wall is the golden section point of that wall. The problem is, there are two
base angles of 72 degrees. Which one do we use?”

“There’s got to be something here to tell us,” said Harry. “Let’s look at the two corners and
see if we can find anything.”

Ron and Hermione went to the left-hand corner while Harry and Ginny went to the right. They
looked at the floor all around the two corners and brushed away the small amount of dust and debris
that had accumulated over the years, but neither pair could find anything.

Ginny looked up and turned around to call to the other two, and something caught her eye in the
corner of the wall about 7 feet from the floor. She raised her wand and looked closely at what
she’d seen. “It’s here,” she shouted. “Look – it’s a cross drawn on the wall.”

The four teens clustered around and saw, illuminated in the light from Ginny’s wand, a cross
paté – the symbol of the Knights Templar.

“That’s it,” said Hermione. “It’s too much of a coincidence for it not to be. That’s got to be
the sign for which base angle to use.” She walked back to her drawing and carefully placed the
protractor on the bottom right-hand angle, and drew a line at exactly the 36 degrees angle and
extended it to intersect the left hand wall. “That’s where the correct tunnel is,” she said
pointing to her drawing and then looking up at the left-hand wall. She measured the distance along
the wall in her drawing and then adjusted the scale back up to actual.

“Ginny – hold the end of the tape measure in the left-hand corner while I measure out along the
wall.”

Hermione walked along the wall and placed the tape measure on the ground at her calculated
distance from the corner. She looked up to see that she was directly in front of the third tunnel
from the left-hand corner. “This is it,” she said.

Ron had looked on, thoroughly bemused, while Hermione had completed her calculations and
measurements. “Are you sure this is the right one? That looked pretty complicated to me.”

“I’m sure, Ron. Come on, let’s go.”

Harry again led the others into the tunnel, which was roughly 7 feet high and 4 feet wide. It
was a quite roughly hewn hand-made tunnel, but not as rough as the first tunnel under the church –
it could well have been built by the Romans nearly two thousand years ago. After about twenty
yards, the tunnel started to arc around to the right and slope downwards. It continued like this
for the next seventy yards or so.

Harry put up his hand to stop the others. “Listen,” he whispered. “Can you hear that?”

They could all hear a feint roaring sound which seemed to come from somewhere up ahead. “Oh no –
not another monster,” groaned Ginny.

“No I don’t think so, Ginny,” said Harry. “Come on, let’s go on a bit further.”

They walked slowly on, still bearing to the right and angling downwards, until, after another
fifty yards, the tunnel straightened out and Harry called another halt. All the while, the roaring
sound had become louder, and when they stopped it was very loud.

“What is that?” asked Ron. “I’ve heard that noise before somewhere.”

Harry gestured the others to follow as he slowly walked forward. The roaring noise was deafening
as Harry stepped out of the tunnel and looked in horror at the scene before him. The others quickly
followed and looked about them with trepidation.

Harry had to shout to make himself heard to the others. “What are we going to do now?”

They had entered a fairly narrow cavern – just over twenty feet wide – and about thirty yards in
length and twenty five feet at its highest point. It looked to be a natural cavern, with a lot of
natural rock formations. They could see an exit tunnel opposite them – about twenty feet away.
Although the tunnel was quite near, it was also quite far – because in between was a raging torrent
of ice-cold water. They could see where the underground river entered to their left and exited the
cavern to their right, through two very low tunnels. The torrent made the most horrendous noise as
it frothed and boiled as it made its rapid way over the myriad sharp rocks that protruded from the
surface.

“There’s no way we’ll wade or swim through that,” shouted Ron. “We’ll be swept away by the
current before we go three feet.”

“Spread out along the bank and see if we can find a crossing point,” shouted Ginny.

Ron and Ginny went to the left, while Harry and Hermione walked to the right. After a few
minutes, they met back at the entrance tunnel and both pairs shook their heads.

“So what now?” shouted Ginny.

The four looked at each other blankly and then gazed forlornly at the raging underground
river.

“I’ve got it!” shouted Harry. “Why didn’t I think of it sooner?”

The other three looked at him expectantly.

“I’ll fly you over,” he shouted. “I’ll transform and take you one at a time. You first,
Ron.”

Harry transformed to his golden eagle form and stooped to let Ron climb onto his back. Then he
spread his wings and pushed off from the ground. He flew slowly over to the far bank and landed
just at the entrance to the tunnel, where Ron climbed down and waited. Harry went back and fetched
Ginny next, and then returned for Hermione, who nearly strangled him as she held onto his neck for
grim death.

After he’d transformed back, Harry led the others into the tunnel, which became very narrow
after only five yards or so. It then cut sharply to the left and continued straight on into the
darkness ahead. It appeared to be a natural tunnel, which had probably carried a tributary stream
into the underground river many years ago. It was still very narrow and the floor, although smooth,
was littered with small rocks.

The four’s progress was slow as they made their way along, keeping watch by wand-light for
over-head rock projections and loose boulders on the floor. Harry entered the cavern before he knew
it – he was surprised that the walls of the tunnel suddenly disappeared and before him stretched a
large natural gallery. It was quite low, only about fifteen feet high, but was fifty yards long by
thirty wide. It was roughly oval in shape.

As they all walked towards the centre of the cavern, they saw that there were a number of exit
tunnels on both sides. They counted ten exits on each side of the gallery. “We’re spoilt for choice
this time,” quipped Ron. “But I’ll tell you one thing – I’m not moving another inch until I eat
something. I’m bloody starving!”

The other three laughed, and realised that they too were hungry. Harry looked at his watch.
“It’s a quarter to two,” he exclaimed. “No wonder we’re hungry!”

Ginny delved into one of the rucksacks that held Millie’s food parcels and she handed them
around to the others. Ron immediately went to the package that contained the pizzas. “I’ve been
waiting all day to have a go at these,” he said with relish.

“Hang on a minute, Ron - I’ll warm them up,” said Hermione. She pointed her wand at the exposed
pizzas and muttered a heating spell. Soon the cavern was filled with the glorious mouth-watering
smell of Millie’s special Pizza Margherita recipe.

Ron was the first to grab a piece, which lasted about twenty seconds flat. “This is bloody
wonderful,” he mumbled as he reached for another piece with a look of ecstasy in his eyes. “You’ll
have to tell your mother to give my mum this recipe, Hermione.”

After fifteen minutes, they washed down the food with a steaming hot cup of tea, again heated by
Hermione, and loafed pleasantly on the floor for a few minutes. They were shaken from their stupor
by a loud belch, which reverberated through the cavern for a full ten seconds.

“Ron – honestly,” exclaimed Hermione.

“Blame your mother, Hermione – not me,” he replied.

“Come on, back to work,” laughed Harry, “goodness knows how much further we’ve got to go.”

Hermione looked around the cave at the exit tunnels. “This is another golden section problem, I
think,” she said. “But which side is the right one?”

After a few minutes thought, she sighed, “We’ll have to measure both sides and work out the
golden section point and see what we get. Come on Ginny, same as before – you hold the end of the
tape while I measure.”

Hermione and Ginny went through the same process as in the first cavern, and after a few minutes
they had the measurements of both sides of the cave. Hermione got out her calculator and shouted
out the two measurements for the golden section of each wall. She and Ginny again took each end of
the tape and walked to the left-hand wall.

When she had reached the required length, she saw that she was facing the bare rock wall. “This
isn’t it,” she said, “let’s try the other side.”

This time, Hermione looked up to see that she was facing the seventh exit tunnel on the
right-hand cave wall. “This must be it,” she said.

“Come on then,” said Harry as he led the way into the tunnel.

***

Remus ducked behind the cover of the church wall as a Flipendus curse blasted a piece of stone
where, a few moments ago, his head had been. “They don’t seem to want to give up,” he shouted at
Sirius.

“No – they’re pretty determined this time,” he shouted back as he sent a ‘stupefy’ towards the
spot where the last curse had originated.

“How long have they been gone now?” shouted Nadine.

Ceri looked at her watch. “Only about fifteen minutes,” she said.

“It seems more like an hour,” Nadine replied. She was then sent tumbling to the floor as a
killing curse hit the church door and sent a large splinter of wood crashing into her forehead.

“Nadine,” cried Ceri as she rushed to her friend, “are you all right?” She looked at the French
girl, who was getting groggily back to her feet. As she straightened, she saw that there was a
large cut just above her hairline, and blood was running down into her eyes.

“Hold still,” said Ceri. ”I’ll stop the bleeding.” She held her wand against the cut as she
muttered a spell, and the flow of blood eased to a trickle and then stopped all together. “You’ll
need some expert help to heal that cut properly, Nadine. But it should be ok for now.”

“Thanks, Ceri. It feels a lot better now.”

“Are you two girls all right?” shouted Charlie. He had seen how close the curse had come to
them.”

“We’re ok, Charlie,” shouted Ceri. “Nadine’s got a cut, but I’ve stopped it bleeding.”

Charlie growled angrily and sent a series of curses at the Death Eater positions, quickly
followed by a volley from Sirius. “Eat that, Wormtail,” he shouted.

The flurry of activity was followed by a lull in the fighting as the Death Eaters took stock of
their assault.

“This is getting us nowhere, Wormtail,” said Travis. “They’re too well dug in. We’ll be here all
afternoon and we won’t make much impression on them.”

Wormtail looked nervous. “We’ve got to keep trying, Travis. Do you want to be the one to tell
Lord Voldemort that we failed?”

Travis grunted, “We won’t fail. We can’t. Brackton – come over here. Let’s do a bit of thinking
– we’ve got to wheedle them out of there somehow.”

“That’s the best thing you’ve said all day, Travis,” said Wormtail. “We’ve got to think up a
plan to break through into the church.”

***

The tunnel sloped gently downwards and swung to the right after they had gone thirty yards.
After another twenty yards, Harry stopped. To his left was a narrow entrance – a large fissure in
the rock wall - while the tunnel they were walking down continued on ahead. He called to the others
and they looked at the fissure dubiously.

“Do you think this is anything worth looking at?” asked Harry. The others just shrugged, not
knowing what to make of the fissure.

“Hang on – I’ll go and have a closer look,” said Harry as he moved towards the fissure, his lit
wand held before him. The other three saw Harry suddenly stop and back slowly towards them. They
sucked in their breath as they saw what had caused Harry to retreat.

Out of the fissure came a tall ghostly form. It was a man of about forty-five years old, and he
was as white as a sheet. He stopped about five yards in front of the teens and raised his arm
towards them. He pointed his index finger at each of them, and then pointed back up the tunnel in
the direction from which they had just come.

The ghost spoke in a low, but authoritative voice, “I am the guardian spirit. Your quest has
been terminated. You are too young for such an awesome responsibility. A new Anima Summa will be
chosen, one who has the experience to complete the task. Go back to your friends and leave this
place. Go and enjoy your youth.”

Ron and Ginny immediately turned around and started back up the tunnel. Hermione watched them
turn, but hesitated - torn between leaving and staying with Harry, who was rooted to the spot. Her
brow creased, deep in thought and confusion.

Harry made no move to follow his two friends – he just stood and stared at the ghost, deep in
concentration. He then shook his head sharply, as if trying to clear it, and he detected the
unmistakable overtones of the Imperious curse.

“Who are you?” he challenged the ghost. “What gives you the right to interrupt the quest of the
Anima Summa and his helpers? I am the true Anima Summa, chosen by one greater than you. I will not
be deflected from my task – go now and let us proceed.”

At the sound of Harry’s voice, Ron and Ginny stopped. Hermione still stood where she had been,
listening intently.

A sudden transformation came over the ghost. He lost his grim expression and a smile broke out
on his ghostly white face. “You are indeed the true one. Proceed to your destiny.”

The ghost again raised his arm and pointed to his left, down the main tunnel. He then pointed at
the other three and muttered a charm, which lifted the imperious curse he had placed on them all
earlier – he had no need to lift it from Harry, of course. Harry had already done that himself.

The ghost then drifted back to the tunnel wall and went back inside the fissure in the rock.

“Thank goodness you know how to resist Imperious, Harry,” said Hermione.

“You didn’t do a bad job of it yourself, Hermione,” grinned Harry.

“Oh not really,” she replied. “I only stayed because you were still there …” She trailed off,
getting flustered. Harry looked at her quizzically, and then called to the others, “Lets carry on
down the tunnel.”

The tunnel still sloped gently downwards, and twisted both to the left and the right for the
next 150 yards or so. It became very narrow in places, so narrow that they had to turn sideways to
squeeze through. In other places, the ceiling dropped to only two feet above the floor, so they had
to crawl on their stomachs to get through.

The tunnel then turned sharply to the left and after another twenty yards they entered a low,
circular chamber – about ten yards in diameter. There were three exit tunnels, one straight ahead
and one on each side, exactly opposite each other.

See Chapter 9B – Labyrinth (part 2) – I’ve had to split the chapter up because it seems that the
upload software can’t handle the full chapter in one go.



11. Labyrinth (part 2)
----------------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 2 2 2003-07-14T17:47:00Z 2003-07-14T17:47:00Z 13 7736 44096 367 88 54152
9.2720 6 pt 2 2

**Chapter 9B Labyrinth (Part 2)**

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

The four walked into the middle of the chamber and looked around. “This is not a golden section
problem,” said Hermione. “I can see nothing that indicates that.”

“So is it ‘The Light of the Righteous’ rule?” asked Ginny. “There’s no light here.”

“I really don’t know,” said Harry as he slowly let out his breath.

The four sat on the floor to think, looking around the chamber seeking inspiration – none
came.

After a few unproductive minutes of thinking, the four jerked up their heads at a low moaning
sound. It was quiet at first, but then became gradually louder. It was coming from the left-hand
tunnel.

They stood up in nervous anticipation and looked at the dark entrance of the tunnel. The grey,
shimmering form of a young woman of about twenty-five appeared from the darkness and looked at the
four.

She hesitated, and then sat down on the floor, her moans of despair filling the small chamber.
She continued to wail pitifully and then Ginny cautiously approached her. “Whatever’s wrong?” she
asked, looking sorrowfully at the ghost.

The young woman looked up at Ginny’s face and said, in a halting pitiful voice, “I am lost in
this terrible labyrinth. I became separated from the man I love and I can’t find him. He had a map
and I know that he’s found his way out, but I can’t follow. I don’t know which way to go.”

“How long have you been down here wandering these passages?” asked Ginny.

“For a long time, such a long time,” the ghost replied. “Do you know the way out? Can you help
me?”

“Wait just a moment. I’ll speak to my friends.” Ginny walked back to the others. “We’ve got to
help her – she’s in such torment. I think we should lead her back to the entrance to the
labyrinth.”

“But what about our quest!” Ron exclaimed. “We’ve come so far, we can’t turn back now.” He
looked at Harry and Hermione questioningly.

“We can’t leave her like this,” said Hermione. “I agree with Ginny. We’ve got to help. I
wouldn’t be able to live with myself if we just left her.”

“Look, I’ll take her back,” said Ginny, “and you three go on with the quest.”

Harry thought for a moment. “No Ginny, that won’t work. How would you get across that raging
underground river? No, we’ll all have to go back together. We’ll just have to come back tomorrow
and start again.”

Ginny looked gratefully at Harry and then turned and walked back over to the young woman, who
had been sniffling pitifully as they spoke.

“My friends and I have agreed to help you. We’ll take you back to the entrance of the labyrinth.
Come on, come with us.” Ginny beckoned to the ghost with her hand and turned to go back up the
tunnel.

“Wait,” said the ghost. “What about your quest?”

“That can wait – there’ll be another day for that.”

The young woman then stood up and her demeanour changed. Hers was no longer the pose of a
pitifully distressed young woman but of a noble lady, full of confidence. “You are filled with
compassion for those less fortunate than yourselves,” she said in a loud, purposeful voice. “You
have proved that you have within you the light of the righteous. Continue your quest and find the
secret.” She raised her arm and pointed to the exit tunnel straight ahead. She turned around then,
and walked silently back into the left-hand tunnel, leaving the four friends gaping after her.

“It was another test,” said Harry, “like the last ghost we met.”

“And we’ve passed with flying colours, so it seems,” said Hermione. “Come on – lead on
Harry.”

Harry led the others into the tunnel, which sloped downwards and bore gently to the right for
about sixty yards or so. He called a halt as he spotted something up ahead. “Put out your lights,”
he said over his shoulder as he extinguished the light from his wand. Darkness enclosed them, but
up ahead they could see a very feint light reflecting from the left-hand wall of the tunnel. They
moved cautiously forward, their wands still extinguished, and as they rounded the bend they saw the
tunnel exit no more than ten yards away. And beyond, the light was much stronger. They walked out
into a large, natural cavern, which was bathed in a cacophony of coloured light. They looked with
awe at the reds, blues, greens, oranges, lilacs and every hue in between. It was beautiful. They
looked up at the walls and ceiling, some thirty feet above, and marvelled as a million pinpricks of
light sparkled, bathing the cavern in a breathtaking glow of colour. There were numerous
stalagmites and stalactites, each one a beacon of beauty as they glowed with their strange inner
light.

“Oh, it’s so beautiful,” breathed Ginny. “What are those lights?”

Hermione walked over to the rock wall. “They’re fluorescent minerals, Ginny,” she said. “They
give off light when they’re stimulated by something – usually ultraviolet radiation. But there’s
none of that here so deep underground. It may be some sort of chemical or mechanical action –
perhaps the rock strata are moving very slowly against each other.”

“Whatever it is,” said Ginny, “I could watch this for ever. It’s amazing.”

Ron and Harry, meanwhile, had made a circuit of the cavern and walked back to the spellbound
girls. “There’re no exit tunnels,” said Harry, “but come and look at these.” He motioned to the
centre of the cave and led the way.

“Look at these pools,” said Harry. They looked at the floor of the cavern to see several roughly
circular natural rock pools, each about five feet across, filled with clear blue-green water. There
were four of them randomly spread around the centre of the cavern.

“Look over there,” said Ginny, “there’s another one.” They walked over to see yet another rock
pool, about ten yards out from the centre.

Hermione looked around the cave floor, turning as she moved her gaze from left to right.
“There’s more of them,” she said. They walked around the cave and found another three pools, each
one further from the centre than the one before, but scattered around in a seemingly random
way.

“What do you think, Hermione?” asked Harry. “Are these pools another part of the puzzle?”

“I don’t know, Harry,” she replied, still looking around her, trying to fathom some order from
apparent disorder. They sat down on the floor and looked at the display of coloured lights, as
Hermione lapsed into deep thought. She looked up at Harry with the light of inspiration in her
eyes. “I wonder?” she breathed quietly to herself, “Harry. Can you transform to your Animagus eagle
and take me up to the ceiling?”

“Uh, yes of course – but what for?”

“I’ll tell you that later. Something’s just struck me about these pools,” she said.

She pulled the rucksack from her back and pulled out a blank piece of parchment and a pencil.
“Ready?”

“Are you going to keep your eyes open this time?” asked Ron with a smirk. Hermione glared at him
with disdain, but said nothing.

“Ok, Hermione,” said Harry, hesitating. “You’re not going to choke me this time are you?”

“I’ll try not to Harry,” she said with mounting impatience.

Harry transformed and Hermione climbed onto his back, clutching the soft feathers at the back of
his head. Harry rose majestically and flew around the cavern before rising to its highest point. He
flapped his wings slowly as he hovered close to the ceiling.

Hermione tightened her grip with her legs as she gingerly took her hands from Harry’s neck. She
placed the parchment on top of his head, holding it with her left hand, while she gazed at the
floor and started drawing.

“Ok, Harry. I’m finished,” she said after about five minutes. Harry glided back to the ground
and Hermione jumped down from his back. He immediately transformed and stared at his friend.

“Well?” he said.

“I think I’m onto something,” said Hermione as she sat on the floor and spread the parchment out
in front of her. She had drawn roughly, the shape of the cavern and, more carefully, the eight rock
pools they had found. She studied her drawing for a while and then picked up the pencil once
more.

“Look at this,” she said as she started drawing. She placed her pencil on the pool at the centre
of the drawing, and then started to draw a curve. When she had finished, she had connected all
eight pools with the curved line. Then she rummaged in her rucksack and brought out the ruler. She
started to measure the distances between the pools in the drawing, along the curved line, and did
various calculations on her calculator.

When she had finished, she looked up at the others in triumph. “Yes! Solved.”

“Uh – would you mind letting us in on the secret, Hermione?” said Ron looking confused.

“It’s a spiral, Ron. Look at the curved line.” She looked back up at her friend.

“It looks just like those diagrams of spiral galaxies you see in Astronomy books,” commented
Harry.

“That’s right, Harry. It also looks like the swirls on the shell of a snail. Don’t you see? It’s
the golden section again. Remember what I told you before? It’s the most common and powerful
geometric force in nature. Each of these pools is a multiple of phi away from each other, radiating
from the centre.”

“So does that mean that one of these rock pools is the way forward?” asked Ron.

“Yes, of course it does,” she replied.

“But which one?” asked Ginny.

“That’s easy, Ginny. We go to the starting point, where the spiral starts to grow - the centre
of creation. The rock pool at the centre.” She pointed to the pool in her drawing.

She then got up and walked over to the pool and looked down. The others quickly followed. “Uh,
it looks pretty deep,” said Ron as he gazed into the blue-green water. “How do we know how far it
goes – will we be able to hold our breath before we come out of it?” He looked at the other three
nervously.

Harry sat on the floor beside the pool and started to take off his shoes. “There’s only one way
to find out. I’ll go down first and see where it goes. You three wait here ‘till I come back.”

Ginny looked frightened and knelt beside her friend. “But Harry, it could be dangerous. You
might drown.”

“If this is the right pool, I don’t think anything bad is going to happen – I should come out
the other side fairly quickly, I think.”

“But there’s no need to take any chances, Harry. Here, tie this around your waist.” Ron reached
into his rucksack and pulled out a long piece of thin rope. “There’s nothing like being prepared,”
he said.

“What made you bring a rope, Ron?” asked Hermione, a look of respect in her eyes.

“I don’t know, really,” he replied. “I thought it just might come in handy.”

Harry finished taking off most of his clothes, just leaving his shorts, and piled them at the
side of the pool. He took the end of Ron’s rope and tied it around his waist. “If I tug on the rope
three times, pull me back – but quick.” He picked up his wand and muttered, “*LUMOS*.”

As he turned to go into the pool, Hermione put her hand on his bare shoulder and Harry looked
into her concerned, hazel-brown eyes. She flushed slightly and whispered, “Please Harry – be
careful.”

Harry grinned and then took a deep breath and jumped, feet first, into the pool. The others
watched as he quickly sank out of sight.

Harry opened his eyes and looked around him as he slowly sank further. All he could see was the
solid rock wall. He looked down but all he could see was inky blackness, the light from his wand
not making much impression in the cold water. There was no sign of the pool levelling out at all.
He must have gone down about twenty-five feet before he became aware of the first tendrils of fear
forcing their way into his mind. He fought a deep desire to tug on the rope and be pulled to
safety. He had a far stronger desire - of wanting to succeed, not to give up.

Another five feet – then his toes touched rock. He looked down to see that the pool walls ended
in a flat rock floor. He started to panic – where was the exit? He looked about him frantically,
circling in the water. He went through two full revolutions before he saw it. In the light from his
wand, he could just make out the shape of a tunnel entrance right in front of him. He reached out
with his hand, and felt the cold air as it emerged from the water. He leant forward, pushing with
his feet against the floor of the pool, and suddenly emerged into a tunnel. He gasped loudly as he
sucked in the sweet air, bending and leaning his arms on his thighs until his breathing returned to
normal. He straightened and looked back behind him. He was amazed to see a wall of water, seemingly
suspended in front of him, covering the tunnel entrance. He marvelled at the magic that must be in
play to keep the water suspended like that – he was even more amazed to find that he was completely
dry, even his shorts.

He was literally pulled from his reverie by a sudden tugging at the rope around his waist. He
realised that Ron and the girls must be worried, after all they didn’t know he could breath now. He
tugged on the rope once, and then walked back through the magical entrance and into the pool and
rose, without any help from himself, back to the surface. He emerged to see three very worried
faces looking at him. He heaved himself back into the cavern and stood up. He felt himself and
found, once again, that he was completely dry.

“Where the bloody hell have you been?” asked Ron with panic in his voice. “We thought you’d
drowned.”

He grinned at his friend. “No, although I did start to get worried at one point.” He turned to
Hermione, and was startled to see tears in her eyes. “Don’t worry, Hermione – you were right. This
is the exit. And it’s magical, look – I’m dry. It’s just like an elevator. You don’t have to swim
or kick your legs – you just let it take you to the bottom or the top.”

As he dressed, he told the others what he had found and what they could expect when they went
into the pool. “I’ll go first again. But follow, one at a time, straight behind me. I’ll direct you
to the tunnel entrance when you reach the bottom. Don’t forget to take a deep breath first, and
don’t panic!”

He jumped back into the pool and sank straight to the bottom, where he waited for his friends.
First came Ron, and as he sank to the bottom, Harry caught hold of his arm, twisted him around, and
gave him a firm push in the back, propelling him in the direction of the tunnel entrance. Ron was
quickly followed by Ginny, then Hermione, who both got similar treatment as they were heaved
through the water into the tunnel.

Harry joined his three friends and they all sat on the floor and rested while they regained
their breath, looking around the tunnel. It was obviously man-made, the rock being scarred by
ancient tools, now long gone. It was about seven feet high and five feet wide, and the floor was
fairly smooth. It curved down and around to the right, into the blackness beyond.

After a few minutes, they started down the tunnel, which after a short distance straightened
out. Harry and Ron led the way, the tunnel being wide enough to allow them to walk two abreast.
When they had walked only about fifty yards, they emerged into a narrow, natural cavern, about
thirty yards long and eight yards wide. They looked in wonder at the milky-white limestone
formations that decorated the sides of the cave, looking like buttresses supporting the rock
walls.

They walked into the cavern about half way, and raised their lit wands high to see if there were
any exit tunnels. They saw one exit at the far side of the cavern, opposite the one they had just
come from, and one on each side, directly opposite where they were standing.

“This is nothing to do with the golden section,” said Hermione.

They continued to look about them and then Ron stiffened and looked intently towards the tunnel
at the far end of the gallery. “Can you hear that?”

They all strained their ears and could just make out the sound Ron had heard. As they watched,
it grew louder. It sounded like something heavy was being dragged along the ground. They stepped
slowly back towards the tunnel they had just come down, never taking their eyes from the opposite
tunnel entrance.

The sound grew louder, and then they looked in horror as a very large snake, about forty feet in
length and twice as thick as a man’s body, come slithering towards them. It opened its mouth to
show two large incisors protruding from its top lip. Ron, Hermione and Ginny backed away more
quickly as the snake approached, but Harry stood his ground.

The three looked on fearfully as the snake approached Harry and opened its mouth. A loud hissing
noise accompanied the flicking forked tongue. Harry, of course, understood what the snake was
saying.

“Which way do you follow?” asked the snake.

Harry hissed back, “We follow the rule of gold and the light of the righteous.”

“What do you seek?” hissed the snake.

“We seek the truth and the secret of Rhedae,” answered Harry.

“Who are you?”

“I am the Anima Summa, and the other three are my brave and trusty helpers.”

The snake looked at Harry with its beady eyes, appraising him, before hissing, “Your way lies
straight ahead – go to the tunnel from whence I just emerged. Take great care – there is danger
ahead.”

With that, the snake turned to its right, and slithered into the left-hand tunnel.

“What did it say?” asked Ron as the others ran up to Harry.

“It asked me a few questions. And I suppose I gave the right answers, because she told me to
take that tunnel at the far side of the cavern.”

“She?” asked Ginny.

“Oh yes,” he answered, “the voice was definitely female. She also said that there is danger up
ahead. We’d better be on our guard from here on.”

They walked across the chamber and entered the tunnel, Harry and Ron again to the front. The
tunnel was again wide enough to take them two-abreast. They cautiously looked around every twist
and turn the tunnel took as they made slow, but steady, progress. After about fifty yards, Harry
and Ron both stopped at the entrance to another chamber. Harry turned and gestured to the girls to
stay in the tunnel while he and Ron went to investigate. The two boys slowly walked into the
chamber, peering around intently. When they were sure that there was no danger present, Ron called
for the girls to join them.

They looked around to a see an almost perfectly square chamber, obviously man-made, with four
exit tunnels leading from it – one at each corner of the square.

“Hermione – is this another golden section problem?” asked Harry.

“I don’t think so, Harry. There’s nothing I know concerning phi relating to squares with points
at all four corners.”

“We’ll just have to wait and see what happens. The snake said there was danger – I wonder if
there’s something dangerous going to come out of those tunnels? Hermione – you and Ginny go back
and wait in the tunnel we just came down. We’ll stay in the middle.”

“But shouldn’t we all wait in the tunnel?” said Ginny.

“No,” answered Harry. “If there’s no one inside the chamber, maybe nothing will happen at all
and we’ll just wait forever.”

Hermione and Ginny retreated to just inside the tunnel and waited, looking at each of the four
exit tunnels intently. After fifteen minutes, nothing at all had happened and the four started to
get impatient.

“Hermione, Ginny – come back please,” called Harry.

“We’re getting nowhere fast,” he said as they approached. “There’s only one thing I can think of
– we’ve got to explore all four tunnels - there’s no other way. Ron – you and Hermione take the one
in the near left corner. Ginny and I will take the one in the far left. If we don’t find anything,
we’ll check the ones on the right. Check your watches – I make it 3.38 pm. Now whatever happens,
we’ll meet back here in twenty minutes – not a minute longer. Ok?”

The other three checked their watches and nodded in agreement.

“And be careful – don’t take any chances. Run back here and wait if there’s the slightest hint
of any danger.” With that, the four split up and went their separate ways.

Harry and Ginny found themselves in a fairly narrow tunnel, which allowed them to walk only in
single file – Harry to the front. The tunnel frequently twisted in different directions and sloped
slightly up all the way. The two proceeded with great caution, checking all the while for any
fissures in the rock on either side, in case there was something hiding there.

They had been walking only for about four minutes when they heard a faint noise in the distance.
They stopped, listening intently, and then heard it again.

“That’s Hermione’s voice,” said Harry with alarm. “They must be in trouble. Come on.”

Harry and Ginny ran as fast as they could back down the tunnel and quickly re-entered the square
chamber. They ran along the wall and went into the tunnel that Ron and Hermione had gone into five
minutes earlier. The sounds of shouting and screaming were now much louder, and they increased
their speed but stopped dead when they came to a small cavern, lit with flaming torches in rusty
iron holders. The scene before them resembled one of those old fantasy movies – Jason and the
Argonaughts came to Harry’s mind in a flash.

Ron and Hermione were against the left-hand wall, back to back, trying to fight off about a
dozen skeletons. The bony nightmares were brandishing thick clubs, trying to get close enough to
clobber the two teens, who were pointing their wands and yelling ‘*FLIPENDO*’ with increasing
frequency.

The curses were hitting the skeletons, flinging them back and breaking bones, but they would
immediately repair themselves – the bones joining back seamlessly – and rejoin the fray.

Ron and Hermione were getting tired and the skeletons were getting closer to them all the while.
One got close enough to Ron to swing its club, which just scraped the side of Ron’s head. He
staggered back, putting his hand to the graze and feeling the warm blood. It was at this point that
Ginny and Harry weighed into the fight. Ginny started flinging *FLIPENDUS* curses from the
cavern entrance, while Harry circled slightly to the left, towards his two friends. Harry felt a
powerful rage come over him as he saw his friends in such great danger, and this was reflected in
the power of his magic.

‘*FLIPENDO*’ he raged as he aimed at one of the skeletons that came up to him. The denizen
was struck by a powerful bolt of energy and went hurtling to the back wall of the cave, where it
splintered into a thousand pieces. It tried, but couldn’t manage to reintegrate itself. After a
short while, it gave up the struggle and collapsed into a pile of white powder on the floor.

Again and again, Harry sent a skeleton to a crumbly end, and after about five minutes of
fighting, twelve piles of white powder littered the floor of the cave.

Hermione rushed over to Harry and flung her arms around his neck. “Thank God you came,” she
cried, hugging him tightly. “I thought we were finished there.”

Harry slowly caught hold of her arms and eased her gently away from him. He looked into her eyes
and said softly, “I’m sorry. It was my fault. I nearly got you and Ron killed.” He looked miserably
at Hermione and Ron.

“But how, Harry?” wailed Hermione. “It wasn’t your fault. How could it be?”

“I should never have split us up like that,” he said. “Our strength is in our combined powers,
and when we split up, our strength was weakened. I should never have done it.” He continued to look
dejected as Ron and Ginny joined Hermione and placed their hands on his back in support of their
friend.

“Come on, let’s go back to the cavern,” said Ginny. “We need to rest before we check the other
tunnels.”

The four trooped slowly back and flopped onto the ground. The fight had drained their powers
more than they realised and they needed to take time to recuperate.

The four chatted quietly amongst themselves as they rested, and Harry looked at his watch. “It’s
twenty past four,” he said. “What do you think is happening outside? Do you think they’ve been able
to hold off Wormtail for nearly four and half hours? I’m worried about them.”

“Don’t forget what that voice said, Harry. I’m sure they’re all right,” said Hermione
gently.

Harry sighed and started to get to his feet. “Come on, time to go. Let’s try the tunnel Ginny
and I went down first – all of us together this time.”

As he stood, he caught a movement out of the corner of his eye. “What?” he yelled as he turned
to his right. The others jumped to their feet and turned in the direction Harry was looking. Above
one of the tunnels – the one in the near right corner – was a shining Templar cross – the cross
paté glowing with a silvery light.

“The light of the righteous,” breathed Hermione. “That fight with the skeletons must have been
another test – a test of our strength and bravery - and we’re being shown the way now that we’ve
come through it unscathed.”

“Are you all up to going on?” asked Harry as he looked at his slightly bedraggled friends.

“Lead on, brave Sir. We shall follow,” said Ron in his best theatrical voice.

Harry and Ron led them into the tunnel, which curved first to the right and then sharply to the
left, and then continued straight ahead for about forty yards. They slowed as they saw a chamber
open up just in front of them. It was faintly illuminated with an eerie green glow. They cautiously
walked into the cavern, which was roughly oval in shape and saw that there were a lot of boulders
strewn around on the floor. It was about thirty yards long and twenty yards wide, and about twelve
feet high.

Hermione and Ginny let out a yell of protest as they bumped into the backs of the two boys.
Ginny looked at her brother, who was staring to his right, eyes wide and mouth agape. She followed
his gaze and saw what he was looking at. Her hand shot to her mouth to stifle the scream that
threatened to emerge.

There was one exit from the cave, off to the right-hand side. The problem was that a very large
and hideous creature, which looked like an overgrown scorpion, guarded it. It had a flexible tail,
which bent back over its deathly-white body, and ended in a nasty looking stinger, which dripped a
greenish coloured liquid.

The creature was facing in their direction, its two huge front pincers opening and closing with
sickeningly loud clicks, moving its head from side to side as if searching for something. It made a
sudden movement towards them, and they rushed back inside the tunnel from which they had just
emerged, eyes wide and panting with fear. The creature was too large to follow them into the
tunnel, and after a few moments it turned and went back to guard the exit tunnel.

When they had calmed down a bit, Ron voiced what the others were thinking. “I don’t think that’s
a boggart, so how are we going to get past it? I don’t like the look of that stinger one bit!”

“Harry,” said Ginny shakily, “why don’t you try to stun it or something? Those Flipendus spells
you threw at the skeletons were very powerful.”

Harry nodded and crept slowly to the cave entrance and saw that the monster was back guarding
the exit. He took a deep breath and stepped purposefully into the cave, aiming his wand at the
creature’s head.

*“STUPEFY,”* he shouted. A powerful red beam of energy left his wand and hit the creature
squarely on the head. The creature shook its head and then turned in Harry’s direction, ready to
charge. Harry’s eyes went wide as he saw that the spell had no effect, and rushed quickly back into
the tunnel just before the monster reached him.

“It didn’t work,” he said to the others. “It just bounced off. That thing must be one powerful
beast!”

“Perhaps you didn’t use your full power, Harry,” said Ron.

“I gave it everything I had, Ron. No, I think we’ve got to use something other than brute force
to get past it.”

“But what?” asked Ginny.

“I think we’ve got to use our heads, Ginny,” said Hermione. “We’re going to have to use a bit of
guile to get through this one.”

Harry nodded and looked thoughtfully at his friends. “Up to now, the monsters we’ve encountered
have had some sort of weakness. We’ve just got to find out what this thing’s weak point is and
exploit it.”

“What do you suggest we do, Harry?” asked Hermione nervously.

“I don’t know. Look, I’ll inch slowly into the back of the tunnel – but not so far that I’ll get
trapped – and you three keep an eye on it and see if you can spot anything.”

“Oh, be careful, Harry. That thing looks deadly to me”, said Ginny fearfully.

Harry slowly edged to the tunnel entrance and peeked cautiously around the right-hand corner. He
looked back and called the other three when he saw that the scorpion was back at the exit tunnel,
about fifteen yards away. He slowly and quietly stepped over to the left-hand corner of the
entrance and started to tip toe around the back wall of the cave. Ron, Hermione and Ginny took his
place at the right-hand side and looked intently and unblinking at the monster.

Harry kept his eye on the creature as he slowly edged his way along the back wall. The creature,
meanwhile, started moving its head from side to side, as before, as if it were trying to detect a
target with some sort of internal radar. Apart from that, it made no movement from its position in
front of the exit tunnel

Harry had gone about four yards around the back wall before something happened. He was so intent
on keeping a close watch on the creature that he didn’t spot the small rock in front of him. With a
loud crash, his left foot hit the rock and he tumbled forward, just saving himself from falling by
bracing his hands against the rock wall.

The creature’s head snapped up and it charged – straight at Harry. Hermione let out a cry of
warning and the scorpion hesitated, stopped in its charge, and turned its head towards Hermione.
The hesitation was all that Harry needed. He turned and rushed back towards the other three. The
monster was quick – very quick. It raced after Harry, its stinger hovering above its head, primed
to strike.

As it closed on him, Harry made a desperate dive and flung himself into the tunnel, just as the
stinger crashed down with awesome power just behind his right foot.

His friends helped Harry to his feet, and he dusted himself off. “Phew!” he breathed. “That was
too close for comfort. That thing’s as fast as lightening.”

He looked expectantly at the others. “Well – did you spot anything?”

“Yes,” said Ginny. “Did you notice that it didn’t attack until you tripped over that rock - and
it stopped and turned when Hermione yelled? I think its blind and it detects its prey by the sound
it makes.”

The others looked at Ginny, and then at each other. “It makes sense,” said Ron. “Hang on a
minute – I’ll take a closer look.”

Ron slowly walked to the entrance to the cave and peeked around the corner – he saw that the
creature was back in its guarding position at the exit tunnel, moving its head from side to side in
the now familiar way. Ron looked closely at it for about a minute and then went back to the others.
“Ginny’s right. I got a close look at its head – it hasn’t got any eyes. It’s blind, all
right.”

“So we’ve found its weak spot,” said Hermione, “but how are we going to use it? It makes up for
its lack of sight with keen hearing and blistering speed.”

After a few moments, Harry looked at his friends. “I think I’ve found a way – I’ll tip toe
around the back of the cave, keeping my eye on the ground, this time, so I won’t trip over
anything. You three move very quietly towards the exit tunnel, but not so far that you can’t get
back if anything goes wrong. When I get to the far end, I’ll make a noise and draw it away. When it
attacks, you three move quietly and go down the exit tunnel. When you’re all inside, make a noise
to distract it away from me.”

“That’s fine Harry,” said Ron, “except for one big flaw. We’ll be in the tunnel and you’ll still
be stuck outside with no way to follow us.”

“I’ve thought of that, Ron. I’ll creep back to the entrance tunnel and throw a rock to the far
side of the cave. When it charges over, I’ll make a dash for the exit.”

“So why don’t we do that now, Harry?” asked Hermione. “There’s no need for you to risk going
over to the far end of the cave.”

“Uh – I hadn’t thought of that.” Harry looked embarrassed as he stared at Hermione, but then
bent down, rummaged around on the floor, and picked up a rock about the size of a cricket ball.
“Ready?” He walked to the tunnel entrance, followed by the others, and then flung the rock at the
far corner.

They all tensed themselves, ready to make a dash for it, as the rock sailed through the air and
hit the far wall with a resounding crash. They looked at the creature, waiting for it to race over
to the sound. It jerked up its head – but made no move.

“What!” exclaimed Ginny.

“I think it must be able to tell the difference between the sound of its prey and the falling of
a rock,” said Hermione. “It makes sense, really. There must be a lot of small rock falls in this
cave – look at how the floor is littered – so it’s learned to tell the difference in the
sounds.”

“That’s great!” groaned Ron. “What do we do now?”

“We stick with my original plan,” said Harry with determination.

“No Harry, you can’t!” exclaimed Hermione in disbelief. “You’ll be stuck here, and there’s no
point in us three going on without you – you’re the Anima Summa!”

“I’ll find a way – I’ll think of something. Look on the bright side – at least we’ll be
three-quarters of the way there.”

“Harry!” she said, her voice full of exasperation. She looked at the others for support but they
just shrugged their shoulders.

“If Harry’s made up his mind,” said Ron, “you should know that there’s nothing that will stop
him. And I can’t think of any way to get past that thing – can you two?”

The two girls shook their heads glumly.

“We’ll wait for you just inside the exit tunnel,” Ron said to Harry. “Just shout if you want us
to do anything to help. We won’t go on without you.”

Hermione and Ginny both hugged Harry as he made to go towards the cavern entrance. He nodded at
them both, and then crept slowly into the cave, keeping his eyes firmly peeled on the ground in
front of him. In a few minutes he had reached the far left-hand end. He waved to his friends and
motioned for them to start to edge towards the exit tunnel.

He waited until they were within about 10 yards of their goal and then waved and motioned for
them to stop. He stamped his feet and started shouting. “Hey! Over here – come and get me.”

The creature jerked his head in Harry’s direction and rushed towards him, its pincers held high
and snapping in anticipation of the kill. When it arrived, it struck – the stinger was a blur as it
plunged down and – buried itself in the soft floor of the cave. Harry was no longer in that spot.
As soon as he’d finished making a noise he’d silently edged away and was now standing about three
yards away from the monster – standing stock still against the rock wall.

The creature jerked its stinger out of the floor and again moved its head from side to side in
confusion, trying to detect where the target was. Harry was afraid even to breath. He concentrated
on holding his breath and not moving a muscle. He looked at the hideous form, so close to his
left-hand side, willing it to move away. Then he heard a commotion over by the exit tunnel. He
moved his eyes to the right and saw Ron stamping on the ground and yelling, “Come on you ugly
bugger – we’re over here!”

The scorpion jerked around, its hind part just missing Harry, and sped off with frightening
speed towards Ron, who dashed back inside the exit tunnel to join the two girls. Harry let out the
breath he’d been holding and relaxed his muscles - the plan had worked, and his friends were safely
inside the tunnel.

By this time, the scorpion had once more taken up its familiar pose, guarding the exit. Harry
thought about what he could do. He slowly and quietly edged back the few yards to the place he’d
been standing when he’d attracted the creature towards him. He looked about him and up at the
ceiling, just six feet above his head. His jaw set with grim determination - then he silently
transformed into his Animagus form.

He looked at the creature with his keen eagle eyes, steeled himself, and then started stomping
on the floor and screeching loudly. The scorpion charged. When it was just five yards away, the
eagle pushed powerfully with his legs and glided silently to the right. Harry was careful not to
flap his wings for fear of drawing the creature towards him. He then veered to the left and floated
quietly towards the exit and landed just outside.

He looked back over his wings, now folded, and saw that the monster had heard his claws land on
the floor and was charging back towards him, just fifteen yards away. Harry just had time to
transform back and dive into the exit tunnel. He was lucky that his legs were spread as he dived.
As his friends caught hold of his arms and hauled him inside the tunnel, the stinger crashed down
between his legs. The creature reached out its right pincer and made a grab for Harry’s foot – but
the vice-like claw closed on empty space – Harry had been pulled just out of its reach.

He looked gratefully at the three as the adrenalin flow started to ease. He was breathing
rapidly and his face was red from the excitement of it all.

“Am I ever glad to see you three,” he breathed as he was hauled to his feet and grabbed with
great relief by his three friends.

With a last look back at the hideous creature at the tunnel exit, the four quickly continued on
their way, this time with Ron and Hermione in the lead, and Harry, with Ginny holding under his
arm, bringing up the rear. They walked for fifty yards or so before the tunnel bent sharply to the
left.

Harry looked at Ginny as she stopped. “What are you doing, Ginny?”

“I’m mapping this turn on the parchment, Harry. Haven’t you noticed me doing it before? I’ve
been drawing our progress from the time we left the church. I’ve been pacing out the lengths of
these tunnels, and judging the angles of the twists and turns, trying to draw a fairly accurate map
of the labyrinth.”

“Sorry, Ginny. I’ve been up front till now so I hadn’t noticed.”

She finished drawing on the parchment and grabbed Harry’s arm as they followed Ron and Hermione.
Harry looked and could see Ginny silently moving her lips as she counted the steps she was taking.
After another fifty yards, Ron and Hermione stopped. “There’s another cavern just ahead,” Ron
whispered over his shoulder, “Stay here – I’ll go and see if there’s any nasty surprises in
there.”

After a few moments, Ron called back, “It seems to be empty, and I can’t see any monsters or
anything.”

The others sighed with relief and followed Ron into the cavern. They raised their lit wands and
looked around them.

***

“They’re up to something. It’s too quiet.” Remus called over to where Sirius was taking cover
just inside the Calvery.

“Yes, you’re right. They haven’t sent any curses for at least five minutes,” he answered.
“Charlie, Ceri, Nadine – keep your eyes peeled. Something’s going on out there.”

They all looked in the direction from where the last curses had been flung, but could see
nothing. “Do you think they’ve given up?” Nadine said to Ceri.

“No way, Nadine. They’ve got too much to lose to give up – like their lives. ‘You Know Who’
isn’t a very forgiving person. No – they’re up to something all right.”

They continued to survey their surroundings, trying to detect a sound, a movement, a disturbed
blade of grass, anything that would give them a clue concerning the strategy of their opponents.
They could detect nothing.

His heightened state of alertness lent Remus a sixth sense. He didn’t hear anything and didn’t
see anything. He just felt a prickling at the back of his neck.

He moved quickly to his left – and that saved him from serious injury, or even death. As he
turned, he spotted Wormtail about thirty yards away - and the ball of energy that he’d sent
hurtling at his exposed back. It caught Remus on his upper right arm and flung him into the stone
monument behind which he’d been sheltering. He let out a groan as the pain laced through his right
arm, and his wand dropped from his stiffened fingers.

Wormtail had earlier transformed to his rat Animagus and run silently behind the church to come
up behind the defenders. He’d transformed back to see Remus Lupin’s back exposed to his gaze. He
couldn’t believe that his target had managed to avoid the full brunt of the Flipendus curse, which
he’d aimed at his exposed spine, but he grinned evilly as he saw that Remus was now at his
mercy.

He pointed his wand squarely at Remus’ chest and took careful aim. He started to utter the
killing curse when he was thrown to the floor as a hastily-aimed spell from Sirius’ wand exploded
just in front of him, sending clodges of earth into his stomach. Wormtail immediately returned to
his rat form and ran quickly behind the church.

The activity signalled the start of a furious bout of curses from the other Death Eaters, who
had used Wormtail’s distraction to change their positions. Charlie was forced to move from his now
vulnerable hiding place, and he run frantically towards Remus, just avoiding the curses that
followed his progress.

He dived behind Remus’ cover and looked at the ashen face of the DADA professor as he clutched
his right arm. “Where are you hit, Remus. Are you ok?”

Remus groaned through the pain, “I think my arm’s broken. I was lucky it wasn’t more
serious.”

In response to Sirius’ urgent calls, Charlie told him Remus’ situation, and that he wasn’t badly
hurt. Sirius grunted with relief as he flung yet another spell at the Death Eaters. “Charlie – see
if you can get behind the church. I saw Wormtail’s rat run there after his attack.”

Charlie dashed to the side of the church, and eased his way around the corner to try to find
Wormtail. There was no movement at all. Wormtail had escaped back to his bunch of thugs.

Charlie returned to Remus’ side, and asked, “Can you fight on, Remus?”

“Yes, I can use my left arm – I won’t be very accurate or powerful but at least I can make a
nuisance of myself as far as the Death Eaters are concerned. You go and find a better spot - I’m ok
here.”

Charlie looked around and saw a good place just this side of the Calvery – behind an old
horse-mounting stone. He dashed over during a lull in the firing and settled down behind it.

***

It was another natural cave, roughly circular, about thirty yards across and twenty feet high.
They examined the walls, ceiling and floor but could find no exit tunnels at all. The only light in
the cavern came from their wands. Apart from a few stalagmites jutting up from the ground, the
cavern was otherwise featureless – just bare rock walls all around, immovable and challenging in
their starkness.

“Do you think we’ve taken a wrong turn back there somewhere?” asked a dejected Ron.

“I don’t think so,” said Hermione. “Why would that scorpion be guarding the last exit if there
was nothing to protect? No – I’m sure we’ve come the right way.”

“Hey – perhaps this is the place,” said Ginny suddenly. “The end of our quest – and we’ve just
got to wait for something to happen.”

“Well,” said Ron, “If we’ve got to wait, I’m going to wait in comfort. Let’s finish our food –
I’m starving!”

“Again!” Hermione exclaimed with disbelief. She looked at her watch. “Oh, it’s five o’clock – I
didn’t think it was that late.”

“See Hermione,” he said. “We haven’t eaten for ages.” With that he flopped down on the ground
and started to take out the remaining food parcels from his rucksack. He was soon joined by the
others. Despite her earlier incredulity, even Hermione felt hunger pangs once she started to think
about the food that was left. And after all, it was teatime!

“Any more pizza left?” mouthed Ron through a great chunk of Cornish pasty.

“No Ron,” answered Ginny. “You polished it all off the last time we stopped for food. Don’t you
remember?”

“Oh yeh – just checking in case you held some back.”

After they finished all the food, Hermione heated the remaining two flasks and poured them all a
hot cup of tea. They all felt a lot better after that – they were now ready to resume their
journey. They all stood and again looked about the cavern. “We must have missed something,” said
Harry. “Let’s spread out and examine the walls more closely – there’s got to be an exit
somewhere.”

They each picked a section of the cave to explore and slowly walked around the walls, stopping
from time to time to examine even the smallest flaw in the rock. After ten minutes, they gave up.
“There’s nothing here,” groaned Harry. “What’re we going to do now? I don’t fancy going back to
face that scorpion again!”

“All we can do is wait, Harry,” said Hermione. “Something will turn up I’m sure.”

They all sat back down on the ground and waited, looking around the cavern for any sign. They
waited for another fifteen minutes, and then, high up on the wall, they spotted movement.

“Look,” shouted Hermione, “do you see that?”

High up on the wall, just beneath the ceiling, they saw 7 circular lights dancing slowly around
each other. There was no sound, just the slow movement of the seven lights.

“It must be something to do with the light of the righteous,” said Hermione. “But the last time
we saw that it was a silvery-white colour. None of those lights are silvery or white. See if you
can detect any pattern in their movement.”

After a little while it was evident that the movement of the lights was completely random.

Suddenly, Ginny slapped her thigh in recognition. “Of course – look, it’s a rainbow. It’s the
seven colours of the rainbow – Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, Indigo and Violet. What do you
think it means?”

The three looked at Hermione, hoping for some answer. She studied the lights again for a moment
and then brightened. “Yes. I think I’ve got it!” She turned to her friends and started to explain
her idea.

“Think of the sunlight shining through a prism – it disperses the white light into the seven
colours of the rainbow. The sun is the source – the white light – and we’ve got to find the source
of these rainbow lights. It’s got to be the light of the righteous.”

She looked at the others, who nodded their agreement with her assessment of the situation.

“I think we’ve all got to do this together – at the same time. We’ve all got to be involved in
finding the source. Point your wands at the lights, and when I nod, say the incantation ‘Ostendo
Origo.’ Ok?”

“Where did you get that one from Hermione?” Asked Ron.

“It means ‘Show the source.’ I read it in that book you bought me for my last birthday. Ready
everybody?”

She looked to see that they were all looking at her, and pointing their wands at the moving
lights. She nodded her head.

*‘OSTENDO ORIGO’* they all shouted at the same time. They watched in fascination as four
silvery blue lights sped towards the top of the wall. As they neared the lights, they merged into a
single, powerful beam of energy and then struck dead centre – in the middle of the seven
lights.

They waited in anticipation as the lights immediately stopped moving. They then started to move
again, but this time in towards each other – to the spot where the spell had just struck the wall.
The seven lights merged into one – and a silvery-white light shone brilliantly. It then slowly
moved across the top of the wall to their right, and then down. It stopped about five feet above
the ground, immediately to their right.

“Come on,” Harry said to the others. He walked up to the waiting light, held his wand against it
and uttered, “*ALOHOMORA*.”

He stood back as the silvery light intensified, then started to get smaller and smaller until it
was just an intense spot on the wall in front of them. Then it disappeared all together, and in its
place, a small hole appeared. It became larger and larger until an exit tunnel was revealed.

Harry looked at his companions and then stepped into the tunnel. The others quickly followed,
holding their wands above their heads to show the way. Ron moved up and walked alongside Harry.

After a short while, the tunnel curved sharply to the left, and then straightened. It meandered
along for about 150 yards before curving sharply to the right again. They stopped and saw that it
gently bent around further to the right.

“I don’t believe this,” gasped Ginny. She had just finished mapping the latest leg of the
tunnel.

“What?” asked Ron.

“We’re nearly back to the place we started. Much deeper than that, but I estimate that if we
continue to move to the right, we’ll be underneath the church again in about a hundred yards.”

“Are you sure, Ginny?” asked Harry.

“Well, I tried to be as accurate as I could, and I’m probably out a bit. But we’re not far from
the church - deep under the church.”

They looked at each other dubiously, and then continued down the tunnel. Harry called a halt
when he detected a faint yellowish light coming from somewhere up ahead. “Kill your lights,” he
whispered.

The yellow light was slightly brighter when their wands were extinguished.

“I think I recognise this place,” said Harry suddenly. “It’s very similar to the tunnel I was in
when I had those dreams.”

The others looked at him hopefully. “Perhaps we’re getting close to the secret,” said Ginny.

They walked slowly forward, the glow getting slightly brighter with each step, and then they
suddenly emerged into an irregularly shaped cavern.

They looked around and immediately saw the source of the yellow light – six ancient-looking
torches were perched in their holders around the rock walls. The torches were not lit with any
natural fire – it was definitely magical. The eerie yellow glow seemed to soak into the rock and
the walls themselves added to the glow.

They all jumped at the sound of a loud, challenging voice coming from the far end of the cavern,
over to the right.

“STAY. HOLD STILL. DO NOT MOVE.”

They looked and saw an amazing sight. Harry gasped, “It’s the one in my dream – the one that’s
been calling to me.”

In the yellowish gloom, they saw a tall, very old man dressed in the uniform of a Knight
Templar. His large and lethal-looking sword was raised above his head. He slowly approached, and
they inched backwards, back towards the tunnel. He stopped about ten yards from them, and said in a
strong, authoritative voice, “WHO ARE YOU AND WHAT DO YOU SEEK.”

Harry stepped forward and replied, “Lord Knight, greetings. I am the Anima Summa that you have
summoned, and these are my 3 brave and trusty helpers. We seek the truth and the secret to aid us
in our task against the Dark Forces.”

He looked at the knight as he waited, hoping that he’d said the right things.

The knight looked at Harry, and then beyond him at his three friends, appraising them with a
practiced eye. He lowered his sword to his side and then spoke once more, “YES. I SEE THAT YOU ARE
WHOM YOU SAY. WELCOME. I HAVE WAITED LONG. BUT I DID NOT EXPECT ONES SO YOUNG. FOR SUCH A TENDER
AGE YOU MUST INDEED BE BRAVE TO HAVE COME SO FAR THROUGH THE LABYRINTH.”

He then seemed to pull himself taller, and raised his head slightly. “I AM THE SPIRIT OF JACQUES
DE MOLAY – THE LAST GRAND MASTER OF THE KNIGHTS TEMPLAR – THE DEFENDERS OF THE SECRET OF RHEDAE. IT
HAS BEEN MY TASK, FOR THE LAST EIGHT HUNDRED YEARS, TO GUARD THE SECRET OF RHEDAE. BUT I WAS ALSO
GIVEN ANOTHER TASK ALL THOSE YEARS AGO. I WAS AWAKENED FROM MY SLUMBER OF VIGIL BY A GREAT EVIL –
AN EVIL THAT THREATENS THE PEACE OF THE WORLD. IT IS MY DUTY TO SUMMON THE ONE WHO CAN DISPELL THIS
EVIL – THE ANIMA SUMMA. AND SO YOU HAVE COME. MY TASK IS NOW DONE AND I CAN YET AGAIN SLUMBER. BUT
YOU CANNOT. YOU ARE JUST BEGINNING YOUR JOURNEY.”

He paused, and then continued, “YOU ARE ABOUT TO WITNESS THE SECRET OF RHEDAE.”

He walked back over to the wall and raised his sword once more. He placed it against the rock
and uttered something in an unfamiliar language. The rock seemed to shrink away from the tip of the
sword, and then parted to reveal a long corridor. It stretched ahead darkly, beyond the vision of
the four friends who had walked up alongside the knight.

The knight gestured with his sword. “COME. GO TO THE CHAMBER AND WITNESS THE SECRET OF
RHEDAE.”

He stood to one side as first Harry, and then the other three, entered the corridor and walked
slowly into the darkness.

Author’s Notes (2) : Don’t forget to review – I really do need to know what you think about this
fic, even if it’s only a one-worder (from rubbish to brilliant and all points in between). Grateful
thanks to those who have reviewed so far – it’s appreciated, especially informed criticism – it’s
the best way for a writer to improve.

Here’s a link to my photo album with 3 images that are relevant to this chapter – Feel free to
have a look at them, and in return please tell me what you think about this fic. The images show
:

- Ginny’s map of the labyrinth

- Inside the church

- The Jesus window, which cast 3 on the 4th.

http://uk.photos.yahoo.com/bc/animasumma/lst?&.dir=/Labyrinth&.src=ph&.view=t



12. The Secret of Rhedae
------------------------

Chapter 10 The Secret of Rhedae

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

Harry and his three friends didn’t light their wands as they slowly walked down the corridor
into the darkness ahead. The floor of the tunnel was lit by the yellow backlight coming from the
chamber behind them. The floor was smooth, although covered by the dust of millennia. Their
footprints were the first to disturb its symmetry in a very long time. They were all feeling
humbled, the weight of privileged responsibility giving them an air of reverence as they
walked.

They had gone about fifty yards before they came to a halt. They sensed that they had just
entered a space that was larger than the tunnel. The light from the Knight’s cavern behind was now
all but gone, but before any of them could raise their wand to give some illumination, a faint
silvery glow suddenly sprung from the ceiling above. They looked up to see the rock ceiling, smooth
and arched like the ceiling of a gothic cathedral, glowing with an inner light. They looked about
them to see a circular chamber, about ten yards in diameter. Equally spaced around the walls hung
four long shields. They each had a white background surrounding a red Templar cross.

“Oh, look at the floor,” breathed Ginny with awe.

They all looked down to see that the floor of the chamber was covered in a vast mosaic, each
piece no bigger than a thumbnail. The colour of the mosaic was predominantly milky white, with
darker coloured pieces fitted to form a pattern. They walked to the side of the chamber so that
they could better see the design.

Around the outside of the floor was a circle of black, inside which was the outline of a Templar
cross in red, the arms of each of the four extremities just touching the ends of the circle. At the
centre of the cross was another circle, again in black, and inside this circle was a strange golden
shape. It was a very simple shape - just two curved lines meeting at one end and then arcing out
and then back in on themselves, and crossing each other just before they touched the other end of
the inner circle.

“I’ve seen that design before,” said Hermione, “but I can’t think where.”

They looked back up from the floor and gazed around the chamber. To their right, and exactly
placed between two of the shields, were two columns stretching from the mosaic floor to the arched
ceiling. They could see that they were made of polished milky-white marble, which reminded them of
those found in a Greek or Roman temple. Hermione couldn’t resist. She walked up and stretched out
her hand to feel the smooth beauty of one of the columns.

“It’s lovely,” she breathed, caressing the stone like she would the delicate wing of a
butterfly.

“Do you think we have to do something?” asked Ron, “I mean, I can’t see any secret here.”

“I don’t know, Ron,” answered Harry, “I think this is one of those times when we have to be
patient. We know we’re at the centre of the mystery. We’ll just have to wait until something
happens.”

*“It is a thing of beauty, is it not?”*

The four jumped at the sound of the soft and gentle voice that came from behind them. They
turned and saw a glowing silvery-white form in the shape of a man, but no clear features were
visible – they were hidden by the intensity of the light that surrounded him. The four teens had to
shield their eyes as they looked directly at the apparition.

The spirit was looking at Hermione as he spoke, *“These two pillars were brought from the
inner temple of Jerusalem by my trusty servants, the Knights Templar. That was once my resting
place until it came under threat. Before that, my home was the great repository of knowledge in the
Library of Alexandria. That was destroyed, also. Since those times, Rhedae has been my
home.”*

“Wh … who are you?” whispered Hermione in a small and nervous voice.

“I am the spirit of the Light. I have been known by many names through the ages. Now I am known
as The Secret, but I have also been known, among other names, as the Holy Grail and The Anointed
One.”

Hermione looked at the spirit, and then down at the design at the centre of the mosaic. A look
of awe came over her beautiful features as she raised both hands to cover her mouth, and she then
sank slowly onto the floor, not moving her eyes, which were now wet with tears, from the
spirit.

“I see that you know me, child. You know my other names. You are the one of intellect – the one
who has helped, along with the brave,” the spirit turned and looked at Ron, “and the one with
compassion,” he looked at Ginny, “bring the Anima Summa into my presence.”

He finally turned and looked at Harry. He, together with Ron and Ginny, had watched and listened
to the words - but they didn’t understand. They didn’t know what Hermione knew.

“I am a repository of ancient wizarding knowledge, one of three that still exists throughout the
world. That knowledge was gathered by one far greater than I and shared between the three
guardians. It is our duty and honour to share this knowledge with the true defender of the light –
the Anima Summa. That is why you have been summoned here – to witness those secrets.”

The spirit slowly walked over towards Harry and looked him directly in the eye and spoke, still
with that soft and gentle voice, “Allow me to see into your heart and mind so that I may be
completely sure that you are indeed the true Anima Summa.”

Harry blinked nervously, but nodded his assent. The spirit raised both arms and reached out
towards Harry. He placed one hand on his head and the other over the centre of his chest. Harry
could feel nothing, apart from a warm glow coming from the hands that were on him.

After a few brief moments, the spirit dropped his arms, “Yes. You are the true Anima Summa. You
are young, but strong and brave. You are filled with the qualities of your three helpers – they are
your right arms – your pillars – your conscience – your friends. With these three, you are rich
beyond all the treasures in the world. You are part of them as they are part of you.

“You have three more tasks to perform, Anima Summa - three quests that will prepare you for the
final conflict with the Dark. I can help with the first, but you must find your own way with the
other two. Those two tasks will see you journey to other ancient places in the world. You must seek
out the secrets and mysteries of my two fellow guardians and feed on their council. Only then will
you be ready to face your destiny.

“But first, you must seek out the one who will be your closest ally. Your first task is to find
your Anima Summa.”

Harry’s eyes opened in astonishment, “But .. but ..,” he stuttered, not able to get out the
words.

Ron came to his rescue. “But we thought that Harry was the Anima Summa. There can’t be two of
them can there?”

The spirit smiled gently and looked at Ginny and then Hermione, “These two know. They are both
aware that there is another. But do not be angry with them. They were charged to keep their
silence, a silence that served a purpose. You, Anima Summa, were not to learn of this until you
came to me. I will now tell you of the prophecy.”

“Th .. the prophecy?” Harry asked.

“It has been pre-ordained that in times of great peril, when the Dark threatens to overtake the
Light, an Anima Summa will arise in the midst of the world. He must seek out his soul mate – his
true Anima Summa – and join with her. They must then, together, seek out the mysteries and secrets
of the ancient world and gain the secret magical power to challenge the Dark. You have completed
the first task, and now you must complete your second before starting the final two quests.”

“But .. but what about my friends? They have helped me up to now, won’t they be permitted to
help me in the other tasks?”

“Yes. They will always be with you. They are part of the prophecy. But you must also be joined
by your Anima Summa. You cannot gain the power if she is not by your side. She has been specially
chosen, from the moment of her conception, just three months after you were conceived.”

“Who is she? Who is the other Anima Summa?” Harry asked, still in a daze.

“That I do not know. Only you can find her. Your three friends cannot help you in this task. It
is for you alone.”

“But how? How will I know if a girl is the right one?”

“That is where I can help you,” the spirit reached into his shining robes and pulled out two
objects. He reached over and held them out towards Harry, “Take these. They will help. They will
know when the time is right for you to meet your Anima Summa. It may be today, tomorrow, next week,
next month. I cannot tell you when, only that these will guide you. Make no mistake, when the time
is right and you meet the right one, they will help you know it beyond any shadow of a doubt.”

Harry reached out and took the objects from the spirit. He looked down and saw two silver rings
nestling in his hand. They each had a design on their outer sides – a Templar cross and the same
design as the one at the centre of the circle in the mosaic. “How will they help?” he asked.

“When you have been guided to your Anima Summa, you must place one of the rings on her hand, and
the other on yours. This will seal the bond. They will also help you in your final two tasks. The
sealing of the bond will activate certain ancient knowledge, which I am about to give you. This
knowledge will be held in the back of your mind, and that of your Anima Summa, only coming to the
surface when you are needful. Be warned, the knowledge I impart is very ancient and powerful. Be
sure to use it only to do good, and never for any selfish or personal act. Come, stand over my
symbol – there at the centre of the mosaic.”

Harry, still in somewhat of a daze, slowly walked to the centre of the floor and stood over the
strange design. He looked up to see the spirit raise his right arm and point his hand, palm
upwards, in his direction. He felt a strange, tingling sensation as a bright, silvery light came
from the spirit’s palm and surrounded his head and shoulders. It lasted only for a few moments, and
then it was over. Harry looked about him, confused. He searched through his mind, his memories,
trying to find the knowledge that had just been given to him. But he couldn’t recall anything –
except just one thing that hadn’t been in his mind before. He looked at the spirit, his eyes wide
and staring, searching for the features that would confirm what he now knew. His legs felt weak and
he sat on the floor, as Hermione had done before him.

“You now know my other names also,” said the spirit smiling, “It is true.”

“Harry?” Ginny went over and looked down at him, “Who is he?”

“It .. it .. it’s ..,” he trailed off, speechless and looked over at Hermione, who had regained
her composure, although she still looked as stunned as Harry.

“Ginny, Ron,” she said quietly, “That design in the middle of the floor – I remember where I’d
seen it before. It was in Rome, when I went there on holiday a few years ago with my parents. We
visited the Catacombs beneath the Pantheon. That symbol was everywhere – it’s a fish, the sign the
Christians used in the early days. The name ‘The Anointed One’ – it was translated from the Greek.
It means Christ. Here, standing before us, is Jesus Christ.”

“What?” breathed Ron in disbelief, and looked at the spirit, “You’re Jesus? But how? Weren’t you
crucified and then rose into heaven?”

Jesus smiled at Ron and then at Ginny, who was now sitting at Hermione’s side, holding her hand,
*“Yes. I am he. But only one aspect of the man you know as Jesus. I exist in more than one place
and more than one time. I am here, but I am also where you call Heaven. I am now, but I am also
then and also will be.”*

“I .. I don’t understand,” said Ron softly.

“You don’t understand now, brave one, but you will. At some time in my future you will see the
true nature of things. But it is not for me to explain the workings of the great one at this time.
You must find your own way to that.”

“But didn’t you teach everyone, two thousand years ago, how to get to heaven?” asked Hermione,
now looking intently at the spirit. She had a deep and urgent desire to know. That was her
nature.

“Yes child - but not in the way that you have been told by others. I have been saddened, over
these long years, to see my teachings changed in a subtle way. But it is not really the fault of
the Liar. He was merely doing what he knew best to ensure that the world knew of me and what I
represent. He knew that to preserve the word of Light for the future, he had to make my history
appeal to the powers of the time – mighty Rome. Without their acceptance of the word, it would not
have survived to this day. So he was merely misguided, as well as good.”

“Who was The Liar?” Asked Hermione.

“You will find out in the years to come. I will now merely point you in the right direction –
read the scrolls unearthed at Qumran – read the Dead Sea Scrolls. Hidden in those scriptures is the
identity of The Liar – but do not look on him unkindly.”

Jesus’ eyes grew harder and his voice lost its soft and gentle quality, “ Reserve that look for
those powerful and greedy men who have taken my name in vain. They have twisted my teachings for
their own ends and have carried out atrocities beyond belief in my name.”

His voice softened once more, and he stepped back towards the far wall, “What you have heard and
seen this day must remain a secret. Do not reveal it to anyone except that noble and dearly-loved
servant of the Light – Albus Dumbledore. Listen to him, Anima Summa. He will be a source of great
help and council in the times ahead. He is your friend and has vast knowledge – heed what he
offers. Know one more thing – the rings you have been given must be returned to me when you have
completed all your tasks. They are yours only for a fleeting moment in the long march of time. They
must be preserved for a time when the next Anima Summa seeks the secret. I pray that it will be a
very long time until that happens, because it is Darkness that spawns the quest.

*“It is time for you to leave this place,”* Jesus looked at Ron and smiled, *“And I know
that one of you is in great and urgent need of sustenance.”*

Ron’s face coloured as a low rumble came from the depths of his stomach, “Sorry,” he whispered
as he put his hands over his belly. Jesus turned and faced Harry.

*“You must now go and start your first quest to find your Anima Summa. Remember, you must do
this alone – do not seek help. Great powers will be bestowed on you both, but only if you
accomplish the task alone. Use only the power of the rings. I bid you God speed and farewell, sons
and daughters of the Light.”*

Jesus then seemed to shrink and the light faded. Before he vanished from their sight, the four
looked at the true face of Jesus.

“Wait, please,” shouted Harry, “I’ve got a lot more questions. I need to know what the last two
tasks are….” But he was only speaking to empty space. Jesus had gone.

The four friends gathered together at the centre of the chamber and put their arms around each
other, seeking comfort in their closeness. They stayed like that for several minutes, trying to
come to terms with what they had just witnessed.

Finally, Ron spoke, “Well. That was something else! He didn’t look a bit like those paintings
and statues you see in churches, did he?”

“Did you feel the power coming from him?” said Ginny, “It was like being bathed in something
incredibly good. It’s difficult to describe.”

“Yes, Ginny,” said Hermione, “I think we all felt that.”

“So now we know the secret of Rhedae,” said Harry, “But I’ve got a lot more questions than
answers. When and how did you know about the other Anima Summa, girls?”

Ginny and Hermione looked at each other sheepishly, and then Ginny replied, “We found out when
we were doing the research into the message from your amulet. We’re not the only ones who know,
Harry. Professor Dumbledore found out last summer, when he received a prophecy from the centaurs.
His inner circle knows, as well – including Sirius, Professor Lupin and Ceri. We were sworn to
secrecy – we were told that it could cause you harm if you found out the full truth before you were
ready for it.”

Harry nodded, “I can accept that. But where do I go from here?” He thought for a moment, “Do you
know any girl with a birthday of 31st October 1980?”

“Harry,” Hermione answered quickly, “Even if we did, we can’t tell you. You heard Jesus – we
aren’t permitted to help. I’m sorry but you have to do this without us.”

Harry nodded gravely, “That’s what worries me. I’m never at my best when it comes to girls –
they’re a mystery to me.” He looked at his two female friends, “You don’t seem to think the same
way as us boys.”

“Amen to that,” said Ron with feeling.

“We’ll support you as much as we can, Harry,” said Ginny, “We’ll always be there for you if you
want to talk. But just don’t expect us to find your Anima Summa for you – we can’t. Only you know
your innermost feelings – listen to them. And don’t forget the rings.”

Harry looked down – he was still clutching the rings tightly in his hand. He put them safely in
his trouser pocket and sighed, “Well I suppose we’d better get back.”

Ron looked at his watch, “It’s half past six. Six and a half hours we’ve been down here, and
it’ll take us at least two hours to find our way out of the labyrinth, even with Ginny’s map.”

“Oh lord,” said Harry looking sick, “The others outside the church. They can’t have been able to
hold off the Death Eaters this long. I hope they’re all right. Come on, the sooner we start, the
sooner we’ll get back.”

The glow dimmed as they rushed out of the chamber, and winked out just as they entered the
corridor. The four hurried along, drawn by the yellow glow up ahead in the Knight’s cavern. They
emerged and saw that Jacques de Molay was waiting for them.

“I SEE FROM YOUR FACES THAT YOU HAVE SPOKEN TO JESUS,” his resounding and authoritative voice
filled the cavern.

“Yes, Sir Knight,” replied Harry, “And we now know the tasks ahead. But we are worried for our
friends’ safety above ground. They are facing great evil to protect us and we’ve been so long in
the labyrinth. We have to get back to them before they are over-whelmed – if they haven’t been
already.”

“DO NOT WORRY, ANIMA SUMMA. YOUR FRIENDS ARE STILL SAFE. WAIT THERE AND I WILL RETURN YOU TO THE
CHURCH, WHICH IS DIRECTLY ABOVE.” He turned and held his sword against the corridor opening, again
muttered in a strange language, and the rock wall closed, leaving no sign that an opening had been
there only a few moments before.

He turned back to the four, “I WILL CONTINUE TO GUARD THE SECRET, AND I AWAIT YOUR RETURN – FOR
YOU SURELY WILL RETURN TO BRING BACK THE RINGS OF JOINING. NOW GATHER TOGETHER BEFORE ME – STAND
CLOSE.”

They did as they were asked, and huddled together in front of the Knight, who lifted his sword
and held it over their heads.

“FAREWELL BRAVE SOULS. MAY THE GREAT ONE GRANT YOU SAFE PASSAGE IN YOUR QUESTS”

He then quietly uttered something in the same unfamiliar language that he’d earlier used, and a
blue light emerged from the tip of his sword, covering all four in its radiance. They closed their
eyes against the glare, and then blinked them open – and found themselves standing in the church,
on the white square in the aisle that had, six and a half hours before, allowed them entry to the
labyrinth.

Hermione looked at her watch – her eyes curious. And she gasped. “Look – it’s only just after
twelve thirty. That’s only half an hour since we left!”

“That’s impossible, Hermi,” exclaimed Ron as he checked his watch, as did the other two. They
all looked at each other with disbelief.

“Now we know what that voice meant by ‘Time will be equalised.’ The time we lost on our last
visit has been returned to us on this.”

“That’s powerful magic, Hermi,” said Ron, “This is beyond me.”

They all suddenly turned towards the entrance to the church as they heard the sound of a curse
exploding against the wall outside.

“You two stay here,” said Harry quickly to the girls, “Ron – let’s go to see what’s happening
outside.”

The two boys rushed quickly to the back of the church and turned into the porch leading to the
main door. They saw Ceri and Nadine, her face and blouse streaked with blood, peering outside and
shouting spells as they aimed their wands to the left of the church. Harry went over and touched
Ceri on her arm.

She turned round and looked at them with surprise, “What’s the matter, Harry. I thought you were
starting on your journey below ground. What’s happened?”

“It’s a long story, Ceri. We’ve completed the quest, but we’ll tell you all about it later.
Right now we need to get out of this mess. Is anyone hurt?” He looked at Nadine’s head.

“Nothing serious, Harry. Nadine’s got a cut on her head, and Remus has a broken arm. Apart from
that, we’re not doing too badly.”

“Where are the Death Eaters holed up?” asked Harry.

“Some are over to the left of the church, in the churchyard, and some are further to their
right, just this side of that line of trees.”

Harry cautiously looked outside and saw the lights of the curses flung by the Death Eaters. He
quickly pulled his head back inside and thought for a few moments. He then turned to Ceri; “The
girls will help you here at the door. Ron and I will get behind them and attack from there. Can you
get the word to the others outside?”

“Yes – but be careful you two. Don’t take any risks – do you hear me?” She looked intently at
the boys, who nodded gravely and turned to go.

“Wait,” Ceri called, “How are you going to get behind them?”

“Oh we’ll fly,” said Ron, “Or at least, Harry will – and I’ll hitch a lift.”

The two boys rushed back into the church and spoke to the girls, who hurried back to help Ceri
and Nadine. Harry and Ron walked over to the church bell tower and looked up into the cavernous
heights above.

“Ready?” asked Harry. Ron nodded and then saw the large golden eagle appear before him. Ron
climbed onto Harry’s back and leaned forward to hold his arms loosely around the eagle’s neck.

Harry kicked off and flew up to the top of the bell tower, being careful to avoid the bell
ropes, and alighted behind one of the big bells. They peeked around the side of the bell and
surveyed the scene before them. They could easily see Remus and Charlie, each crouching behind a
large stone close to the entrance to the church. Sirius was a little further off to the right, at
the edge of the Calvery. They quickly spotted the Death Eaters from their elevated position,
crouched in an arc behind tombstones and trees at the edge of the graveyard.

Ron pointed to the line of trees at the back of the cemetery, “I think that’s the best place to
land, Harry, behind those trees. But it’ll be a good idea if you take a circular route, around to
the right and close to the ground, so that we won’t be seen.”

Harry nodded his head and moved to the right-hand side of the tower, ready to glide down towards
the ground. Neither he, nor Ron, saw the tall young girl, about Harry’s age – perhaps a little
younger, watching them intently from one of the top windows of the Villa Bethania. She raised her
hand and brushed her long white hair back from around her lovely face, craning forward to look
intently at the eagle. Her beautiful vivid green eyes lit up with a flash of recognition as she
stared at Harry piercingly. A far-away look then seemed to come over her, as the eagle and his
passenger dropped from the tower towards the ground and then levelled out and skimmed the grass as
they moved swiftly to the right.

Harry flew in a wide arc, and approached the line of trees from the back end, the branches and
leaves masking their approach from the Death Eaters. Harry landed behind a particularly large tree
and transformed after Ron quickly jumped down from his back. They both peered around the side of
the tree and saw three of the black-robed figures not thirty yards away, fully exposed to their
gaze. The other eight were further over, closer to the church.

“You take the nearest and I’ll take the second one. We’ll both have a go at the one furthest
away,” Harry whispered in Ron’s ear. Ron nodded and held up three fingers, and counted down to
begin their attack.

The boys stepped around the tree and aimed their wands at their targets. ‘*STUPIFY*’ they
both shouted together. The two Death Eaters dropped like stones, and the third looked up in
surprise, just in time to see two beams of light hit him in the chest. He followed his two
black-robed friends to the floor, unconscious.

“Potter’s behind us,” Travis shouted. All the other Death Eaters turned and stared, seeing Harry
and Ron run back behind the cover of the large tree. The distraction allowed Ceri and Hermione to
rush from the front of the church and join the three men outside, the five forming a far more solid
and aggressive line. They added to the Death Eaters’ confusion as they sent spell after spell at
their positions.

Wormtail started to feel panic, but steeled himself to the fight, “Travis – you take three
others and go after Potter and his friend. We’ll hold the others off here.”

Travis beckoned to the three closest to him and they started crawling along the ground in the
direction of the large tree. Harry could see what was happening, and he and Ron fired off spells,
trying to slow the Death Eaters’ approach.

Deprived of more than half their firepower, Wormtail and the remaining three stood no chance
against the seven clustered in and around the church. Soon, two of the Death Eaters lay stunned on
the ground, and Sirius and Charlie started to move forward, outflanking Wormtail and the other
Death Eater. With Travis and the other three effectively pinned down by Harry and Ron, their
position soon became hopeless.

Ron stupefied one of the four, and Sirius placed Wormtail’s companion in a full body bind.
Wormtail finally gave in to his panic and Apparated back to the cave. When he saw him disappear,
Travis quickly followed, leaving the other two to face overwhelming odds, and they were soon
over-powered by Sirius and Charlie.

All nine Death Eaters were quickly rounded up and bound securely inside the line of trees, to
await the arrival of the French aurors. Sirius knew that such a lot of magical activity would
attract their attention, and he didn’t have long to wait.

“Nadine – are you all right?” Charlie had rushed over to the church door and held the French
girl by the arms as he looked at her with concerned eyes.

“Yes, don’t worry Charlie – I’m ok – honestly. It’s just a little cut. Ceri stopped the bleeding
and I’ll soon get it fixed properly.”

Ginny just stood watching the two with a smirk on her face.

Harry and Ron joined Hermione as she bent over Remus, who was carefully cradling his arm.

“You need to get that seen to quickly, Professor,” said Hermione, “We’ll ask Nadine if she knows
of a good wizarding nurse close by. You can both go together to get your injuries fixed.”

Remus nodded and looked up at Harry, “Did you find the secret, Harry?”

“Yes Professor, we did. But we’ll tell you more about that later. But Hermione’s right – I’ll go
and ask Nadine to get you to a nurse.”

When three French aurors arrived about five minutes later, Nadine explained what had happened,
and they took charge of the prisoners, promising to get in touch with their counterparts in London
to come to collect them.

“Any problems, Nadine?” asked Sirius.

“They weren’t very happy, Sirius. They asked me to tell you that they should have been told
about any possibility of trouble on their patch. And they’re not too pleased about the tidying up
they’ll have to do – altering the memories of the priest and a few of the locals who saw the
fight.”

“Oh well, c’est la vie – isn’t that what you say?”

She laughed at Sirius’ terrible French accent, then called to Charlie, “Charlie – will you help
me take Remus to get his arm fixed? I know a witch just down the bottom of the hill who’s a good
nurse – she lives in a little cottage just outside the village of Couiza. It shouldn’t take long.”
She glanced at Ron, whose forehead looked a bit of a mess, the congealed blood bearing witness to
the ordeal he had gone through beneath the church, “You’d better come too, Ron. You need to get
that cut fixed.”

“Uh, Ceri,” said Ron tentatively, “Before we go, have you got any food left?”

Ceri laughed, “Yes, Ron. We’ve got all of it left – we didn’t have much time for a lunch break
you know.”

“Great,” shouted Ron, “That means you’ve still got the pizza!”

“Go and get your head fixed, Ron”, said Ceri laughing, “We won’t eat anything until you get
back, I promise.”

Charlie, Remus, Ron and Nadine drove off in the Land Rover, leaving the others to rest until
their return.

While they were waiting, Hermione looked over at Harry, standing on his own outside the Calvery,
deep in thought. She walked over and gently touched his arm, “Are you ok, Harry? You look a bit
worried.”

“Worried is not the word for it, Hermi. I’m bloody petrified. I’ve just been told by none other
than Jesus himself, that I’ve got to find a girl – and not just any girl, mind you, but my Anima
Summa – the one I’ll probably spend the rest of my life with. I just can’t get my head around that,
Hermi.”

She looked with sympathy at her friend, “It’ll take time for you to come to terms with it,
Harry. I did – uh, I mean both Ginny and I did when we found out about it. Try not to worry too
much.”

Harry looked at his friend with confusion, “I’m sorry, Hermi. I’ve got to get some air. I’ll be
back in a little while.” He transformed and kicked off powerfully from the ground, soaring up into
the clear blue sky. The feeling of freedom helped and he felt his problems slipping away as the air
raced over his body and wings. Out over the countryside he flew, high above the sun-baked fields
and vineyards.

After a while, his keen eyesight spotted the Land Rover as it made its way back up the hillside
to the village of Rennes-le-Chateau, and he knew that he should return to join his friends. He
landed at the side of the church and transformed. Again he didn’t see that he was being watched.
The white-haired girl looked at him intently with her vivid green eyes. She’d seen the eagle and
she’d seen the boy. Her face took on a look of enchantment and she sighed deeply. As Harry walked
around to the front of the church and out of sight of the beautiful young girl in the villa, she
stepped down from the window, lay on her bed and closed her lovely eyes. A smile lit up her
beautiful face as she dreamt.

Harry walked up to the others just as Hermione was explaining about the time being equalised.
“Ah there you are,” said Sirius, “We were worried about you.”

“Sorry, Sirius. I just had to be by myself for a while. I’ve got a lot to think about.”

“Yes, I know Harry. Hermione told us that you’ve found out about your Anima Summa. Sorry I
couldn’t say anything about it before.”

“Don’t worry, Sirius, I know.”

“So what’s the secret of Rhedae then?” Ceri asked.

“Uh, sorry Ceri,” said Hermione, “We can’t tell you. It has to remain a secret. All we can say
is that all four of us, and the other Anima Summa when she’s been found, have to go on another two
quests. We don’t know what they are yet, but I’m sure we’ll find out when the time’s right.”

“Can’t you tell us any more?”

They all turned to see Nadine, who had just asked the question, with Remus, Ron and Charlie
standing behind her.

“Sorry, Nadine. I’ve just been telling the others. We can’t reveal the secret. We’ve been sworn
to secrecy.”

“Oh, I’m so disappointed. I’ve wondered about the mystery of Rennes-le-Chateau ever since I can
remember.”

“Believe me, Nadine,” said Ginny, “You wouldn’t believe us even if we could tell you. But we can
tell you about the dangers we came up against in the labyrinth.”

“Hang on a minute,” said Ron testily, “First things first. Where’s the pizza, Ceri?”

They all laughed and then helped Ron polish off the remainder of the food. The adults looked on
incredulously as the teens told them of their journey through the maze of tunnels and caverns,
marvelling that they had come through one ordeal after another, and now talked as if it had just
been a stroll in the park!

Later, as they drove back to Carcassonne, the four friends were preoccupied, deep in thought.
The adults recognised that they had been through a harrowing experience, one that possibly no one
else on the planet could expect to go through, and they kept quiet, giving them time to work things
out in their own way.

Harry couldn’t help thinking about his immediate task. The more he thought about it, the more
fearful he became. He would rather face a hoard of monsters in caverns than one single girl – girls
– they made him uneasy, unsure of himself. How was he going to cope?

Ron also thought about the task facing his friend – and sympathised, but at the same time
grateful that it wasn’t himself that was facing it. He was also looking forward to the two quests
he would be going on with his friends. The excitement of the labyrinth was still racing through his
blood.

Ginny was more reflective. She felt deeply for Hermione – she knew what she would be thinking at
that moment. Harry was so close to her and yet so far away. Ginny knew that she couldn’t help; she
could only give her support.

Hermione’s thoughts were varied and opposing in the emotions they elicited. She was full of
excitement at what she’d witnessed, and couldn’t wait to read the Dead Sea Scrolls. She also
relished the puzzles and mysteries that would no doubt need to be solved on the final two quests.
She was also full of despair – the boy she loved was sitting next to her, not thinking about her,
but of another girl, one he possibly hadn’t even met yet. She wondered and worried how she’d be
able to cope seeing Harry with his Anima Summa – the girl that he would love above all others.

The Grangers greeted the four as they trooped into the kitchen late that afternoon. Nadine had
thoughtfully driven slowly, and in a circuitous route, back to Carcassonne, giving the youngsters
time to settle down after their ordeal.

“I didn’t expect you home so early,” said Millie, “Did you find what you were looking for?”

“Yes, Mum,” said Hermione, “I think we’ve got everything we need now.”

“Good,” said Arbuthnot, “You can relax for the next two days – just laze about and recharge your
batteries for next term – you’re going to be busy with your OWLS.”

“Don’t remind us,” groaned Ron.

“Well Ron,” said Millie with an amused grin on her face, “are you ready for something to eat
yet?”

“Mrs. Granger, I’m always ready for that. Uh – have you got any of that pizza left?”

***

Later that evening, the four sat outside the tent in the garden, talking quietly.

“I wonder what those last two quests will be,” said Ron, “I know we’ve got to find the other two
guardians, but where will they be?”

“Jesus said that they’ll be in ancient places,” said Ginny, “And we’ll have to solve their
mysteries. What do you think, Hermi? How many other ancient and mysterious places are there?”

“Oh, there’s a lot, Ginny, far too many to try to guess where the two we want will be. And
they’re all over the world, Europe, Africa, Asia, the Americas, and some ancient places haven’t
even been found yet – some are known only from ancient writings, and others are merely
legends.”

“But what sort of places are they, Hermi?” asked Harry.

“Well, let’s see. There’s Egypt, of course – the ancient sites dotted along the Nile are full of
mystery. Then there’s Sumeria – the present day Iraq. It’s even older than Egypt, and just as
mysterious. That ancient Mesopotamian civilisation came before the Assyrians and ancient Babylon
arose from their ashes. Did you know that some of the oldest stories in the Bible are based on
Sumerian legend?”

“Legend?” exclaimed Ginny, “So does that mean they’re not true?”

“Not necessarily, Ginny,” answered Hermione, “I said they were based on legend, not myth. Myths
are mostly fiction – the product of some ancient scholar’s fertile imagination, but where legends
are concerned, there’s always some grain of truth hidden in their depths.”

“Well I hope we don’t have to go there,” said Ron, “I don’t think that Saddam Hussein will be
too pleased about us poking about in his country. Any other places, Hermi?”

“There’s the mysterious civilisations of the Indus Valley, in modern day Pakistan; the ancient
places found in South America, like Tiahuanaco in Bolivia, and loads of places in Peru and Mexico.
Then, of course, there’s El Dorado – the legendary city of gold.”

“Gold?” said Ron, his ears pricking up, “where’s that, Hermi?”

“Ron, if we knew where it is, it wouldn’t be a mystery any more! The Spanish invaders, and
countless people ever since, searched for it, but no one’s ever found it. It’s still out there
somewhere – perhaps in the jungles of Brazil, who knows?”

“Oh,” said Ron, deflated.

“There are so many other places. It just goes to show how much there is to be discovered out
there. It’s fascinating.” Hermione had a dreamy look as she stared, unseeing, into the darkening
sky.

“What about some of the other legends?” asked Ginny.

“Again, too many to recount,” Hermione replied, “but the most mysterious of them all, of course,
is the legend of Atlantis.”

“But that’s just myth, Hermi,” exclaimed Harry.

“Maybe, Harry, and maybe not. The ancient Greek philosopher, Plato, first wrote about it. He
wrote about an even more ancient Greek scholar, Solon, who was told about Atlantis by temple
priests in Egypt. Most historians today say that Plato invented the story, just to illustrate a
philosophical point – the fall from grace of a once powerful state – but a lot of other people
think that his story is true.”

“And where did he say Atlantis could be found?” asked Ginny.

“He only said that it was ‘Beyond the pillars of Hercules.’ Now that could be anywhere, but most
think he’s referring to the straights of Gibraltar – it guards the entrance to the Mediterranean
Sea. So that would put Atlantis where it’s name suggests – in the Atlantic Ocean. But others have
argued that it’s actually in the Mediterranean, some say it’s in the Caribbean, and some have even
suggested that it’s buried beneath miles of ice under the Antarctic continent.”

The four became quiet for a few minutes as they contemplated those ancient and mysterious places
that Hermione had spoken about. There were just too many to second guess where they’d have to go on
their quests.

Ginny broke the silence, “Harry, have you been able to remember any of the ancient spells Jesus
gave you?”

“No, Ginny. I’ve tried and tried but there’s nothing. I’m beginning to wonder if they’re there
at all!”

“They’re there, Harry,” Hermione whispered, “Don’t forget, he said that you wouldn’t be able to
access them until you seal the bond with your Anima Summa, and even then only when you need
them.”

“What did he mean by that, do you think?” asked Ron.

“I think it means that Harry and .. and his Anima Summa will only be able to remember a spell
when it’s needed. For instance, if they find themselves in danger, something to help them get out
of it will be placed from their subconscious into the conscious parts of their minds where they’ll
be able to use it.”

Harry let out a great sigh, “This is all very well, but I’ve still got this first quest hanging
over my head - the Anima Summa. I just don’t know where to start.”

Hermi reached out and squeezed his hand, “Don’t get too despondent, Harry. You’ll do it, I know
you will – and don’t forget you’ve got the rings to help you.”


Harry gazed deeply into Hermione’s eyes, and felt a wave of great affection come over him.
‘What’s that?’ he thought to himself, ‘Hermi’s so .. so...’

He mentally shook himself and squeezed her hand in return, “I know, Hermi. And I know that
you’ll be there for me, all three of you. I want you to know that when I find my Anima Summa, it
won’t affect the way I feel about you – all of you.”

Hermione was immediately reminded of the earlier thoughts she’d had on the trip back to
Carcassonne, and she retrieved her hand slowly as she felt tears start to sting her eyes. Here was
the boy she loved, holding her hand and speaking to her about friendship, and all she wanted to do
was fling her arms around his neck and kiss him to death.

“I .. I’ve got to go to the bathroom,” she finally whispered and then got up and walked quickly
back to the cabin.

“What’s wrong with Hermi?” Harry asked.

Ginny, of course, knew what was wrong with Hermione, “I think it’s just the reaction of what
happened today.” She stood up and followed her friend into the gite, hoping that she’d be able to
console her.

***

The next morning, Hermione, Harry and Ron sat at the table in the kitchen finishing their
breakfast. Ginny had already finished and had gone into the garden and slipped into the copse of
trees at the back. She had a glint of determination in her eye as she waved at everyone, looking
around for her brother.

Ginny made a beeline for Charlie, when she spotted him in the tent, and dragged him over to a
quiet spot at the edge of the little grove of trees.

“You had a bit of a shock yesterday, Charlie – you know, when you saw the cut on Nadine’s head.
I’ve never seen you so worried.”

“Well, I thought she might have been badly hurt, Ginny. I felt bad enough about dragging her
into all this danger, and it would have been my fault if anything …” he trailed off looking worried
at what might have happened.

“Oh, I see. So you feel very protective of her?”

“Well, yes – as I said, if it wasn’t for me, she wouldn’t have been placed in danger.”

“And that’s all? You’re concern has nothing to do with the way you feel about her?”

“What do you mean, Ginny?”

“Oh, I think, Charlie, that she’s spotted what I could see the last few days we were
together.”

Charlie turned as he heard the voice behind him, “Demont! How on earth did you get here?”

Demont Blanc grinned, “Nadine left a message with one of the French aurors yesterday - Giles is
a very good friend of mine. He told me where you were and a good spot where I could Apparate.” He
paused and looked at the pretty red-haired girl, “And this must be your sister – there’s no
mistaking that colouring.”

Charlie snapped out of his surprise, “Sorry. Demont – this is Ginny, my scheming little sister.
Ginny, this is Nadine’s scheming big brother, Demont. Come on, I’ll introduce you to the
others.”

As the three walked back to the clearing in the middle of the grove, Ginny leaned over and
whispered in Demont’s ear, “So you’ve seen it too?”

“Yes,” he whispered back, “I think we need to get our heads together later, don’t you
think?”

Ginny grinned and nodded, glad that she was going to get some help in her quest to get Nadine
and Charlie together.

After the introductions were over, they all sat drinking coffee. Nadine sat next to her brother,
her arm looped through his. Sirius told Demont what had happened the previous day and that the
quest was now over.

“Yes – it all fits now,” said Demont, “just before I came here, I had a report that the
creatures seem to be back to normal. Have you been able to detect any emanations lately,
Nadine?”

Nadine looked surprised, “Well, in all the excitement, I didn’t check. Hang on a minute.” She
closed her eyes and let her mind reach out, trying to pick up on the vibrations. “No. There’s
nothing! They’ve stopped.”

“Just as I thought,” said Demont, “Well, Charlie. I suppose this means that your job is
finished. I suppose you’ll be going home now?”

“Oh no, Demont. Not yet,” Charlie’s panic was obvious to everyone, “I mean, we’ve still got to
monitor the dragons for a while to make sure they’re back to normal. And we’ll have loads and loads
of reports to write for both our ministries.”

“Oh, of course. How could I have neglected to think of that?” Demont stole a sly glance at Ginny
and they both grinned at each other.

Any further banter was interrupted as Harry, Ron and Hermione walked into the clearing. “That’s
where you are,” Ron said as he looked at his sister, “We’ve been looking for you for ages.”

“Ah – this must be your brother, Charlie. I don’t think I’ve ever seen three red-headed people
together in one place before.”

Nadine did the introductions, and they all sat down together, waiting for a fresh brew of
coffee. Ginny went back on the offensive as she looked at Nadine, “So, Nadine, what are you going
to be doing now that the problem with the magical creatures is over?”

Nadine thought for a moment and then looked slyly at her brother, “I suppose I’ll have to
contribute to the reports that need to be written. After all, I have been closely involved with the
work.”

Charlie had a huge grin on his face as he responded, “Well of course – you need to document how
we traced the path of the vibrations – and for a while, you’ll still need to check that they don’t
recur.”

“I must say,” Demont suddenly exclaimed looking at Ginny, seemingly changing the subject, “this
is a very pleasant spot here. I think I’ll have a look around.”

“I’ll show you around, Demont,” said Ginny as she got up and caught hold of his arm, “there’s a
great view of the city just over here.”

As they walked, they conspired unashamedly, “I had a good heart-to-heart with your sister the
other night,” said Ginny, “She likes Charlie a lot. But she seems a bit reluctant to start
anything. She feels that Charlie has got to make the first move – but she doesn’t know if he’s
ready yet.”

“And what does Charlie think?”

“Oh he likes Nadine – he likes her a lot. But he feels that she may not want to start anything
because of her recent bad experience. It’s so frustrating, Demont. I can see how they feel about
each other so why can’t they?”

“Ah - matters of the heart are so delicate, Ginny. But I’m elated. All they need is time – time
to realise what we can both see as plain as the nose on our faces. And I think I can give them the
time they need. After all, this report is going to be very complicated and it’s going to take ages
to get it all done.”

Ginny grinned, “What have you got in mind?”

“Well, I’ll have to write the bulk of the report, but Charlie and Nadine both need to do a fair
bit of field work together to confirm that all is now well. Just leave it to me Ginny.”

Ginny hugged Demont, “See you at the wedding, then?”

As they walked back to the clearing, they were greeted by the wonderful aroma of freshly brewed
coffee, Ceri just pouring the eleventh and last mug, “Ah, just in time,” she said looking towards
Demont and Ginny, “Come on – sit down and taste the delights of my special brew.”

“So,” said Demont a little later, “What are you all going to do now?”

“We’ve got today and tomorrow,” said Sirius, “then it’s back to Hogwarts. What are you kids
going to do until then?”

“We’ll just laze around today, but Mum and Dad’s got a trip to Toulouse planned for tomorrow.
It’s about sixty miles North-West of here,” Hermione answered, “We really should get down to some
work before the term starts, maybe we’ll do some this afternoon?” she looked at Ron and Harry, who
groaned, anticipating an afternoon of bullying by their determined friend.

The adults laughed and then Demont sighed, “Well, Charlie, Nadine – we’d better get a move on.
We’ve got a long drive back to the cabin, and I’m being pressured to get an interim report done for
the ministry.”

The three said their goodbyes and then walked over to the Land Rover. As they got in, Ginny
kissed Nadine on the cheek and whispered, “Don’t let him off the hook.” The French girl laughed and
waved at Ginny as she slowly drove onto the track leading onto the main North-South road.

“I’ll miss them,” Hermione said as she chatted to Ceri a little later, “they’re great fun to be
with.”

“Yes, I’ll miss them too,” Ceri replied. Then she looked closely at the girl sitting beside her,
seeing and feeling the sadness, “What about you, Hermione - how are you coping with .. things?”

She looked at Ceri, and she felt her eyes begin to water, “I don’t know, Ceri. Sometimes I think
I’ve got it sorted. But then I think about the time, which won’t be far away now, when I’ll have to
see Harry with his Anima Summa. I .. I… don’t know if I’ll be able to cope, Ceri. Oh, why couldn’t
things have been different?”

Ceri reached out and held Hermione as she sobbed despairingly into her shoulder. She felt really
bad for this lovely girl, but knew that there was nothing she could do to help with her pain.

***

Early on the morning of 9th April, Professor Dumbledore warmly greeted the travellers
shortly after they appeared outside the main doors of the castle. He saw the strain etched on all
their faces, and knew that the quest had been difficult.

“There’s a hearty breakfast waiting for you in the Great Hall,” he said, “the rest of the
students and teachers won’t be arriving till this afternoon, so we’ll have the place to ourselves.
I’m looking forward to your report.”

As they all walked into the school towards the Great Hall, Harry hung back and beckoned to the
headmaster. “Professor, we have to see you alone to give you the full report – some of it is for
your ears only.”

Dumbledore looked quizzically at Harry, “All right, Harry. Come up to my office after
breakfast.”

A little while later, Dumbledore sat behind the desk in his office looking at the four friends,
“Well, you certainly had a very harrowing experience in the labyrinth, and I want you to know how
proud I am of all of you. You showed great courage to find the secret of Rhedae – and I suppose
that is what this little meeting is about. Only I can be told the nature of that secret, am I
right?”

“Yes Professor,” said Harry, “He told us that only you were to know what it is.”

“He?”

Hermione cleared her throat, “Yes, Professor. The secret of Rhedae is the spirit of Jesus
Christ. He told us that you are a much-beloved servant of the light and you were to be told the
secret. He also told us that we are to seek your advice in the times ahead.”

“Jesus?” whispered Dumbledore, “You talked to Jesus?”

“Yes sir,” answered Hermione, “He told us that he is one of three guardians of ancient wizarding
knowledge, and Harry, his Anima Summa, and the three of us are to seek them out. Only then will
Harry be able to tackle the Dark Side. He put some of this ancient knowledge in Harry’s brain, but
he won’t be able to access it until he joins with his Anima Summa.”

“I see,” said Dumbledore, tugging his beard. His eyes had a far-away look. “I had no idea that
these repositories of ancient wisdom existed.”

“Professor?”

Dumbledore shook himself back to the present and looked at Harry, “Yes Harry?”

“Before we can start on these quests, I have to find my Anima Summa. Jesus told us that she was
born three months after me. Can you help me find her? I mean, you have all the student records and
their dates of birth, haven’t you?”

“Yes I do, Harry. But I don’t think I can help. Jesus probably told you that no one must help
you with this task – it would dilute your powers and could affect the outcome of the struggle
against the Dark Side. I can tell you that there are several students at Hogwarts with birthdays on
or around 31st October – and don’t forget that your Anima Summa was *conceived* 3
months after you, so she may have been born a little before, on or a little after that date. No
Harry – I don’t think that looking at the student records is going to help you. The only clear help
you have was given to you by Jesus – the rings. The best advice I can give, and I know it’s not
easy for you, is that you try not to force the issue. Wait for the rings to guide you.”

The headmaster smiled at the crest-fallen look on Harry’s face and continued, his voice calm and
reassuring, “Believe me, Harry, you will find your Anima Summa – don’t doubt that. It has been
pre-ordained. So just try to relax and let this take it’s course.”

“I .. I’ll try, Professor. But it’s like sitting on a time bomb.”

“I can imagine what you’re going through, Harry,” a twinkle came into Dumbledore’s eyes and his
mouth curved into a wicked smile, “But rest assured, your fuse will be lit – just don’t go around
with a box of matches in your hand. You may get burned.”

Hermione, Ron and Ginny couldn’t suppress their laughter at the professor’s attempt to lighten
Harry’s burden – but Harry couldn’t laugh.

***

The students and teachers began arriving back at the school that afternoon, and the school lost
its unnatural silence as it was filled with the excited chatter of friends relating what they had
done over the holiday.

Kristen arrived a little after the other students, appearing by Portkey outside the main doors.
She looked around and spotted Harry and her other three friends walking down by the lake. She
quickly walked towards them and called out, “Hey – I’m back. Wait for me.”

She reached up and kissed Harry on the lips in greeting. Harry instinctively reached into his
cloak pocket and felt the rings – but there was no reaction. Kristen frowned as she saw the
disappointed look on Harry’s face, “What’s the matter, Harry. Aren’t you glad to see me?”

“Uh, sorry Kristen – no – I mean, of course I’m glad to see you. How was your holiday?”

“Ok, I guess,” she replied. She looked at Harry with narrowed eyes. She knew there was something
wrong with their relationship – it wasn’t as it had been when they first started going out
together. She looked at Hermione wondering if it was she that Harry really liked.

Her thoughts were pushed to the back of her mind as Ginny looped her arm through hers and pulled
her along by the side of the lake, “We had a great time in France, Kristen – let me tell you what
Ron did in Carcassonne.”

As the other three followed behind, Hermione punched Harry’s arm, “Is that any way to greet your
girlfriend, Harry? She must be feeling awful!”

Harry had a pained look on his face as he whispered his reply, “I’m sorry, Hermi – I held the
rings but I couldn’t get a reaction – nothing”

“Harry, you know that the rings will only react when they feel you are ready to meet your Anima
Summa. It doesn’t mean that Kristen is or isn’t the one – you’ve just got to be patient.”

“Come on, Harry,” said Ron, “you know Hermi’s right. If you’re not careful you’re going to lose
Kristen.”

Early the following morning, just as the dawn was breaking, Harry woke from a restless sleep. He
had found it difficult to get to sleep last night – he just couldn’t get the thoughts of finding
his Anima Summa out of his head. He knew that the advice given by Dumbledore and his friends was
right, but he just couldn’t feel relaxed about it at all – after all, it was his whole future that
was in the balance.

He tried to get back to sleep, but his thoughts, together with the loud snores of Neville,
defeated his best efforts. He sighed in resignation, got out of bed, and started to dress.
Suddenly, his head jerked up, and he stared at the window. He didn’t know what had caught his
attention, but he had an irresistible urge to look out of the window.

He got up and walked to the window. He looked down at the grounds, which were now bathed in that
special quality early-dawn diffused light, searching for something. He didn’t know what he was
looking for, only that there was something there that was tugging at the far reaches of his
mind.

He caught a slight movement by the side of a tree at the edge of the lake and he stared
intently. Then he saw her, as she stepped in front of the tree and looked up at his window.

She was a beautiful young girl, about his own age. She had long white hair, and as the sun
peeked out from behind a cloud low down on the horizon and shone on her, he could see that she had
the most striking vivid green eyes. Their eyes locked together and Harry could see a look of
recognition in her face. She raised her arm and slowly waved a greeting, smiling. Harry didn’t
know, of course, that it was the same girl that had watched him from her bedroom window in
Rennes-le-Chateau.

Harry quickly waved back and rushed over to his bed to put on his cloak. He sprinted down to the
common room, taking three steps at a time down the spiral staircase, and dashed out through the
portrait hole. His breathing was heavy as he opened the main doors of the school and ran quickly
down to the lake.

As he approached the tree, he could see no sign of the girl. He turned and looked all around the
grounds, but there was no sign of her. He slapped the side of his leg in frustration, still turning
and looking in all directions. It was as if she had never been there.

“Who was that?” he asked himself aloud, “I feel as if I should know her – but I don’t think I’ve
ever seen her before. Could she be …?” Harry pushed his hand into his cloak pocket and held the
rings – which were as inert as they always were.

Again he slapped his leg in frustration and slowly walked back up to the school.

***

“AAAaaaarrrrgggghhhh”

The horrible sound tailed off to an agonised gurgle as Lord Voldemort lifted his wand, ending
the Cruciatus curse. He looked at the pathetic bundle lying in front of him with disdain and pushed
him over with his foot so that he could look into his victim’s face.

“I told you what would happen if you failed, Wormtail. Feel the wrath of your master.” Again,
Voldemort pointed his wand at Wormtail and yelled “*CRUCIO*.”

Wormtail convulsed and let out a shriek of agony as the fire coursed through his nervous system.
A full minute passed before the Dark Lord lifted the curse.

“Give me one good reason why I shouldn’t kill you now. Prepare to die.”

Wormtail’s eyes bulged as he saw Voldemort once again point his wand at him. He lifted his arm
as if to ward off the killing curse that he knew would soon strike him, and thought desperately,
trying to think of a way to save his life.

“No, wait master, please wait. I can still find out what you want to know.”

Voldemort scowled, still keeping his wand trained on the slobbering Wormtail, but didn’t let
loose the curse that would end his miserable existence. “Well, Wormtail. I won’t wait for much
longer. Tell me, quickly.”

“Remus Lupin – he was with Potter’s protectors in France. So he must know what it is they were
looking for, and he’ll probably know about what this Anima Summa thing is.”

“So? He’ll be at Hogwarts protected by Dumbledore, so he’s out of our reach. Tell me something
useful Wormtail, or you die now.”

“No master, please. Wait. I know how to get hold of Lupin.” Wormtail cowered before Voldemort,
his arm still raised to ward off the unstoppable curse.

“Don’t try my patience, Wormtail. Tell me what you know now.”

“Lupin is a werewolf – and I know where he hides out when he transforms – it’s away from
Hogwarts. The full moon is tomorrow night, and if you let me take five Death Eaters with me, I can
capture him and bring him to you.”

Voldemort thought for a moment, and then, “All right, Wormtail. This is your last chance. Bring
him to me tomorrow night at the Callanish stone circle. And Wormtail – if you fail me this time, I
won’t give you a chance to talk your way out of your death. Do I make myself perfectly clear?”

“Yes, my Lord. I won’t fail you this time.”

“Take Travis with you, and tell him that the same fate awaits him if you fail.”

***

Remus Lupin arrived at the shrieking shack early the following evening, before the last light of
day left the sky. He wanted to make sure that he wouldn’t be caught outside when the first rays of
the full moon fell. He was content that he would be able to come through his ordeal without too
much trouble, with the help of Snape’s serum and the comfort of Padfoot’s presence.

He looked at his watch and thought, ‘Hmm, Sirius should be here in about half an hour. I’d
better make sure that all the doors and windows are bolted shut.’

He went to the main entrance and pulled the heavy steel bolt firmly across. Then he walked
towards the next room. As he walked through the door, he felt that he was not alone. He sensed,
more than saw, the Death Eaters hiding in the shadows. He turned to run back out of the room but
was jumped on by three of the Death Eaters, who quickly threw him to the floor and held him. He
looked up and saw Wormtail and two others walk over towards him, smiling.

“Ah, nice of you to turn up, Moony,” said Wormtail, “We’ve come to take you to a little
meeting.”

Although restrained by the three big Death Eaters, Remus managed to trace with his extended
finger, unnoticed by his captors, a few letters in the dust by the side of the door. He wrote
‘WORMT” before he was hit by a stupefy curse. He knew nothing more until he regained consciousness
at the stone circle of Callanish. He was thrown into a shallow hole at the side of the megaliths,
and covered with a heavy fallen capstone. There in that confined space he would be forced to stay
until his ordeal as a werewolf ended and he was ready to be interrogated.

“Moony … Moony?”

Sirius had arrived at the shrieking shack and was puzzled that Remus was not in the room they
normally stayed in. He walked from room to room, trying to find his friend. By this time it was
starting to get dark, and he needed his raised illuminated wand to find his way about.

As he entered the room to the side of the main entrance hallway, he could see that there was
something amiss. Several chairs were overturned and there were signs of a struggle where the dust
had been disturbed. “Oh lord ..” he said to himself as he looked about the room for any clues of
what had happened.

Shaking his head, he turned and walked back to the door, when he spotted the letters scribbled
in the dust to the side. “W. O. R. M. T.” he spelled out.

“Wormtail!” he breathed with anger. He quickly retraced his steps to the tunnel entrance that
would take him back to Hogwarts.

***

“Yes, I know it looks as if he was captured by Wormtail, but where would he have been taken?”
said Ceri.

Ceri, Sirius, McGonagall, Snape and Dumbledore sat around the headmaster’s desk in his
office.

“It could be anywhere,” said Snape, “’You Know Who’s secret cave, any one of a number of sites
they use to hold their secret meetings, or anywhere in between.”

“I know, but we’ve got to do something,” said Sirius. “Wormtail will take him straight to ‘You
Know Who’ and there won’t be much left after he’s finished with him”

“Why do you think they went after Remus?” asked McGonagall.

“Oh that’s pretty obvious, Minerva,” said Dumbledore, “Wormtail saw him in France with the
others so he’s quite aware that Remus knows everything about what’s been going on with Harry.
Voldemort is after information – and I fear that he’ll get it. Oh, Remus won’t give it to him
voluntarily, even under torture, but he won’t be able to resist Veritaserum.”

“Then we’ve got to rescue him before he can be made to talk,” said Sirius.

“We can only do our best, Sirius,” said Dumbledore, “I think the best plan is to Apparate to the
sites where they hold their meetings and look at each of those. Severus, have you any idea where
Voldemort’s cave is?”

“No, Headmaster. Only the chosen few have ever been there, and I’m not one of those any
longer.”

“So we’ll just have to hope that he isn’t taken there,” said Ceri.

“Sirius, Severus,” said Dumbledore, “You two make up a list of the known sites where he may be
held. We’ll be able to cover more ground if we split into three teams of two - Sirius and Ceri,
Severus and Flitwick, Minerva and myself. I’ll go to brief Professor Flitwick while you make up the
list, then we can get started – there’s no time to lose if we’re to get Remus back in one piece.
Oh, and make sure that Harry and his friends don’t find out about this – you know what they’re like
and I don’t want to have to go looking for them as well as Remus.”

About half an hour later, they all met up again in the headmaster’s office, this time joined by
Professor Flitwick.

“Right, let’s see that list,” said Dumbledore.

McGonagall let out a gasp as she saw the list, “There’s over forty places here, ranging from the
Scottish islands to the Channel isles. It’ll take ages to check them all, even if we split them
three ways.”

“It’s the only chance we’ve got, Minerva,” said Dumbledore, “Sirius, you and Ceri take the ones
that that you’ve been to recently – you know their lay-out better than us. We’ll use the shrieking
shack as a base – we’ll meet back there after each site has been checked; we don’t want to go
charging all around the country if one of us finds him quickly.”

“Come on then, let’s get going,” said Sirius, “It’ll be dawn in an hour, and they’ll start to
question Remus as soon as he changes back from his werewolf form.”

***

The sun cast an eerie glow over the sinister standing stone circle at Callanish. At the centre
of the circle, a wooden wrack had been erected, with ties at each corner, and around it stood
Wormtail, Travis and the four Death Eaters who had captured Remus. All six of them dropped to one
knee as the Dark Lord Apparated in front of them.

“So, you’ve managed to do something right at last, Wormtail. Fetch him out and tie him to the
wrack – let’s see if he’ll talk.”

Four of the Death Eaters lifted the capstone from Remus’ makeshift dungeon and dragged him to
the centre of the circle where he was roughly tied into the wooden frame. They then stood back to
allow Voldemort to approach him.

“So, you are Remus Lupin – one of Potter’s protectors?” hissed Voldemort.

Remus looked at the deadly form in front of him and suppressed a shudder. He breathed deeply and
whispered, “Go to hell, Voldemort. You won’t get anything out of me.”

“Oh won’t I? Brave words, Lupin, but a bit misguided I fear. You don’t know the agony I can
inflict on you. So why don’t you answer my questions and save yourself a lot of pain. Now, what did
you find in Rennes-le-Chateau?”

“Nothing. We didn’t find anything – it was a wild-goose chase.”

“What is the Anima Summa?”

Remus’ eyes opened a bit wider in surprise, but quickly covered it up, “The what? I’ve never
heard of it.”

Voldemort’s jaw set in anger as he lifted his wand and pointed it at Remus. “*CRUCIO*,” he
roared.

Remus stretched taut as the curse hit him, sending rivers of agony through his body. After
twenty seconds, Voldemort lifted the curse, allowing Remus to sag back onto the torture wrack.

“That’s just a mild sample of what I can dish out, Lupin. And I can keep this up as long as I
like, always making sure that death wont release you from your suffering. Now let’s start again.
What did you find in France?”

Remus gritted his teeth and whispered, “One or two pretty French ladies, but not much else.”

“*CRUCIO*”

And Remus’ agony continued as the sun made its way towards its zenith.

***

Back at the shrieking shack, Sirius and Ceri walked in to join the other four who were waiting
for them.

“Anything?” asked Dumbledore.

“Nothing,” said Ceri. That’s the fifth site we’ve been to and no sign of activity.”

“All right,” said Dumbledore, “lets go to the next ones on our list. See you all back here in
about half an hour”

***

“Lupin, why don’t you be reasonable. Why submit yourself to this torture? All you have to do is
answer two simple questions, then you can go.”

“Don’t make me laugh, Voldemort,” said Remus through tight lips. His body was covered with sweat
and his face was haggard. “If I tell you what you want to know, you’ll kill me five seconds later.
So go to hell.”

Voldemort let out an impatient snort and walked over to Wormtail. “Have you contacted Lucius?”
he whispered.

“Yes, my Lord. He should be here with the Veritaserum in a few minutes.”

“Good. In the mean time, go and tell Travis and the others to break a few of his bones. Perhaps
that will loosen his tongue.”

Prompted by Wormtail, Travis and the largest of the other Death Eaters stepped up each side of
Remus and took hold of each of his hands. They looked towards Voldemort, waiting for a signal.

“Lupin. Once more – are you going to answer my questions?”

“No”

Voldemort nodded, and the two Death Eaters caught hold of Remus’ middle fingers and bent them
back at an impossible angle, until a distinct snapping noise could be heard. Remus screamed in
agony and blood dribbled down his chin as his teeth inadvertently bit into his tongue.

“Will you answer my questions?”

“No. Never,” groaned Remus.

Two more fingers were broken and Remus sagged, unconscious, onto the torture wrack.

A few moments later, a black-hooded Lucius Malfoy Apparated into the stone circle, holding a
vial of brownish liquid in his right hand.

“Ah, Lucius – you’ve brought the Veritaserum. Good. Travis – revive him.”

At that moment, Sirius and Ceri Apparated to a spot several hundred yards from the stone circle.
They immediately saw the activity and quickly ducked behind a large monolith.

Travis splashed cold water on Remus’ face to bring him back to a spluttering, barely conscious
state. Malfoy walked over to the wrack and gestured for Travis to hold Remus’ head and force open
his mouth, which he did with little resistance. Malfoy held the vial above the open mouth and let a
few drops fall onto Remus’ tongue.

“Right, my lord, just wait a few minutes for the Veritaserum to take effect.”

“Thank you, Lucius,” said Voldemort as he stood impatiently in front of Remus.

Sirius had an agonised expression on his face as he whispered, “What are those devils doing to
Remus?”

“Keep calm, Sirius,” said Ceri, “we’re badly outnumbered, and ‘You Know Who’ is here as well. If
we go charging in now, we wouldn’t stand a chance, and we’d be no help to Remus.”

“Yes, I know you’re right, Ceri. But I don’t think we’ll have time to go back to the shrieking
shack and wait for the others. We’ve got to do something now, or Remus is finished.”

“All right. Let’s try to get closer. I saw that Death Eater put something into Remus’ mouth. I
think they’ve given him Veritaserum to make him talk.”

They transformed into their Animagus forms and slowly and stealthily crept to the spot where
they’d remained hidden the last time they’d visited the site, where they had a clear view and could
hear what was being said.

“Right, Lupin,” said Voldemort, ”let’s see if your tongue is any looser now, shall we?”

Voldemort roughly caught hold of Remus’ hair and jerked his head back so that he was looking
directly into his eyes. “What did Potter and his friends find in Rennes-le-Chateau?”

From the look on his face, Sirius and Ceri could see that Remus was trying to fight the serum,
but inevitably had to give in. His voice had a dull quality as he told Voldemort what he wanted to
hear.

“They went through a labyrinth underneath the church and found a secret chamber. They were told
that this was one of three quests to find the ancient knowledge which will help to defeat the Dark
Side.”

“And did Potter find any knowledge there?”

“Yes. It’s in his subconscious, but he can’t access it yet.”

“When will he be able to access it?”

“When he joins with his Anima Summa”

“Ah – the Anima Summa. Who or what is it?”

“Harry is the Anima Summa – a servant of the Light ordained to fight the Dark side.”

“If Potter is the Anima Summa, there must be another one as well if he has to join with it – am
I right?”

“Yes – there is a girl who is his Anima Summa.”

“Who is she?”

“I don’t know. No-one knows yet, not even Harry. He hasn’t found her yet.”

“Is she one of the girls at Hogwarts?”

“I don’t know.”

Voldemort released his grip on Remus and turned back to his followers, “We wont get any more out
of him – he’s told me what I wanted to know. I must return to my cave to think about what I’ve
heard and to determine our next actions. One thing I do know – Potter has to be stopped before our
greater plans for world domination can proceed.”

He turned to Lucius Malfoy, “Contact the inner circle – I want you at my cave in two days time
to discuss the plans I will have ready by then. And tell our friend at the school to keep a close
eye on Potter. I want to know everything he does and which girls he gets friendly with. Wormtail,
leave two of my servants here to tidy up this mess and then follow me back to the cave.”

With that Voldemort disappeared, shortly followed by Malfoy.

Wormtail gestured to two of the Death Eaters, “You two stay here. You know what to do. Make sure
that no sign remains of what went on. Travis and you others, come on – let’s get back to the
cave.”

After their partners in crime had disappeared, the two Death Eaters faced each other.

“Are you going to kill him or do you want me to do it?” said one nonchalantly.

“I’ll do it,” said the other leering at Remus who was now struggling futilely with his
restraints, “Watch and learn.”

He lifted his wand and pointed it at Remus’ head.

“*AVADA K*..” that was as far as he got with the killing curse before a heavy weight struck
his back and sent him sprawling onto the ground.

“What the ..” he shouted as he turned over to see the full set of Padfoot’s fangs slobbering
just an inch from his throat. His eyes widened and he froze with fear, unable to move a muscle.

The other Death Eater had only moments to witness the action before he fell to the ground
unconscious, stupefied by Ceri. She walked over and took the other Death Eater’s wand from his
trembling hand before Padfoot transformed and rushed over to the torture frame. She then put him in
a full body bind.

“Remus,” he said with compassion in his voice, “are you all right? What have they done to you?”
He looked at Remus’ hands and felt a wrench in his stomach as he saw four of his fingers bent back
at impossible angles.

“Sirius! Thank god. I thought I was done for. How did you find me?”

“Later, Remus. Let’s get you down from that thing”

As Sirius untied his friend and gently helped him to sit on the ground, Remus let out an
agonised sob, “Sirius, Ceri – I told them about Harry and his Anima Summa. I told ‘You Know Who’
everything.”

“Don’t blame yourself, Remus,” whispered Ceri, “We saw them give you Veritaserum. There was
nothing you could have done.”

“Come on,” said Sirius, “we’ll take you back to the shrieking shack with these two plonkers. The
others will be waiting for us and we can get you to Madam Pomfrey to sort out those hands.”

As they prepared to Apparate, Sirius turned to the torture wrack and lifted his wand.

“*EFFLIGO*” he roared, and a bright red light shot from his wand and hit the wooden frame.
It shimmered and then disappeared, leaving only a few wisps of white ash that drifted slowly to the
ground.

“At least they won’t be able to use that anymore,” he said bitterly. Then they Apparated back to
the shrieking shack, taking the Death Eaters with them.

***

“How is poor Remus now?” asked McGonagall.

“Madam Pomfrey wants to keep him in the hospital for a day or two,” said Sirius, “She’s sorted
out his hands, but it seems that he took quite a lot of the Cruciatus curse from ‘You Know Who’ as
well.”

They were sitting around Dumbledore’s desk and Sirius and Ceri had just finished giving their
report on the events at Callanish.

“So now ‘You Know Who’ knows everything,” said Snape gloomily.

“Don’t blame Remus,” said Dumbledore, “You, above all others Severus, know the power of
Veritaserum. And in any case, I suppose it was inevitable that he’d find out. He knew that
something was going on, and Voldemort would leave no stone unturned until he unearthed the
truth.”

“Yes, I suppose your right, Headmaster,” said McGonagall, “but now that he knows, he’ll try
anything he can to prevent Harry getting his full Anima Summa powers. Those poor kids are in even
more danger now.”

“I’m afraid your right, Minerva,” said Dumbledore, “We’ll just have to be doubly vigilant and
keep a very close eye on them. I’ll see Harry and the other three after this meeting and tell them
what’s happened. I don’t think there’s anything to be gained in keeping them in the dark about it.
And it may just serve to stop them going on any of their clandestine excursions beyond the school
grounds.”

“What do you think ‘You Know Who’ will do, Headmaster?” asked Sirius.

“There are a number of things he may try, but I don’t think he’ll attempt a mass attack on the
school – he’d be foolish to try that. But just in case, we’d better check and strengthen the school
defences.”

“Don’t forget the spy that’s in Hogwarts,” said Ceri, “He or she may try to kill Harry – it
would be a simple matter to slip poison in his food or drink.”

“I don’t think so, Ceri,” said Dumbledore, “I think that Voldemort will want to capture Harry
alive.”

“How can you be so sure about that, Headmaster?” asked McGonagall.

“When he killed Harry’s parents, and then tried to kill Harry, Voldemort inadvertently
transferred some of his powers to Harry – how else would Harry be a Parselmouth? Voldemort will
want to get those powers back, and not only those powers. Don’t forget, he now knows that there is
ancient knowledge and spells buried in Harry’s subconscious. He’ll certainly want to take those for
himself. There are certain spells and procedures available to Dark Arts practitioners that may just
achieve that transfer of knowledge and power.”

“Perhaps he’ll try to lure Harry outside the protection of Hogwarts – like he did when he
captured Harry’s Muggle friend, Lara,” said McGonagall.

“That’s a possibility, Minerva,” replied Dumbledore, “We are just going to have to keep a close
watch on Harry and all his friends – a very tight watch.”

Dumbledore looked at the others and tried to lighten the grim mood that had settled on them,
“There is one good thing that’s come out of this, of course. Voldemort has had to put his plans on
hold, so we can concentrate our efforts on protecting Harry and the others – that’s our full-time
job now, especially Sirius, Ceri and Remus when he’s fit again. I only hope that Harry finds his
Anima Summa sooner rather than later – at least then they’ll have the powers from the first quest
at their disposal.”

“What do you think those powers will be, Professor?” asked Ceri.

“I don’t know, Ceri. They haven’t been used since Merlin’s time, and that’s a long time ago. I
can’t even guess what they’ll be. But neither can Voldemort – he may just be in for the biggest
surprise of his evil life.”

Author’s Notes (2) : Don’t forget to review – I really do need to know what you think about this
fic, even if it’s only a one-worder (from rubbish to brilliant and all points in between). Grateful
thanks to those who have reviewed so far – it’s appreciated, especially informed criticism – it’s
the best way for a writer to improve.

Here’s a link to my photo album with 4 images that are relevant to this chapter – Feel free to
have a look at them, and in return please tell me what you think about this fic. The images show
:

Carcassonne – from the copse

Graveyard – part of, where the fight took place

Rennes-le-Chateau

Villa Bethania

uk.photos.yahoo.com/bc/animasumma/lst?&.dir=/Secret+of+Rhedae&.src=ph&.view=t

Cut and paste into your browser, than type http:// in front of it.

Watch out for Chapter 11 – The Anima Summa. Coming soon. – It’s the one you’ve been waiting for!
Harry meets his Anima Summa!



13. The Anima Summa
-------------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 14 1871 2003-01-06T13:03:00Z 2003-07-17T11:25:00Z 23 11719 66802 556 133
82037 9.2720 Chapter 11 The Anima Summa

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Notes :**

Don’t forget to review – I need to know what you think about the story so that I can
include/exclude the sort of things you like/dislike in future works. Many thanks to those of you
who’ve reviewed up to now. A couple of points on the review board :

Third-person point of view – You’re absolutely right, Munkii. When I wrote the plot to this fic
(and to the two that follow) I saw that the story would benefit from several parallel and related
sub-plots in support of the main Harry-centric plot (eg Charlie and Nadine, Sirius and Ceri,
Dumbledore’s group, Voldy and his minions). The only way to get this over with any sort of clarity
was by using third-person perspective.

Jesus – Apologies if this has offended any of you, but there is a reason for his inclusion – I
give a full explanation in the extended author’s notes at the end of the epilogue (that’s after the
next chapter). Oh and Remus is one of my favourite characters too – I couldn’t do anything really
bad to him – just portray him as the heroic figure he undoubtedly is.

The next chapter – The Attack – will be up very soon.

Lord Voldemort was not in the best of moods as he sat in his cave in a very remote part of
Northern Scotland. His mood was so foul that Wormtail and Nagini cringed at the back of the cave,
in the darkest corner they could find, trying to be as inconspicuous as possible.

Voldemort had spent the best part of two days trying to work out how to get Harry out of
Hogwarts and into his clutches, but had not yet come up with a foolproof plan. He had sent some of
his Death Eaters to test out the magical defences surrounding the grounds at Hogwarts, and their
report had not been encouraging. No weaknesses could be found, and there were even some additional
protective spells in place compared to the last time they had done their checks.

“WORMTAIL!” he roared.

Wormtail jumped and scrambled over to the Dark Lord’s throne, where he grovelled at its
base.

“Go and signal the inner circle – they’re late. I will not be kept waiting.”

“Yes, my lord,” said Wormtail as he rushed out of the cave to activate the signalling device.
The inner circle was not late - they weren’t due to meet for another half hour, but it would have
taken a braver man than Wormtail to point this out to his master.

Within three minutes, all inner circle members had gathered outside the cave. “Why have we been
summoned early, Wormtail?” asked Lucius Malfoy.

“Don’t ask,” Wormtail shuddered. “I haven’t seen him in this bad a mood for a very long time.
Come on, we’d better get in there quick.”

Everyone had gone pale at Wormtail’s words and wondered who would have to take the brunt of
Voldemort’s wrath if the meeting didn’t go well. They all trouped cautiously into the cave, and
approached the dark figure at the centre with trepidation. The dancing light from the flaming
torches on the wall reflected off Voldemort’s smouldering, slitty red eyes as he watched them
approach the throne.

“I have thought hard and long, these past two days,” he said, “but I have not yet found a way to
get Potter into my clutches. What have *you* done? I want some answers, and I want them now.
Nott, what do you advise?”

Nott visibly paled as he felt that sinking feeling in the pit of his stomach.

“I … I … I’ve spent the last two days wracking my brains, my Lord. But I haven’t been able to
come up with anything acceptable yet.”

“Brains? What brains?” roared Voldemort, pointing his wand at the unfortunate Nott.
“*CRUCIO.*”

Nott fell to the floor and writhed about in agony, until Voldemort mercifully lifted the
curse.

“I hope the rest of you have done better than Nott. Lucius – what about you?”

“My Lord,” Lucius bowed his head. “Our friend at the school has told me that there has been
increased activity by the teachers around the perimeter of the school grounds. They have been
strengthening their defences, and Potter and his friends are being very closely watched. Whenever
they go outside the school building, someone keeps a close watch on them – they’ve even started
patrolling the edge of the Forbidden Forest whenever they go outside.”

“Hmm – that doesn’t help, Lucius. I know about the increased defences. Tell me something
positive.”

“Uh – there are two possibilities I can think of, my Lord.” Lucius paused, thinking quickly for
the second one - the first he’d already had up his sleeve when he found out about Voldemort’s evil
mood.

“Well. Don’t keep me waiting. Speak!”

“First, we can keep two Death Eaters permanently stationed in the Forbidden Forest. They can
keep a close eye on what goes on, and they can also be alert to Potter and his friends when they
come out into the grounds. A lot will depend on luck, but one of them may get close enough to be
snatched and brought here to you. It doesn’t matter who we snatch – Potter will come running if he
knows that one of his friends is in danger.”

“Hmm good, Lucius. Not brilliant, but at least it’s something. Arrange for our two best
followers to set up camp in the Forbidden Forest as soon as the meeting’s over. Now, what’s your
second plan?”

“Uh, it’s not so much a plan as a possibility for you to consider, my Lord. The Dementors – you
could use your influence to get them on our side. I’m sure they wouldn’t need much persuading if
you dangled the carrot of a few souls in front of them.”

“The Dementors – Hmm, I wonder,” Voldemort reflected. “I didn’t want to use them just yet, but
yes, I think you may have something there, Lucius. But we need to be very clever. I can’t afford to
take all of them from Azkaban – that would force the ministry to publicly admit my presence. But I
can take some of them. They might well be very useful as a diversionary tactic if we need to attack
the school directly. Yes, thank you Lucius. Good.”

“I only wish to serve you, my Lord.” Lucius grinned to himself. His quick thinking had once
again got him out of an awkward situation and gained points with the Dark Lord.

“What news from our friend at Hogwarts, Lucius? Any news on Potter’s Anima Summa?”

“I’m afraid not, my Lord. But I’m certain he hasn’t found her yet. Potter is still moping around
the school, looking despondent.”

“Right. I want you all to think about how we can attack Hogwarts. It may not come to it, but if
all else fails I want a plan in place. We will meet here in one week’s time. Now go.”

After the inner circle had left, Voldemort appeared in a slightly better mood. At least he now
had something to work at. “Wormtail – I’m going to Azkaban, and I want you with me. Come on.”

Wormtail cringed at the prospect of being anywhere near a Dementor, but he followed his master
out of the cave, ready to Apparate to a spot where Voldemort knew he’d be able to speak to one of
the evil creatures.

***

“What can I do, Ron? There has to be some way I can find my Anima Summa. I mean, it’s even more
urgent now that Voldemort knows about everything.”

“I know, Harry,” said Ron sympathetically, “but there’s nothing you can do - you heard what
Dumbledore said. You’ve just got to let things take their course. Knight to King 6.”

Harry and Ron were sitting in the Gryffindor common room playing wizarding chess, although their
minds were not really on the game.

“Do you think it’s Kristen?”

“I don’t know, Harry. There’s no way of telling. Only the rings can help.”

“But the rings are just dormant all the time. If she’s the one, surely they’d react in some
way?”

Ron could only look at his friend with sympathy. He, above all others, knew how mysterious girls
appeared to be.

“Well what about that strange girl I saw in the school grounds the other morning? What was she
doing there, and why was she looking up at our window? Perhaps she’s the one.”

“She may well be, Harry. But didn’t you say the rings didn’t react?”

“Yes, but that was after she’d gone. Maybe I have to be very close to her before they’ll
react.”

“What’ll react?” asked Ginny. She and Hermione had walked over to the two boys and just caught
the last bit of their conversation.

“Harry was wondering if he needs to be very close to his Anima Summa before he gets a reaction
from the rings. He thinks it may be that strange girl he told us about the other day.”

“Are you sure you’ve never seen her before, Harry?” asked Hermione.

“No – I’m sure. She’s so beautiful that once seen, never forgotten.”

Hermione felt the familiar pang of disappointment at Harry’s words. It seems that he’d been
smitten by that girl before he’d even spoken to her.

“I must say it’s strange that she just turns up in the school grounds, looks up at your window
and then disappears. Are you sure it wasn’t a dream?” asked Hermione.

“No, I’m sure. I just wish I knew how to get in contact with her. That’s the only way I’ll find
out if she’s the one.”

“Well, I’m at a complete loss on this,” said Ron. “All we can do is wait.”

“I think I’ll go and find Kristen,” said Harry suddenly. “I’ve just realised I don’t know when
her birthday is.”

“Oh lord,” whispered Ginny as Harry went through the portrait hole. She looked at the other two
with a glum expression on her face.

“Hey, Kristen, hang on,” Harry shouted as he spotted Kristen just about to go into the
library.

She turned and smiled as Harry approached. “Hi Harry, what’s up?”

“Kristen, I’ve only just realised something. I don’t know when your birthday is, and I wouldn’t
want to miss out on getting you a present.”

“Well that’s more than six months away. 31st October.”

Harry’s mouth dropped open. “Uh, you mean you were born on 31st October 1980?”

“Yes that’s right, Harry. But why are you acting so strange? There’s nothing special about
31st October is there – apart from Halloween that is?”

“Uh, no ... no. Uh, Kristen, would you like to come for a walk down by the lake?”

“I’ve got to get this Potions essay done by tomorrow … well ok, but just for a little
while.”

As they walked around the lake, Harry pulled Kristen over to a seat under one of the oak trees
that grew just back from the water’s edge. As they sat down, Harry turned towards her and put his
left hand behind her head, playing with her hair, while he put his right into his cloak pocket and
held the rings. Then he slowly pulled Kristen towards him and kissed her tenderly on the lips.

When they broke apart, Kristen’s eyes narrowed at the look of deep disappointment on Harry’s
face. The rings had not reacted in the slightest, and Harry couldn’t conceal how he felt.

“Well that’s great, Harry. You’ve just ruined a lovely moment. If that’s how you feel when you
kiss me, I don’t know why we’re still going out together.”

Kristen shot to her feet and run back up towards the school, tears running down her pretty
face.

“Kristen ... Kristen, I’m sorry. It’s not what you think,” shouted Harry. But Kristen continued
up to the school and rushed up to Gryffindor common room and straight into her dorm.

‘I’ve done it now,’ Harry thought to himself. ‘Why didn’t the rings do something? She was born
at exactly the right time to be the Anima Summa. I wonder if there’s something wrong with these
rings?’

Deep down, however, Harry knew that there was nothing wrong with the rings. He forced himself to
think about the way he felt about Kristen. He liked her, sure – he liked her a lot. But did he love
her? Is this the girl he wanted to spend the rest of his life with?

‘Perhaps not,’ he thought. ‘Oh why does everything have to be so complicated?’

As she ran up the spiral staircase to her dormitory, Ron, Hermione and Ginny couldn’t help but
see her.

“I was afraid of this,” said Ginny. “She looks very upset. I’ll go and talk to her.” Ginny
slowly made her way up to Kristen’s dorm trying to think what she could say to her.

She opened the door and saw Kristen sprawled on her bed, her head buried in her pillow.
“Kristen? What’s the matter?”

Kristen slowly turned around and sat on the edge of her bed. Tears were still running down her
face. “It’s Harry,” she said. “After he kissed me down by the lake, I couldn’t believe the look on
his face. He seemed so disappointed at me, just like he wondered why he’d bothered to kiss me in
the first place. I felt so hurt, Ginny. What have I done to deserve that?”

“Believe me, Kristen, it’s not your fault. I know dozens of boys who’d give their right arms to
go out with you.”

“Remember when we had that talk back at your birthday party? I’ve thought for some time that
Harry’s in love with somebody else – I’ve tried to ignore it, but after today I don’t think I can.
I think it’s best if we split up, Ginny - for both our sakes. I can’t take much more of this
torture, wondering when he’ll realise he loves somebody else.”

“Oh Kristen, I’m so sorry”

“I think it’s Hermione, Ginny. It’s the way he looks at her sometimes. I think it’ll be best if
I go and tell him now.”

“Wait Kristen. You can’t tell Harry you think he loves Hermione.” Ginny closed her eyes and
thought furiously for a few moments. Then she took a deep breath and told Kristen about the Anima
Summa and the coming conflict with the Dark Side. She felt she had no choice, and it was only fair
that she be told.

“So that’s why he was so interested in my birthday? It’s the right day for his Anima Summa. But
why do you think he was so disappointed?”

“Probably because he didn’t get a reaction from the rings, Kristen. I knew when he stormed out
of the common room to find you that he’d try to force things along.”

“So I can’t be the Anima Summa, then. When is Hermione’s birthday?”

“It’s in September, Kristen - too early for her to be the Anima Summa.”

“But I was so sure it was she he’s in love with.”

“He may well love her Kristen. I’m sure he loves you as well. And I know he loves me – even
though it’s only like a little sister. But being in love with someone and being the Anima Summa
don’t necessarily go hand in hand. Oh - when he finds the right one, he will love her – love her
above all others. Make no mistake about it. Look Kristen, it doesn’t mean that you’re not the Anima
Summa – it may just mean that the rings feel that Harry isn’t ready for her to be revealed
yet.”

“I don’t think so, Ginny. There’d be a lot more to his feelings for me if I were the one. I’ve
got no illusions about it. But at least I can understand why Harry reacted like he did this
afternoon. I still think it’s best if we split – I’m only in the way, anyway, and it’ll free up his
feelings and emotions for his search for the right girl.”

“Don’t say anything to him about who you think he’s in love with, Kristen. It’ll just confuse
him even more.”

“I won’t, Ginny. And don’t worry – I won’t say anything to a living soul about what we’ve just
spoken about.”

Ginny squeezed her friend’s hand, smiled at her, and went back down to the common room to tell
Ron and Hermione what had happened.

“I’ll give her a few minutes, and then I’ll go out and make sure Harry’s all right,” said Ron.
“I know how he’s going to feel.”

Harry was still sitting on the bench under the oak tree when Kristen slowly walked up to him. He
didn’t notice her approach – he was miles away in a world of his own, trying to make sense of
things.

“Harry?” she whispered.

Harry looked up, shaken from his reverie, and stood up. “Kristen. Look I’m sorry about earlier.
I didn’t mean to upset you.”

Kristen took his hand and pulled him back to the seat. “I know, Harry. Ginny told me everything
– about the Anima Summa. I know you were trying to get a reaction from those rings. There was
nothing was there?”

Harry looked surprised, wondering why Ginny had told Kristen about the Anima Summa. “No. I’m
sorry Kristen. When you told me your birthday, I was sure it was you.”

“It’s not me, Harry. I think we’d be a lot different together if I were the one. I ... I think
you love someone else, Harry. I’ve known for a while now, but I didn’t want to believe it. It’s
just a feeling I’ve had for some time.”

“But you’re wrong, Kristen. There isn’t anybody else. Why do you think that?”

“Just call it intuition, Harry.”

“But who do you think I’m in love with?”

“I ... I can’t tell you that Harry. And after what Ginny told me I’m not even sure myself
anymore. Look – I think it’d be best if we split up. Our relationship isn’t going anywhere and I’ll
only be in the way of you finding your Anima Summa. I like you a lot, Harry, but I’ve got to face
up to the fact that I’m going to lose you sooner or later.”

Harry though for a minute before he replied. “I’m so sorry Kristen. I never meant to hurt you in
any way. I’ve been so confused about things and I know I must have seemed distracted when we’re
together. I’m sorry.”

Kristen lifted her hand and held the side of Harry’s face for a moment as she looked wistfully
into his eyes – eyes that were full of remorse, mingled with hurt.

“We can still be friends, can’t we Harry?”

Harry squeezed her hand. “Of course we can, Kristen. You’re one of the nicest girls I know.”

“’Bye Harry. See you later.” Kristen got up, her eyes watery, and walked back up to the
school.

Ron passed Kristen as she ran up the staircase towards Gryffindor common room. He could see that
she was upset, and didn’t stop to talk to her. He walked out of the main doorway and saw Harry, who
was still sitting on the seat down by the lake.

“Kristen and I have split up, Ron,” he said as Ron approached him.

“I know, Harry. Ginny spoke to her earlier and told us what she was going to do. She’s quite a
girl, Harry. You know that she’s put you before her own feelings, don’t you?”

“Yes, Ron – I know. But she was right. We weren’t really going anywhere, and it would have been
cruel to keep stringing her along. I always seem to make a mess of things when it comes to girls,
Ron.”

“You’re not the only one, Harry. I only hope it gets easier as we get older.”

“But I haven’t got time to get older, Ron. I have to find my Anima Summa now! The fate of the
wizarding world depends on it.”

“Come on, Harry. Let’s go back up to the common room. You’re not going to solve anything moping
around out here.”

“Ron, why do you think Ginny told Kristen about the Anima Summa?”

“I don’t know, Harry. But she must have had a good reason. She knows how important it is to keep
it quiet.”

“Hmm. I think I’ll go and speak to Dumbledore, Ron. Come on, let’s get back.”

“I’d better go and make sure she’s all right, Hermione,” said Ginny as they saw Kristen walk
listlessly back up to her dorm.

“Ok, Ginny. I’ll wait here for you.”

Left on her own, Hermione’s thoughts inevitably turned to Harry. ‘He must be feeling terrible.
He’s unattached now,’ she thought, ‘but there’s no use raising my hopes. So I might as well try to
make the best of being his friend. Oh – it’s just not fair!’

“What’s happened with Harry and Kristen, Hermione?” Hermione was jerked from her thoughts by
Parvati, who had noticed Kristen’s comings and goings, and how upset she was.

“Oh. I think they’ve split up, Parvati.”

“How? Why?” she asked, wide-eyed.

“I don’t know any details, Parvati, but I think they’re best left alone for a while.”

“Right,” she replied as she left hurriedly in search of Lavender.

***

“Sit down, Harry,” said Dumbledore. “I can see that there’s something bothering you. Do you want
to tell me about it?”

“It’s the Anima Summa, Professor,” replied Harry. “I’m just so confused. I found out that
Kristen’s birthday is 31st October 1980, but when I was with her, the rings didn’t do
anything. We ... we’ve split up now.”

“I’m sorry, Harry. Kristen’s a very nice girl.”

“Yes, she is. Look, there’s something else I want to tell you, Professor. Early the other
morning, I saw a girl about my age looking up at me in my dormitory window. But when I went down,
she’d vanished. I haven’t seen her before, and she doesn’t belong at the school. So why was she
there? Do you think she might be my Anima Summa?”

“She may well be, Harry, but I really don’t know. Look, you really must try to relax about this.
I know it must be very difficult for you, but it’s always been my experience that such things will
work themselves out in their own way and in their own time. Believe me, when it happens, it will be
spontaneous – it won’t happen because you try to force it. The best advice I can give is that you
try to concentrate on studying for your OWLS - the Anima Summa situation will take care of
itself.”

“Thanks, Professor, I promise I’ll try.”

The news of Harry and Kristen splitting up spread like wildfire throughout the school. The
female population was now on full alert, and many a devious plan was in the making for attracting
his attentions. Harry, however, despite Dumbledore’s advice, was approaching despair. Wherever he
went in the school, he’d try to walk close to any girl that appeared to be the right age, all the
time holding the rings in his cloak pocket, but he couldn’t get any reaction from them.

“She just can’t be one of the students at the school,” he told Ron, Ginny and Hermione one
evening as they sat in the common room. “I’ve been close to just about every girl in the school –
even Millicent Bulstrode - ugh - but there’s just nothing from the rings at all. I think it just
*has* to be that girl I saw in the grounds – it’s *got* to be – there isn’t anybody
else.”

“You’ve got to stop beating yourself up with this Harry,” said Ron. “Listen to what Dumbledore
told you. Don’t forget that we’ve got the match against Slytherin in a few weeks, and you’ll need
to be fully alert if we’re going to beat them.”

“That’s easy for you to say Ron,” replied Harry with more force than he’d really intended, “but
how can I put this out of my mind? It’s starting to drive me crazy.”

Hermione reached out and squeezed Harry’s arm, concern etched on her features. “None of us
thinks it’s easy for you Harry. But you must see that if you keep worrying like this you’ll make
yourself ill.”

Harry didn’t reply and got up and walked out through the portrait hole, quickly followed by
Ron.

“This is getting bad, Ginny,” said Hermione. “He *will* make himself ill if he doesn’t calm
down soon.”

“How about you?” asked Ginny. “How are you coping with all this?”

“I ... I’m trying my best, Ginny. I keep telling myself that it’s stupid to have these feelings
for Harry, but I just can’t help myself.” She looked sadly down at her hands and twiddled her
fingers.

Ginny reached over and took Hermione’s hands in her own and looked into her eyes. “Things will
work out - I just know they will.”

***

The weather was idyllic in the little mountain valley in the Langedoc. Charlie, Nadine and
Demont sat lazily on padded chairs outside the cabin, listening to the tinkling sounds of the
stream as it made its way past them. They had just finished an al fresco lunch, and were in the
process of polishing off their second bottle of wine.

Their investigations in the Forbidden Forest had confirmed that everything was now back to
normal, and they were taking a bit of time out to relax before starting on their full report to
their respective ministries.

“Have you heard from Professor Dumbledore yet Charlie?” asked Demont.

“Yes, I had an owl from him this morning. He advises that we don’t say anything about Harry and
the Anima Summa in our report. He thinks that it would attract too much attention from the ministry
and the wizarding press at a time when he’s tightening security. It may give ‘You Know Who’ an
opportunity to sneak some of his followers into the school.”

“That makes sense, Charlie,” said Nadine. “Any news on Harry’s Anima Summa?”

“Nothing yet, Nadine. Dumbledore says that Harry’s getting a bit anxious about it, though.”

“Yes, I suppose he must be - the poor kid. It’s a lot of responsibility for young shoulders to
bear.”

“Well I only met him for a few minutes, but I think he’ll be able to cope if anyone can,” said
Demont.

Charlie and Nadine had told Demont about Harry’s quest just after they’d arrived back at the
cabin a few weeks ago, and had sworn him to secrecy.

“So what are we going to tell them?” asked Charlie.

“We could tell them that the magical creatures had picked up on the cries of a telepathic
Banshee – they have been known to exist,” suggested Demont.

“Or a rogue Augury – sending out telepathic predictions of forthcoming doom,” said Nadine.

“I suppose either of them would be plausible,” said Charlie. “But we’ll need to do a bit of
research on these creatures first.”

“I’ve got just the book in the cabin,” said Demont. “I’ll go and do a bit of reading. You two
stay there for a while – I’ll call you when I’ve found something.”

“Do you have the feeling that your brother takes every opportunity to leave us on our own?” said
Charlie, smiling as he watched Demont disappear into the cabin.

“Yes, I do Charlie,” Nadine replied laughing. “I’ve tackled him about it, but he just shrugs it
off.”

“Not that I’m complaining, of course. I do like your company, Nadine.”

“The feeling’s mutual, Charlie.”

They both smiled at each other, and then lay back in their chairs, deep in their own thoughts.
The last few weeks had brought them closer together, but they were both afraid of taking things a
stage further. Both their thoughts dwelt around how they could achieve this without leaving
themselves vulnerable to rejection.

“Come on you two, I’ve found it,” Demont shouted from the cabin doorway. “We’d better make a
start.”

Charlie got up from his chair and held out his hand to help Nadine to her feet. Nadine was
pleasantly surprised when Charlie held onto her hand and led her slowly back to the cabin.

***

“We’re starting to get worried about Harry, Professor Dumbledore. He seems to be getting worse,”
said Ginny as she, Ron and Hermione walked down to the Quidditch pitch to watch the Gryffindor
team’s practice session. They had run to catch up to the headmaster as he made a rare visit to see
the team’s progress. In reality, he was more interested in how Harry would cope with Quidditch
given his disturbed state, but he didn’t show his worries as he talked to the three friends.

“I’m confident that things will sort themselves out soon,” he replied. “We have to be patient as
well as Harry. The best thing you three can do is to be with him as much as possible and show your
support.”

High above the Quidditch field, Harry was flying his broomstick in wide, slow, sweeping arcs,
scanning the space below for the Golden Snitch. Out of the corner of his eye, he saw a flash of
gold and steered towards it. He didn’t chase the Snitch, however – he’d seen something else. A
flash of white some distance away down at the edge of the Forbidden Forest. He peered more closely
and saw that it was a figure with white hair – could it be that girl?

Harry increased his speed and flashed towards the girl, who looked up at him, smiled, waved -
and then walked back into the forest. Harry landed where he’d seen the girl and started to run into
the forest after her, but he was stopped by a pair of strong arms that encircled his waist.

“Hold on there Harry,” said Sirius. He and Ceri had been patrolling just inside the edge of the
forest, knowing that Harry was out on the Quidditch field.

“But Sirius, I saw that strange girl I told you about. She was right here a few moments ago.
I’ve got to go after her.”

“You stay with me, Harry,” said Ceri. “Sirius, see if you can find her.”

Sirius turned and dashed into the Forbidden Forest. “Make sure he doesn’t follow, Ceri,” he
shouted just before he transformed into Padfoot.

“It was her, Ceri. I know it was,” said Harry breathlessly.

“Did the rings do anything?”

Harry looked dismayed as he thrust his hand into his Quidditch cloak. “Oh it’s too late now. I
was too intent on getting to her to try them earlier.”

“What happened?” shouted Ron as he and the two girls, quickly followed by Dumbledore, ran up to
them.

“Harry saw that strange girl again,” said Ceri. “Sirius has gone to try to find her.”

“Did you see her, Ceri?” asked Dumbledore.

“No, Professor. We were about fifty yards away just inside the forest when we saw Harry hurtling
towards this spot. There were too many trees in the way for us to spot anybody.”

“I’m sorry,” said Sirius as he walked out of the forest. “I didn’t see anything. Couldn’t even
pick up a scent. Sorry, Harry.”

Dumbledore put his hand on Harry’s sagging shoulder. “There’ll be other times, Harry. She just
seems to be waiting for the right time to meet you face to face. You four had better get back up to
the school. Dinner’ll be ready shortly.”

Dumbledore held up his hand to prevent Sirius and Ceri following the four friends as they slowly
walked back up to the school. “I wanted to speak to you both. Severus came to see me a short while
ago – there have been some developments. He’s heard from reliable sources that the Dementors are
about to join forces with Voldemort.”

“What?” breathed Sirius. He shuddered at his terrible memories of them during his stay at
Azkaban. “Do you think they’ll leave Azkaban?”

“I don’t know, Sirius. I think it’s doubtful that they’ll all leave. Voldemort wouldn’t want to
raise too many suspicions with the ministry at this stage. But it’s something else we’ll have to
watch out for. I don’t want those evil creatures getting anywhere near the school.”

“And so say all of us,” said Sirius.

***

“Honestly, Ron,” said Hermione, “you really must do some work. The OWLS are only four weeks
away!”

The four friends were sitting around a small table in the common room. Ginny was writing an
essay for Hagrid on the qualities of Unicorns, Hermione was revising Potions, and Ron was reading
‘*Quidditch Through the Ages*.’ Harry was looking at his ‘*History of Magic’* textbook,
although he wasn’t taking much of it in.

“There’s plenty of time, Hermione,” said Ron. “Don’t worry.”

“Ohh. I might as well talk to the wall!” she replied. She turned to Harry, her expression
softening. “How are you doing, Harry? Are you managing to get any work done?”

“Some. But it’s not easy trying to concentrate on this dry stuff. I think I’ll go down to the
library.”

“I’ll come with you, Harry,” said Ron.

Hermione looked forlornly after Harry as he went out through the portrait hole. She wasn’t doing
a very good job of suppressing her feelings for him, and Ginny looked sympathetically at her
friend, knowing what she was going through.

Suddenly, Ginny erupted. “What’s the matter with him? Can’t he see you? Can’t he see that you
exist?” she blurted, but regretted her outburst immediately.

Hermione looked with surprise at her friend. “You know he can’t feel anything for me, Ginny.
He’s got to save that for his Anima Summa.”

“I know, Hermione,” she replied quietly. “I’m sorry. But it hurts to see you suffering like
this.”

Later that day, their double Potions class with Snape did nothing to ease the mood of the
four.

“Are you with us today, Potter?” asked Snape as he spotted Harry daydreaming when he should have
been mixing his potion.

“Yes, sorry Professor,” Harry said as he commenced chopping the billywig stings.

“We’ll see, Potter. You can be the first to test if your potion manages to do what it’s supposed
to do.”

Malfoy, Crabbe and Goyle sniggered at the other end of the room, relishing Snape making a fool
of Harry again. Hermione gave them a withering stare and then watched Harry to make sure he chopped
the stings in the correct manner.

A little while later, after the potions were brewed, Snape stood up from his desk at the front
of the room. “Right. Let’s see if you’ve done this properly. Longbottom, go over to Potter’s desk
and take a spoonful of his potion.”

Neville jumped, and then slowly got up and walked over to Harry. As he passed Hermione, she
whispered, “Don’t worry, Neville. I think he’s done it correctly.”

“Get a move on, Longbottom. We haven’t got all day,” said Snape disgustedly.

Harry scooped up a spoonful of his potion and held it out for Neville to drink. He tentatively
sniffed the liquid and then put the spoon in his mouth and swallowed the contents.

“Come out to the front of the class, Longbottom. This should only take a few minutes to work –
assuming Potter’s brewed it properly, of course. Oh by the way, I forgot to tell you that there can
be some nasty side effects if the potion is not done in exactly the right way – instead of it
levitating you, you may have to endure pink hair for the rest of the day.”

The Slytherins erupted with laughter as they heard Snape’s pronouncement and watched eagerly as
Neville walked to the front of the room. He felt very self-conscious as the whole class looked at
him and waited with baited breath. Harry looked very uncomfortable as he willed the potion to work
properly. He didn’t want to be the cause of any further embarrassment to Neville.

Then, Neville started to float gently upwards. He stopped just before his head touched the
ceiling. No side effects could be seen. The Slytherins groaned with disappointment, but the
Gryffindors clapped loudly, a few of them slapping Harry on the back.

“That will be quite enough,” said Snape, not disguising the disappointment in his voice. “It
seems that you are able to do the odd thing properly, Potter. More by luck than judgement, no
doubt. Longbottom, the effects will last for ten minutes, after which you will slowly drift back to
the floor. You may then join your classmates in their next lesson. Class dismissed.”

“We can’t leave poor old Neville hanging about like that,” whispered Hermione as everyone filed
out into the corridor.

“But Snape’s still in there, Hermione,” said Ron. “He’ll put us on detention and deduct points
if we try to get him.”

“He’s right, I’m afraid,” said Harry. “The best we can do for Neville is to tell McGonagall why
he’ll be late for our Transfigurations class.”

***

That evening, Harry was sitting alone in his favourite seat by the window in the common room. He
had a sad look on his face as he stared, unseeing, at his History of Magic textbook.

He was brought back to awareness by a light touch on his arm. He looked up to see Clare Bryant,
the precocious little first year student, staring at him with a serious look on her pretty
face.

“Harry? I ... I was wondering. Can I be your girlfriend?”

Harry sat stunned for a moment, then a slight grin spread over his face. “Why would you want to
be my girlfriend, Clare?”

“Because ever since you split up with Kristen, you’ve been looking so sad. And I don’t like to
see you sad. I just know I can cheer you up.”

Harry stifled a laugh and thought furiously, not wanting to upset her. “Clare. That’s one of the
nicest things anyone has ever said to me. But don’t you think I’m a little bit too old for
you?”

“Well yes. But I’m growing up very fast.”

“Oh I can see that, Clare. Give you a couple of years and the boys won’t know what’s hit them.”
Clare grinned and waited expectantly. “But right now, I don’t think I could have another
girlfriend. I need to get some thinking done before I commit myself again. Do you understand what
I’m saying?”

“Well yes, I guess so Harry. But if you change your mind any time soon, will you think of
me?”

“How could I ever forget you, Clare? And thanks for the offer. You’ve done my ego the world of
good.”

“Ok. ‘Bye Harry.” And she walked back to her friends at the other end of the room.

“What was that all about?” asked Ron as he flung himself down in the seat next to Harry.

“Oh, that was Clare trying to cheer me up, Ron. And do you know, I think it’s worked – for the
moment at least.”

***

One week later, in the middle of the night, there was an incident at a cottage at the edge of
Hogsmeade. The cottage stood alone, some distance away from the centre of the town.

An elderly wizarding couple slept soundly in their bed upstairs, and didn’t hear the sound of
breaking glass at their front door. Even if they had, it is unlikely that they could have done
anything to prevent the tragedy that followed – they were too old to generate the power needed to
defend themselves.

The first they knew that anything was amiss was the crash of the bedroom door as it exploded
inwards off it’s hinges.

“What ..?” said the elderly wizard as he slowly lifted himself from his pillow.

“What is it, Daniel?” said his wife as she pulled the bedclothes up to her throat.

“Oh my god,” was all the wizard was able to say as he saw the two ghoulish forms approach the
bed, one to each side. They moved as if floating just above the floor.

The screams of the unfortunate couple were abruptly cut off as their mouths were covered by the
hideous open gashes, and their souls were ever so slowly sucked out of them.

That night, the Dark Mark appeared over the village of Hogsmeade.

Later the next morning, Dumbledore held a meeting in his office, with his usual close aides in
attendance.

“It must have been horrible for those poor people,” said McGonagall with a shudder. “To think
that such a thing could happen in Hogsmeade.”

“It’s as I feared,” said Snape. “The Dementors have joined ‘You Know Who.’”

“I’m afraid you’re right, Severus,” said Dumbledore. “Voldemort has done two things here. First,
he needed to give the Dementors something to keep them sweet. Second, he’s sending us a warning,
telling us he can strike close to home.”

“But have the Dementors left Azkaban?” asked Remus, now fully recovered from his ordeal at
Callanish.

“No. I checked with the ministry this morning. Most of them are still on guard duty, although a
few seem to be missing.”

“Is the ministry going to put out a general warning on this?” asked Ceri.

“I’m afraid not,” said Dumbledore. “They still don’t want the wizarding world to know that
Voldemort is back, and the magical community knows that only Voldemort could influence the
Dementors to carry out such attacks on them.”

“So what are we going to do, Headmaster?” asked Sirius.

“Increase our defences to detect the presence of Dementors,” he replied. “We can’t prevent them
coming into the school grounds, but at least we can make sure we’re warned when they come close so
that we can go and repel them.”

“Should we tell Harry and the others, Headmaster?” asked McGonagall.

“Not yet, Minerva. They’ve got enough on their plates already, without giving them any more to
worry about. Let’s try to keep a lid on this as long as we can. Come on, let’s get down to the
grounds and re-set the defences. Will you get Professor Flitwick on your way down please,
Severus?”

***

The morning of the first day of June saw the school grounds bathed in warm sunshine. The
students had finished breakfast and were trooping excitedly down to the Quidditch field to see the
final game of the season – Gryffindor verses Slytherin.

Tensions were high among both the teams and spectators. Whoever won the game would be school
champions for the year. The teams walked onto the field, the Gryffindors looking nervous but
determined, the Slytherins looking their usual confident, cocky selves.

Madam Hooch released the balls, and blew her whistle to start the match. Harry took up his usual
position flying lazily above the main action, with Malfoy in close attendance.

“You’re going to lose, Potter,” he sneered as he flew straight in front of Harry, trying to
dislodge him from his broom.

Harry deftly swerved around him, and ignored the remark, keeping his eyes peeled for the Golden
Snitch.

After half an hour, the score stood at Slytherin 60 Gryffindor 40, and there had been no sign of
the Snitch. Bletchley, the Slytherin Keeper, was having a stormer – Gryffindor would have been way
out in front if it weren’t for his acrobatic saves.

Then Harry spotted a flash of gold down at the base of the Slytherin goal posts. He angled his
broom downwards and started his dive, but was surprised to find that instead of streaking towards
the ground, he was only just making any headway. He turned to see Malfoy right behind him, a
malevolent sneer on his face, and both hands grasping the back of Harry’s broom.

“Get off, Malfoy,” he shouted. “That’s a foul.”

The Slytherins cheered wildly as they saw what was going on, but the rest of the students
shouted indignantly. When Harry looked back, the Snitch had disappeared.

“Oh look at that,” shouted Lee Jordan who was commenting on the game. “That’s dirty, Malfoy.
Come on Madam Hooch – penalty!”

Madam Hooch had spotted the infringement and blew her whistle for a penalty to Gryffindor, which
Katie Bell dispatched with style, sending Bletchley the wrong way.

The game continued for another hour, and Slytherin began to gain the upper hand. The score stood
at Slytherin 150 Gryffindor 100. Harry was kept fully occupied, not only with looking for the
Snitch, but trying to keep Malfoy at bay. The Slytherin was trying every dirty trick in the book to
keep Harry’s attention away from his search for the Snitch.

“I know what your tactics are, Malfoy,” Harry yelled as their broomsticks once again came close.
“You’re trying to keep me occupied until you build a lead over 150. But it’s not going to
work.”

“Why not, Potter? Just you try to stop me.” Malfoy’s eyes went wide as Harry looped up and over
his head at great speed, and stormed off in the opposite direction. Malfoy did his best to keep up
with Harry, but the surprise tactic had opened a gap between them, which Harry found easy to
maintain. For the next 15 minutes, he zoomed around the perimeter of the field, with Malfoy vainly
trying to keep up with him.

“Just look at Harry go,” yelled Lee Jordan. “Give it up, Malfoy. You’ll never catch him.”

Apart from the Slytherins, the students were doubled up with laughter at Malfoy’s attempts to
get close to Harry. This did nothing for Malfoy’s temper and he started flying wildly, trying
anything to get to Harry.

Harry suddenly changed his flight path, and stated flying straight down the field to one set of
goal posts, and then turning back to storm up to the other set of posts. Malfoy followed at great
speed, but he was trying to weave between the goal posts at a speed beyond his capabilities to
control.

After five lengths of the field, the inevitable happened. While trying to steer his way around
Slytherin’s right-hand goal post he lost control, and collided with it. Malfoy avoided hitting his
head, but he had to let go of his broom as his hands encircled the post. As the broom dropped to
the floor, Malfoy was left suspended high in the air, his body wrapped around the post.

To the uncontrollable mirth of the students, even some of the Slytherins, he slowly started to
slip down the post, and finished up with a thud as his backside hit the floor.

While this was happening, the score had reached 190 – 120 to Slytherin.

Now free of his tormentor, Harry could concentrate his efforts on looking for the Snitch – and
he saw it low down at the base of the Gryffindor goal posts. He swooped down and caught it
easily.

“Harry’s got the Snitch,” yelled Lee Jordan. “Gryffindor win 270 – 190. Gryffindor are the
champions.”

The Gryffindor students streamed down from the stands and rushed to congratulate their team.
Hermione, Ginny and Ron were among the last, since they had been watching from the very top tier.
As Ron and Ginny ran down the stairs, Hermione paused. She’d spotted something over by the edge of
the Forbidden Forest. She squinted her eyes and saw a figure in the distance. What she had spotted
was a flash of white hair.

“Ron, Ginny,” she shouted, but her two friends had disappeared into the crowd, and the cheering
drowned out her shout.

Hermione quickly left the stand and started running around the left-hand edge of the pitch, in
the direction of the forest. She didn’t run directly to the figure, but aimed over to one side,
hoping that she wouldn’t scare her away.

As she got close, she saw that it was a young girl, about her own age, with white hair. She was
dressed in a dark blue cloak, and if it hadn’t been for her hair, she would never have been
spotted. ‘It must be that girl that Harry’s been seeing,’ she thought as she gained the cover of
the trees about two hundred yards from where the girl was still standing.

She quietly walked along the edge of the forest and got within twenty yards before the girl
suddenly turned and spotted her approach. She looked startled, but didn’t try to run away. Hermione
walked slowly up to her. She could see the vivid green eyes set in a beautiful face, which was
surrounded by startling white hair.

“Hello, I’m Hermione. Who are you?”

The girl’s eyes grew wide, and she stammered, “My name ees Margot. You are ‘Arry’s friend,
no?”

“You’re French?” said Hermione. “Yes I’m one of Harry’s best friends. Why are you here? Why have
you been watching Harry?”

“I ... I cannot tell you. I must go. I should not be ‘ere.”

“No wait. Why don’t you speak to Harry? He’s desperate to meet you.”

“No ... no. I cannot. Ze time ees not yet right. I must go now.”

“What do you mean, the time is not yet right? You’re Harry’s Anima Summa, aren’t you? When will
the time be right for you to meet him?”

“Ze time is very soon, now. But ... no ... no. I ‘ave said too much already. I ‘ave to go now.
Tell ‘Arry I will speak to ‘eem soon. Au revoir.”

Margot smiled at Hermione and then turned and walked back into the forest.

Hermione stood rooted to the spot, deep in thought. ‘I’ve met Harry’s Anima Summa. She’s the one
he’ll spend the rest of his life with. She seems very nice, though. I’d better get back and tell
Harry what she said.’

Hermione slowly turned, looking forlorn, and started to slowly walk back up towards the
Quidditch pitch. She hadn’t gone five yards before she heard the loud ‘crack’ of a foot breaking a
twig behind her. She turned and saw two figures dressed all in black, with hoods pulled down over
their faces, walking quickly out of the forest towards her.

Hermione turned and started to run, but one of the men grabbed the back of her flowing cloak and
pulled her to a stop.

“Let me go,” she shouted, struggling to free her cloak.

“No you don’t, my pretty,” said one of the men. “There’s someone who’d like to meet you, and we
wouldn’t want to disappoint him now, would we?”

The Death Eater raised his wand and pointed it at her. Quick as a flash, Hermione pulled her own
wand from her cloak and yelled, “*EXPELIARMUS*.”

The Death Eater’s wand went flying from his hand, and, his eyes wide with surprise, he fell onto
his back. The other Death Eater, in the mean time, raised his wand and also yelled
“*EXPELIARMUS*” and Hermione saw her own wand fly from her hand.

“Stop messing about and get up,” he said. “Let’s grab her and get out of here. The Dark Lord
will be very grateful when we deliver Granger to him.”

The two Death Eaters’ attention was distracted when they heard a yell in the distance, “Hang on
Hermione, we’re coming!”

Hermione took advantage of the distraction and started to run towards Ceri, Sirius and Remus who
were about a hundred yards away, and closing fast.

“Quick, get her,” hissed the first Death Eater.

“No – it’s too late, now. Let’s get out of here.” As he said this, a look of pure venom
contorted his features and he raised his wand and aimed it at the fleeing Hermione.

“*FLIPENDO*,” he roared loudly.

A brilliant ball of energy sprung from his wand and hit Hermione in the middle of her back with
great force. She was flung forward and hit the ground awkwardly, where she lay unmoving.

“NO!” an agonised cry escaped from Sirius’ lips as he saw the girl fall. He doubled his speed as
he chased after the two Death Eaters, who had just entered the edge of the forest.

“Remus,” gasped Ceri. “Get Hermione up to the hospital, I’ll help Sirius get those two devils.”
And she ran after Sirius into the forest.

Remus knelt down beside the still form of Hermione, lifted her hand and felt for a pulse. His
eyes held a grim look as he felt only a very weak beat. He looked up at the sound of running feet
and saw Dumbledore, McGonagall and Flitwick approaching.

“What’s happened, Remus?” Dumbledore said breathlessly.

“Two Death Eaters attacked her Professor. She’s in a bad way. We’ve got to get her up to Madam
Pomfrey straight away.”

Dumbledore levitated Hermione and they all rushed back up to the school. The sounds of
jubilation were quickly hushed as the students saw the inert form being taken up towards the main
entrance.

“Oh no,” gasped Ginny. “Harry, Ron – it’s Hermione. Something’s happened to her.”

The three friends quickly followed behind as Hermione was taken up to the hospital wing, where
Madam Pomfrey directed her towards a bed and started her examination.

Everyone watched anxiously as the nurse completed her examination and poured a few drops of
potion between Hermione’s pale lips and applied a healing spell to her shoulder.

She then rose and sighed, “All we can do now is wait. Her shoulder was broken – probably from
her fall – but she’s taken a very powerful Flipendus curse in the middle of her back, right behind
her heart. I don’t understand it – by rights, it should have killed her. I don’t know how she’s
survived this long.”

Harry’s eyes were wet, and his voice choked, as he spoke, “I do, Madam Pomfrey. It was the
pendant I gave her for her birthday last year. Look – the sapphire is glowing faintly. The wizard I
bought it from said it contained magical properties to lessen the spells cast by evil ones.”

“It’s a good job you gave it to her, Harry,” said the nurse. “It saved her life back there. I
just hope she comes through this.”

“Come on,” said Dumbledore, “we can’t do anything more here. We’d better see to the students.
Remus, you’d better try to find Sirius and Ceri – they may need help. Ron, Ginny, Harry – I think
it’ll be ok if you stay here with Hermione. She’ll want to see her friends if ... when she wakes
up. Is that ok, Poppy?”

Madam Pomfrey smiled weakly at the three distraught friends. “Yes, Professor, I think that’ll be
ok.”

Ron and Ginny sat by the bedside, not taking their eyes from Hermione. Harry couldn’t bear to
sit still, and he slowly walked over to the window and looked out. He let out a gasp as he saw the
strange girl with white hair down by the Quidditch pitch. She was looking anxiously up at the
hospital window.

“She’s down there – that girl – she’s down by the Quidditch field,” he said.

Ron and Ginny looked up and started over to the window. The three of them looked down at the
girl but couldn’t quite make out her features – she was too far away - but then turned sharply
around as Hermione let out a gasp. The three rushed over to the bed, all thoughts of the
white-haired girl driven from their minds.

Harry was the first to Hermione’s side, and he reached out and gently caught hold of her
hand.

“Harry?” she croaked. “What happened?”

“Shhh, Hermione. You’re going to be all right.” he looked up at Ginny. “Ginny, get Madam
Pomfrey.”

“Harry,” said Hermione in a very weak voice, “I ... I’ve got to tell you something. It’s
urgent.”

“That can wait, young lady,” said Madam Pomfrey as she quickly brushed Harry and Ron aside.
After a minute, she looked up and smiled. “She’s going to be all right. Her heart-beat is much
stronger now. But she’ll be full of aches and pains for a few days. Thank goodness for that
pendant.”

“Pendant?” said Hermione.

“The one Harry gave you for your birthday,” said Ginny. “It saved your life. If it weren’t for
that, the Death Eaters would have killed you.”

Hermione looked up at Harry and squeezed his hand. “Thank you again, Harry.”

A tear rolled down Harry’s cheek, this time from joy rather than sorrow, as he smiled at his
friend and held her hand even tighter. “It’ll take more than Death Eaters to take you away from me,
Hermione.”

Hermione smiled and looked with longing at her friend. Then she remembered that she had
something urgent to tell Harry.

“Harry, I saw her – the strange girl – I spoke to her.”

“What?” Ron, Ginny and Harry spoke the word in unison.

Hermione thought for a moment. She knew she had to be careful not to tell Harry that Margot was
his Anima Summa. “I saw her down by the forest, watching the game. Her name’s Margot and she’s
French. I spoke to her for a few minutes before she ran back into the forest. I asked her to come
and speak to you, Harry, but she said the time wasn’t right yet. She said that she’d speak to you
soon though. She seems very nice.”

Hermione looked away at the last few words, and Ginny squeezed her other hand in understanding
and support.

“She’s down on the Quidditch pitch now,” said Harry. ”She’s looking up at the hospital window.
She seems anxious. Perhaps she saw what happened to you and wants to make sure that you’re ok.”

“You must go down to her, Harry,” said Hermione. “Perhaps now’s the right time for you to meet
her.”

Harry didn’t move. He was torn between leaving his sick friend, and going down to see his
future. He couldn’t decide what was best to do – it would seem so selfish to rush out and leave
Hermione now. He had an almost overwhelming feeling of love and protection towards his friend, and
it confused the hell out of him.

‘What *is* this I’m feeling for Hermione? It’s not like the brotherly love I feel for Ginny
- it’s different somehow. So what is it? It can’t be love – she’s not my Anima Summa, and she’s not
meant for me. So what is it?’

“It’s too late now,” said Ron as he looked out of the window at Margot’s receding back. “She’s
just gone back into the forest.”

“Don’t worry, Harry,” said Hermione. “You’ll see her soon. She told me.”

Then the hospital door flew open and Padfoot, Ceri and Remus rushed in. “Thank goodness,”
breathed Ceri as she saw that Hermione was conscious.

“She’s going to be ok,” said Ron, smiling. “The pendant Harry gave her for her birthday saved
her.”

Padfoot looked around and saw that the nurse wasn’t in the room, so he transformed. “How are you
feeling, Hermione?” Sirius asked gently

“A bit weak, Sirius. And I’m aching all over. But other than that I feel all right. Did you find
those horrible men?”

“Yes, we got them,” said Sirius grimly. “They’re on their way to the ministry for questioning.
And I dare say they’ll be feeling some aches and pains for a few days as well.”

Sirius then transformed back to his Animagus form as he heard the nurse’s door open. “What’s all
this noise,” said Madam Pomfrey as she came out from her office. “Out, out – all of you. This girl
needs to get some rest. You can come back and see her tomorrow. And what’s this dog doing in my
hospital?”

***

The school returned to normal the next day, and the students resumed their classes. Ron, Harry
and Ginny were run off their feet taking books up to Hermione. She refused to take things easy –
there were only a few weeks left before they sat their OWLS.

Ginny was sitting by her bedside, stacking some books that Hermione had finished with to take
back to the library, when she felt her friend’s hand touch her own.

“Ginny – I feel so stupid. I just can’t get these feelings I’ve got for Harry out of my head.
And I’ve just met his future wife, for goodness sake.”

“I saw the way Harry looked at you yesterday,” said Ginny, “and didn’t you notice that he
wouldn’t leave your side to go and see that girl when he had the chance?”

“I know, Ginny. But that was just concern for a friend. I can’t pretend it’s anything more than
that. I know, Ginny. I’ve spoken to Margot.”

“Oh, Hermione,” Ginny breathed with compassion.

***

Towards the end of the next day, Hermione was allowed to leave the hospital, given a clean bill
of health by Madam Pomfrey. She walked into the Great Hall for dinner, and all her friends rushed
up and made a big fuss. Hermione was overwhelmed before Ginny caught her hand and led her to the
table to sit next to her, and opposite Ron and Harry.

“Feeling better now?” asked Ron.

“Much better thanks, Ron,” she replied. She turned her gaze to Harry, who sat grinning at her.
She once again felt that lurch deep inside as their eyes met. She quickly looked away and stared
down at her plate.

After dinner, the four friends trouped up to the common room to do some badly needed revision.
Harry and Ron went to sit at a free table over by the window, while Hermione and Ginny joined
Parvati, Lavender and Kristen at the other end of the room.

“When do you think she’ll turn up next, Ron?” asked Harry suddenly.

“Who – Margot?”

Harry nodded.

“Who knows, Harry? She *did* tell Hermione that it’ll happen pretty soon, though.” Ron got
up and looked out of the window down towards the lake and the edge of the forest. “No sign of her
yet,” he said.

Harry sighed and looked back down at his Transfigurations book.

Ginny looked at Hermione sitting next to her and saw that her head was buried in her Potions
textbook. She knew that Hermione’s thought were far away from Potions, because she’d not turned a
page for the last five minutes, and her eyes stared blankly, unmoving, at the same spot on the
page.

Ginny reached over and gently squeezed her hand.

Hermione looked up with moist eyes. “It’s ok, Ginny. I’ll get over it… honestly.”

Hermione didn’t really feel that she’d get over it any time soon. She looked up and across the
room at Harry as he sat reading his book. She had a sudden urge to get up and go to him, but she
curbed the impulse.

‘Why couldn’t things have been different,’ she thought to herself as she looked longingly at
Harry.

Harry’s head suddenly jerked up as he felt something. There was a feeling of warmth on the
outside of his thigh. He put his hand into his cloak pocket and was astonished as he felt the heat
coming from the rings. He also felt that they were vibrating slightly.

He got up and looked out of the window, looking for Margot. But the grounds were deserted.

‘This is stupid,’ he thought to himself. ‘She’s got to be somewhere near.’

He went back to his seat and looked slowly around the room. He saw some first and second year
students on the next table, Fred, George and Lee the next table over, and Seamus and Neville a
little further over. At the far end of the room he saw Parvati, Lavender, Kristen, Ginny and
Hermione.

Only Hermione was looking in his direction. He saw that she was looking sadly at him, her eyes
full of hurt and longing. She looked lost. She quickly looked back down at her book when she
registered that Harry was staring at her.

There was a sickening lurch deep within him as Harry saw what was in Hermione’s eyes, and that
overwhelming urge to protect her filled his mind.

The rings, now held firmly in Harry’s hand, felt warmer and the vibrations increased.

He again looked all around the room, and up to the top of the spiral staircase, but there was no
sign of Margot. His eyes were dragged back to Hermione. All he could think of was making the hurt
he’d seen in her eyes go away.

Harry felt a strange vibration rising from the rings, moving up his body. He looked down and saw
a faint silvery glow rising to envelope his head and shoulders.

He looked through the slight silvery haze at Hermione. And then it struck him. He thought back
to when she was lying on the hospital bed and the feelings he’d had.

‘I don’t want Margot,’ he thought to himself. ‘I want Hermione. I ... I love her. I think I
always have loved her. How could I be so stupid to ignore it before?’

He looked at her bushy brown hair, the cute nose, soft full lips, her beautiful big hazel-brown
eyes. Her whole being was beautiful. Harry savoured the wondrous feeling that came over him - but
then came up against the prophecy.

‘But I can’t love her,’ he thought. ‘She was born the wrong time. She can’t be my Anima Summa –
can she?’

Unseen by Harry, Ginny was staring at him intently. Of all the people in the room, it was her
alone that had seen the faint silvery glow rise to cover Harry’s head and shoulders. She also saw
the direction in which he was looking – and she felt the excitement thrill throughout her whole
being as she saw the beautiful event unfold in front of her.

She’d been waiting for months for this to happen. She thought back to the time she’d spoken with
Hermione’s mother back before the Easter holidays.

.

.

.

*“Hello again Mrs. Granger,” said Ginny as she saw Hermione’s mother waiting at the Main
entrance to the school. “Hermione seems a lot better. I think you’ve done her the world of
good.”*

*“And it’s thanks to you, Ginny. I’m so glad she’s got a friend like you. I know that her
father will want me to thank you properly for what you’ve done.”*

*“It’s the least I could have done, Mrs. Granger. You said earlier that you hadn’t seen her
this ill since she was a little baby. I was wondering - what was wrong with her?”*

*“She was very ill for the first few months of her life. There were times when we thought she
wouldn’t survive. But thank god she did. You see, she was born prematurely, and she wasn’t very
strong at first.”*

*Ginny’s ears almost flapped when she heard this, but she forced herself to remain calm. “Uh,
prematurely Mrs. Granger? How much premature was she?”*

*“About six weeks, Ginny, perhaps a bit less.”*

*“Oh,” was all Ginny could say then. Her mind worked overtime as she calculated that if she
had been born normally, Hermione’s birthday would have been on or around 31st October
1980!*

*“But Hermione never told us about this, Mrs. Granger.”*

*“She doesn’t know, Ginny. Oh you know how it is. By the time she was able to understand
things, and she turned out to be a strong, healthy girl, it just didn’t seem that important any
more. We didn’t see any reason to tell her.”*

*She quickly said her goodbyes to Mrs. Granger and then rushed up to Professor Dumbledore’s
office. Luckily he was outside his office, just about to go up the staircase, when Ginny called out
to him, “Professor, Professor – I need to speak to you. It’s urgent.”*

*“Calm down, Ginny,” he said. “Come on up and you can tell me all about it.”*

Dumbledore had a twinkle in his eye as he absorbed the information given by Ginny. “I did wonder
if something like this might happen. Ginny – I want you to swear to me that you won’t breath a word
of this to anyone - no one at all. Not Ron, not Hermione, and especially not Harry. This has to
remain between us two alone.”

*“Yes Professor. I promise.”*

*“I’ll give you the password to my office, Ginny – and every time I change it. If you see any
developments between them, I want you to come here and tell me immediately. Do you
understand?”*

*“Yes sir. I promise.”*

.

.

.

Ginny now sat transfixed, waiting to see what would happen next. She couldn’t stop a little tear
running down her face as she waited. She glanced at Hermione and saw that she wasn’t aware of
anything yet. She still wore the sad expression on her face.

‘If she’s not the one,’ thought Harry, ‘why am I feeling like this?’

The power given off by the rings was increasing all the time, and the silvery light surrounding
Harry started to get a bit more distinct. The light also did something else. It slowly extended
across the room and alighted on Hermione.

Again, only Harry and Ginny saw this.

Harry gazed longingly at his friend with growing realisation. ‘I love you Hermione’ he thought.
‘She must be the one. How can she not be?’

Suddenly, Hermione’s head snapped up. She thought she’d heard something – Harry faintly calling
to her – telling her he loved her. She looked over at Harry, her vision blurred by the tears that
she strove to hold back, and saw that he was still staring at her. But she didn’t notice the
silvery light. She looked back down at her book, sadly.

‘I’m getting delusional now,’ she thought. ‘I really must get a grip.’

Harry had seen Hermione look up suddenly just after his thoughts of love for her, and he
wondered if the rings were sending his thoughts across the room. He could now clearly see the
silvery light covering her.

As the rings grew more active in his hand, he again thought, ‘I love you Hermione,’ and this
time tried to will those thoughts in her direction.

Suddenly, Hermione’s eyes went wide, and her mouth dropped open. She’d heard it again. She
looked back up and across to Harry. His emerald green eyes were sparkling, and he was smiling at
her. Her eyes were full of wonder as she finally saw the narrow band of light that joined them
both. And she realised that she hadn’t imagined anything. She couldn’t prevent the tears that ran
down her cheeks then - she knew at last that Harry loved her.

She formed her own thoughts now, ‘I love you too, Harry. I always have.’

Harry heard it in his mind. There was no longer any doubt.

He suddenly rose to his feet, knocking his chair backwards, and strode purposefully over to the
girls’ table. Everyone looked on in amazement as Harry gently took Hermione’s hand and drew her to
her feet. When they touched, the silvery light disappeared, although the rings were still warm and
vibrating. Nothing was said as they looked deeply into each other’s eyes. He then pulled her gently
towards the portrait hole, and they went outside.

Ginny’s face was now awash with tears, but the wide grin she wore revealed her true feelings.
She saw Ron, his face set in a grim expression, go to follow them through the portrait hole, and
dashed over to stop him.

“He’s hurt her before, Ginny. I won’t let him do it again,” he said.

Her voice was choked as she stretched up and whispered in his ear, “No Ron. He won’t hurt her.
How could he? Hermione’s his Anima Summa.”

“What!” said Ron staring at his sister as if she had two heads.

“There’s something I’ve got to tell you, Ron. Something that I was sworn to keep secret until it
happened. But it *has* just happened and it doesn’t matter any more. Come on – I’ll tell you
on the way to see Dumbledore.”

***

Harry and Hermione sat on the bench beneath the tall oak tree down by the lake and gazed into
each-others’ eyes. They were both still in deep shock, and had not spoken a word to each other.

Harry lifted his hand and gently laid it on Hermione’s cheek, his thumb wiping away the tears
that still flowed freely from her beautiful eyes. She leaned into his hand and covered it with her
own. She closed her eyes, unable to comprehend fully what was happening.

“I love you, Hermione,” whispered Harry.

“I love you too, Harry,” she replied.

He pulled her head towards him and gently kissed her. They were soon lost in the wondrous
feelings of love that followed, their kisses becoming deeper and more urgent.

Breathlessly, Harry pulled back and put his hand into his cloak pocket. “I need to do
something,” he said as he pulled his hand back out, now holding the rings.

Harry lifted Hermione’s left hand and placed one of the rings on her middle finger. Then he
placed the other ring on the middle finger of his own right hand. Harry didn’t know why he did it
this way – it just felt right, somehow.

They both saw the silvery light return and envelope them both. They looked on wide-eyed with
wonder as they began to sense each-others’ innermost thoughts and emotions. Any remaining doubt was
completely dispelled as they saw what each felt for the other.

But Harry’s face contorted with remorse as he saw the pain that Hermione had gone through these
past few months. He hadn’t realised before that all her ills were caused by him - his inability to
see what he could clearly see now. He couldn’t believe how insensitive he’d been. How could he have
caused this beautiful girl so much hurt?

Then he heard Hermione’s thought push past the remorse, ‘Hush, Harry. That’s all in the past.
Feel how I feel now – not then. It more than makes up for those months before we really knew each
other.’

And he felt those emotions and his face regained its serene look.

He reached down with his right hand, and held her left hand gently. As he did so, the rings
touched.

There was a sudden shimmer, and the silvery light that surrounded them changed to a sparkling
blue. Then they heard a powerful, but gentle voice in their minds, speaking to them as if they were
one. It was the voice they’d heard back in the secret chamber. It was the voice of Jesus.

‘THIS IS THE POWER OF THE RINGS. HEAR ME.’

***

Dumbledore was in the middle of a meeting with his close aides when Ginny and Ron burst into the
room. Snape tutted in annoyance, while Sirius, Ceri, Remus, McGonagall and Flitwick, who had now
been included in the circle for the first time, looked up expectantly.

Ginny and Ron hesitated as they saw their professors staring at them, then Dumbledore got up and
walked around his desk. “By the expression on your face, Ginny, it seems that something has
happened at last, am I right?”

“Yes, Professor. It happened a few minutes ago in the common room.”

“What’s happened?” the professors shouted as one.

“Oh, I think you’re all going to like this. Come and sit down you two. Ginny – tell us exactly
what happened please.”

“It’s Harry. He’s found his Anima Summa. It’s Hermione.”

There were gasps all around the room, and then Ginny related the sequence of events leading up
to Harry and Hermione going out of the common room together. She also told them, at Dumbledore’s
nod, about Hermione’s premature birth.

“Where are they now?” said Ceri, unable to keep the excitement from her voice.

“I think they went outside, Ceri,” said Ron.

“Yes, they’re down by the lake under the oak tree,” said Remus who had gone over to look out of
the window.

There was a mad rush as everyone in the room crowded around the window, looking at the couple
down by the lake. There were gasps as they saw Harry put the rings on their fingers, and the
silvery light covered them. There were even louder gasps as they saw the silver change to sparkling
blue.

Ceri suddenly staggered back from the window and would have fallen if Sirius hadn’t reached out
to steady her. “The emotions,” she gasped. “They’re so strong. Even at this distance.”

She went back to the window, with Sirius’ help, and they all continued to look.

***

‘WELCOME ANIMA SUMMAS. YOU HAVE A GREAT AND AWESOME TASK AHEAD OF YOU, BUT YOU ARE NOT YET FULLY
MATURE – BOTH PHYSICALLY AND EMOTIONALLY – I WILL HELP YOU WITH THAT.

DO NOT FORGET THAT THE RINGS YOU NOW WEAR MUST BE RETURNED FROM WHENCE THEY CAME. FUTURE
GENERATIONS MAY BE NEEDFUL OF THEM.

I MUST WARN YOU THAT THERE IS GREAT DANGER AHEAD. DO NOT BE APART – YOU MUST REMAIN AS ONE. ONLY
THEN WILL YOU BE ABLE TO OVERCOME THE ORDEALS THAT AWAIT YOU.

THERE ARE TWO MORE QUESTS FOR YOU TO COMPLETE BEFORE YOU WILL BE ABLE TO FACE THE DARK FORCES
WITH IMPUNITY. THE FIRST OF THESE TASKS WILL BE GIVEN TO YOU SHORTLY, BUT BEFORE YOU CAN EMBARK ON
IT, YOU MUST LEARN TO GROW AND DEVELOP YOUR NEW POWERS – SEEK OUT THIS KNOWLEDGE WISELY AND
PRACTICE IT.

THE ANCIENT WISDOM AND SPELLS I GAVE YOU IN MY SECRET CHAMBER ARE NOW AVAILABLE TO YOU. USE THEM
WITH DIGNITY AND SELFLESSLY.

I WILL NOW LEAVE YOU FOR THERE IS MUCH FOR YOU TO DISCOVER.

REMEMBER, DO NOT BE APART AND ALWAYS WEAR THE RINGS.

BE ASSURED THAT I WILL REMAIN WITH YOU ALWAYS.

The voice of Jesus trailed off to a whisper as he spoke the last few words. The blue light
disappeared and the two seemed normal once more. They quickly found, however, that they could still
sense each-other’s emotions whenever they touched, and could still hear each-other’s thoughts if
they tried hard, even if they weren’t touching.

“I think I must be dreaming,” said Hermione. “I can’t believe this is happening. If you only
knew how much I’ve longed for this, Harry.”

“But I do know, Hermione – don’t I?”

“Yes – of course you do,” she replied as she pulled him towards her and held him close.

They stayed like this for the next five minutes, immersed in their love - a love of such quality
and intensity not experienced by anyone since Merlin and Morgana over a millennium ago. They were,
simply, ecstatic as they felt the full force of their love for the first time.

At the edge of the Forbidden Forest, Margot watched with increasing excitement. Her vivid green
eyes shone and her face lit up with a sunny smile.

‘It’s happened at last,’ she thought to herself. ‘I must now return to Rennes-le-Chateau and
prepare.’

Hermione passionately kissed Harry before they broke apart, gasping. After a little while, they
put their foreheads together and whispered to each other.

“This sensing of emotions, Harry. I wonder if it only works between us, or if we can make it
work with other people?”

“Why do you ask that?”

“Because there are a couple of people with whom I’d like to share what we have. And I want them
to feel how I feel about them too.”

“Yes,” Harry replied, smiling, “I’d like to try it on Ron and Ginny, too.”

“Are you scared at all, Harry? With what’s just happened, I mean.”

“Not really scared. There was nothing frightening about it, was there? But I am a bit awed by it
all. How about you?”

“I feel the same. Jesus told us we’ve got to learn to develop our powers, and he told us to seek
out the knowledge wisely. What do you think he meant by that?”

“I don’t know. Perhaps we have to go back to the secret chamber to get more instruction? I don’t
know. I think we’d better ask Professor Dumbledore. After all, Jesus did tell us to listen to his
advice.”

***

Back in Dumbledore’s office, everyone had returned to their seats after the silvery blue light
disappeared. They were all reluctant to intrude on the couple’s privacy longer than was
necessary.

When he spoke, Dumbledore’s voice was stronger and more vibrant than it had been for many a long
year. The sparkle was aglow in his eyes once more.

“Right, everyone. We now need to plan our next actions. We’ve got a lot to do now that Harry and
Hermione have bonded and we have to make plans to help them. Ron, Ginny – go down to the grounds
and wait for your friends. Don’t interrupt them, but when they come back up to the school, will you
ask them to come to see us please?”

“Yes, Professor,” said Ron, and he and Ginny then made their way down to the Entrance Hall.

Harry and Hermione ambled back up to the school, holding hands, when they heard a rustle from
one of the bushes alongside the path. They looked and saw Draco Malfoy emerge and walk towards
them.

“Well, well,” said the sneering Malfoy. “What do we have here then? Found yourself a new
girlfriend, Potter? I’m surprised at you, Granger – I thought you had better taste.”

The two looked at each other; distaste clearly showing on their faces. Then Harry lifted his
right hand, Hermione her left, and they pointed them, palms outwards, at Malfoy.

“PA HENKYT MALFOY,” they both said together.

A silvery-blue light shot from their palms, the streams of light joining a few yards in front of
the pair, and then shot straight at Malfoy.

Malfoy’s eyes went wide and his mouth dropped open as he shimmered, floated up above the ground,
and then vanished with a loud ‘pop.’

“Bloody hell!” gasped Ron as he and Ginny ran down to their two friends. “That was incredible.
What did you do to Malfoy?”

“Oh nothing much,” said Hermione. “We thought he’d be better off back in bed.”

Down in the Slytherin dungeon, Draco Malfoy blinked several times and looked down at himself. He
patted himself all over, but could feel nothing out of place. In fact, he felt as good as he’d ever
felt – physically that is. He looked around and saw that he was sitting on his bed in the Slytherin
dormitory. He gave a shudder and whispered to himself, “What the hell was that? Wand-less magic!
Granger must be Potter’s Anima Summa, and it looks like they’ve joined together. I’ve got to tell
father about this straight away.”

Crabbe and Goyle, who were sitting in the Slytherin common room munching on two very large
cakes, looked up in surprise as their friend shot down the staircase, quill and parchment in hand,
and rushed out of the room.

“I’ll be back later,” Draco shouted over his shoulder. “I’ve got to go to the Owlery.”

Back at the steps outside the school, Ginny rushed to Hermione and caught around her in a tight
hug.

“I’m so glad, Hermione. I thought you two would never get together. I’ve been waiting for ages
for this to happen.”

“What do you mean, Ginny? You knew all along that Hermione was my Anima Summa?” asked Harry
incredulously.

“Yes, Harry. Well, I was pretty sure it was her, but I couldn’t be one hundred percent
sure.”

“But how, Ginny?” asked Hermione as she gently eased her friend away from her. “I mean, my
birthday’s 19th September. Jesus told us that the Anima Summa was born exactly three
months after Harry. How is it possible? Jesus can’t be wrong, can he?”

“No, Hermione, he wasn’t wrong. But think carefully – he said you had to be *conceived*
three months after Harry, not necessarily *born* three months after him. When your mother told
me you were born six weeks prematurely, I just knew it had to be you.”

“I ... I was born prematurely?” said Hermione quietly. “They never told me.”

“They didn’t think it was important. You were very ill back then, and I don’t think they wanted
to be reminded of the pain they went through, not knowing if you’d survive.”

“I wish I’d known,” said Hermione quietly.

“Me too,” said Harry. “It would have made things so much easier.”

“I was sworn to secrecy by Dumbledore. I couldn’t tell you. But it would have been easier for me
too if I could have,” said Ginny. “You don’t know the agonies I’ve been through keeping this to
myself. Watching you being so hurt and sad, Hermione, and you, Harry, wracked with worry about
finding the right one. You don’t know the number of times I wanted to go up to you and beat some
sense into your head.”

“I wish you had, Ginny,” he replied softly.

“Kristen knew too, even before she was aware of the Anima Summa prophecy. She knew you were in
love with someone else, Harry, and she confided in me that she thought it was Hermione. Like me,
she saw the way you looked at her. But I had to make her swear she wouldn’t tell you. That’s why
she split up with you, Harry.”

“Uh,” said Ron, “Professor Dumbledore wants you to go up to his office. He wants to speak to you
both. But tell me, what was that spell you did on Malfoy? You didn’t use your wands. What language
was that? I haven’t heard anything like it before.”

“It was just there – in our heads,” said Harry shrugging helplessly. “It must have been one of
those ancient spells Jesus told us about. I don’t know why we didn’t use our wands – what we did
just felt like the right thing to do.”

“Well it looked pretty awesome from where I was standing,” said Ron.

“Come on then,” said Harry, “let’s all go up.”

“Uh, I think he wants to speak to just you two,” said Ginny.

Harry looked at Hermione and they smiled and nodded to each other. “Where we go, you go too –
for as long as you want, that is,” said Harry.

“Before we go up, there’s something we want to try,” said Hermione.

“Ginny,” whispered Harry, “come and hold my hand.”

“And you come and hold mine, Ron,” said Hermione.

The red-haired pair looked puzzled, but did as they were asked. Harry and Hermione closed their
eyes and concentrated. As they connected, they once again felt their innermost emotions, their love
for each other and for their two friends. As one, they slowly pushed their thoughts and feelings
out through themselves and into Ron and Ginny.

“Oh it’s so beautiful and wonderful,” cried Ginny as the tears ran down her face.

Ron just stood, glassy-eyed, unable to voice what he was feeling – there just didn’t seem to be
the words that would do it justice.

Harry and Hermione were surprised when they were able to feel the thoughts and emotions of their
two friends. They had only intended to show Ron and Ginny what they felt – they hadn’t expected a
three-way interaction. Ron – Ginny – Harry/Hermione as one.

They stood like that for only about five minutes, but the bond between all four was strengthened
immeasurably within that short time.

As they broke contact at last, the four just stood and looked at each other. There was nothing
to be said. They now knew far more than all the words in the world were capable of expressing.

As they walked up to Dumbledore’s office, Ron suddenly stopped and turned around, causing the
others, who were behind, to bump into him.

“Uh, Hermione?” he asked tentatively. “This thought transference thing – telepathy – do you
think it’ll work if we’re not physically in contact? I mean, like across a classroom – say, for
instance, when we’re taking our OWLS and the classroom’s very quiet.”

“Ron!” said Ginny as she slapped his arm.

“Honestly, Ron!” said Hermione.

Harry just laughed.

“Well, it was worth a try, wasn’t it?” said Ron.

Ron and Ginny smiled at each other as they approached the headmaster’s office. They were both
pleased to see that their two friends had not changed in the slightest – at least not when they
weren’t mentally linked together – but even that was not really a change. It was just something
new, and very, very special.



14. The Attack
--------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 2 2505 2003-07-18T11:02:00Z 2003-07-18T11:02:00Z 20 7967 45413 378 90
55770 9.2720 Normal Chapter 12A

**The Attack**

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Notes :**

Watch out for the Epilogue – The Burrow. Coming soon. I’ll also be including some of my thoughts
on this fic and a little preview from Chapter 1 of Book 2 – I’ll want to know if you think I should
continue with this and publish. Some points on the review board :

- Why couldn’t it be something simple that set the rings off? – The path to fulfilment of the
prophecy is not easy. The time has to be right for progression to the next stage to take place –
there’s more about this in book 2.

- Margot – Pronounced Mar-go, it’s the French short form of Margaret.

Ron and Ginny pushed Harry and Hermione in front of them as they went into the headmaster’s
office. Dumbledore’s inner circle was still sitting around the desk, and looked up expectantly as
the four walked in. Everyone was beaming at them – even Snape managed a grudging smile.

Ceri was the first to approach, and she caught around Hermione and whispered, “I’m so glad
Hermione. I can’t tell you how pleased I am for you.”

“Thanks, Ceri,” she replied, “I ... I can’t believe this is happening.”

“Come on, you four,” said Dumbledore, “come and join us. We’ve got a lot to discuss. But first
let me congratulate you both, Anima Summas. I know everyone around this table is really pleased
that you’re together at last. From what Ginny said, and having observed you both over the last few
months, I think I can safely say that the bonding was completely spontaneous – you both still have
that look of surprise on your faces. So you should be able to achieve full powers – whatever they
may be.”

“Thank you, Professor,” said Harry as the four sat down. “I don’t think it’s really sunk in
yet.”

“Ginny told us what happened up in the common room,” said Sirius, “but can you tell us any more?
I mean, we all saw that silvery light surrounding you both, and then it changed to blue. What was
that?”

“It was the rings, Sirius,” said Harry. “The silvery light came when I put them on our fingers.
Then when the rings touched, the light changed. And the rings spoke to us.”

Dumbledore looked up suddenly. “They spoke to you? Can you tell us what was said?”

“Well they didn’t really speak, Professor,” said Hermione. “There was no sound or anything – we
just, well, sort of felt the words inside our heads. It told us that we’d receive details of the
first of the remaining two quests very shortly.”

“And it told us that we had to develop our new powers,” Harry continued. “We have to seek out
the knowledge wisely and practice it. I think we need to get your advice on that, Professor
Dumbledore.”

“Oh,” said Hermione, “and it warned us of great danger ahead. It said we mustn’t be apart. We
have to remain as one.”

Hermione and Harry looked deeply into each other’s eyes as she finished. The professors sat
spellbound as they listened.

“And that’s not all,” said Ron. “Tell them about that spell with Malfoy.”

“Draco saw you?” said Snape animatedly. “Does he know about you two?”

“Yes, Professor,” said Hermione. “We saw him as we walked back to the school. Even if he didn’t
see us together under the tree, he’ll know something strange is going on because of what we did to
him.”

“When he made some snide remarks about us,” said Harry, “we – well we sent him back to his
dormitory.”

“How did you do that?” asked Remus.

“The spell just came into our heads,” replied Harry.

“But that’s not all,” said Ginny. “They didn’t use their wands. They can do wand-less magic,
now.”

All the professors in the room gasped, and just stared.

“We don’t know if we can do it individually,” said Hermione, “or whether we have to be
physically touching for it to happen. I suppose that’s something we have to find out.”

“What was the spell you used?” asked Dumbledore.

“It was PA HENKYT,” said Harry.

“What’s that?” asked McGonagall. “I’ve never heard anything like that before. What language is
it?”

“We don’t know Professor,” said Hermione. “It just came into our heads – or to be more accurate,
our collective conscious.”

“Pa Henkyt,” said Dumbledore. “That’s not a language I’ve heard before. How do you think it’s
spelt? Is it P-A H-E-N-K-Y-T?”

“I don’t know, sir,” said Hermione, “but that sounds about right, I think.”

“Hang on a minute,” said the headmaster as he got up from his chair and walked to the large
bookcase at the back of his office. He rummaged around and then came back to his desk carrying a
very large, leather-bound book. He turned the pages over, searching, and then stopped.

“Pa – it means ‘fly to’.” He turned several other pages over and then looked up again. “Henkyt –
it means ‘bed.’ You told Draco Malfoy to, literally, fly to bed.”

“What language is it, Headmaster?” asked Remus. “I must say I’ve studied a lot of them, but I’ve
never heard anything like that before.”

“No, I don’t suppose you have, Remus,” replied Dumbledore. “And neither has anyone else – at
least not for the last three thousand years. It’s Middle-Kingdom Egyptian. I thought the spellings
were familiar – you see, I studied Egyptian hieroglyphics at University. There are a number of
different transliterations available today – but they all only guess at what the words would have
sounded like.”

“And this is only the start,” said Flitwick. “When you begin to develop your powers, who knows
how much ancient knowledge will become available to you.”

“Awesome. Really awesome,” said Ron.

“Is there anything else you’ve found?” asked McGonagall.

“Yes Professor,” said Hermione. “We’re able to feel each other’s emotions when we’re in contact,
and we can also send those emotions to other people we touch – and pick up what they feel as well.
We did it with Ron and Ginny before we came up here.”

“And we can read each other’s thoughts,” said Harry. “We even did that when we weren’t
touching.”

“Phew!” exclaimed Sirius. “This is incredible.”

“Sorry to bring everybody back down to earth,” said Ceri, “but what are we going to do now? Are
we going to try to keep this quiet – I mean not just the Anima Summas, but also the fact that Harry
and Hermione are together as a couple? What do you think, Professor Dumbledore?”

Dumbledore thought for a few moments, and then said, “I don’t know if that’s possible. I mean,
we can’t tell Harry and Hermione to keep their distance from each other can we – I doubt they’d be
able to even if they tried. And it’s as plain as the nose on your face how they feel about each
other. We have to keep the Anima Summa information quiet, of course, but when it gets out that
they’re an item, it’s bound to attract the attention of the Daily Prophet – especially after those
articles Rita Skeeter wrote about them back last year.”

“But I don’t think we can keep it from ‘You Know Who’ Professor,” said Snape. “When Lucius
Malfoy hears about this – and you can be sure that Draco will tell him about the wand-less magic –
he’ll go running to the Dark Lord post haste.”

“Do you think that Draco’s the spy, Severus?” asked Flitwick.

“There’s no proof of that, Filius. And I’m not suggesting that he is for one minute, but I know
he’s in touch with his father regularly. There’s nothing sinister in that, but he’s bound to tell
him what’s happened.”

“Yes, I’m afraid you’re right, Severus,” said Dumbledore, looking quite sad. “Voldemort is bound
to find out. But I don’t want Cornelius Fudge or the Daily Prophet finding out about the Anima
Summa just yet – things will start to get out of hand when that happens. Perhaps we’d better sleep
on it for now. Harry, Hermione – it’s basically up to you two whether you want the rest of the
school to know that you’re a couple. We’ll all meet back here after lunch tomorrow, and then you
can tell us what you’ve decided. Thank you everybody, it’s been a very eventful day, and I’m sure
you want to get to your beds – without any help from the Anima Summas though, I hasten to add.”

***

“This place is so beautiful, Nadine. No wonder you come up here as often as you can.”

Charlie and Nadine were taking a break from writing the report on the magical creature activity,
and were walking slowly up the little wooded valley above Demont’s cabin. They were walking
alongside the mountain stream, heading up to try to find its source.

“Yes, Charlie - this place is in my blood. Whenever I’m away from here I always feel as if
there’s something missing.”

“Hang on, Nadine. I’ll help you,” said Charlie as he athletically leapt over a stile at the side
of the stream.

“Thank you, kind sir,” she replied as she climbed the stile and balanced precariously on the top
step, holding her arms out towards Charlie.

Now if a soccer referee had been present, he would have immediately given Nadine a yellow card
for the obvious ‘dive’ she then took. Charlie, however, didn’t notice the subterfuge and just
steadied himself as she crashed into him.

“Careful, Nadine,” he whispered, their faces just inches apart and his arms holding her
tightly.

“Sorry, Charlie,” she replied quietly.

“I’m not,” he said, and he did what he’d been dying to do ever since he met her. As they kissed,
everything around them seemed to dissolve – only the two of them mattered - everything else was
forgotten. It was as if the beauty of the countryside had been transferred into their very beings.
They didn’t even see the grinning Demont as he stood watching them about 50 yards back down the
valley.

Demont whistled happily to himself as he trotted back to the wine shed at the edge of the
stream. He wanted to write a short note to his fellow conspirator at Hogwarts. ‘Ginny is going to
be so pleased,’ he thought to himself as he tied the note to his owl and sent her on her way.

A while later, around lunchtime, Charlie and Nadine walked back to the cabin, and were
pleasantly surprised to see that Demont had prepared lunch on the table outside. He was sitting on
one of the chairs grinning broadly as they joined him.

“What?” said Nadine, looking quizzically at her brother.

“It’s happened at last, hasn’t it,” he replied. “You’ve both finally seen the light.”

“Demont ...” Charlie started to reply.

“I saw you up at the side of the stream,” continued Demont, “and I just had to make you lunch,
by way of celebration.”

“Oh,” said Charlie.

“Don’t look like that, Charlie. I’m pleased for you both. Really pleased. Come on, let’s tuck
in.”

Nadine and Charlie looked at each other and then burst out laughing. Demont got up and kissed
his radiant sister, and then caught hold of the grinning Charlie’s hand and shook it
vigorously.

“Oh, I’d better tell you both – I just sent Della to Hogwarts with a note for Ginny. She’ll be
really pleased to hear the news about you two.”

“Oh no,” said Charlie. “That means that mum will know about it too – that’s the first thing
Ginny’ll do when she finds out. I can expect a plague of owls now. Mum’ll want to know everything
about you, Nadine. And she’ll want to meet you - she won’t rest till she does.”

“Don’t worry, Charlie,” said Nadine. “It’s just natural for a mother to want to know about the
girl that’s in love with her son.”

Charlie looked at Nadine intensely, again lost in her beautiful deep blue eyes. Then he shook
himself. “What about your parents? Have you owled them as well, Demont?”

“Not yet Charlie. I’ll have to wait for Della to come back first.”

As they ate their lunch, Charlie’s expression suddenly changed from ecstatic to worried.

“What’s the matter, Charlie?” said Nadine. “What’s wrong?”

“Oh, Nadine. Just as we get together, I’m going to have to leave you for a few days. I’ve got to
give my lecture at the ministry in London the day after tomorrow, so I’ll have to go back in the
morning to prepare my presentation.”

“Oh,” said Nadine, her smile fading slowly from her face.

“What’s the problem Charlie?” said Demont. “As I see it, you can kill two birds with one stone.
Why don’t you take Nadine with you? She can give you moral support at your lecture, and then you
can visit your parents together.”

“Nadine?” Charlie lifted his eyebrows questioningly at her.

“Yes. I’d love to come, Charlie. Just as long as I won’t be in the way.”

“You can never be in the way, Nadine. And I’ll be able to show you off to my friends at the
ministry.”

“Right, that’s settled then,” said Demont. “Come on - let’s get back to work. The sooner we
finish this report the more time you’ll have to yourselves.”

***

Hermione, Harry and Ron sat in the Great Hall eating their lunch. The Anima Summas had made
great efforts to act normally all day, trying to conceal their feelings for each other until they
met Dumbledore before the afternoon classes started.

Suddenly, Ginny came tearing into the hall, clutching a piece of parchment and grinning all over
her face. She quickly sat down beside Hermione, breathing heavily.

“What’s the matter, Ginny?” said Hermione.

The three looked expectantly at the grinning redhead, waiting for her to get her breath.

“It’s happened,” she blurted.

“What. What’s happened?” said Ron impatiently.

“Charlie and Nadine. They’ve got together at last. I just had an owl from Demont.”

“Oh that’s great!” said Hermione, clutching her friend’s hand.

“Oh is that all?” said Ron looking disappointed. “I thought that something important had
happened – like the Chudley Cannons signing that star chaser everybody’s talking about.”

“Ron!” said Hermione and Ginny together.

Harry chuckled to himself. “That’s great, Ginny. I know how much you’ve been wanting that to
happen.”

“Thank you, Harry,” said Ginny, and then turned to Ron, looking hurt. “You should be happy for
Charlie, Ron.”

“Oh I am, Ginny. Honestly I am. But it wasn’t exactly unexpected, was it.”

“Well,” said Ginny. “Mum’s going to be so pleased about this. Ron, can I borrow Pigwidgeon? I’ve
got to send her a note straight away.”

“Yes ok, Ginny,” he replied.

Ginny got up quickly and raced off towards the Owlery. “Don’t forget our meeting in fifteen
minutes,” Hermione shouted after her.

Ten minutes later, Ginny made her way towards Dumbledore’s office. As she climbed the main
staircase Parvati and Lavender, who stood right in front of her, looking determined, halted
her.

“What’s happening between Harry and Hermione Ginny?” asked Parvati. “Something’s going on, isn’t
there!”

“Wh ... what makes you say that, Parvati?”

“Come on Ginny. The Slytherins have been spreading rumours that they’re an item all morning. But
if anybody knows, you do.”

“And we’ve noticed the way they’ve been looking at each other in class this morning,” said
Lavender.

“I ... I. Look, I can’t stop to talk now. Dumbledore wants to see me – like straight away. I’ll
speak to you later, right?”

Ginny deftly sidestepped around the two girls and ran up the stairs to the headmaster’s
office.

“There’s something going on all right,” said Lavender.

“Sorry I’m late, everybody,” said Ginny as she walked into the headmaster’s office.

“Come and sit down Ginny,” said Dumbledore smiling. Hermione had told everyone about Charlie and
his new French girlfriend and Ginny’s visit to the Owlery.

“Right then,” said Dumbledore. “Harry, Hermione. Have you decided what you’re going to do
yet?”

“Uh, sorry to interrupt,” said Ginny, “but I don’t think there’s any point in Harry and Hermione
trying to hide that they’re an item. Lavender and Parvati stopped me on the way here - that’s why
I’m late. It seems that Draco Malfoy’s been blabbing, and there’re rumours about them coming from
the Slytherins. But more importantly Hermione, Lavender and Parvati have noticed the vibes coming
from you and Harry. And you know what they’re like. Once they get a whiff of something romantic,
they won’t stop until they find out about it.”

“We’ve been trying our hardest to conceal it all morning,” said Hermione, looking aghast.

“But there’s no point any more,” said Harry. “We’ve already decided to make it known,
anyway.”

“It was just so difficult trying to keep it concealed this morning,” said Hermione.

“All right. I respect your decision,” said Dumbledore. “Just keep your eyes out for Rita
Skeeter. She’s bound to come looking for a story sooner or later. So – how are you going to let
everybody know?”

“Oh, we won’t say a thing, will we Hermione?”

“No – not a thing. But everybody’ll know before we eat dinner this evening.”

“All right. Good luck,” said McGonagall. “You four had better get to your classes now.”

After they’d gone, Dumbledore called the meeting to order.

“It’s best that they go public, I think,” said Flitwick. “It would be too hard for them to keep
how they feel about each other under wraps. But what bothers me is that they may show something,
well, unusual when they’re together. I mean, they don’t even know themselves what they’re capable
of, magically, and what they may find ‘normal’ may be seen as quite startling to everyone else. Can
you see what I’m getting at?”

“Yes, I think we do, Filius,” said Dumbledore. “It’s only a matter of time, really, that strange
things will start to happen when they’re together. And you can be sure that it’ll get back to
Fudge, eventually.”

“I just hope that he won’t start snooping around until they’ve sat their OWLS,” said
McGonagall.

“Yes, Minerva. That’s what concerns me. We’re just going to have to do a bit of stone-walling
until the exams are over.”

“What about ‘You Know Who,’ Headmaster?” asked Remus. “What do you think he’ll do when he finds
out that Hermione is the Anima Summa?”

“I don’t know, Remus. I think he’ll try everything to get at them now. He might even try to
attack Hogwarts itself.”

There was a gasp from everyone in the room.

“Surely you don’t think he’ll go that far, Headmaster?” said McGonagall aghast.

“Minerva, Voldemort is capable of just about anything. And if he can see his dream of world
domination being threatened, he may just do that. We’ll just have to be as vigilant as we can.”

That evening, the Great Hall was buzzing with the rumours about Harry and Hermione. Although
rumours that came from the Slytherins were normally taken with a pinch of salt, Lavender and
Parvati had wasted no time in telling everybody what they thought was going on. Everyone kept
looking at the Gryffindor table, but although Ron and Ginny were there, there was no sign of their
two friends. No one noticed that Kristen was also missing.

Then the Great Hall doors opened, and everyone turned to look, the room becoming quiet. And
Kristen walked in. She was smiling as she walked to her usual seat at the Gryffindor table. The
buzz of chatter started up again as Kristen sat down. Parvati and Lavender started quizzing her
about why she was late.

“Where’ve you been, Kristen?” asked Lavender. “Have you seen Harry and Hermione?”

“Just wait, Lavender,” she replied. “They’ll be here in a moment.”

“What? Have they said anything to you?” asked Parvati.

“Just wait,” said Kristen. She was still feeling the wonderful emotions shared with her by Harry
and Hermione after they’d told her that Hermione was the Anima Summa. Although she was still a bit
fragile about losing Harry, she was really glad that Hermione had been the one. And she was glad
that they’d taken the trouble to tell her everything before the rest of the students found out.

Then the doors opened again. Once more, every head turned around and the room became very
quiet.

First, Hermione entered and then waited as Harry followed and closed the doors behind him. Then,
not taking their eyes from each other, they reached out and held hands - and then walked towards
the Gryffindor table.

The room erupted with excited chatter, and there were some jealous looks among some of the
girls. Most of them, however, were grinning broadly, and the Gryffindor girls rushed to the pair,
firing questions. Lavender was the first to arrive, quickly followed by Parvati.

“It’s true then? You’re really together – as a couple?”

“Yes, Lavender,” said Hermione.

“And about time too,” said Parvati. “We’ve had our suspicions for a while now – ever since we
caught you watching …Uh, so when did this happen then?”

“Only yesterday evening, Parvati,” Hermione looked gratefully at her.

“Well we’re really pleased for you both,” said Lavender. “Come on, come and get something to
eat.”

Everyone went back to the table, except for little Clare Bryant, who tugged Harry’s cloak and
gestured for him to lean close to her.

“I’m glad you’re together with Hermione, Harry. She’s nice, and I’m sure she’ll be able to cheer
you up.”

“Well thank you, Clare,” said Harry grinning as Clare walked back to her seat.

Harry and Hermione sat opposite Ron and Ginny, who were grinning widely. “Well there’s no going
back now,” said Ginny.

***

The following evening, Charlie and Nadine stood nervously outside the Burrow. Charlie had given
his lecture on the Romanian Longhorn dragons, and it had proved to be a great success. Now he
anticipated a more harrowing time as he prepared himself mentally to introduce Nadine to his
mother.

“Well are we going in, Charlie?” asked Nadine.

“Yes, in a moment Nadine. Look, my mother can be a bit, well, overpowering at times. And she’s
going to be pretty excited at meeting you. Are you going to be ok?”

“Yes, Charlie, of course I am. Come on - let’s go in. You really should have told them we were
coming, you know.”

Charlie grinned nervously. “They like surprises, Nadine.”

They walked up to the door and Charlie opened it cautiously. They walked into the kitchen to see
Arthur sitting at the table reading the Daily Prophet, Molly over by the stove preparing dinner,
and Percy sitting in a chair by the fireplace reading a ministry report. As they walked in, all
three heads shot up and just stared at them for a few moments.

Then Molly let out a loud shriek, the pan she was holding clattering into the sink. She ran over
to Charlie and threw her arms around his neck.

“Why didn’t you tell me you were coming?” she said as she looked across at Nadine with tearful
eyes. “I’d have prepared a special meal.”

“Uh, mum. This is Nadine – she’s from France. She’s my girlfriend.”

“Oh, Charlie,” said his mother, “I know who it is. I got everything out of your sister
yesterday. Hello, Nadine – you’re very welcome at the Burrow. Come and sit down by the table and
meet the others.”

She caught under Nadine’s arm and eased her over to the kitchen table.

“Very pleased to meet you, Nadine. I’m Charlie’s father – call me Arthur.”

“And I’m Percy, Charlie’s brother,” said Percy smiling as he walked over and sat next to
Nadine.

Nadine shook hands with the two men. “I’m pleased to meet you all. I hope you don’t mind me
dropping in like this?”

“Mind? Of course we don’t,” said Molly. “I’ve been looking forward to meeting you for days.”

“Hello. Who’s this then?”

Everyone looked to see Bill Weasley come into the room. “Nadine,” said Charlie with a wide grin,
“the cool-looking dude who just came in is my elder brother, Bill. Bill this is Nadine.”

Bill smiled and walked over to the table. He lifted Nadine out of her chair and hugged her.

“So you’re the girl who’s captivated my little brother? When I spoke to him last month, he
couldn’t stop talking about you.”

“Hello, Bill. Pleased to meet you,” said Nadine, laughing.

“Bill Weasley,” shouted Molly. “You mean to say you knew all about this a month ago and you
didn’t tell me?”

“No Mum,” said Bill defensively. “I knew Charlie was in love with a girl, but I didn’t know the
feeling was mutual back then.” He looked slyly at Charlie and Nadine. “And for the sake of
Charlie’s sanity, I thought it best not to mention it until he did something about it. You know
what you’re like.”

“Well really!” said Molly, trying to suppress a smile.

“So Bill, what are you doing here? Shouldn’t you be in Egypt?” asked Charlie.

“Oh just a lightening visit, Charlie. I had to come over for a meeting at the bank in Diagon
Alley, so I thought I’d drop in for dinner.”

“Charlie, I didn’t know you had two other brothers,” said Nadine. “I thought it was just Ron and
Ginny.”

“Uh, I’ve got two more as well, Nadine. Fred and George are in their seventh year at Hogwarts. I
suppose you’ll have to meet them at some time.”

“Why do you say it like that, Charlie? Don’t you want them to meet me?”

“Oh no, you misunderstand Nadine. Well, just ask Bill and Percy what they’re like. They’re an
experience all on their own. Believe me, once you’ve met them you won’t be the same person
again.”

“Oh Charlie,” said Arthur. “Now you’re exaggerating. I know those two can be a bit, well,
inventive on times, but they’ll just adore Nadine, I’m sure.”

“Inventive is not the word, Dad,” said Percy. “Remember that time last year when they nearly
blew up all the Slytherins?”

“Yes, Arthur,” said Molly. “I’ve had to send more howlers to those two than all the other kids
put together.”

“Blew up the Slytherins?” said Nadine, laughing. “I think I’m going to like them a lot.”

“Nadine was at Hogwarts for her final year – the year after I left,” explained Charlie, “so she
knows what the Slytherins are like.”

“So how long can you both stay?” asked Arthur.

“Only overnight, Dad,” replied Charlie. “We’ve got to get back to France to finish the report on
the magical creature disturbances.”

“What happened, Charlie? Did you find out the cause of it all in the end?” asked Bill.

“Uh, yes we did. But I can’t really tell you, I’m afraid. Professor Dumbledore has sworn us to
keep it secret.”

“Dumbledore? How’s he involved?” said Bill, looking pointedly at his brother.

“We saw Ron and Ginny in France,” said Charlie. “They were with Harry and Hermione. It seems
they were on a quest, which happened to be the cause of all the disturbances. So we sort of joined
forces with them.”

“And how are you feeling now, Nadine?” asked Molly. “Ginny told me you were hurt in that fight
with the Death Eaters.”

“Oh it was nothing, Mrs. Weasley. Just a cut from some splintered wood.”

“Death Eaters?” shouted Bill. “What were they doing there?”

“Bill, I can’t tell you any more details – let’s just say that the four kids are involved in
some pretty heavy stuff. Don’t worry - they’re well protected. But ‘You Know Who’ is involved.”

“’You Know Who’? In anybody’s language, that means that Ron and Ginny are in great danger. Can’t
we do anything to help?”

“I don’t think so Bill,” said Arthur. “Try not to worry too much – Dumbledore is looking after
them. He won’t let anything happen to them.”

Everybody’s attention was drawn to the fireplace as a rush of blue flame shot up the chimney.
Then Ginny’s head appeared, grinning widely. “Mum?” she shouted.

Molly walked over to the fireplace. “Ginny. I didn’t expect you to call me tonight. What’s the
matter?”

“Just a quick call, mum. Just to tell you that Harry and Hermione have got together – you know,
as a couple.”

“Oh that’s great, Ginny. They’re a lovely couple of kids – well matched.” There was a hint of
disappointment in Molly’s voice – she had secretly hoped that Harry and Ginny would have got
together one day.

Charlie looked at Nadine and walked over to the fireplace to stand beside his mother. “Did I
hear right, Ginny. Harry and Hermione?”

“Charlie!” Ginny shouted. “Is Nadine with you?”

Nadine walked to Charlie’s side. “Hello Ginny. How are you?”

“Oh Nadine. I was so glad to hear about you and Charlie. I can’t wait to meet you both again.
I’ve got so much I want to ask you – and I want to know everything!”

“We’ll probably see you over the summer holidays, Ginny,” said Charlie. “But what about Harry
and Hermione?”

“Look, I’ve got to go now. Everybody’s coming back from dinner. Charlie, Nadine – Hermione’s the
one. You know what I mean. See you soon – ‘bye.”

Ginny’s head disappeared in a burst of blue flame, and Charlie and Nadine just stood
grinning.

“What did she mean, Charlie?” asked Percy. “She’s the one – what was that about?”

“I can’t tell you, I’m afraid. It’s all part of the thing we’ve got to keep secret.”

“Well I’m sure we’ll be told when Dumbledore thinks we need to know,” said Arthur.

Molly let out a yell at the sound of water boiling over on the stove. “The dinner,” she said as
she rushed over. “It’ll be ready in ten minutes.”

“I’ll just show Nadine around the garden, Mum,” said Charlie as he led Nadine out through the
kitchen door.

“She’s a very nice girl, isn’t she?” said Arthur.

“Yes she is,” said Molly, a dreamy look in her eyes. “You could tell straight away, couldn’t
you? And did you see the way they look at each other?”

“I like your family, Charlie,” said Nadine as they walked around the garden, “and I can’t wait
to meet Fred and George.”

Charlie grinned. “They like you as well. I could tell straight away.”

“Do you think that Hermione’s Harry’s Anima Summa, Charlie?”

“Yes, that’s what Ginny meant, all right. I just hope that ‘You Know Who’ doesn’t find out.”

“I’m so glad for them. I could tell that she was in love with Harry, and she was really hurting
back in France – Ceri told me. It’s so romantic, isn’t it?”

“Yes, I guess it is, Nadine. Talking about romance, come here for a minute.”

Nadine squealed with delight as Charlie pulled her to him and kissed her passionately. After
five minutes, Bill, who shouted from the kitchen door, interrupted them.

“Put her down, Charlie. There’s something else to eat in here. Come on.”

After they had finished dinner, they sat at the table talking, finishing off the four bottles of
wine that Bill had brought over from Egypt.

“So, what are you going to do when the report’s finished?” asked Arthur.

Charlie and Nadine appeared startled as they looked at each other.

“Uh, I don’t know, Dad,” said Charlie. “We haven’t really talked about it. And I don’t know what
the ministry’s got lined up for me next – I suppose they’ll let me know after my holidays. They’ve
given me six weeks off – the first break I’ve had for a year. We’re going to spend most of that
time back in France with Nadine’s brother – and we’ll pop back here for the odd visit, of
course.”

“Be sure you do, Charlie,” said Molly darkly.

***

“So Granger’s the other Anima Summa,” said Voldemort reflectively. Lucius Malfoy had just given
his report after receiving the message from Draco. Wormtail looked at the Dark Lord with
trepidation, expecting him to go into a rage. But his master just sat on his throne deep in
thought.

“And you’re sure he’s got it right? They did wand-less magic on him?”

“I’m sure, my Lord,” said Lucius. “He said the spell they used wasn’t in any language they’d
come across at Hogwarts.”

“Hmm. I wonder how strong they are? And from what Lupin told us, they can now only get stronger.
We’ve got to do something, and do it quickly.”

“What do you suggest, my Lord?” asked Lucius.

“I can see no alternative, now,” said Voldemort darkly. “We’ll have to attack Hogwarts. It’ll be
dangerous with Dumbledore there, but perhaps we can arrange a few surprises. Wormtail – go and
summon my inner circle. I want them here, now!”

Wormtail rushed out of the cave while Voldemort tapped the arm of his throne impatiently. Five
minutes later, six more black-cloaked figures stood in front of the throne.

“There have been developments,” said Voldemort. “Potter has found his Anima Summa – the Granger
girl. We have to act soon to capture them - they can’t be allowed to develop their powers. I have
decided that I will lead the attack on the school myself.”

“But my Lord,” said Lucius hurriedly, “you’ll be seen by everyone at the school. The ministry
will be forced to admit that you have returned, and that’s going to set back your greater plan by
months, if not years.”

Voldemort reflected on his chief lieutenant’s advice. “Perhaps you’re right, Lucius. I still
need to be there to control the Dementors and to weaken the protection spells around the grounds,
but it may be better if I remain hidden. I don’t want you seen either, Lucius, nor the rest of you
– your positions at the ministry will be compromised if you’re spotted. Like me, you will have to
remain hidden and direct operations from inside the Forbidden Forest.”

“But who’ll lead the attack, my Lord?” asked Avery. “It won’t be that easy to capture Potter and
Granger now they’ve joined together. And you can be sure that they’ll be well protected.”

“What I have in mind will draw off that protection, Avery, and leave them exposed. Wormtail –
you and Travis will lead the main attack to capture the pair. I want all of you to get together and
choose one hundred of your best Death Eaters for the main attack.”

“Yes, my Lord,” they all said in unison.

Voldemort shifted his position on his throne, and pointed his wand at the floor. As they all
watched, a plan of the school grounds appeared in the dust. He then looked up. “Now this is what I
plan to do …”

***

It was the dead of night at Hogwarts, and all the students were sleeping soundly - except for
two of them who crept silently through the corridors, each carrying a heavy sack over their
shoulders. Peeves was floating about the empty hallways that night, but the two easily managed to
evade him. They’d had plenty of experience at doing that during their seven years at the
school.

They moved stealthily into the Entrance Hallway and then went into the corridor that led down
into the dungeons. They were heading for the Slytherin common room.

“Did you get the password, Fred?”

“Yes George. I put a bit of pressure on that first year Slytherin – I told him that I’d tell
Snape about his little midnight jaunts unless he gave it to me. No problem.”

They tried hard to contain the fit of giggles that bubbled inside them as they approached the
entrance portal to the Slytherin common room. Fred stood in front of the stone snake and said the
password.

“Vampire bites.”

The stone snake hissed and the portal opened. They both let out a sigh of relief as they
silently crept inside.

The following morning, Harry, Hermione, Ron and Ginny went down to the Great Hall early for
breakfast. A few Ravenclaws and Hufflepuffs were there, but the four were surprised to see two
red-haired figures sitting at the Gryffindor table – Fred and George were grinning like Cheshire
cats as they each tucked into a mound of bacon and eggs.

“Uh oh,” said Ginny. “Something’s up. They’re never down this early.”

“What have you two been up to?” asked Ron as the four sat opposite them.

“You’ll just have to wait to find that out, little bro’” said George.

“Let’s just say that this is our big-bang farewell to Hogwarts,” said Fred.

“What have you done?” asked Harry. “I suppose we’d better keep our eyes peeled on the Slytherin
table?”

“Spot on, Harry,” said George.

“Pass the word when the others come down,” said Fred.

Ten minutes later, almost all the Gryffindors, Ravenclaws and Hufflepuffs sat tucking into their
breakfast. But there was no sign of the Slytherins yet. The word had been spread and everyone was
chatting excitedly, wondering what was going to happen.

The teachers looked puzzled at the top table, wondering why no Slytherins had appeared, and what
all the animated chatter was about.

“Severus,” said McGonagall, “where are your lot this morning?”

“I don’t know,” replied Snape. “I think I’d better go and find out.”

As Snape rose from his seat, Malfoy came into the Great Hall, closely followed by Crabbe and
Goyle. Then more Slytherins appeared and walked over to their table. Two minutes later they were
all there. The room had become very quiet, with all the other students watching the Slytherin table
expectantly.

“Something’s up,” said Malfoy to his two friends. “Look at the way everybody’s watching us.”

“What’s gone wrong, Fred?” asked Ron. “Nothing’s happening.”

“Just wait for five minutes,” Fred answered.

Three minutes later, there was a buzz of disappointment around the room as nothing untoward had
occurred at the Slytherin table. They were just wolfing their breakfasts as they normally did, and
talking among themselves. Two minutes after that, something started to happen.

Crabbe, who had stuffed himself silly with five helpings of bacon and eggs, opened his
grease-covered mouth to tell Goyle to pass him some more toast, but no words came out. Instead,
something that resembled a balloon issued from his mouth, floated up to the ceiling, and then
exploded with a loud ‘BANG.’

There was silence in the room as everybody stared. Then Malfoy opened his mouth to ask what was
going on – and the same thing happened. The balloon almost reached the ceiling before it exploded.
Then, all the Slytherins started talking at once – except they didn’t talk. Hundreds of balloons
started rising into the air and exploding. The noise was deafening.

Meanwhile, Fred and George were congratulating themselves on their best prank yet, while all the
other Gryffindors, Ravenclaws and Hufflepuffs fell about with uncontrollable laughter.

As the Slytherins got angrier at what was happening, they started shouting – aiming their ire at
the Gryffindor table. But the bubbles just got bigger and the explosions got louder. As a
consequence, the mirth of the rest of the students increased in intensity – they were all now
rolling about on the floor, holding their sides, as they failed to keep their giggling under
control.

Even most of the teachers were laughing quite openly at the sight – except for Snape, who looked
angrily at the Gryffindor table. Dumbledore’s eyes were twinkling, and he had an amused grin on his
face.

After five minutes, Snape brought the show to a close. He rushed over to his house table and
herded the Slytherins out of the Great Hall and into the school grounds, where it was raining quite
heavily.

After a further five minutes, the students started to recover their composure and some of them
walked up to Fred and George, patting them on their back.

“Really cool, George,” said Lee Jordan.

“Your best one yet, Fred,” said Seamus Finnegan.

“Wicked – really wicked,” said Katie Bell.

“That was hilarious – I can’t remember when I’ve laughed so much,” said Angelina Johnson.

Hermione leaned over the table towards the proud-looking pair. “So you’ve really managed to go
out with a bang then?”

This brought a further bout of giggling from the Gryffindors, who then started to rush out of
the Great Hall, wanting to see what the Slytherins were doing now.

“What did you do?” asked Ginny.

“Well,” said Fred, “we’ve been working on this for a few weeks, now. We played on the Slytherins
well-known aptitude for greed.”

“Yes,” continued George, “we made about three hundred fake gold coins – they look exactly like
the real thing. Except that we spiked them all with this new charm we invented last month – a
variation of that Donkey charm we did on them.”

“And we planted them in the Slytherin common room last night,” said Fred.

“We knew they wouldn’t be able to keep their hands off the coins,” said George. “That’s why they
were late – I bet they were making sure there were no more coins hanging about.”

“When you pick one up and put it in your pocket, the heat of your body eventually dissolves it,
and it gets absorbed into your skin. It then makes its way into the stomach, where it waits. The
effects – well you just saw that,” said Fred.

“It’s not activated until food or drink mixes with it,” said George.

“So how long will it last?” asked Ron.

“That depends,” said George.

“On what?” asked Harry.

“On how greedy they are,” said Fred. “You see, the more coins they stuff into their pockets, and
the more food they eat, the longer the effects will last.”

“It can be from about an hour, right up to a full day,” said George.

“That’s brilliant,” said Hermione. “Everybody can now see which of them is the greediest. “

“I bet the two greediest will be Crabbe and Goyle,” said Ron.

Fred and George looked at each other, and started grinning. They each bent over the table and
planted a big kiss on Hermione’s cheek.

“You’re brilliant, Hermione,” said Fred, “we hadn’t thought of that.”

“We can make another killing, George.” said Fred. “Just like we did with Ginny’s spell last
year.”

“I was thinking the same thing,” said George. “We can take bets from all the students on who
they think will be the greediest – we can’t lose – especially if we give even money odds on each
bet.”

“Five sickles on Crabbe,” shouted Ron as he handed the money over to his brothers.

“Three sickles on Goyle,” said Ginny as she dug her hand into her cloak pocket.

“How about you two?” George asked Harry and Hermione.

They looked at each other and Harry said, “We’ll have 10 sickles on Malfoy.”

“Done,” said Fred as he took the money. “Come on George, let’s get round all the others before
classes start.”

“Just one moment you two – what do you know about what happened earlier?”

The six turned to see the angry face of Professor Snape glaring at the twins.

“Now, now, Severus,” said McGonagall as she joined them, “you don’t know that Fred and George
had anything to do with it.”

“Come on, Minerva,” he replied animatedly, “who else would it be? This has Fred and George
Weasley stamped all over it.”

Just then, Professor Dumbledore joined the group.

“I want these two disciplined, Headmaster,” said Snape. “I think that expulsion would not be too
harsh a punishment.”

“Come now, Severus,” said the headmaster. “There’s no proof that they were responsible. I think
it would be best if the matter were dropped. And I really think it would be a good idea if you go
outside to see if your house students are all right.”

Snape made a strangled noise and stormed out of the Great Hall. Dumbledore then turned to Fred
and George. “I must say that I haven’t seen such hilarity at the school for many a year. I haven’t
seen anything like it since the time of Mooney, Wormtail, Padfoot and Prongs. This will go down in
the annals of Hogwarts as one of the best pranks ever played on the Slytherins. Minerva, 10 points
to Gryffindor for raising the morale of the school, don’t you think? But not a word to
Severus.”

“I quite agree, Headmaster,” she replied.

“Oh, before you go, you two,” said Dumbledore. “Professor Snape was right in one respect. I
wouldn’t be doing my duty if I let you both go unpunished. Make sure that half of any profit you
make is donated to school funds.”

“Yes sir,” they both said together, feeling relieved, wondering how Dumbledore found out about
their betting plan. They then ran out to see the other students.

For the next two days, the prank was the talk of the school, and everywhere, students could be
heard chuckling as they recalled the event. Fred and George duly handed over 6 galleons to a
grinning headmaster, being fifty percent of their winnings.

Their profit margin was far greater than they’d hoped, so they didn’t mind giving half of it to
school funds. The reason for this was the unexpected winner of the ‘greediest Slytherin’
competition. Most of the students had bet on either Crabbe or Goyle. But the winner, albeit only by
about five minutes, turned out to be Millicent Bulstrode. Crabbe was second and Goyle third. It
turned out that Malfoy was way down the list.

***

The following Saturday turned out to be one of the warmest and sunniest days of the year so far.
Most of the students were taking advantage of the kind weather that morning as they sat and lay on
the grass in the school grounds. Most of them were revising for their imminent exams. The
fifth-years, in particular, were starting to get a bit panicky – their OWLS were now less than two
weeks away.

Even Ron had started to get down to some real work. He, Ginny, Harry and Hermione were lying on
the grass, reading their textbooks. They were lying on their stomachs under a tree, not far from
the Forbidden Forest. They had gone there to get away from a group of first-years students, who had
congregated by the lake. Their incessant chatter was ruining their concentration.

Ceri, Remus and Padfoot were patrolling just inside that part of the Forbidden Forest nearest to
the four friends.

They knew that something was wrong from Harry’s behaviour. He was quietly reading his Potions
notes, when he suddenly jumped to his feet, clutching his forehead. Hermione and the other two
looked up, startled.

“What’s the matter, Harry?” said a concerned Hermione.

“It’s my scar,” Harry replied. “It just started to hurt.”

His face was screwed up in pain as he sat back down on the grass, still holding his hand to his
head.

Ron turned towards where Ceri and the others were sitting and shouted to them, “Come quick.
Harry’s scar is hurting.”

Remus, Ceri and Padfoot rushed over, looking about them all the time, trying to spot anything
unusual.

“My scar suddenly started to hurt,” he told Ceri. “Voldemort is close - I can feel it.”

“I’ll go and get Dumbledore,” said Remus. “Ceri - you’d better get these four back up to the
school.”

Before anybody could move, they heard a commotion coming from the far end of the grounds.
Students were screaming and running back across the Quidditch field towards the school. As they
looked to see the cause of the panic, a feeling of coldness and despair shot through their minds.
Just at the far edge of the Forbidden Forest, they could see about twenty Dementors, the ghoulish
forms heading directly towards them.

“I can’t see ‘You Know Who’ with them,” said Ceri.

“Oh he’s there all right, Ceri,” said Harry. “My scar’s telling me that. He must be hidden in
the trees somewhere.”

As they started up to the school, they saw the teachers rushing out of the main doors, quickly
followed by Dumbledore. They ran to head off the Dementors, preparing to repel them from the
grounds. The charms they’d put in place earlier had given them advance warning of their approach,
so they’d had time to plan their defence.

Ceri and Remus started to run to join the teachers, but Dumbledore waved them back. “We’ll take
care of those,” he shouted. “You keep close to Harry and the others.”

Most of the students were now watching the action, having been joined by the ones that had run
from the far end of the grounds. Some of the seventh-years, including Fred and George, rushed to
help the teachers with the Dementors.

Ceri and Remus ran back to the group and started to direct them up to the school. But at that
moment, they saw a sight that filled them with fear.

From five points around the grounds, opposite where the Dementors were attacking, poured about a
hundred Death Eaters, their faces covered by their black hoods. Ceri could see that the attack had
been carefully planned, one of the groups of about twenty were moving quickly to cut off their
retreat to the school, while another was headed to cut off any possible escape into the forest. The
other three groups were converging on their position, the ones in the lead already starting to
throw curses, although they were still too far away to achieve any sort of accuracy.

The students started screaming in panic, and rushed back to the school, trying to get away from
the black-cloaked demons. Most of them were close enough to get into the school fairly quickly, but
some – including the group of first-years - had quite a distance to run.

Ceri looked back at the other end of the grounds, and could see the teachers and some of the
students producing their Patronus to fight off the Dementors. They hadn’t seen the Death Eaters
attack yet.

Padfoot suddenly transformed and Sirius grabbed Ceri and shouted, “Come on. We’re cut off from
the school – lets get these kids behind the tree. At least we’ll get some protection there. We’ll
try to hold them off until we get some help from the other end of the grounds.”

Ceri complied as she helped get the four friends behind the cover of the tree, but she knew it
was hopeless. The Death Eaters were closing fast and there was no chance that they’d get help in
time.

As they all crouched behind the tree, curses started to pepper their position. Despite the
spells they threw in return, they could all see that it was only a matter of time before they were
surrounded.

Then Harry and Hermione stood up and joined hands, Harry’s right hand clasping Hermione’s left.
The others looked on in surprise as they lifted their other hands, palms upwards above their heads,
and shouted out two strange words.

“*DADEX MER*.”

A beam of silvery-blue light shot from their upraised hands and met about ten feet above their
heads. Where the beams met, an emerald green shimmering light appeared. It then spread outwards in
all directions for about twenty feet, and then cascaded down until it met the ground. All seven of
them were now encased by the emerald green light.

“What’s that, Harry?” shouted Sirius. “What have you done?”

“We’re just protecting you, Sirius,” Hermione replied.

Just then, the three closest groups of Death Eaters came around both sides of the tree and
pointed their wands at the seven. One of the Death Eaters stepped forward and spoke.

“It’s all over,” said Travis. “Your position is hopeless. We can kill you all in a second.”

Another of the Death Eaters stepped up alongside him. “You can all go free if you put down your
wands and hand over Potter and Granger to us. I’ll give you 5 seconds to decide.”

A low growl came from Sirius, “Wormtail!” he said. “You can go to hell.”

He lifted his wand to fire off a spell at his enemy, but was restrained by Harry placing his
hand on his arm.

“You won’t be able to penetrate the protective shield with any spells,” said Harry, “but we
can.”

“I think you’d better transform, Sirius,” said Hermione. “The teachers and some of the
seventh-years will be here soon.”

Back at the other end of the grounds, a huge and powerful Patronus, generated by Dumbledore,
forced the remaining five Dementors to retreat back into the Forbidden Forest. They joined the
other Dementors who had been banished from the grounds a little earlier.

“Headmaster. Look,” shouted Flitwick as he stared at the other end of the grounds.

The teachers and seventh-years turned to see a large number of Death Eaters standing in three
groups. One of the groups – of about sixty - was surrounding Harry, his three friends, two adults
and a large dog.

“Come on, quick,” shouted Dumbledore, panic clearly showing in his voice. “We’ve got to help
them.”

They all took off for the other end of the grounds in a mad sprint, Fred and George in the lead.
The sight of their little brother and sister being in such a hopeless position spurred them on.

Harry and Hermione turned back to the Death Eaters after Padfoot appeared. They again lifted
their arms and pointed their palms at Wormtail.

“*SHAJ HER*,” they shouted together.

A beam of silvery-blue light left each of their hands and again met in front of them, before
continuing through the protective shield to strike Wormtail directly on his head.

For a moment, nothing happened. Then Wormtail’s black hood disappeared to reveal his rat-like
features. Then, incredibly, his head expanded to about five times its normal size. Wormtail turned
around in panic, shouting to the other Death Eaters for help. But they all stood transfixed at the
sight, not knowing what to do.

Dumbledore and the others were now getting close.

“Look,” shouted Professor Trelawney, “it’s Peter Pettigrew! Harry was right. He’s still
alive.”

Everyone else was able to see Wormtail, drawn to his features by the size of his head – even the
students who had gained the protection of the school and were peering out from the windows on the
ground floor couldn’t really miss him.

Then, suddenly, Wormtail’s head resumed its normal size.

“Quick,” said Travis. “Grab them – Dumbledore’s getting too close for comfort.”

Five of the Death Eaters advanced to grab hold of Harry and Hermione, but were brought to a
sudden stop. They couldn’t get through the barrier that the pair had erected. Again they tried,
aided by another ten Death Eaters, but they couldn’t penetrate through to the pair.

Wormtail and Travis howled in frustration. “Kill them. Kill them all,” shouted Wormtail.

Sixty Death Eaters lifted their wands and aimed them at the group of seven.

“*AVADA KEDAVRA*,” they all yelled at the same time. Sixty deathly-green beams of light
struck the emerald green barrier. And sixty beams of green light were deflected away, leaving
everyone inside the shield untouched.

“Kill them,” roared Wormtail. Again the Death Eaters flung their killing curses, and again they
were deflected. This time, however, some of them rebounded back and struck some of the Death
Eaters. Six of them fell to the ground dead. Unfortunately, one of the beams rebounded and missed
Wormtail’s group, travelling straight between a gap in their ranks, and continued up to strike into
the midst of the last group of students who had just arrived, breathless, at the school doors – the
first-years.

“Noooooo!” wailed Harry and Hermione as they saw what had happened.

“Let’s get out of here,” shouted Travis as he saw the rapidly approaching teachers and
seventh-years.

All the remaining Death Eaters took flight, flinging curses wildly behind them. Some just grazed
some of the nearest seventh-years, although no great harm was done.

“Ten of the fleeing hoard were stunned by the spells flung by Dumbledore and the teachers and
dropped to the ground, immobile, but the rest of them escaped back into the forest.

Harry and Hermione had remained linked together ever since they had erected the protection
barrier. Now they again raised their hands and ended the spell, the emerald green field dissipating
into the air.

“Are you all ok?” shouted Dumbledore anxiously as he went up to them.

“Yes, we’re all right, Professor,” said Hermione, and then pointed up towards the school, “but
there’s someone up there who isn’t, I’m afraid.”

Everyone rushed up to the main entrance doors of the school, where they found the group of
first-years crying and looking down at the ground, where a small form lay unmoving.

“Oh no!” said Dumbledore as he hurried over. But Harry got there first and looked stunned as he
saw Clare Bryant lying on the floor. Her face was white and her eyes stared sightlessly at the sky
above her. She bore the unmistakable mark of the killing curse.

“On no,” cried Harry, “not Clare!”

Harry knelt on the ground beside her and lifted the still form gently in his arms. He hugged her
to him as he cried unashamedly. “I’ll get them, Clare,” he whispered, “I’ll make them pay for
this.”

Everyone felt completely helpless and inadequate at that moment. All they could do was just
stand and stare, unwilling to believe that the popular little girl had been taken from them.

Harry raised his tear-stained face to the headmaster. “She didn’t deserve this, Professor. She
wouldn’t harm a fly.”

Hermione approached Harry, her eyes ablaze, and touched his shoulder.

(Continued in part 2 – I’ve had to split the chapter again because it was too big for the upload
software to handle – A.S.)



15. The Attack Part 2
---------------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 1 2 2003-07-18T10:59:00Z 2003-07-18T11:01:00Z 19 8175 46598 388 93 57225
9.2720 6 pt 2 2 Chapter 12B

**The Attack (Part 2)**

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

“Harry, quick. Join with me.”

Harry stared at Hermione, and then something dawned in his mind. He quickly got up and took hold
of her hand – his right and her left - the rings touched.

“Get back, everyone – please,” he said softly.

Harry and Hermione closed their eyes and concentrated hard. Then they extended their free hands
over Clare’s body and spoke two words softly.

“*MESNEH MWT*”

Everyone gasped as the silvery light shot from their hands and joined just above the little
girl’s body. Then it spread in a silvery blanket and covered her.

The still form rose slowly from the ground, levitated by the strange spell, and then turned
until she was standing upright on her feet. Then the silvery glow faded. Clare let out a loud gasp
and opened her eyes, staring around her in confusion. Ron and Ginny caught her as she staggered,
and sat her back onto the ground

They both comforted her as she started crying. “What happened?” she whispered. “I thought I was
dead!”

She looked up and saw Harry and Hermione standing over her, their hands still extended over the
spot where she’d earlier laid. And she knew – she understood – she felt their beautiful and
comforting aura, which still lingered in her soul.

She shot up and grabbed them both, clinging to them desperately. “Thank you,” she cried. “Thank
you Harry, Hermione.”

The hushed spell that everyone had been under then broke, and a thousand questions were
uttered.

“How did you do that?” asked Fred.

“What did you do?” asked George.

“What sort of magic was that?” asked Lee Jordan.

“I’ve never seen anything like it,” said Katie Bell.

Even Snape stood transfixed, looking at Harry and Hermione with a look of deep respect on his
face.

“Come on, everyone,” said Dumbledore. ”Back into the school, quickly. We need to check that
there aren’t any more Death Eaters and Dementors hanging about.”

Professor McGonagall, her eyes wet, caught hold of Harry and Hermione and fiercely hugged them
both. “Thank you so much,” she said.

Professor Trelawney then came up to Harry. “I’m so glad you’ve found your destiny Harry. What
you both did was so beautiful.”

Then she walked back into the school, a serene look on her face.

Dumbledore walked up to Harry and Hermione. “That was incredible,” he said. “I never thought I’d
see the killing curse overcome like that. Thank you both from the bottom of my heart for saving
Clare. Come up to my office in an hour – all of you – we’ve got plenty to discuss. But first, I’ll
take Clare up to Madam Pomfrey to make sure there’s no lasting damage. Come on Minerva, bring Clare
with you, if you please.”

Clare was very reluctant to relinquish her contact with the pair as McGonagall gently eased her
away from Harry and Hermione.

“It’s ok, Clare,” said Harry, “we’ll come up to the hospital wing to see you later.”

“Professor Dumbledore,” said Harry as McGonagall and Clare went into the school, “can I speak to
you for a moment?”

“Yes Harry?”

“Voldemort – he was here. I knew because my scar started hurting. But he’s gone now. My scar
stopped hurting when the Death Eaters started running away.”

Dumbledore looked surprised. “I didn’t see him Harry. He must have stayed at the edge of the
forest – probably directing the Dementors or the Death Eaters. Obviously, he still doesn’t want to
make it known that he’s back. But after this, we should be able to persuade Fudge to tell the
wizarding world about his return.”

Before he went into the school, Dumbledore turned to Ceri, Remus and Padfoot. “You’d better
check that they’ve all gone before we hold the meeting – but be careful!”

Only Ceri, Remus, Padfoot and the four friends were left in the grounds after the headmaster
went up to the hospital wing.

“You four had better come with us,” Ceri said smiling ruefully, “we might need some
protection.”

“That was great back there wasn’t it?” said Remus, equally ruefully. “The protectors having to
be protected by the protected!”

“Huh?” said Ron, confused.

“No wonder ‘You Know Who’ tried to get you two,” said Ceri. “You’re very, very powerful now. He
must be feeling a bit vulnerable.”

“I don’t know about that,” said Harry, “but there’s one thing I *do* know. That spell we
put on Wormtail – when we made his hood disappear and inflated his head. We wanted to make sure
everybody saw him. There’s no way that Fudge can keep Sirius’ innocence a secret now, is
there?”

Padfoot nuzzled his wet nose into Harry’s hand, and Remus said the words that Sirius was
thinking.

”Of course he can’t Harry! How can he be guilty of killing Wormtail if everybody’s just seen him
alive and well? We’ll force him to go public with it now – and Sirius can get his official
pardon.”

***

Back in his cave, Voldemort was deep in thought as his inner circle stood nervously in front of
his throne. He’d seen the wand-less magic done by Harry and Hermione, although he was not aware yet
that they’d saved the little girl from the killing curse.

“This is serious,” he said to his group. “I never thought that they were so strong. And they’ll
only get stronger as time goes on.” He banged his hand down on the arm of his throne in
frustration. When he’d seen the pair perform the protection spell, even from a distance, a tendril
of fear had started to worm itself into his brain.

“There must be something I can do to stop them!”

He suddenly stood up. “Go now. Continue your recruitment campaigns. I’ll summon you all when I
need you. Lucius, make sure our friend keeps his eyes peeled until the end of term. I want to know
if he spots any weaknesses in them - anything at all. Now go.”

After his initial rage and frustration had subsided, Voldemort started thinking more rationally
about the problem he faced. And a chink of light started to grow in his mind.

‘If there are ancient spells to aid the Light side, why can’t there be something similar to aid
the Dark?’ he thought to himself. ‘I wonder ... I need to do some research to see if there’s
anything I can use.’

He got up and walked over to the back of his cave where he kept his Dark Arts library. He looked
through the ranks of forbidden books on the shelves and stopped at one.

“This looks promising,” he said to himself as he heaved the large tome off the shelf.

He went back over to his throne, sat down, and started to read …

***

The usual group sat around Dumbledore’s desk that afternoon. The four friends were also there as
they started to review the events of the morning.

“What were those spells you used this morning?” asked Sirius.

“The first was ‘Protect friends,’” said Harry.

“The second was ‘Reveal face,’” said Hermione.

“And the last, that saved Clare, was ‘Reverse death.’ Thank goodness that Hermione was thinking
clearly – I was too caught up in my grief to call it to mind,” said Harry.

“What you two did this morning,” said McGonagall, “was nothing short of miraculous. We all owe
you a debt of gratitude for what you did for that lovely little girl.”

There was a general murmur of approval from around the room.

“She can’t stop talking about you, you know,” continued the deputy-head. “I think she must have
sensed your inner feelings and emotions when you did the spell. She was quite overcome with the
beauty of it all.”

“I think she must have felt it, Professor,” said Hermione. “We had to put everything we had into
that spell.”

“How is she coping with it all, Minerva?” asked Remus.

“Physically, there’s no problem. But Poppy wants to keep her in the hospital for a few days.
She’s a bit worried about the psychological effects as the reality of it all hits her. She did die,
after all. I’ve been in touch with her parents – I think that talking to them will help. They
should be here in the morning.”

“So what do you think ‘You Know Who’ will do now, Headmaster?” asked Snape.

“I don’t know, Severus. He must have been desperate to try an attack on Hogwarts – it must have
been his last-ditch attempt to get at the Anima Summas. I’ve got a feeling that we won’t be hearing
from him for a while – he’s got a lot to think about now.”

“Uh, Professor,” said Ginny. ”Everybody saw Peter Pettigrew this morning. Won’t Sirius be
officially cleared of the charges now?”

“I think so, Ginny. I’ve had to make a report to the ministry, and the Minister for Magic is
coming here himself tomorrow to lead the investigation into the attack. I’ll make sure that enough
teachers and students testify that they saw Wormtail to make it impossible for him to keep quiet
about Sirius’ innocence. And since Voldemort wasn’t spotted, he needn’t tell the world that he’s
back if he’s so inclined. So I don’t see any problem at all. I will, of course, press him to go
public about Voldemort as well.”

The four youngsters grinned at Sirius – which was returned by him in kind.

“What about the Anima Summas, Headmaster?” asked Remus. “Everybody saw what Harry and Hermione
did today. And Fudge and his team are bound to find out about it. What are we going to say to
them?”

Dumbledore sighed, “I don’t think there’s much we can do to cover it up. It would be silly to
even try. Fudge is not stupid – he didn’t become Minister for Magic for nothing. Just tell them the
truth. But don’t say anything about the prophecy or the Anima Summas – I’ll take care of that
myself.”

“They seem to be getting stronger, Headmaster,” said Flitwick as he grinned at Harry and
Hermione.

Dumbledore thought for a moment. “I’m not sure about that, Filius. Don’t get me wrong – they’re
powerful, very powerful. But if the prophecy and what we’ve learned is anything to go by, they’ve
still got a lot of learning and developing to do. Don’t forget, they’ve still got two more quests
to complete to reach their full potential – and the rings told them they have to learn and grow. No
– what we’ve seen is nothing compared to what we will see, at some time in the future. And they
still need our protection. I know it looks as if they can protect themselves without any problem,
but you know how devious the Dark Side can be – and they can’t watch their backs twenty four hours
a day.”

“Does that mean we’re still in a job, Professor?” asked Ceri.

“Oh, most certainly you are,” Dumbledore replied. “I’ve been in touch with your superiors in the
States, and they’ve seconded your services to me indefinitely. You’ll continue to work with Sirius
and Remus, and I’ll try to get a couple more of the ministry’s best Aurors out of Fudge when he
visits tomorrow.”

“That’s great!” said Sirius as he smiled at Ceri. Then coloured slightly as he saw Harry’s
grinning face looking directly at him.

“So what do you make of it all, Headmaster?” asked McGonagall as her face took on a look of
reflection. “I mean - there are things at work here that none of us even guessed at before. What do
you think it is?”

“Ah, Minerva, if only I knew,” Dumbledore replied. “But there’s certainly some spirit, or force,
active. And it’s obviously a part of the Light Side. Think about it. I believe that you, Hermione,
have been guided by this force right from the start.”

Hermione looked startled. “What do you mean, Professor? I haven’t felt anything at all.”

“Well I may be wrong, but just think. You’ve probably been acting as Harry’s Anima Summa right
from the start of this mystery – even though you were unaware of it. First, you made sure that
Sirius sorted him out when he was in the depths of despair. Then you purchased the amulet that
contained the message – although I know the Priory of Sion was involved in that – but it was you
they contacted. Then you were the brains behind solving the riddle of the amulet’s message. You’ve
given unflinching support to Harry in the face of great personal pain and danger. You’ve even been
willing to sacrifice your own happiness to make sure that Harry met the right girl.”

Hermione’s face was bright red with embarrassment as she heard Dumbledore singing her praises,
and Harry held her hand tightly.

“That’s only my personal opinion, Hermione,” the headmaster continued, “but everything fits.
Let’s just say that there are far more things in heaven and earth than we know about. We may never
know what’s behind it all, but it’s definitely the Light Side in some shape or form. But we can’t,
of course, rely on speculation to protect them. We have to be vigilant. I get the feeling that
we’ll have to be on our toes to make sure that these two reach their ultimate goal.”

***

The following day, Cornelius Fudge and his team arrived from the ministry. Fudge went straight
up to Dumbledore’s office, while his team prepared one of the classrooms as their temporary
office.

“This is a bad business, Albus,” he said. “The school coming under attack from Death Eaters, for
goodness sake. I’m under a lot of pressure to get some answers, you know. And the media are on to
it now. I’ve managed to keep them quiet for the moment, but they’ll be straight back at me when I
return to London.”

“I understand, Cornelius,” said Dumbledore. “You are welcome to speak to whoever you like – most
of the students saw the attack, and all the professors were right there in the thick of it. Perhaps
we can meet up for lunch in my office later and we can discuss your findings. And I’m sure you’ll
want to talk to me after you’ve interviewed everyone.”

“Thank you, Albus. Right, we’d better get started.”

Later that morning, one of the first-year Gryffindors came into the common room. “Harry,
Hermione – Professor McGonagall would like to see you both in her office.”

Five minutes later, Hermione knocked on the office door, and the professor came out and closed
the door behind her. “Clare’s parents are inside,” she said quietly. “Clare’s told them all about
what happened yesterday, and they know that you saved her life. They want to see you. I haven’t
told them any details, but they’re clearly puzzled. I leave it to you to be as discreet as you
can.”

McGonagall walked away down the corridor, and Harry opened the door and led Hermione into the
office.

“Mr & Mrs Bryant?” she asked. “I’m Hermione Granger and this is Harry Potter. You want to
speak to us?”

Mrs Bryant rushed over and hugged them both, while her husband slowly walked towards them and
shook their hands.

“I can’t tell you how grateful we are,” said Mr Bryant. “Clare told us what happened yesterday –
she said that you two brought her back to life. How did you do that? Everybody knows that you’re
special, Harry, but how was that possible?”

“We’re trying to come to terms with it all,” said Mrs Bryant, “but, quite frankly, we didn’t
believe Clare until Professor McGonagall confirmed what she told us.”

“Uh, we can’t tell you everything,” said Harry, “but, well yes – Clare was hit by the killing
curse and she died – I held her in my arms myself, swearing that I’d make those Death Eaters pay
for what they’d done – you see, Clare’s a very popular girl, and we’d become good friends, despite
the difference in our ages. But it’s Hermione you really need to thank. She was the one who first
thought of the spell to save her.”

“But how is it possible?” asked Mr Bryant. “No one has survived the Avada Kedavra curse – except
yourself, of course Harry.”

“Mr & Mrs Bryant. What we’re about to tell you must remain between us four. Will you agree
to that?” asked Harry.

“Of course, Harry,” said Mrs Bryant. “We just want to understand what happened to our little
girl.”

“Hermione and I – we ... uh ... well, we’re able to join together mentally – it’s all part of an
ancient prophecy that’s come to light. We are now able to access some very powerful ancient magic,
given to us by the Light Side. When we join together, we can perform that magic. Until we stood
over Clare, we didn’t even know we could bring her back. It’s all very new and we don’t know the
extent of it yet – we only found out ourselves a matter of days ago.”

Mr Bryant gasped, “This is incredible. I haven’t heard anything about it at the ministry.”

“They don’t know about it yet, Mr Bryant,” said Hermione. “Look, it’s bound to be made public
sooner or later and then you’ll know the full details of it all. But for now, we have to keep it
secret.”

“Don’t worry, Hermione,” said Mrs Bryant, “it’s safe with us. I’m just so grateful to you both –
I don’t know what we’d have done if we’d lost her.”

“She couldn’t stop talking about you both,” said Mr Bryant. “I think she sees you as - well,
some sort of divine beings. And after speaking to you, perhaps she’s not far off the mark.”

“We’re hardly divine,” said Harry. “Although something of a higher order does seem to be guiding
us – we just don’t know. All we can do is try to follow the path that’s been set out for us.”

Clare’s parents left the office to spend some time with their daughter shortly after. They were
content that they at least knew something of the forces that saved Clare, and they were relieved
that it was clearly the Light Side.

Fudge and the ministry team spent the rest of the morning in endless rounds of interviews with
the students and teachers, listening with interest to all they were told. By lunchtime, they still
hadn’t finished. They still hadn’t spoken to Harry and his friends. What they had heard, however,
got them buzzing with excitement, and it was an animated Fudge that joined Dumbledore in his office
for lunch.

“I can’t believe what I’ve heard this morning,” he said. “Strange spells, bringing people back
from the dead – what’s been going on, Albus?”

Dumbledore sighed deeply, knowing that he’d have to tell the minister about the Anima Summas.
But first he wanted to get Sirius officially cleared. “I’ll tell you about that later, Cornelius.
But first, were you told about Peter Pettigrew leading the Death Eaters?”

“Yes, I was. It seems that everyone saw him. The students recognised him from that article the
Daily Prophet ran two years ago about Sirius Black. I suppose you’ll want me to give him an
official pardon now?”

“Of course I will,” replied Dumbledore. “There isn’t a problem is there? You won’t have to say
anything about Voldemort to clear him.”

Fudge winced as he heard the dreaded name. “No, I suppose not. Ok, Albus, I’ll see to it when I
get back to London. And I’ll make sure the Daily Prophet carries an article about it.”

“Thank you, Cornelius. He deserves no less than that. He’s done some excellent work for me
spying on Voldemort and protecting Harry Potter and his friends. If I may suggest – perhaps you can
officially employ him as an Auror and second him to my team?”

“No problem, Albus. Now talking about Harry, what was that all about yesterday?”

“Firstly, Cornelius, Harry felt that Voldemort was close by – his scar told him he was there. I
don’t think you can hold off much longer in telling everyone about his return.”

“No – I don’t want to do that yet, Albus. Now what about Harry?”

Dumbledore then told Fudge about the prophecy, the quest, and the Anima Summas. He also urged
him to keep it quiet.

“This is incredible, Albus. I don’t know if I can keep something like this quiet – the whole
world is going to want to hear about it.”

“Think about it, Cornelius. If we tell them about the Anima Summas, we’ll have to tell them why
they’re here at this moment in time. They’re bound to guess the reason – the rise of the Dark Side,
and Voldemort in particular. So if you tell them about Harry and Hermione, you’ll have to tell them
that Voldemort is back.”

Fudge stroked his chin, deep in thought. “You’re right of course. I’ll keep it quiet as long as
I can, but news of these strange spells they’ve been doing is bound to get out sooner or later.
We’d both better prepare for the announcements we’ll have to make at some stage. How does Harry and
Hermione feel about being thrust into the limelight – I mean, Harry’s always in the news, but this
is different.”

“I haven’t really spoken to them about it yet. I thought it best that they come to terms with it
themselves before exposing them to the world’s collective scrutiny. After all, they’ve only been
the Anima Summas for a few days. We’ve got to give them time and space to develop. And don’t forget
– they’ve got their OWLS in just over a week and I don’t want them to have any distractions.”

“Yes, you’re right, of course. We don’t want to do anything to hinder that development. They’re
our best chance – our only chance - of beating the Dark Side. I shudder to think of what it was
like fifteen years ago, when ‘You Know Who’ was at his prime,” said Fudge.

“Voldemort’s found out about them, of course. That was the reason for the attack yesterday – he
wants to get hold of them – or more accurately, he wants to get hold of the ancient knowledge and
spells they have.”

“Oh Lord, Albus. We can’t let that happen. He’ll be unstoppable if he gets his hands on
that.”

“Quite. So I was thinking. Can you spare me a couple of your best Aurors to add to my protection
team?”

“I wish I could, but it’s impossible, Albus. We’re fully stretched trying to keep tabs on all
the new Death Eater recruitment that’s still going on. I’m afraid you’ll have to make do with what
you’ve got – why don’t you think about some of your seventh-year students? Perhaps a couple of them
could join your team?”

“No, Cornelius. A few of them are showing excellent potential, but they won’t have the necessary
experience they’ll need. I’ll just have to try to juggle my resources to make sure the kids are
given the best protection.”

“Right. We should be finished by late afternoon. I’ll see you before I go.”

***

The following morning, Ginny rushed down the common room stairs clutching a newspaper in her
hands. She was clearly excited as she ran over to her three friends, who were sitting by the
window.

“Look at this! Errol just delivered it from Mum,” she said as she thrust the copy of the Daily
Prophet at them.

Harry grabbed the paper and stared at it with a wide grin on his face. The front page carried a
large banner headline – ‘SIRIUS BLACK INNOCENT,’ and his grinning photograph, clearly taken quite a
while ago, stared out at them.

Harry read the first few lines of the article aloud, which had been written by Rita Skeeter
……

‘*Sirius Black, who caused great consternation in the wizarding world by escaping from Azkaban
last year, has been officially cleared of all charges by the Ministry of Magic.*

*In an exclusive interview, Cornelius Fudge – the Minister for Magic - stated that Peter
Pettigrew, previously thought to have been murdered by Black, had made an appearance at Hogwarts
School on Saturday. He led a group of black-cloaked figures in an attack on the school.*

*Details of this are still sketchy, but this reporter will be investigating, and will bring
you the latest news as soon as possible.*

*The minister further stated that Sirius Black has now been employed by the ministry as an
Auror. It is understood that he will be working directly for Professor Albus Dumbledore, the
headmaster of Hogwarts, and will be in charge of security there.*

“This is great,” said Ron. “He’ll be able to walk around the school without having to change
into Padfoot.”

“I’m going to make sure everybody sees this before breakfast,” said Ginny. “I’m going down to
pin this up on the doors of the Great Hall.”

The other three grinned as Ginny raced through the portrait hole. “Sirius will be so pleased,”
said Hermione.

“Yes, he will,” said Harry, “but there’s a down side as well – Rita Skeeter’ll be snooping
around. She’s bound to find out about those spells we did – you know what she’s like – a dog with a
bone – she won’t stop until she finds out about us.”

“Well she may well find out, Harry,” said Hermione, “but you heard what minister Fudge told us
yesterday – he doesn’t want it broadcast yet. And neither does the headmaster. I’m sure that
between them, they’ll be able to keep her quiet.”

“Let’s hope so,” said Harry.

There was an excited chatter at breakfast. Everyone had seen the newspaper that Ginny had pinned
to the Great Hall doorway. The question on everybody’s lips was when they’d get to see the famous
Sirius Black.

Half way through breakfast, the headmaster stood up and rapped the table in front of him with a
spoon. The room went quiet, and every head turned towards the top table.

“This morning, I had a surprise announcement to make,” he said, “but a certain someone has put
paid to that.” He looked directly at Ginny, who coloured up, but still managed to pretend that she
was not the focus of everybody’s attention.

“You all know by now,” he continued, “that Sirius Black is completely innocent of all charges
made against him nearly fifteen years ago. And you will also know that he’ll be working at the
school. His main job will be to protect you – the student body – from any more despicable attacks
like we saw last Saturday. He will be joined in this task by Ceri Jones, our visitor from the
United States. I’m sure you’ve all seen her around the school these past few months.

“Now I know you’re all anxious to meet them. They’ll be in the school grounds during the lunch
break, so if you have any questions, you can speak to them then.” Dumbledore then spoke more
loudly, “Sirius, Ceri - would you like to join us at the top table for breakfast?”

The Great Hall doors opened, and Sirius and Ceri walked in. They stood side by side as they
looked around the room at the students, wondering what their reception would be. Then Harry, Ron,
Ginny and Hermione stood up and started to clap. Soon, all the Gryffindors, quickly followed by the
Ravenclaws and Hufflepuffs, were standing, clapping and cheering. The Slytherins remained seated -
most of them were scowling. The two walked self-consciously up to the top table, relieved grins on
their faces, and sat at two spare seats between Remus and Hagrid. All the professors, including
Snape, shook their hands and welcomed them to their ranks.

After breakfast, Harry and his friends rushed up to Sirius and Ceri. Draco Malfoy hurried up to
the Owlery.

“This is great, Sirius,” said Harry. “I’ve waited for this for ages.”

“And it’s thanks to you two,” he replied affectionately as he looked at Harry and Hermione.

“So we’ll be seeing more of you both now then?” asked Ron.

“Yes, you will,” said Ceri.

“It’ll be a relief to walk about the school on two legs instead of four,” said Sirius. “But
we’ll still be doing the same job as before. The only difference is that I’ll be paid for it
now.”

“Will you have to register as an Animagus now, Sirius?” asked Hermione.

“Yes – I spoke to Fudge about it yesterday. I’ve got to go to the ministry this afternoon to do
it – and they’ll need some other details, you know, where to send my pay cheque each month, and
such things.”

“Where will you be staying now?” asked Ginny.

“Oh. At the school,” he replied. “I’ve got the guest room next to Ceri.”

“I hope there isn’t an adjoining door?” said Ginny grinning slyly.

“Ginny!” exclaimed Hermione as she looked sternly at her friend.

The others just laughed, albeit not without some embarrassment.

***

Voldemort was in a foul mood, as he had been for the last two days. Wormtail and Nagini had long
since been banished to a much smaller cave about a hundred yards from Voldemort’s main residence –
the Dark Lord wanted as much space as possible to display the pile of books opened at
likely-looking pages. He had not stopped reading since the previous Saturday evening, and had
followed a myriad of cross-references in the various Dark Arts volumes in his library. But all to
no avail.

He flung a large tome to the other end of the cave, as the latest thread he was following yet
again proved to be a dead end.

“There’s got to be something here!” he shouted, his sibilant voice echoing from the damp
walls.

Once more, he walked over to his bookcases, and started looking at the titles. He came to one
exceptionally large book and pulled it impatiently from the top shelf to read the title. As he
supported the heavy tome in both hands, a much smaller, insignificant little book fluttered to the
floor of the cave.

‘What’s that?’ he thought. ‘It must have been hidden behind these large books, pushed to the
back of the shelf years ago’

He dropped the large book and picked up the smaller one. He read the title – ‘Memoirs of Aleric
the Dark.’

‘Hmm,’ he thought, ‘Aleric – I remember reading about him a while ago. He was one of the most
respected Dark Arts practitioners of the seventeenth century. I didn’t know I had this book.’

Voldemort walked back to his throne, and started to thumb through the brown-stained pages. It
was written by Aleric himself, telling the story of his celebrated travels throughout Europe and
the Middle East. He settled down to read, his foul mood lifted by his discovery of the little
treasure.

One hour later, Voldemort stared at the heading of the last chapter in the book. He couldn’t
believe his eyes – ‘The True Location of the Necronomicon.’

“What!?!” he gasped.

Before he read the chapter, he thought about what he knew about the fabled Dark Arts book …

‘The Necronomicon – the lost treasure of the Dark Arts. The literal translation is ‘Book of Dead
Names.’ Written by Abdul Alhazred around 735 AD - he was known as ‘The Mad Arab.’ He died, or
disappeared in 738 AD. The story goes that he was seized by an invisible monster in broad daylight,
and was devoured horribly. No one really knows what was contained in the book – but there are tales
that those who have read it either died terrible deaths, or went mad from what they learned. It is
said that the volume contains details of an ancient race that pre-dated humans, dark and powerful
magical spells, and how to summon powerful beings from another realm. There have been several fake
copies of the book in circulation since those times, some of which are thought to contain some of
the original text – but many of them were burnt by the Church.’

Voldemort knew that he was on the verge of a great discovery. If he could get hold of the book,
he would be able to master the world – Anima Summa or no Anima Summa. He avidly read Aleric’s
account …

*‘It has long been believed that the Necronomicon was lost soon after Abdul Alhazred died. But
I know the truth of it. I know this from a letter the mad Arab sent to his brother just before he
went missing. I was able to obtain this letter, which was never known to exist before, during my
explorations in the ancient city of Damascus. Read closely and learn.*

Abdul did not die – he went to the city of IREM – the fabled City of Pillars. Many people have
heard of this place and thought it to be a myth, supposedly hidden beneath the shifting sands of
the Arabian Desert. But it was discovered by Abdul, and I now know where it is located.

He said in his letter that he was taking the Necronomicon with him – and would lay it to rest in
that strange city – after he had found the portal into another realm. He gave instructions in his
letter for his brother to make the information available to any true follower of the Dark Arts. But
his brother was afraid. He knew what was contained in that book, and he did not want it made known
to anyone. He knew that only great evil would come of it.

*IREM lies below the ancient rose-red city, half as old as time. Its entrance can be gained
outside the Treasury – go to the second pillar from the left and open it. There will be found the
key to the underground metropolis, and the way to the Necronomicon.*

*Be warned – the Necronomicon is only for the eyes of those who truly follow the Dark Arts. If
there is a shred of the Light in you – you will perish as soon as you look on its pages.*

I wish you well, if you dare to take up the challenge and seek out the great book. I am now too
old, so I leave it to one who will come after me to uncover its secrets.

“Yes!” Voldemort exclaimed. “WORMTAIL,” he roared, his voice thundering out through the cave
entrance and over the surrounding countryside.

A few moments later, Wormtail ran into the cave. “You called, my Lord?”

“Wormtail. I have an important task for you. Make use of your rat form and gain entry to the
British Library in London. I want to know where I can find an ancient city. It is called ‘The
Rose-Red City – Half as Old as Time.’ Go immediately – and don’t come back until you’ve found
something. When you return, you can clear up these books and stack them neatly on my
bookshelves.

“Yes, my Lord,” Wormtail replied and hurried out of the cave.

***

Ron looked terrible as he slowly made his way down to the common room from his dormitory. His
face was pale, and he felt very, very sick. He saw Harry and Hermione sitting by the window,
feverishly thumbing through their Potions notes.

Hermione looked up as Ron approached. Unlike Ron she was supremely happy and full of the vigour
of youth. Harry’s health appeared to be half way between the two extremes displayed by his two
friends

“Ron. What’s the matter?” said Hermione, a look of concern clouding her earlier brightness.

“How can you be so happy, Hermione?” he replied. “You *do* know what day it is, don’t
you?”

“Yes Ron. The first day of our OWLS – exciting, isn’t it?”

“Ugghhh,” was all Ron could say.

“Oh come on, Ron,” she said, “you’ll be ok. You’ll feel better when you get some breakfast
inside you.”

“I feel sick, Hermione. I can’t eat any breakfast this morning. Dumbledore’s a sadist, I swear.
How can he make Potions the first OWL we have to do?”

“Look on the bright side, Ron,” said Harry. “At least we’ll be getting the worst one over with
first.”

“You think that’s our worst one Harry?” he replied. “We’ve got History of Magic this afternoon,
and Divination tomorrow morning! These are going to be the worst two days of my life.”

“Well you’ve only got yourself to blame, Ron,” said Hermione sternly. “I did try to get you to
do some work before. This is what you get when you try to cram everything into two weeks before the
exams.”

“Oh take pity,” he whined. “I’m suffering.”

“Yes,” said Harry, “but not as much as Neville. Look at him!”

They followed Harry’s gaze and saw poor Neville Longbottom barely able to put one foot in front
of the other as he slowly made his way down into the common room.

“Oh, Neville,” said Hermione as she trotted over to him. “Come on. Come and sit by us three for
a moment.”

“I know how you’re feeling, Neville,” said Ron as the pale-faced boy sat down.

“Do you?” asked Neville. “We’ve got two Potions exams this morning. The first two hours we’ve
got the practical exam, followed by another two hours written one. I don’t know if I’ll survive
this. Snape is going to make mincemeat out of me.”

“Don’t worry, Neville,” said Harry, “we’re all in the same boat. Just focus your mind on dinner
tonight – it’ll be over by then.”

Neville made a sickly attempt at a grin, and then followed the other three down to the Great
Hall.

At dinner that evening, the fifth-year Gryffindors looked exhausted. And it was only the first
day – they had another four days of exams to go. Of them all, only Hermione and Kristen looked
reasonably happy.

“Hermione?” asked Ron tentatively. “What answer did you get to question three, this
morning?”

Hermione thought for a moment. “Oh that was an easy one – chopped dried nettles mixed with
sliced caterpillar tails.”

“Ohhhh,” groaned Ron. “I put masticated frogs brains and chopped ginger root.”

“Never mind, Ron. You can’t get them all right. What did you get for number four?”

“You don’t want to know, Hermione. Can we talk about something else?”

Things did get a bit easier over the next four days, and Ron started to look a lot better.
Harry’d been right. The worst day had been the first one – Ron started to think that Dumbledore had
some method to his madness, after all.

At the end of the fifth day, the exams were over and all the fifth-year Gryffindors collapsed
into their usual chairs in the common room, exhausted, but happy that it was finished at last.

“Well, you lot,” said Ginny as she sat next to her three friends, “what was it like? You’ve all
managed to survive, I see.”

“It was terrible, Ginny,” said Ron. “Listen to the voice of experience – and don’t do what I
did. Make sure you start your revision early when you take your OWLS next year.”

Hermione lifted her eyes to the ceiling in despair.

***

It was early the following day when Dobby entered the headmaster’s office. “Professor
Dumbledore,” he said. “There’s a lady downstairs says she wants to talk to you. She says she’s from
the Daily Prophet.”

“Oh lord,” breathed Dumbledore. “You’d better show her up Dobby.” Dumbledore had banned all
reporters from Hogwarts the previous week because of the exams, but he knew that he now had no
reason to keep them away.

“Good morning Professor Dumbledore,” said Rita Skeeter as she walked up to the headmaster’s
desk.

“Good morning, Miss Skeeter. Take a seat. Dobby, would you bring some tea for us please? Now,
what can I do for you?”

“Firstly, I’d like to do an interview with Sirius Black. There’s been great interest from our
readers ever since he was cleared, and they want to know his side of the story – how he managed to
stay sane in Azkaban, how he managed to escape, what he thinks about Peter Pettigrew. That sort of
thing.”

“I’ll ask him if he wants to talk to you, of course, but the decision is his. He went through
some pretty bad times, you know, and he may not want it all aired in public.”

“Thank you, Professor. And secondly, we’ve been hearing rumours of strange goings on at
Hogwarts. We’ve heard that Harry Potter and Hermione Granger have been doing some very powerful
magic – I know it sounds incredible, but we’ve even heard that they managed to bring somebody back
to life after the killing curse. What do you say about that, Professor?”

“The only thing I can say is that you shouldn’t always believe the rumours you hear. You know
how certain actions always seem to be blown out of all proportion.”

“Yes – but not where Harry’s involved. I’d like to interview him – and Hermione Granger.
Especially since I’ve heard that they’ve become romantically involved.”

“I can’t allow that, Miss Skeeter. They’re only fifteen years old, and they’ve only just
completed their OWLS. I’m sure you remember how exhausted you were after you sat them?”

“Oh yes, Professor, I certainly do. Ok, if I can’t have an interview with them, do you mind if I
just ask around this morning? I want to find out more about the attack the other week – from the
perspective of the students, that is.”

“Be my guest, but please keep a sense of perspective. Young children tend to exaggerate and
embellish things when they know they’re in the spotlight. And please come and see me before you go
– I’d like to know what will be appearing in the Daily Prophet about my school.”

“I will, Professor. And thank you.”

Dumbledore sighed heavily as he watched the reporter walk out of his office. He knew that she
had a very keen eye for a good story, and hoped he’d be able to prevent anything sensational being
reported.

Later that morning, Rita managed to persuade Sirius to give an interview. He was reluctant at
first, when Dumbledore asked him, but relented when he heard that she was asking the other
professors and students about him. He decided that if his story had to be told, it would be the
true one.

After that, she wandered around the school corridors, stopping students at random, asking them
about the Death Eater attack. It was just by chance that one of the students he stopped was Clare
Bryant.

“Tell me, Clare. I’ve heard that you were hurt in the attack. What happened?”

Now Clare had been asked by Harry and Hermione not to say anything about her resurrection from
the killing curse. But that didn’t stop Clare singing their praises. She thought that everyone in
the country would want to know how good and powerful they were.

“Well I can’t tell you a lot,” she said slowly, “but I did see Harry and Hermione protecting
their friends from hundreds of those dreadful men. They managed to erect a powerful force field,
and it stopped every curse that was thrown at them – even the killing curse.”

Rita looked stunned. At last she’d had one of the more unbelievable rumours confirmed. She
already knew that Harry and Hermione had expanded Wormtail’s head so that everyone could see
him.

She looked thoughtful as she wandered down towards the dungeons and the Slytherin common room.
She stopped as she heard voices just around a bend in the corridor, and hid herself behind a suit
of armour. She peeked between the body and arm of the armour and saw three boys ambling along. She
couldn’t believe her luck when they stopped right opposite her.

“So what’s happening with Potter and Granger now?” asked one of the boys, who was quite
large.

“I’m making sure my dad knows everything,” said one of the others, a much thinner, blond-haired
boy.

“Tell me again,” said the third, very large boy. “What’s these Anima Summas?”

“Shhh. Nobody’s supposed to know about it,” said the second boy. “I told you before. You mustn’t
talk about it outside the common room. Now come on – let’s go.”

Rita was deep in thought as she walked back up to the Entrance Hallway. ‘What the devil are the
Anima Summas? And what’s it got to do with Harry and the Granger girl? Hmmm. I think I may be onto
something here. Let’s see what Dumbledore has to say about it.’

Later, Dumbledore sat looking at the reporter sitting at the other side of his desk. He could
see that she had something up her sleeve.

“Well I think I’ve got everything I need, Professor,” she said. “Sirius Black was very
cooperative. Our readers are going to be amazed at what the poor man has had to go through, and how
he’s managed to come through it all relatively unscathed. The wizarding community are going to be
very proud of him.”

“Well I’m glad. He deserves all the support and respect we can give him.”

“There is one thing, however,” she said slyly.

‘Here it comes,’ thought Dumbledore.

“Like you asked, I didn’t speak to Harry Potter or Hermione Granger. But I have heard some very
strange things about them. Like blocking Avada Kedavra and every other curse the Death Eaters threw
at them. Has this got anything to do with the Anima Summas?”

Dumbledore’s eyes narrowed, and Rita knew that she’d hit a raw spot.

“What have you heard about that?” he asked.

“Oh, I just happened to overhear a conversation. What are the Anima Summas, Professor?”

Dumbledore was angry. “I don’t approve of anybody snooping around listening to private
conversations. And I can’t tell you anything about the Anima Summas. I would advise you not to
print anything about it in your paper – speculation may well lead to things which could be very
dangerous, and we wouldn’t want that, would we?”

“You wouldn’t be trying to threaten me, Professor Dumbledore?”

“Of course not - I’d never threaten the press. I’m merely pointing out that there are things
which the wizarding world are not yet ready to learn about.”

“So there is something, Professor. I thought so.”

“Please heed what I say, Miss Skeeter. It’s very important.”

“Well thank you, Professor. Thank you for a very informative visit.”

After she’d left, Dumbledore got straight in touch with Cornelius Fudge and told him what had
happened.

“Don’t worry, Albus,” he said. “I’ll summon her to the ministry immediately. I’ll make sure that
nothing appears in the Daily Prophet about Harry and Hermione.”

***

The following day saw the end of year feast and ball. Gryffindor easily won the house cup, and
everyone had a great time at the dance. Ten friends sat around one of the many tables spaced about
the sides of the Great Hall. Harry and Hermione, Ron and Lavender, Ginny and Neville, Parvati and
Dean Thomas, and Kristen and Seamus Finnegan.

They had a great time, the relief in the fifth-years faces now their OWLS were over clearly
showing. Half way through the evening, another strange thing occurred that made everyone in the
hall stand and stare.

The band played a slow, romantic song – Moon River, which had become something of a standard at
the end-of-year balls. Most of the students were up dancing, when a gasp went up near the centre of
the floor. Every one looked in awe at the sight that confronted them.

Harry and Hermione, oblivious that everybody else had stopped, were dancing very close together.
There was nothing strange about that – everybody expected it. What was unexpected was they were
dancing on air – quite literally. And not only that - as they danced about three feet off the
floor, they were both enveloped in a silvery light, which made the pair glow.

It was only when the music suddenly stopped, the musicians also gaping at the pair, that they
knew that anything was wrong. As they broke apart, they drifted slowly back to the floor and the
silvery glow disappeared. Everybody then started talking to them at once, wanting to know what had
happened. They were grateful when Dumbledore rescued them and led them out of the room.

“You really must try to control your feelings when other people are around,” he said, smiling at
them.

“Sorry Professor,” said Hermione. “We didn’t know that anything strange was happening.”

“No,” he replied wistfully, “I’m sure you didn’t. Well, on with the ball. Let’s go back in,
shall we?”

“What are we going to say?” asked Harry. “They’ll all want to know how we did that.”

“Oh, I think I’ve got the answer to that. And I’m sure that Fred and George won’t mind admitting
to a final prank before they leave Hogwarts – I’ll go and speak to them now.”

“But won’t they be suspicious about the cover up?” asked Hermione.

“Oh I’m sure they will. But they’re going to find out about it in the morning, anyway. I’ve
called a meeting with my close aids. You two, Ron and Ginny need to be there, as well as Fred and
George. I’ve asked Molly and Arthur Weasley to come, as well as your parents, Hermione. I think it
only right that they be told about what’s going on. We also need to discuss where you’ll be staying
over the summer holidays, and how you can be best protected. Right, now where did I see Fred and
George last?”

“What was that all about, Harry?” Lavender asked when he and Hermione went back to their table.
Harry just pointed to the other end of the room, where Dumbledore had Fred and George in tow as
they made their way out of the room.

“Oh – them two!” said Parvati. “We should have known they’d do something on their final night at
Hogwarts.”

Dumbledore’s office was full the next morning. Arthur and Molly, Arbuthnot and Millie, Fred and
George were looking particularly apprehensive, not knowing why they’d been summoned to see the
headmaster.

Millie Granger couldn’t take her eyes off her daughter. She didn’t know that she was finally
with Harry, but she could see how radiantly happy she appeared to be. She couldn’t wait to speak to
her later.

After the introductions were over, Dumbledore started the meeting. “I’m sorry to be so secretive
about this meeting, but I need to tell you something that’s known to only a very few people. It’s
about Harry and Hermione primarily, but it also involves Ron and Ginny – they’ve been just as much
a part of this as anybody. Now what I’m about to tell you will seem incredible, especially to the
Grangers. I’d better start with the prophecy we had from the centaurs at the start of the school
year …”

And so Dumbledore told them everything. At the end of his long talk, Molly sat thunderstruck,
with her hands covering her mouth, and the Grangers just stared blankly at the headmaster. Only
Arthur, Fred and George appeared relatively comfortable with what they’d been told.

“Do any of you have any questions? Anything you want me to clarify?” asked Dumbledore.

“Yes Professor,” said Molly. “Why do Ron and Ginny have to be with Harry and Hermione on their
next two quests. Surely, they’ve done enough?”

“Mum!” said Ron and Ginny together.

“Molly,” said Arthur gently, “they’re part of this. They were told at the end of the first quest
that they have to be with them – it’s been pre-ordained. And I’m sure that they’ll get the very
best of protection. Right, Headmaster?”

“Yes, Arthur. They’ll have my best people with them. And don’t forget – they’ll also be
protected by the power of the Anima Summas – we’ve already seen that happen when the Death Eaters
attacked.”

“Sorry, Professor,” said Molly, “but they’re all so young to be going through this.”

“I know, Molly,” said Dumbledore. “Mr and Mrs Granger – this must seem very strange to you both.
Is there anything you wish to ask?”

“I can’t get my head around my little girl being in so much danger, Professor,” said Arbuthnot.
“I know she’ll be protected, but this Voldemort character seems to be the devil himself, from what
you’ve said.” Millie clutched her husband’s hand, seeking comfort.

“I won’t lie to you,” said Dumbledore. “There is great danger – and what these four youngsters
are trying to do is to save the whole world – not just the wizarding world. It’s their destiny. And
they’ve got our full support and help.”

At that moment, Cornelius Fudge burst into the room, looking flustered. “Sorry to barge in,
Albus. I need to talk to you urgently.”

“Take a seat, Cornelius,” said Dumbledore. “Everyone in the room knows about the Anima Summas,
so you can speak freely.”

“I’m under a lot of pressure from the press, and from some of the top men in my ministry –
they’ve heard the rumours. I had to pull out all the stops to prevent anything appearing in the
Daily Prophet and it’s only a matter of time before they lose patience and publish something.
There’s only so much I can do. Look, I’ll go public with the return of ‘You Know Who’ if you agree
to release the Anima Summa story. The wizarding world will need to know that something is being
done to fight the Dark Side, otherwise there’ll be wholesale panic. What do you think?”

“I can see your dilemma, Cornelius. And I agree that we’ll have to say something before long.
Let me get the opinion of my team. Sirius? Harry’s your godson, so you’re opinion matters perhaps
more than anyone’s. What do you think we should do?”

Sirius reflected for a few moments. “I agree that we have to make the story known some time
soon. And rumour and speculation appearing in the press would only confuse everybody – and it won’t
stop reporters snooping around any place that Harry and Hermione happen to be. I also agree that
everyone should be told about ‘You Know Who’ – I’m sure you’ll agree, minister, that we’ll be able
to recruit more Aurors as soon as that’s known.”

Fudge nodded his head in agreement.

“But we can’t forget one thing,” continued Sirius, “or should I say four – the four youngsters
at the centre of it all. It’s them that will be thrust into the limelight – I think the final
decision on when we go public must rest with them. They’ll need to prepare themselves for all the
attention, and we’ll need to prepare to make sure that attention is kept to a minimum.”

There were nods of approval from all Dumbledore’s team.

“You make a lot of sense, Sirius,” said Dumbledore. “Well Harry, Hermione, Ron and Ginny. What
thoughts do you have on this?”

The four looked at each other, then Harry spoke, “Professor, this has come as a bit of a
surprise to us all, I think.” He looked at his friends to see them nodding. “Do you think we could
have some time to talk about it – amongst ourselves as well as with you, Sirius and the
others?”

“Of course, Harry,” said Dumbledore. “What do you say, Cornelius? I think it’s only fair that
they be given some time.”

“Yes, Albus – I agree. I can keep the wolves at bay for a little while longer.”

“Right,” said Dumbledore. “School finishes today and you start your summer holidays. Now we
don’t know when you’ll receive details of the next quest, but I think it will be very soon now. I
think you should aim to get this distraction out of the way as soon as you can – let me know what
you decide. And it goes without saying, of course, that you can speak to me, or any of my team, if
you need any help or advice.”

“Thank you, Professor,” said Harry, “but we’ll need to be together to decide. There’re only a
few hours before we have to catch the Hogwarts express.”

“Ah – that brings me to the next item on the agenda – and one of the reasons I’ve asked the
families to be here today. We have to decide where you’ll be staying this summer. This is how I see
it. First, the rings have told Harry and Hermione that they must not be apart. I don’t think that
the Dursleys will want an uninvited guest for the summer, so I don’t think, Harry, you shouldn’t go
back there this year.”

“Yes!” shouted Harry. Then a quieter, “Sorry,” as everybody looked at him.

“Second. Ron and Ginny have to be fully protected. Third, at the moment, it’s impractical to
split my support team between the four of them. This draws me to only one conclusion – all four of
them have to be together for the summer.”

The four friends grinned and nodded their approval.

“So that brings me to a difficult question – where should they all stay for the summer?”

“No problem,” said Arthur. “They can all stay with us at The Burrow – I can easily add a few
more rooms on the east side of the house. There’ll be plenty of room, won’t there Molly?”

“Yes, Arthur, of course there will,” said a smiling Molly Weasley.

“And Ginny and I’ll chaperone these two,” said a grinning Ron.

“We’ll help with that, Ron,” said George.

“Yes – we’ve got this new creaking-floorboards charm we’re working on,” said Fred.

“Boys!” said an angry-looking Molly. “That’s a terrible thing to say.”

Harry and Hermione both blushed furiously.

“Mr and Mrs Granger,” said Dumbledore, “you are the ones who’ll be affected most by this. I’m
afraid you won’t have your daughter around for the summer. What are your thoughts on the
matter?”

“I think I speak for Arbuthnot as well,” said Millie as she looked for her husband’s nod of
approval. She also glanced at Fred and George. The high-pitched strangled sounds coming from them,
and the way they kept their heads down, testified to their mighty struggle not to burst into
laughter at Arbuthnot’s name.

Millie continued, “The most important thing for Hermione is that she’s kept as safe as possible.
So we agree. But I would ask one thing, Molly - can we visit your home during the summer to see
her?”

“Of course you can, Millie. You can come whenever you like – you can even spend your holidays
with us if you so wish.”

“That’d be great,” added Arthur. “You can fill me in on all the things going on in the Muggle
world, Arbuthnot.”

Again, there were more strangled noises from Fred and George.

“Well that’s settled then,” said Dumbledore. “Molly, I won’t ask you to make room for Sirius,
Ceri and Remus – but can they stay in wizarding tents in your garden? They need to keep an eye on
the kids over the summer.”

“No problem,” replied Molly. “We can just add a few more rooms to the west side of the house –
it’ll be great with so many people around.”

“Thank you, Molly. Right, everybody – it’s lunchtime. Let’s all go down, shall we?”

As they all walked down to the Great Hall, Millie asked Hermione and Harry to stop. She went to
them and looked her daughter directly in the eye. “Are you happy, Hermione?”

“Oh yes Mum,” she said as she hugged her mother. “I’ve never been happier.”

Millie smiled as she released her daughter. “I’m so glad you found each other – you looked
perfect together in France. But please, be careful – both of you.”

“We will Mrs Granger,” said Harry. “I won’t let anything happen to her.”

That afternoon, the four said a sad farewell to Kristen. “With luck, we’ll see you in the new
school year,” said Harry. “We’ve got that match with your school, don’t forget.”

“And where Harry goes, we go,” said Ron, smiling.

“So long, you four,” said Kristen as she held the Portkey. “It’s been great knowing you
all.”

“’Bye Kristen,” they all said as the girl disappeared with a slight ‘pop.’

“So, Ginny,” said Fred as they all waited for the coaches that would take them to Hogsmeade
railway station. “What have you got in store for Malfoy today?”

“Oh,” she replied, “somehow, I don’t think we’ll be seeing him on this trip. I think he’s
learned his lesson - don’t you?”



16. Epilogue - The Burrow
-------------------------

Keith Lewis Keith Lewis 10 724 2003-01-07T17:05:00Z 2003-07-19T09:42:00Z 11 4705 26821 223 53
32938 9.2720 Epilogue

**The Burrow**

**DISCLAIMER:** This story is based on characters and situations created and owned by JK
Rowling, various publishers including but not limited to Bloomsbury Books, Scholastic Books and
Raincoast Books, and Warner Bros., Inc. No money is being made and no copyright or trademark
infringement is intended.

**Author’s Notes :** This is the final chapter of book 1. At the end of the chapter I’ve
included a few notes and a preview of book 2. By the way, sexytexy, you’re absolutely right. I’m a
big fan of the Indiana Jones films – that’s the genre I’m trying to emulate in some small way.
Books 2 and 3 also contain the same sort of adventures that Indy would have got up to.

Harry lay awake in bed on his first night at The Burrow. He smiled as he thought about the
previous evening spent with all his friends and Ron’s family – it had been great - so different
from Privet Drive.

He tried to ignore the snoring coming from the other end of Ron’s small bedroom, but he just
couldn’t get to sleep. He thought of Hermione – she was in the next room, sharing Ginny’s bedroom.
They had been able to relax for the first time since they had discovered each other – since the
wonderful shock of their joining, endless meetings with Dumbledore and his team, Voldemort’s
attack, their OWLS, and the involvement of the Ministry and the Press. It had been hectic, and he
and Hermione had had precious little time to themselves.

At The Burrow, he looked forward to them being able to spend some time together and to explore
the new powers they’d been given. The Burrow was pretty crowded now, but there were plenty of
secret little spots in the garden and down by the river that was not far from the house.

He again smiled as he fingered the ring on his right hand, and tried to project his thoughts to
the room next door – trying to make contact with the girl he loved.

‘Are you awake, Hermione?’

There was no response. Harry sighed – she was either asleep or they had to be very close to be
able to hear each other’s thoughts.

Eventually, he drifted off to sleep.

The next morning, the four friends walked slowly through the garden after finishing their
breakfast.

“Look,” said Harry, “I’ve been thrust into the limelight ever since I came back to the wizarding
world, and I’ve learned to ignore it. But what about you three – are you going to be able to cope?
Seeing your photographs splashed all over the newspapers, complete strangers walking up to you and
shaking your hands and wanting to know everything about you? It’s like living in a goldfish bowl at
times.”

“Oh, I think I’ll be able to cope with a little bit of fame, Harry,” said Ron nonchalantly.

“But it’s not only that,” said Harry. “All the Death Eaters in the country will get to know what
you all look like – not to mention Voldemort.”

“But we’re just as much a target for them now as you are, Harry,” said Ginny. “Don’t forget that
Wormtail saw us with you in France, and Hermione’s already been attacked. So I don’t think it will
change anything as far as the Death Eaters are concerned.”

“And don’t forget,” said Hermione, “Fudge will tell the Daily Prophet that ‘You Know Who’ is
back. They’ll be able to recruit more Aurors and be that much better prepared for any attacks that
are coming.”

Harry thought for a moment, his brow creased with worry. “I don’t know, Hermione. I really don’t
know.”

“Look, Harry,” said Ron. “Us three think that Dumbledore should go public - why don’t you? You
know it makes sense, and anyway, it’s only a matter of time before it comes out.”

Any further discussion was interrupted by the sounds of scuffling coming from the bushes about
ten yards in front of them. They stopped as Sirius and Remus backed out onto the path, followed by
Ceri, who was firmly holding Rita Skeeter by her arm. The reporter held a camera in her other
hand.

“Let me go,” shouted Rita. “I’ve got every right to keep the wizarding public informed of any
developments in their world.”

“Not when you’re trespassing on people’s private ground, and on their right to privacy,” said
Sirius sternly.

“Harry,” shouted Rita. “What can you tell me about the Anima Summas?”

“Look. I thought I said ...” started Sirius, but he was interrupted by Harry, who shook his head
in resignation.

“It’s ok, Sirius. Let her go. Look, Miss Skeeter, if you agree to leave and not come back, I’ll
ask Professor Dumbledore to tell you everything you want to know.”

Rita stared at Harry. She hadn’t expected this response. “Ok, Harry. When will that be?”

“I’ll get in touch with him today, and then it’ll be up to him when he tells you.”

“Will you leave now please?” said Ceri.

Rita shot Harry a grin, and then turned on her heels and walked towards the rickety gate and out
of the garden, back towards the village.

“Are you sure about this, Harry?” asked Remus.

“The others already thought we should go public. It was me who was a bit reluctant. But when I
saw what just happened, I knew there was no use in delaying the inevitable.”

“Ok, Harry,” said Sirius. “I’ll get in touch with the headmaster straight away.”

***

That afternoon, Charlie and Nadine arrived for a week’s stay at the Burrow. The reports had been
finished, and Demont had agreed that he would present them to the French and British ministries
himself and answer any questions that may arise.

“Nadine!” squealed Ginny as Charlie and the French girl opened the kitchen door. She ran over
and hugged her warmly and then caught her hand. ”Come on, let’s go for a little walk around the
garden, I’ve got loads I want to ask you. Oh, hello Charlie.”

Charlie laughed as the two girls walked out of the kitchen. He was then greeted by his mother
and Ceri, who had been trying to decide what to cook for dinner that evening.

“What are you going to do now the dragon thing is all done and dusted?” asked Ceri.

“I don’t know, Ceri,” he replied. “We haven’t really discussed it yet - I think we’re both a bit
afraid to broach the subject. You see, I could be sent anywhere in the world; it all depends on
which family of dragons they want me to study. I know that Nadine just loves Southern France, and I
don’t want to take her any place where she may be unhappy.”

“Don’t worry, Charlie,” said Molly. “The way you two feel about each other, I can’t see you
being apart, wherever they send you.”

“I hope so, Mum.”

“Charlie!” Fred and George had just come down from their bedroom, and slapped their brother on
the back.

“So where is she then?” said George.

“Nadine? Oh she’s been collared by Ginny – they’re out in the garden.”


“Come on then, George,” said Fred. “Let’s go and see what she looks like.”

“Hey, you two,” said Molly. ”Be nice – and no tricks. We don’t want to frighten her away.”

“I’ll give them a couple of minutes, then I’ll go and rescue her,” said Charlie.

The twins spotted their sister and Nadine at the far end of the garden, and ran over to
them.

“Nadine,” said Ginny, “these two are my twin brothers – Fred and George.”

“Uh, which is which Ginny. How can you tell?” said a stunned Nadine as she looked at the
identical twins.

“Oh it takes practice,” said Ginny.

“I’m Fred,” he said as he hugged Nadine.

“And I’m George,” he said as he pulled Nadine away from Fred and also gave her a big hug.

“So,” said Fred, “how did a nice girl like you manage to tame the dragon man?”

“More to the point,” said George, “how did the dragon man manage to attract such a beautiful
girl?”

“Fred, George,” said Ginny sternly. “Leave her alone. You’re embarrassing her.”

“That’s all right, Ginny,” said Nadine laughing. “I must say I was a bit in awe about meeting
you two after the things everyone has said about you, but anybody who can make the Slytherins go
bang can’t be all that bad.”

“Ah, so you’ve heard about our little farewell prank?” said Fred.

“Yes – Ginny told me. I’d only just stopped laughing when you two came over.”

“It’ll be nice to have another sister in the family, won’t it Fred?” said George.

“Yes. When’s the wedding, Nadine?” said Fred.

Nadine smiled at the two boys as she blushed prettily. “Fred! George!” shouted Ginny. “You’re
embarrassing her. Now leave her alone.”

“I’ve arrived just in time, I think,” said Charlie as he caught Nadine’s arm and led her away
from his two grinning brothers and Ginny.

“I hope they didn’t pull any tricks or anything,” he said as they walked.

“No, Charlie – they’re a bit overpowering, but I’m going to like those two, I think.”

“Charlie! Nadine.” They turned to see Harry and Hermione approach.

“It’s great to see you both again,” said Harry.

“It’s nice to be here,” said Nadine. “And congratulations, you two. We were thrilled to hear
about what happened. Come on Hermione, tell me all about it.”

Charlie and Harry watched the two girls as they walked arm in arm, in front of them, chatting
merrily.

“Ginny told us that you two are together at last, Charlie.”

“Yes – I still can’t believe it,” said Charlie.

“I know the feeling,” said Harry.

***

The kitchen was crowded at dinner that evening. Arthur had magically increased the size of the
kitchen table so that everyone could sit around it.

The room was filled with the sounds of laughter and animated talk, Fred and George to the
forefront of it all. Then Ginny nudged Ron, who nudged Hermione, who nudged Harry. The four sat
grinning as Harry cleared his throat.

“Fred, George,” he said, “you’ve both been full of surprises during the five years us four have
been at Hogwarts. Now there’s a little surprise we’ve got for *you*.”

Fred and George looked at Harry, wondering what he was going to say.

“Do you remember the Marauders Map you gave me a couple of years ago?”

“Yes,” said George.

“The one made by Moony, Wormtail, Padfoot and Prongs,” said Fred.

“They’ve been your heroes haven’t they?” asked Harry.

“Too true,” said George.

“Their exploits at Hogwarts are legendary,” said Fred. “They were the ones who inspired us – we
wanted to follow in their footsteps.”

“Did you ever find out who they were?” said Harry.

“Well no,” said George.

“You’re going to tell us who they were Harry?” said Fred.

Harry and the other three grinned in anticipation, and then Harry continued. “Let’s get the
worst bit out of the way first. Wormtail is Peter Pettigrew – Voldemort’s sidekick.”

Most of those around the table shuddered. Fred and George just stared.

“And Prongs was my father,” said Harry.

“Whoa, cool – we didn’t know, Harry,” said George.

“Now Moony and Padfoot,” said Harry.

“Go on – go on,” said Ginny, unable to contain her excitement.

“Well,” said Harry, “Fred, George – meet Moony and Padfoot, also known as Remus Lupin and Sirius
Black.”

Fred and George were thunderstruck – they looked at the other end of the table where Remus and
Sirius sat together, grinning. Then they erupted.

“What!” they both shouted together.

“You’re kidding us,” said George

“He’s not, George,” said Sirius. “I’m Padfoot.”

“And I’m Moony,” said Remus.

Fred and George both jumped from their seats and rushed over to their two heroes, shaking their
hands and just staring at them. Eventually, Fred found his voice.

“You’ve got to tell us how you made that map.”

“And we want to hear how you pulled that floating stunt on the Slytherins,” said George.

“We’ve got loads of new stuff we’re working on,” said Fred. “Come and have a look – we’d value
your opinion.”

Moony and Padfoot were dragged from their seats and marched up to the twins’ bedroom, followed
by the laughter coming from the ones left at the kitchen table.

“That was so good,” said Ron. “I’ve never seen them so gob-smacked before. That was a masterful
performance, Harry.”

***

“So, Sirius,” said Ginny, a slight smirk on her face. “What’s happening with you and Ceri, these
days?”

The four friends and Harry’s godfather were sitting in the garden while breakfast was being
prepared.

“What do you mean, Ginny?” he answered, knowing full well what she meant.

“You’re going to have to get used this, Sirius,” said Harry. ”She’s looking for something new to
focus on now that Charlie and Nadine are together.”

“I think my sister’s going to open a dating agency when she finishes school,” said Ron,
laughing.

Sirius was spared further embarrassment as they heard two owls flutter overhead. One headed into
The Burrow with the morning post, but the other just hovered over them, and dropped three
official-looking letters. It then hooted and flew off, heading north.

Hermione picked up the three letters, looked at them, and then drew her lips back in a grimace.
“They’re from Hogwarts,” she said, looking at Ron and Harry. “One for each of us. I think they’re
our OWL results.”

“Oh hell,” said Harry. Ron just went a light shade of pale.

“Well go on then,” said Ginny, “open them.”

“I can’t Ginny,” said Ron. “Mum’ll kill me if I haven’t done as well as Percy. And you know how
many OWLS he had.”

The three just sat looking at each other, and then Hermione ripped open her letter and read
it.

“Ahhhh,” she screamed. “I don’t believe it – I’ve passed them all. I’ve got full marks in every
subject except Potions.”

She read a note on the bottom of the letter ..

*‘Congratulations, Hermione. You had the best marks in the whole of the fifth year. Only
Kristen came close to you. I tackled Professor Snape about the five percentage points he deducted
from your Potions result – he said that he just couldn’t bring himself to give top marks to a
Gryffindor – the cheek of it!*

*Minerva McGonagall, House Mistress, Gryffindor House.*

“Well done, Hermione,” said Harry and Ron as they both kissed her.

“There was never any doubt was there?” said Sirius as he added his congratulations.

“Come on you two,” said Hermione, “open them.”

Harry was the next to open his letter, not without some nervousness.

“I’ve passed everything except Potions,” he said, smiling. “The marks aren’t bad, either – I’m
pleased with that.”

“Come on, Ron,” said Ginny.

“I can’t Ginny,” he said as he passed his letter to his sister. “You open it.”

Ginny took the letter and ripped it open hurriedly as Ron sat with his arms folded over his
head. She had a serious expression on her face as she looked at Ron.

“I knew it,” he said miserably. “I’ve failed everything, haven’t I?”

Ginny’s face then split into a grin. “Sorry to tease you, Ron. You’ve passed everything except
Potions and Divination – your marks are very good. Mum’ll be pleased.”

They all shouted with delight, and then ran into the kitchen to tell everybody. They pulled up
short as they went in. Everybody was gathered around Arthur, who had a copy of the Daily Prophet in
front of him on the table.

Sirius and the four friends walked over and stared at the front page of the paper. Large banner
headlines roared,

*‘YOU KNOW WHO IS BACK’*

And underneath, in equally large print,

‘BUT THERE IS HOPE – ANIMA SUMMAS ARRIVE’

In the middle of the page there was a large photograph of Harry, Hermione, Ron and Ginny walking
in the garden at The Burrow. Moving arrows pointed from ‘Anima Summas’ in the headline to Harry and
Hermione in the photograph.

As Arthur turned the pages, it seemed that the entire paper was devoted to Voldemort’s
re-appearance and the story of the four’s first quest in France.

“Well Percy,” said Arthur, “I don’t think we’ll get much work done when we go into the office
today. We’d better prepare ourselves for a grilling from everybody at the ministry.”

“I suppose we’ll be inundated by reporters now,” said Molly despondently.

“No Molly,” said Sirius. “Dumbledore told me that a condition of making the story public is a
ban on visits to The Burrow by the press. We won’t be bothered by them.”

“How do you feel about it?” said Harry to his three friends. “Any regrets?”

“Well, only ...” said Ginny as she stared at the photograph with a pained look. “I ... I don’t
think that photo’s very flattering. If I’d known, I’d have combed my hair!”

“Come off it, Ginny,” said Charlie, laughing. “You look stunning, as usual”

Everybody laughed at the little redhead as her face slowly matched the colour of her hair.

Harry and Hermione spoke to Sirius as they were finishing their third cup of tea after
breakfast.

“Sirius. Hermione and I’ve been talking. We want to pay a brief visit to Lara in Privet Drive. I
haven’t been able to write to her recently, what with everything that’s been going on, and what we
want to tell her is best done in person. What do you think?”

Sirius thought for a few moments. “It should be ok, Harry – as long as it’s only for a few
minutes. I don’t want to leave The Burrow unprotected for any longer than that. Ceri, Remus and
I’ll have to come with you, of course, but we’ll keep a discreet distance from the house. When do
you want to go?”

“Right now, if it’s ok,” said Harry.

“I’ll round up the other two,” said Sirius. “We’ll meet you out in the garden. You can hang on
to us as we Apparate.”

Five minutes later, Harry stood at the kitchen door of number 12 Privet Drive. Hermione waited
just behind the house, at the edge of the garden. Harry could hear Lara talking to her mother
inside as he knocked and stood back. Lara’s mother opened the door.

“Hello, Mrs Smythe. Is Lara in?” asked Harry.

“Hello Harry,” she said. “It’s nice to see you again.”

Lara looked over her mother’s shoulder and then pushed past and hugged Harry briefly. “It’s
great to see you Harry. What brings you here? Are you back with the Dursleys?”

“Uh, no Lara - not this summer. We can’t stay very long, I’m afraid. We just wanted to see you
for a few minutes.”

“We?” asked Lara.

“Hermione and I – she’s just round the back of the house.”

“I won’t be long, Mum,” Lara said to her mother as she closed the kitchen door and walked with
Harry round the back of the house and into the garden.

Lara looked at Hermione and smiled. “Hello again. You two are together, aren’t you? I can see it
in your faces – just as I could see it back last year in that cave.”

She hugged Hermione tightly and then did the same to Harry. “Is that why you came – to tell me
about you two?”

“Yes – that was one reason, Lara.” said Harry, “And we wanted to share with you what we feel –
about each other, and about you. We wanted to see you now, when we had the chance. I don’t think
we’ll be able to visit you again for a long time – things have become pretty complicated in the
wizarding world.”

“You mean it’s become very dangerous, don’t you?” asked Lara nervously.

“I’m afraid so,” said Hermione, “and Harry and I are – well – we’re right in the middle of
it.”

Harry caught Lara’s hand, and Hermione caught the other. Then they closed their eyes and let
their feelings and emotions flow into the blond-haired girl. After a few minutes, they broke
contact, and Lara staggered slightly. Tears were running down her face, but she was smiling.

“You two have something very, very special,” she said quietly. “I’ve never felt anything like
that before – never knew such feelings could exist. Is it something that only wizards and witches
can share?”

“Well yes and no, Lara,” said Hermione. “It’s something that’s very rare. We only found out
about it – we only found each other – a few weeks ago.”

“Well it’s so beautiful,” said Lara. “You’re going to have a lovely life together.”

“I hope so, Lara,” said Harry. “When all the trouble is finished with, when times are better -
we’ll come to see you again.”

“We have to go now,” said Hermione.

“Please be very careful, both of you.” Lara waved as Harry and Hermione walked away.

***

“What took you so long, Wormtail?” growled Voldemort as the rat-faced wizard entered the cave,
accompanied by Lucius Malfoy. “I suppose you’d still be looking aimlessly through the library if I
hadn’t sent Lucius to get you?”

“There were millions of books there, my Lord,” said Wormtail. “I’m sorry.”

“Well – did you find what I sent you to get?”

“Yes, my Lord,” said Lucius. “The rose-red city is in the Southern Jordanian desert. It was
built by the Nabataeans and was once an important stopping place on the ancient trade route between
the Far East and Egypt. It has long since been abandoned, and no one lives there – it’s only
visited by tourists these days. The city is ringed by mountains, and was hewn from the pink and
salmon-coloured desert rock”

“What is its name?” asked Voldemort.

“Petra,” said Lucius. “I’ve taken the liberty of contacting the Dark Forces of the desert
region, and they will provide an Arab guide to take us to the city and to the Treasury
building.”

“Excellent, Lucius. We can leave first thing in the morning – make the necessary arrangements. I
want you, Wormtail, Travis and two of my best servants with me.”

“Yes my Lord,” said Lucius and Wormtail together.

***

They’d been at The Burrow for just over a week, and the four were just getting used to the
idyllic life style.

A keen rivalry had been built up over the week. There were enough of them at The Burrow to form
two teams of five, and they’d played several games of Quidditch in the garden. Harry and Charlie
revelled in pitting their Seeker skills against each other, and Harry usually came out on top since
Charlie was a bit stale. He still enjoyed the encounters, though.

Harry and Hermione, aided by Ron and Ginny, started to explore their new powers, and after a few
days, they found out a few things – including Dumbledore’s feeling that they still had a lot of
developing to do.

They found that they couldn’t do wand-less magic on their own. When they weren’t physically
linked together, their magical strength seemed about the same as it had been before they bonded.
And even when joined, they could only do the force-field protection spell. They couldn’t bring to
mind any new spells – it seemed that they would surface only when the need arose.

They could still feel their emotions when they touched, and they could read each other’s
thoughts when they were close together. They spent a lot of time trying to improve that aspect of
their powers.

They would concentrate very hard, and try to project their thoughts at increasing distances from
each other. At the end of three days of trying, they found they could do it at a distance of about
50 yards. This was a marked improvement from the first day, and they knew that with a lot of
practice and effort, they’d be able to extend the distance even further.

They couldn’t read Ron and Ginny’s thoughts, however, even when each of them was in close
contact to their friends. They could only do it when the four of them joined hands.

“I don’t know Hermione,” said Harry one day. “We can improve our telepathy, but what about the
ancient spells and knowledge that are buried deep inside us? It doesn’t look as if we’ll be able to
find out any more unless we’re put in the position to access the spells – and that usually means a
position of danger.”

“I’m not sure, Harry,” replied Hermione. “There may be other ways to access all that knowledge –
there just has to be. We’ll have to ask Professor Dumbledore what he thinks.”

The following day, Harry and Hermione were sitting by the side of the river on a lush area of
grass and ferns. They were holding hands, and gazing into each other’s eyes, revelling in the
strong emotions that close contact brought. They were startled when a voice spoke behind them.

“I am sorry to intrude - please forgive me.”

They turned to see the tall, white-haired, green-eyed girl standing just inside the line of
trees that skirted the river.

“Margot!” exclaimed Hermione as she and Harry got up and walked over to the girl.

“Yes ‘Ermione. My name ees Margot Denarnaud.”

“Denarnaud,” said Hermione. “Are you belonging to Marie Denarnaud, Berenger Sauniere’s house
keeper?”

“Yes. I am zee great-great granddaughter of Marie and Berenger. Eet ees not known to many
persons zat zey ‘ad a son together – my great-grandfather.”

“We’ve been puzzling, Margot,” said Harry. “Why have you been watching me? We thought that you
were my Anima Summa.”

“No, ‘Arry. As soon as I met ‘Ermione, I knew eet was ‘er who was ze one. I was watching for a
different reason. You see, I live in Rennes-le-Chateau, and when I first saw you at ze top of ze
church tower – even though you were in your eagle form – I knew you were ze Anima Summa. I dreamt
then – you see, I am a seer.”

“A seer?” said Harry.

“She can see things the rest of us can’t – she can see into the future,” said Hermione
quietly.

“Yes,” said Margot, “but zat ees not why I am ‘ere. I received a message in my dream - a message
for ze two Anima Summas. When I saw you, ‘Ermione, ze time was not right to deliver ze message. You
‘ad not yet joined with ‘Arry. But now, ze time ees right.”

Harry and Hermione stared at the French girl, waiting.

“Eet is now time for you both to ‘ear your second quest. But eet ees only ze first part of your
quest. More will be given to you by another after you ‘ave completed ze first part.”

She stared at Harry and Hermione, making sure that she had their full attention.

“Now listen carefully …”

End – of Book 1 – The Mystery of Rhedae.

**Author’s Notes (2)**

Before I tell you a bit about book 2, just a few thoughts about book 1.

First and foremost – thanks to everyone who’ve taken the trouble to review, and especially to
those of you who review regularly – you’re my inspiration.

Secondly – You may be interested to know that when I first wrote the outline of the story,
Hermione wasn’t the Anima Summa – it was Ginny. When I reviewed it, reading it over and over, I
could tell that something wasn’t quite right and it took a while for me to put my finger on the
problem. Hermione’s character was far stronger than Ginny’s, who seemed to be far too docile by
comparison. I could see that it was Hermione who’d contribute more to the concept of Anima Summa –
it was her raging intellect. So I re-wrote the outline, making Ginny a far more spirited and
compassionate person – ideally suited to support her friends. I hope you think it worked. But that
left me with a problem – I originally intended to get Ron and Hermione together (although as the
book progressed I came to realise that that pairing just wasn’t right!), so that left two loose
ends in the romance stakes. But there’s still books 2 and 3 to come!

Thirdly – I took a bit of a risk with the subject matter of the fic. I knew that religion was a
touchy subject and that some readers may be alienated by it, but I was determined to write a fic
that combined the amazing Harry Potter world with one of my other great interests. The mystery of
Rennes-le-Chateau is not some figment of my imagination – it’s a real-life mystery that still
baffles the many authors and television filmmakers that cover it. And it’s essentially a mystery
with religion at its core – the man at the centre of the mystery was Berenger Sauniere – a Catholic
priest - and the iconography inside the church at Rennes-le-Chateau is exactly as I’ve described it
in the fic – and a lot more - it seems to be a map of some sort, urging the seeker to unravel the
esoteric messages that abound within (and outside) its walls. Many commentators agree that the
solution to the mystery is to do with Jesus – either that he’s buried somewhere nearby or that his
bloodline is perpetuated in the Merovingian dynasty, following the children produced by him and
Mary Magdalene. Either of those scenarios would, of course, have devastating implications on
Christianity today. What the true answer is, I just don’t know, but my fictionalised solution to
the mystery preserves both the belief in the resurrection and Jesus’ presence around
Rennes-le-Chateau. To those of you who were offended – my apologies.

If you want to find out more about the mystery – and I’ve touched on only the basics in my fic –
just put ‘Rennes-le-Chateau’ into your search engine – you’ll come up with loads of hits.

Now onto book 2 :

It’s finished (as indeed is book 3) – it’s a bit longer than book 1, with fourteen chapters and
an epilogue and I’ll start posting within a day or two.

Book 2 is about two quests – one by Harry and his friends and one by Voldemort. There’s an
element of religion in it – but mainly those of pre-Christian cultures. I don’t want to say too
much about it at this stage though. It’s far wider in scope than book 1, and it’s also a bit darker
– the storm clouds brewing at the end of book 1 are about to burst!

So, walk beside our four friends as they unravel the clues that lead them over half of Europe
and beyond in their search for the second repository of ancient wizarding knowledge.

If you dare, join Voldemort in his search for the dreaded Necronomicon, and cringe when he opens
its pages and finds out about the deadliest thing ever to threaten the human race.

And we’ll meet a few of Harry’s old friends along the way, some were mentioned in book 1, and
some weren’t, but most are from JK’s world (apart from my own characters that are essential to the
plot.)

As for romance – it’s there, but I won’t say who it involves. There’s also another ‘Who-Is-It’,
which has a rather surprising outcome, although after reading the reviews for book 1, some of you
will no doubt second-guess me!

Here’s a snippet from chapter 1 of the second book…

.

.

.

Harry and Hermione were sitting quietly side by side on the bank of the river that flowed past
the side of the garden at The Burrow. Their eyes were clouded, immersed in their own thoughts. They
sat slightly apart from each other, each knowing that their emotions were at that moment hidden
from the other. They were also careful to keep their thoughts guarded. They had learned that in
order to hear their thoughts, they had to consciously project them.

They were both, however, thinking about the same thing – the thing that was becoming
increasingly difficult to conceal, both from themselves and their friends – a raging and passionate
desire. They were desperately in love, a love that seemed to be growing day by day, and they both
wrestled with the consequences of what that love would inevitably lead to. They were red-blooded,
healthy teens and over the last few days they had become more and more aware of their developing
needs and urges.

Both were pure in mind and body, and their experiences of life up to this point did little to
help them cope with the problem they now faced. They both knew, of course, where their love would
eventually lead them, but they both felt that they were too young to enter into such full-blooded
intimacy.

Although they both thought the same things, they had been careful to conceal it up to now, so
they didn’t know how the other felt about it. But Hermione knew that the situation had to change,
she knew that if she kept her raging feelings hidden from Harry for much longer, it might just
cause a rift between them.

She brushed a lock of hair away from the side of her face and looked at Harry tentatively,
wondering what she should do. Then she spoke in a quite voice, “Harry?”

Harry jumped slightly, drawn away from the thoughts that mirrored those of his girlfriend. “Yes
Hermione?”

“Harry… I… I think we need to talk.”

“About what?”

“About… about what I’m feeling right now. Oh, this is so hard!”

“Hermione…” Harry reached over to touch her hand, but Hermione drew back slightly, denying the
contact.

“No, not yet Harry. I want to say what I feel before you feel what I feel.”

Harry smiled wryly. “Hermione, I think I know how you feel. I feel it too.”

Hermione’s eyes grew wider. “You do?”

“How could I not? I mean, I’m in love with the most beautiful girl in the world and we’re always
together. It’s torture Hermione, but I don’t know what to do about it.”

Hermione smiled and reached out her hand, lightly brushing the unruly mop of hair from his eyes.
Then she dropped her hand and rested it on top of Harry’s, letting her emotions flow, all thoughts
of hiding her feelings now gone.

Harry sucked in a deep breath as he felt the love and raging passion enter his very being, and
Hermione gasped as Harry exposed his own thought and emotions to her probing mind. They both
reached out then and drew each other into a tight embrace, crushing their lips together in an
outward pouring of their wild passion.

.

.

.

To find out what happens next, be sure to read Chapter 1 of Book 2!

And the title? I took ages to come up with it, and this is about the tenth one, but by the end
of book 2 you’ll know what it means.

So, keep a look out for :

**Anima Summa Book 2 – As Above So Below.**

Oh yes, if you want me to carry on posting this – **PLEASE REVIEW**.

A.S.